HP Color LaserJet MFP E77822, E77825, E77830

HP Color LaserJet MFP E78323, E78325, E78330

Service Manual

www.hp.com/videos/laserjet
www.hp.com/support/colorlje77800mfp
www.hp.com/support/lje78323mfp
 HP Color LaserJet Managed MFP E77822,
E77825, E77830, E78323, E78325, E78330 -
Service Manual

SUMMARY

Learn about theory of operation, remove and replace, troubleshooting on the printer. Parts are either customer-
self repair (CSR) replaceable, or field replaceable units (FRUs) which require installation by a trained field-service
technician. Use the provided parts diagrams and tables to identify the required part.
Legal information
Copyright and License

© Copyright 2023 HP Development

Company, L.P.

Reproduction, adaptation, or translation

without prior written permission is
prohibited, except as allowed under the
copyright laws.

The information contained herein is subject

to change without notice.

The only warranties for HP products and

services are set forth in the express
warranty statements accompanying such
products and services. Nothing herein
should be construed as constituting an
additional warranty. HP shall not be liable
for technical or editorial errors or omissions
contained herein.

Edition 19.5, 09/2023

Revision History

View a list of document revisions.

The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP
products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products
and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be
liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein.

Table Revision History

Revision Revision Date Revision Notes

Number

19.5 September, 2023 Add footnote to Booklet Maker speed.

19.4 August, 2023 Updated Tray 3 cassette PN in the parts chapter per HPPK PR 384.

Removed 5QJ90-64002 part number for the HCI drive. There is only one part
number: JC93-00452A. Per HP PR 382

19.3 August, 2023 Replace reservoir remove/replace step with Jade specific toner duct remove/
replace step in the high-voltage rail assembly remove/replace procedure per HPPK
PR 375.

19.2 June, 2023 Added JC39-02120A Flat Cable-WLED to image scanner PN list as per HPPK PR 362.

19.1 April, 2023 Updated the adjusting laser scanner skew error content per HPPK PR 316.

19 March, 2023 Updated FDB part numbers (removed incorrect JC44-00210E/JC44-00211E in

remove/replace) per HPPK PR 283.

18.2 December, 2022 Changed JC92-02978A DCF PCA part number to Y1F97-67001

18.1 October, 2022 Minor graphic change in the "Tamper unit, Ejector unit, Stapler unit, Main PCA"
diagram

18.0 July, 2022 Changed the 110V Fuser part number from X3A64-61001 to Z7Y77-67002.

17.0 February, 2022 Removed the Automatically Straighten menu item from the Scan menu table in the
"Control panel menus" section, as that option is not available.

16.0 December, 2021 Updated the part number for the 220V Fuser Assembly (for the E78323, E78325,
E78330 models) to Z9M03-67002

15.0 August, 2021 Addition of Special installation instructions (Developer unit) content and update to
the Developer Unit Replacement for the HP Color LaserJet Managed MFP E77820-
E77830 Series video. See Removal and replacement: Developer unit on page 217.

14.0 April, 2021 Part number updates and general edits.

13.0 September, 2020 Completed adding the information for E78323, E78325, E78330 models in whole
manual.

Added to title page, all tables needed and all specifications as designated.

Added new part numbers for E78323, E78325, E78330 to Parts view and Remove and
replace procedures.

12.0 August, 2020 Added the information for 78323, 78325, 78330 models in whole manual.

Updated Hardware configuration image and added formatter sections. See

Formatter on page 100.

iii
 Table Revision History (continued)

Revision Revision Date Revision Notes

Number

11.0 May, 2020 Part number updates and general edits.

10.0 May, 2020 SRM migration to SDL Tridion Docs.

Part number updates and general edits.

Updated SSBM sections to current HPPK content. See Stapler/stacker and booklet
maker (SSBM) on page 948.

Updated BHCI sections. See Optional high-capacity input (HCI) on page 942.

Added HP EPA 3.0 compliance content. See Service parts changes For
Environmental Protection Agency 3.0 Compliant Products on page 2766.

9.0 January, 2020 Corrected Graphic issues

8.0 January, 2020 Updated numerous part numbers throughout based on HP PN format.

Added Electrical Mechanical diagrams to aide in troubleshooting. See Electrical-

mechanical diagrams on page 909.

Removed references to Control panel that used 8”(inch) in title. This is due to
the marketing change to definition of the control panel. See Table 1.1 Technical
specifications on page 6.

Added high-voltage rail remove and replace procedure. See Table 1.1 Removal and
replacement: High-voltage rail assembly on page 370.

7.0 June, 2019 Updated all inner finisher content. See Inner finisher on page 2175.

Updated developer unit remove and replace procedure. See Removal and
replacement: Developer unit on page 217.

Added right door dampener kit remove and replace. See Removal and replacement:
Right door dampener and lever kit on page 366.

6.0 July, 2018 Updated parts numbers throughout document to remove "SAM-" prefix and updated
new part numbers as identified.

Minor content edits (including graphics)

5.0 March, 2018 Upload all graphics to data base.

Part number updates.

Minor changes/updates.

4.0 January, 2018 Minor changes to environmental specs and engine dimensions.

iv Revision History
Table Revision History (continued)

Revision Revision Date Revision Notes

Number

3.0 November, 2017 Updated code data for Diagnostics and Service Functions

Replaced Product Overview with the UG-style Printer Views and removed the
previous “Machine external view” section.

Updated R&R TOC level to 1.

Replaced references to SAW with WISE and removed QR codes.

Replaced Samsung Paper Jam content with the UG content

Moved specifications out of the appendix to the Product Specifications chapter

Added additional specification content to the Product Specifications chapter from

the UG

Removed the lists of tables and figures and the alphabetical and numerical lists of
parts

Placed ESD cautions at the beginning of the R&R sections for the main printer and
both finishers.

Removed the Samsung precaution sections

Updated variable list items to refer only to Diamond

Updated part numbers, part descriptions, diagrams, and photos

Linked Removal and Replacement procedures are linked to part number information.

2.0 July, 2017 Updated TOC to only consist of 3 levels

Add error code and CPMD overview

Added “How to search for documentation” section.

Updated toner average yield data

Changed all occurrences of #2 Phillips to #2 JIS

1.0 April, 2017 Service manual initial release

v
 Conventions used in this guide

Learn about the conventions used in this publication.

TIP: Tips provide helpful hints or shortcuts.

NOTE: Notes provide important information to explain a concept or to complete a task.

CAUTION: Cautions indicate procedures that you should follow to avoid losing data or damaging the
product.

WARNING! Warnings alert you to specific procedures that you should follow to avoid personal injury,
catastrophic loss of data, or extensive damage to the product.

vi Conventions used in this guide

Table of contents

1 Product specifications and description............................................................................................................................................................................... 1

Printer views ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 1
Printer front view................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 1
Printer back view................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 2
Interface ports..................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2
Control-panel view............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 3
Inner finisher view ............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 5
Stapler/stacker finisher view .................................................................................................................................................................................... 5
Booklet finisher view....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 5
Specifications ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 6
Technical specifications............................................................................................................................................................................................... 6
Supported operating systems ...............................................................................................................................................................................10
Mobile printing solutions............................................................................................................................................................................................ 12
Printer dimensions.......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 12
Power consumption, electrical specifications, and acoustic emissions ............................................................................... 14
Operating-environment range ............................................................................................................................................................................... 14
General specifications ................................................................................................................................................................................................ 14
Print specifications ........................................................................................................................................................................................................16
Scan specifications.......................................................................................................................................................................................................18
Copy specifications....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 21
Paper handling specifications .............................................................................................................................................................................. 23
Supplies................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 28
Maintenance parts ........................................................................................................................................................................................................ 29
Optional ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 33
Feeding system ........................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 34
Feeding system overview ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 34
Main components and functions........................................................................................................................................................................ 35
Cassette................................................................................................................................................................................................................................38
Pickup Assembly............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 39
Registration assembly................................................................................................................................................................................................40
Tray 1 (MP) feed assembly.......................................................................................................................................................................................... 41
Image creation............................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 42
Printing process overview........................................................................................................................................................................................ 42
Imaging unit ........................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 43
Fuser unit ......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 49
Fuser unit overview....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 49
Fuser unit drive.................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 51
Fuser unit temperature control ............................................................................................................................................................................. 51
Loop control........................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 52
Laser scanner unit .................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 53
Laser scanner assembly overview.................................................................................................................................................................... 53

vii
 Laser scanning optical path ................................................................................................................................................................................... 54
Laser synchronizing detectors............................................................................................................................................................................. 55
Automatic CPR adjustment.....................................................................................................................................................................................56
Drive system.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 59
Drive motors....................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 59
Main drive unit (OPC/DEVE/ITB/Transfer Roller/Disengage/Engage motors)..................................................................... 61
Pickup Drive ......................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 61
Registration (Regi)/Tray 1 drive.............................................................................................................................................................................. 62
Feed drive.............................................................................................................................................................................................................................63
Fuser/Exit Drive ................................................................................................................................................................................................................64
Toner collection unit drive ........................................................................................................................................................................................65
Toner supply drive ..........................................................................................................................................................................................................66
Flatbed Scanner System......................................................................................................................................................................................................66
Flatbed scanner system overview......................................................................................................................................................................67
Scanning system components.............................................................................................................................................................................69
Caution for moving the scanner...........................................................................................................................................................................75
Document feeder LX (dn models) ...................................................................................................................................................................................76
Document feeder LX overview ..............................................................................................................................................................................76
Document feeder LX electrical parts ...............................................................................................................................................................77
Document feeder LX registration........................................................................................................................................................................78
Document feeder LX drive system .....................................................................................................................................................................78
Document feeder LX scanning position .........................................................................................................................................................81
Document feeder LX specifications................................................................................................................................................................. 82
Flow document feeder z models (GX).......................................................................................................................................................................... 82
Flow document feeder overview......................................................................................................................................................................... 82
Flow document feeder sensors...........................................................................................................................................................................83
Flow document feeder ultra sonic multi-feed (USM) sensor ..........................................................................................................85
Flow document feeder drive system................................................................................................................................................................85
Flow document feeder specifications .............................................................................................................................................................87
Flow document feeder registration...................................................................................................................................................................88
Flow document feeder scanning position....................................................................................................................................................88
Flow document feeder mixed size original (MSO) sensor.................................................................................................................89
Flow document feeder dual sensor cleaning method.........................................................................................................................90
Flow ADF z bundles (GX).............................................................................................................................................................................................. 91
Hardware configuration......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 91
Main controller..................................................................................................................................................................................................................94
Formatter............................................................................................................................................................................................................................100
Low voltage power supply (LVPS; Type 5H) / switching mode power supply (SMPS)................................................... 102
Low voltage power supply (LVPS) PCA (Type 4) (GX/z models) ..................................................................................................... 102
Fuser drive board (FDB)............................................................................................................................................................................................104
High-voltage power supply (HVPS) PCA.......................................................................................................................................................106
Eraser PCA ........................................................................................................................................................................................................................108
Waste Sensor PCA ......................................................................................................................................................................................................108
CRUM PCA .........................................................................................................................................................................................................................108
Toner CRUM joint PCA...............................................................................................................................................................................................109
Paper Size sensor PCA.............................................................................................................................................................................................109
Dual cassette feeder (DCF)..............................................................................................................................................................................................109

viii
 Inner finisher ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 114

2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement.................................................................................................................................................................118

HP service and support .......................................................................................................................................................................................................118
How to search for printer documentation ..............................................................................................................................................................119
Order parts by authorized service providers...................................................................................................................................................... 122
Ordering............................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 122
Orderable parts ............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 122
How to use parts lists and diagrams......................................................................................................................................................................... 122
ESD precautions....................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 123
Service approach.................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 123
Precautions when replacing parts................................................................................................................................................................... 123
Before performing service .....................................................................................................................................................................................124
After performing service ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 125
Post-service test ........................................................................................................................................................................................................... 125
Maintenance ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 126
Cleaning the document feeder white bar and CIS (LX)..................................................................................................................... 126
Cleaning the flow document feeder white bar and CIS (GX)......................................................................................................... 126
Cleaning the scanner glass...................................................................................................................................................................................127
Cleaning the transfer roller ................................................................................................................................................................................... 128
Cleaning the color toner density (CTD) sensor....................................................................................................................................... 129
Main parts ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 131
Main assembly................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 131
Removal and replacement: ADF white backing (LX) ...........................................................................................................................134
Removal and replacement: ADF white backing (GX) ............................................................................................................................137
Removal and replacement: ADF whole unit (LX).....................................................................................................................................139
Removal and replacement: Flow ADF whole unit (GX)........................................................................................................................144
Removal and replacement: Image scanner assembly (flatbed) ................................................................................................150
Removal and replacement: Exit unit................................................................................................................................................................158
Removal and replacement: Fuser unit............................................................................................................................................................ 161
Removal and replacement: Right door assembly.................................................................................................................................163
Removal and replacement: Image transfer belt (ITB) assembly..................................................................................................167
Removal and replacement: Fuser drive board (FDB) .......................................................................................................................... 179
Removal and replacement: Scanner LVPS (Type 5) board .............................................................................................................183
Removal and replacement: LVPS fan .............................................................................................................................................................187
Removal and replacement: Formatter and formatter cage..........................................................................................................190
Removal and replacement: 500 GB FIPS HDD/500 GB formatter HDD ................................................................................197
Removal and replacement: HP Foreign interface harness (FIH) solution............................................................................199
Removal and replacement: NFC Kit installation..................................................................................................................................... 201
Removal and replacement: Main board ....................................................................................................................................................... 212
Removal and replacement: Developer unit.................................................................................................................................................217
Removal and replacement: Imaging drum ................................................................................................................................................ 223
Removal and replacement: Front cover open switch........................................................................................................................ 228
Removal and replacement: Right door open switch .......................................................................................................................... 233
Removal and replacement: 500 GB Main PCA HDD ......................................................................................................................... 235
Removal and replacement: Control panel ................................................................................................................................................. 239
Removal and replacement: Keyboard............................................................................................................................................................242

ix
 Exit assemblies ........................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 246
Exit assembly.................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 246
Alphabetical parts list.......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 248
Numerical parts list................................................................................................................................................................................................................249
Cassettes tray 2/3 ..................................................................................................................................................................................................................249
Cassettes Tray 2/3.......................................................................................................................................................................................................249
Alphabetical parts list........................................................................................................................................................................................................... 251
Numerical parts list............................................................................................................................................................................................................... 252
Main drive assembly............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 252
Main drive.......................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 252
Alphabetical parts list.......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 254
Numerical parts list............................................................................................................................................................................................................... 255
Fuser output drive.................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 255
Fuser output drive....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 255
Alphabetical parts list...........................................................................................................................................................................................................257
Numerical parts list............................................................................................................................................................................................................... 258
Main frame assembly .......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 258
Main engine frame...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 258
Removal and replacement: Main drive unit .............................................................................................................................................260
Removal and replacement: Fuser/exit drive assembly .................................................................................................................... 265
Removal and replacement: Feed drive assembly ............................................................................................................................... 269
Removal and replacement: Toner collection unit drive.....................................................................................................................273
Removal and replacement: Toner supply drive assembly ..............................................................................................................276
Removal and replacement: Toner collection full sensor................................................................................................................. 282
Removal and replacement: Toner duct assembly................................................................................................................................ 285
Removal and replacement: Fuser-duct fan ..............................................................................................................................................289
Removal and replacement: Pickup drive units ....................................................................................................................................... 293
Removal and replacement: Feed sensor 1 .................................................................................................................................................297
Removal and replacement: Feed sensor 2................................................................................................................................................302
Removal and replacement: Automatic color registration (ACR) .............................................................................................. 307
Removal and replacement: Fuser out sensor..........................................................................................................................................314
Removal and replacement: Duplex sensor and loop sensor........................................................................................................ 317
Alphabetical parts list..........................................................................................................................................................................................................320
Numerical parts list................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 321
Tray 1 registration drive....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 322
Tray 1 registration drive............................................................................................................................................................................................ 322
Alphabetical parts list.......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 323
Numerical parts list................................................................................................................................................................................................................324
Registration sub-frame........................................................................................................................................................................................................324
Registration sub-frame ............................................................................................................................................................................................324
Removal and replacement: Registration drive assembly ............................................................................................................. 325
Removal and replacement: Registration assembly............................................................................................................................ 329
Alphabetical parts list..........................................................................................................................................................................................................334
Numerical parts list...............................................................................................................................................................................................................335
Main frame pickup..................................................................................................................................................................................................................335
Main frame pickup ......................................................................................................................................................................................................335
Removal and replacement: Trays 2-x main rollers................................................................................................................................336

x
 Removal and replacement: Paper pickup assemblies and empty/level sensor............................................................ 342
Alphabetical parts list..........................................................................................................................................................................................................349
Numerical parts list...............................................................................................................................................................................................................350
Main frame pickup upper ..................................................................................................................................................................................................350
Main frame pickup upper.......................................................................................................................................................................................350
Alphabetical parts list.......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 352
Numerical parts list...............................................................................................................................................................................................................353
Main frame...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................353
Main frame........................................................................................................................................................................................................................353
Removal and replacement: ACR shutter motor ....................................................................................................................................355
Removal and replacement: High-voltage power supply (HVPS) board..................................................................................357
Removal and replacement: Laser scanner assembly .......................................................................................................................361
Removal and replacement: Right door dampener and lever kit ...............................................................................................366
Removal and replacement: High-voltage rail assembly ...................................................................................................................370
Removal and replacement: TCU presence photo sensor ..............................................................................................................395
Removal and replacement: Paper size sensor PCA ...........................................................................................................................397
Alphabetical parts list..........................................................................................................................................................................................................400
Numerical parts list................................................................................................................................................................................................................401
Covers..............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................401
Covers...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................401
Removal and replacement: Rear covers ....................................................................................................................................................403
Removal and replacement: Left cover..........................................................................................................................................................406
Alphabetical parts list..........................................................................................................................................................................................................409
Numerical parts list................................................................................................................................................................................................................410
Right door ......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................410
Right door............................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 411
Alphabetical parts list........................................................................................................................................................................................................... 413
Numerical parts list................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 414
Tray 1 .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 414
Tray 1 rollers....................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 414
Removal and replacement: Tray 1 rollers ..................................................................................................................................................... 416
Removal and replacement: Tray 1 unit and Tray 1 assemblies...................................................................................................... 419
Alphabetical parts list..........................................................................................................................................................................................................435
Numerical parts list...............................................................................................................................................................................................................436
Right door output....................................................................................................................................................................................................................436
Right door output.........................................................................................................................................................................................................436
Alphabetical parts list..........................................................................................................................................................................................................438
Numerical parts list...............................................................................................................................................................................................................439
Right door feed guide...........................................................................................................................................................................................................439
Right door feed guide ...............................................................................................................................................................................................439
Removal and replacement: HP LaserJet Transfer Roller (T2) ......................................................................................................440
Alphabetical parts list..........................................................................................................................................................................................................443
Numerical parts list...............................................................................................................................................................................................................444
ADF (LX models).......................................................................................................................................................................................................................444
ADF (LX models)............................................................................................................................................................................................................444
Removal and replacement: Document feeder (ADF) jam access cover (LX) ...................................................................445

xi
 Removal and replacement: Document feeder (ADF) input tray (LX).......................................................................................450
Removal and replacement: Contact Image Sensor (CIS) assembly ...................................................................................... 454
Removal and replacement: Document feeder (ADF) main motor (LX) ..................................................................................464
Alphabetical parts list............................................................................................................................................................................................................471
Numerical parts list................................................................................................................................................................................................................472
ADF exterior and ADF pickup (LX models) .............................................................................................................................................................472
ADF exterior and ADF pickup (LX) .....................................................................................................................................................................472
Removal and replacement: Document feeder (ADF) PCA (LX) ...................................................................................................473
Removal and replacement: Document feeder (ADF) pick/feed roller assembly (LX)..................................................477
Alphabetical parts list.......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 482
Numerical parts list...............................................................................................................................................................................................................483
ADF main frame assembly (LX models)..................................................................................................................................................................483
ADF main frame assembly (LX/du models)...............................................................................................................................................483
Removal and replacement: Document feeder (ADF) separation roller assembly (LX) .............................................485
Removal and replacement: Document feeder (ADF) feed motor (LX)................................................................................... 492
Alphabetical parts list..........................................................................................................................................................................................................496
Numerical parts list................................................................................................................................................................................................................497
Flow ADF (GX/z)..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................497
ADF (GX/z)...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................497
Removal and replacement: Document feeder input tray (GX) ....................................................................................................499
Removal and replacement: Contact Image Sensor (CIS) assembly ......................................................................................505
Alphabetical parts list........................................................................................................................................................................................................... 513
Numerical parts list................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 514
Flow ADF open cover (GX/sGX) ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 514
Flow ADF open cover (GX/z) .................................................................................................................................................................................. 514
Removal and replacement: Document feeder jam access cover (GX).................................................................................. 515
Alphabetical parts list.......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 522
Numerical parts list............................................................................................................................................................................................................... 523
ADF upper pickup (GX/z) .................................................................................................................................................................................................... 523
ADF upper pickup (GX/z) ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 523
Removal and replacement: Flow document feeder pick roller assembly (GX)................................................................ 525
Removal and replacement: ADF separation roller assembly (GX)...........................................................................................530
Alphabetical parts list..........................................................................................................................................................................................................538
Numerical parts list...............................................................................................................................................................................................................539
Flow ADF stacker (GX/z) .....................................................................................................................................................................................................539
Flow ADF stacker (GX/sGX) ...................................................................................................................................................................................539
Alphabetical parts list........................................................................................................................................................................................................... 541
Numerical parts list............................................................................................................................................................................................................... 542
Flow ADF main frame (GX/z)............................................................................................................................................................................................ 542
ADF main frame (GX/z)............................................................................................................................................................................................. 542
Removal and replacement: Document feeder front motor (GX)................................................................................................544
Removal and replacement: Document feeder rear motors (GX)................................................................................................547
Removal and replacement: Document feeder PCA fan (GX)........................................................................................................555
Removal and replacement: Document feeder contact image sensor (CIS) fan (GX).................................................558
Removal and replacement: Flow ADF ultrasonic sensor with PCA (GX) ...............................................................................561
Removal and replacement: PCA-ADF HIC (GX).......................................................................................................................................569
Alphabetical parts list...........................................................................................................................................................................................................572

xii
Numerical parts list................................................................................................................................................................................................................574
Image scanner...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................575
Image scanner................................................................................................................................................................................................................575
Alphabetical parts list...........................................................................................................................................................................................................578
Numerical parts list................................................................................................................................................................................................................579
Image scanner assembly ..................................................................................................................................................................................................579
Image scanner assembly .......................................................................................................................................................................................579
Removal and replacement: Scan glass........................................................................................................................................................581
HP LaserJet Managed MFP E72525-E72535, E77822-E77830 - Removal and replacement: Scanner
LED lamp module .........................................................................................................................................................................................................583
Alphabetical parts list...........................................................................................................................................................................................................587
Numerical parts list...............................................................................................................................................................................................................588
Image scanner, lower (LX).................................................................................................................................................................................................588
Image scanner, lower (LX)......................................................................................................................................................................................588
Removal and replacement: Scanner assembly – CCD and lens...............................................................................................590
Removal and replacement: Scanner APS sensor................................................................................................................................593
Alphabetical parts list..........................................................................................................................................................................................................598
Numerical parts list...............................................................................................................................................................................................................599
Second Exit (Optional) .........................................................................................................................................................................................................599
Remove the second eixt (Optional).................................................................................................................................................................599
Remove the return gate solenoid (Optional).............................................................................................................................................601
Dual cassette feeder (DCF).............................................................................................................................................................................................605
DCF main ...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................605
Alphabetical parts list ...............................................................................................................................................................................................619
Numerical parts list....................................................................................................................................................................................................620
DCF main frame pickup 1......................................................................................................................................................................................... 621
DCF main frame pickup........................................................................................................................................................................................... 622
Alphabetical parts list ...............................................................................................................................................................................................627
Numerical parts list....................................................................................................................................................................................................628
DCF main frame pickup,upper ...........................................................................................................................................................................629
High-capacity input (HCI) tray (workgroup)..........................................................................................................................................................630
HCI main .............................................................................................................................................................................................................................630
Alphabetical parts list ..............................................................................................................................................................................................646
Numerical parts list.....................................................................................................................................................................................................647
HCI sub - frame...............................................................................................................................................................................................................647
Alphabetical parts list .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 667
Numerical parts list....................................................................................................................................................................................................668
HCI sub - pickup upper/lower ..............................................................................................................................................................................668
Alphabetical parts list ...............................................................................................................................................................................................675
Numerical parts list.....................................................................................................................................................................................................676
HCI drive..............................................................................................................................................................................................................................676
Alphabetical parts list ............................................................................................................................................................................................... 701
Numerical parts list.....................................................................................................................................................................................................702
HCI sub - cassette........................................................................................................................................................................................................702
Alphabetical parts list ............................................................................................................................................................................................... 714
Numerical parts list..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 715

xiii
 3 Problem solving............................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 716
Control panel messages document (CPMD) ....................................................................................................................................................... 716
Error codes (types and structure) .................................................................................................................................................................... 716
How to search for printer documentation.................................................................................................................................................. 718
Troubleshooting process ....................................................................................................................................................................................................721
Determine the problem source ...........................................................................................................................................................................721
Tools for troubleshooting ...................................................................................................................................................................................................732
Problem-solving checklist ......................................................................................................................................................................................732
Print menu map..............................................................................................................................................................................................................734
Print current settings pages.................................................................................................................................................................................734
Print event log..................................................................................................................................................................................................................735
Pre-boot menu options .............................................................................................................................................................................................735
Control panel menus..................................................................................................................................................................................................753
Clear paper jams.....................................................................................................................................................................................................................844
Paper jam locations...................................................................................................................................................................................................844
13.A1 tray 1 paper jam................................................................................................................................................................................................845
13.A2, 13.A3 tray 2, tray 3 paper jam................................................................................................................................................................846
Clear paper jams in the Bottom HCI..............................................................................................................................................................849
Service mode (tech mode)...............................................................................................................................................................................................850
Entering service mode.............................................................................................................................................................................................850
Service mode menu tree......................................................................................................................................................................................... 851
Information........................................................................................................................................................................................................................857
Maintenance counts .................................................................................................................................................................................................859
Diagnostics ......................................................................................................................................................................................................................860
Service functions ........................................................................................................................................................................................................880
Print quality troubleshooting guide............................................................................................................................................................................882
Image quality problems and solutions.........................................................................................................................................................882
Adjusting the laser scanner assembly skew error..........................................................................................................................................901
Adjusting the flow ADF/ADF skew ...............................................................................................................................................................................903
Adjust Scan skew error ......................................................................................................................................................................................................906

4 Electrical-mechanical diagrams........................................................................................................................................................................................909
PCAs, Boards, and Laser Scanning Unit (LSU)...................................................................................................................................................909
Exit section ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................913
Drive section ...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................914
Paper handling section........................................................................................................................................................................................................ 921
Frame section............................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 923
Fuser section .............................................................................................................................................................................................................................926
Right door section...................................................................................................................................................................................................................927
Scanner section .......................................................................................................................................................................................................................931
Document feeder section ................................................................................................................................................................................................933
Image formation section...................................................................................................................................................................................................935
Optional dual-cassette feeder (DCF) .......................................................................................................................................................................939

xiv
 Optional high-capacity input (HCI) ............................................................................................................................................................................. 942

5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM) ..............................................................................................................................................................948

Product specification and description....................................................................................................................................................................948
Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher view ............................................................................................................................948
Detailed Specifications...........................................................................................................................................................................................950
Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher system.......................................................................................................................956
Service approach..................................................................................................................................................................................................................1031
Precautions when replacing parts.................................................................................................................................................................1031
Before performing service .................................................................................................................................................................................1034
ESD precautions ........................................................................................................................................................................................................1034
After performing service .....................................................................................................................................................................................1034
Post-service test ........................................................................................................................................................................................................1035
Order parts by authorized service providers .......................................................................................................................................1035
Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement (stapler/ stacker and booklet finishers).........................................................1035
Parts, diagrams (stapler/stacker)...................................................................................................................................................................1036
Parts, diagrams (Booklet finisher) ................................................................................................................................................................. 1070
Bridge unit.......................................................................................................................................................................................................................1090
Covers.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 1113
Entrance unit..................................................................................................................................................................................................................1180
Punch unit.........................................................................................................................................................................................................................1185
Tray diverter unit...........................................................................................................................................................................................................1191
Top exit unit......................................................................................................................................................................................................................1218
Top output tray unit................................................................................................................................................................................................... 1244
Main exit unit ..................................................................................................................................................................................................................1257
Paddle unit ......................................................................................................................................................................................................................1283
End fence unit................................................................................................................................................................................................................1315
Tamper unit.....................................................................................................................................................................................................................1349
Stapler unit.....................................................................................................................................................................................................................1502
Ejector unit......................................................................................................................................................................................................................1582
Main output tray unit ................................................................................................................................................................................................1735
Paper holding unit...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 1793
Buffer unit........................................................................................................................................................................................................................1849
Booklet maker ..............................................................................................................................................................................................................1862
Booklet entrance unit ..............................................................................................................................................................................................1872
Booklet paddle unit...................................................................................................................................................................................................1889
Booklet end fence unit ...........................................................................................................................................................................................1902
Booklet presser unit ................................................................................................................................................................................................ 1922
Booklet tamper unit..................................................................................................................................................................................................1943
Booklet stapler unit ..................................................................................................................................................................................................1998
Booklet fold unit ..........................................................................................................................................................................................................2016
Booklet diverter unit ...............................................................................................................................................................................................2098
Booklet exit unit............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 2121
Booklet output tray unit.........................................................................................................................................................................................2139
PCA....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2142
Problem solving......................................................................................................................................................................................................................2160
Control panel message document (CPMD)............................................................................................................................................2160
Clear paper jams .......................................................................................................................................................................................................2160

xv
 Finisher system diagram..................................................................................................................................................................................................2173

6 Inner finisher ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................2175

Product specification and description...................................................................................................................................................................2175
Inner finisher view ......................................................................................................................................................................................................2175
Detailed specifications ..........................................................................................................................................................................................2176
Inner finisher system ..............................................................................................................................................................................................2180
Service approach................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 2219
Precautions when replacing parts................................................................................................................................................................ 2219
Before performing service ................................................................................................................................................................................. 2221
ESD precautions ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2222
After performing service .................................................................................................................................................................................... 2222
Post-service test ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2222
Order parts by authorized service providers ...................................................................................................................................... 2222
Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement (inner finisher).................................................................................................................. 2223
Parts and diagrams (inner finisher)..............................................................................................................................................................2224
Covers............................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2234
Entrance unit................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 2256
Exit unit ...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................2271
Paper support unit ...................................................................................................................................................................................................2290
Paddle unit ......................................................................................................................................................................................................................2378
Tamper unit....................................................................................................................................................................................................................2399
Stapler unit....................................................................................................................................................................................................................2509
Ejector unit..................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2535
End fence unit.............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 2602
Output tray unit ........................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2612
Paper holding unit......................................................................................................................................................................................................2673
Punch unit.........................................................................................................................................................................................................................2718
Problem solving.......................................................................................................................................................................................................................2731
Control panel message document (CPMD).............................................................................................................................................2731
Electrical Mechanical Diagrams (Inner finisher)............................................................................................................................................2732
Punch waste full sensor........................................................................................................................................................................................2733
Punch waste box sensor and finisher docking sensor ..................................................................................................................2734
Entrance motor ...........................................................................................................................................................................................................2735
Exit sensor ......................................................................................................................................................................................................................2736
Exit motor, main paddle motor & home sensor, output tray lower limit switch, and paper holding
solenoid ........................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2737
Paper support motor & home sensor.........................................................................................................................................................2738
Front tamper motor and home sensor.......................................................................................................................................................2739
Rear tamper motor and home sensor........................................................................................................................................................2740
End fence sensor........................................................................................................................................................................................................ 2741
Stapler position motor and sensor............................................................................................................................................................... 2742
Ejector 1 motor and home sensor, ejector 2 motor, motor sensor, and home sensor.............................................2743
Output tray motor and sensor .........................................................................................................................................................................2744
Output tray top of stack sensor......................................................................................................................................................................2745
Top cover switch.........................................................................................................................................................................................................2746
Front cover switch......................................................................................................................................................................................................2747

xvi
7 Diagrams...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................2748
Diagrams (connection) .....................................................................................................................................................................................................2748
Diagrams (FUSER EXIT) ....................................................................................................................................................................................................2748
Diagrams (PICKUP/PH DRIVE/SIDE).........................................................................................................................................................................2749
Diagrams (laser scanner assembly/HVPS) ...................................................................................................................................................... 2750
Diagrams (toner).....................................................................................................................................................................................................................2751
Diagrams (FDB/LVPS).........................................................................................................................................................................................................2752
Diagrams (UI)............................................................................................................................................................................................................................2753
Diagrams (FRONT/OPC) ...................................................................................................................................................................................................2754
Diagrams (scanner).............................................................................................................................................................................................................2755
Diagrams (Dual Cassette Feeder)............................................................................................................................................................................2756

Appendix A ..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................2758
Certificate of Volatility (For 77822, 77825, 77830)..........................................................................................................................................2758
Certificate of Volatility (for E783xxdn) .................................................................................................................................................................. 2760
Certificate of Volatility (for E783xxz).......................................................................................................................................................................2763

Appendix B Service parts changes For Environmental Protection Agency 3.0 Compliant Products...............................2766

Glossary of terms ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................2770

Index.......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2780

xvii
1 Product specifications and description

You will learn more about the following sub sections:

Printer views
Learn more specifically about the different views of the printer.

Printer front view

Learn about the printer components (front view).

Figure 1-1 Printer front view

1 2
3
17 4
16 5
6
7
15 8
9 10

12

13
14 11

Item Description

1 Automatic document feeder cover (access for clearing jams)

2 Automatic document feeder width guides

3 Automatic document feeder input tray

4 Automatic document feeder output tray

5 Control panel with color touchscreen display (tilts up for easier viewing)

Product specifications and description 1

 Item Description

6 Physical keyboard (Flow models only). Pull the keyboard straight out to use it. (NOTE: Close the keyboard
when it is not in use.)

7 Right door (access for clearing jams)

8 On/off button

9 Tray 1

10 Power switch

11 Power connection

12 Front door (access to the toner cartridges)

13 Tray 2

14 Tray 3

15 Output bin

16 Easy-access USB port. Insert a USB flash drive for printing or scanning without a computer, or to update
the printer firmware. (NOTE: An administrator must enable this port before use.)

17 Hardware integration pocket (for connecting accessory and third-party devices)

Printer back view

Learn about the printer components (back view).

Figure 1-2 Printer rear view

Item Description

1 Formatter cover

2 Interface ports

3 Serial number and product number label

Interface ports
Learn about the printer components (interface ports).

2 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

 Figure 1-3 Interface ports

Item Description

1 USB port for connecting external USB devices (NOTE: For easy-access USB printing, use the USB port
near the control panel.)

2 Local area network (LAN) Ethernet network port

3 Hi-Speed USB 2.0 printing port

Control-panel view
Learn about the printer components (control-panel).

NOTE: Tilt the control panel for easier viewing.

The Home screen provides access to the printer features and indicates the current status of the printer.

Return to the Home screen at any time by touching the Home button on the printer control panel.

NOTE: The features that appear on the Home screen can vary, depending on the printer
configuration.

Control-panel view 3
 Figure 1-4 Printer control panel
2 3 4 5

6
1

Item Button Description

1 Home button Touch the Home button to return to the Home screen.

2 Reset button The Reset button returns the printer to default settings and is always present
if users are not logged in. The Reset button is not present when the Sign Out
button is present. Touch the Reset button to resume and release jobs from the
previous pause state and interrupt mode, reset the quick copy count in the copy
count field, exit special modes, reset the display language and the keyboard
layout.

3 Sign In or Sign Out Touch the Sign In button to access secured features.
button
Touch the Sign Out button to sign out of the printer. The printer restores all
options to the default settings.

NOTE: This button displays only if the administrator has configured the printer
to require permission for access to features.

4 Information button Touch the information button to access a screen that provides access to several
types of printer information. Touch the buttons at the bottom of the screen for
the following information:

● Display Language: Change the language setting for the current user
session.

● Sleep Mode: Place the printer into sleep mode.

● Wi-Fi Direct: View information for how to connect directly to the printer
using a phone, tablet, or other device with Wi-Fi.

● Wireless: View or change wireless connection settings (only when an

optional wireless accessory is installed).

● Ethernet: View or change Ethernet connection settings.

● HP Web Services: View information to connect and print to the printer using
HP Web Services (ePrint).

4 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

 Item Button Description

5 Help button Touch the Help button to open the embedded help system.

The status line provides information about the overall printer status.

6 Applications area Touch any of the icons to open the application. Swipe the screen sideways to
access more applications.

NOTE: The available applications vary by printer. The administrator can

configure which applications appear and the order in which they appear.

7 Start Copy button Touch the Start Copy button to start a copy job.

8 Home-screen page Indicates the number of pages on the Home screen or in an application. The
indicator current page is highlighted. Swipe the screen sideways to scroll between pages.

Inner finisher view

Learn about the printer components (inner finisher).

Stapler/stacker finisher view

Learn about the printer components (stapler/stacker finisher).

Booklet finisher view

Learn about the printer components (booklet finisher).

Inner finisher view 5

 Specifications
Learn about the specifications.

Technical specifications
Learn technical specifications for model bundles.

NOTE: Hole punch accessories are optional for the stapler/stacker, inner finisher, and booklet maker
accessories.

Table 1-1 E77822dn, E77822z, E77825dn, E77825z, E77830dn, E77830z, E78323dn, E78323z, E78325dn, E78325z,
E78330dn, E78330z

Model number Item E77822dn E77822z E77825dn E77825z E77830dn E77830z

E78323dn E78323z E78325dn E78325z E78330dn E78330z

Product number
X3A78A X3A77A X3A81A X3A80A X3A84A X3A83A

8GR95A 8GR99A 8GR96A 8GS00A 8GR97A 8GS01A

Paper handling Tray 1 (100-sheet Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported
capacity)

Tray 2 (520-sheet Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported

capacity)

Tray 3 (520-sheet Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported

capacity)

HP LaserJet dual Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional

cassette feeder
(DCF) (workgroup)

2,000-sheet high- Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional

capacity input tray
(HCI) (workgroup)

HP LaserJet Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional

Printer cabinet
(workgroup)

6 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

Table 1-1 E77822dn, E77822z, E77825dn, E77825z, E77830dn, E77830z, E78323dn, E78323z, E78325dn, E78325z,
E78330dn, E78330z (continued)

Model number Item E77822dn E77822z E77825dn E77825z E77830dn E77830z

E78323dn E78323z E78325dn E78325z E78330dn E78330z

Product number
X3A78A X3A77A X3A81A X3A80A X3A84A X3A83A

8GR95A 8GR99A 8GR96A 8GS00A 8GR97A 8GS01A

HP LaserJet Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional

Stapler/stacker
finisher

HP LaserJet Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional

Booklet finisher

HP LaserJet Inner Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional

finisher

HP LaserJet 2/3 Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional

hole punch

HP LaserJet 2/4 Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional

hole punch

Swedish hole Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional

punch

HP LaserJet Job Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional

separator

HP LaserJet Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional

Spacer

HP LaserJet Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional

Second exit

Automatic duplex Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported

printing

Connectivity 10/100/1000 Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported

Ethernet LAN
connection with
IPv4 and IPv6

Hi-Speed USB 2.0 Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported

Easy-access USB Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported

port for printing
without a
computer and
upgrading the
firmware

Hardware Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported

Integration Pocket
for connecting
accessory and
third-party devices

Memory 6 GB base Supported Not Supported Not Supported Not

memory supported supported supported

7 GB base memory Not Supported Not Supported Not Supported

supported supported supported

Technical specifications 7
 Table 1-1 E77822dn, E77822z, E77825dn, E77825z, E77830dn, E77830z, E78323dn, E78323z, E78325dn, E78325z,
E78330dn, E78330z (continued)

Model number Item E77822dn E77822z E77825dn E77825z E77830dn E77830z

E78323dn E78323z E78325dn E78325z E78330dn E78330z

Product number
X3A78A X3A77A X3A81A X3A80A X3A84A X3A83A

8GR95A 8GR99A 8GR96A 8GS00A 8GR97A 8GS01A

Mass storage 500 GB HP Secure Supported Not Supported Not Supported Not
High-Performance supported supported supported
Hard Disk

2x 500 GB Not Supported Not Supported Not Supported

HP Secure High- supported supported supported
Performance Hard
Disk

16 GB Supported Not Supported Not Supported Not

embedded Multi- supported supported supported
Media Controller
(eMMC)

Control-panel Color touchscreen Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported

display control panel

Retractable Not Supported Not Supported Not Supported

keyboard supported supported supported

Print Prints 22 pages Supported Supported Not Not Not Not

per minute (ppm) supported supported supported supported
on A4 and on
letter-size paper.

Prints 25 pages Not Not Supported Supported Not Not

per minute (ppm) supported supported supported supported
on A4 and on
letter-size paper

Prints 30 pages Not Not Not Not Supported Supported

per minute (ppm) supported supported supported supported
on A4 and on
letter-size paper

Easy-access Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported

USB printing
(no computer
required)

Fax Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional

Copy and Scan Scans 80 pages Supported Not Supported Not Supported Not
per minute (ppm) supported supported supported
on A4 and letter-
size paper

Scans 120 pages Not Supported Not Supported Not Supported

per minute (ppm) supported supported supported
on A4 and letter-
size paper

8 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

Table 1-1 E77822dn, E77822z, E77825dn, E77825z, E77830dn, E77830z, E78323dn, E78323z, E78325dn, E78325z,
E78330dn, E78330z (continued)

Model number Item E77822dn E77822z E77825dn E77825z E77830dn E77830z

E78323dn E78323z E78325dn E78325z E78330dn E78330z

Product number
X3A78A X3A77A X3A81A X3A80A X3A84A X3A83A

8GR95A 8GR99A 8GR96A 8GS00A 8GR97A 8GS01A

100-page Supported Not Supported Not Supported Not

document feeder supported supported supported
with dual-head
scanning for
single-pass duplex
copying and
scanning

250-page Not Supported Not Supported Not Supported

document feeder supported supported supported
with dual-head
scanning for
single-pass duplex
copying and
scanning

HP EveryPage Not Supported Not Supported Not Supported

Technologies supported supported supported
including
ultrasonic multi-
feed detection

Embedded Not Supported Not Supported Not Supported

optical character supported supported supported
recognition (OCR)
provides the ability
to convert printed
pages into text
that can be edited
or searched using
a computer

SMART Label Not Supported Not Supported Not Supported

feature provides supported supported supported
paper-edge
detection for
automatic page
cropping

Automatic page Not Supported Not Supported Not Supported

orientation for supported supported supported
pages that have
at least 100
characters of text

Automatic tone Not Supported Not Supported Not Supported

adjustment supported supported supported
sets contrast,
brightness, and
background
removal for each
page

Digital Send Send documents Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported
to E-mail, USB, and
shared folders on
a network

Technical specifications 9
 Table 1-1 E77822dn, E77822z, E77825dn, E77825z, E77830dn, E77830z, E78323dn, E78323z, E78325dn, E78325z,
E78330dn, E78330z (continued)

Model number Item E77822dn E77822z E77825dn E77825z E77830dn E77830z

E78323dn E78323z E78325dn E78325z E78330dn E78330z

Product number
X3A78A X3A77A X3A81A X3A80A X3A84A X3A83A

8GR95A 8GR99A 8GR96A 8GS00A 8GR97A 8GS01A

Send documents Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported

to SharePoint®

Supported operating systems

Learn about supported operating systems.

The following information applies to the printer-specific Windows PCL 6 and HP print drivers for macOS
and to the software installer.

Windows: The HP Software Installer can be downloaded from the printer support website for this printer
and installs the "HP PCL.6" version 3 print driver, the "HP PCL 6" version 3 print driver, or the "HP PCL-6"
version 4 print driver, depending on the Windows operating system, along with optional software when
using the software installer.

Download the "HP PCL.6" version 3 print driver, the "HP PCL 6" version 3 print driver, and the
"HP PCL-6" version 4 print driver from the printer-support website for this printer: www.hp.com/support/
colorlje77822mfp.

macOS: Mac computers are supported with this printer. Download HP Easy Start either from 123.hp.com/
LaserJet or from the Printer Support page, and then use HP Easy Start to install the HP print driver.
HP Easy Start is not included in the HP Software Installer.

1. Go to 123.hp.com/LaserJet.

2. Follow the steps provided to download the printer software.

Linux: For information and print drivers for Linux, go to www.hp.com/go/linuxprinting.

UNIX: For information and print drivers for UNIX®, go to www.hp.com/go/unixmodelscripts.

Table 1-2 Supported operating systems and print drivers

Operating system Print driver installed (from the software on the Notes
web)

Windows® XP SP3, 32- The "HP PCL.6" printer-specific print driver is Microsoft retired mainstream support for
bit installed for this operating system as part of the Windows XP in April 2009. HP will continue to
software installation. provide best effort support for the discontinued
XP operating system. Some features and page
sizes in the print driver are not supported.

Windows Vista®, 32-bit The "HP PCL.6" printer-specific print driver is Microsoft retired mainstream support for
installed for this operating system as part of the Windows Vista in April 2012. HP will continue to
software installation. provide best effort support for the discontinued
Vista operating system. Some features and page
sizes in the print driver are not supported.

10 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

Table 1-2 Supported operating systems and print drivers (continued)

Operating system Print driver installed (from the software on the Notes
web)

Windows Server 2003 The "HP PCL.6" printer-specific print driver is Microsoft retired mainstream support for
SP2, 32-bit available for download from the printer-support Windows Server 2003 in July 2010. HP will
website. Download the driver, and then use the continue to provide best effort support for the
Microsoft Add Printer tool to install it. discontinued Server 2003 operating system.
Some features and page sizes in the print driver
are not supported.

Windows 7 SP1, 32-bit The "HP PCL 6" printer-specific print driver is
and 64-bit installed for this operating system as part of the
software installation.

Windows 8, 32-bit and The "HP PCL 6" printer-specific print driver is Windows 8 RT support is provided through
64-bit installed for this operating system as part of the Microsoft IN OS Version 4, 32- bit driver.
software installation.

Windows 8.1, 32-bit and The "HP PCL-6" V4 printer-specific print driver is Windows 8.1 RT support is provided through
64-bit installed for this operating system as part of the Microsoft IN OS Version 4, 32- bit driver.
software installation.

Windows 10, 32-bit and The "HP PCL-6" V4 printer-specific print driver is
64-bit installed for this operating system as part of the
software installation.

Windows Server 2008 The "HP PCL.6" printer-specific print driver is Microsoft retired mainstream support for
SP2, 32-bit available for download from the printer-support Windows Server 2008 in January 2015. HP will
website. Download the driver, and then use the continue to provide best effort support for the
Microsoft Add Printer tool to install it. discontinued Server 2008 operating system.
Some features and page sizes in the print driver
are not supported.

Windows Server 2008 The "HP PCL 6" printer-specific print driver is
SP2, 64-bit available for download from the printer-support
website. Download the driver, and then use the
Microsoft Add Printer tool to install it.

Windows Server 2008 The "HP PCL 6" printer-specific print driver is
R2, SP 1, 64-bit available for download from the printer-support
website. Download the driver, and then use the
Microsoft Add Printer tool to install it.

Windows Server 2012, The PCL 6 printer-specific print driver is available

64-bit for download from the printer-support website.
Download the driver, and then use the Microsoft
Add Printer tool to install it.

Windows Server 2012 The PCL 6 printer-specific print driver is available

R2, 64-bit for download from the printer-support website.
Download the driver, and then use the Microsoft
Add Printer tool to install it.

macOS 10.12 (Sierra), To install the print driver, download HP Easy Start
macOS 10.11 (El from 123.hp.com/LaserJet.
Capitan), and macOS
10.10 (Yosemite) Follow the steps provided to install the printer
software and print driver.

NOTE: Supported operating systems can change. For a current list of supported operating systems,
go to www.hp.com/support/colorlje77822mfp for HP's all-inclusive help for the printer.

NOTE: For details on client and server operating systems and for HP UPD driver support for this
printer, go to www.hp.com/go/upd. Under Additional information, click the links.

Supported operating systems 11

 Table 1-3 Minimum system requirements

Windows macOS

● An Internet connection ● Internet connection

● Dedicated USB 1.1 or 2.0 connection or a network ● 1 GB of available hard-disk space

connection

● 2 GB of available hard-disk space

Mobile printing solutions

Learn what HP offers for mobile printing solutions.

HP offers multiple mobile and ePrint solutions to enable easy printing to an HP printer from a laptop,
tablet, smartphone, or other mobile device. To see the full list and to determine the best choice, go to HP
Customer Support - Knowledge Base.

● Wi-Fi Direct

● HP ePrint via email (Requires HP Web Services to be enabled and the printer to be registered with
HP Connected)

● HP ePrint app (Available for Android, iOS, and Blackberry)

● HP All-in-One Remote app for iOS and Android devices

● HP ePrint software

● Google Cloud Print

● AirPrint

● Android Printing

Printer dimensions
Learn about printer dimensions.

NOTE: A color printer model is shown in the figure below. However, the dimension information applies
to mono and color printers.

12 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

 1

2
2
3 3

Table 1-4 Printer dimensions

Item Normal operating dimensions Maximum operating dimensions

Height 877 mm (34.5 in) (dn models) 1241 mm (49 in) (dn models)

925 mm (36.5 in) (z models) 1375 mm (54.25 in) (z models)

Depth 730 mm (28.75 in) (dn models) 1115 mm (44 in) (dn models)

780 mm (30.75 in) (z models) 1216 mm (48 in) (z models)

Width 568 mm (22.5 in) (dn models) 1010 mm (39.75 in) (dn models)

584 mm (23 in) (z models) 1026 mm (40.5 in) (z models)

Weight 91.1 kg (200.8 lb) (dn models)

102.61 kg (226.2 lb) (z models)

Table 1-5 Printer accessory dimensions and weights

Product Length Width Depth Height Weight

HP LaserJet 790 mm (31.1 in) 566 mm (22.3 in) 610 mm (24 in) 265 mm (10.4 in) 13.4 kg (29.5 lbs)
Cabinet
(workgroup)

HP LaserJet 790 mm (31.1 in) 566 mm (22.3 in) 610 mm (24 in) 265 mm (10.4 in) 21 kg (46.3 lbs)
2x520-sheet dual
cassette feeder
(DCF) (workgroup)

HP LaserJet 790 mm (31.1 in) 585 mm (23 in) 670 mm (26.4 in) 312 mm (12.3 in) 29.3 kg (64.59 lbs)
2000 sheet high
capacity input
(HCI) feeder
(workgroup)

Printer dimensions 13
 Table 1-5 Printer accessory dimensions and weights (continued)

Product Length Width Depth Height Weight

HP LaserJet 790 mm (31.1 in) 464 mm (18.3 in) 394.7 mm (15.5 in) 124.5 mm (4.9 in) 3 kg (1.4 lbs)
Job separator
(workgroup)

HP LaserJet Inner 790 mm (31.1 in) 458 mm (18 in) 491 mm (19.3 in) 173 mm (6.8 in) 15kg (33.1 lbs)
finisher

HP LaserJet 790 mm (31.1 in) 1016.4 mm (39.75 in) 673 mm (26.75 in) 587.5 mm (23.5 in) 62 kg (136.7 lbs)
Booklet finisher

HP LaserJet 790 mm (31.1 in) 1016.4 mm (39.75 in) 673 mm (26.75 in) 587.5 mm (23.5 in) 40kg (88.2 lbs)
Stapler/Stacker
finisher

NOTE: HP recommends that 30 mm (1.81 in) be added to the printer dimensions provided in this
chapter to make sure there is sufficient space to open doors and covers, and to provide proper
ventilation.

Power consumption, electrical specifications, and acoustic emissions

In order to operate properly, the printer must be in an environment that meets certain power
specifications.

See www.hp.com/support/colorlje77830mfp for current information.

CAUTION: Power requirements are based on the country/region where the printer is sold. Do not
convert operating voltages. This will damage the printer and void the printer warranty.

Operating-environment range
In order to operate properly, the printer must be in an environment that meets certain specifications.

Table 1-6 Operating-environment specifications

Environment Recommended Storage

Temperature 17° to 25°C (62.6° to 77°F) Not available

Relative humidity 30% to 70% relative humidity (RH) Not available

General specifications
Learn about the general specifications.

NOTE: Acoustic values are subject to change. For current information, see www.hp.com/support.

Table 1-7 General specifications

Item Description Specification

Processor CPU 1.2 GHz

14 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

Table 1-7 General specifications (continued)

Item Description Specification

User Interface Control Panel 20.3 cm (8 in) Color Graphics

Display (CGD) with touchscreen; rotating
(adjustable angle) display; illuminated
Home button (for quick return to the
Home menu); USB High-speed 2.0 port;
Hardware Integration Pocket; Extended
Keyboard (Flow models only)

User Interface LED 2 (Power/Status)

User Interface Key/Button 1 (Power)

Memory Standard Flow Bundle : 8GB, dn bundle : 7GB

Storage Standard Two 1,000 GB Standard, embedded

HP High-Performance Secure Hard
Disk, Total 1,000G; AES 256 hardware
encryption or greater; Secure
erase capabilities (Secure File Erase-
Temporary Job Files, Secure Erase-Job
Data, Secure ATA Erase-Disk).

NOTE: US Government SKU uses 500

GB FIPS 140–2 validated hard disk.

Storage Optional N/A

Interface USB (Device) Yes (Hi-Speed USB 2.0)

Interface USB (Host) Yes (Hi-Speed USB 2.0)

Interface USB (EDI) N/A

Interface Wired LAN Standard (Ethernet 10/100/1G Base TX)

Interface Wireless LAN Optional (IEEE 802.11b/g/n + NFC Active

Type

Interface NFC Optional (IEEE 802.11b/g/n + NFC Active

Type

Interface Other N/A

Warmup Time From Ready) Less than 25 sec

From Sleep Less than 21 sec

Power Consumption Ready Less than 250 Wh

Power Consumption Normal operation Less than 800 Wh

Power Consumption Max/Peak Less than 1200 Wh

Power Consumption Sleep Less than 1.5 Wh

Power Consumption Power off Less than 0 W

Power Consumption TEC ● E77822, E78323: 1.438 Wh

● E77825, E78325: 1.580 Wh

● E77830, E78330: 2.034 Wh

Default Sleep Delay Time Sleep mode operation 2 minutes

Maximum Sleep Delay Time Sleep mode operation 60 minutes

General specifications 15
 Table 1-7 General specifications (continued)

Item Description Specification

Power Requirement Operation ● Input Voltage (Europe): AC 220–240

V (+-6%)

● Input voltage (USA): AC 110–127 V

(+-10%)

● Input Voltage (Korea): AC 220–240 V

(+-6%)

● Rated Frequency: 50/60 Hz (+-2Hz)

Acoustic Noise Level (Power) Power Emissions ● Acoustic power emissions

● Acoustic power emissions (ready)

● Acoustic power emissions (active,

copy)

● Acoustic power emissions (active,

scan)

Acoustic Noise Level (Pressure) Pressure Emissions ● Acoustic pressure emissions

bystander (active, printing)

● Acoustic pressure emissions

bystander (ready)

● Acoustic pressure emissions

bystander (active, copy)

● Acoustic pressure emissions

bystander (active, scan)

Recommended monthly print volume Operation ● E77822, E78323: 4400 pages

● E77825, E78325: 5100 pages

● E77830, E78330: 6300 pages

Max monthly duty cycle Operation Up to 30,000 recommended monthly

page volume

Print specifications
Learn about the print specifications.

16 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

Table 1-8 Print specifications

Item Specification

Print speed Simplex ● E77822

– Up to 22 ppm

● E78323

– Up to 23 ppm

● E77825/E78325

– Up to 25 ppm

● E77830/E78330

– Up to 30 ppm

FPOT From Ready (mono/color) ● E77822: Less than 12.0/9.3 seconds

● E77825: Less than 11.3/9.1seconds

● E77830: Less than 10.9/8.7 seconds

● E78323: Less than 13.3/10.3

seconds

● E78325: Less than 12.8/10.3

seconds

● E78330: Less than 10.9/8.7 seconds

FPOT From Sleep (mono/color) ● E77822: Less than 27/27 seconds

● E77825: Less than 27/27 seconds

● E77830: Less than 27/27 seconds

● E78323: Less than 24/24 seconds

● E78325: Less than 24/24 seconds

● E78330: Less than 24/24 seconds

Resolution Optical 600 x 600 dpi

Resolution Enhanced Up to 1200 x 1200 dpi with reduced

speed

Printer Language HP PCL 6/HP PCL 5c/HP PostScript

Level 3 Emulation/PDF (v1.7)/AirPrint™
compatible

Font 84 scalable TrueType fonts

Network Protocol ● IPv4/IPv6: Apple Bonjour Compatible (Mac OS 10.2.4 or higher), SNMPv1/v2c/v3,
HTTP, HTTPS, FTP, TFTP, Port 9100, LPD, WS Discovery, IPP, Secure-IPP, IPsec/
Firewall

● IPv6: DHCPv6, MLDv1, ICMPv6

● IPv4: Auto-IP, SLP, Telnet, IGMPv2, BOOTP/DHCP, WINS, IP Direct Mode, WS Print

● Other: NetWare NDS, Bindery, NDPS, ePrint; Google Cloud Print 2.0

Duplex Print Automatic (standard)

Direct Print PRN/PDF/TIFF/JPEG/XPS

Print specifications 17
 Table 1-8 Print specifications (continued)

Item Specification

Print Features ● WSD print

● Secure print

● Stored print

● Booklet

● N-up

● Cover page

● Insert page

● Except page

● Barcode

● Eco

● Poster

● Glossy

● Watermark

● Tray priority setting

● Auto tray setting

● Tray protection

● USB print

● Secure PDF print

● Google Cloud print

Scan specifications
Learn about the scan specifications.

Table 1-9 Scan specifications

Item Specification

Scan method MMT

Compatibility Network TWAIN/Network

SANE

Color Mode Mono/Gray/Color

18 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

Table 1-9 Scan specifications (continued)

Item Specification

Scan Speed Scan to folder speeds DN bundles (black and

(hardware) white, gray scale, and
color):

● Simplex up to 80 ipm
@ 300 x 300 dpi

● Duplex up to 160 ipm

@ 300 x 300 dpi

Z bundles (black and white,

gray scale, and color):

● Simplex up to 120 ipm

@ 300 x 300 dpi

● Duplex up to 240 ipm

@ 300 x 300 dpi

Scan Speed Gray ● E77822, E78323

– Simplex: Up to 45
ipm @ 600 dpi

– Duplex: Up to 18
ipm @ 600 dpi

● E77825, E78325

– Simplex: Up to 80
ipm @ 600 dpi

– Duplex: Up to 100
ipm @ 600 dpi

● E77830, E78330

– Simplex: Up to 80
ipm @ 600 dpi

– Duplex: Up to 100
ipm @ 600 dpi

Scan specifications 19
 Table 1-9 Scan specifications (continued)

Item Specification

Scan Speed Color ● E77822, E78323

– Simplex: Up to 45
ipm @ 600 dpi

– Duplex: Up to 18
ipm @ 600 dpi

● E77825, E78325

– Simplex: Up to 80
ipm @ 600 dpi

– Duplex: Up to 100
ipm @ 600 dpi

● E77830, E78330

– Simplex: Up to 80
ipm @ 600 dpi

– Duplex: Up to 100
ipm @ 600 dpi

File Formats ● PDF

● Search-able PDF

● Compact PDF

● PDF Encryption

● Digital Signature in
PDF

● PDF/A

● Single-Page PDF

● Multi-page PDF

● TIFF

● Single-Page TIFF

● Multi-page TIFF

● XPS

● Single-Page XPS

● Multi-page XPS

● JPEG

● PNG

Resolution Optical (ADF) Up to 600 x 600 dpi

Resolution Optical (flatbed) Up to 600 x 600 dpi

Resolution Enhanced (ADF) Up to 4800 x 4800 dpi

Resolution Enhanced (flatbed) Up to 4800 x 4800 dpi

20 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

 Table 1-9 Scan specifications (continued)

Item Specification

Scan Destinations ● Email

● FTP

● SMB

● HDD

● USB

● WSD

● PC

Multi-destinations Yes

Communication Protocol ● SMTP (IPv4, IPv6, SSL/

TLS)

● FTP (IPv4, IPv6)

● SMB (IPv4, IPv6)

● WSD

● T4Net

Scan ADF Minimum for dn bundles:

Size 128 x 140 mm (5 x 5.5 in)

Minimum for z bundles: 105

x 148 mm (4.13 x 5.82 in)

Maximum: 297 x 432 mm

(11.7 x 17 in)

Flatbed Maximum: 297 x 432 mm

(11.7 x 17 in)

Scan Original Types Text/Text & Photo/Photo

Copy specifications
Learn about the copy specifications.

Table 1-10 Copy specifications

Item Specification

Copy Speed Single Document Multiple Copy (SDMC) ● E77822, E78323

– Up to 22 cpm

● E77825, E78325

– Up to 25 cpm

● E77830, E78330

– Up to 30 ppm

Copy specifications 21
 Table 1-10 Copy specifications (continued)

Item Specification

FCOT From Ready (mono/color) ● E77822: Less than 9.9/8.7 seconds

● E77825: Less than 9.0/7.7 seconds

● E77830: Less than 8.0/6.8 seconds

● E78323: Less than 11.0/9.7 seconds

● E78325: Less than 10.2/8.7 seconds

● E78330: Less than 8.0/6.8 seconds

Resolution ADF (Flow ADF/ADF) ● Scan: 600 x 600 dpi

● Printing: 600 x 600 dpi

Flatbed ● Scan: 600 x 600 dpi

● Printing: 600 x 600 dpi

Reduce/Enlarge ADF (Flow ADF/ADF) 25–400%

Reduce/Enlarge Flatbed 25–400%

Copier Settings ● 2–sided copying

● Scalability

● Image adjustments (darkness, contrast, background clean up, sharpness)

● Optimized text/picture (text, mixed, printed picture, photograph)

● N-Up

● N or Z-ordering

● Content orientation

● Collation

● Booklet

● ID scan

● Job build

● Job storage

● Watermark

● Stamps

● Book mode scans

● Erase edges

● Automatically detect color/mono

● Image preview

22 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

 Table 1-10 Copy specifications (continued)

Item Specification

Copy Original Type ● Text

● Text and Printed Photo

● Text and Glossy Photo

● Newspaper

● Printed Photo

● Glossy Photo

● Copied Original

● Map

● Light Original

● ID Copy

● N-up

● Booklet

● Image Repeat

● Auto Fit

● Book Copy

● Watermark

● Image Overlay

● Stamp

● Covers

● Job Build

● Preview

● Erase Edge

● Image Shift

● Image Adjustment

● Background Adjustment

Paper handling specifications

Learn about the paper handling specifications.

Table 1-11 Paper handling specifications

Item Specification

Input Capacity Standard 1040 sheets

Input Capacity Multipurpose 100 sheets

Input Capacity Other Options Dual Cassette Feeder (2 x 520 sheets)

Paper handling specifications 23

 Table 1-11 Paper handling specifications (continued)

Item Specification

Input Capacity BotomHigh Capacity 2000 sheets, A4 only

Input (bHCI)

Input Capacity Maximum 1040 Std + 100 Tray 1 + 2000 bHCI

Standard Cassette Capacity 520 sheets x 2

Tray

Standard Cassette Media Sizes ● Tray2: 140 x 210 mm to 297 x 364 mm (5.5 x 8.27 in) to (11.7 x 14.33 in)
Tray
● Tray3: 140 x 210 mm to 297 x 432 mm (5.5 x 8.27 in) to (11.7 x 17 in)

Standard Cassette Media Types ● Plain

Tray
● Thin

● Bond

● Hole Punched

● Pre-Printed

● Recycled

● Thin Cardstock

● Letterhead

● Thick

● Cotton

● Colored

● Archive

● Thin Glossy

● Heavy Weight

24 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

Table 1-11 Paper handling specifications (continued)

Item Specification

Standard Cassette Media Weight ● Plain Paper: 70-90 g/m2 (18.5-24 lb/ Duplex)
Tray
● Thick Paper: 91-105 g/m2 (25-28 lb/ Duplex)

● Heavy Weight Paper : 106-176 g/m2 (Duplex)

● Extra Heavy Weight 1 Paper : 177-220 g/m2

● Thin Paper: 60-69 g/m2 (16-19 lb/Duplex)

● Cotton paper: 75-90 g/m2 (Duplex

● Colored: 75-90 g/m2 (Duplex)

● Pre-Printed: 71-90 g/m2 (Duplex)

● Recycled: 60-90 g/m2 (Duplex)2

● Bond Paper: 105-120 g/m2 (Duplex)2

● Letterhead: 75-90 g/m2 (Duplex)2

● Hole Punched Paper: 75-90 g/m2 (Duplex)

● Thin CardStock: 105-163 g/m2 (Duplex)

● Thin Glossy : 106-163 g/m2 (Duplex)

Standard Cassette Sensing ● H/W Install Detect: Yes

Tray
● Paper Empty and Low Level Detect: Yes

● Paper Type Detect: No

● Paper Size Detect: Yes

Tray 1 Capacity 100 sheets

Tray 1 Media Sizes 98 x 148 mm to 297 x 432 mm (3.8 x 5.8 in) to (11.7 x 17 in)

Paper handling specifications 25

 Table 1-11 Paper handling specifications (continued)

Item Specification

Tray 1 Media Types ● Plain

● Thin

● Bond

● Hole Punched

● Pre-Printed

● Recycled

● Thin Cardstock

● Letterhead

● Thick

● Cotton

● Colored

● Archive

● Thin Glossy

● Heavy Weight

● Envelope

● Label

● Card transparency

Tray 1 Media Weight 60 to 176 g/m2 (16 to 47 lb): Simplex, Duplex Envelope (75 to 90 g/m2)

Label (120 to 150 g/m2): Simplex

Tray 1 Sensing Paper Empty Detect: Yes

Paper Size Detect: No

26 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

Table 1-11 Paper handling specifications (continued)

Item Specification

Automatic document Capacity ● 250 sheets for flow (GX/z models)

feeder (ADF) (LX/dn
models) ● 100 sheets for Managed (LX/dn models)

Duplex document Yes

scanning

Document Size ● Width: 128 mm-297 mm ((5 in-11.7 in))

● Length: 128 mm-432 mm ((5 in- 17in))

Document Weight ● E72525/72825

– Simplex: 42 — 163 g/m2 (11.25— 43.25 lb)

– Duplex: 50 — 128 g/m2 (12.25— 34 lb)

● E72530/72830, E72535/72835

– Simplex: 42 — 163 g/m2 (11.25— 43.25 lb)

– Duplex: 50 — 128 g/m2 (12.25— 34 lb)

● E77822, E78323

– Simplex: 42 — 163 g/m2 (11.25— 43.25 lb)

– Duplex: 50 — 128 g/m2 (12.25— 34 lb)

● E77825, E77830, E78325, E78330

– Simplex: 42 — 163 g/m2 (11.25— 43.25 lb)

– Duplex: 50 — 128 g/m2 (12.25— 34 lb)

Automatic document Capacity 250 sheets

feeder (ADF) (GX/d
models) Document size ● Width : 105 mm - 297 mm (5in - 11.7in)

● Length : 140 mm - 432 mm (5.5in - 17in)

Document Weight Simplex: 60 — 163 g/m2 (11.25— 43.24 lb) (guarantee) 42-60 g/m and 163-220
g/m2(support)

Auto Detected Size A3/A4/A5/A6 SEF/B4/B5/Letter/Legal/Statement/Folio/Executive

Printer Output Standard 500 sheets, face down

Capacity

Printer Output Maximum 615 sheets 500 sheets (Standard) + 125 sheets (Job Separator)
Capacity

Printing Size Maximum Size 297 x 432 mm (11.7 x 17 in)

Printing Size Minimum Size 98 mm x 148 mm (3.8 in x 5.8 in)

Maximum Printing Area Trays 1–3 Top: 4.23 +/- 1.5 mm / Left: 4.23 +/- 1.5 mm

Maximum Printing Area Simplex from optional Top and Left: 4.23 +/- 2 mm
trays

Maximum Printing Area Duplex Top: 4.23 +/- 2 mm / Left: 4.23 +/- 2 mm

Duplex Printing Support Built-in

Paper handling specifications 27

 Table 1-11 Paper handling specifications (continued)

Item Specification

Duplex Printing Media Sizes ● 140 mm x 182 mm (5.5in x 7.2 in)

● 297 mm x 432 mm (11.7 in x 17 in)

Duplex Printing Media Types ● Plain

● Thin

● Bond

● Punched

● Pre-Printed

● Recycled

● Thin Cardstock

● Letterhead

● Thick

● Cotton

● Colored

● Archive

● Thin Glossy

● Heavy Weight

Duplex Printing Media weight 60 to 176 g/m2 (16 to 47 lb)

Supplies
Learn about the required toner cartridge and toner collection unit (TCU).

Table 1-12 Supplies

Item Part number Average yield

HP LJ Toner Cartridge - Cyan1 ● X3A83-67901 (For E77822, E77825, 28,000 pages

E77830)

● W9211-67901 (For E78323, E78325,

E78330)

HP LJ Toner Cartridge - Magenta1 ● X3A83-67902 (For E77822, E77825, 28,000 pages

E77830)

● W9213-67901 (For E78323, E78325,

E78330)

HP LJ Toner Cartridge - Yellow1 ● X3A83-67903 (For E77822, E77825, 28,000 pages

E77830)

● W9212-67901 (For E78323, E78325,

E78330)

28 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

 Table 1-12 Supplies (continued)

Item Part number Average yield

HP LJ Toner Cartridge - Black1 ● X3A83-67904 (For E77822, E77825, 29,000 pages

E77830)

● W9201-67901 (For E78323, E78325,

E78330)

SVC-Cyan Mngd LJ Toner Cartridge1 W9191MC (For E77822, E77825, E77830) 28,000 pages

W9211MC (For E78323, E78325, E78330)

W9191-67902 (Service) (For E77822,

E77825, E77830)

SVC-Magenta Mngd LJ Toner Cartridge1 W9193MC (For E77822, E77825, E77830) 28,000 pages

W9213MC (For E78323, E78325, E78330)

W9193-67902 (service) (For E77822,

E77825, E77830)

SVC-Yellow Mngd LJ Toner Cartridge1 W9212-67901 (For E78323, E78325, 28,000 pages
E78330)

W9212MC (For E78323, E78325, E78330)

W9192-67902 (service) (For E77822,

E77825, E77830)

SVC-Black Mngd LJ Toner Cartridge1 W9210-67901 (For E78323, E78325, 29,000 pages
E78330)

W9210MC (For E78323, E78325, E78330)

W9190-67902 (service) (For E77822,

E77825, E77830)

HP LJ Toner Collection Unit X3A83-67923 33,700 pages

1Print cartridge life is approximate, based on average A4 /Letter-size page count with ISO coverage.
Declared cartridge yield value in accordance with ISO/IEC 19798. Actual yields vary considerably based
on images printed and other factors. For more information, visit www.hp.com/go/learnaboutsupplies.

NOTE: Depending on the print pattern and job mode used, the lifespan of the consumable can vary.

IMPORTANT: Toner cartridges or other supplies must be purchased in the same country/region as
the printer being used. Otherwise, new toner cartridges or other supplies will be incompatible with the
printer. This is due to differing configurations of toner cartridges and other supplies according to the
conditions of a specific country/region.

Maintenance parts
Learn about the printer maintenance parts.

HP recommends replacing the following maintenance parts at specific intervals to make sure the printer
produces quality copies and to extend the service life of the printer.

Some of the printer parts have a shorter lifespan than the life of the printer.

Maintenance parts 29
 Table 1-13 Maintenance parts

Item Product number Life

HP Managed LJ Imaging Drum X3A83-67905 (for E77822, E77825, 135,000 pages

E77830)

W9215-67901 (for E78323, E78325,

E78330)

HP Managed LJ Toner Collection Unit X3A83-67923 33,700 pages

HP LaserJet Cyan Developer Unit JC96-11665A (for E77822, E77825, 300,000 pages
E77830)

8JM71-67001 (for E78323, E78325,

E78330)

HP LaserJet Magenta Developer Unit JC96-11664A (for E77822, E77825, 300,000 pages
E77830)

8JM73-67001 (for E78323, E78325,

E78330)

HP LaserJet Yellow Developer Unit JC96-11663A (for E77822, E77825, 300,000 pages
E77830)

8JM72-67001 (for E78323, E78325,

E78330)

HP LaserJet Black Developer Unit JC96-11666A (for E77822, E77825, 300,000 pages
E77830)

8JM70-67001 (for E78323, E78325,

E78330)

HP LaserJet 110V Fuser Assembly JC82-00472A (for E77822, E77825, 250,000 pages
E77830)

Z7Y77-67002 (for E78323, E78325,

E78330)

HP LaserJet 220V Fuser Assembly JC82-00485A (for E77822, E77825, 250,000 pages
E77830)

Z9M03-67002 (for E78323, E78325,

E78330)

HP LaserJet Image Transfer Cleaner JC96-06246A (for E77822, E77825, 150,000 pages
E77830)
GEMs 1.2 : 200,000 pages
5PN64-67001 (for E78323, E78325,
E78330)

HP LaserJet image transfer belt (ITB) JC98-00980D (for E77822, E77825, GEMs 1.0 : 300,000 pages
E77830)
GEMs 1.2 : 400,000 pages
5PN63-67001 (for E78323, E78325,
E78330)

HP LaserJet Transfer Roller (T2) JC95-02274A (for E77822, E77825, GEMs 1.0 : 150,000 pages
E77830)
GEMs 1.2 : 200,000 pages
5QJ90-61041 (for E78323, E78325,
E78330)

HP LaserJet Trays 2-x Rollers JC93-00540A 200,000 pages

HP LaserJet Tray 1 Roller JC93-00540B 200,000 pages

30 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

Table 1-13 Maintenance parts (continued)

Item Product number Life

Flow ADF pick roller assembly(GX and Z8W50A 200,000 pages

sGX z models)

ADF pick roller assembly(LX dn models) Z7Y64A 200,000 pages

ADF reverse(separation) roller Z7Y65A 100,000 pages

assembly(LX dn models)

Flow ADF reverse(separation) roller Z8W51A 200,000 pages

assembly(GX and sGX z models)

NOTE: Depending on print patterns and the job mode used, maintenance part lifespans vary.

Table 1-14 Maintenance intervals

Device Item 100K 200K PM Note

Paper Path—Set (PH) Pickup Roller Replace Clean Use a damp cloth or lint-free paper
(Tray1(MP)) moistened with water to clean
maintenance parts.

Paper Path—Set (PH) Forward Roller Replace Clean Use a damp cloth or lint-free paper
(Tray1(MP)) moistened with water to clean
maintenance parts.

Paper Path—Set (PH) Retard Roller Replace Clean Use a damp cloth or lint-free paper
(Tray1(MP)) moistened with water to clean
maintenance parts.

Paper Path—Set (PH) Pickup Roller (Tray2,3) Replace Clean Use a damp cloth or lint-free paper
moistened with water to clean
maintenance parts.

Paper Path—Set (PH) Forward Roller (Tray2,3) Replace Clean Use a damp cloth or lint-free paper
moistened with water to clean
maintenance parts.

Paper Path—Set (PH) Retard Roller (Tray2,3) Replace Clean Use a damp cloth or lint-free paper
moistened with water to clean
maintenance parts.

Paper Path—Set (PH) Feed Roller (1,2) Clean Use a damp cloth or lint-free paper
moistened with water to clean
maintenance parts.

Paper Path—Set (PH) Regi Roller Clean Use a damp cloth or lint-free paper
moistened with water to clean
maintenance parts.

Paper Path—Set (PH) Feed Sensor (1,2) Clean Use dry cloth to remove toner and
paper dust.

Paper Path—Set (PH) Regi Sensor Clean Use dry cloth to remove toner and
paper dust.

Paper Path—Set (PH) Paper dust brush Clean Use dry cloth to remove toner and
paper dust.

Paper Path—DCF/HCI/ Pickup Roller (Tray4,5) Replace Clean Use a damp cloth or lint-free paper
sHCI moistened with water to clean
maintenance parts.

Maintenance parts 31
 Table 1-14 Maintenance intervals (continued)

Device Item 100K 200K PM Note

Paper Path—DCF/HCI/ Forward Roller (Tray4,5) Replace Clean Use a damp cloth or lint-free paper
sHCI moistened with water to clean
maintenance parts.

Paper Path—DCF/HCI/ Retard Roller (Tray4,5) Replace Clean Use a damp cloth or lint-free paper
sHCI moistened with water to clean
maintenance parts.

Paper Path—DCF/HCI/ Feed Sensor (3,4) Clean Use dry cloth to remove toner and
sHCI paper dust.

Paper Path—Finisher Finisher Paddle Roller Clean Use a damp cloth or lint-free paper
moistened with water to clean
maintenance parts.

Paper Path—Finisher Booklet Paddle Roller Clean Use a damp cloth or lint-free paper
moistened with water to clean
maintenance parts.

Paper Path—Finisher Ejector Reverse Roller Clean Use a damp cloth or lint-free paper
moistened with water to clean
maintenance parts.

Paper Path—Finisher Tamper Base Clean Use a damp cloth or lint-free paper
moistened with water to clean
maintenance parts.

Paper Path—Finisher Ejector Base Clean Use a damp cloth or lint-free paper
moistened with water to clean
maintenance parts.

Paper Path—Finisher Feeding Roller Clean Use a damp cloth or lint-free paper
moistened with water to clean
maintenance parts.

Paper Path—Finisher Punch Chad Bin Clean Empty the chad bin.

Paper Path—Finisher Feed Sensor Clean Use dry cloth to remove toner and
paper dust.

Paper Path—Finisher Ejector Sensor (2K/3K Clean Use dry cloth to remove toner and
Finisher) paper dust.

Paper Path—Finisher End fence Sensor Clean Use dry cloth to remove toner and
(Inner Finisher) paper dust.

Scanner—ADF ADF Pick-Up roller Replace Clean Use a damp cloth or lint-free paper
Assembly moistened with water to clean
maintenance parts.

Scanner—ADF ADF Separation roller Replace Clean Use a damp cloth or lint-free paper
Assembly (Gx - z moistened with water to clean
bundle) maintenance parts.

Scanner—ADF ADF Separation roller Replace Clean Use a damp cloth or lint-free paper
Assembly (Lx - dn, du) moistened with water to clean
maintenance parts.

Scanner—ADF White sheet / White Clean Use a damp cloth or lint-free paper
sponge / Feed roller moistened with water to clean
maintenance parts.

Perform maintenance tasks as needed during a service visit for parts replacement.

32 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

Optional
Learn about the printer optional parts.

Table 1-15 Optional list

Item Model E77830 E77825 E77822 E78330 E78325 E78323

HP LaserJet Y1F97A Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Dual
Cassette
Workgroup
Feeder

HP LaserJet Y1G17A Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Workgroup
Cabinet

HP LaserJet Y1F99A Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

2000 Sheet
High
Capacity Tray
WG

HP LaserJet Y1G00A Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Inner Finisher

HP LaserJet Y1G07A Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Booklet
Finisher

HP LaserJet Y1G15A Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Job
Separator
WG

HP LaserJet Y1G14A Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Stapler/
Stacker
Finisher
Staples

HP LaserJet Y1G13A Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Inner/Booklet
Finisher
Staples

HP LaserJet Y1G02A Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Inner Finisher
Hole 2/3
Punch

HP LaserJet Y1G03A Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Inner Finisher
Hole 2/4
Punch

HP LaserJet Y1G04A Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Inner Finisher
Swedish
Punch

HP LaserJet Y1G10A Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Hole Punch
2/3
Accessory

Optional 33
 Table 1-15 Optional list (continued)

Item Model E77830 E77825 E77822 E78330 E78325 E78323

HP LaserJet Y1G11A Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Hole Punch
2/4
Accessory

HP LaserJet Y1G12A Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Hole Punch
Swedish
Accessory

HP LaserJet Y1G22A Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Paper Tray
Heaters WG

HP LaserJet Y1G22A#BGJ Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Paper Tray
Heaters
Accessory
WG 110V

HP LaserJet Y1G22A#B19 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Paper Tray
Heaters
Accessory
WG 220V

HP Second Y1G23A Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Exit1

1Required to attach an external finisher and installing an inner finisher.

Feeding system
Learn about the feeding system.

Feeding system overview

Learn about the feeding system overview.

The feeding system picks up paper from the cassette or Tray 1 and moves it to the printing mechanism
inside the printer. The feeding system consists of the pickup unit, registration unit, transfer roller
assembly, and exit unit.

34 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

 Figure 1-5 Feeding system overview

Main components and functions

Learn about main components and their functions.

Rollers
Learn about the rollers.

Main components and functions 35

 Figure 1-6 Rollers

Table 1-16

Callout Description Callout Description

1 Tray 2 12 Tray 4 paper path rollers

2 Tray 3 13 Tray 5 paper path rollers

3 Tray 4 (optional) 14 Sensor registration

4 Tray 5 (optional 15 Roller registration

5 Tray 2 pick/separation/feed rollers 16 Roller transfer

6 Tray 3 pick/separation/feed rollers 17 Roller output 1st

7 Tray 4 pick/separation/feed rollers 18 Roller output 2nd

36 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

 Table 1-16 (continued)

Callout Description Callout Description

8 Tray 5 pick/separation/feed rollers 19 Roller invert

9 Tray 1 pick/separation/feed rollers 20 Roller duplex 1

10 Tray 2 paper path rollers 21 Roller duplex 2

11 Tray 3 paper path rollers

● Pickup roller (Tray 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5)

– This roller picks up the paper from the tray.

● Feed roller (Tray 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5)

– This roller is placed against the reverse roller. It transfers the paper from the pickup roller to the
feed roller.

● Separation roller (Tray 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5)

– This roller is placed against the feed roller and transfers only one sheet of paper to the feed
roller. When two or more sheets of paper are being transferred from the pickup roller, the load of
the torque limiter of the reverse roller is heavier than the frictional force between the sheets of
paper. As a result, the reverse roller is stopped and the lower sheet of paper is not transferred.

● Feed roller

– This roller transfers the paper came from the forward/separation roller to the registration roller.

● Registration roller

– This roller aligns the leading edge of the paper and transfers the paper to the transfer roller
assembly.

Sensor, motor, and solenoid

Learn about the sensor, motor, and solenoid.

Sensor, motor, and solenoid 37

 Figure 1-7 Sensor, motor, and solenoid

5SBZ

1JDLVQ
TPMFOPJE

5SBZ

Cassette
Learn about the cassette.

The tray stores paper. The paper size is set using the guides in each tray.

38 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

 Figure 1-8 Basic cassette

Table 1-17

Item Description

1 Structure: Drawer Type

2 Capacity: 520 sheets (80 g/m² paper standard)

3 Paper type

NOTE: Tray 2 does not support A3 or 11 x 17 paper.

4 Paper weight

● Plain paper: 60–220 g/m²

5 Plate knock up lift type: Lift Motor + Up Limit Sensor

Pickup Assembly
Learn about the pickup assembly.

When paper pickup occurs, the pickup roller moves down in order to come in contact with the surface of
the paper. If the cassette is installed, the LEVER-INPUT CST is pushed and the pickup roller moves down.
The feed and separation rollers make sure that a single sheet of paper is moved into the paper path, and
that the feed roller moves the paper as far as the registration (REGI) roller.

NOTE: The pickup unit 1 and pickup unit 2 are not interchangeable.

Pickup Assembly 39
 Figure 1-9 Pickup unit 1

Figure 1-10 Pickup unit 2

Registration assembly
Learn about the registration assembly.

The registration roller is driven by the registration/multipurpose motor.

The registration roller clutch is located between the registration/Tray 1 motor and registration roller, or on
the transfer belt (for color), and it controls power to the registration roller in order to match paper and an
image on the drum at the predetermined registration point.

Figure 1-11 Registration roller

40 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

Tray 1 (MP) feed assembly
Learn about the Tray 1 feed assembly.

The Tray 1 feed assembly allows feeding of special media cardstock and custom size paper.

Figure 1-12 Tray 1 feeder assembly

Specification

● Capacity: 100 sheets (80g/m² / 21 lb paper standard)

● Media size: 297mm x 432 mm – 98 mm x 148 mm (11.7 in x 17 in – 3.87 in x 5.8 in)

● Media weight: Plain paper 60 – 176 g/m²

● Feeding speed: 30 ppm (E77430/78330), 25 ppm (E77425/78325), 22 ppm (E77422), 23 ppm (E78323)
Letter/A4 LEF (Long Edge Feeding)

Paper separation

Figure 1-13 Paper separation

When the Tray 1 paper detection [A] sensor detects paper and the machine gets a Tray 1 printing job, the
Tray 1 solenoid [B] drops the pickup roller [C] onto the top of the paper stack in Tray 1.

Tray 1 (MP) feed assembly 41

 This machine uses a Feed and Separation Roller (FSR) system for feeding paper. The friction between
the separation roller [D] and feed roller [E] separates the top sheet of paper from the stack.

Image creation
Learn about image creation.

Printing process overview

Learn about the printing process overview.

This printer uses four imaging units and four lasers for color printing. Each imaging unit consists of a
drum unit and a developer unit.

The drum unit has an OPC drum, charge roller, cleaning roller, and cleaning blade.

Figure 1-14 Printing process overview

The OPC drum (A) is charged with a negative voltage and is exposed by the light from the laser scanning
assembly (B).

The light produced by the laser creates a latent image by discharging on the surface of the OPC drum.
The negatively charged toner is attracted to the latent drum image due to an electric field. The toner
(real image) on each OPC drum is moved to the image transfer belt (ITB) (C) by the positive bias applied
to the first transfer roller. All four toners (color image) are transferred to the paper by a positive charge
applied to the second transfer roller (D).

1. OPC drum charge: The charge roller gives the drum a negative charge.

2. Laser exposure: Light produced by a laser diode hits the charged OPC through the lens and mirrors.

3. Development: The developing roller carries negatively charged toner to the latent image on the
drum surface. This printer uses four independent drum and development units (one for each color).

4. Transfer:

● Image transfer: The first transfer roller opposite the OPC drums transfer toner from the drums
to the ITB. Four toner images are super-imposed onto the belt.

● Paper transfer: The second transfer roller transfers the toner from the ITB to the media.

42 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

 5. Cleaning the OPC drum: The cleaning brush and blade remove remaining toner on the drum surface
after image transfer to the paper.

6. Erasing for OPC drum: Erasing is done by illuminating the whole area of the drum with the laser at
the end of every job.

7. Cleaning and erasing charges on the ITB: The cleaning roller and blade clean the belt surface. The
grounding roller inside the ITB unit removes the remaining charge from the belt.

Imaging unit
Learn about the imaging unit.

Imaging unit overview

Learn about the imaging unit..

This printer uses a two-part imaging unit. It uses four color development and one paper path to increase
color printing productivity.

Each imaging unit consists of the drum unit and the developer unit. The developer units are not
interchangeable. The drum units are interchangeable. The diameter of the drum is 30 mm with a
circumference of about 94.2 mm (3.7 in).

The development gap between a drum and the corresponding magnetic roller cannot be adjusted. The
Customer-Replaceable Unit Monitor (CRUM) is the subpart of the drum unit. The CRUM stores job count
information and other data.

Figure 1-15 Imaging unit

Drum drive
Learn about the drum drive unit.

Imaging unit 43
 The color OPCs and magnetic roller are driven by each color motor. The OPC drum and magnetic roller
are powered by the coupling.

The Brushless Direct Current (BLDC) motor maintains constant speed. The speed sync for each color
depends on the BLDC motor.

Phase sync for each OPC job prints the pattern on the Intermediate Transfer Belt (ITB) and is adjusted
automatically.

Figure 1-16 Drum drive

Developer unit
Learn about the developer unit.

This printer uses a dual-component development system that has four developer units. Each new unit
contains 185 g (6.5 oz) of magnetic toner carrier.

The developer powder is supplied to the magnetic (development) roller [A] by the two mixing augers [B].
The diameter of the magnetic roller is 16 mm (0.63 in).

44 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

Each development unit has a toner carrier (TC) sensor [C]. It is used for controlling the operating range of
the toner density.

Figure 1-17 Developer unit

Developer circulation

Two mixing augers (B) circulate the developer forward and backward in order to sufficiently mix the
toner and carrier.

Developer unit 45
 Figure 1-18 Developer auger

Agitation occurs at the following times:

● During the process control self-checking (warm up)

● During toner supply job

● During development job

If the developer unit is stored above 50°C (122°F), the toner might harden and will not work properly. If the
toner in the development unit has hardened, an installation error occurs.

Dynamic security
Learn about dynamic-security-enabled printers.

Certain HP printers use cartridges that have security chips or electronic circuitry. Cartridges using a
non-HP chip or modified or non-HP circuitry* might not work. And, those that work today might not work
in the future.

As is standard in the printing business, HP has a process for authenticating cartridges. HP continues
to use security measures to protect the quality of our customer experience, maintain the integrity
of our printing systems, and protect our intellectual property. These measures include authentication
methods that change periodically and might prevent some third-party supplies from working now or in
the future. HP printers and original HP cartridges deliver the best quality, security and reliability. When
cartridges are cloned or counterfeited, the customer is exposed to quality and potential security risks,
compromising the printing experience.

*Non-HP Chips and modified or non-HP electronic circuitry are not produced or validated by HP. HP
cannot guarantee that these chips or circuitry will work in your printer now or in the future. If you are
using a non-original HP cartridge, please check with your supplier to ensure your cartridge has an
original HP security chip or unmodified HP electronic circuitry.

46 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

Intermediate transfer belt unit
Learn about the intermediate transfer belt unit.

Intermediate transfer belt overview

Learn about the intermediate transfer belt (ITB).

The toner on the four drums is transferred to the intermediate transfer belt (ITB) by the first transfer
roller

The image overlapped by four colors is transferred to the paper by the second transfer roller. The
remaining toners are removed by the cleaning blade and transferred to the toner collection unit.

This process is completed with one rotation of the ITB. The arrow above the C and M drums on the
following diagram shows the direction of the ITB rotation. The ITB is rotated by friction between the drive
roller and the ITB. The tension roller provides tension to prevent slipping.

There are three color plane registration (CPR) sensors and one photo sensor. Two CPR sensors are for
line position adjustment and one is for process control. The photo sensor monitors the position of the
first transfer rollers.

Figure 1-19 Intermediate transfer belt

Table 1-18 Intermediate transfer belt components

Item Description

1 Intermediate transfer belt (ITB)

2 First transfer roller

3 ITB drive roller

4 Tension roller

5 Photo sensor

6 Cleaning blade

7 Color plane registration (CPR) sensor

8 Second transfer roller

9 Toner collection auger

10 Drum unit

Intermediate transfer belt unit 47

 Transfer belt drive
Learn about the transfer belt drive.

The drive motor (A) drives the ITB (B) by using gears and the ITB drive roller (C).

The ITB (B) and black OPC (D) is synchronized by the drive motor (A).

Figure 1-20 Transfer belt drive

Cleaning blade
Learn about the transfer belt cleaning blade.

The intermediate transfer belt (ITB) cleaner removes toner during printing. Belt cleaning is completed
while the ITB makes one rotation. The ITB drive motor drives the ITB cleaning motor.

The cleaning blade (A) in the ITB cleaner always contacts the ITB (B). The cleaning blade removes the
used toner from the ITB. The toner collection auger (C) transfers the waste toner to the toner collection
unit.

The seal (D) on the ITB cleaner protects against toner contamination. The driving power by the driver
roller is transferred to the tension roller (E). The toner collection auger gear (F) drives the gear (G) and
collects the toner

48 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

 Figure 1-21 Cleaning blade

Fuser unit
Learn about the fuser unit.

Fuser unit overview

Learn about the fuser unit.

This section describes the image fusing process used by the printer.

This unit fuses the toner that was transferred by the transfer roller onto the paper by applying heat and
pressure. The printer uses an instant fusing belt which has a faster warm-up time than a conventional
fusing and pressure roller system.

Fuser unit 49
 Figure 1-22 Fuser unit

● Lamp halogen

The fuser unit has two halogen lamps. One lamp heats the center of the fusing belt, and the other
lamp heats the end of axial direction. The halogen lamps are lit alternately to heat the fusing belt.
Each lamp has its coil in a different location. The coil of the center heater lamp is in the center. The
coils of the side heater lamp are located on both sides. The lamps are fixed inside of the fusing belt.
The lamps do not rotate when the fusing belt rotates.

● Fusing Belt

The fusing belt receives heat from the halogen lamp and transfers it to the toner and paper. The
fusing belt consists of three thin layers. The thin fusing belt reduces time needed to warm up and
change modes. To prevent the fusing belt from adhering to the toner, the surface of the fusing belt is
lubricated. There is a nip inside the fusing belt. A spring is used to maintain the proper nip between
the fusing belt and pressure roller.

● Pressure Roller

The pressure roller is made of rubber, which ensures proper nip width between the pressure roller
and the fusing belt. The pressure roller is powered by the drive system and drives the fusing belt.

● Non-Contact (NC) Sensor

NC sensors (non-contact type thermistors) are located near the center and the end of the fusing
belt and monitor the temperature of the fusing belt.

● Thermostats

The thermostats cuts off the power supply to the halogen lamp by opening the circuit when the
heat roller becomes abnormally hot as a result of problems such as a NC sensor malfunction. The
thermostats are used to prevent abnormal operation. When the thermostat is tripped, it cannot be
reset and must be replaced (as well as the other damaged parts in the fuser unit).

50 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

Fuser unit drive
Learn about the fuser unit drive.

The fuser motor (A) drives the pressure roller (B) through the gear train. The fuser belt is driven by the
pressure roller.

Figure 1-23 Fuser drive

Fuser unit temperature control

Learn about fuser temperature control.

When the main switch turns on, the CPU turns on the fusing lamp. The lamp stays on until the NC
sensors detect the standby temperature. The CPU then raises the temperature up to the printing
temperature.

Fuser unit drive 51

 Figure 1-24 Fuser unit temperature control

Overheat protection
The CPU cuts power to the fusing lamp in the following cases :

● The temperature detected by the NC sensor stays higher than 240°C (464°F) for 20 seconds

The following components are used when thermistor overheat protection fails:

● Two thermostats get into line with the common ground wire of the fusing lamp.

● If one of the thermostat temperatures becomes higher than 195°C (383°F), power is turned off to the
fusing lamp. If the other thermostat temperature becomes higher than 195°C (383°F), it also turns
the power off to the fusing lamp.

Loop control
Learn about fuser loop control.

The tension of the paper between the OPC nip and the fuser nip is known as the paper loop level.

52 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

 Figure 1-25 Loop control

The paper loop level is controlled by monitoring photo sensors 1 and 2. The fuser unit controls the motor
speed for the paper loop level.

Laser scanner unit

Learn about the laser scanner unit.

Laser scanner assembly overview

Learn about the laser scanner assembly.

The laser scanner assembly consists of one polygon motor and four laser diodes (LD) units. The Laser
scanner assembly forms a latent image on the surface of four OPC drums. For this process, the laser
scanner assembly has a collimator lens, cylindrical lens, two F-Theta lenses, and two reflective mirrors
on an optical path for each color.

This laser scanner assembly uses the cross scan type scanning. K Color and C Color scan the laser
from the rear to the front. M Color and Y Color scan the laser from the front to the rear.

The laser scanner assembly has a skew adjustment function which adjusts the scanning line. An
automatic shutter is used to clean and protect the glass on the laser scanner assembly.

Laser scanner unit 53

 Figure 1-26 Laser scanner assembly overview

Table 1-19 Laser scanner assembly overview

Item Description

1 LD PCA

2 P/Mirror Motor

3 F1 Lens

4 F2 Lens

5 Skew adjust assembly

6 Shutter

7 PD PCA

Laser scanning optical path

Learn about the laser scanning optical path.

The laser from the laser scanner assembly is placed at intervals of 78 mm for each color. All colors use
the same polygon motor for oblique incidence.

54 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

 The F2 lens (A) determines the slope of the primary scanning line and the image position of the
secondary scanning direction. This setting is adjusted by the manufacturer. The primary scanning line
slope difference is adjusted by the skew adjustment in the laser scanner assembly.

Reflective mirrors (B) on each color path adjust the curvature of primary scanning. This setting is
adjusted by the manufacturer.

Figure 1-27 Laser scanning optical path

Item Specification Remark

LD Unit Laser Diode: Quad Beam LD x 4 (for each color)

Driving IC: Dual LD X 8

P/Motor Speed ● E77822: 22,087 rpm

● E77825: 27,520 rpm

● E77830: 33,071 rpm

Speed ● E77822: 187 mm/s

● E77825: 233 mm/s

● E77830: 280 mm/s

H/W interface Interface with printer: 50 pin + 60 pin + 8 pin FFC + FFC + Wire

Laser synchronizing detectors

Learn about laser synchronizing detectors.

The laser scanner assembly has two beam detector sensor boards (PD PBA includes four sensors). The
PD PBAs are located at each corner of the laser optics housing unit.

The beam is detected by the PD PCA at the scanning start point and creates the horizontal sync signal
(Hsync).

The two PD PBAs detect the following:

● (A, B): Scanning start position for K, C

● (C, D): Scanning start position for M, Y

Laser synchronizing detectors 55

 Figure 1-28 Laser synchronizing detectors

Main scan start detection

The PD PBAs detect four beams at the scanning start point and create the horizontal sync (Hsync)
signal. Data is scanned by Hsync.

The arrow in the previous diagram shows the data scanning direction for each color. Black/Cyan and
Yellow/Magenta use the same polygon motor scanning in opposite directions.

Automatic CPR adjustment

Learn about automatic CPR adjustment.

During automatic CPR adjustment, the line patterns below are created eight times on the intermediate
transfer belt (ITB). The spaces between the lines (KK, CC, MM, YY, KC, KM, KY) are measured by the front,
center, and rear CPR sensors.

The controller takes the average of the spaces and then adjusts the following positions and
magnification:

● Sub scan line position for CMY

● Main scan line position for CMY

● Magnification ratio for CMY

56 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

● Skew for CMY

● KK, CC, MM, YY: Spaces between two lines of the same color.

● KC, KM, KY: Spaces between a black line and each color line.

NOTE: The ITB cleaning unit cleans the ITB after the patterns are measured.

Figure 1-29 Automatic CPR adjustment

Adjustment
● Sub Scan line position for CMY

The adjustment of the sub scan line position for CMY is based on the line position for K (black). The
printer measures the gaps between the lines of each color in the pattern on the ITB. When the gaps
for a color are incorrect, the printer moves the image of the color up or down the sub scan axis. To
do this, it changes the laser write timing for that color.

● Main Scan line position for CMY

When the printer detects that the image is out of position in the main scan direction, it changes the
laser write start timing for each scan line.

● Magnification Adjustment for CMY

Automatic CPR adjustment 57

 When the printer detects that magnification adjustment is necessary, it changes the LD clock
frequency for the required color.

● Skew for CMY

The adjustment of the skew for CMY is based on the line position for K (black).

Adjustment Conditions
Line position adjustment can be turned on or off. However, it is normally recommended to turn on this
function.

Line position adjustment timing depends on several settings. These settings include the following:

● ΔT = Temperature change of the laser scanner assembly between the temperature of the previous
line position adjustment and the current temperature.

● Pages = Total printed pages after previous line position adjustment.

Interval during print job

Line position adjustment interrupts printing and then starts automatically when one of these conditions
occurs when the printer checks at the sheet interval:

● ΔT > Temperature threshold (laser scanner assembly temperature: default 3°C (37.4°F)

● Pages > Output threshold for all outputs (default: 500 pages)

Toner collection unit not-installed/installed

● Line position adjustment starts automatically when toner collection unit is removed and reinstalled.

Drum unit or developer unit replaced

● When the printer detects a new drum unit or developer unit, line position adjustment is automatically
performed.

ITB replaced
● When the printer detects a new ITB or other ITB, field technicians have to execute the adjustment
manually.

Main scan skew adjustment

The skew adjustment assembly (A) consists of the worm gear (1) for adjustment and worm gear (2). When
Color Plane Registration (CPR) executes, it detects and adjusts the scanning line slope manually.

The skew adjustment assembly (A) for magenta, cyan, and yellow adjusts the skew angle of the F2 lens
(B). This mechanism corrects main scan skew.

58 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

 Figure 1-30 Main scan skew adjustment

Drive system
Learn about the drive system.

Drive motors
Learn about the drive motors.

The following diagram shows the location of the printer drive motors.

Drive system 59
 Figure 1-31 Drive motors

Number Motor Motor type Qty Function

1 Exit PM-STEP 1 Exit drive

(Reverse drive at duplex job)

2 Fuser BLDC 1 Fuser drive/Fuser pressure

mode

(Reverse drive at pressure

mode)

3 Registration (Regi)/ BLDC 1 Registration (Regi)/Tray 1

Tray 1 drive

3 Registration (Regi)/ E-CLT 2 Registration (Regi)/Tray 1

Tray 1 drive control

4 Feed HB-STEP (Hybrid) 1 Feed 1/2 roll drive

Stepper motor

5 Tray 2 and 3 Pickup PM-STEP (Permanent 2 Pickup roller/tray lift drive

Magnet) Stepper
Motor

6 Toner supply DC 4 Toner transfer in toner

cartridge drive duct

7 OPC/DEVE BLDC 4 OPC/DEVE drive

8 ITB BLDC 1 ITB drive

60 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

 Number Motor Motor type Qty Function

9 Transfer roller Dis/En PM-STEP 1 Transfer roller Dis/Engage

10 Toner collection unit PM-STEP 1 Toner collection unit leveling

Main drive unit (OPC/DEVE/ITB/Transfer Roller/Disengage/Engage motors)

Learn about the main drive unit.

The following diagram shows details of the printer main drive unit.

Figure 1-32 Main drive unit—front view

Figure 1-33 Main drive unit—rear view

Pickup Drive
Learn about the pickup drive.

Main drive unit (OPC/DEVE/ITB/Transfer Roller/Disengage/Engage motors) 61

 Figure 1-34 Pickup drive

Power train

Pickup: rotating (pickup/input)/counter rotating (tray lift input)

● Step → Forward rotation → Gear 1 → Gear 2 (pickup)

● Step → Reverse rotation → Gear 1 → Gear 3 → Gear 4 → Gear 5 → Gear 6 (tray lift)

Registration (Regi)/Tray 1 drive

Learn about the registration / Tray 1drive.

The following diagram shows the drives that power the registration (Regi)/Tray 1 systems.

62 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

 Figure 1-35 Registration (Regi)/Tray 1 drive

Power Train

Registration (Regi)/Tray 1: BLDC motor drive, clutch drive control

● 1 BLDC motor → 2 gear → 3 gear → 4 clutch/gear (registration (Regi) drive)

● 1 BLDC motor → 2 gear → 5 gear → 6 gear → 7 clutch/gear (Tray 1 drive)

Feed drive
Learn about the feed drive.

The following diagram shows the feed drive components.

Feed drive 63
 Figure 1-36 Feed drive

Power Train

Feed: HB-STEP drive

● 1 HB-STEP motor → 2 gear → 3 gear (feed 1 drive)

● 1 HB-STEP motor → 2 gear → 4 gear (feed 2 drive)

Fuser/Exit Drive
Learn about the fuser/exit drive.

64 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

 Figure 1-37 Fuser/exit drive

Power Train

Fuser: BLDC motor drive

Exit: Step motor drive

Fuser and fuser release: One-way gear is used

● 1 BLDC Motor → counterclockwise rotation (CCW) → 2 clockwise rotations (CW) → 3 (CW) (Fuser
drive)

● 1 BLDC Motor → 1 clockwise rotation (CW) → 4 (CCW) → 5 (CW) → 6 (CW) (Fuser release drive)

● 7 Step Motor →8 RDCN Exit (Exit drive)

Toner collection unit drive

Learn about the toner collection unit drive.

The following diagram shows the toner collection unit (TCU) drive components.

Toner collection unit drive 65

 Figure 1-38 TCU drive

Power Train

Step motor and Gear-DCN TCU: Toner collection unit drive

● 1 PM step motor → 2 gear- TCU (toner collection unit drive)

Toner supply drive

Learn about the toner supply drive.

Figure 1-39 Toner supply drive

Power Train

DUCT and cartridge drive

● 1 DC motor → 2 gear supply → 5 gear DUCT (DUCT drive)

● 1 DC motor → 2 gear supply → 3 gear supply idle → 4 gear supply (cartridge drive)

Flatbed Scanner System

Learn about the flatbed scanner system.

66 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

Flatbed scanner system overview
Learn about the flatbed scanner system.

The scanner converts a hard copy original into data. To scan an original, the scanner uses the lens and
Charge Coupled Device (CCD). The scanner stores and transfers the converted image to the storage
space or transfers the scanned data to the printer engine for copy.

For scan operation, the scanner uses a full rate (FR) carriage and a half rate (HR) carriage that is moved
by a wire. It scans the original document on the scanner glass or from the ADF.

The scanner system consists of the three following modules:

● Full Rate (FR) carriage: Illuminates the original and reflects the light at a 90 degree angle.

● Half Rate (HR) carriage: Transfers the reflected light from the FR carriage to the lens.

● Imaging lens: Makes an image on the CCD.

The HR carriage moves half the distance at half the speed of the FR carriage. This keeps a regular gap
between the original and the imaging lens.

Figure 1-40 Scanner system overview

Scan process description

Learn about the scan process description.

Flatbed scanner system overview 67

 1. The FR carriage lamp illuminates the original. The reflected light is moved to Mirror #1.

2. The reflected light from Mirror #1 is sent to the imaging lens through Mirror #2 and #3.

3. The light becomes smaller and makes an optical image.

4. The optical image is generated to the electrical signal by the CCD sensor.

To make a stable image, a gap must be maintained between the original and the lens. To maintain this
gap, the HR carriage moves half the distance and half the speed of the FR carriage.

Figure 1-41 Scan process

The optical image made by the CCD sensor is changed to an electrical-analog signal.

Each color element signal in the optical image is separated by the CCD sensor into red, green, and blue.

The red CCD sensor extracts the red color from the optical image, the green CCD sensor extracts the
green color from the optical image, and the blue CCD sensor extracts the blue color from the optical
image.

68 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

 The analog image signal is changed to a digital image signal by the A/D converter and is transferred to
the processor.

The image scan of the main scanning direction is performed by the CCD sensor. The CCD sensor
consists of approximately 7500 pixels. The image scan of the sub scanning direction is performed by the
FR carriage and HR carriage. The carriage is moved by a wire driven by the scan motor.

Scan resolution is 600 dpi.

Figure 1-42 Image processing

Scanning system components

The following shows the construction and purpose of the scanning system.

To scan the original on the scanner glass, two carriages driven by the motor move at a regular speed.
The motor drives the timing belt, pulley, and wire. The wire pulley rolls and releases the wire to move the
carriage.

The scanner consists of the scanner glass, FR carriage, HR carriage, imaging unit, and driving unit.

Scanning system components 69

 Figure 1-43 Scanning system components

● FR Carriage

70 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

Figure 1-44 FR carriage

– LED lamp module

This module illuminates the original. Two white LEDs are assembled on the side of the module.
The original is illuminated by the light-guide. The heat sink is attached to the LED PCB. When the
heat sink is broken or expired, an engineer needs to replace it.

○ Light-guide

The light-guide changes the light from point type to line type. The light-guide is made by
transparent resin and controls the amount of light in the scan area uniformly.

○ White LED

The white LED emits white light. The heat sink attached to the PCA prevents heat
deterioration.

○ Reflection holder

The reflection holder reflects the light that has passed through the light-guide.

– Mirror #1

Mirror #1 reflects light at a 90 degree angle.

Scanning system components 71

 HR Carriage (mirror unit)

Figure 1-45 HR carriage

● Mirror #2 and #3

Mirrors #2 and #3 are positioned at a 45 degree angle in order to change the direction of the light.
The reflected light from mirror #1 is sent to the imaging lens through mirrors #2 and #3.

● Pulley

The pulley is a ball bearing type. The pulley rolls and releases the wire which makes the HR carriage
move. The HR carriage moves half the distance at half the speed of the FR carriage.

Imaging unit

The imaging unit changes the optical image to an electrical signal.

Figure 1-46 Imaging unit

● Imaging lens

The reflected light from the imaging lens is focused on the CCD. The image is reduced to the fixed
CCD sensor and pixel size.

● CCD PCA

72 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

 The image made by the imaging lens is changed to an electrical signal by the CCD. The CCD
consists of three channel line sensors for image creation. The brightness and darkness of the
image depends on the voltage level from the CCD. The output voltage is changed to a digital signal.
The digital signal makes the scanned image.

Wire driving

To move the carriages, the wire is assembled in the front and rear of the scanner. The pulley rolls and
releases the wire which moves the FR carriage and the HR carriage.

Figure 1-47 Wire driving

Scanning system components 73

 Scanner glass (flatbed glass)

The original is placed on the scanner glass for scan or copy jobs. The scanner glass is made of
tempered glass and is held in place by the frame to prevent distortion.

Drive motor

The scanner drive system uses the step motor to move the carriage. The step motor controls the
position and maintains constant speed. The motor power is transferred to the wire through the timing
belt and pulley.

Timing belt

The timing belt has a regular saw tooth gear and transfers the motor power to the pulley.

Figure 1-48 Timing belt

Paper size sensor

The paper size sensor automatically detects the size of the original on the scanner glass. The paper size
sensor uses two sensors. An infrared LED is used to detect the dark original.

Home sensor

The home sensor detects the FR carriage position. The home sensor is a transmission photo sensor.

Cover open sensor #1

When the ADF unit opens and closes, a function is triggered which detects whether the paper size
sensor is on or off.

Cover open sensor #2

The cover open sensor #2 detects when the ADF unit is closed using magnetic force.

74 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

 ADF glass

Scanner read the original feed from ADF unit through ADF glass. The FR carriage read the original as it
passes on ADF glass. If ADF glass is contaminated.

Shading sheet

The shading sheet is attached under flat-bed glass. Before every scan job, scanner read the shading
sheet to get reference image with same optical conditions. If shading sheet is contaminated, a vertical
line might occur on scan image.

Figure 1-49 Shading sheet

Caution for moving the scanner

Learn about cautions when moving the scanner.

When shipping or moving the printer, the FR and HR carriages in the scanner must be secured with a
scan locking screw to prevent movement of these parts and possible damage to the scanner

This screw must be installed before moving the printer and then removed once the printer is positioned
in place.

When installing

After unpacking, before turning on the printer, the scan locking screw must be removed. If the locking
screw is not removed scanner failure will occur.

1. When installing the printer, remove the scan locking screw.

2. After removing the screw, assemble the screw cap from the accessory package.

Caution for moving the scanner 75

 Figure 1-50 Remove scan locking screw

When moving the printer

When moving the printer, tighten the scan locking screw to prevent damage to the carriages.

1. Make sure the FR carriage is located in the end of scanner side wall which is screw locked.

2. Remove the screw cap.

3. Tighten the M3x8 screw to secure the FR carriage.

Figure 1-51 Tighten scan locking screw

Document feeder LX (dn models)

Learn about the document feeder LX (dn models).

Document feeder LX overview

Learn about the document feeder LX.

76 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

 Figure 1-52 Document feeder LX overview
R6 R5 R4 R3 R2 R1

R7 R8 R9 R10 R11

Table 1-20 Document feeder LX overview

Part Description Function

R1 STACKER ASSY Original paper input tray

R2 GUIDE-DOC F&R Original paper guide (front/rear)

R3 PICK ROLLER Pick up original paper from the input tray

R4 ADF ROLLER Original paper feed roller

R5 SEPARATION ROLLER Original paper separation roller

R6 REGISTRATION (REGI) ROLLER Original paper alignment roller

R7 SCAN IN ROLLER Feeds an original paper before scanning

R8 SIMPLEX WHITE-BAR Support of scanning unit

R9 SCAN OUT ROLLER Transfer a scanned original paper to the

exit roller

R10 D-CIS MODULE Back side image scan unit

R11 EXIT ROLLER Sends an original paper to the exit tray

Document feeder LX electrical parts

Learn about the document feeder LX electrical parts.

Figure 1-53 Document feeder LX electrical parts electrical parts locations

Pick~ Roller
4. Paper Length
3.Detect Pickup
2, Registra on Feed Out

Registra on 5. Paper Width

1. Cover Open
Roller
Exit Roller

6. Exit Idle
Scan In

Scan Out

Scan Scan CCD

Document feeder LX electrical parts 77

 Table 1-21 Document feeder LX electrical parts

Callout Item Function

1 Cover Open Detects if cover is open or closed

2 Registration (Regi) Sensor Detects if there is a jam on the registration path

3 Detect Sensor Detects if tray is empty

4 Paper Length Sensor Detects paper length

5 Paper Width Sensor Detects paper width

Document feeder LX registration

Learn about the document feeder LX registration.

Figure 1-54 Document feeder LX registration

Registra on Sensor
Registra on Roller

Item Document feeder LX

Registration 1 times registration

Document feeder LX drive system

Learn about the document feeder LX drive system.

The drive system consists of one motor and two clutches to transfer the paper.

78 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

 Figure 1-55 Document feeder LX drive system

Pickup Drive sec•on

Registra•on Motor sec•on

Feed Drive sec•on

The document feeder LX drive system consists of two motors (BLDC and STEP) and one clutch that
moves the paper.

● BLDC Motor > Feed and pickup

● STEP Motor > Regi

● Clutch > Pickup

There are three sections: pickup drive section, registration (regi) motor section, and feed drive section.

The pickup drive section has three assemblies: pickup drive assembly, pickup assembly, and guide
pickup assembly.

The registration motor section has the regi motor, trans gear, regi roller, regi-idle roller, regi sensor, and
actuator.

LX ADF original pickup assembly

Learn about the LX ADF original pickup assembly.

LX ADF original pickup assembly 79

 Figure 1-56 LX ADF pickup assembly
Pickup Drive sec•on

Pickup Drive Assy

Pickup Assy

Guide pickup Assy

After detecting the paper, one motor controls the drive system.

The CLUTCH-ELECTRIC provides the power to pick up the paper.

The CLUTCH cannot rotate inversely. The spring that is included in the ADF GUIDE PICKUP ASSEMBLY
is connected to COVER-OPEN. When the CLUTCH does not drive, stand-by status occurs and stops the
operation.

The ADF roller and pick roller are connected by the belt.

The ADF roller is provided with power while the paper is picked up and transferred to the registration
roller. When the pickup drive is stopped and the registration roller is driven, the ADF roller becomes idle.

The normal process is:

● When the original is setting up, the detect-sensor is activated and the printing job starts. The motor
and pickup clutch begin working. The pick roller then moves down and contacts the original in the
tray.

● When the registration sensor detects paper, the pickup clutch stops.

● When the detect-sensor detects that the tray is empty, the motor stops and the printer enters
stand-by status.

LX ADF registration (regi) drive assembly

Learn about the LX ADF registration (regi) drive assembly.

80 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

 Figure 1-57 LX ADF registration (regi) drive assembly
Registra•on Motor sec•on
istra•on(V)$)/(+'-$%)"

The registration drive uses the CLUTCH-ELECTRIC to drive the registration roller and transfer the paper
to the ROLLER FEED.

The registration roller aligns the leading edge of the original. When the original is placed in the nip, the
roller is rotated for alignment.

The CLUTCH-ELECTRIC repeats on/off to align each original.

Document feeder LX scanning position

Learn about the document feeder LX scanning position.

Document feeder LX scanning position 81

 Figure 1-58 Document feeder LX scanning position

Item Simplex Duplex

Scanning White Bar White Bar

Document feeder LX specifications

Learn about the document feeder LX specifications.

Table 1-22 Document feeder LX specification

Item Specification

Capacity 100 pages

Scan Speed 80/160 ipm

Pickup Semi-Retard

Registration 1 times registration

Motor 2 each

Stacker Not applicable

Scanning White Bar

MSO Not applicable

Flow document feeder z models (GX)

Learn about the flow document feeder z models (GX).

Flow document feeder overview

Learn about the flow document feeder.

82 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

 Figure 1-59 Flow document feeder overview
R7 R6 R5 R4 R3 R2 R1

R8 R9 R1 R11 R1 R1 R1
0 2 3 4

Table 1-23 Flow document feeder overview

Part Description Function

R1 STACKER ASSY Original paper input tray

R2 GUIDE-DOC F&R Original paper guide (front/rear)

R3 PICK ROLLER Pick up original paper from the input tray

R4 ADF ROLLER Original paper feed roller

R5 SEPARATION ROLLER Original paper separation roller

R6 FEED ROLLER Original paper transfer roller (A6 size)

R7 PRE REGI ROLLER Original paper alignment roller (1 round)

R8 REGI ROLLER Original paper alignment roller (2 round)

R9 SCAN IN ROLLER Feeds an original paper before scanning

R10 SIMPLEX WHITE-ROLLER Support of simplex scanning unit

R11 SIMPLEX SCAN OUT ROLLER Transfer a scanned original paper to the
duplex white-roller

R12 D-CIS MODULE Back side image scan unit

R13 DUPLEX SCAN OUT ROLLER Transfer a scanned original paper to the
exit roller

R14 EXIT ROLLER Sends an original paper to the exit tray

Flow document feeder sensors

Learn about the flow document feeder sensors.

Flow document feeder sensors 83

 Figure 1-60 Flow document feeder sensors
10. MSO 8.Cover Open 7. Pickup Position 5. Detect Sensor 2. Paper Width

9.Pickup 1. Paper Length

Pickup Roller
11. Pre Registration
12. Registration

3.LIFT

PRE REGI PICK UP FEED separation 4.CAM RELEASE

6. POSITION
REGI
DUPLEX-SCAN OUT EXIT

Scan CIS
13. SIM Scan Idle
SIMPLEX
Scan In WHITE-R
OLLER

16. Exit

14. SIM Scan

Scan CCD
MSO Sensors 15. DUP Scan

11. Pre Registration

10. MSO

Table 1-24 Flow document feeder sensors

Callout Item Function

1 Paper Length Sensor Detects paper length

2 Paper Width Sensor Detects paper width

3 Stacker Lift Sensor Detects Stacker Position

4 Cam Release Sensor Sensing ‘Separation Roller’ rotation

5 Detect Sensor Detects if tray is empty

6 Position Sensor Detects Stacker Position

7 Pickup Position Sensor Sensing ‘Pickup Roller’ rotation

8 Cover Open Sensor Detects if cover is open or closed

9 Pickup Sensor Detects if there is a jam on the feed path

10 MSO Sensor Detects mix size

11 Pre-Regi Sensor Detects if there is a jam on the pre-regi path

12 Regi Sensor Detects if there is a jam on the Regi path

13 SIM Scan Idle Sensor Sensing ‘Scan In Roller’ rotation

14 SIM Scan Sensor Detects if there is a jam on the Scan In path

15 DUP Scan Sensor Detects if there is a jam on the Scan Out path

16 Exit Sensor Paper Exit Sensing

84 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

Flow document feeder ultra sonic multi-feed (USM) sensor
Learn about the flow document feeder ultra sonic multi-feed (USM) sensor.

Figure 1-61 Flow document feeder ultra sonic multi-feed (USM) sensor
Tx Sensor

Rx Sensor

This sensor detects multi-feeds.

● Component: Ultrasonic Sensor Tx Board, Rx Board , HIC Board (Amp and Filter)

● The Rx Sensor has a different level on each paper status: no paper, one paper, multiple papers.

● Detect the multi-feeding through the level change of Rx Sensor.

● Transmit and receive operation of 300 khz frequency.

Flow document feeder drive system

Learn about the flow document feeder drive system.

The flow document feeder drive system drive system includes eight motors.

The Flow ADF drive system consists for the following sections:

● Pickup release drive

● Pickup drive

● Pre-regi drive

● Regi drive

● Scan-in roller release drive

● Scan drive

● Exit drive

● Lift drive

Flow document feeder ultra sonic multi-feed (USM) sensor 85

 Figure 1-62 Flow document feeder drive system
Pre-Registration Drive section

Registration Drive section

Pickup Drive section Pickup Release Drive section

Scan Drive section

Lift Drive section

Scan in Roller Release Drive section

Exit Drive section

Flow document feeder lifting drive system

Learn about the flow document feeder lifting drive system.

Figure 1-63 Flow document feeder lifting drive system

● Component: LIFT MOTOR, LIFT SHAFT, LIFT BAR, PAPER SENSOR

● LIFT MOTOR Starts > LIFT SHAFT and LIFT BAR lift Tray

● PAPER SENSOR detects paper in the Tray

86 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

 ● Paper contacts PICKUP ROLLER and stops movement

● Document is passed through SCAN OUT SENSOR. Duplex scanning starts.

Flow document feeder scan-in roller release drive system

Learn about the flow document feeder scan-in roller release drive system.

Figure 1-64 Flow document feeder scan-in roller release drive system

● Holds the rear of the paper using cam motion for improved scan quality

● Component: RELEASE MOTOR, RELEASE CAM, SCAN-IN IDLE ROLLER

● Motor and cam operation repeats for every piece of paper

Flow document feeder specifications

Learn about the flow document feeder specifications.

Table 1-25 Flow document feeder specification

Item Specification

Capacity 250 pages (stacker lifting)

Scan Speed 120/240 ipm

Pickup Semi-Retard

Registration 2 times registration

Motor 8 each

Stacker Lifting

Scanning White Roller/White Bar

MSO Support

Flow document feeder scan-in roller release drive system 87

 Flow document feeder registration
Learn about the flow document feeder registration.

The flow document feeder registration uses a two-times registration process.

Figure 1-65 Flow document feeder registration

Pre Registration Roller
Registration Sensor Pre Registration Sensor

Registration
Roller

Flow document feeder scanning position

Learn about the flow document feeder scanning position.

Figure 1-66 Flow document feeder scanning position

6LPSOH[
'XSOH[

Table 1-26 Flow document feeder scanning position

Item Simplex Duplex

Scanning White Roller White Bar

88 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

Flow document feeder mixed size original (MSO) sensor
Learn about the flow document feeder mixed size original (MSO) sensor.

The MSO sensor detects the size of mixed size papers and sets the alignment of the papers to the rear.

Figure 1-67 Flow document feeder MSO 1

Figure 1-68 Flow document feeder MSO 2

Pre-Registration
MSO Sensor
Sensor

Table 1-27 Flow document feeder MSO3 (length x max width)

Length A3 SEF A4 LEF B4 SEF B5 LEF A4 SEF A5 LEF A5 LEF A5 SEF

(297 mm) (297 mm) (257 mm) (257 mm) (210 mm) (210 mm) (182 mm) (148 mm)
(11.7 in) (11.7 in) (10.1 in) (10.1 in) (8.3 in) (8.3 in) (7.2 in) (5.8 in)

A3 SEF X

(420 mm)
(16.5 in)

A4 LEF X

(210 mm)
(8.3 in)

Flow document feeder mixed size original (MSO) sensor 89

 Table 1-27 Flow document feeder MSO3 (length x max width) (continued)

Length A3 SEF A4 LEF B4 SEF B5 LEF A4 SEF A5 LEF A5 LEF A5 SEF

(297 mm) (297 mm) (257 mm) (257 mm) (210 mm) (210 mm) (182 mm) (148 mm)
(11.7 in) (11.7 in) (10.1 in) (10.1 in) (8.3 in) (8.3 in) (7.2 in) (5.8 in)

B4 SEF X X X

(363 mm)
(14.3 in)

B5 LEF X X X

(182 mm)
(7.2 in)

A4 SEF X X X X X

(297 mm)
(11.7 in)

A5 LEF X X X X X

(148 mm)
(5.8 in)

B5 SEF X X X X

(257 mm)
(10.1 in)

A5 SEF X X

(210 mm)
(8.3 in)

Flow document feeder dual sensor cleaning method

Learn about the flow document feeder dual sensor cleaning method.

● Component: LEVER GUIDE EXIT F, GUIDE-EXIT UPPER ASSEMBLY.

● Open LEVER GUIDE EXIT F.

● Cleans with a D-CIS GLASS in the direction indicated.

● Cleans the GUIDE EXIT UPPER ASSEMBLY in the direction indicated.

Figure 1-69 Flow document feeder dual sensor cleaning method (1 of 2)

3XOOWKHOHYHU

90 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

 Figure 1-70 Flow document feeder dual sensor cleaning method (2 of 2)

Flow ADF z bundles (GX)

Learn about the flow ADF z bundles (GX).

Model Engine Scanner

Platen DN-sGX Z-GX

Color 40 ppm Same at Scan USM Capacity Scan USM Capacity

whole Speed Speed
model
50 ppm 80/160 ipm X 100 sheet 120/240 O 250 sheet
ipm
60 ppm

Mono 40 ppm

50 ppm

60 ppm

Hardware configuration
Learn the functions and specifications of the hardware configuration.

The electronic circuit system consists of the following:

● Main controller (main board)

● OPE unit

● Document feeder (Flow/LX) controller

● HVPS board

Flow ADF z bundles (GX) 91

 ● LVPS board

● Fuser drive assembly

Figure 1-71 Electronic circuit diagram

The main controller handles the video controller, engine controller, and scan controller.

The main controller receives print data from the host through the network or USB port and receives
copy data from the scan controller. The main controller uses this information to generate printable video

92 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

bitmap data. It controls all modulesrequired to print, including the laser scanner assembly, HVPS, FAN,
fuser, and so on.

The main controller communicates with the drive system and other devices through Universal
Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter (UART). The main controller communicates with and checks the
life of the toner cartridge, drum, and developer units through I2C.

The main controller uses Quad Core CPU 1.5 GHz, DDR3 4 GB memory, Micro SD 4 GB, and a 500 GB
SATA HDD to control the engine driving, video signal processing, and user interface.

A MICOM controls power to the fuser lamp and power to the system according to an optimized energy
saving algorithm. The MICOM communicates with the OPE controller through the USB 3.0 protocol to
display the system information on the control panel.

The OPE unit displays the status of the system using the control panel TFT LCD in response to user
actions or the main controller.

The soft power switch in the OPE unit is used to safely shut down the system.

The ADF controller controls some mechanisms required to scan continuously from the ADF. The ADF
controller communicates with the main controller to synchronize scan timing.

The HVPS board generates and controls high-voltage channels. The fuser drive assembly controls
power to the fuser lamp. The LVPS board generates 5 V and 24 V power for the system.

The following diagrams show the locations of the printer circuit boards:

Hardware configuration 93
 Figure 1-72 Circuit board locations

HP Formatter
(Not shown)

LVPS (2)

Main controller
Learn about the main controller.

This topic describes the main controller PCA and formatter cabling.

Main controller
Learn about the printer main controller.

The main controller consists of the main processor (Chrous4N), memory (DDR3 2GB), flash (4 GB
on main board; 2 GB on the front side and 2 GB on the back side), 1G Ethernet PHY, USB 2.0 HUB,
Micom (power/fuser control), can/video/UI/fax signal interface connection, motor drive IC, engine signal
interface connection, and power interface.

94 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

The main processor (Dual Core 1 GHz CPU) controls video, engine, UI display, and communicates with
various devices. The HDD is connected to the main controller by SATA cable and to other devices (ADF,
dual cassette feeder, finisher, modem) by UART.

Figure 1-73 Main controller block diagram

Hqjlqh

Main controller 95
 Figure 1-74 Main controller connection information (For 77822, 77825, 77830)

96 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

Figure 1-75 Main controller connection information (For 78323, 78325, 78330)

Table 1-28 Main controller connections

Item Description Item Description Item Description Item Description

1 EXIT 9 GIGA N/W 17 POWER I/F 25 FUSER

RJ45

2 HDD 10 USB HOST 18 Dual 26 SCAN I/F

POWER 1/2 cassette
feeder I/F

3 HDD I/F 11 USB 19 Right door 27 2nd GIGA

DEVICE NPC

4 Image 12 HVPS 20 PICKUP 28 MSOK I/F

scanner COLOR
CCDM

5 Flow ADF 13 Laser 21 PH DRIVER 29 MODEM

DCIS scanner JOINT
assembly
COLOR

Main controller 97
 Table 1-28 Main controller connections (continued)

Item Description Item Description Item Description Item Description

6 FRONT USB 14 HVPS PWR 22 ID SENSOR 30 COLOR

HUB FRONT

7 OPE 15 Fuser drive 23 SHUTTER 31 OPC

POWER I/F assembly SENSOR
I/F

8 FIH I/F 16 DEVE MTR 24 TONER I/F 32 FINISHER

COLOR

Information

● Part Name: PCA-MAIN

● Part Number:

– JC82-00541B (E77822, E77825, E77830 series)

– 8GR94-60003 (E78323, E78325, E78330 series)

– Part Name: PCA-MAIN

Master system operation key (MSOK)

Learn about the master system operation key (MSOK).

The MSOK PCA is used to store all system information and consists of serial flash memory, an EEPROM
and an x-CRUM. The flash memory (4MB), EEPROM (256Kb), and X-CRUM are used for all system
operations (system parameter, device status, tech information, and service information).

NOTE: When a main board needs to be exchanged, reinstall the MSOK PCA to the new main board to
retain the system information.

IMPORTANT: Do not lose or damage the MSOK chip. It must be installed on the replacement main
board in the same orientation as when it was removed in order for the printer to function.

Figure 1-76 MSOK

1 Main PCA I/F connector

● Information

– Part number: Not applicable

98 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

 Cable Rev A
sGX/GX ADF Only CPS (J28)
–

Card insGX/GX

Cable
Power Supply CPS Aux 5V Power Power Connector location on Toast not shown
Engine HDMI (J29) (PCIe x1 Gen 2) JC39 - 02584A

Engine LAN
Engine Eng
g LAN ((J8)) JC39 - 002567A
Formatter cabling

Engine HDMI
Controller Board Eng
g Control ((J36)) JC39 - 02553A
HIP2 USB (J12)

Formatter cabling
These three cables are
Front of Product wrapped together Front/Walkup USB (J20)

8” Control Panel JC39-02579A

w/ Keyboard “Z” bundle

J8
NA
CP HDMI (J30)

Jxx

J29
Table 1-29 Formatter cabling
CP Sideband ((J16))
JC39-02557A
Part name: PCA-MSOK

Power
Dual USB 2.0
Learn about the formatter cabling.

Button Host
eMMC
Expansion (J18)
IOD (Island of Data) J51
Figure 1-77 Formatter cabling (sGX/GX)

Inside Formatter Cage Gigabit

Fan (J47) RJ45

Internal USB/AA Int. USB/AA (J21) USB 2.0

Opt Device
2x Host Ports

LVPS
From
Engine Engine Power (J6) Kani Fax Card
Power Supply

Main board
Main board
Fax (J15)
Opt
STMS(Smart Transducer Monitoring
System)

To

Formatter
Formatter
Accelerator
Purpose

(JC39-02584A)
(JC39-02584A)

Formatter cabling
High speed print data
High speed print data
Power for accelerator

99
 Table 1-29 Formatter cabling (continued)

Cable Jxx From To Purpose

Engine control J36 Main board Formatter Low level engine

control (JC39-02553A)

HIP2 USB J12 Formatter HIP USB for HIP

NOTE: Cable bundled.

Front walk-up USB J20 Formatter Front of printer USB for walk u

NOTE: Cable bundled.

CP HDMI J30 Formatter CP Data to CP

NOTE: Cable bundled.

CP side band J16 Formatter CP Power, reset, wake

lines, display
power, keyboard
(JC39-02557A)

Power button J16 Formatter Power button Power ON/OFF

IOD J16 Formatter IOD Data to/from Island of

Data

Internal USB/AA J21 Formatter Accessory Accessory

Engine power J6 LVPS Formatter 5V supply to formatter

Formatter
Figure 1-78 Formatter connections (For 78323, 78325, 78330 dn bundel)

100 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

Figure 1-79 Formatter connections (For 78323, 78325, 78330 z bundel)

Table 1-30 Formatter connections

Cable Jxx From To Purpose

Engine HDMI J29 Engine controller Formatter High speed print data (JC39-02552A)
board (ECB)

Engine LAN J8 Engine controller Formatter High speed print data (JC39-02567A)
board (ECB)

Engine control J36 Engine controller Formatter Low level engine control (JC39-02553A)
board (ECB)

HIP2 USB J12 Formatter HIP USB for HIP

Front walk-up USB J20 Front of printer USB for walk up

CP HDMI J30 CP Data to CP

These three cables are wrapped together

JC39-02554A

CP side band J16 Formatter CP Power, reset, wake-lines, display power,

keyboard. 3 cable assembly

● JC39-02705A (a,dv models only)

● JC39-02557A (dn models only)

Power button J16 Formatter Power button Power ON/OFF

IOD J16 Formatter IOD Data to/from island of data

Internal USB/AA J21 Formatter Accessory Accessory

Engine power J6 LVPS Formatter 5V supply to formatter

STMS J57 Formatter STMS Data to/from smart transducer monitoring

system (STMS) (JC39-02594A)

Formatter 101
 Low voltage power supply (LVPS; Type 5H) / switching mode power supply (SMPS)
Learn about the low voltage power supply (LVPS; Type 5H) / switching mode power supply (SMPS).

The low voltage power supply (LVPS-SMPS) Type 5H PCA supplies electric power to the main PCA and
other boards. The voltage provided includes +5V, and +24V from a 110V/220V power input. It has safety
protection modes for over current and overload.

Figure 1-80 LVPS (SMPS) Type 5H PCA

Specification

● General input/output voltage

– AC 110V (90V-135V)

– AC 220V (180V-270V

– Input current: 13.7A (110V)/6.8A (220V)

– Output power: 1500W

○ DC 5V: 55W/DC 5VS: 30W/DC 24V: 432W

Table 1-31 Information

110 V 220 V

Part number JC44-00249A JC44-00250A

Part name LVPS 110V Type 5H LVPS 220V Type 5H

Low voltage power supply (LVPS) PCA (Type 4) (GX/z models)

Learn about the low voltage power supply (LVPS) PCA (Type 4).

NOTE: The Type 4 LVPS only exists on some early models during original release. This has been
removed from all new models.

Some models have three LVPS boards. (Type5 x 1 each, Type4 x 2 each)

102 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

The low voltage power supply (LVPS) board supplies electric power to the main board and other boards.
The voltage provided includes +5 V, and +24 V from a 110 V/220 V power input. It has safety protection
modes for over current and overload.

Figure 1-81 LVPS PCA (Type 4)

1 INPUT_AC

2 OUTPUT_DC +24 V1/2/3 and DC +5 V 1/2 (to Main PCA)

3 24 V on/off

Specification

● General input/output voltage

– AC 110 V (110 V — 127 V)

– AC 220 V (220 V — 240 V)

– Input current: 6.3 A (110 V)/5 A (220 V)

– Output power: 205 W

○ DC 5 V: 25 W

○ DC 24 V: 180 W

Information

Table 1-32 LVPS PCA (Type 4)

110 V 220 V

Part number JC44-00091D JC44-00092D

Part name LVPS 110V Type 4 LVPS 220V Type 4

Low voltage power supply (LVPS) PCA (Type 4) (GX/z models) 103
 Input/output connector

● AC input connector (CN1)

Table 1-33 LVPS PCA (Type 4)

PIN assign PIN name Description

1 AC_L AC input

2 AC_N

● DC output connector (CN4)

Table 1-34 LVPS PCA (Type 4)

PIN assign PIN name Description

1 +5V1 Power

2 GND 5 V ground

3 +5V2 Power

4 GND 5 V ground

5 +24V1 Power

6 GND 24 V ground

7 +24V2 Power

8 GND 24 V ground

9 +24V3 Power

● Signal Connector (CN3)

Table 1-35 LVPS PCA (Type 4)

PIN assign PIN name Description

1 GND Active Low

2 24 V On/Off

3 GND

Fuser drive board (FDB)

Learn about the fuser drive board.

This board supplies voltage to the fuser AC, heater, and main board.

104 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

Figure 1-82 Fuser drive board (FDB) (For 77822, 77825, 77830)

1
2
7

4 3

Figure 1-83 Fuser drive board (FDB) (For 78323, 78325, 78330)

● Information

Table 1-36 Fuser drive board (FDB)

Part number Description Remark

8GR94-60001 FDB V1 (110V)

8GR94-60002 FDB V2 (220V)

● Connection

Fuser drive board (FDB) 105

 Table 1-37 Fuser drive board (FDB)

Item Description

1 Heater I/F

2 Fuser AC

3 Fuser drive PCA I/F

4 Type 5

5 Main S/W

6 Inlet

7 Heater S/W

High-voltage power supply (HVPS) PCA

Learn about the high-voltage power supply (HVPS) PCA.

The HVPS PCA generates 15 high-voltage channels, including ITHV (4), MHV (4), DEV (4), FUSER, SAW, and
THV.

Figure 1-84 HVPS board (For 77822, 77825, 77830)

106 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

Figure 1-85 HVPS board (For 78323, 78325, 78330)

Connection Information
Table 1-38 HVPS connections

No Connections

1 ITHV Y/M/C/K

2 Fuser

3 SAW

4 THV

5 HVPS I/F

6 HVPS Voltage

7 DEV Y

8 MHV Y

9 DEV M

10 MHV M

11 DEV C

12 MHV C

13 DEV K

14 MHV K

Specification
● Input voltage: DC 24V, 5V

● Output voltage

High-voltage power supply (HVPS) PCA 107

 – MHV: —1182V

– DEV DC: —498V

– DEV AC Y/M/C/K: Vpp 1000V

– THV1 Y/M/C/K: 19.97uA

– THV2+: 1893V, THV2 -: 2250V

– FUSER: 819V

– SAW: -703V

Eraser PCA
Learn about the eraser PCA.

The eraser PCA has one LED. The LED is used for erasing the negative charges on the surface of the
drum after printing.

Figure 1-86 Eraser PCA

Information

● Part name: PCA-ERASER

Waste Sensor PCA

Learn about the waste sensor PCA.

The waste sensor PCA detects the waste toner level inside the toner collection unit.

Figure 1-87 Waste sensor PCA

Information

● Part name: WASTE SENSOR RX

CRUM PCA
Learn about the CRUM PCA.

108 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

 The CRUM PCA includes memory for the drum, toner cartridge, and fuser.

Figure 1-88 CRUM PCA

Information

● Part name: PCA-ZCRUM

Toner CRUM joint PCA

Learn about the toner CRUM joint PCA.

The toner CRUM joint PCA is the interface PCA between the toner cartridge and the printer.

Figure 1-89 Toner CRUM joint PCA

Paper Size sensor PCA

The paper size sensor PCA is used for detecting the size of the paper in the tray.

Figure 1-90 Paper size sensor PCA

Dual cassette feeder (DCF)

Learn about the dual cassette feeder.

Toner CRUM joint PCA 109

 The DCF is an optional device that stores additional paper.

DCF front sectional view

Figure 1-91 DCF front sectional view

Item Description Item Description

1 Global HCI to tray 7 HCI 4 pickup assembly

2 Feed roller (HCI 3) 8 Feed roller (HCI 4)

3 Idle roller (HCI 3) 9 Idle roller (HCI 4)

4 Feed roller (HCI 3) 10 Feed roller (HCI 4)

5 Separation roller 11 Separation roller (HCI 4)

(HCI 3)

6 Pick roller (HCI 3) 12 Pick roller (HCI 4)

110 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

DCF paper path

Figure 1-92 DCF paper path

Item Description

1 Tray 4 paper path

2 Tray 5 paper path

Dual cassette feeder (DCF) 111

 DCF electrical parts locations

Figure 1-93 DCF electrical parts locations

Item Description Part DC Item Description Part DC

number controller number controller
PCA PCA

M1 Feed motor JC31– CN5 3 to 6 S2 Tray 4 limit 0604-0013 CN6 4 to 6

00033B sensor 81

M2 Tray 4 JC31– CN5 9 to 12 S3 Tray 4 0604-0013 CN6 1 to 3

pickup 00149A paper 93
motor empty
sensor

M3 Tray 5 JC31– CN5 13 to S4 Tray 5 feed 0604-0013 CN6 16 to

pickup 00149A 16 sensor 81 18
motor

SW3 Tray 4 auto- JC32– CN9 1 to 4 S5 Tray 5 limit 0604-0013 CN6 13 to

size switch 00013A sensor 81 15

SW4 Tray 5 auto- JC32– CN9 5 to 8 S6 Tray 5 0604-0013 CN6 10 to

size switch 00013A paper 81 12
empty
sensor

112 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

Item Description Part DC Item Description Part DC
number controller number controller
PCA PCA

S1 Tray 4 feed 0604-0013 CN6 7 to 9 S7 Door open JC39-0169 CN3 1 to 2

sensor 81 sensor 6A

DCF sensor and signal

Figure 1-94 DCF sensor and signal

Item Sensor Signal

1 P_Size_DCF 1 Tray 4 paper size analog signal

3 nP_Empty_DCF 1_IHCF Tray 4 paper empty signal

4 Limit_DCF 1_IHCF Tray 4 paper limit signal

5 Feed_DCF 1_IHCF Tray 4 feed signal

6 P_Size_DCF 2 Tray 5 paper size analog signal

8 nP_Empty_DCF 2 Tray 5 paper empty signal

9 Limit_DCF 2 Tray 5 paper limit signal

10 Feed_DCF 2 Tray 5 feed signal

11 nDoor_open Door open signal

Dual cassette feeder (DCF) 113

 DCF PCA connection

Figure 1-95 DCF PCA connection

Connector number Connection

CN1 Download tool I/F (minicube)

CN2 Debug I/F

CN3 Cover open switch (24V interlock switch)

CN4 USB I/F

CN5 EMPTY/LIFT/FEED (Tray 4 and 5) sensor

CN6 FEED/PICKUP 3, 4 motor

CN7 Interface with main

CN9 Paper size sensor (Tray 4 and 5)

Inner finisher
Learn about the inner finisher.

The inner finisher is an optional device that stores additional paper.

114 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

Inner finisher sectional view

Figure 1-96 Inner finisher sectional view

Item Description Item Description

1 Punch unit 8 End fence unit

2 Entrance unit 9 Tamper unit

3 Diverter unit 10 Stapler unit

4 Exit unit 11 Ejector 1 unit

5 Paper support unit 12 Ejector 2 unit

6 Main paddle unit 13 Output tray unit

7 Sub paddle unit 14 Paper holding unit

Inner finisher paper path

Figure 1-97 Inner finisher paper path

Item Description

1 Finisher main tray — staple/offset/punch

Inner finisher 115

 Item Description

2 Finisher top tray — stack only

Inner finisher electrical parts locations

Figure 1-98 Inner finisher electrical parts locations

Item Description Part number Item Description Part number

S1 Stapler position 0604-001381 S12 Paper support 0604-001393

sensor home sensor

S2 Stapler position 0604-001393 S13 Output tray top 0601-003440

sensor of stack sensor
(LED)

S3 Front cover JC39-01610A S14 Rear tamper 0604-001393

switch home sensor

S4 Main paddle 0604-001393 S15 Top cover switch JC39-01610A

home sensor

S5 Front tamper 0604-001393 S16 0604-001393

home sensor

S6 Output tray 0604-001393 S17 End fence 0604-001381

motor sensor sensor

S7 Output tray JC90-01320A S18 Punch waste 0604-001393

lower limit box sensor
switch

S8 Output tray top 0603-001309 S19 Punch waste full 0604-001381

of stack sensor sensor
(receiver)

S9 Paper holding 0604-001393 S20 Finisher docking 0604-001393

sensor sensor

116 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

Item Description Part number Item Description Part number

S10 Ejector 2 home 0604-001393 S21 Exit sensor 0604-001415

sensor

S11 Ejector 2 motor 0604-001393

sensor

Inner finisher PCA connection

Figure 1-99 Inner finisher PCA connection

Connector number Connection

1 CN3: REAR joint I/F

2 CN1: REAR sensor

3 CN10: Traverse mid sensor

4 CN8: Debug

5 CN2: REAR I/F

6 CN7: FRONT I/F

7 CN6: Stacker switch

8 CN9: Solenoid

9 CN4: Ejector and supporter I/F

10 CN5: Main I/F

Inner finisher 117

 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Learn about parts, diagrams, removal and replacement.

HP service and support

Learn about access to additional service and support information.

Additional service and support for channel partners

Channel partners can use the HP Partner Portal or the Channel Services Delivery Platform (CSDP) to
access the HP Web-based Interactive Search Engine (WISE).

Find information about the following topics.

● Service manuals, service cost data, and service advisories

● The latest control panel message (CPMD) troubleshooting information

● Remove and replace part instructions and videos

● Solutions for printer issues and emerging issues

● Printer specifications, warranty, and regulatory information

● Install, configure, and how to information

View a video of how to use the HP Partner First Portal to access WISE.

Access WISE for Channel partners (HP Partner Portal)

1. Sign-in to the HP Partner Portal (click https://partner.hp.com to access the sign-in page).

2. Select the Services & Support item (near the top of the screen).

3. Select the Technical Support (WISE) item.

4. Select the Technical Documentation item.

5. Use the WISE portal to search for printer information.

Access WISE for Channel partners (CSDP)

1. Sign-in to the CSDP portal (click csdp.hp.com to access the sign-in page).

2. Select the Knowledge and Training item.

3. Select theHP Technical Documentation item.

4. Use the WISE portal to search for printer information.

Additional service and support for HP internal personnel

HP internal personnel, go to one of the following Web-based Interactive Search Engine (WISE) sites:

118 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 View a video of how to access WISE for internal HP users.

Americas (AMS)

● WISE - English

● WISE - Spanish

● WISE - Portuguese

● WISE - French

Asia Pacific / Japan (APJ)

● WISE - English

● WISE - Japanese

● WISE - Korean

● WISE - Chinese (simplified)

● WISE - Chinese (traditional)

● WISE - Thai

Europe / Middle East / Africa (EMEA)

● WISE - English

Additional technical support WISE videos

The videos below provide additional ways to access printer information using WISE.

View a video of how to use WISE to find technical support videos (model number search).

View a video of ow to use WISE to find technical support videos (Product detail page [PDP]
search).

How to search for printer documentation

Find printer documentation using the internal HP portals.

The CPMD, error codes, and other support documentation for each printer is found on the internal HP
portals GCSN and WISE (formerly SAW). GCSN is available to HP channel partners and WISE is available
to call agents, service technicians, and other HP internal users. The level of detail available will depend
on your access credentials.

How to search WISE for printer documentation

These instructions are for HP internal use by call agents, service technicians, and other internal users.
View a video of how to find support content in WISE.

To view a list of control panel message documents per printer in WISE, enter document ID c05048451, to
locate CPMD list.

Go to WISE and enter this document ID c05791539 for written instructions.

How to search for printer documentation 119

 How to search GCSN for printer documentation
These instructions are for internal use by HP Channel Partners. View a video of how find support content
in GCSN, or follow the steps below.

1. On the Home screen in GCSN, open Technical information using one of the following two methods:

● Type TINF in the Speedcode field found in the upper right corner and press Enter, or

● On the Home page, click Technical information in the left pane.

Figure 2-1 GCSN home page

2. Under Product Search, select the Type, Category, Family, and Series that match your product model
(leave the Model field as blank or the default).

NOTE: Make sure to login to GCSN using your service-qualified credentials to access the most
comprehensive content list available. To find out how to become service-qualified, contact your HP
representative.

Figure 2-2 Sample product search criteria (GCSN)

120 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

3. Click Add Favorites and then click Add to add the printer to your Favorites list and allow you to
bypass the Product Search fields next time for that particular model (optional).

Figure 2-3 Add favorites (GCSN)

4. Clear all of the high-level check boxes.

Figure 2-4 Clear search criteria (GCSN)

5. Select the check boxes for the document types for which you want to search.

NOTE: Select only the high-level Manuals and Guides search option if you are not sure in which
type of manual or guide the content might be listed.

Figure 2-5 Select search criteria (GCSN)

6. Select Submit.

How to search for printer documentation 121

 7. If needed, click Back To selection Criteria and narrow your search (the maximum allowed search
result is 100 documents).

NOTE: Do not select the Top Issue option unless you only want to view top issues for that model.
All other available content is filtered out.

Table 2-1 Information type selections

Technical information type Select this checkbox

Control panel message document (CPMD) CPMD-Map

List of all CPMDs per product Support Information

Installation Guide or Hardware Install Guide Maintenance/Service Guide or Install Guide

Service cost document Install Guide or Service Guide/Manual

Service guide or Service manual Service Guide/Manual

Self-solve or troubleshooting document Support Information

User manual or User guide User Guide

Warranty and Legal Guide Warranty Statement

Order parts by authorized service providers

Find information about ordering parts and supplies for the printer.

Ordering
Order parts by authorized service providers.

Table 2-2 Ordering

Item or provider Description

Order supplies and paper www.hp.com/go/suresupply

Order parts from authorized service providers www.hp.com/buy/parts or partsurfer.hp.com

Order through service or support providers Contact an HP-authorized service or support provider.

Order using the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS) To access, in a supported web browser on your
computer, enter the printer IP address or host name
in the address/URL field. The EWS contains a link to
the HP SureSupply web site, which provides options for
purchasing Original HP supplies.

Orderable parts
Not all of the parts shown in the exploded assembly diagrams are orderable parts.

Refer to the tables following the diagrams or the alphabetical/numerical parts lists to determine if a part
is orderable.

How to use parts lists and diagrams

Learn how to use the parts lists and diagrams.

122 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 The figures in this chapter show the major sub-assemblies in the printer and their component parts.
A parts list table follows each exploded view assembly diagram. The table lists the item number, the
associated part number, and the description of each part. If a part is not listed in the table, then it is not a
field replacement unit (FRU).

NOTE: Be sure to order the correct part. When looking for part numbers for electrical parts, pay
careful attention to the voltage that is listed in the part description. Doing so will make sure that the
selected part number is for the correct printer model.

NOTE: The abbreviation “PCA” stands for “printed circuit-board assembly.” Components described as
a PCA might consist of a single circuit board or a circuit board plus other parts, such as cables and
sensors.

ESD precautions
Learn the importance of electrostatic discharge.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Look for the ESD reminder
when removing printer parts. Always perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If
an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground
before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

Service approach
Learn more about the service approach.

Precautions when replacing parts

Learn about precautions when replacing parts.

Precautions when assembling and disassembling

● Use only HP approved replacement parts. Make sure that the part number, product name, voltage,
and current or temperature ratings are correct. Failure to do so might result in damage to the
machine, circuit overload, fire, or electric shock.

● Do not make unauthorized changes or additions to the printer. Unauthorized changes might cause
the printer to malfunction and create electric shock or fire hazards.

● Use caution when dismantling the unit. Take note of the location of each screw or other part. This
printer contains different kinds of screws. Using the wrong screw might lead to system failure, short
circuit or electric shock.

● Do not disassemble the laser scanner assembly. Once the laser scanner assembly is
disassembled, dust might enter the mirror chamber and will seriously degrade print quality. There
are no serviceable parts inside the laser scanner assembly.

● Regularly check the condition of the power cable, plug and socket. Bad contacts might lead to
overheating and fire. Damaged cables might lead to electric shock or unit malfunction.

ESD precautions 123

 Precautions when handling PCAs
Static electricity might damage a PCA. Use approved, anti-static precautions when handling or storing a
PCA. Service personnel should use grounded ESD straps and/or mats when handling PCAs.

● Precautions when moving and storing a PCA

– Keep PCA in a conductive case, anti-static bag, or wrapped in aluminum foil.

– Do not store a PCA where it is exposed to direct sunlight.

● Precautions when replacing a PCA

– Disconnect power cables before disconnecting other cables.

– Do not touch any soldered connections, connector terminals, or other electronic parts when
handling insulated parts.

● Precautions when checking a PCA

– Touch a grounded area of the printer chassis to discharge static electric charge before
touching a PCA.

– Do not touch a PCA with bare hands or metal objects. Doing so might create a short circuit or
cause electric shock. Use caution when handling a PCA with moving parts such as sensors,
motors, or lamps, as they might become very hot.

– Use caution when fitting and removing screws. Watch for hidden screens. Make sure that the
correct screw is used and make sure that when toothed washers are removed, they are refitted
in their original positions.

– Place the product on an ESD workstation or mat, or use an ESD strap (if one is available). If
an ESD workstation, mat, or strap is not available, ground yourself by touching the sheet-metal
chassis before touching an ESD-sensitive part.

Releasing plastic latches

Many of the parts are held in place with plastic latches. The latches might easily break. Be careful when
releasing them. To remove such parts, press the hook end of the latch away from the part to which it is
latched.

Before performing service

Learn what to do before performing service.

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

● Unplug the power cable and interface cable or cables.

● Remove any finishing devices and the side HCI, if they are installed.

● Place the product on an ESD workstation or mat, or use an ESD strap (if one is available). If an
ESD workstation, mat, or strap is not available, ground yourself by touching the sheet-metal chassis
before touching an ESD-sensitive part.

● Remove the toner cartridges, if needed.

124 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

After performing service
Learn what to do after performing service.

● Verify that the service performed was successful.

● Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

● Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

● Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new
issues.

● Verify that the printer is in better condition than when you arrived, cosmetically and electrically.

Post-service test
Perform the following tests to verify that the repair or replacement was successful:

Print-quality test
Learn about the print-quality test.

1. Verify that you have completed the necessary reassembly steps.

2. Make sure that the tray contains clean, unmarked paper.

3. Attach the power cord and interface cable or interface cables, and then turn on the product.

4. Print a configuration page.

5. Print a print quality page, and then verify that there are no lines, streaks, banding, or other print
quality defects.

6. Send a print job from the host computer, and then verify that the output meets expectations.

Copy-quality test
Learn about the copy-quality test.

1. Place the configuration page in the document feeder, print a copy job, and then verify the results.

2. Place the configuration page on the flatbed glass, print a copy job, and then verify the results

Fax-quality test
Learn about the fax-quality test.

1. Place the configuration page in the document feeder.

2. Type a valid fax number, and send the fax job.

3. Verify that the send quality and the receive quality meet expectations.

Parts removal order

For procedures and/or steps that require identifying the right, left, or rear side of the printer, face the
front of the printer for correct orientation.

After performing service 125

 Maintenance
Learn about preventive maintenance and printer cleaning procedures.

Cleaning the document feeder white bar and CIS (LX)

Learn about cleaning the document feeder white bar and CIS (LX).

1. Open the document feeder unit.

Figure 2-6 Open document feeder unit

2. Clean the document feeder white bar and CIS using a lint-free cloth.

Figure 2-7 Clean document feeder white bar

CIS

Simplex
White bar

Duplex
White bar

Cleaning the flow document feeder white bar and CIS (GX)
Learn about cleaning the flow document feeder white bar and CIS (GX).

126 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 1. Open the document feeder, peel back the white backing , and then release the green tab.

Figure 2-8 Peel back the white backing and release one tab

2. Open the access door. Clean the simplex white bar (callout 1), the CIS (callout 2), and the duplex
white bar (callout 3) using a soft, lint-free, clean cloth.

Figure 2-9 Clean flow document feeder white bar

Cleaning the scanner glass

Learn about cleaning the scan glass.

Cleaning the scanner glass 127

 ■ Open the document feeder. Clean the scanner glass (callout 1) using a soft, lint-free, clean cloth.

Figure 2-10 Clean the scanner glass

Cleaning the transfer roller

Learn about cleaning the transfer roller.

128 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 1. Open the right door.

Figure 2-11 Open the right door

2. Clean the transfer roller (A) using a lint-free cloth.

Figure 2-12 Transfer roller cleaning

Cleaning the color toner density (CTD) sensor

Learn about cleaning the color toner density (CTD) sensor.

Cleaning the color toner density (CTD) sensor 129

 1. Open the right door.

Figure 2-13 Open the right door

2. Clean the sensor window using a lint-free cloth while pushing the shutter to the right.

Figure 2-14 Clean sensor window

130 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 3. Do the following:

a. Close the right door.

b. Enter service mode, and then select CTD Sensor Cleaning (Diagnostics > Image Management
> Auto Tone Adjustment > CTD Sensor Cleaning).

c. When the confirmation screen appears, select Yes.

Main parts
Learn about the printer main parts.

Main assembly
Parts diagram and parts list for the main assembly.

Figure 2-15 Main assembly

Table 2-3 Main assembly

Ref Part number Description Qty

No

2 JC96-02090A Cover, top 1

3 X3A83-67923 Toner Collection Unit (TCU) 1

4 JC44-00212C HVPS 24 (For E77822, E77825, E77830) 1

Main parts 131

 Table 2-3 Main assembly (continued)

Ref Part number Description Qty

No

4 JC44-00212D HVPS 24 (For E78323, E78325, E78330) 1

5 JC97-04864A Laser scanner unit 1

6 JC63-05410A ADF White backing (LX/dn bundles) 2

6 JC63-05795A ADF White backing (GX/z bundles) 1

7 JC97-04520C Scanner assembly 1

8 JC97-04954A ADF, whole unit (LX/dn models only) 1

8 JC97-04955A Flow ADF, whole unit (GX/z models only) 1

10 JC90-01118B Exit 1

11 JC82-00485A Fuser, 220V (For E77822, E77825, E77830) 1

11 Z9M03-67002 Fuser, 220V (For E78323, E78325, E78330) 1

11 JC82-00472A Fuser, 110V (For E77822, E77825, E77830) 1

11 Z7Y77-67002 Fuser, 110V (For E78323, E78325, E78330) 1

12 JC98-00980D Image Transfer Belt Assembly (For E77822, 1

E77825, E77830)

12 5PN63-67001 Image Transfer Belt Assembly (For E78323, 1

E78325, E78330)

13 JC95-02079A Right door assembly (For E77822, E77825, 1

E77830)

13 8GR88-60101 Right door assembly (For E78323, E78325, 1

E78330)

15 8GR94-60002 Fuser drive board, 220V 1

15 8GR94-60001 Fuser drive board, 110V 1

16 JC44-00091D LVPS (SMPS) 110V, Type 41 1

16 JC44-00092D LVPS (SMPS) 220V, Type 41 1

16 JC44-00249A LVPS (SMPS) 110V, Type 5H 1

16 JC44-00250A LVPS (SMPS) 220V, Type 5H 1

18 JC31-00162A Fan-Type 8 LVPS 1

20 JC82-00540A Main board PCA with heat sink (For E77822, 1

E77825, E77830)

20 8GR94-60003 Main board PCA with heat sink (For E78323, 1

E78325, E78330)

22 JC97-02276A Main PCA HDD bracket 1

23 8JM72-67001 Developer unit, Y (For E78323, E78325, E78330) 1

23 JC96-11663A Developer unit, Y (For E77822, E77825, E77830) 1

24 8JM73-67001 Developer unit, M (For E78323, E78325, E78330) 1

24 JC96-11664A Developer unit, M (For E77822, E77825, E77830) 1

132 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Table 2-3 Main assembly (continued)

Ref Part number Description Qty

No

25 8JM71-67001 Developer unit, C (For E78323, E78325, E78330) 1

25 JC96-11665A Developer unit, C (For E77822, E77825, E77830) 1

26 8JM70-67001 Developer unit, K (For E78323, E78325, E78330) 1

26 JC96-11666A Developer unit, K (For E77822, E77825, E77830) 1

27 L41606-011 Main PCA HDD 500 GB 1

30 JC96-06246A ITB cleaner (For E77822, E77825, E77830) 1

30 5PN64-67001 ITB cleaner (For E78323, E78325, E78330) 1

Not shown JC39-01202A Main PCA HDD SATA cable 1

Not shown JC39-01943A Main PCA HDD Power cable 1

Not shown 5851-6712 Formatter HDD 500 GB Kit 1

Not shown L41606-011 Formatter HDD 500 GB 1

Not shown B5L46-40014 Formatter HDD Cradle 1

Not shown T3U55-60001 Formatter HDD SATA Riser Module 1

Not shown B5L32-60002 eMMC PCA 16GB 1

Not shown X3A92-60006 Formatter PCA (For E77822, E77825, E77830) 1

Not shown X3A92-60006 Formatter PCA Obsidian (LX) (For E78323, 1

E78325, E78330)

Not shown Y3K99-60005 Formatter PCA Rock (GX) (For E78323, E78325, 1
E78330)

Not shown 6502-001131 Wire Clip Formatter 1

Not shown B5L32-60002 eMMC card-16 GB 1

Not shown B5L46-40021 HIP Cover 1

Not shown JC93-01538A Formatter Cage 1

Not shown 2EH31A HP MFP Analog 700 Fax Accessory 1

Not shown 5UT59A HP MFP Analog Fax 701 Fax Accessory 1

Not shown X3A92-60002 PCI-Island of Data 1

Not shown JC39-02554A Control Panel Interface Cable 1

Not shown X3A61-60001 STMS PCA (SDS) 1

Not shown JC39-02552A HDMI Cable Formatter - DC Controller 1

Not shown X3A83-67905 Imaging drum (For E77822, E77825, E77830) 1

Not shown W9215-67901 Imaging drum (For E78323, E78325, E78330) 1

Not shown B5L31-90902 Foreign Interface Harness (FIH) (service) 1

Not shown J8030-61001 Jetdirect Wireless Print Server with NFC Kit 1

Not shown B5L29-67903 Formatter HDD - 500 GB FIPS 1

Main assembly 133

 Table 2-3 Main assembly (continued)

Ref Part number Description Qty

No

Not shown JC93-00466A Switch, front cover open 1

Not shown JC93-01467A Switch, right door open 1

Not shown B5L47-60101 Control panel, Pulsar 1

Not shown B5L47-60102 Keyboard assembly (US) 1

Not shown B5L47-60103 Keyboard assembly (UK) 1

Not shown JC39-02072A Wiring harness (output device) 1

Not shown JC64-00708B HANDLE-SWING DEVE(Latch) 1

1Type 4 LVPS is only installed in some early models during original release. Removed from all new
models.

Removal and replacement: ADF white backing (LX)

Learn how to remove and replace the ADF white backing (LX).

This document provides the procedures to remove the white backing assembly.

View a video of how to remove and replace the document feeder white backing (LX).

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

134 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Table 2-4 Part information

Part number Part description

JC63-05410A ADF white backing (LX)

Required tools
● No special tools are required to remove or install this assembly.

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of
the printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the document feeder white backing

Follow these steps to remove the document feeder white backing.

1. Open the document feeder cover.

2. Peel the white backing away to remove.

IMPORTANT: Remove all the tape and foam from the bottom of the document feeder.

3. Position the new white backing on the scanner glass.

4. Peel the adhesive tape backing off the new white backing.

Remove the document feeder white backing 135

 5. Close the document feeder cover to attach the white backing.

Figure 2-16 Close the document feeder cover

6. Open the cover again and smooth the white backing.

Figure 2-17 Smooth the white backing

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

136 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: ADF white backing (GX)

This document provides the procedures to remove the white backing assembly.

E72520-E72530:

View a video of removing and replacing the ADF white backing (E72520-E72530).

E77820-E77830:

View a video of removing and replacing the ADF white backing (E77820-E77830).

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Basic

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Disconnect the power cable.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-5 Part information

Part number Part description

JC63-05795A ADF White backing (GX)

Removal and replacement: ADF white backing (GX) 137

 Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.

1. Remove the document feeder white backing

Follow these steps to remove the document feeder white backing.

1. Open the document feeder cover.

2. Peel the white backing away to remove.

IMPORTANT: Remove all the tape and foam from the bottom of the document feeder.

3. Position the new white backing on the scanner glass.

4. Peel the adhesive tape backing off the new white backing.

5. Close the document feeder cover to attach the white backing.

6. Open the cover again and smooth the white backing.

Figure 2-18 Smooth the white backing

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

138 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: ADF whole unit (LX)

Learn how to remove and replace the ADF whole unit (LX bundles).

To view a short video of this procedure, click the link below.

View a video of how to remove and replace the ADF whole unit (LX/du bundles).

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

Removal and replacement: ADF whole unit (LX) 139

 ● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 2-6 Part information

Part number Part description

JC97-05074A Document feeder whole unit assembly (LX models)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of
the printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the formatter cover

Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.

140 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 ■ Unscrew two captive thumbscrews on the formatter cover. Slide the formatter cover to the left, and
then to the right to remove it.

Figure 2-19 Remove the formatter cover

2. Remove the upper rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the upper rear cover.

■ Remove three screw-caps and five screws. Lift the upper rear cover away from the printer to remove
it.

Figure 2-20 Remove the upper rear cover

3. Remove the document feeder whole unit (LX)

Follow these steps to remove the document feeder whole unit (LX).

Remove the upper rear cover 141

 1. Remover one screw cap and screw (callout 1), and then remove the document feeder connector
cover (callout 2).

Figure 2-21 Remove the document feeder connector cover

2. Remove one screw to release the ground wire (callout 1), and then disconnect three connectors
(callout 2).

Figure 2-22 Remove the document feeder harness and ground wire

3. Disconnect the document feeder harness from the PCA - ADF HIC. Remove one connector and one
grounding wire.

142 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 4. Release one screw on each hinge stop on the back of the document feeder.

Figure 2-23 Release the document feeder hinge screws

5. Remove two screws. Slide the assembly back, and then lift the document feeder to remove.

Figure 2-24 Lift and remove the document feeder

NOTE: Complete a shading test and a skew alignment after replacing the document feeder unit.

4. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Unpack the replacement assembly 143

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Flow ADF whole unit (GX)

This document provides the procedures to remove the document feeder whole unit assembly.

View a video of removing and replacing the document feeder.

Mean time to repair: 5 minutes

Service level: Basic

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Disconnect the power cable.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-7 Part information

Part number Part description

JC97-04955A ADF whole unit assembly (GX/z models)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

144 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 After performing service
Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.

1. Remove the formatter cover

Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.

■ Unscrew two captive thumbscrews on the formatter cover. Slide the formatter cover to the left, and
then to the right to remove it.

Figure 2-25 Remove the formatter cover

2. Remove the upper rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the upper rear cover.

Remove the formatter cover 145

 ■ Remove three screw-caps and five screws. Lift the upper rear cover away from the printer to remove
it.

Figure 2-26 Remove the upper rear cover

3. Remove the document feeder whole unit (GX)

Follow these steps to remove the document feeder whole unit (GX).

1. Open the document feeder cover, and then remove the document feeder connector cover.

Figure 2-27 Remove document feeder connector cover

146 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

2. Remove the plastic cable choke from the wire harness, and then disconnect the document feeder
harness from the main board. Disconnect the insulated ground wire from the chassis.

Figure 2-28 Remove the cable choke

3. Disconnect the document feeder harness from the scanner PCA. Remove one connector and one
grounding wire.

Figure 2-29 Disconnect document feeder harness

4. Release two hinge stops on the back of the document feeder to allow the document feeder to open
to a full 90°.

IMPORTANT: Note the alignment marks on the hinge stops. Any new document feeder must be
reinstalled with the same alignment.

Remove the document feeder whole unit (GX) 147

 Figure 2-30 Alignment marks

5. Remove two screws on each hinge stop.

Figure 2-31 Remove screws

148 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 6. Pull back and then lift up to release the document feeder unit.

Figure 2-32 Release the document feeder

NOTE: Complete a shading test and a skew alignment after replacing the document feeder unit.

4. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Unpack the replacement assembly 149

 Removal and replacement: Image scanner assembly (flatbed)
This document provides the procedures to remove the scanner whole unit.

View a video of removing and replacing the image scanner (E72520-E72530).

View a video of removing and replacing the image scanner (E77820-E77830).

Mean time to repair: 30 minutes

Service level: Advanced

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Disconnect the power cable.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-8 Part information

Part number Part description

JC97-04520C Scanner whole unit part number

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.

1. Remove the scanner whole unit

Follow these steps to remove the scanner whole unit.

150 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

1. Open the document feeder cover, and then remove the document feeder connector cover.

Figure 2-33 Remove document feeder connector cover

2. Remove the plastic cable choke from the wire harness, and then disconnect the document feeder
harness from the main board. Disconnect the insulated ground wire from the chassis.

Figure 2-34 Remove the cable choke

Remove the scanner whole unit 151

 3. Disconnect the document feeder harness from the PCA - ADF HIC. Remove one connector and one
and one grounding wire.

Figure 2-35 Disconnect document feeder harness

4. Release two hinge stops on the back of the document feeder to allow the document feeder to open
to a full 90°.

IMPORTANT: If installing a replacement document feeder, note the alignment marks on the hinge
stops. Any new document feeder must be reinstalled with the same alignment.

Figure 2-36 Alignment marks

152 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

5. Remove two screws on each hinge stop.

Figure 2-37 Remove screws

6. Pull back and then lift up to release the document feeder unit.

Figure 2-38 Release the document feeder

NOTE: Complete a shading test and a skew alignment after replacing the document feeder unit.

Remove the scanner whole unit 153

 7. Remove three screws.

Figure 2-39 Remove three screws

8. Place the control panel in the upright position.

9. Gently pry the control-panel bezel from the center screw hole, and then pry from the center of the
control-panel bezel to the edges to release.

CAUTION: Do not pry against the scanner glass when removing the control-panel bezel.

10. Remove two screws on the control-panel frame.

Figure 2-40 Remove two screws

11. Disconnect one FFC, one connector, the HIP USB cable, and one HDMI connector.

154 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

12. Remove the USB interconnect cable from its retainer and reroute out of the way.

Figure 2-41 Remove USB interconnect cable

13. Slide the keyboard out, and then depress two latches to remove the keyboard.

Figure 2-42 Remove the keyboard

14. Lift the control panel up from the front to release the tabs at the rear, and then remove the control
panel.

TIP: Align the four tabs at the rear of the control panel, and then snap in the control panel.

Remove the scanner whole unit 155

 15. Remove six screw-caps and six screws. It might be necessary to use leverage near the left hinge
and then pull the cover toward the back.

Figure 2-43 Remove screw-caps and screws and release scan-front cover

16. Remove three screw-caps and three screws. Release the scan-left cover.

Figure 2-44 Release scan-left cover

17. Remove three screw-caps and three screws (callout 1). Release the scan-right cover.

NOTE: At the front of the scanner, remove the bracket (callout 2) and install it on the replacement
scanner whole unit.

156 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Figure 2-45 Remove scan-right cover

18. Remove two screws.

Figure 2-46 Remove two screws

Remove the scanner whole unit 157

 19. Disconnect the two scan cables and one FFC at the top of the main board.

Figure 2-47 Disconnect scan cables

20. Remove three screws. Lift the scanner straight up and off of the printer to remove it.

NOTE: After reassembly, utilize the target to adjust the scanner location as necessary.

Reinstallation tip: Reinstall the scan bed by lowering the left side first and then lower the right.
Align the screw holes on the right, and then install the screws.

Reinstall the lower cover and ensure the cables are routed through the opening for the control
panel and the bracket is properly aligned in the cover.

Figure 2-48 Remove three screws

Removal and replacement: Exit unit

This document provides the procedures to remove the exit unit.

View a video of removing the exit unit.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

158 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Service level: Intermediate

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Disconnect the power cable.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-9 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01118B Exit unit

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.

1. Remove the exit unit

Follow these steps to remove the exit unit.

NOTE: Remove second exit drive if installed.

Remove the exit unit 159

 1. Open the right door. Disconnect the Exit unit connector and two cable restraints.

Figure 2-49 Disconnect exit unit connector and cable restraints

2. Remove three screws, and then remove the exit unit.

Figure 2-50 Remove screws and exit unit

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

160 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Fuser unit

This document provides the procedures to remove the fuser unit.

View a video of removing the fuser unit.

Mean time to repair: 3 minutes

Service level: Basic

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Disconnect the power cable.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-10 Part information

Part number Part description

JC82-00472A Kit-HP LaserJet 110V Fuser (E778xx Series)

3A64-61001 Kit-HP LaserJet 110V Fuser (E783xx Series)

JC82-00485A Kit-HP LaserJet 220V Fuser (E778xx Series)

Z9M03-67002 Kit-HP LaserJet 220V Fuser (E783xx Series)

Removal and replacement: Fuser unit 161

 Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.

1. Remove the fuser unit

Follow these steps to remove the fuser unit.

1. Open the right door.

2. Remove the two screws shown below, and then remove the fuser unit.

Figure 2-51 Remove two fuser unit screws

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

162 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Right door assembly

This document provides the procedures to remove the right door assembly.

View a video of removing the right door assembly.

Mean time to repair: 3 minutes

Service level: Basic

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Disconnect the power cable.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-11 Part information

Part number Part description

JC95-02079A Right door assembly (E778xx series)

8GR88-60101 Right door assembly (E783xx series)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

Removal and replacement: Right door assembly 163

 After performing service
Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.

1. Remove the right door

Follow these steps to remove the right door.

NOTE: Remove second exit drive if installed.

1. Remove three screws, and then remove the cover (A).

Figure 2-52 Remove cover

164 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

2. Disconnect the right door connector.

Figure 2-53 Disconnect right door connector

3. Release the right hinge (callout 1).

CAUTION: The right hinge spring tension can be dangerous. Use caution when releasing the right
hinge to avoid injury.

Figure 2-54 Release right hinge

Remove the right door 165

 4. Release the left dampener (callout 1).

Figure 2-55 Release left dampener

5. Remove the right door.

NOTE: Open the lower access door. If there is an HCI or 2x520 input device, release the dampener
to clear the lower right door. Remove clockwise.

Figure 2-56 Remove right door

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

166 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Image transfer belt (ITB) assembly

This document provides the procedures to remove the image transfer belt (ITB).

View a video of removing the image transfer belt (ITB).

Mena time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Intermediate

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Disconnect the power cable.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-12 Part information

Part number Part description

JC98-00980D Image transfer belt (ITB) assembly (E778xx series)

5PN63-67001 Image transfer belt (ITB) assembly (E783xx series)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

Removal and replacement: Image transfer belt (ITB) assembly 167

 After performing service
For replacement ITB installations: Perform a Setting Standard Tone procedure. See Setting Standard
Tone on page 176.

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.

1. Remove the ITB cleaner

Follow these steps to remove the ITB cleaner.

1. Open the front cover.

2. Loosen the captive screw.

Figure 2-57 Loosen screw

3. Release the ITB cleaner.

Figure 2-58 Release ITB cleaner

168 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

2. Remove the right door
Follow these steps to remove the right door.

NOTE: Remove second exit drive if installed.

1. Remove three screws, and then remove the cover (A).

Figure 2-59 Remove cover

2. Disconnect the right door connector.

Figure 2-60 Disconnect right door connector

3. Release the right hinge (callout 1).

CAUTION: The right hinge spring tension can be dangerous. Use caution when releasing the right
hinge to avoid injury.

Remove the right door 169

 Figure 2-61 Release right hinge

4. Release the left dampener (callout 1).

Figure 2-62 Release left dampener

5. Remove the right door.

NOTE: Open the lower access door. If there is an HCI or 2x520 input device, release the dampener
to clear the lower right door. Remove clockwise.

170 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Figure 2-63 Remove right door

3. Remove the ITB unit

Follow these steps to remove the ITB unit.

Remove the ITB unit 171

 1. Disconnect the ITB connector from the right. Pull the holder to the front.

Figure 2-64 Disconnect ITB connector

172 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

2. Remove two screws.

Figure 2-65 Remove two screws

3. Remove the ITB unit until the handles are fully visible. Release the ITB unit smoothly.

CAUTION: Make sure not to touch the belt surface of the ITB.

Remove the ITB unit 173

 Figure 2-66 Release ITB unit

174 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 4. Before installing the new ITB unit, align the CAM position with the two arrows shown.

Figure 2-67 Align CAM

5. Install the new ITB unit, and then install the ITB cleaner.

4. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 175

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

5. Setting Standard Tone

Follow the steps below if a replacement ITB is installed.

For a replacement ITB installation (or after cleaning the CTD sensor), perform a Setting Standard Tone
procedure.

Support Tools > Service > Service Tools > Diagnostics > Image Management > Setting Standard Tone

1. From the control panel, select Support Tools and then Service.

2. Enter the Service PIN ID.

● 04077817

3. Select Service Tools.

Figure 2-68 Service Tools

176 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

4. Select Diagnostics.

Figure 2-69 Diagnostics

5. Select Image Management.

Figure 2-70 Image Management

Setting Standard Tone 177

 6. Select Setting Standard Tone.

Figure 2-71 Setting Standard Tone (1 of 4)

7. Load Tray 2 with paper, and then select Start.

NOTE: Make sure that the paper is loaded for short-edge first (SEF) feeding into the printer.

Figure 2-72 Setting Standard Tone (2 of 4)

178 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 8. A color patch page prints.

Figure 2-73 Setting Standard Tone (3 of 4)

9. Position the color patch page on the flatbed glass as shown below, and then select Start.

NOTE: If when the process is completed the results are not satisfactory, use the Cancel Setting
Standard Tone menu item to return to the default value.

Support Tools > Service > Service Tools > Diagnostics > Image Management > Cancel Setting
Standard Tone

Figure 2-74 Setting Standard Tone (4 of 4)

Removal and replacement: Fuser drive board (FDB)

This document provides the procedures to remove the fuser drive board (FDB).

Removal and replacement: Fuser drive board (FDB) 179

 View a video of removing the FDB.

Mean time to repair: 8 minutes

Service level: Basic

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Disconnect the power cable.

CAUTION: Wait five minutes after disconnecting the power cable before replacing the Fuser drive
assembly board. Not waiting long enough after disconnecting the power cable can cause electric
shock.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-13 Part information

Part number Part description

8GR94-60001 Fuser drive board (110V)

8GR94-60002 Fuser drive board (220V)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.

1. Remove the rear bottom cover

Follow these steps to remove the rear bottom cover.

180 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 1. Unscrew two captive thumbscrews on the formatter cover. Slide the formatter cover to the left, and
then to the right to remove.

Figure 2-75 Remove the formatter cover

2. Remove seven screws, and then remove the rear-bottom cover.

Figure 2-76 Remove the rear-bottom cover

2. Remove the LVPS cover

Follow these steps to remove the LVPS cover.

Remove the LVPS cover 181

 ■ Remove four screws, and then remove the LVPS cover.

Figure 2-77 Remove the LVPS cover

3. Remove the fuser drive assembly board

Follow these steps to remove the fuser drive assembly board.

■ Disconnect seven connectors and cable restraints on the fuser-drive assembly board. Remove four
screws, and then remove the fuser-drive assembly board.

NOTE: Several of the connectors have tabs that need to be pressed in order to release.

Figure 2-78 Remove the fuser-drive assembly board

182 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

4. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Scanner LVPS (Type 5) board

This document provides the procedures to remove the scanner LVPS board.

View a video of removing the scanner LVPS board.

Mean time to repair: 8 minutes

Service level: Basic

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Disconnect the power cable.

CAUTION: Wait five minutes after disconnecting the power cable before replacing the LVPS
board. Not waiting long enough after disconnecting the power cable can cause electric shock.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Unpack the replacement assembly 183

 Table 2-14 Part information

Part number Part description

JC44-00249A LVPS 110 V type 5H (SMPS V1)

JC44-00250A LVPS 220 Type 5 (SMPS V2)

JC44-00091D LVPS 110 Type 4 (SMPS V1)

JC44-00092D LVPS 220 Type 4 (SMPS V2)

NOTE: The Type 4 LVPS only exists on some early models during original release. This has been
removed from all new models.

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.

1. Remove the rear bottom cover

Follow these steps to remove the rear bottom cover.

1. Unscrew two captive thumbscrews on the formatter cover. Slide the formatter cover to the left, and
then to the right to remove.

Figure 2-79 Remove the formatter cover

184 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 2. Remove seven screws, and then remove the rear-bottom cover.

Figure 2-80 Remove the rear-bottom cover

2. Remove the LVPS cover

Follow these steps to remove the LVPS cover.

■ Remove four screws, and then remove the LVPS cover.

Figure 2-81 Remove the LVPS cover

3. Remove the scanner LVPS (Type 5) board

Follow these steps to remove the scanner LVPS (Type 5) board.

Remove the LVPS cover 185

 ■ Disconnect four connectors, including one fuser-drive assembly connector and four other
connectors, on the LVPS PCA (Type 5). Remove four screws, and then remove the scanner LVPS
board (Type 5).

Figure 2-82 Remove the scanner LVPS (Type 5) board

4. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

186 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: LVPS fan

This document provides the procedures to remove the LVPS fan assembly.

View a video of removing the LVPS fan assembly.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Basic

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cable before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-15 Part information

Part number Part description

JC31-00162A LVPS fan assembly (fan type 8)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.

1. Remove the rear bottom cover

Follow these steps to remove the rear bottom cover.

Removal and replacement: LVPS fan 187

 1. Unscrew two captive thumbscrews on the formatter cover. Slide the formatter cover to the left, and
then to the right to remove.

Figure 2-83 Remove the formatter cover

2. Remove seven screws, and then remove the rear-bottom cover.

Figure 2-84 Remove the rear-bottom cover

2. Remove the LVPS cover

Follow these steps to remove the LVPS cover.

188 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 ■ Remove four screws, and then remove the LVPS cover.

Figure 2-85 Remove the LVPS cover

3. Remove the LVPS fan

Follow these steps to remove the LVPS fan.

■ Disconnect the connector and remove wire from retainer. Remove one screw, and then remove the
LVPS fan.

Figure 2-86 Remove the LVPS fan

TIP: When reinstalling, verify that the fan is oriented as indicated by the arrows on the fan housing.

Remove the LVPS fan 189

 4. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Formatter and formatter cage

This document provides the procedures to remove the formatter and formatter cage assembly.

View a video of removing and replacing the formatter and formatter cage.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Basic

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cable before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

190 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Table 2-16 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-01538A Formatter Cage

X3A92-60003 Formatter PCA (E778xx series)

X3A92-60006 Formatter PCA - obsidian (E783xx series) (LX)

Y3K99-60005 Formatter PCA - Rock (E783xx series) (GX)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.

Remove the rear covers

Follow these steps to remove the rear covers.

1. Unscrew two captive thumbscrews on the formatter cover. Slide the formatter cover to the left, and
then to the right to remove.

Figure 2-87 Remove the formatter cover

Remove the rear covers 191

 2. Remove seven screws, and then remove the rear-bottom cover.

Figure 2-88 Remove the rear-bottom cover

3. Remove six screws (callout 1), and then remove the rear-top cover.

Figure 2-89 Remove the rear-top cover

Remove the accelerator board

Follow these steps to remove the accelerator board.

CAUTION: ESD sensitive part.

192 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 ■ Loosen two screws, retained in plastic clips, on the outside of the formatter cage. Disconnect one
connector, release the plastic locator pin, and then gently lift the accelerator board away from the
formatter by the edges.

NOTE: A connector on the back of the accelerator board holds the board on the formatter.

IMPORTANT: Do not lift the accelerator board by the heat sink.

Figure 2-90 Remove the accelerator PCA

Remove the hard-disk drive (HDD)

Follow these steps to remove the hard-disk drive (HDD).

■ Release one retainer, and then remove the HDD.

IMPORTANT: The HDD and the IOD cannot be replaced at the same time.

Figure 2-91 Remove the hard-disk drive (HDD)

Remove the Island of data (IOD)

Follow these steps to remove the Island of data (IOD).

Remove the hard-disk drive (HDD) 193

 ■ Disconnect one connector and remove one screw, and then remove the IOD.

IMPORTANT: The HDD and the IOD cannot be replaced at the same time.

Figure 2-92 Remove the IOD

Remove the formatter PCA

Follow these steps to remove the formatter PCA.

■ Disconnect seven connectors and eight screws, and then remove formatter PCA.

Figure 2-93 Remove the formatter connectors and screws

Remove the formatter cage

Follow these steps to remove the formatter cage.

1. Disconnect ten connectors and two cable restraints.

194 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

2. Remove four screws and screw-caps, and then remove the left-upper cover.

Figure 2-94 Remove the left-upper cover

3. Remove one screw from the side of the formatter cage (beneath the left-upper cover location).

Figure 2-95 Remove the formatter cage side screw

Remove the formatter cage 195

 4. Remove three screws from the formatter cage face, and then release one tab to remove the
formatter cage.

Figure 2-96 Remove three screws to remove the formatter cage

Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

196 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Removal and replacement: 500 GB FIPS HDD/500 GB formatter HDD
This procedure is for removing the 500 GB FIPS HDD installed on the formatter.

View a video of removing and replacing the HDD (E72520-E72530).

View a video of removing and replacing the HDD (E77820-E77830).

Mean time to repair: 20 minutes

Service level: Intermediate

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cable before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-17 Part information

Part number Part description

L41606-011 Formatter HDD 500 GB

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriverL41606-011 with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.

1. Remove the formatter cover

Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.

Removal and replacement: 500 GB FIPS HDD/500 GB formatter HDD 197

 ■ Unscrew two captive thumbscrews on the formatter cover. Slide the formatter cover to the left, and
then to the right to remove.

Figure 2-97 Remove the formatter cover

2. Remove the hard-disk drive (HDD)

Follow these steps to remove the hard-disk drive (HDD).

■ Release one retainer, and then remove the HDD.

IMPORTANT: The HDD and the IOD cannot be replaced at the same time.

Figure 2-98 Remove the hard-disk drive (HDD)

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

198 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: HP Foreign interface harness (FIH) solution

This document provides the procedures to install the Foreign Interface Harness (FIH) accessory.

View a video of installing the HP Foreign interface harness (FIH) accessory.

Mean time to repair: 1 minute

Service level: Basic

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cable before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Removal and replacement: HP Foreign interface harness (FIH) solution 199

 Table 2-18 Part information

Part number Part description

B5L31-90902 Foreign Interface Harness (FIH)

Required tools
● No special tools are required to remove this part.

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Make sure that the printer initializes to a Ready state.

Connect a third party solution to the FIH, and then verify it correctly functions.

1. Unpack the FIH accessory

Follow these steps to unpack the FIH accessory.

■ Unpack the accessory from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the
sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect
the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

2. Install the FIH accessory

Follow these steps to install the FIH accessory.

■ Locate the USB connector on the printer formatter. Connect the FIH to this connector

Figure 2-99 Connect the FIH

200 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

3. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: NFC Kit installation

This document provides the procedures to install the NFC kit.

View a video of installing the NFC Kit.

Mean time to repair: 5 minutes

Service level: Basic

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cable before attempting to service the printer.

Unpack the replacement assembly 201

 Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 2-19 Part information

Part number Part description

J8030-61001 Jetdirect Wireless Print Server with NFC Kit

Required tools
● No special tools are required to remove this part.

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Make sure that the printer initializes to a Ready state.

Connect a third party solution to the FIH, and then verify it correctly functions.

1. Unpack the NFC kit

Follow these steps to unpack the NFC kit.

■ Unpack the kit from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the
sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect
the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the part prior to installation.

2. Install the NFC kit

Follow these steps to install the NFC kit.

1. Turn off the power to the product.

202 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

2. Remove the HIP cover.

Install the NFC kit 203

 3. Identify the USB connector in the HIP and attach the appropriate USB cable:

204 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

a. Locate the USB connector that is along one of the short edges. A USB Mini B receptacle
(callout 1.1) is the most common. However, on some models, a USB Mini B plug (callout 1.2) is
used.

Install the NFC kit 205

 b. Select the appropriate cable from the two that are provided.

206 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 c. Plug the USB cable into the socket in the HIP. Note that the USB logo on the connector may
face down on some models of printers/MFPs.

4. Attach the power and grounding ends of the USB cable:

NOTE: Before connecting the NFC accessory to the USB connector, verify that the product power
is turned off.

Install the NFC kit 207

 a. Attach the white power connector of the cable into the corresponding receptacle on the
underside of the NFC accessory with the contacts facing down.

b. Attach the metal ground connector of the cable to the grounding tab on the underside of the

5. Insert the NFC accessory into the HIP recess.

208 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

a. Insert the NFC accessory into the HIP recess using the hook-shaped clips first.

Install the NFC kit 209

 b. Gently push the NFC accessory onto the rounded clips so that it is held securely in place
within the recess.

210 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 6. Turn ON the power to the product. The NFC accessory will light up to confirm the installation is
correct. A wireless network icon will also appear on the control panel.

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 211

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Main board

This document provides the procedures to remove the main board assembly.

View a video of removing the main board.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Intermediate

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cable before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-20 Part information

Part number Part description

JC82-00540A Main board whole unit (E778xx series)

8GR94-60003 Main board whole unit (E783xx series)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.

1. Remove the rear covers

Follow these steps to remove the rear covers.

212 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

1. Unscrew two captive thumbscrews on the formatter cover. Slide the formatter cover to the left, and
then to the right to remove.

Figure 2-100 Remove the formatter cover

2. Remove seven screws, and then remove the rear-bottom cover.

Figure 2-101 Remove the rear-bottom cover

Remove the rear covers 213

 3. Remove six screws (callout 1), and then remove the rear-top cover.

Figure 2-102 Remove the rear-top cover

2. Remove the formatter cage

Follow these steps to remove the formatter cage.

1. Disconnect ten connectors and two cable restraints.

2. Remove four screws and screw-caps, and then remove the left-upper cover.

Figure 2-103 Remove the left-upper cover

214 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 3. Remove one screw from the side of the formatter cage (beneath the left-upper cover location).

Figure 2-104 Remove the formatter cage side screw

4. Remove three screws from the formatter cage face, and then release one tab to remove the
formatter cage.

Figure 2-105 Remove three screws to remove the formatter cage

3. Remove the main board

Follow these steps to remove the main board.

Remove the main board 215

 1. Disconnect 24 connectors and three FFCs on the main board.

Figure 2-106 Remove the main board connectors and screws

2. Remove nine screws, and then remove the main board.

3. Disconnect the MSOK from the removed main board, noting its orientation. Transfer the MSOK to
the replacement main board and install it using the same orientation.

TIP: The main board is marked to show the correct orientation of the MSOK when installed.

IMPORTANT: A Shading Test for the ADF must be completed after replacing the ADF unit or the
Main board.

Figure 2-107 MSOK installation orientation

4. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

216 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Developer unit

This document provides the procedures to remove the developer unit(s).

View a video of removing the developer unit.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Basic

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Disconnect the power cable.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-21 Part information

Part number Part description

JC-96-11666A Kit-HP LaserJet Black Developer Unit (E778xx series)

8JM70-67001 Kit-HP LaserJet Black Developer Unit (E783xx series)

Removal and replacement: Developer unit 217

 Table 2-21 Part information (continued)

Part number Part description

JC-96-11663A Kit-HP LaserJet Yellow Developer Unit (E778xx series)

8JM72-67001 Kit-HP LaserJet Yellow Developer Unit (E783xx series)

JC-96-11664A Kit-HP LaserJet Magenta Developer Unit (E778xx series)

8JM73-67001 Kit-HP LaserJet Magenta Developer Unit (E783xx series)

JC-96-11665A Kit-HP LaserJet Cyan Developer Unit (E778xx series)

8JM71-67001 Kit-HP LaserJet Cyan Developer Unit (E783xx series)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.

1. Remove the developer unit

Follow these steps to remove the developer unit.

218 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

1. Turn off the printer. Open the front door and remove the toner collection unit.

Figure 2-108 Remove the toner collection unit

2. Remove the imaging drum that corresponds with the developer unit being replaced.

3. Fold down the toner supply shutter.

CAUTION: The toner supply cap contains toner. Use caution to avoid spilling toner during removal.

Figure 2-109 Fold down the toner supply shutter

Remove the developer unit 219

 4. Push the shutter in to close the toner supply (callout 1). Grasp the toner supply connection on the
black plastic and wiggle and pull out to disengage the connection from the developing unit. Rotate
the toner supply up (callout 2).

CAUTION: Do not compress or squeeze the gray supply pipe. This supply pipe is filled with toner
and will leak if squeezed.

Figure 2-110 Rotate swivel

220 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

5. Remove 2 screws and then remove the bracket (A). Disconnect the connector.

Figure 2-111 Remove bracket

6. Remove the developer unit.

Figure 2-112 Remove developer unit

NOTE: The carrier in this printer series developer unit cannot be changed. The entire developer
unit must be replaced.

NOTE: When the assembly is installed, make sure that the bracket is seated correctly and that the
bracket screws are installed. Install the toner supply by swiveling down to the normal position, and
make sure the toner supply shutter is pulled up to the "open" position. Reinstall the imaging drum,
then reinstall the toner collection unit.

Remove the developer unit 221

 2. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

3. Special installation instructions (Developer unit)

Also use the following special installation instructions.

1. Fill the empty replacement developer unit with developer powder prior to installation.

IMPORTANT: During filling, place the developer unit on sheets of paper or a disposable cover to
catch any spilled developer powder.

a. Unpack the developer unit and silver packet of developer powder from the kit box.

b. Open the developer unit cover.

CAUTION: Do not touch the silver roller.

c. Carefully open the developer packet, and then distribute the developer powder evenly into the
developer unit.

IMPORTANT: Before opening the packet, shake it three or four times. This prevents the
developer powder from scattering.

d. Close the developer unit cover.

e. Install the developer unit in the printer.

222 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 2. Reset the firmware counter and initialize the toner concentration.

IMPORTANT: The front door must be open at the beginning of this procedure. Do not close the
door until instructed.

a. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, select the Support Tools menu.

b. Select the Service menu.

c. Make sure that Service Access Code is selected in the drop-down menu, and then enter the
service access code.

d. Select the Service Tools menu.

e. On the Information tab, select the Supply Status menu.

f. Select Field Replacement Unit.

g. Select Development Unit (Developer) (CMYK).

h. Select the check box on the right side of the screen for the replaced developer unit.

i. Select Reset, to clear the counter and begin the toner concentration initialization.

j. Close the front door, wait for the toner concentration initialization process to complete, and
then exit service mode (touch the Home button).

Removal and replacement: Imaging drum

This document provides the procedures to remove the imaging drum.

View a video of removing the imaging drum.

Mean time to repair: 5 minutes

Service level: Basic

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Disconnect the power cable.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-22 Part information

Part number Part description

X3A83-67905 Imaging drum (E778xx series)

W9215-67901 Imaging drum (E783xx series)

Removal and replacement: Imaging drum 223

 Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.

1. Remove the imaging drum

Follow these steps to remove the imaging drum.

1. Open the front cover.

Figure 2-113 Open the front cover

2. Open the right door and make sure the latch releases.

224 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

3. Remove the toner collection unit.

Figure 2-114 Remove the toner collection unit.

Remove the imaging drum 225

 4. Turn the locking level counterclockwise.

Figure 2-115 Turn level counterclockwise

226 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 5. Remove the imaging drum.

Figure 2-116 Remove the imaging drum

6. If installing a new imaging drum, remove from the imaging drum from its packaging, and then rotate
the locking lever clockwise until it makes a solid “click”.

NOTE: If you intend to reuse an imaging drum, make sure the imaging drum surface is covered
and not exposed to direct light or sunlight. Cover the imaging drum with a few sheets of paper or
keep it in the original packaging until ready to install. When handling any imaging drum, do not touch
the drum surface.

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using

Unpack the replacement assembly 227

 disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Front cover open switch

This document provides the procedures to remove the front cover open switch assembly.

View a video of removing the front cover open switch.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Intermediate

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Disconnect the power cable.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-23 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-00466A APS sensor assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.

1. Remove the front cover open switch

Follow these steps to remove the front cover open switch.

228 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

1. Open the right door.

Figure 2-117 Open right door

2. Remove two screw-caps and two screws (callout 1).

NOTE: Do not dislodge the power button (callout 2) when the cover is removed.

Figure 2-118 Remove screw-caps and screws

3. GX/z models: Remove two screws.

NOTE: Do not dislodge the power button when the cover is removed.

Remove the front cover open switch 229

 Figure 2-119 Remove screws

4. LX/dn Models: Remove one screw inside of right door.

Figure 2-120 Remove one screw

230 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

5. GX/z models: Remove two screws.

Figure 2-121 Remove two screws

6. Remove the front-top cover.

Figure 2-122 Remove the front top cover

7. Open the front door. Remove the Toner Collection Unit (TCU). Remove all toner cartridges.

8. Remove three tapping screws and remove the top front cover.

Remove the front cover open switch 231

 9. Remove eight screws, and then remove the front inner cover.

Figure 2-123 Remove screws and front inner cover

10. Remove one screw, and then remove the cover-open switch.

Figure 2-124 Remove screw and cover-open switch

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

232 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Right door open switch

This document provides the procedures to remove the right door open switch.

View a video of removing and replacing the right door open switch.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Intermediate

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Disconnect the power cable.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-24 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-01467A Right door open switch

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

Removal and replacement: Right door open switch 233

 After performing service
Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.

1. Remove the right door open switch

Follow these steps to remove the right door open switch.

1. Remove the rear cover. Remove one screw securing the sensor.

Figure 2-125 Remove rear cover and screw

2. Remove the micro-switch.

Figure 2-126 Remove micro-switch

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

234 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: 500 GB Main PCA HDD

This procedure is for removing the 500GB main PCA HDD installed beneath the rear-exit cover.

View a video of removing and replacing the 500GB Main PCA HDD.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Intermediate

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Disconnect the power cable.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-25 Part information

Part number Part description

L41606-011 Main PCA HDD 500

Removal and replacement: 500 GB Main PCA HDD 235

 Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.

1. Remove the main disk drive

Follow these steps to remove the main disk drive.

1. Remove the inner finisher or paper pass, if installed.

2. Remove two screw-caps and two screws from the power-switch cover.

Figure 2-127 Remove the power-switch cover

236 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

3. Remove two screw-caps and two screws, and then remove the exit tray.

Figure 2-128 Remove screw-caps and screws

4. Remove one screw and cover exit right.

Figure 2-129 Remove the cover exit right

Remove the main disk drive 237

 5. Remove four screws and three screw covers. Remove the cover exit rear by pulling from the right
and rotating out.

Figure 2-130 Remove screws and cover exit rear

6. Remove four screws. Disconnect the cable and remove the main disk drive assembly.

Figure 2-131 Remove screws, disconnect cable and remove main disk drive assembly

7. Remove four screws, and then remove main disk drive from its bracket.

8. Install the new main disk drive assembly.

TIP: When reinstalling, make sure the plastic locator tabs on the rear exit cover are seated
correctly.

238 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

2. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Control panel

This document provides the procedures to remove the control panel assembly.

View a video of removing and replacing the control panel (E72520-E72530).

View a video of removing and replacing the control panel (E77820-E77830).

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Intermediate

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cable before attempting to service the printer.

Unpack the replacement assembly 239

 Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-26 Part information

Part number Part description

B5L47-60101 Control panel assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.

1. Remove the control-panel bezel

Follow these steps to remove the control-panel bezel.

1. Open the document feeder, and then remove three screws.

Figure 2-132 Remove the document feeder bezel

2. Place the control panel in the upright position.

240 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 3. Gently pry the control-panel bezel from the center screw hole, and then pry from the center of the
control-panel bezel to the edges to release.

CAUTION: Do not pry against the scanner glass when removing the control-panel bezel.

2. Remove the control-panel

Follow these steps to remove the control-panel.

1. Place the control panel in the upright position.

2. Disconnect one FFC, one connector, and one HDMI connector (callout 1), and then remove two
screws on the control-panel frame.

Figure 2-133 Remove the control panel screws and disconnect connectors

3. Remove the USB interconnect cable from its retainer and reroute out of the way.

Figure 2-134 Remove the USB interconnect cable

Remove the control-panel 241

 4. Lift the control panel up from the front to release the tabs at the rear, and then remove the control
panel.

TIP: Align the four tabs at the rear or control panel, and then snap in the control panel.

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Keyboard

This document provides the procedures to remove the keyboard assembly.

View a video of removing and replacing the keyboard (E72520-E72530).

View a video of removing and replacing the keyboard (E77820-E77830).

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Basic

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

242 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Before performing service
○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cable before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-27 Part information

Part number Part description

B5L47-60102 US English Keyboard Assy

B5L47-60103 UK English Keyboard Assy

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.

1. Remove the control-panel bezel

Follow these steps to remove the control-panel bezel.

Remove the control-panel bezel 243

 1. Open the document feeder, and then remove three screws.

Figure 2-135 Remove the document feeder bezel

2. Place the control panel in the upright position.

3. Gently pry the control-panel bezel from the center screw hole, and then pry from the center of the
control-panel bezel to the edges to release.

CAUTION: Do not pry against the scanner glass when removing the control-panel bezel.

2. Remove the keyboard

Follow these steps to remove the keyboard.

1. Disconnect one FFC.

Figure 2-136 Disconnect one FFC

244 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 2. Slide the keyboard out, and then depress two latches to remove the keyboard.

Figure 2-137 Remove the control-panel keyboard

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Unpack the replacement assembly 245

 Exit assemblies
View the exit assemblies exploded view, parts list, and repair procedures.

Exit assembly
Parts diagram and parts list for the exit assemblies.

Figure 2-138 Exit assembly

Table 2-28 Exit assembly

Ref Part number Description Qty

No

2 0604-001393 Photo interrupter (fuser out sensor) 2

5 JC61-07185A Spring, TS 1

6 JC66-04339A Actuator-bin full exit 1

246 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Table 2-28 Exit assembly (continued)

Ref Part number Description Qty

No

7 JC66-02218A Actuator, full exit 1

8 JC66-02278A Actuator, full exit 1

10-1 JC66-03183A Roller, face down exit 1

10-2 JC61-04799A Upper exit guide 1

11 JC90-01133A Exit guide, lower 1

Exit assembly 247

 Alphabetical parts list
Table 2-29 Alphabetical parts list

Description Part number Table and page

Actuator, full exit JC66-02218A Exit assembly on page 246

Actuator, full exit JC66-02278A Exit assembly on page 246

Actuator-bin full exit JC66-04339A Exit assembly on page 246

Exit guide, lower JC90-01133A Exit assembly on page 246

Photo interrupter (fuser out sensor) 0604-001393 Exit assembly on page 246

Roller, face down exit JC66-03183A Exit assembly on page 246

Spring, TS JC61-07185A Exit assembly on page 246

Upper exit guide JC61-04799A Exit assembly on page 246

248 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Numerical parts list
Table 2-30 Numerical parts list

Part number Description Table and page

0604-001393 Photo interrupter (fuser out sensor) Exit assembly on page 246

JC61-04799A Upper exit guide Exit assembly on page 246

JC61-07185A Spring, TS Exit assembly on page 246

JC66-02218A Actuator, full exit Exit assembly on page 246

JC66-02278A Actuator, full exit Exit assembly on page 246

JC66-03183A Roller, face down exit Exit assembly on page 246

JC66-04339A Actuator-bin full exit Exit assembly on page 246

JC90-01133A Exit guide, lower Exit assembly on page 246

Cassettes tray 2/3

View the cassettes tray 2/3 exploded view, parts list, and repair procedures.

Cassettes Tray 2/3

Parts diagram and parts list for the cassettes tray 2/3.

Numerical parts list 249

 Figure 2-139 Cassettes Tray 2/3

Table 2-29 Cassettes Tray 2/3

Ref Part number Description Qty Repair procedure

No

0 JC90-01619A Cassette, Tray 2 1 Not applicable

0 5QJ90-60109 Cassette, Tray 3 1 Not applicable

250 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Alphabetical parts list
Table 2-30 Alphabetical parts list

Description Part number Table and page

Cassette, Tray 2 JC90-01619A Cassettes Tray 2/3 on page

250

Cassette, Tray 3 5QJ90-60109 Cassettes Tray 2/3 on page

250

Alphabetical parts list 251

 Numerical parts list
Table 2-31 Numerical parts list

Part number Description Table and page

5QJ90-60109 Cassette, Tray 3 Cassettes Tray 2/3 on page

250

JC90-01619A Cassette, Tray 2 Cassettes Tray 2/3 on page

250

Main drive assembly

View the main drive assembly exploded view, parts list, and repair procedures.

Main drive
Parts diagram and parts list for the main drive.

Figure 2-140 Main drive

Table 2-30 Main drive

Ref Part number Description Qty Repair procedure

No

1 JC31-00123A Motor, bldc 5 Not applicable

252 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Table 2-30 Main drive (continued)

Ref Part number Description Qty Repair procedure

No

3 JC93-00452 Drive motor, step 1 Not applicable

A

4-1 0604-001393 Photo interrupter 4 Not applicable

4-2 JC61-04538A OPC sensor holder 4 Not applicable

5 JC93-00914B Main sub drive 1 Not applicable

Main drive 253

 Alphabetical parts list
Table 2-31 Alphabetical parts list

Description Part number Table and page

Drive motor, step JC93-00452A Main drive on page 252

Main sub drive JC93-00914B Main drive on page 252

Motor, bldc JC31-00123A Main drive on page 252

OPC sensor holder JC61-04538A Main drive on page 252

Photo interrupter 0604-001393 Main drive on page 252

254 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Numerical parts list
Table 2-32 Numerical parts list

Part number Description Table and page

0604-001393 Photo interrupter Main drive on page 252

JC31-00123A Motor, bldc Main drive on page 252

JC61-04538A OPC sensor holder Main drive on page 252

JC93-00452A Drive motor, step Main drive on page 252

JC93-00914B Main sub drive Main drive on page 252

Fuser output drive

View the fuser output drive exploded view, parts list, and repair procedures.

Fuser output drive

Parts diagram and parts list for the fuser output drive.

Figure 2-141 Fuser output drive

Numerical parts list 255

 Table 2-31 Fuser output drive

Ref Part number Description Qty Repair procedure

No

8 JC31-00123B Motor, bldc 1 Not applicable

9 JC93-00452 Drive motor, step 1 Not applicable

A

256 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Alphabetical parts list
Table 2-32 Alphabetical parts list

Description Part number Table and page

Drive motor, step JC93-00452A Fuser output drive on page 256

Motor, bldc JC31-00123B Fuser output drive on page 256

Alphabetical parts list 257

 Numerical parts list
Table 2-33 Numerical parts list

Part number Description Table and page

JC31-00123B Motor, bldc Fuser output drive on page 256

JC93-00452A Drive motor, step Fuser output drive on page 256

Main frame assembly

View the main frame assembly exploded view, parts list, and repair procedures.

Main engine frame

Parts diagram and parts list for the main engine frame.

Figure 2-142 Main engine frame

Table 2-32 Main engine frame

Ref Part number Description Qty Repair procedure

No

1 JC61-04900A Registration stopper 1 Not applicable

2 JC66-03164A Feeding Duct Shaft 4 Not applicable

3 JC66-03166A Idle feeding duct gear 4 Not applicable

258 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Table 2-32 Main engine frame (continued)

Ref Part number Description Qty Repair procedure

No

4 JC93-00078 Registration Cleaner 1 Not applicable

C

5 JC93-00915B Main drive 1 Removal and replacement:

Main drive unit on page 260

6 JC93-00441A Fuser exit drive 1 Removal and replacement:

Fuser/exit drive assembly on
page 265

7 JC93-00442 Pickup drive (For E77822, E77825, E77830) 2 Not applicable

A

7 5QJ90-64001 Pickup drive (For E78323, E78325, E78330) 2 Not applicable

8 JC93-00443 Registration assembly 1 Removal and replacement:

A Registration assembly on
page 329

9 JC93-00444 Feed drive 1 Removal and replacement:

A Feed drive assembly on page
269

10 JC93-00445 TCU drive 1 Removal and replacement:

A Toner collection unit drive on
page 273

11 JC93-00446 Toner supply drive (For E77822, E77825, 4 Removal and replacement:
B E77830) Toner supply drive assembly
on page 276

11 5QJ83-6400 Toner supply drive (For E78323, E78325, 4 Removal and replacement:
2 E78330) Toner supply drive assembly
on page 276

12 JC93-00483 Toner Duct (For E77822, E77825, E77830) 4 Removal and replacement:
B Toner duct assembly on page
285

12 5QJ94-40001 Toner Duct (For E78323, E78325, E78330) 4 Removal and replacement:
Toner duct assembly on page
285

13-1 JC93-00161A Fan, type 7 Fuser (For E77822, E77825, E77830) 1 Removal and replacement:
Fuser-duct fan on page 289

13-1 JC31-00161A Fan, type 7 Fuser (For E78323, E78325, E78330) 1 Removal and replacement:
Fuser-duct fan on page 289

15 JC93-00511A Main frame first pickup 1 Removal and replacement:

Pickup drive units on page
293

16 JC93-01441A Main frame second pickup 1 Removal and replacement:

Pickup drive units on page
293

17 JC93-00536 Main feed first color 1 Not applicable

A

18 JC93-00537 Main feed second 1 Not applicable

D

Main engine frame 259

 Table 2-32 Main engine frame (continued)

Ref Part number Description Qty Repair procedure

No

Not shown 0604-001393 Feed sensor 1 1 Removal and replacement:

Feed sensor 1 on page 297

Not shown 0604-001393 Feed sensor 2 1 Removal and replacement:

Feed sensor 2 on page 302

Not shown JC93-00895 Automatic color registration (ACR) (For 1 Removal and replacement:
A E77822, E77825, E77830) Automatic color registration
(ACR) on page 307

Not shown JC93-01803A Automatic color registration (ACR) (For 1 Removal and replacement:
E78323, E78325, E78330) Automatic color registration
(ACR) on page 307

Not shown JC93-00492 Sensor, toner collection unit full 1 Removal and replacement:
A Toner collection full sensor on
page 282

Not shown 0604-001381 Photo interrupter (fuser out sensor) (For 1 Removal and replacement:
E77822, E77825, E77830) Fuser out sensor on page 314

Not shown 0604-001393 Photo interrupter (fuser out sensor) (For 1 Removal and replacement:
E78323, E78325, E78330) Fuser out sensor on page 314

Not shown 0604-001393 Photo interrupter (duplex sensor) 1 Removal and replacement:
Duplex sensor and loop
sensor on page 317

Not shown 0604-001393 Photo interrupter (loop sensor) 1 Removal and replacement:
Duplex sensor and loop
sensor on page 317

Not shown JC39-02112A Harness, engine side for DCF with connector 1 Not applicable

Removal and replacement: Main drive unit

This document provides the procedures to remove the main drive unit assembly.

View a video of removing the Main drive unit.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Intermediate

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Disconnect the power cable.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

260 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Table 2-33 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-00915B Main drive unit assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.

1. Remove the TCU

Follow these steps to remove the TCU.

■ Open the front door and remove the toner collection unit (TCU).

Figure 2-143 Remove the TCU

2. Remove the imaging units

Follow these steps to remove the imaging units.

■ Remove all imaging units.

Remove the TCU 261

 3. Remove the rear covers
Follow these steps to remove the rear covers.

1. Unscrew two captive thumbscrews on the formatter cover. Slide the formatter cover to the left, and
then to the right to remove.

Figure 2-144 Remove the formatter cover

2. Remove seven screws, and then remove the rear-bottom cover.

Figure 2-145 Remove the rear-bottom cover

262 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 3. Remove six screws (callout 1), and then remove the rear-top cover.

Figure 2-146 Remove the rear-top cover

4. Remove the main drive unit

Follow these steps to remove the main drive unit.

1. Disconnect the alienation motor and the ITB motor.

2. Remove eight screws, and then remove the main drive unit.

IMPORTANT: Remove and replace the screws in the order indicated on the chassis.

Figure 2-147 Remove screws and the main drive unit

Remove the main drive unit 263

 3. Remove the connector(s) for the motor(s) to be replaced.

NOTE: The following graphics show all the connectors associated with the main motors for
reference purposes.

Figure 2-148 Main drive motor electrical connectors – top view

Figure 2-149 Main drive motor electrical connectors – photo interrupters

NOTE: To remove the photo interrupters, release the tabs on the back side. Use caution not to
damage the plastic hooks.

5. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

264 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Fuser/exit drive assembly

This document provides the procedures to remove the fuser/exit drive assembly.

View a video of removing the Fuser/exit drive assembly.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Intermediate

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Disconnect the power cable.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-34 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-00441A Fuser/exit drive assembly

Removal and replacement: Fuser/exit drive assembly 265

 Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.

1. Remove the rear covers

Follow these steps to remove the rear covers.

1. Unscrew two captive thumbscrews on the formatter cover. Slide the formatter cover to the left, and
then to the right to remove.

Figure 2-150 Remove the formatter cover

266 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 2. Remove seven screws, and then remove the rear-bottom cover.

Figure 2-151 Remove the rear-bottom cover

3. Remove six screws (callout 1), and then remove the rear-top cover.

Figure 2-152 Remove the rear-top cover

2. Remove the fuser/exit drive unit

Follow these steps to remove the fuser/exit drive unit.

Remove the fuser/exit drive unit 267

 1. Disconnect the connector and remove the cable from the cable restraint. Remove the cable from
the guides on the duct housing. Remove three screws, and then remove the Fuser-Duct.

Figure 2-153 Remove the fuser-duct

2. Disconnect two motor connectors. Remove three screws, and then remove the fuser/exit drive unit.

Figure 2-154 Remove screws and the fuser/exit drive unit

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

268 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Feed drive assembly

This document provides the procedures to remove the Feed drive assembly .

View a video of removing the Feed drive assembly.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Intermediate

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Disconnect the power cable.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-35 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-00444A Feed drive assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

Removal and replacement: Feed drive assembly 269

 After performing service
Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.

1. Remove the rear covers

Follow these steps to remove the rear covers.

1. Unscrew two captive thumbscrews on the formatter cover. Slide the formatter cover to the left, and
then to the right to remove.

Figure 2-155 Remove the formatter cover

270 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 2. Remove seven screws, and then remove the rear-bottom cover.

Figure 2-156 Remove the rear-bottom cover

3. Remove six screws (callout 1), and then remove the rear-top cover.

Figure 2-157 Remove the rear-top cover

2. Remove the feed drive unit

Follow these steps to remove the feed drive unit.

Remove the feed drive unit 271

 ■ Release the cable from two cable restraints and disconnect the connector. Remove three yellow
screws, and then remove the Feed Drive unit.

Figure 2-158 Remove screws and feed drive unit

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

272 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Removal and replacement: Toner collection unit drive
This document provides the procedures to remove the toner collection unit drive assembly.

View a video of removing the toner collection unit drive.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Intermediate

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Disconnect the power cable.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-36 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-00445A Toner collection unit drive assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.

1. Remove the toner cartridges

Follow these steps to remove the toner cartridges.

Removal and replacement: Toner collection unit drive 273

 ■ Open the front door and remove the toner collection unit and toner cartridges.

Figure 2-159 Remove the TCU

2. Remove the front inner cover

Follow these steps to remove the front inner cover.

■ Remove seven screws, and then remove the front inner cover.

NOTE: The TCU cleaning blade must be removed to remove the front inner cover.

Figure 2-160 Remove the front inner cover

274 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

3. Remove the toner collection drive unit
Follow these steps to remove the toner collection drive unit.

■ Disconnect two connectors. Remove two screws, and then remove the toner collection unit drive
unit.

Figure 2-161 Remove screws and toner collection unit drive unit

4. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Remove the toner collection drive unit 275

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Toner supply drive assembly

This document provides the procedures to remove the toner supply drive assembly.

View a video of removing the toner supply drive unit.

Mean time to repair: 20 minutes

Service level: Intermediate

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Disconnect the power cable.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-37 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-00446B Toner supply drive assembly (E778xx series)

5QJ83-64002 Toner supply drive assembly (E783xx series)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.

1. Remove the rear covers

Follow these steps to remove the rear covers.

276 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

1. Unscrew two captive thumbscrews on the formatter cover. Slide the formatter cover to the left, and
then to the right to remove.

Figure 2-162 Remove the formatter cover

2. Remove seven screws, and then remove the rear-bottom cover.

Figure 2-163 Remove the rear-bottom cover

Remove the rear covers 277

 3. Remove six screws (callout 1), and then remove the rear-top cover.

Figure 2-164 Remove the rear-top cover

2. Remove the formatter cage

Follow these steps to remove the formatter cage.

1. Disconnect ten connectors and two cable restraints.

2. Remove four screws and screw-caps, and then remove the left-upper cover.

Figure 2-165 Remove the left-upper cover

278 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 3. Remove one screw from the side of the formatter cage (beneath the left-upper cover location).

Figure 2-166 Remove the formatter cage side screw

4. Remove three screws from the formatter cage face, and then release one tab to remove the
formatter cage.

Figure 2-167 Remove three screws to remove the formatter cage

3. Remove the main board cage

Follow these steps to remove the main board cage.

1. Remove the FFC retainer at the bottom-right.

Remove the main board cage 279

 2. Pinch the ground strap (callout 1) to remove it from the top of the cage.

Figure 2-168 Remove the ground strap

3. Open seven cable retainers.

4. Remove four screws.

Figure 2-169 Remove the main board cage screws

5. Lift the main board cage up slightly to release one bracket, and then pull out to remove.

4. Remove the toner supply drive unit

Follow these steps to remove the toner supply drive unit.

280 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 ■ Disconnect two connectors, one on the body and one inline. Remove three screws, release one cable
harness, and then remove the Toner Supply Drive unit by carefully releasing the snaps.

Figure 2-170 Remove the toner supply drive

NOTE:

● To remove the K Toner supply drive unit, first remove the main drive unit.

● The toner supply drive units are interchangeable.

5. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 281

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Toner collection full sensor

This document provides the procedures to remove the toner collection full sensor.

View a video of removing the toner collection full sensor.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Basic

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Disconnect the power cable.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-38 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-00492A Toner collection full sensor

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.

1. Remove the toner cartridges and TCU

Follow these steps to remove the toner cartridges and TCU.

282 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 ■ Open the front door and remove the toner collection unit and toner cartridges.

Figure 2-171 Remove the TCU

2. Remove the front inner cover

Follow these steps to remove the front inner cover.

■ Remove seven screws, and then remove the front inner cover.

NOTE: The TCU cleaning blade must be removed to remove the front inner cover.

Figure 2-172 Remove the front inner cover

Remove the front inner cover 283

 3. Remove the toner collection full sensor
Follow these steps to remove the toner collection full sensor.

1. Release the cable from three restraints.

2. Disconnect one inline connector.

3. Remove one screw, and then remove the sensor.

Figure 2-173 Remove the TCU full sensor

4. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

284 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Toner duct assembly

This document provides the procedures to remove the toner duct assembly.

View a video of removing the toner duct assembly.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Intermediate

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Disconnect the power cable.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-39 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-00483B Toner duct assembly (E778xx series)

5QJ94-40001 Toner duct assembly (E783xx series)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.

1. Remove the toner cartridges and TCU

Follow these steps to remove the toner cartridges and TCU.

Removal and replacement: Toner duct assembly 285

 ■ Open the front door and remove the toner collection unit and toner cartridges.

Figure 2-174 Remove the TCU

2. Remove the front inner cover

Follow these steps to remove the front inner cover.

■ Remove seven screws, and then remove the front inner cover.

NOTE: The TCU cleaning blade must be removed to remove the front inner cover.

Figure 2-175 Remove the front inner cover

286 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

3. Remove the toner duct assembly
Follow these steps to remove the toner duct assembly.

1. Close the shutter duct on the developer unit.

Figure 2-176 Close the developer unit shutter duct for the station being replaced

2. Remove the shutter from the top of the developer unit.

Figure 2-177 Remove the developer unit shutter duct

3. Remove two screws, and then remove the cover at the front of the duct assembly.

CAUTION: Be careful not to spill toner while removing the toner duct assembly.

Remove the toner duct assembly 287

 Figure 2-178 Remove the toner duct cover

4. Remove the toner duct assembly.

Figure 2-179 Remove the toner duct assembly

IMPORTANT: The toner supply shutters must be in the open (up) position whenever performing
service in this area of the printer.

4. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

288 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Fuser-duct fan

This document provides the procedures to remove the fuser-duct fan assembly.

View a video of removing the fuser-duct fan assembly.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Intermediate

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Disconnect the power cable.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-40 Part information

Part number Part description

JC67-00570A Upper fuser-duct fan assembly

JC67-00571A Lower fuser-duct fan assembly

Removal and replacement: Fuser-duct fan 289

 Table 2-40 Part information (continued)

Part number Part description

JC93-00161A Fan-Type 7 fuser

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.

1. Remove the rear covers

Follow these steps to remove the rear covers.

1. Unscrew two captive thumbscrews on the formatter cover. Slide the formatter cover to the left, and
then to the right to remove.

Figure 2-180 Remove the formatter cover

290 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 2. Remove seven screws, and then remove the rear-bottom cover.

Figure 2-181 Remove the rear-bottom cover

3. Remove six screws (callout 1), and then remove the rear-top cover.

Figure 2-182 Remove the rear-top cover

2. Remove the fuser duct

Follow these steps to remove the fuser duct.

Remove the fuser duct 291

 1. Disconnect the connector and remove the cable from the cable restraint. Remove the cable from
the guides on the duct housing. Remove three yellow screws, and then remove the fuser-duct.

Figure 2-183 Remove the fuser-duct

2. Release the fan by separating the fuser-duct.

Figure 2-184 Separate the fuser-duct

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

292 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Pickup drive units

This document provides the procedures to remove the Pickup drive units.

View a video of removing the Pickup drive units.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Intermediate

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Disconnect the power cable.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-41 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-00511A 1st pickup drive assembly

JC93-01441A 2nd pickup drive assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

Removal and replacement: Pickup drive units 293

 After performing service
Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.

1. Remove the rear covers

Follow these steps to remove the rear covers.

1. Unscrew two captive thumbscrews on the formatter cover. Slide the formatter cover to the left, and
then to the right to remove.

Figure 2-185 Remove the formatter cover

294 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 2. Remove seven screws, and then remove the rear-bottom cover.

Figure 2-186 Remove the rear-bottom cover

3. Remove six screws (callout 1), and then remove the rear-top cover.

Figure 2-187 Remove the rear-top cover

2. Remove the pickup drive unit

Follow these steps to remove the pickup drive unit.

Remove the pickup drive unit 295

 1. Release the cable from the cable restraint and disconnect the connector. Remove three yellow
screws, and then remove the Pickup Drive unit 1.

Figure 2-188 Remove screws and pickup drive unit 1

2. Disconnect the connector. Remove three screws, and then remove the Pickup Drive unit 2.

Figure 2-189 Remove screws and pickup drive unit 2

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

296 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Feed sensor 1

This document provides the procedures to remove the feed sensor 1.

View a video of removing and replacing the feed sensor 1.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Basic

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Disconnect the power cable.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-42 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Feed sensor 1

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

Removal and replacement: Feed sensor 1 297

 After performing service
Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.

1. Remove the right door

Follow these steps to remove the right door.

NOTE: Remove second exit drive if installed.

1. Remove three screws, and then remove the cover (A).

Figure 2-190 Remove cover

298 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

2. Disconnect the right door connector.

Figure 2-191 Disconnect right door connector

3. Release the right hinge (callout 1).

CAUTION: The right hinge spring tension can be dangerous. Use caution when releasing the right
hinge to avoid injury.

Figure 2-192 Release right hinge

Remove the right door 299

 4. Release the left dampener (callout 1).

Figure 2-193 Release left dampener

5. Remove the right door.

NOTE: Open the lower access door. If there is an HCI or 2x520 input device, release the dampener
to clear the lower right door. Remove clockwise.

Figure 2-194 Remove right door

2. Remove feed sensor 1

Follow these steps to remove feed sensor 1.

300 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 1. Remove two screws, and then remove the sensor cover.

Figure 2-195 Remove screws and sensor cover

2. Disconnect the connector, remove one screw, and then remove the feed sensor cover.

Figure 2-196 Remove feed sensor

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

Unpack the replacement assembly 301

 http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Feed sensor 2

This document provides the procedures to remove the feed sensor 2.

View a video of removing and replacing the feed sensor 2.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Basic

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Disconnect the power cable.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-43 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Feed sensor 2

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

302 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 After performing service
Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.

Remove the right door

Follow these steps to remove the right door.

NOTE: Remove second exit drive if installed.

1. Remove three screws, and then remove the cover (A).

Figure 2-197 Remove cover

Remove the right door 303

 2. Disconnect the right door connector.

Figure 2-198 Disconnect right door connector

3. Release the right hinge (callout 1).

CAUTION: The right hinge spring tension can be dangerous. Use caution when releasing the right
hinge to avoid injury.

Figure 2-199 Release right hinge

304 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 4. Release the left dampener (callout 1).

Figure 2-200 Release left dampener

5. Remove the right door.

NOTE: Open the lower access door. If there is an HCI or 2x520 input device, release the dampener
to clear the lower right door. Remove clockwise.

Figure 2-201 Remove right door

Remove feed sensor 2

Follow these steps to remove feed sensor 2.

Remove feed sensor 2 305

 1. Remove one screw, and then remove the Feed Unit (A).

Figure 2-202 Remove screw and feed unit

2. Remove three screws, and then remove the bracket (B).

Figure 2-203 Remove screws and bracket

3. Disconnect the connector, and then remove the feed sensor 2.

Figure 2-204 Remove feed sensor 2

Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

306 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Automatic color registration (ACR)

This document provides the procedures to remove the automatic color registration assembly (ACR)
assembly.

View a video of removing the automatic color registration (ACR) assembly.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Intermediate

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Disconnect the power cable.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-44 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-00895A Automatic Color Registration (E778xx series)

JC93-01803A Automatic Color Registration (E783xx series)

Removal and replacement: Automatic color registration (ACR) 307

 Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.

1. Remove the right door

Follow these steps to remove the right door.

NOTE: Remove second exit drive if installed.

1. Remove three screws, and then remove the cover (A).

Figure 2-205 Remove cover

308 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

2. Disconnect the right door connector.

Figure 2-206 Disconnect right door connector

3. Release the right hinge (callout 1).

CAUTION: The right hinge spring tension can be dangerous. Use caution when releasing the right
hinge to avoid injury.

Figure 2-207 Release right hinge

Remove the right door 309

 4. Release the left dampener (callout 1).

Figure 2-208 Release left dampener

5. Remove the right door.

NOTE: Open the lower access door. If there is an HCI or 2x520 input device, release the dampener
to clear the lower right door. Remove clockwise.

Figure 2-209 Remove right door

2. Remove the color plane registration unit

Follow these steps to remove the color plane registration unit.

310 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

1. Remove two screws, and then remove the feed sensor cover.

Figure 2-210 Remove the feed sensor cover

2. Remove the black plastic bushing retainer at the rear of the REGI unit, disconnect one connector,
and then remove two screws at the front and rear of the REGI unit.

Figure 2-211 Remove the REGI unit

3. Release the front side of the REGI unit first, and then release the back side to remove.

IMPORTANT: Note the bushings on the REGI assembly—they are not retained and can fall from the
assembly during removal.

Remove the color plane registration unit 311

 4. Locate and remove the clip at the rear (make note of the orientation of the spring and the clip
before removal).

5. Release the spring from the hook at the rear.

6. Slide the shutter toward rear.

7. Remove the spring (make note of the orientation of the spring before removal).

8. Remove four screws in the cover.

9. Release the left cover at the front and slide off at the rear of the assembly.

312 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 10. Replace the sensor (remove two screws and one connector) or thermistor (remove one screw and
one connector).

11. Disconnect the thermistor cable and three connectors at the sensor PCA.

NOTE: After replacing the CPR sensor assembly, make sure the assembly rests forward, but
moves backward freely.

12. A Color Plane Registration must be performed from the Diagnostics menu whenever a sensor is
replaced.

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 313

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Fuser out sensor

This document provides the procedures to remove the fuser out sensor.

View a video of removing and replacing the fuser out sensor.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Basic

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Disconnect the power cable.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-45 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001381 Fuser out sensor (E778xx series)

0604-001393 Fuser out sensor (E783xx series)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.

Remove the fuser out sensor

Follow these steps to remove the fuser out sensor.

314 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

1. Remove two screws and two plastic guides. Lift up the right-door.

Figure 2-212 Lift right-door

2. Disconnect the connector and remove the cable from the cable guide. Remove the right-door exit.
Use caution as the springs are not retained.

Figure 2-213 Remove right-door exit

Remove the fuser out sensor 315

 3. Remove three screws (plastic self-tapping), and then separate the right-door exit.

Figure 2-214 Remove screws and separate right-door exit

4. Disconnect the connector and remove the fuser-out sensor.

TIP: When removing the sensor lift the flag, compress the bottom tabs and push from hole, and
then rotate and release the top tabs.

Figure 2-215 Disconnect connector and remove fuser-out sensor

Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

316 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Duplex sensor and loop sensor

This document provides the procedures to remove the duplex sensor and loop sensor.

Mean time to repair: 5 minutes

Service level: Basic

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cable before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-46 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Duplex sensor

0604-001393 Loop sensor

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Removal and replacement: Duplex sensor and loop sensor 317

 Post service test
Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.

Remove the duplex sensor and loop sensor

Follow these steps to remove the duplex sensor and loop sensor.

1. Push down on transfer roller assembly at the front to release one tab. Move the transfer roller
assembly slightly toward the back, and then release one tab. Rotate the transfer roller assembly
outward to remove.

Figure 2-216 Remove transfer roller assembly

2. Remove one screw. Turn over the Guide-transfer roller Upper.

Figure 2-217 Remove screw and turn over guide-transfer roller upper

318 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 3. Remove the duplex sensor (A) and loop sensor (B). To remove the sensors, remove two screws,
pinch the tabs and push to release the sensors. Use caution while handling the plastic snaps as
they can become damaged when handled with force.

Figure 2-218 Remove duplex and loop sensors

Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Unpack the replacement assembly 319

 Alphabetical parts list
Table 2-5 Alphabetical parts list

Description Part number Table and page

Automatic color registration (ACR) (For E77822, E77825, E77830) JC93-00895A Main engine frame on page 258

Automatic color registration (ACR) (For E78323, E78325, E78330) JC93-01803A Main engine frame on page 258

Fan, type 7 Fuser (For E77822, E77825, E77830) JC93-00161A Main engine frame on page 258

Fan, type 7 Fuser (For E78323, E78325, E78330) JC31-00161A Main engine frame on page 258

Feed drive JC93-00444A Main engine frame on page 258

Feed sensor 1 0604-001393 Main engine frame on page 258

Feed sensor 2 0604-001393 Main engine frame on page 258

Feeding Duct Shaft JC66-03164A Main engine frame on page 258

Fuser exit drive JC93-00441A Main engine frame on page 258

Harness, engine side for DCF with connector JC39-02112A Main engine frame on page 258

Idle feeding duct gear Main engine frame on page 258

Main drive JC93-00915B Main engine frame on page 258

Main feed first color JC93-00536A Main engine frame on page 258

Main feed second JC93-00537D Main engine frame on page 258

Main frame first pickup JC93-00511A Main engine frame on page 258

Main frame second pickup JC93-01441A Main engine frame on page 258

Photo interrupter (duplex sensor) 0604-001393 Main engine frame on page 258

Photo interrupter (fuser out sensor) (For E77822, E77825, E77830) 0604-001381 Main engine frame on page 258

Photo interrupter (fuser out sensor) (For E78323, E78325, E78330) 0604-001393 Main engine frame on page 258

Photo interrupter (loop sensor) 0604-001393 Main engine frame on page 258

Pickup drive (For E77822, E77825, E77830) JC93-00442A Main engine frame on page 258

Pickup drive (For E78323, E78325, E78330) 5QJ90-64001 Main engine frame on page 258

Registration Cleaner JC93-00078C Main engine frame on page 258

Registration assembly JC93-00443A Main engine frame on page 258

Registration stopper JC61-04900A Main engine frame on page 258

Sensor, toner collection unit full JC93-00492A Main engine frame on page 258

TCU drive JC93-00445A Main engine frame on page 258

Toner Duct (For E77822, E77825, E77830) JC93-00483B Main engine frame on page 258

Toner Duct (For E78323, E78325, E78330) 5QJ94-40001 Main engine frame on page 258

Toner supply drive (For E77822, E77825, E77830) JC93-00446B Main engine frame on page 258

Toner supply drive (For E78323, E78325, E78330) 5QJ83-64002 Main engine frame on page 258

320 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Numerical parts list
Table 2-6 Numerical parts list

Part number Description Table and page

Idle feeding duct gear Main engine frame on page 258

5QJ90-64001 Pickup drive (For E78323, E78325, E78330) Main engine frame on page 258

0604-001381 Photo interrupter (fuser out sensor) (For E77822, E77825, E77830) Main engine frame on page 258

0604-001393 Feed sensor 1 Main engine frame on page 258

0604-001393 Feed sensor 2 Main engine frame on page 258

0604-001393 Photo interrupter (duplex sensor) Main engine frame on page 258

0604-001393 Photo interrupter (fuser out sensor) (For E78323, E78325, E78330) Main engine frame on page 258

0604-001393 Photo interrupter (loop sensor) Main engine frame on page 258

5QJ83-64002 Toner supply drive (For E78323, E78325, E78330) Main engine frame on page 258

5QJ94-40001 Toner Duct (For E78323, E78325, E78330) Main engine frame on page 258

JC31-00161A Fan, type 7 Fuser (For E78323, E78325, E78330) Main engine frame on page 258

JC39-02112A Harness, engine side for DCF with connector Main engine frame on page 258

JC61-04900A Registration stopper Main engine frame on page 258

JC66-03164A Feeding Duct Shaft Main engine frame on page 258

JC93-00078C Registration Cleaner Main engine frame on page 258

JC93-00161A Fan, type 7 Fuser (For E77822, E77825, E77830) Main engine frame on page 258

JC93-00441A Fuser exit drive Main engine frame on page 258

JC93-00442A Pickup drive (For E77822, E77825, E77830) Main engine frame on page 258

JC93-00443A Registration assembly Main engine frame on page 258

JC93-00444A Feed drive Main engine frame on page 258

JC93-00445A TCU drive Main engine frame on page 258

JC93-00446B Toner supply drive (For E77822, E77825, E77830) Main engine frame on page 258

JC93-00483B Toner Duct (For E77822, E77825, E77830) Main engine frame on page 258

JC93-00492A Sensor, toner collection unit full Main engine frame on page 258

JC93-00511A Main frame first pickup Main engine frame on page 258

JC93-00536A Main feed first color Main engine frame on page 258

JC93-00537D Main feed second Main engine frame on page 258

JC93-00895A Automatic color registration (ACR) (For E77822, E77825, E77830) Main engine frame on page 258

JC93-00915B Main drive Main engine frame on page 258

JC93-01441A Main frame second pickup Main engine frame on page 258

JC93-01803A Automatic color registration (ACR) (For E78323, E78325, E78330) Main engine frame on page 258

Numerical parts list 321

 Tray 1 registration drive
View the Tray 1 registration drive exploded view, parts list, and repair procedures.

Tray 1 registration drive

Parts diagram and parts list for the Tray 1 registration drive.

Figure 2-219 Tray 1 registration drive

Table 2-47 Tray 1 registration drive

Ref Part number Description Qty Repair procedure

No

1 JC31-00123B Motor, bldc 1 Not applicable

2 JC47-00037A Electric clutch 2 Not applicable

322 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Alphabetical parts list
Table 2-48 Alphabetical parts list

Description Part number Table and page

Electric clutch JC47-00037A Tray 1 registration drive on

page 322

Motor, bldc JC31-00123B Tray 1 registration drive on

page 322

Alphabetical parts list 323

 Numerical parts list
Table 2-49 Numerical parts list

Part number Description Table and page

JC31-00123B Motor, bldc Tray 1 registration drive on

page 322

JC47-00037A Electric clutch Tray 1 registration drive on

page 322

Registration sub-frame
View the registration sub-frame exploded view, parts list, and repair procedures.

Registration sub-frame
Parts diagram and parts list for the registration sub-frame.

Figure 2-220 Registration sub-frame

324 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Table 2-48 Registration sub-frame

Ref Part number Description Qty Repair procedure

No

0 JC93-01371A Registration assembly (For E77822, E77825, 1 Removal and replacement:

E77830) Registration assembly on
page 329

0 8GS05-6013 Registration assembly (For E78323, E78325, 1 Removal and replacement:

0 E78330) Registration assembly on
page 329

1 0604-001381 Photo interrupter 1 Not applicable

Removal and replacement: Registration drive assembly

This document provides the procedures to remove the registration drive assembly.

View a video of removing the registration drive assembly.

Mean time to repair: 20 minutes

Service level: Intermediate

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Disconnect the power cable.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-49 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-01371A Registration drive assembly (For E77822, E77825, E77830)

8GS05-60130 Registration drive assembly (For E78323, E78325, E78330)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Removal and replacement: Registration drive assembly 325

 Post service test
Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.

1. Remove the rear covers

Follow these steps to remove the rear covers.

1. Unscrew two captive thumbscrews on the formatter cover. Slide the formatter cover to the left, and
then to the right to remove.

Figure 2-221 Remove the formatter cover

2. Remove seven screws, and then remove the rear-bottom cover.

Figure 2-222 Remove the rear-bottom cover

326 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 3. Remove six screws (callout 1), and then remove the rear-top cover.

Figure 2-223 Remove the rear-top cover

2. Remove the registration drive assembly

Follow these steps to remove the registration drive unit.

1. Disconnect three connectors, one at the motor and two at the frame.

2. Release the cables from the cable guides.

3. Remove four screws, and then remove the registration drive unit by lifting up and out at the top.
Clear the white gear and the cable guide while removing.

IMPORTANT: Remove and replace the screws in the order indicated on the chassis.

Remove the registration drive assembly 327

 Figure 2-224 Remove the registration drive unit

NOTE: Reinstall note: Reinstall the bottom of the unit first while clearing the white gear.

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

328 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Removal and replacement: Registration assembly
This document provides the procedures to remove the registration unit assembly.

View a video of removing and replacing the registration assembly.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Intermediate

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Disconnect the power cable.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-50 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-01371A Registration unit assembly (For E77822, E77825, E77830)

8GS05-60130 Registration unit assembly (For E78323, E78325, E78330)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.

Remove the right door

Follow these steps to remove the right door.

NOTE: Remove second exit drive if installed.

Removal and replacement: Registration assembly 329

 1. Remove three screws, and then remove the cover (A).

Figure 2-225 Remove cover

2. Disconnect the right door connector.

Figure 2-226 Disconnect right door connector

3. Release the right hinge (callout 1).

CAUTION: The right hinge spring tension can be dangerous. Use caution when releasing the right
hinge to avoid injury.

330 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Figure 2-227 Release right hinge

4. Release the left dampener (callout 1).

Figure 2-228 Release left dampener

5. Remove the right door.

NOTE: Open the lower access door. If there is an HCI or 2x520 input device, release the dampener
to clear the lower right door. Remove clockwise.

Remove the right door 331

 Figure 2-229 Remove right door

Remove the registration unit

Follow these steps to remove the registration unit.

1. Remove two screws, and then remove the feed sensor cover.

Figure 2-230 Remove the feed sensor cover

2. Do the following:

a. Remove the black plastic bushing retainer at the rear of the assembly, disconnect one
connector, and then remove two screws at the front and rear of the registration assembly.

b. Release the front side of the registration assembly, and then release the back side to remove.

NOTE: The bushings on the assembly are not captive and can be dislodged when handling
the assembly.

332 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Figure 2-231 Remove registration assembly;ly

Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Unpack the replacement assembly 333

 Alphabetical parts list
Table 2-5 Alphabetical parts list

Description Part number Table and page

Photo interrupter 0604-001381 Registration sub-frame on

page 325

Registration assembly (For E77822, E77825, E77830) JC93-01371A Registration sub-frame on

page 325

Registration assembly (For E78323, E78325, E78330) 8GS05-60130 Registration sub-frame on

page 325

334 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Numerical parts list
Table 2-6 Numerical parts list

Part number Description Table and page

0604-001381 Photo interrupter Registration sub-frame on

page 325

8GS05-60130 Registration assembly (For E78323, E78325, E78330) Registration sub-frame on

page 325

JC93-01371A Registration assembly (For E77822, E77825, E77830) Registration sub-frame on

page 325

Main frame pickup

View the main frame pickup assemblies exploded view, parts list, and repair procedures.

Main frame pickup

Parts diagram and parts list for the main frame pickup.

Figure 2-232 Main frame pickup

Numerical parts list 335

 Table 2-51 Main frame pickup

Ref Part number Description Qty Repair procedure

No

0 JC93-00510A Sub frame pickup 1 Not applicable

1 JC93-00540 Trays 2-x rollers 3 Removal and replacement:

A Trays 2-x main rollers on page
336

2 JC93-00504 Main pickup, upper 1 Removal and replacement:

A Paper pickup assemblies and
empty/level sensor on page
342

7 JC93-00503 Main pickup, lower 1 Removal and replacement:

A Paper pickup assemblies and
empty/level sensor on page
342

7-4 JC67– Coupler, torque limiter 1 Not applicable

00455A

Not shown 0604-001381 Photo interrupter (empty/level sensor) 1 Removal and replacement:
Paper pickup assemblies and
empty/level sensor on page
342

Not shown 0604-001393 Photo interrupter (empty/level sensor) (For 1 Removal and replacement:
E78323, E78325, E78330) Paper pickup assemblies and
empty/level sensor on page
342

Removal and replacement: Trays 2-x main rollers

This document provides the procedures to remove the pickup/reverse/feed roller.

View a video of removing the pickup/reverse/feed roller.

Mean time to repair: 6 minutes

Service level: Basic

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Disconnect the power cable.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-52 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-00540A Pickup/reverse/feed roller assembly

336 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.

1. Remove the right door

Follow these steps to remove the right door.

NOTE: Remove second exit drive if installed.

1. Remove three screws, and then remove the cover (A).

Figure 2-233 Remove cover

Remove the right door 337

 2. Disconnect the right door connector.

Figure 2-234 Disconnect right door connector

3. Release the right hinge (callout 1).

CAUTION: The right hinge spring tension can be dangerous. Use caution when releasing the right
hinge to avoid injury.

Figure 2-235 Release right hinge

338 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 4. Release the left dampener (callout 1).

Figure 2-236 Release left dampener

5. Remove the right door.

NOTE: Open the lower access door. If there is an HCI or 2x520 input device, release the dampener
to clear the lower right door. Remove clockwise.

Figure 2-237 Remove right door

2. Remove the pickup/feed/reverse roller

Follow these steps to remove the pickup/feed/reverse roller.

Remove the pickup/feed/reverse roller 339

 1. Remove one screw and disconnect one connector. Remove the pickup assembly.

Figure 2-238 Remove the pickup assembly

2. Release the small tab and remove the pickup/reverse/feed roller. Note the location of the clutches
and gears.

Figure 2-239 Remove pickup/reverse/feed roller (1 of 2)

340 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Figure 2-240 Remove pickup/reverse/feed roller (2 of 2)

NOTE: It is recommended to replace all three rollers at the same time.

3. Enter service mode. Select the “Field Replacement Unit” menu item for the pickup/reverse/feed
roller (Information > Supply Status > Field Replacement Unit). Select “Reset” to reset the current
count to “0”.

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 341

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Paper pickup assemblies and empty/level sensor

This document provides the procedures to remove the paper pickup assemblies and empty/level sensor.

View a video of removing the paper pickup assemblies and empty/level sensor.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Intermediate

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Disconnect the power cable.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-53 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-00504A Main Pick Up Upper

JC93-00503A Main Pick Up Lower

0604-001381 Photo interrupter

0604-001393 Photo interrupter (E783xx series)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.

1. Remove the right door

Follow these steps to remove the right door.

342 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

NOTE: Remove second exit drive if installed.

1. Remove three screws, and then remove the cover (A).

Figure 2-241 Remove cover

2. Disconnect the right door connector.

Figure 2-242 Disconnect right door connector

3. Release the right hinge (callout 1).

CAUTION: The right hinge spring tension can be dangerous. Use caution when releasing the right
hinge to avoid injury.

Remove the right door 343

 Figure 2-243 Release right hinge

4. Release the left dampener (callout 1).

Figure 2-244 Release left dampener

5. Remove the right door.

NOTE: Open the lower access door. If there is an HCI or 2x520 input device, release the dampener
to clear the lower right door. Remove clockwise.

344 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Figure 2-245 Remove right door

2. Remove the paper trays

Follow these steps to remove the paper trays.

■ Remove the paper trays.

3. Remove the paper pickup unit

Follow these steps to remove the paper pickup unit.

1. Remove one screw and one connector for each paper pickup assembly.

Figure 2-246 Remove the paper pickup assembly screw(s)

Before removing the Tray 2 paper pickup assembly, remove one screw and disconnect one
connector, and then remove the feed sensor bar.

Remove the paper trays 345

 Figure 2-247 Remove the feed sensor bar

2. Remove the paper pickup assemblies.

Figure 2-248 Remove the paper pickup assemblies

4. Remove the empty and level sensors

Follow these steps to remove the empty and level sensors.

346 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 1. Release the sensor after disconnecting the connector. (Empty sensor [A], level sensor [B]).

Figure 2-249 Release the empty and level sensor

2. Remove one screw and disconnect one sensor, and then remove the sensor assembly.

5. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 347

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

348 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Alphabetical parts list
Table 2-5 Alphabetical parts list

Description Part number Table and page

Coupler, torque limiter JC67–00455A Main frame pickup on page 336

Main pickup, lower JC93-00503A Main frame pickup on page 336

Main pickup, upper JC93-00504A Main frame pickup on page 336

Photo interrupter (empty/level sensor) 0604-001381 Main frame pickup on page 336

Photo interrupter (empty/level sensor) (For E78323, E78325, 0604-001393 Main frame pickup on page 336
E78330)

Sub frame pickup JC93-00510A Main frame pickup on page 336

Trays 2-x rollers JC93-00540A Main frame pickup on page 336

Alphabetical parts list 349

 Numerical parts list
Table 2-6 Numerical parts list

Part number Description Table and page

0604-001381 Photo interrupter (empty/level sensor) Main frame pickup on page 336

0604-001393 Photo interrupter (empty/level sensor) (For E78323, E78325, Main frame pickup on page 336
E78330)

JC67–00455A Coupler, torque limiter Main frame pickup on page 336

JC93-00503A Main pickup, lower Main frame pickup on page 336

JC93-00504A Main pickup, upper Main frame pickup on page 336

JC93-00510A Sub frame pickup Main frame pickup on page 336

JC93-00540A Trays 2-x rollers Main frame pickup on page 336

Main frame pickup upper

View the main frame pickup upper exploded view, parts list, and repair procedures.

Main frame pickup upper

Parts diagram and parts list for the main frame pickup upper.

Figure 2-250 Main frame pickup upper

350 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Table 2-54 Main frame pickup upper

Ref Part number Description Qty Repair procedure

No

3 JC66-03199A Actuator, empty pickup 1 Not applicable

4 JC66-00977A Clutch one way 1 Not applicable

5 JC66-00943 Gear-m, joint 1 Not applicable

A

6 JC66-00941A Gear-m, one way 1 Not applicable

7 JC66-00940 Gear-m, idle 1 Not applicable

A

10 JC61-01288A Holder-m, idle one way 1 Not applicable

12 0604-001393 Photo interrupter 2 Not applicable

Main frame pickup upper 351

 Alphabetical parts list
Table 2-55 Alphabetical parts list

Description Part number Table and page

Actuator, empty pickup JC66-03199A Main frame pickup upper on

page 351

Clutch one way JC66-00977A Main frame pickup upper on

page 351

Gear-m, idle JC66-00940A Main frame pickup upper on

page 351

Gear-m, joint JC66-00943A Main frame pickup upper on

page 351

Gear-m, one way JC66-00941A Main frame pickup upper on

page 351

Holder-m, idle one way JC61-01288A Main frame pickup upper on

page 351

Photo interrupter 0604-001393 Main frame pickup upper on

page 351

352 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Numerical parts list
Table 2-56 Numerical parts list

Part number Description Table and page

0604-001393 Photo interrupter Main frame pickup upper on

page 351

JC61-01288A Holder-m, idle one way Main frame pickup upper on

page 351

JC66-00940A Gear-m, idle Main frame pickup upper on

page 351

JC66-00941A Gear-m, one way Main frame pickup upper on

page 351

JC66-00943A Gear-m, joint Main frame pickup upper on

page 351

JC66-00977A Clutch one way Main frame pickup upper on

page 351

JC66-03199A Actuator, empty pickup Main frame pickup upper on

page 351

Main frame
View the main frame exploded view, parts list, and repair procedures.

Main frame
Parts diagram and parts list for the main frame.

Numerical parts list 353

 Figure 2-251 Main frame

1-5-1

Table 2-55 Main frame

Ref Part number Description Qty Repair procedure

No

1-2 JC93-00894 ACR shutter drive 1 Removal and replacement:

A ACR shutter motor on page
355

1-3 JC93-00466 Front Door Switch Open 2 Not applicable

A

2-1 JC92-02622C PCA Paper Size Sensor 2 Removal and replacement:

Paper size sensor PCA on
page 397

2-2 JC92-02164A PCA, toner e-label joing 4 Not applicable

3 JC93-00894 Automatic Color Registration (ACR) 1 Removal and replacement:

A ACR shutter motor on page
355

3 JC93-00895 Automatic Color Registration (ACR) (For 1 Removal and replacement:

A E77822, E77825, E77830) ACR shutter motor on page
355

3 JC93-01803A Automatic Color Registration (ACR) (For 1 Removal and replacement:

E78323, E78325, E78330) ACR shutter motor on page
355

354 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Table 2-55 Main frame (continued)

Ref Part number Description Qty Repair procedure

No

3-4 JC32-00014A CTD sensor 3 Not applicable

1-5-1 5CM76-67901 Right door damper and lever kit 1 Removal and replacement:
Right door dampener and
lever kit on page 366

Not shown 0604-001393 Photo interrupter (For E78323, E78325, 1 Not applicable
E78330)

Not shown JC61-04784A Guide - Toner Cartridge (For E77822, E77825, 1 Not applicable
E77830)

Not shown 5QJ83-4003 Guide - Toner Cartridge (For E78323, E78325, 1 Not applicable
0 E78330)

Not shown JC93-00492 TCU presence photo sensor 1 Removal and replacement:
A TCU presence photo sensor
on page 395

Not shown JC93-00494 High-voltage rail assembly 1 Removal and replacement:

A High-voltage rail assembly on
page 370

Removal and replacement: ACR shutter motor

This document provides the procedures to remove the ACR shutter motor.

View a video of removing the ACR shutter motor.

Mean time to repair: 35 minutes

Service level: Advanced

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Disconnect the power cable.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-56 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-00894A ACR shutter motor

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

Removal and replacement: ACR shutter motor 355

 After performing service
Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.

1. Remove the toner cartridges and TCU

Follow these steps to remove the toner cartridges and TCU.

■ Open the front door and remove the toner collection unit and toner cartridges.

Figure 2-252 Remove the TCU

2. Remove the front inner cover

Follow these steps to remove the front inner cover.

■ Remove seven screws, and then remove the front inner cover.

NOTE: The TCU cleaning blade must be removed to remove the front inner cover.

356 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Figure 2-253 Remove the front inner cover

Removal and replacement: High-voltage power supply (HVPS) board

This document provides the procedures to remove the High-Voltage Power Supply (HVPS) board.

View a video of removing the High-voltage power supply (HVPS) board.

Mean time to repair: 20 minutes

Service level: Intermediate

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cable before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-57 Part information

Part number Part description

JC44-00212C High-Voltage Power Supply (HVPS) board (E778xx Series)

JC44-00212D High-Voltage Power Supply (HVPS) board (E783xx Series)

Removal and replacement: High-voltage power supply (HVPS) board 357

 Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.

1. Remove the left cover

Follow these steps to remove the left cover.

■ Remove the left trim cover, and then remove ten screws to remove the left cover.

Figure 2-254 Remove the left trim cover

358 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Figure 2-255 Remove the left cover

2. Remove the high-voltage power supply (HVPS)

Follow these steps to remove the high-voltage power supply (HVPS).

1. Remove eight screws, and then release middle hook.

Figure 2-256 Remove screws

2. Unplug the connector and then remove the HVPS.

Remove the high-voltage power supply (HVPS) 359

 Figure 2-257 Remove the HVPS board

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

360 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Removal and replacement: Laser scanner assembly
This document provides the procedures to remove the laser scanner assembly.

View a video of removing the laser scanner assembly.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Basic

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cable before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-58 Part information

Part number Part description

JC97-04864A Laser scanner assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.

1. Remove the left cover

Follow these steps to remove the left cover.

Removal and replacement: Laser scanner assembly 361

 ■ Remove the left trim cover, and then remove ten screws to remove the left cover.

Figure 2-258 Remove the left trim cover

Figure 2-259 Remove the left cover

2. Remove the high-voltage power supply (HVPS)

Follow these steps to remove the high-voltage power supply (HVPS).

362 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 1. Remove eight screws, and then release middle hook.

Figure 2-260 Remove screws

2. Unplug the connector and then remove the HVPS.

Figure 2-261 Remove the HVPS board

3. Remove the laser scanner assembly

Follow these steps to remove the laser scanner assembly.

Remove the laser scanner assembly 363

 1. Remove two screws, and then release the bracket.

Figure 2-262 Release the bracket

2. Remove two screws and disconnect one sensor.

Figure 2-263 Remove the laser scanner assembly

364 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 3. Disconnect the laser scanner assembly harness at the left, and then partially remove the assembly
from the chassis. Disconnect the FFC cable, and then remove the laser scanner assembly
completely.

CAUTION: If the laser scanner assembly is removed too rough or fast, the harness can be
damaged.

Figure 2-264 Disconnect the laser scanner assembly harness and FFC cable

4. Complete a laser scanner assembly adjustment after a new laser scanner assembly has been
installed.

4. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 365

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Right door dampener and lever kit

Learn how to remove and replace the right door dampener.

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 2-59 Part information

Part number Part description

5CM76-67901 Right door dampener and lever kit

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of
the printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

366 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Remove the right door dampener
Follow these steps to remove the right door dampener.

1. Remove Tray 2 and Tray 3.

2. Open the right door, and then release the right door stopper from the damper.

Figure 2-265 Release the right door stopper

3. Remove three screws, and then remove the right front cover.

Figure 2-266 Remove the right front cover

4. Remove two screws, and then remove the front lower cover.

TIP: Slightly open Tray 4 to make removing the cover easier.

Remove the right door dampener 367

 Figure 2-267 Remove the front lower cover

5. Remove two screws, and then remove the dampener cover.

Figure 2-268 Remove the dampener cover

6. Remove the dampener gear assembly.

IMPORTANT: Do not discard the failed dampener. Return the assembly to HP for failure analysis.

368 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Figure 2-269 Remove the dampener assembly

7. Important: Make sure that the right door stopper is reinstalled after servicing the printer. Closing
the right door without the stopper installed will damage the damper.

Figure 2-270 Install the right door stopper

Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Unpack the replacement assembly 369

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: High-voltage rail assembly

Learn how to remove and replace the high-voltage rail assembly.

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 2-60 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-00494A High-voltage rail assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

370 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 After performing service
Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of
the printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

Remove the left cover

Follow these steps to remove the left cover.

■ Remove the left trim cover, and then remove ten screws to remove the left cover.

Figure 2-271 Remove the left trim cover

Remove the left cover 371

 Figure 2-272 Remove the left cover

Remove the high-voltage power supply (HVPS)

Follow these steps to remove the high-voltage power supply (HVPS).

1. Remove eight screws, and then release middle hook.

Figure 2-273 Remove screws

2. Unplug the connector and then remove the HVPS.

372 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Figure 2-274 Remove the HVPS board

Remove the exit cover

Follow these steps to remove the exit cover.

1. Remove the inner finisher or paper pass, if installed.

2. Remove two screw-caps and two screws, and then remove the exit tray.

Figure 2-275 Remove screw-caps and screws

Remove the ITB cleaner

Follow these steps to remove the ITB cleaner.

1. Open the front cover.

Remove the exit cover 373

 2. Loosen the captive screw.

Figure 2-276 Loosen screw

3. Release the ITB cleaner.

Figure 2-277 Release ITB cleaner

Remove the right door

Follow these steps to remove the right door.

NOTE: Remove second exit drive if installed.

374 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

1. Remove three screws, and then remove the cover (A).

Figure 2-278 Remove cover

2. Disconnect the right door connector.

Figure 2-279 Disconnect right door connector

3. Release the right hinge (callout 1).

CAUTION: The right hinge spring tension can be dangerous. Use caution when releasing the right
hinge to avoid injury.

Remove the right door 375

 Figure 2-280 Release right hinge

4. Release the left dampener (callout 1).

Figure 2-281 Release left dampener

5. Remove the right door.

NOTE: Open the lower access door. If there is an HCI or 2x520 input device, release the dampener
to clear the lower right door. Remove clockwise.

376 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Figure 2-282 Remove right door

Remove the ITB unit

Follow these steps to remove the ITB unit.

Remove the ITB unit 377

 1. Disconnect the ITB connector from the right. Pull the holder to the front.

Figure 2-283 Disconnect ITB connector

378 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

2. Remove two screws.

Figure 2-284 Remove two screws

3. Remove the ITB unit until the handles are fully visible. Release the ITB unit smoothly.

CAUTION: Make sure not to touch the belt surface of the ITB.

Remove the ITB unit 379

 Figure 2-285 Release ITB unit

380 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 4. Before installing the new ITB unit, align the CAM position with the two arrows shown.

Figure 2-286 Align CAM

5. Install the new ITB unit, and then install the ITB cleaner.

Remove the imaging drum

Follow these steps to remove the imaging drum.

1. Open the front cover.

Figure 2-287 Open the front cover

2. Open the right door and make sure the latch releases.

Remove the imaging drum 381

 3. Remove the toner collection unit.

Figure 2-288 Remove the toner collection unit.

382 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

4. Turn the locking level counterclockwise.

Figure 2-289 Turn level counterclockwise

Remove the imaging drum 383

 5. Remove the imaging drum.

Figure 2-290 Remove the imaging drum

6. If installing a new imaging drum, remove from the imaging drum from its packaging, and then rotate
the locking lever clockwise until it makes a solid “click”.

NOTE: If you intend to reuse an imaging drum, make sure the imaging drum surface is covered
and not exposed to direct light or sunlight. Cover the imaging drum with a few sheets of paper or
keep it in the original packaging until ready to install. When handling any imaging drum, do not touch
the drum surface.

Remove the developer unit

Follow these steps to remove the developer unit.

384 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

1. Turn off the printer. Open the front door and remove the toner collection unit.

Figure 2-291 Remove the toner collection unit

2. Remove the imaging drum that corresponds with the developer unit being replaced.

3. Fold down the toner supply shutter.

CAUTION: The toner supply cap contains toner. Use caution to avoid spilling toner during removal.

Figure 2-292 Fold down the toner supply shutter

Remove the developer unit 385

 4. Push the shutter in to close the toner supply (callout 1). Grasp the toner supply connection on the
black plastic and wiggle and pull out to disengage the connection from the developing unit. Rotate
the toner supply up (callout 2).

CAUTION: Do not compress or squeeze the gray supply pipe. This supply pipe is filled with toner
and will leak if squeezed.

Figure 2-293 Rotate swivel

386 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

5. Remove 2 screws and then remove the bracket (A). Disconnect the connector.

Figure 2-294 Remove bracket

6. Remove the developer unit.

Figure 2-295 Remove developer unit

NOTE: The carrier in this printer series developer unit cannot be changed. The entire developer
unit must be replaced.

NOTE: When the assembly is installed, make sure that the bracket is seated correctly and that the
bracket screws are installed. Install the toner supply by swiveling down to the normal position, and
make sure the toner supply shutter is pulled up to the "open" position. Reinstall the imaging drum,
then reinstall the toner collection unit.

Remove the developer unit 387

 Remove the paper dust brush
Follow these steps to remove the paper dust brush.

■ Remove the paper dust brush.

Figure 2-296 Remove the paper dust brush

Remove the front cover and inner cover

Follow these steps to remove the front cover and inner cover.

1. Open the right door.

Figure 2-297 Open right door

388 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

2. Remove two screw-caps and two screws (callout 1).

NOTE: Do not dislodge the power button (callout 2) when the cover is removed.

Figure 2-298 Remove screw-caps and screws

3. GX/z models: Remove two screws.

NOTE: Do not dislodge the power button when the cover is removed.

Figure 2-299 Remove screws

Remove the front cover and inner cover 389

 4. LX/dn Models: Remove one screw inside of right door.

Figure 2-300 Remove one screw

5. GX/z models: Remove two screws.

Figure 2-301 Remove two screws

390 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 6. Remove the front-top cover.

Figure 2-302 Remove the front top cover

7. Open the front door. Remove the Toner Collection Unit (TCU). Remove all toner cartridges.

8. Remove three tapping screws and remove the top front cover.

9. Remove eight screws, and then remove the front inner cover.

Figure 2-303 Remove screws and front inner cover

Remove the toner duct assembly

Follow these steps to remove the toner duct assembly.

Remove the toner duct assembly 391

 1. Close the shutter duct on the developer unit.

Figure 2-304 Close the developer unit shutter duct for the station being replaced

2. Remove the shutter from the top of the developer unit.

Figure 2-305 Remove the developer unit shutter duct

3. Remove two screws, and then remove the cover at the front of the duct assembly.

CAUTION: Be careful not to spill toner while removing the toner duct assembly.

392 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Figure 2-306 Remove the toner duct cover

4. Remove the toner duct assembly.

Figure 2-307 Remove the toner duct assembly

IMPORTANT: The toner supply shutters must be in the open (up) position whenever performing
service in this area of the printer.

Remove the high-voltage rail assembly

Follow these steps to remove the high-voltage rail assembly.

Remove the high-voltage rail assembly 393

 1. Before proceeding, take note from the front of the printer where the six high-voltage rail screws are
located.

Figure 2-308 Locate six screws

2. From inside the printer remove six screws, and then remove the high-voltage rail assembly.

Figure 2-309 Remove the high-voltage rail assembly

Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using

394 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: TCU presence photo sensor

Learn how to remove and replace the toner collection unit presence photo sensor.

View a video of how to remove and replace the toner collection unit presence photo sensor.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-61 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-00492A TCU presence photo sensor

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of
the printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

Removal and replacement: TCU presence photo sensor 395

 ○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

Remove the toner cartridges

Follow these steps to remove the toner cartridges.

■ Open the front door and remove the toner collection unit and toner cartridges.

Figure 2-310 Remove the TCU

Remove the TCU presence photo sensor

Follow these steps to remove the TCU presence photo sensor.

1. Remove the yellow imaging and developer units

396 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 2. Disconnect one connector. Reach inside the chassis and squeeze two tabs on the connector side
of the sensor, and then release the hook on the right side of the sensor assembly.

Figure 2-311 Remove the TCU presence sensor

Removal and replacement: Paper size sensor PCA

This document provides the procedures to remove the Paper Size Sensor PCA.

View a video of removing the Paper size sensor PCA.

Mean time to repair: 20 minutes

Service level: Intermediate

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Disconnect the power cable.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-62 Part information

Part number Part description

JC92-02622C Paper Size Sensor PCA (For 77822, 77825, 77830, 78323, 78325, 78330)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

Removal and replacement: Paper size sensor PCA 397

 After performing service
Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.

1. Remove the Paper Size Sensor PCA

Follow these steps to remove the Paper Size Sensor PCA.

■ Do the following:

● Remove all trays to access the inside of the printer.

● Disconnect the connector. Remove two screws, and then remove the sensor.

Figure 2-312 Remove screws

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

398 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Unpack the replacement assembly 399

 Alphabetical parts list
Table 2-5 Alphabetical parts list

Description Part number Table and page

ACR shutter drive JC93-00894A Main frame on page 354

Front Door Switch Open JC93-00466A Main frame on page 354

PCA Paper Size Sensor JC92-02622C Main frame on page 354

PCA, toner e-label joing JC92-02164A Main frame on page 354

400 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Numerical parts list
Table 2-6 Numerical parts list

Part number Description Table and page

JC92-02164A PCA, toner e-label joing Main frame on page 354

JC92-02622C PCA Paper Size Sensor Main frame on page 354

JC93-00466A Front Door Switch Open Main frame on page 354

JC93-00894A ACR shutter drive Main frame on page 354

Covers
View covers exploded view, parts list, and repair procedures.

Covers
Parts diagram and parts list for the covers.

Figure 2-313 Covers

Table 2-63 Covers

Ref Part number Description Qty Repair Procedure

No

1 JC95-02116A Front cover 1 Not applicable

Numerical parts list 401

 Table 2-63 Covers (continued)

Ref Part number Description Qty Repair Procedure

No

2 JC95-02082 Right cover, middle 1 Not applicable

A

3 JC95-02089 Inner cover 1 Not applicable

A

4 JC63-05647A Cover, Control Panel Top 1 Not applicable

5 JC95-02085 Left cover 1 Removal and replacement:

A Left cover on page 406

6 JC63-04534 Left cover, top 1 Not applicable

B

7 JC63-05576A Left scan cover 1 Not applicable

8 JC63-05623 Left cover, upper 1 Not applicable

A

9 JC95-02208 Exit cover 1 Not applicable

A

10 JC63-04536 Front cover, lower 1 Not applicable

B

11 JC63-04531B Right cover, front 1 Not applicable

12 JC63-04532 Right cover, rear 1 Not applicable

B

13 JC63-05575A Right scan cover 1 Not applicable

14 JC63-04520 Right cover, upper 1 Not applicable

B

15 JC63-05619A Rear cover, lower (For E77822, E78785, E77830) 1 Removal and replacement:
Rear covers on page 403

15 8GR98-40016 Rear cover, lower (For E78323, E78325, 1 Removal and replacement:
E78330) Rear covers on page 403

16 JC63-05618A Rear cover, upper 1 Removal and replacement:

Rear covers on page 403

18 JC63-05577A Rear scan cover 1 Not applicable

20 JC63-04567B Rear cover, dummy 1 Not applicable

22 JC63-05648 Cover, control panel bottom 1 Not applicable

A

Not shown B5L46-40002 Keyboard blank for non Flow 1 Not applicable

Not shown B5L47-60102 US English Keyboard Assy 1 Not applicable

Not shown B5L47-60103 UK English Keyboard Assy 1 Not applicable

Not shown B5L46-40029 Bushing for Keyboard 1 Not applicable

Not shown JC61-04626A Strap, front cover 1 Not applicable

Not shown JC92-02951A PCA, USB host 1 Not applicable

Not shown JC92-02969A PCA, front power switch 1 Not applicable

402 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Table 2-63 Covers (continued)

Ref Part number Description Qty Repair Procedure

No

Not shown 8GR94-60103 Front Label Kit (For 783xx dn) 1 Not applicable

Not shown 8GR98-60104 Front Label Kit (For 783xx z) 1 Not applicable

Removal and replacement: Rear covers

This document provides the procedures to remove the rear covers.

View a video of removing the rear covers.

Mean time to repair: 5 minutes

Service level: Basic

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Disconnect the power cable.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-64 Part information

Part number Part description

JC63-05618A Rear-upper cover

JC63-05619A Rear-lower cover (E778xx series)

8GR98-40016 Rear-lower cover (E783xx series)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

No post service tests are required for this assembly.

Removal and replacement: Rear covers 403

 1. Remove the rear covers
Follow these steps to remove the rear covers.

1. Unscrew two captive thumbscrews on the formatter cover. Slide the formatter cover to the left, and
then to the right to remove.

Figure 2-314 Remove the formatter cover

2. Remove seven screws, and then remove the rear-bottom cover.

Figure 2-315 Remove the rear-bottom cover

404 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 3. Remove six screws (callout 1), and then remove the rear-top cover.

Figure 2-316 Remove the rear-top cover

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Unpack the replacement assembly 405

 Removal and replacement: Left cover
This document provides the procedures to remove the left cover assembly.

View a video of removing the left cover.

Mean time to repair: 5 minutes

Service level: Basic

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Disconnect the power cable.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-65 Part information

Part number Part description

JC95-02085A Left cover assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

No post service tests are required for this assembly.

1. Remove the left cover

Follow these steps to remove the left cover.

406 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 ■ Remove the left trim cover, and then remove ten screws to remove the left cover.

Figure 2-317 Remove the left trim cover

Figure 2-318 Remove the left cover

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Unpack the replacement assembly 407

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

408 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Alphabetical parts list
Table 2-5 Alphabetical parts list

Description Part number Table and page

Bushing for Keyboard B5L46-40029 Covers on page 401

Cover, Control Panel Top JC63-05647A Covers on page 401

Cover, control panel bottom JC63-05648A Covers on page 401

Exit cover JC95-02208A Covers on page 401

Front Label Kit (For 783xx dn) 8GR94-60103 Covers on page 401

Front Label Kit (For 783xx z) 8GR98-60104 Covers on page 401

Front cover JC95-02116A Covers on page 401

Front cover, lower JC63-04536B Covers on page 401

Inner cover JC95-02089A Covers on page 401

Keyboard blank for non Flow B5L46-40002 Covers on page 401

Left cover JC95-02085A Covers on page 401

Left cover, top JC63-04534B Covers on page 401

Left cover, upper JC63-05623A Covers on page 401

Left scan cover JC63-05576A Covers on page 401

PCA, USB host JC92-02951A Covers on page 401

PCA, front power switch JC92-02969A Covers on page 401

Rear cover, dummy JC63-04567B Covers on page 401

Rear cover, lower (For E77822, E78785, E77830) JC63-05619A Covers on page 401

Rear cover, lower (For E78323, E78325, E78330) 8GR98-40016 Covers on page 401

Rear cover, upper JC63-05618A Covers on page 401

Rear scan cover JC63-05577A Covers on page 401

Right cover, front JC63-04531B Covers on page 401

Right cover, middle JC95-02082A Covers on page 401

Right cover, rear JC63-04532B Covers on page 401

Right cover, upper JC63-04520B Covers on page 401

Right scan cover JC63-05575A Covers on page 401

Strap, front cover JC61-04626A Covers on page 401

UK English Keyboard Assy B5L47-60103 Covers on page 401

US English Keyboard Assy B5L47-60102 Covers on page 401

Alphabetical parts list 409

 Numerical parts list
Table 2-6 Numerical parts list

Part number Description Table and page

8GR94-60103 Front Label Kit (For 783xx dn) Covers on page 401

8GR98-40016 Rear cover, lower (For E78323, E78325, E78330) Covers on page 401

8GR98-60104 Front Label Kit (For 783xx z) Covers on page 401

B5L46-40002 Keyboard blank for non Flow Covers on page 401

B5L46-40029 Bushing for Keyboard Covers on page 401

B5L47-60102 US English Keyboard Assy Covers on page 401

B5L47-60103 UK English Keyboard Assy Covers on page 401

JC61-04626A Strap, front cover Covers on page 401

JC63-04520B Right cover, upper Covers on page 401

JC63-04531B Right cover, front Covers on page 401

JC63-04532B Right cover, rear Covers on page 401

JC63-04534B Left cover, top Covers on page 401

JC63-04536B Front cover, lower Covers on page 401

JC63-04567B Rear cover, dummy Covers on page 401

JC63-05575A Right scan cover Covers on page 401

JC63-05576A Left scan cover Covers on page 401

JC63-05577A Rear scan cover Covers on page 401

JC63-05618A Rear cover, upper Covers on page 401

JC63-05619A Rear cover, lower (For E77822, E78785, E77830) Covers on page 401

JC63-05623A Left cover, upper Covers on page 401

JC63-05647A Cover, Control Panel Top Covers on page 401

JC63-05648A Cover, control panel bottom Covers on page 401

JC92-02951A PCA, USB host Covers on page 401

JC92-02969A PCA, front power switch Covers on page 401

JC95-02082A Right cover, middle Covers on page 401

JC95-02085A Left cover Covers on page 401

JC95-02089A Inner cover Covers on page 401

JC95-02116A Front cover Covers on page 401

JC95-02208A Exit cover Covers on page 401

Right door
View the right door exploded view, parts list, and repair procedures.

410 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Right door
Parts diagram and parts list for the right door

Figure 2-319 Right door

Table 2-66 Right door

Ref Part number Description Qty Repair procedure

No

2 JC63-03356 Cover, Front Tray 1 1 Not applicable

C

3 JC63-04570B Cover, Right door 1 Not applicable

4 JC63-04573B Cover, Right door Upper (For E77822, E77825, 1 Not applicable
E77830)

4 5QJ90-40014 Cover, Right door Upper (For E78323, E78325, 1 Not applicable
E78330)

5 JC31-00160C Fan, type 6 2 Not applicable

6 JC95-02081A Right Door Feed (For E77822, E77825, E77830) 1 Not applicable

6 JC95-02292A Right Door Feed (For E78323, E78325, E78330) 1 Not applicable

7 JC61-04795A Duplex guide, upper (For E77822, E77825, 1 Not applicable

E77830)

7 JC95-02292A Duplex guide, upper (For E78323, E78325, 1 Not applicable

E78330)

8 JC95-01509C Right door, exit (For E77822, E77825, E77830) 1 Not applicable

8 JC90-01877A Right door, exit (For E78323, E78325, E78330) 1 Not applicable

Right door 411

 Table 2-66 Right door (continued)

Ref Part number Description Qty Repair procedure

No

12 JC95-01517A Right Door Feed Duplex 1 Not applicable

15 JC95-01516A Right Door Take Away (For E78323, E78325, 1 Not applicable
E78330)

15 JC95-02130A Right Door Take Away (For E78323, E78325, 1 Not applicable
E78330)

16 6107-003052 Spring, TS 1 Not applicable

17 JC95-01510A Motor Right Door Duplex 1 Not applicable

17-1 JC93-00802 Drive motor, step 1 Not applicable

A

20 JC66-03235 Right Door Dampner 1 Not applicable

A

21 JC64-00711A Right Rear Lock 1 Not applicable

22 JC95-02256 Right door link rear 1 Not applicable

A

27 JC64-00710A Right Door Lock 1 Not applicable

Not shown JC63-05750A Sensor, sheet 1 Not applicable

412 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Alphabetical parts list
Table 2-67 Alphabetical parts list

Description Part number Table and page

Cover, Front Tray 1 JC63-03356C Right door on page 411

Cover, Right door JC63-04570B Right door on page 411

Cover, Right door Upper (For E77822, E77825, E77830) JC63-04573B Right door on page 411

Cover, Right door Upper (For E78323, E78325, E78330) 5QJ90-40014 Right door on page 411

Drive motor, step JC93-00802A Right door on page 411

Duplex guide, upper (For E77822, E77825, E77830) JC61-04795A Right door on page 411

Duplex guide, upper (For E78323, E78325, E78330) JC95-02292A Right door on page 411

Fan, type 6 JC31-00160C Right door on page 411

Motor Right Door Duplex JC95-01510A Right door on page 411

Right Door Dampner JC66-03235A Right door on page 411

Right Door Feed (For E77822, E77825, E77830) JC95-02081A Right door on page 411

Right Door Feed (For E78323, E78325, E78330) JC95-02292A Right door on page 411

Right Door Feed Duplex JC95-01517A Right door on page 411

Right Door Lock JC64-00710A Right door on page 411

Right Door Take Away (For E78323, E78325, E78330) JC95-02130A Right door on page 411

Right Door Take Away (For E78323, E78325, E78330) JC95-01516A Right door on page 411

Right Rear Lock JC64-00711A Right door on page 411

Right door link rear JC95-02256A Right door on page 411

Right door, exit (For E77822, E77825, E77830) JC95-01509C Right door on page 411

Right door, exit (For E78323, E78325, E78330) JC90-01877A Right door on page 411

Sensor, sheet JC63-05750A Right door on page 411

Spring, TS 6107-003052 Right door on page 411

Alphabetical parts list 413

 Numerical parts list
Table 2-68 Numerical parts list

Part number Description Table and page

5QJ90-40014 Cover, Right door Upper (For E78323, E78325, E78330) Right door on page 411

6107-003052 Spring, TS Right door on page 411

JC31-00160C Fan, type 6 Right door on page 411

JC61-04795A Duplex guide, upper (For E77822, E77825, E77830) Right door on page 411

JC63-03356C Cover, Front Tray 1 Right door on page 411

JC63-04570B Cover, Right door Right door on page 411

JC63-04573B Cover, Right door Upper (For E77822, E77825, E77830) Right door on page 411

JC63-05750A Sensor, sheet Right door on page 411

JC64-00710A Right Door Lock Right door on page 411

JC64-00711A Right Rear Lock Right door on page 411

JC66-03235A Right Door Dampner Right door on page 411

JC90-01877A Right door, exit (For E78323, E78325, E78330) Right door on page 411

JC93-00802A Drive motor, step Right door on page 411

JC95-01509C Right door, exit (For E77822, E77825, E77830) Right door on page 411

JC95-01510A Motor Right Door Duplex Right door on page 411

JC95-01516A Right Door Take Away (For E78323, E78325, E78330) Right door on page 411

JC95-01517A Right Door Feed Duplex Right door on page 411

JC95-02081A Right Door Feed (For E77822, E77825, E77830) Right door on page 411

JC95-02130A Right Door Take Away (For E78323, E78325, E78330) Right door on page 411

JC95-02256A Right door link rear Right door on page 411

JC95-02292A Duplex guide, upper (For E78323, E78325, E78330) Right door on page 411

JC95-02292A Right Door Feed (For E78323, E78325, E78330) Right door on page 411

Tray 1
View the tray 1 exploded view, parts list, and repair procedures.

Tray 1 rollers
Parts diagram and parts list for Tray 1 rollers.

414 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Figure 2-320 Tray 1

3-9

3-10

3-11
3-4

Table 2-67 Tray 1 rollers

Ref Part number Description Qty Repair procedure

No

1 JC90-01778A Tray 1 Door 1 Removal and replacement:

Tray 1 unit and Tray 1
assemblies on page 419

2-1 0604-001393 Photo interrupter 1 Not applicable

2-4 JC67-00455A Coupler, Torque Limiter 1 Not applicable

2-5 JC62-01085A Seal, pad tray 1 3 Not applicable

3 JC90-01125B Tray1 bracket pickup 1 Not applicable

3-1 JC33-00029 Solenoid, tray 1 1 Removal and replacement:

B Tray 1 unit and Tray 1
assemblies on page 419

3-2 JC90-00918A MP one way clutch 1 Not applicable

3-3 JC66-00977A Clutch, one way 2 Not applicable

3-4 JC61-01288A Holder-M_idle one way 1 Not applicable

3-9 JC66-00940 Gear-M_idle PU 1 Not applicable

A

3-10 JC66-00977A Clutch-P_one way 1 Not applicable

3-11 JC93-00540 Frame-main pickup roller 2 Removal and replacement:

B Tray 1 rollers on page 416

Tray 1 rollers 415

 Table 2-67 Tray 1 rollers (continued)

Ref Part number Description Qty Repair procedure

No

7 X3A92-67918 Tray 1 roller (kit) Removal and replacement:

Tray 1 rollers on page 416

Not shown JC95-02079A Right door assembly (For E77822, E77825, 1 Removal and replacement:
E77830) Tray 1 unit and Tray 1
assemblies on page 419

Not shown 8GR88-60101 Right door assembly (For E78323, E78325, 1 Removal and replacement:
E78330) Tray 1 unit and Tray 1
assemblies on page 419

Removal and replacement: Tray 1 rollers

This document provides the procedures to remove the Tray 1 rollers.

View a video of removing the Tray 1 rollers.

Mean time to repair: 6 minutes

Service level: Basic

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Disconnect the power cable.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-68 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-00540B Kit-HP LaserJet MP Roller

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Small flat-blade screwdriver

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

416 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Post service test
Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.

1. Remove the Tray 1 pick/reverse/feed roller

Follow these steps to remove the Tray 1 rollers.

1. Open Tray 1. Use a small flat blade screwdriver to release the tab on the right side of the cover

NOTE: The plastic tabs on the edges of the cover might require extra pressure to remove.

Figure 2-321 Remove the cover

2. Remove the cover shown using a small flat blade screwdriver to release the tab on the right side of
the cover.

NOTE: The flag, it will need to be moved out of the way to remove cover.

Remove the Tray 1 pick/reverse/feed roller 417

 Figure 2-322 Remove the cover

3. Release the small tab and remove the Tray 1 pick/reverse/feed roller (callout 2). Move the flag
(callout 1) out of the way to release rollers.

CAUTION: Remove the rollers slowly to avoid loosening the parts behind the rollers. If these parts
come loose, they might fall into the printer and be difficult to retrieve. Note the location of all
components.

NOTE: HP recommends replacing all three rollers at the same time.

Figure 2-323 Remove the Tray 1 pick/reverse/feed roller

4. After the replacement rollers are installed, follow these instructions to reset the firmware counter:

a. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, select the Support Tools menu.

b. Select the Service menu.

418 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 c. Make sure that Service Access Code is selected in the drop-down menu, and then enter the
service access code.

d. Select the Service Tools menu.

e. Select the Supply Status menu.

f. Select Field Replacement Unit.

g. Select Tray X Rollers.

h. elect Tray 1 Roller Kit.

i. Select Reset.

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Tray 1 unit and Tray 1 assemblies

This document provides the procedures to remove the Tray 1 assembly.

View a video of removing the Tray 1 assembly.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Unpack the replacement assembly 419

 Service level: Intermediate

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Disconnect the power cable.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-69 Part information

Part numbers Part descriptions

JC95-02079A Right door assembly (E778xx series)

8GR88-60101 Right door assembly (E783xx series)

JC90-01778A Tray 1

JC95-02081A Right door feed (E778xx series)

JC95-02292A Right door feed (E783xx series)

JC33-00029B Solenoid Tray 1

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Small flat-blade screwdriver

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.

1. Remove the right door

Follow these steps to remove the right door.

NOTE: Remove second exit drive if installed.

420 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

1. Remove three screws, and then remove the cover (A).

Figure 2-324 Remove cover

2. Disconnect the right door connector.

Figure 2-325 Disconnect right door connector

3. Release the right hinge (callout 1).

CAUTION: The right hinge spring tension can be dangerous. Use caution when releasing the right
hinge to avoid injury.

Remove the right door 421

 Figure 2-326 Release right hinge

4. Release the left dampener (callout 1).

Figure 2-327 Release left dampener

5. Remove the right door.

NOTE: Open the lower access door. If there is an HCI or 2x520 input device, release the dampener
to clear the lower right door. Remove clockwise.

422 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Figure 2-328 Remove right door

2. Remove the multipurpose unit and MP assemblies

Follow these steps to remove the multipurpose unit and MP assemblies.

1. Open the MP tray and remove the MP roller cover. Release tabs at back of the roller cover and
rotate to release.

Figure 2-329 Remove MP front cover

Remove the multipurpose unit and MP assemblies 423

 2. Open the MP tray and release the hinge from the right, flexing the linker to remove.

Figure 2-330 Open MP tray and release link

3. Remove two screws and then remove the cable cover.

Figure 2-331 Remove screws and cable cover

424 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

4. Remove three screws and then remove the cable cover lower.

Figure 2-332 Remove screws and cable cover lower

5. Remove one screw. Prop up the hinge on the door edge to keep it out of the way.

Figure 2-333 Remove screw and prop up hinge

Remove the multipurpose unit and MP assemblies 425

 6. Remove three screws.

Figure 2-334 Remove screws

7. Remove one screw.

Figure 2-335 Remove screw

426 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

8. Remove two screws from the other side of the door.

Figure 2-336 Remove screws

9. Remove four screws.

Figure 2-337 Remove screws

Remove the multipurpose unit and MP assemblies 427

 10. Swing out the guide feed (C) to the right. Remove the hinge pin from the front.

Figure 2-338 Remove hinge pin

11. Gently lift up the right door.

Figure 2-339 Lift right door duplex lower

428 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

12. Remove two screws.

Figure 2-340 Remove screws

13. Disconnect three connectors near the hinge.

IMPORTANT: Make sure the connector couplers stay attached to the door.

Figure 2-341 Disconnect connectors

Remove the multipurpose unit and MP assemblies 429

 14. Remove one screw, and then remove the MP unit.

Figure 2-342 Remove screw and MP unit

15. Remove the MP-cover base.

Figure 2-343 Remove MP-cover base

430 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

16. Remove the E-ring, and then remove the gear (C).

Figure 2-344 Remove e-ring and gear

17. Remove the E-ring, and then remove the bushing (D).

Figure 2-345 Remove e-ring and bushing

Remove the multipurpose unit and MP assemblies 431

 18. Remove one screw, and then remove the Bracket-Solenoid.

Figure 2-346 Remove screw and bracket-solenoid

NOTE: Reinstallation note: Route the cable before putting the cover back on during reinstallation.

19. Remove four screws, and then release the MP bracket pickup. Release the cable from the cable
harness.

Figure 2-347 Release MP bracket pickup and release cable from harness

432 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 20. Release the cable from the cable retainer, and release the cable from the cable harness. Remove
two screws, and then remove the MP solenoid.

Figure 2-348 Release cable and remove MP solenoid

NOTE: Reinstallation note: When reinstalling, the paper stopper needs to be located in the
appropriate slot in the housing.

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 433

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

434 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Alphabetical parts list
Table 2-5 Alphabetical parts list

Description Part number Table and page

Clutch, one way JC66-00977A Tray 1 rollers on page 415

Clutch-P_one way JC66-00977A Tray 1 rollers on page 415

Coupler, Torque Limiter JC67-00455A Tray 1 rollers on page 415

Frame-main pickup roller JC93-00540B Tray 1 rollers on page 415

Gear-M_idle PU JC66-00940A Tray 1 rollers on page 415

Holder-M_idle one way JC61-01288A Tray 1 rollers on page 415

MP one way clutch JC90-00918A Tray 1 rollers on page 415

Photo interrupter 0604-001393 Tray 1 rollers on page 415

Right door assembly (For E77822, E77825, E77830) JC95-02079A Tray 1 rollers on page 415

Right door assembly (For E78323, E78325, E78330) 8GR88-60101 Tray 1 rollers on page 415

Seal, pad tray 1 JC62-01085A Tray 1 rollers on page 415

Solenoid, tray 1 JC33-00029B Tray 1 rollers on page 415

Tray 1 Door JC90-01778A Tray 1 rollers on page 415

Tray 1 roller (kit) X3A92-67918 Tray 1 rollers on page 415

Tray1 bracket pickup JC90-01125B Tray 1 rollers on page 415

Alphabetical parts list 435

 Numerical parts list
Table 2-6 Numerical parts list

Part number Description Table and page

0604-001393 Photo interrupter Tray 1 rollers on page 415

8GR88-60101 Right door assembly (For E78323, E78325, E78330) Tray 1 rollers on page 415

JC33-00029B Solenoid, tray 1 Tray 1 rollers on page 415

JC61-01288A Holder-M_idle one way Tray 1 rollers on page 415

JC62-01085A Seal, pad tray 1 Tray 1 rollers on page 415

JC66-00940A Gear-M_idle PU Tray 1 rollers on page 415

JC66-00977A Clutch, one way Tray 1 rollers on page 415

JC66-00977A Clutch-P_one way Tray 1 rollers on page 415

JC67-00455A Coupler, Torque Limiter Tray 1 rollers on page 415

JC90-00918A MP one way clutch Tray 1 rollers on page 415

JC90-01125B Tray1 bracket pickup Tray 1 rollers on page 415

JC90-01778A Tray 1 Door Tray 1 rollers on page 415

JC93-00540B Frame-main pickup roller Tray 1 rollers on page 415

JC95-02079A Right door assembly (For E77822, E77825, E77830) Tray 1 rollers on page 415

X3A92-67918 Tray 1 roller (kit) Tray 1 rollers on page 415

Right door output

View the right door output exploded view, parts list, and repair procedures.

Right door output

Parts diagram and parts list for the right door output.

436 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Figure 2-349 Right door output

Table 2-70 Right door output

Ref Part number Description Qty Repair procedure

No

2 0604-001393 Photo interrupter 1 Not applicable

3 JC66-03307A Actuator, fuser out 1 Not applicable

4 6107-001737 Spring, TS 1 Not applicable

Right door output 437

 Alphabetical parts list
Table 2-71 Alphabetical parts list

Description Part number Table and page

Actuator, fuser out JC66-03307A Right door output on page 437

Photo interrupter 0604-001393 Right door output on page 437

Spring, TS 6107-001737 Right door output on page 437

438 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Numerical parts list
Table 2-72 Numerical parts list

Part number Description Table and page

0604-001393 Photo interrupter Right door output on page 437

6107-001737 Spring, TS Right door output on page 437

JC66-03307A Actuator, fuser out Right door output on page 437

Right door feed guide

View the right door feed guide exploded view, parts list, and repair procedures.

Right door feed guide

Parts diagram and parts list for the right door feed guide.

Figure 2-350 Right door feed guide

Numerical parts list 439

 Table 2-71 Right door feed guide

Ref Part number Description Qty Repair procedure

No

2 6107-001731 Spring, CS 2 Not applicable

4 JC66-02354 Roller shaft 1 Not applicable

A

5 JC66-02289 Idle roller 2 Not applicable

B

6 6107-003048 Spring, cs 2 Not applicable

8 JC66-02180A Actuator, duplex 2 1 Not applicable

9 6107-001737 Spring, TS 1 Not applicable

12 0604-001393 Photo interrupter 1 Not applicable

19 JC95-01942A HP LaserJet Transfer Roller (T2) (For 77822, 1 Removal and replacement: HP
77825, 77830) LaserJet Transfer Roller (T2)
on page 440

19 5QJ90-61041 HP LaserJet Transfer Roller (T2) (For 78323, 1 Removal and replacement: HP
78325, 78330) LaserJet Transfer Roller (T2)
on page 440

Removal and replacement: HP LaserJet Transfer Roller (T2)

This document provides the procedures to remove the HP LaserJet Transfer Roller (T2).

View a video of removing the HP LaserJet Transfer Roller (T2).

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Intermediate

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Disconnect the power cable.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-72 Part information

Part number Part description

JC95-01942A HP LaserJet Transfer Roller (T2) (E778xx series)

5QJ90-61041 HP LaserJet Transfer Roller (T2) (E783xx series)

440 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.

1. Remove the HP LaserJet Transfer Roller (T2)

Follow these steps to remove the HP LaserJet Transfer Roller (T2).

1. Open the right door.

2. Hold and release both sides of the HP LaserJet Transfer Roller (T2) to remove.

Figure 2-351 Remove HP LaserJet Transfer Roller (T2)

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Remove the HP LaserJet Transfer Roller (T2) 441

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

442 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Alphabetical parts list
Table 2-5 Alphabetical parts list

Description Part number Table and page

Actuator, duplex 2 JC66-02180A Right door feed guide on page

440

HP LaserJet Transfer Roller (T2) (For 77822, 77825, 77830) JC95-01942A Right door feed guide on page
440

HP LaserJet Transfer Roller (T2) (For 78323, 78325, 78330) 5QJ90-61041 Right door feed guide on page
440

Idle roller JC66-02289B Right door feed guide on page

440

Photo interrupter 0604-001393 Right door feed guide on page

440

Roller shaft JC66-02354A Right door feed guide on page

440

Spring, CS 6107-001731 Right door feed guide on page

440

Spring, TS 6107-001737 Right door feed guide on page

440

Spring, cs 6107-003048 Right door feed guide on page

440

Alphabetical parts list 443

 Numerical parts list
Table 2-6 Numerical parts list

Part number Description Table and page

0604-001393 Photo interrupter Right door feed guide on page

440

5QJ90-61041 HP LaserJet Transfer Roller (T2) (For 78323, 78325, 78330) Right door feed guide on page
440

6107-001731 Spring, CS Right door feed guide on page

440

6107-001737 Spring, TS Right door feed guide on page

440

6107-003048 Spring, cs Right door feed guide on page

440

JC66-02180A Actuator, duplex 2 Right door feed guide on page

440

JC66-02289B Idle roller Right door feed guide on page

440

JC66-02354A Roller shaft Right door feed guide on page

440

JC95-01942A HP LaserJet Transfer Roller (T2) (For 77822, 77825, 77830) Right door feed guide on page
440

ADF (LX models)

View the ADF (LX models) exploded view, parts list, and repair procedures.

ADF (LX models)

Parts diagram and parts list for the ADF (LX models).

444 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Figure 2-352 ADF (LX models)

Table 2-73 ADF (LX models)

Ref Part number Description Qty Repair procedure

No

1 JC97-04853A ADF cover open (LX) 1 Removal and replacement:

Document feeder (ADF) jam
access cover (LX) on page
445

2 JC97-04856B ADF pickup (LX) 1 Not applicable

3 JC63-05563 ADF, front cover (LX) 1 Not applicable

A

4 JC63-05561A ADF, cover rear (LX) 1 Not applicable

7 JC97-04859A ADF stacker (LX) (For E77822, E77825, E77830) 1 Removal and replacement:
Document feeder (ADF) input
tray (LX) on page 450

7 X3A84-60103 ADF stacker (LX) (For E78323, E78325, E78330) 1 Removal and replacement:
Document feeder (ADF) input
tray (LX) on page 450

7-4 JC66-04079 ADF pinion gear (LX) 1 Not applicable

A

7-5 0604-001393 Photo interrupter 1 Not applicable

Removal and replacement: Document feeder (ADF) jam access cover (LX)
Learn how to remove and replace the document feeder jam access cover (LX).

Removal and replacement: Document feeder (ADF) jam access cover (LX) 445
 To view a short video of this procedure, click the link below.

View a video of how to remove and replace the document feeder jam access cover (LX).

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 2-74 Part information

Part number Part description

JC97-04853A Jam access cover (LX)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of
the printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

446 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Post service test
Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the document feeder (ADF) back cover

Follow these steps to remove the document feeder (ADF) back cover.

1. Remove two screws from the top of document feeder back cover.

Figure 2-353 Remove the document feeder back cover top screws

2. Remove 3 caps and 3 screws.

Figure 2-354 Remove 3 caps and 3 screws.

Remove the document feeder (ADF) back cover 447

 3. Release the top back cover.

Figure 2-355 Release the top back cover.

2. Remove the document feeder jam access cover

Follow these steps to remove the document feeder jam access cover.

1. Open the jam access cover, and then remove one screw.

Figure 2-356 Remove the jam access cover screw

448 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 2. Remove the pivot pin, and then pivot the cover and release the hinge to remove the jam access
cover.

Figure 2-357 Remove the jam access cover

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Unpack the replacement assembly 449

 Removal and replacement: Document feeder (ADF) input tray (LX)
Learn how to remove and replace the document feeder input tray (LX).

To view a short video of this procedure, click the link below.

View a video of how to remove and replace the document feeder input tray (LX).

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 2-75 Part information

Part number Part description

JC97-04859A ADF stacker (LX) (E778xx series)

X3A84-60103 ADF stacker (LX) E783xx series)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of
the printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

450 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 ○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the document feeder (ADF) front cover

Follow these steps to remove the document feeder (ADF) front cover.

1. Remove two screws from the top of document feeder front cover.

Figure 2-358 Remove the document feeder front cover top screws

2. Open the document feeder. Detach a sticker and then remove a screw (Callout 1) from the bottom
of the document feeder front cover.

Figure 2-359 Open the document feeder

Remove the document feeder (ADF) front cover 451

 3. Remove the document feeder front cover.

Figure 2-360 Remove the document feeder front cover

2. Remove the document feeder (ADF) back cover

Follow these steps to remove the document feeder (ADF) back cover.

1. Remove two screws from the top of document feeder back cover.

Figure 2-361 Remove the document feeder back cover top screws

452 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 2. Remove 3 caps and 3 screws.

Figure 2-362 Remove 3 caps and 3 screws.

3. Release the top back cover.

Figure 2-363 Release the top back cover.

3. Remove the document feeder (ADF) input tray

Follow these steps to remove the document feeder (ADF) input tray.

■ Disconnect one connector on document feeder board (callout 1), remove one screw and hinge pin
(callout 2), and then remove the input tray.

NOTE: Carefully guide the cable out of the chassis while removing the tray.

Remove the document feeder (ADF) input tray 453

 Figure 2-364 Remove the input tray connector, screw, and hinge pin

1
2

4. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Contact Image Sensor (CIS) assembly

Learn how to remove and replace the document feeder CIS (LX).

454 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

To view a short video of this procedure, click the link below.

View a video of how to remove and replace the document feeder CIS (LX).

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 2-76 Part information

Part number Part description

JC97-04920A Contact image sensor (CIS)

JC97-04722A Contact image sensor (CIS) (E778xx series)

JC97-04920A Contact image sensor (CIS) (E783xx series)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of
the printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Removal and replacement: Contact Image Sensor (CIS) assembly 455

 Post service test
Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the document feeder (ADF) front cover

Follow these steps to remove the document feeder (ADF) front cover.

1. Remove two screws from the top of document feeder front cover.

Figure 2-365 Remove the document feeder front cover top screws

2. Open the document feeder. Detach a sticker and then remove a screw (Callout 1) from the bottom
of the document feeder front cover.

Figure 2-366 Open the document feeder

456 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 3. Remove the document feeder front cover.

Figure 2-367 Remove the document feeder front cover

2. Remove the document feeder (ADF) back cover

Follow these steps to remove the document feeder (ADF) back cover.

1. Remove two screws from the top of document feeder back cover.

Figure 2-368 Remove the document feeder back cover top screws

Remove the document feeder (ADF) back cover 457

 2. Remove 3 caps and 3 screws.

Figure 2-369 Remove 3 caps and 3 screws.

3. Release the top back cover.

Figure 2-370 Release the top back cover.

3. Remove the pick and feed roller assembly

Follow these steps to remove the pick and feed roller assembly.

458 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

1. Remove four screws.

Figure 2-371 Remove four screws

2. Remove two screws on the front cover.

Figure 2-372 Remove two screws on front cover

Remove the pick and feed roller assembly 459

 3. Open the ADF and then remove three screw caps.

Figure 2-373 Remove three screw caps

4. Remove three screws, and then remove the front cover.

Figure 2-374 Remove three screws and front cover

460 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

5. Rotate the pick/feed roller assembly to release the sheet metal tab from ADF frame.

Figure 2-375 Release the sheet metal tab from ADF frame

6. To remove the pick/feed roller assembly lift up on the front side (callout 1) and, then slide towards
the front (callout 2) to release the pick/feed roller assembly.

Figure 2-376 Release the pick/feed roller assembly

Remove the pick and feed roller assembly 461

 7. Rotate the roller assembly over, and then disconnect one connectors. Remove the document
feeder pick roller assembly.

Figure 2-377 Remove the document feeder pick roller assembly

TIP: Note the four flags (callout 1) on the bottom of the pick/feed roller assembly. When
reinstalling, hold up the flags while reinstall to allow for proper installation.

Figure 2-378 Pick/Feed roller assembly four flags

4. Remove the CIS assembly

Follow these steps to remove the CIS assembly.

1. Remove one screw, and then remove the CIS front alignment cover.

Reinstallation tip: Note the orientation of the CIS front alignment cover. The cover must be
reinstalled in the same orientation.

462 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Figure 2-379 Remove the CIS front alignment cover screws

2. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then lift the alignment pin to release the CIS assembly
(callout 2).

Figure 2-380 Disconnect the CIS connector and lift the alignment pin

3. Remove the CIS assembly from the chassis.

5. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Unpack the replacement assembly 463

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Document feeder (ADF) main motor (LX)

Learn how to remove and replace the document feeder main motor (LX).

To view a short video of this procedure, click the link below.

View a video of this procedure for HP Color LaserJet MFP.

View a video of this procedure for HP LaserJet MFP

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

464 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 2-77 Part information

Part number Part description

JC31-00163A Main motor assembly (LX)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of
the printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the document feeder (ADF) back cover

Follow these steps to remove the document feeder (ADF) back cover.

Remove the document feeder (ADF) back cover 465

 1. Remove two screws from the top of document feeder back cover.

Figure 2-381 Remove the document feeder back cover top screws

2. Remove 3 caps and 3 screws.

Figure 2-382 Remove 3 caps and 3 screws.

466 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 3. Release the top back cover.

Figure 2-383 Release the top back cover.

2. Remove the main motor

Follow these steps to remove the main motor.

1. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), remove the tension spring (callout 2), and then remove four
screws (callout 3).

Figure 2-384 Remove the main motor connector, spring, and screws

2
1

2. Carefully lift the motor out while releasing the gear belt.

Reinstallation tip:

a. Reinstall the motor and lift the gear belt up to engage the motor pulley.

b. Loosely install the motor mount screws.

c. Install the tension spring.

Remove the main motor 467

 d. Tighten the motor mount screws just enough so that the tension spring (not the motor mount
screws) is providing the tension to the belt.

Figure 2-385 Main motor and gear belt

3. Remove the CIS assembly

Follow these steps to remove the CIS assembly.

1. Remove one screw, and then remove the CIS front alignment cover.

Reinstallation tip: Note the orientation of the CIS front alignment cover. The cover must be
reinstalled in the same orientation.

Figure 2-386 Remove the CIS front alignment cover screws

468 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 2. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then lift the alignment pin to release the CIS assembly
(callout 2).

Figure 2-387 Disconnect the CIS connector and lift the alignment pin

3. Remove the CIS assembly from the chassis.

4. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 469

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

470 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Alphabetical parts list
Table 2-5 Alphabetical parts list

Description Part number Table and page

ADF cover open (LX) JC97-04853A ADF (LX models) on page 445

ADF pickup (LX) JC97-04856B ADF (LX models) on page 445

ADF stacker (LX) (For E77822, E77825, E77830) JC97-04859A ADF (LX models) on page 445

ADF stacker (LX) (For E78323, E78325, E78330) X3A84-60103 ADF (LX models) on page 445

ADF, cover rear (LX) JC63-05561A ADF (LX models) on page 445

ADF, front cover (LX) JC63-05563A ADF (LX models) on page 445

Alphabetical parts list 471

 Numerical parts list
Table 2-6 Numerical parts list

Part number Description Table and page

JC63-05561A ADF, cover rear (LX) ADF (LX models) on page 445

JC63-05563A ADF, front cover (LX) ADF (LX models) on page 445

JC97-04853A ADF cover open (LX) ADF (LX models) on page 445

JC97-04856B ADF pickup (LX) ADF (LX models) on page 445

JC97-04859A ADF stacker (LX) (For E77822, E77825, E77830) ADF (LX models) on page 445

X3A84-60103 ADF stacker (LX) (For E78323, E78325, E78330) ADF (LX models) on page 445

ADF exterior and ADF pickup (LX models)

View the ADF exterior and ADF pickup (LX models) exploded view, parts list, and repair procedures.

ADF exterior and ADF pickup (LX)

Parts diagram and parts list for the ADF exterior and ADF pickup (LX models).

Figure 2-388 ADF exterior and ADF pickup (LX models)

472 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Table 2-78 ADF exterior and ADF pickup (LX models)

Ref Part number Description Qty Repair procedure

No

1-1 JC92-02962A LX PCA 1 Removal and replacement:

Document feeder (ADF) PCA
(LX) on page 473

1-5 JC97-04528A LX, hinge r 1 Not applicable

1-6 JC97-04527A LX, hinge l 1 Not applicable

2-2 0604-001393 Photo interrupter 1 Not applicable

2-5 JC97-04857A Pick Roller Assy - LX 1 Removal and replacement:

Document feeder (ADF) pick/
feed roller assembly (LX) on
page 477

2-5-1 JC97-04099A LX pick roller 1 Not applicable

2-5-6 JC97-04860A LX feed roller 1 Not applicable

Removal and replacement: Document feeder (ADF) PCA (LX)

Learn how to remove and replace the document feeder PCA (LX).

To view a short video of this procedure, click the link below.

View a video of how to remove and replace the document feeder PCA (LX).

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Removal and replacement: Document feeder (ADF) PCA (LX) 473

 Table 2-79 Part information

Part number Part description

JC92-02962A Document feeder PCA assembly (LX)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of
the printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the document feeder (ADF) back cover

Follow these steps to remove the document feeder (ADF) back cover.

1. Remove two screws from the top of document feeder back cover.

Figure 2-389 Remove the document feeder back cover top screws

474 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 2. Remove 3 caps and 3 screws.

Figure 2-390 Remove 3 caps and 3 screws.

3. Release the top back cover.

Figure 2-391 Release the top back cover.

2. Remove the document feeder (ADF) PCA

Follow these steps to remove the document feeder (ADF) PCA.

Remove the document feeder (ADF) PCA 475

 ■ Disconnect six connectors and the ground wire from PCA, remove four screws, and then remove the
document feeder PCA (LX).

Figure 2-392 Document feeder PCA (LX)

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

476 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Removal and replacement: Document feeder (ADF) pick/feed roller assembly (LX)
Learn how to remove and replace the document feeder pickup/feed roller assembly (LX/du models).

To view a short video of this procedure, click the link below.

View a video of how to remove and replace the document feeder pickup/feed roller assembly
(LX).

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 2-80 Part information

Part number Part description

JC97-04857A Pick feed roller assembly (LX)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of
the printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

Removal and replacement: Document feeder (ADF) pick/feed roller assembly (LX) 477
 ○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the document feeder (ADF) (LX/du models) pick and feed roller assembly
Follow these steps to remove the document feeder (ADF) (LX/du models) pick and feed roller assembly.

1. Open the document feeder cover.

Figure 2-393 Open the document feeder cover

2. Remove four screws in the document feeder pick roller assembly cover.

NOTE: Remove one spring (callout 2; not shown)

Figure 2-394 Remove the document feeder cover screws

478 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

3. Rotate the document feeder pickup cover up, and then disconnect one connector (callout 1).

Figure 2-395 Turn the cover over and disconnect connector

4. Before proceeding, take note of the removed roller cover and the roller assembly.

Figure 2-396 Document feeder pick roller cover and roller assembly

5. Remove one screw (callout 1), and then remove the sensor flag bracket (callout 2).

Reinstallation tip: When the roller assembly is reinstalled, make sure that the sensor flags (on
both sides of the assembly) are correctly installed and move freely.

Remove the document feeder (ADF) (LX/du models) pick and feed roller assembly 479
 Figure 2-397 Remove one screw and the sensor flag bracket

6. Release two plastic clips (callout 1), slide bushing toward roller assembly (callout 2), and then slide
the shaft towards front of printer to release it (callout 3). Remove the roller assembly.

CAUTION: Do not damage the sensor flags when handling the roller assembly.

NOTE: The bushing is not captive. Do not lose it when handling the roller assembly.

Figure 2-398 Remove the document feeder pick roller assembly clips

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

480 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Unpack the replacement assembly 481

 Alphabetical parts list
Table 2-5 Alphabetical parts list

Description Part number Table and page

LX PCA JC92-02962A ADF exterior and ADF pickup

(LX models) on page 473

LX feed roller JC97-04860A ADF exterior and ADF pickup

(LX models) on page 473

LX pick roller JC97-04099A ADF exterior and ADF pickup

(LX models) on page 473

LX, hinge l JC97-04527A ADF exterior and ADF pickup

(LX models) on page 473

LX, hinge r JC97-04528A ADF exterior and ADF pickup

(LX models) on page 473

Photo interrupter 0604-001393 ADF exterior and ADF pickup

(LX models) on page 473

Pick Roller Assy - LX JC97-04857A ADF exterior and ADF pickup

(LX models) on page 473

482 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Numerical parts list
Table 2-6 Numerical parts list

Part number Description Table and page

0604-001393 Photo interrupter ADF exterior and ADF pickup

(LX models) on page 473

JC92-02962A LX PCA ADF exterior and ADF pickup

(LX models) on page 473

JC97-04099A LX pick roller ADF exterior and ADF pickup

(LX models) on page 473

JC97-04527A LX, hinge l ADF exterior and ADF pickup

(LX models) on page 473

JC97-04528A LX, hinge r ADF exterior and ADF pickup

(LX models) on page 473

JC97-04857A Pick Roller Assy - LX ADF exterior and ADF pickup

(LX models) on page 473

JC97-04860A LX feed roller ADF exterior and ADF pickup

(LX models) on page 473

ADF main frame assembly (LX models)

View the ADF main frame assembly (LX models) exploded view, parts list, and repair procedures.

ADF main frame assembly (LX/du models)

Parts diagram and parts list for the ADF main frame assembly (LX models).

Numerical parts list 483

 Figure 2-399 ADF main frame (LX models)

13

Table 2-81 ADF main frame assembly (LX models)

Ref Part number Description Qty Repair procedure

No

1-1 JC97-04586A LX separation housing 1 Not applicable

1-2 JC97-04852A ADF LX separation roller 1 Removal and replacement:

Document feeder (ADF)
separation roller assembly
(LX) on page 485

1-2-1 JC97-04861A ADF LX separation sub roller Not applicable

1-3 JC69-01326A Friction pad 1 Not applicable

5-5 JC66-04104A Actuator, output1 1 Not applicable

6-2 JC66-04105A Actuator, feed out 1 Not applicable

6-3 JC66-04103A Actuator, registration 1 Not applicable

6-4 0604-001381 Photo interrupter 1 Not applicable

6-5 0604–001393 Photo interrupter1 1 Not applicable

484 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Table 2-81 ADF main frame assembly (LX models) (continued)

Ref Part number Description Qty Repair procedure

No

7 JC31-00156C Feed motor assembly (Motor, bldc type 1) 1 Removal and replacement:
Document feeder (ADF) feed
motor (LX) on page 492

13 JC31-00163A Motor - Step main 1 Not applicable

16 JC47-00038A LX - Motor feed DC 1 Not applicable

17 JC66-04100A LX - Link Cover Open 1 Not applicable

19 JC97-04920A Contact Image Sensor (CIS) 1 Not applicable

19 JC97-04722A Contact Image Sensor (CIS) (E778xx series) 1 Not applicable

19 JC97-04920A Contact Image Sensor (CIS) (E783xx series) 1 Not applicable

1Early models only during original release. This part removed from newer models.

Removal and replacement: Document feeder (ADF) separation roller assembly

(LX)
Learn how to remove and replace the document feeder separation roller assembly (LX).

To view a short video of this procedure, click the link below.

View a video of how to remove and replace the document feeder separation roller assembly
(LX).

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Removal and replacement: Document feeder (ADF) separation roller assembly (LX) 485
 Table 2-82 Part information

Part number Part description

JC97-04852A ADF separation roller assembly (LX)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of
the printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the document feeder (ADF) (LX/du models) pick and feed roller assembly
Follow these steps to remove the document feeder (ADF) (LX/du models) pick and feed roller assembly.

1. Open the document feeder cover.

Figure 2-400 Open the document feeder cover

486 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

2. Remove four screws in the document feeder pick roller assembly cover.

NOTE: Remove one spring (callout 2; not shown)

Figure 2-401 Remove the document feeder cover screws

3. Rotate the document feeder pickup cover up, and then disconnect one connector (callout 1).

Figure 2-402 Turn the cover over and disconnect connector

Remove the document feeder (ADF) (LX/du models) pick and feed roller assembly 487
 4. Before proceeding, take note of the removed roller cover and the roller assembly.

Figure 2-403 Document feeder pick roller cover and roller assembly

5. Remove one screw (callout 1), and then remove the sensor flag bracket (callout 2).

Reinstallation tip: When the roller assembly is reinstalled, make sure that the sensor flags (on
both sides of the assembly) are correctly installed and move freely.

Figure 2-404 Remove one screw and the sensor flag bracket

6. Release two plastic clips (callout 1), slide bushing toward roller assembly (callout 2), and then slide
the shaft towards front of printer to release it (callout 3). Remove the roller assembly.

CAUTION: Do not damage the sensor flags when handling the roller assembly.

NOTE: The bushing is not captive. Do not lose it when handling the roller assembly.

488 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Figure 2-405 Remove the document feeder pick roller assembly clips

2. Remove the LX document feeder separation roller

Follow these steps to remove the LX document feeder separation roller.

1. Rotate the separation roller cover up to release it, and then remove the cover.

Figure 2-406 Remove the separation roller cover

Remove the LX document feeder separation roller 489

 2. Before proceeding, take note of the removed roller cover and the roller assembly.

Figure 2-407 Document feeder separation roller cover and roller assembly

3. Release two claws, and then remove the separation roller assembly.

NOTE: The separation roller assembly spring under the roller is not captive.

Figure 2-408 Remove the separation roller assembly

490 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 4. When the assembly is reinstalled, make sure that the spring is correctly seated in the holder.

Figure 2-409 Separation roller assembly spring

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Unpack the replacement assembly 491

 Removal and replacement: Document feeder (ADF) feed motor (LX)
Learn how to remove and replace the document feeder feed motor (LX).

To view a short video of this procedure, click the link below.

View a video of how to remove and replace the document feeder feed motor (LX).

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 2-83 Part information

Part number Part description

JC31-00156C Feed motor assembly (LX) (bldc type 1)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of
the printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

492 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 ○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the document feeder (ADF) back cover

Follow these steps to remove the document feeder (ADF) back cover.

1. Remove two screws from the top of document feeder back cover.

Figure 2-410 Remove the document feeder back cover top screws

2. Remove 3 caps and 3 screws.

Figure 2-411 Remove 3 caps and 3 screws.

Remove the document feeder (ADF) back cover 493

 3. Release the top back cover.

Figure 2-412 Release the top back cover.

2. Remove the feed motor

Follow these steps to remove the feed motor.

1. Loosen the cables in the cable guide, remove two screws and then move the cable guide out of the
way.

Figure 2-413 Feed motor cable guide

494 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 2. Disconnect one connector, remove four screws, and then carefully lift the motor out to remove.

Figure 2-414 Remove the feed motor

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Unpack the replacement assembly 495

 Alphabetical parts list
Table 2-5 Alphabetical parts list

Description Part number Table and page

ADF LX separation roller JC97-04852A ADF main frame assembly (LX

models) on page 484

ADF LX separation sub roller JC97-04861A ADF main frame assembly (LX
models) on page 484

Actuator, feed out JC66-04105A ADF main frame assembly (LX

models) on page 484

Actuator, output1 JC66-04104A ADF main frame assembly (LX

models) on page 484

Actuator, registration JC66-04103A ADF main frame assembly (LX

models) on page 484

Contact Image Sensor (CIS) JC97-04920A ADF main frame assembly (LX
models) on page 484

Contact Image Sensor (CIS) (E778xx series) JC97-04722A ADF main frame assembly (LX
models) on page 484

Contact Image Sensor (CIS) (E783xx series) ADF main frame assembly (LX
models) on page 484

Friction pad JC69-01326A ADF main frame assembly (LX

models) on page 484

LX - Link Cover Open JC66-04100A ADF main frame assembly (LX

models) on page 484

LX - Motor feed DC JC47-00038A ADF main frame assembly (LX

models) on page 484

LX separation housing JC97-04586A ADF main frame assembly (LX

models) on page 484

Motor - Step main JC31-00163A ADF main frame assembly (LX

models) on page 484

Photo interrupter 0604-001381 ADF main frame assembly (LX

models) on page 484

Photo interrupter1 0604–001393 ADF main frame assembly (LX

models) on page 484

496 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Numerical parts list
Table 2-6 Numerical parts list

Part number Description Table and page

Contact Image Sensor (CIS) (E783xx series) ADF main frame assembly (LX
models) on page 484

0604-001381 Photo interrupter ADF main frame assembly (LX

models) on page 484

0604–001393 Photo interrupter1 ADF main frame assembly (LX

models) on page 484

JC31-00163A Motor - Step main ADF main frame assembly (LX

models) on page 484

JC47-00038A LX - Motor feed DC ADF main frame assembly (LX

models) on page 484

JC66-04100A LX - Link Cover Open ADF main frame assembly (LX

models) on page 484

JC66-04103A Actuator, registration ADF main frame assembly (LX

models) on page 484

JC66-04104A Actuator, output1 ADF main frame assembly (LX

models) on page 484

JC66-04105A Actuator, feed out ADF main frame assembly (LX

models) on page 484

JC69-01326A Friction pad ADF main frame assembly (LX

models) on page 484

JC97-04586A LX separation housing ADF main frame assembly (LX

models) on page 484

JC97-04722A Contact Image Sensor (CIS) (E778xx series) ADF main frame assembly (LX
models) on page 484

JC97-04852A ADF LX separation roller ADF main frame assembly (LX

models) on page 484

JC97-04861A ADF LX separation sub roller ADF main frame assembly (LX
models) on page 484

JC97-04920A Contact Image Sensor (CIS) ADF main frame assembly (LX
models) on page 484

Flow ADF (GX/z)

View the flow ADF (GX/z) exploded view, parts list, and repair procedures.

ADF (GX/z)
Parts diagram and parts list for the ADF (GX/z).

Numerical parts list 497

 Figure 2-415 ADF (GX/z)

Table 2-84 ADF/ Scanner GX/z

Ref Part number Description Qty Repair procedure

No

1 JC97-04869A GX/z ADF open cover 1 Not applicable

2 JC97-04872A GX/z ADF pickup upper 1 Not applicable

3 JC66-02270A GX/z ADF cover hinge 1 Not applicable

5 JC97-04881A GX/z ADF front cover 1 Not applicable

6 JC97-04879A GX/z ADF dummy front 1 Not applicable

8 JC97-04692A GX/z ADF damper 1 Not applicable

9 JC97-04880A GX/z ADF cover, bottom 1 Not applicable

10 JC97-04883A GX/z ADF main frame 1 Not applicable

12 JC97-04658C GX/z ADF Stacker 1 Not applicable

13 JC63-05566 GX/z ADF cover, rear 1 Not applicable

A

498 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Removal and replacement: Document feeder input tray (GX)
This document provides the procedures to remove the input tray assembly.

View a video of removing and replacing the input tray (E72520-E72530).

View a video of removing and replacing the input tray (E77820-E77830).

Mean time to repair: 20 minutes

Service level: Intermediate

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Disconnect the power cable.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-85 Part information

Part number Part description

JC97-04658C Input tray assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.

1. Remove the document feeder (ADF) front cover

Follow these steps to remove the document feeder (ADF) front cover.

Removal and replacement: Document feeder input tray (GX) 499

 1. Remove two screws from the top of document feeder front cover.

Figure 2-416 Remove the document feeder front cover top screws

2. Open the document feeder. Detach a sticker and then remove a screw (Callout 1) from the bottom
of the document feeder front cover.

Figure 2-417 Open the document feeder

500 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 3. Remove the document feeder front cover.

Figure 2-418 Remove the document feeder front cover

2. Remove the document feeder back cover

Follow these steps to remove the document feeder back cover.

1. Remove two screws from the top of document feeder back cover.

Figure 2-419 Remove the document feeder back cover top screws

Remove the document feeder back cover 501

 2. Remove three screws from the bottom of the document feeder back cover, and then remove the
document feeder back cover.

Figure 2-420 Remove the document feeder back cover bottom screws

3. Remove the dampening unit

Follow these steps to remove the dampening unit.

■ Remove three screws, and then remove the damping unit.

Figure 2-421 Remove the document feeder dampening unit

4. Remove the document feeder pickup and feed assembly

Follow these steps to remove the document feeder pickup and feed assembly.

502 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

1. Remove 4 screws.

Figure 2-422 Remove 4 screws.

2. Remove 2 cables (callout 1) then remove the document feeder pickup roller assembly

Figure 2-423 Remove the pickup roller assembly

TIP: Re-assembly

● Make sure shape of both the holes on the assembly and the shafts at the frame.

Remove the document feeder pickup and feed assembly 503

 5. Remove the input tray
Follow these steps to remove the input tray.

1. Disconnect the document feeder PCA connector, and then remove cable from guide.

Figure 2-424 Disconnect the document feeder PCA connector

2. Lift the tray from the front, and pivot the tray outward to remove.

504 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Removal and replacement: Contact Image Sensor (CIS) assembly
This document provides the procedures to remove the CIS assembly.

View a video of removing and replacing the CIS (E72520-E72530).

View a video of removing and replacing the CIS (E77820-E77830).

Mean time to repair: 20 minutes

Service level: Intermediate

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Disconnect the power cable.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-86 Part information

Part number Part description

0605-001246 Contact Image Sensor (CIS) assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.

1. Remove the document feeder (ADF) front cover

Follow these steps to remove the document feeder (ADF) front cover.

Removal and replacement: Contact Image Sensor (CIS) assembly 505

 1. Remove two screws from the top of document feeder front cover.

Figure 2-425 Remove the document feeder front cover top screws

2. Open the document feeder. Detach a sticker and then remove a screw (Callout 1) from the bottom
of the document feeder front cover.

Figure 2-426 Open the document feeder

506 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 3. Remove the document feeder front cover.

Figure 2-427 Remove the document feeder front cover

2. Remove the document feeder back cover

Follow these steps to remove the document feeder back cover.

1. Remove two screws from the top of document feeder back cover.

Figure 2-428 Remove the document feeder back cover top screws

Remove the document feeder back cover 507

 2. Remove three screws from the bottom of the document feeder back cover, and then remove the
document feeder back cover.

Figure 2-429 Remove the document feeder back cover bottom screws

3. Remove the document feeder pickup and feed assembly

Follow these steps to remove the document feeder pickup and feed assembly.

1. Remove 4 screws.

Figure 2-430 Remove 4 screws.

508 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 2. Remove 2 cables (callout 1) then remove the document feeder pickup roller assembly

Figure 2-431 Remove the pickup roller assembly

TIP: Re-assembly

● Make sure shape of both the holes on the assembly and the shafts at the frame.

4. Remove the paper path cover

Follow these steps to remove the paper path cover.

Remove the paper path cover 509

 ■ Remove five screws, and then remove the paper path cover.

Figure 2-432 Remove the document feeder paper path cover

5. Remove the CIS assembly

Follow these steps to remove the CIS assembly.

1. Remove one screw, and then remove the CIS front alignment cover.

TIP: Note the orientation of the CIS front alignment cover for reinstallation; the cover must
reinstalled with the same orientation.

Figure 2-433 Remove the CIS front alignment cover screws

2. Do the following:

a. Disconnect one connector (callout 1).

510 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 b. Use a pair of needle nose pliers to pull up on the metal pin, and then slide the CIS as shown
below to remove it.

Figure 2-434 Remove the CIS

3. Remove the CIS assembly from the chassis.

6. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 511

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

512 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Alphabetical parts list
Table 2-5 Alphabetical parts list

Description Part number Table and page

GX/z ADF Stacker JC97-04658C ADF/ Scanner GX/z on page

498

GX/z ADF cover hinge JC66-02270A ADF/ Scanner GX/z on page

498

GX/z ADF cover, bottom JC97-04880A ADF/ Scanner GX/z on page

498

GX/z ADF cover, rear JC63-05566A ADF/ Scanner GX/z on page

498

GX/z ADF damper JC97-04692A ADF/ Scanner GX/z on page

498

GX/z ADF dummy front JC97-04879A ADF/ Scanner GX/z on page

498

GX/z ADF front cover JC97-04881A ADF/ Scanner GX/z on page

498

GX/z ADF main frame JC97-04883A ADF/ Scanner GX/z on page

498

GX/z ADF open cover JC97-04869A ADF/ Scanner GX/z on page

498

GX/z ADF pickup upper JC97-04872A ADF/ Scanner GX/z on page

498

Alphabetical parts list 513

 Numerical parts list
Table 2-6 Numerical parts list

Part number Description Table and page

JC63-05566A GX/z ADF cover, rear ADF/ Scanner GX/z on page

498

JC66-02270A GX/z ADF cover hinge ADF/ Scanner GX/z on page

498

JC97-04658C GX/z ADF Stacker ADF/ Scanner GX/z on page

498

JC97-04692A GX/z ADF damper ADF/ Scanner GX/z on page

498

JC97-04869A GX/z ADF open cover ADF/ Scanner GX/z on page

498

JC97-04872A GX/z ADF pickup upper ADF/ Scanner GX/z on page

498

JC97-04879A GX/z ADF dummy front ADF/ Scanner GX/z on page

498

JC97-04880A GX/z ADF cover, bottom ADF/ Scanner GX/z on page

498

JC97-04881A GX/z ADF front cover ADF/ Scanner GX/z on page

498

JC97-04883A GX/z ADF main frame ADF/ Scanner GX/z on page

498

Flow ADF open cover (GX/sGX)

View the flow ADF open cover (GX/sGX) exploded view, parts list, and repair procedures.

Flow ADF open cover (GX/z)

Parts diagram and parts list for the ADF open cover (GX/z).

514 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Figure 2-435 ADF open cover (GX/z)

Table 2-87 Flow ADF open cover

Ref Part number Description Qty Repair procedure

No

0 JC97-04869A Cover, open (GX/z) 1 Removal and replacement:

Document feeder jam access
cover (GX) on page 515

2 JC97-04696B Cover, open lower (GX/z) 1 Not applicable

2-5-1 0604-001381 Photo-interrupter 4 Not applicable

Removal and replacement: Document feeder jam access cover (GX)

This document provides the procedures to remove the jam access cover assembly.

View a video of removing and replacing the jam access cover (E72520-E72530).

Removal and replacement: Document feeder jam access cover (GX) 515
 View a video of removing and replacing the jam access cover (E77820-E77830).

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Intermediate

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Disconnect the power cable.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-88 Part information

Part number Part description

JC97-04869A Jam access cover assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.

1. Remove the document feeder (ADF) front cover

Follow these steps to remove the document feeder (ADF) front cover.

516 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

1. Remove two screws from the top of document feeder front cover.

Figure 2-436 Remove the document feeder front cover top screws

2. Open the document feeder. Detach a sticker and then remove a screw (Callout 1) from the bottom
of the document feeder front cover.

Figure 2-437 Open the document feeder

Remove the document feeder (ADF) front cover 517

 3. Remove the document feeder front cover.

Figure 2-438 Remove the document feeder front cover

2. Remove the document feeder back cover

Follow these steps to remove the document feeder back cover.

1. Remove two screws from the top of document feeder back cover.

Figure 2-439 Remove the document feeder back cover top screws

518 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 2. Remove three screws from the bottom of the document feeder back cover, and then remove the
document feeder back cover.

Figure 2-440 Remove the document feeder back cover bottom screws

3. Remove the document feeder jam access cover

Follow these steps to remove the document feeder jam access cover.

1. Disconnect connector at document feeder PCA and route cable out.

Figure 2-441 Disconnect one connector

Remove the document feeder jam access cover 519

 2. Disconnect the ground wire.

Figure 2-442 Remove the jam access cover ground wire

3. Remove one screw (callout 1), remove hinge (pivot) pin, and then remove door arm support (callout
2)

Figure 2-443 Remove the jam access cover door arm support

4. Remove the jam access cover.

4. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

520 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Unpack the replacement assembly 521

 Alphabetical parts list
Table 2-5 Alphabetical parts list

Description Part number Table and page

Cover, open (GX/z) JC97-04869A Flow ADF open cover on page

515

Cover, open lower (GX/z) JC97-04696B Flow ADF open cover on page
515

Photo-interrupter 0604-001381 Flow ADF open cover on page

515

522 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Numerical parts list
Table 2-6 Numerical parts list

Part number Description Table and page

0604-001381 Photo-interrupter Flow ADF open cover on page

515

JC97-04696B Cover, open lower (GX/z) Flow ADF open cover on page
515

JC97-04869A Cover, open (GX/z) Flow ADF open cover on page

515

ADF upper pickup (GX/z)

View the ADF upper pickup (GX/z) exploded view, parts list, and repair procedures.

ADF upper pickup (GX/z)

Parts diagram and parts list for the ADF upper pickup (GX/z).

Numerical parts list 523

 Figure 2-444 ADF upper pickup (GX/z)

Table 2-89 ADF upper pickup (GX/z)

Ref Part number Description Qty Repair procedure

No

2-1 JC97-04650A GX/z ADF, sub-pickup 1 Removal and replacement:

Flow document feeder pick
roller assembly (GX) on page
525

2-2 0604-001393 Photo-interrupter 1 Not applicable

2-5 0604-001381 Photo-interrupter 1 Not applicable

Not shown JC97-04915A Document feeder separtation roller assembly 1 Removal and replacement:
(GX/z models) ADF separation roller
assembly (GX) on page 530

524 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Removal and replacement: Flow document feeder pick roller assembly (GX)
This document provides the procedures to remove the flow document feeder pickup roller assembly.

View a video of removing and replacing the pick roller (E77822-E77830).

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service leve: Basic

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Disconnect the power cable.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-90 Part information

Part number Part description

JC97-04650A Pick roller assembly (GX/z models)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.

1. Remove the flow ADF pickup roller assembly

Follow these steps to remove the flow ADF pickup roller assembly.

1. Open the document feeder top cover.

2. Remove the pickup roller assembly:

Removal and replacement: Flow document feeder pick roller assembly (GX) 525
 a. Remove 4 screws.

Figure 2-445 Remove 4 screws.

b. Remove 2 cables (callout 1) then remove the document feeder pickup roller assembly

Figure 2-446 Remove the pickup roller assembly

TIP: Re-assembly

● Make sure shape of both the holes on the assembly and the shafts at the frame.

526 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

3. Remove the pickup rollers:

a. Remove four screws and then remove the cover.

Figure 2-447 Remove the pickup roller assembly cover

b. Remove two plastic clips and two bushings, disconnect two springs, and then remove the
shaft coupler.

NOTE: The shaft is engaged in the coupler.

Remove the flow ADF pickup roller assembly 527

 Figure 2-448 Remove the pickup roller components

Figure 2-449 Pickup roller components-disassembled

c. Slide the roller shaft and then remove the pickup roller assembly.

Figure 2-450 Remove the pickup roller assembly

4. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

528 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

3. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Also use the following special installation instructions.

ADF pick roller (GX/sGX)

After the replacement roller is installed, follow these instructions to reset the firmware counter:

1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, select the Support Tools menu.

2. Select the Service menu.

3. Make sure that Service Access Code is selected in the drop-down menu, and then enter the service
access code.

4. Select the Service Tools menu.

5. Select the Supply Status menu.

6. Select Field Replacement Unit.

7. Select ADF Pick Roller.

8. Select ADF Pick Roller.

9. Select Reset.

Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly 529

 Removal and replacement: ADF separation roller assembly (GX)
This document provides the procedures to remove the flow document feeder separation roller
assembly.

View a video of removing and replacing the separation roller (E72525-E72535).

View a video of removing and replacing the separation roller (E77822-E77830).

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Basic

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Disconnect the power cable.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-91 Part information

Part number Part description

JC97-04915A Separation roller assembly (GX/z)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.

1. Remove the flow ADF pickup roller assembly

Follow these steps to remove the flow ADF pickup roller assembly.

1. Open the document feeder top cover.

2. Remove the pickup roller assembly:

530 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

a. Remove 4 screws.

Figure 2-451 Remove 4 screws.

b. Remove 2 cables (callout 1) then remove the document feeder pickup roller assembly

Figure 2-452 Remove the pickup roller assembly

TIP: Re-assembly

● Make sure shape of both the holes on the assembly and the shafts at the frame.

Remove the flow ADF pickup roller assembly 531

 3. Remove the pickup rollers:

a. Remove four screws and then remove the cover.

Figure 2-453 Remove the pickup roller assembly cover

b. Remove two plastic clips and two bushings, disconnect two springs, and then remove the
shaft coupler.

NOTE: The shaft is engaged in the coupler.

532 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Figure 2-454 Remove the pickup roller components

Figure 2-455 Pickup roller components-disassembled

c. Slide the roller shaft and then remove the pickup roller assembly.

Figure 2-456 Remove the pickup roller assembly

4. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

2. Remove the flow ADF separation roller assembly

Follow these steps to remove the flow ADF separation roller assembly.

Remove the flow ADF separation roller assembly 533

 1. Slightly lift the input tray, and then remove the separation roller cover.

Figure 2-457 Remove the separation roller cover

2. Remove one plastic clip.

NOTE: The shaft is engaged in the coupler.

Figure 2-458 Remove one plastic clip

3. Slide the roller assembly to the front, and then pull up to release the claws from the shaft.

Reinstallation tip: Position the spring and shaft before attaching the claws to the shaft.

534 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Figure 2-459 Release the separation roller

4. Remove the separation roller.

NOTE: Make sure that the sponge washer (circled in a previous step) is retained during the
removal of the roller assembly–it might fall off.

Figure 2-460 Remove the separation roller

TIP: Re-assembly tip

1. Put the spring to the arrow direction at the bottom of the holder.

Remove the flow ADF separation roller assembly 535

 2. Insert the spring at the hole carefully.

3. Push the separation roller assembly to the bottom (Callout 1), then insert the assembly (2
joints) to the shaft (Callout 2)

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

536 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

4. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Also use the following special installation instructions.

Flow ADF separation roller

After the replacement roller is installed, follow these instructions to reset the firmware counter:

1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, select the Support Tools menu.

2. Select the Service menu.

3. Make sure that Service Access Code is selected in the drop-down menu, and then enter the service
access code.

4. Select the Service Tools menu.

5. Select the Supply Status menu.

6. Select Field Replacement Unit.

7. Select ADF Separation (Reverse) Roller.

8. Select ADF Separation Roller.

9. Select Reset.

Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly 537

 Alphabetical parts list
Table 2-92 Alphabetical parts list

Description Part number Table and page

Document feeder separtation roller assembly (GX/z models) JC97-04915A ADF upper pickup (GX/z) on
page 524

GX/z ADF, sub-pickup JC97-04650A ADF upper pickup (GX/z) on

page 524

Photo-interrupter 0604-001381 ADF upper pickup (GX/z) on

page 524

Photo-interrupter 0604-001393 ADF upper pickup (GX/z) on

page 524

538 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Numerical parts list
Table 2-93 Numerical parts list

Part number Description Table and page

0604-001381 Photo-interrupter ADF upper pickup (GX/z) on

page 524

0604-001393 Photo-interrupter ADF upper pickup (GX/z) on

page 524

JC97-04650A GX/z ADF, sub-pickup ADF upper pickup (GX/z) on

page 524

JC97-04915A Document feeder separtation roller assembly (GX/z models) ADF upper pickup (GX/z) on
page 524

Flow ADF stacker (GX/z)

View the flow ADF stacker (GX/z) exploded view, parts list, and repair procedures.

Flow ADF stacker (GX/sGX)

Parts diagram and parts list for the flow ADF stacker (GX/sGX).

Numerical parts list 539

 Figure 2-461 Flow ADF stacker (GX/sGX)

Table 2-92 Flow ADF stacker

Ref Part number Description Qty Repair procedure

No

0 JC97-04658C GX/z Flow ADF stacker 1 Removal and replacement:

Document feeder input tray
(GX) on page 499

1-6 0604-001381 Photo-interrupter 1 Not applicable

6 0604-001393 Photo-interrupter 1 Not applicable

Not shown JC82-00693 Flow ADF - stacker upper CM 1 Not applicable

A

540 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Alphabetical parts list
Table 2-93 Alphabetical parts list

Description Part number Table and page

Flow ADF - stacker upper CM JC82-00693A Flow ADF stacker on page 540

GX/z Flow ADF stacker JC97-04658C Flow ADF stacker on page 540

Photo-interrupter 0604-001381 Flow ADF stacker on page 540

Photo-interrupter 0604-001393 Flow ADF stacker on page 540

Alphabetical parts list 541

 Numerical parts list
Table 2-94 Numerical parts list

Part number Description Table and page

0604-001381 Photo-interrupter Flow ADF stacker on page 540

0604-001393 Photo-interrupter Flow ADF stacker on page 540

JC82-00693A Flow ADF - stacker upper CM Flow ADF stacker on page 540

JC97-04658C GX/z Flow ADF stacker Flow ADF stacker on page 540

Flow ADF main frame (GX/z)

View the flow ADF main frame (GX/z) exploded view, parts list, and repair procedures.

ADF main frame (GX/z)

Parts diagram and parts list for the ADF main frame (GX/z)

Figure 2-462 ADF main frame (GX/z)

1-3

542 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Table 2-93 ADF main frame (GX/z)

Ref Part number Description Qty Repair procedure

No

1-1 JC97-04915A GX Separation Roller Assy 1 Removal and replacement:

ADF separation roller
assembly (GX) on page 530

1-2 JC97-04652A GX ADF - Separation Roller Cover 1 Not applicable

1-3 JC61-08235A Spring CS 1 Not applicable

5 JC97-04656B GX ADF scan in lower 1 Not applicable

7 0605-001246 Contact Image Sensor (CIS) assembly 1 Not applicable

8 JC97-04681A GX ADF, pickup release drive 1 Removal and replacement:

Document feeder rear motors
(GX) on page 547

11 JC92-02964A GX ADF, PCA 1 Removal and replacement:

PCA-ADF HIC (GX) on page
569

12 JC97-04680A GX ADF, feed drive motor 4 Removal and replacement:

Document feeder rear motors
(GX) on page 547

13 JC97-04640A GX ADF, hinge L 1 Not applicable

14 JC97-04641A GX ADF, hinge R 1 Not applicable

16 JC61-07694A GX Fan motor housing 1 Not applicable

17 JC31-00168A Fan, ADF CIS 1 Removal and replacement:

Document feeder contact
image sensor (CIS) fan (GX) on
page 558

19 JC97-04679A GX ADF, lift drive 1 Removal and replacement:

Document feeder rear motors
(GX) on page 547

20 JC31-00177A GX Step motor, ip 1 Removal and replacement:

Document feeder front motor
(GX) on page 544

21 JC31-00146A Fan type 4, ADF PCA (GX) 1 Removal and replacement:

Document feeder PCA fan
(GX) on page 555

23 JC97-04668B GX ADF - Input Tray 1 Not applicable

26 JC97-04687A GX ADF, white simplex roller 1 Not applicable

27 JC97-04830A GX ADF scan out 1 Not applicable

29 JC97-04682A GX ADF - Motor Drive Release Scan 1 Not applicable

36 6602-001730 Timing belt, gear 3 Not applicable

Not shown JC92-02965A PCA - ADF HIC (GX only) 1 Removal and replacement:
Flow ADF ultrasonic sensor
with PCA (GX) on page 561

Not shown JC92-02967A PCA - ADF Receiver (GX only) 1 Removal and replacement:
Flow ADF ultrasonic sensor
with PCA (GX) on page 561

ADF main frame (GX/z) 543

 Table 2-93 ADF main frame (GX/z) (continued)

Ref Part number Description Qty Repair procedure

No

Not shown JC92-02966A PCA - ADF Transmitter (GX only) 1 Removal and replacement:
Flow ADF ultrasonic sensor
with PCA (GX) on page 561

Removal and replacement: Document feeder front motor (GX)

This document provides the procedures to remove the front motor assembly.

View a video of removing and replacing the motor (E72520-E72530).

View a video of removing and replacing the motor (E77820-E77830).

Mean time to repair: 25 minutes

Service level: Advanced

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Disconnect the power cable.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-94 Part information

Part number Part description

JC31-00177A Front motor assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.

544 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

1. Remove the document feeder back cover
Follow these steps to remove the document feeder back cover.

1. Remove two screws from the top of document feeder back cover.

Figure 2-463 Remove the document feeder back cover top screws

2. Remove three screws from the bottom of the document feeder back cover, and then remove the
document feeder back cover.

Figure 2-464 Remove the document feeder back cover bottom screws

2. Remove the front motor

Follow these steps to remove the front motor.

Remove the document feeder back cover 545

 ■ Remove two screws and disconnect one connector, and then remove the motor.

Reinstallation tip:

a. Reinstall the motor and lift the gear belt up to engage the motor pulley.

b. Loosely install the motor mount screws.

c. Install the tension spring.

d. Tighten the motor mount screws just enough so that the tension spring (not the motor mount
screws) is providing the tension to the belt.

Figure 2-465 Remove the document feeder front motor

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using

546 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Document feeder rear motors (GX)

This document provides the procedures to remove the rear motor assemblies.

View a video of removing and replacing the motors (E72520-E72530).

View a video of removing and replacing the motors (E77820-E77830).

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Intermediate

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Disconnect the power cable.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-95 Part information

Part number Part description

JC97-04679A Motor 1 - Flow ADF drive

JC97-04681A Motor 2 -Flow ADF drive release pickup

JC97-04680A Pickup motor

C97-04680A Pre_REGI motor

JC97-04680A Exit motor

JC97-04680A Feed motor

JC31-00177A REGI motor

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

Removal and replacement: Document feeder rear motors (GX) 547

 ○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.

1. Identify the document feeder motors

Follow these steps to identify the document feeder motors.

■ Use the figure below to locate the motor.

Figure 2-466 Document feeder motors identification

1 2 3 4

5 6 7

Callout Description

1 Motor 1

2 Motor 2

3 Pickup motor

4 Pre-REGI motor

5 Exit motor

6 Feed motor

7 REGI motor

2. Remove the document feeder back cover

Follow these steps to remove the document feeder back cover.

548 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 1. Remove two screws from the top of document feeder back cover.

Figure 2-467 Remove the document feeder back cover top screws

2. Remove three screws from the bottom of the document feeder back cover, and then remove the
document feeder back cover.

Figure 2-468 Remove the document feeder back cover bottom screws

3. Remove motors 1 and 2

Follow these steps to remove motors 1 and 2.

■ Remove two screws and one connector, and then remove the motor.

Reinstallation tip: Reinstall the motor and lift the gear belt up to engage the motor pulley.

Remove motors 1 and 2 549

 Figure 2-469 Remove the motor

4. Remove the pickup and pre-REGI motors

Follow these steps to remove the pickup and pre-REGI motors.

1. Loosen the cable retainer, and then disconnect one connector from the motor.

TIP: Remove the connector harness from the retainer, and then disconnect the connector.

Figure 2-470 Disconnect one connector

2. Remove one spring (callout 1), and then loosen (but do not remove) three screws. Slide the pickup
motor off the screws to remove it.

NOTE:

● Reinstall the motor on the motor mounting screws, and then lift the gear belt up to engage the
motor pulley.

550 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 ● Install the tension spring.

● Tighten the motor mount screws just enough so that the tension spring (not the motor mount
screws) is providing the tension to the belt.

Figure 2-471 Pickup motor

3. Remove one spring (callout 1), and then loosen (but do not remove) three screws. Slide the pre-REGI
motor off the screws to remove it.

NOTE:

● Reinstall the motor on the motor mounting screws, and then lift the gear belt up to engage the
motor pulley.

● Install the tension spring.

● Tighten the motor mount screws just enough so that the tension spring (not the motor mount
screws) is providing the tension to the belt.

Remove the pickup and pre-REGI motors 551

 Figure 2-472 Pre-REGI motor

5. Remove the exit motor

Follow these steps to remove the exit motor.

1. Remove two screws and one connector, and then remove the CIS fan.

Figure 2-473 Remove the main fan

2. Remove the spring (callout 1), disconnect one connector (callout 2), loosen three screws, and then
remove the exit motor.

Reinstallation tip:

a. Reinstall the motor and lift the gear belt up to engage the motor pulley.

b. Install the tension spring.

552 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 c. Tighten the motor mount screws just enough so that the tension spring (not the motor mount
screws) is providing the tension to the belt.

Figure 2-474 Remove the motor

6. Remove the feed motor

Follow these steps to remove the feed motor.

1. Disconnect one connector (callout 1).

Figure 2-475 Disconnect one connector

Remove the feed motor 553

 2. Remove two screws, and then remove motor.

Figure 2-476 Remove the motor

7. Remove the REGI motor

Follow these steps to remove the REGI motor.

1. Remove the rear cover.

2. Remove the Pre-REGI motor.

3. Disconnect one connector from the motor.

TIP: Remove the connector harness from the cable retainer, and then disconnect the connector.

4. Remove one spring, loosen (do not remove) 3 screws, and then slide the motor off the screws to
remove it.

Reinstallation tip:

a. Reinstall the motor and lift the gear belt up to engage the motor pulley.

b. Install the tension spring.

c. Tighten the motor mount screws just enough so that the tension spring (not the motor mount
screws) is providing the tension to the belt.

8. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

554 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Document feeder PCA fan (GX)

This document provides the procedures to remove the document feeder PCA fan assembly.

View a video of removing and replacing the fan (E72520-E72530).

View a video of removing and replacing the fan (E77820-E77830).

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Intermediate

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Disconnect the power cable.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-96 Part information

Part number Part description

JC31-00146A Document feeder PCA fan assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

Removal and replacement: Document feeder PCA fan (GX) 555

 After performing service
Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.

1. Remove the document feeder back cover

Follow these steps to remove the document feeder back cover.

1. Remove two screws from the top of document feeder back cover.

Figure 2-477 Remove the document feeder back cover top screws

556 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 2. Remove three screws from the bottom of the document feeder back cover, and then remove the
document feeder back cover.

Figure 2-478 Remove the document feeder back cover bottom screws

2. Remove the document feeder PCA fan

Follow these steps to remove the document feeder PCA fan.

■ Disconnect one connector (callout 1) and then release two tabs (callout 2) to remove the fan.

Reinstallation tip: Install the fan with the correct orientation when reinstalling.

Figure 2-479 Remove the document feeder PCA fan connector

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

Remove the document feeder PCA fan 557

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Document feeder contact image sensor (CIS) fan (GX)
This document provides the procedures to remove the CIS fan assembly.

View a video of removing and replacing the fan (E72520-E72530).

View a video of removing and replacing the fan (E77820-E77830).

Mean time to repair: 20 minutes

Service level: Intermediate

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Disconnect the power cable.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-97 Part information

Part number Part description

JC31-00168A CIS fan

558 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.

1. Remove the document feeder back cover

Follow these steps to remove the document feeder back cover.

1. Remove two screws from the top of document feeder back cover.

Figure 2-480 Remove the document feeder back cover top screws

Remove the document feeder back cover 559

 2. Remove three screws from the bottom of the document feeder back cover, and then remove the
document feeder back cover.

Figure 2-481 Remove the document feeder back cover bottom screws

2. Remove the document feeder CIS fan

Follow these steps to remove the document feeder CIS fan.

■ Remove one connector, and then remove two mounting screws to remove the fan.

Figure 2-482 Remove the document feeder CIS fan

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

560 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Flow ADF ultrasonic sensor with PCA (GX)
This document provides the procedures to remove the ultrasonic sensor with PCA assembly.

View a video of removing and replacing the sensor (E72520-E72530).

E77820-E77830:

View a video of removing and replacing the sensor (E77820-E77830).

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Intermediate

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Disconnect the power cable.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Removal and replacement: Flow ADF ultrasonic sensor with PCA (GX) 561
 Table 2-98 Part information

Part number Part description

JC92-02965A PCA- ADF HIC (GX only)

JC92-02967A PCA- ADF Receiver (GX only)

JC92-02966A PCA- ADF Transmitter (GX only)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.

1. Remove the document feeder (ADF) front cover

Follow these steps to remove the document feeder (ADF) front cover.

1. Remove two screws from the top of document feeder front cover.

Figure 2-483 Remove the document feeder front cover top screws

562 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 2. Open the document feeder. Detach a sticker and then remove a screw (Callout 1) from the bottom
of the document feeder front cover.

Figure 2-484 Open the document feeder

3. Remove the document feeder front cover.

Figure 2-485 Remove the document feeder front cover

2. Remove the document feeder back cover

Follow these steps to remove the document feeder back cover.

Remove the document feeder back cover 563

 1. Remove two screws from the top of document feeder back cover.

Figure 2-486 Remove the document feeder back cover top screws

2. Remove three screws from the bottom of the document feeder back cover, and then remove the
document feeder back cover.

Figure 2-487 Remove the document feeder back cover bottom screws

3. Remove the document feeder pickup and feed assembly

Follow these steps to remove the document feeder pickup and feed assembly.

564 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

1. Remove 4 screws.

Figure 2-488 Remove 4 screws.

2. Remove 2 cables (callout 1) then remove the document feeder pickup roller assembly

Figure 2-489 Remove the pickup roller assembly

TIP: Re-assembly

● Make sure shape of both the holes on the assembly and the shafts at the frame.

Remove the document feeder pickup and feed assembly 565

 4. Remove the document feeder paper path cover
Follow these steps to remove the document feeder paper path cover.

■ Remove five screws, and then remove the paper path cover.

Figure 2-490 Remove the document feeder paper path cover

5. Remove the ultrasonic sensor with PCA

Follow these steps to remove the ultrasonic sensor with PCA.

566 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

1. Remove the separation roller, and then remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 2-491 Remove one screw

2. Remove the pick/feed cover.

Figure 2-492 Remove the pick/feed cover

Remove the ultrasonic sensor with PCA 567

 3. Remove two screws (callout 1), and then remove the ultrasonic sensor.

Figure 2-493 Remove the ultrasonic sensor

6. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

568 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Removal and replacement: PCA-ADF HIC (GX)
This document provides the procedures to remove the document feeder PCA.

View a video fo removing and replacing the PCA (E72520-E72530).

View a video fo removing and replacing the PCA (E77820-E77830).

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Intermediate

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Disconnect the power cable.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-99 Part information

Part number Part description

JC92-02962A Document feeder PCA assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.

1. Remove the document feeder back cover

Follow these steps to remove the document feeder back cover.

Removal and replacement: PCA-ADF HIC (GX) 569

 1. Remove two screws from the top of document feeder back cover.

Figure 2-494 Remove the document feeder back cover top screws

2. Remove three screws from the bottom of the document feeder back cover, and then remove the
document feeder back cover.

Figure 2-495 Remove the document feeder back cover bottom screws

2. Remove the document feeder PCA

Follow these steps to remove the document feeder PCA.

570 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 1. Disconnect six connectors and the ground wire from PCA, and then remove four screws.

Figure 2-496 Document feeder PCA

2. Remove the document feeder PCA.

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Unpack the replacement assembly 571

 Alphabetical parts list
Table 2-5 Alphabetical parts list

Description Part number Table and page

Contact Image Sensor (CIS) assembly 0605-001246 ADF main frame (GX/z) on page
543

Fan type 4, ADF PCA (GX) JC31-00146A ADF main frame (GX/z) on page
543

Fan, ADF CIS JC31-00168A ADF main frame (GX/z) on page

543

GX ADF - Input Tray JC97-04668B ADF main frame (GX/z) on page

543

GX ADF - Motor Drive Release Scan JC97-04682A ADF main frame (GX/z) on page
543

GX ADF - Separation Roller Cover JC97-04652A ADF main frame (GX/z) on page
543

GX ADF scan in lower JC97-04656B ADF main frame (GX/z) on page

543

GX ADF scan out JC97-04830A ADF main frame (GX/z) on page

543

GX ADF, PCA JC92-02964A ADF main frame (GX/z) on page

543

GX ADF, feed drive motor JC97-04680A ADF main frame (GX/z) on page
543

GX ADF, hinge L JC97-04640A ADF main frame (GX/z) on page

543

GX ADF, hinge R JC97-04641A ADF main frame (GX/z) on page

543

GX ADF, lift drive JC97-04679A ADF main frame (GX/z) on page

543

GX ADF, pickup release drive JC97-04681A ADF main frame (GX/z) on page
543

GX ADF, white simplex roller JC97-04687A ADF main frame (GX/z) on page
543

GX Fan motor housing JC61-07694A ADF main frame (GX/z) on page

543

GX Separation Roller Assy JC97-04915A ADF main frame (GX/z) on page

543

GX Step motor, ip JC31-00177A ADF main frame (GX/z) on page

543

PCA - ADF HIC (GX only) JC92-02965A ADF main frame (GX/z) on page
543

PCA - ADF Receiver (GX only) JC92-02967A ADF main frame (GX/z) on page
543

PCA - ADF Transmitter (GX only) JC92-02966A ADF main frame (GX/z) on page
543

572 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Table 2-5 Alphabetical parts list (continued)

Description Part number Table and page

Timing belt, gear 6602-001730 ADF main frame (GX/z) on page

543

Alphabetical parts list 573

 Numerical parts list
Table 2-6 Numerical parts list

Part number Description Table and page

0605-001246 Contact Image Sensor (CIS) assembly ADF main frame (GX/z) on page
543

6602-001730 Timing belt, gear ADF main frame (GX/z) on page

543

JC31-00146A Fan type 4, ADF PCA (GX) ADF main frame (GX/z) on page
543

JC31-00168A Fan, ADF CIS ADF main frame (GX/z) on page

543

JC31-00177A GX Step motor, ip ADF main frame (GX/z) on page

543

JC61-07694A GX Fan motor housing ADF main frame (GX/z) on page

543

JC92-02964A GX ADF, PCA ADF main frame (GX/z) on page

543

JC92-02965A PCA - ADF HIC (GX only) ADF main frame (GX/z) on page
543

JC92-02966A PCA - ADF Transmitter (GX only) ADF main frame (GX/z) on page
543

JC92-02967A PCA - ADF Receiver (GX only) ADF main frame (GX/z) on page
543

JC97-04640A GX ADF, hinge L ADF main frame (GX/z) on page

543

JC97-04641A GX ADF, hinge R ADF main frame (GX/z) on page

543

JC97-04652A GX ADF - Separation Roller Cover ADF main frame (GX/z) on page
543

JC97-04656B GX ADF scan in lower ADF main frame (GX/z) on page

543

JC97-04668B GX ADF - Input Tray ADF main frame (GX/z) on page

543

JC97-04679A GX ADF, lift drive ADF main frame (GX/z) on page

543

JC97-04680A GX ADF, feed drive motor ADF main frame (GX/z) on page
543

JC97-04681A GX ADF, pickup release drive ADF main frame (GX/z) on page
543

JC97-04682A GX ADF - Motor Drive Release Scan ADF main frame (GX/z) on page
543

JC97-04687A GX ADF, white simplex roller ADF main frame (GX/z) on page
543

JC97-04830A GX ADF scan out ADF main frame (GX/z) on page

543

574 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Table 2-6 Numerical parts list (continued)

Part number Description Table and page

JC97-04915A GX Separation Roller Assy ADF main frame (GX/z) on page

543

Image scanner
View the image scanner exploded view, parts list, and repair procedures.

Image scanner
Parts diagram and parts list for the image scanner.

Image scanner 575

 Figure 2-497 Image scanner

Table 2-100 Image scanner

Ref Part number Description Qty Repair procedure

No

2 JC92-02781A PCA - Scan Joint 1 Not applicable

3 JC01-00101A SSA Tempered Glass 1 Not applicable

4 JC97-04516A Image scanner open sensor 1 Not applicable

5 JC97-04521A Scanner - FR Lamp 1 Not applicable

6 JC97-04515A Image scanner, lower 1 Not applicable

576 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Table 2-100 Image scanner (continued)

Ref Part number Description Qty Repair procedure

No

7 JC31-00158A Step motor, ip 1 Not applicable

Image scanner 577

 Alphabetical parts list
Table 2-101 Alphabetical parts list

Description Part number Table and page

Image scanner open sensor JC97-04516A Image scanner on page 576

Image scanner, lower JC97-04515A Image scanner on page 576

PCA - Scan Joint JC92-02781A Image scanner on page 576

SSA Tempered Glass JC01-00101A Image scanner on page 576

Scanner - FR Lamp JC97-04521A Image scanner on page 576

Step motor, ip JC31-00158A Image scanner on page 576

578 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Numerical parts list
Table 2-102 Numerical parts list

Part number Description Table and page

JC01-00101A SSA Tempered Glass Image scanner on page 576

JC31-00158A Step motor, ip Image scanner on page 576

JC92-02781A PCA - Scan Joint Image scanner on page 576

JC97-04515A Image scanner, lower Image scanner on page 576

JC97-04516A Image scanner open sensor Image scanner on page 576

JC97-04521A Scanner - FR Lamp Image scanner on page 576

Image scanner assembly

View the image scanner assembly exploded view, parts list, and repair procedures.

Image scanner assembly

Parts diagram and parts list for the image scanner assembly.

Numerical parts list 579

 Figure 2-498 Image scanner assembly

Table 2-101 Image scanner assembly

Ref Part number Description Qty Repair procedure

No

1 JC97-04522B Image scanner scan glass 1 Removal and replacement:

Scan glass on page 581

2 JC92-02781A PCA scanner 1 Not applicable

3 JC01-00101A Tempered scan glass 1 Not applicable

4 JC97-04516A Scanner assembly-DDC and lens 2 Not applicable

5-1 JC97-04521A Image scanner lamp 1 HP LaserJet Managed

MFP E72525-E72535, E77822-
E77830 - Removal and
replacement: Scanner LED
lamp module on page 583

7 JC31-00158A Step motor, ip 1 Not applicable

Not shown JC39-02120A Flat Cable-WLED 1 Not applicable

580 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Removal and replacement: Scan glass
Learn how to remove and replace the scanner glass.

View a video of how to remove and replace the scanner glass.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 2-102 Part information

Part number Part description

JC97-04522B Scanner glass

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of
the printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Removal and replacement: Scan glass 581

 Post service test
Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

Remove the scanner glass

Follow these steps to remove the scanner glass.

■ CAUTION: Make sure not to be contaminated in scanner while scanner glass is removed.

Open the document-feeder cover, remove two screws, and then slide the scanner glass to the right
to remove it.

Figure 2-499 Remove scanner glass

Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

582 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

HP LaserJet Managed MFP E72525-E72535, E77822-E77830 - Removal and

replacement: Scanner LED lamp module
This document provides the procedures to remove the LED lamp module assembly.

E72520-E72530:

?
colid=https%3A%2F%2F2.zoppoz.workers.dev%3A443%2Fhttps%2Fplayers.brightcove.net%2F1160438706001%2Fsykvjerxx_default%2Findex.html
%3Fvideoid%3Dref%3Arefidph0000000357#NOTFOUND

E77820-E77830:

?
colid=https%3A%2F%2F2.zoppoz.workers.dev%3A443%2Fhttps%2Fplayers.brightcove.net%2F1160438706001%2Fsykvjerxx_default%2Findex.html
%3Fvideoid%3Dref%3Arefidph0000000283#NOTFOUND

Mean time to repair: 45 minutes

Service level: Advanced

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Disconnect the power cable.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-103 Part information

LED lamp module assembly part number

JC97-04521A LED lamp module assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

HP LaserJet Managed MFP E72525-E72535, E77822-E77830 - Removal and replacement: Scanner LED lamp module
583
 Post service test
Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.

1. Remove the scanner glass

Follow these steps to remove the scanner glass.

■ CAUTION: Make sure not to be contaminated in scanner while scanner glass is removed.

Open the document-feeder cover, remove two screws, and then slide the scanner glass to the right
to remove it.

Figure 2-500 Remove scanner glass

2. Remove the LED lamp module

Follow these steps to remove the LED lamp module.

1. CAUTION: Make sure not to be contaminated in scanner while scanner glass is removed. then
remove the LED lamp module.

Remove the transparent tape.

Figure 2-501 Remove transparent tape

584 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 2. Disconnect the flat cable.

Figure 2-502 Disconnect cable

3. Remove four screws. Remove the LED lamp module.

Figure 2-503 Remove screws and release LED lamp module

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

Unpack the replacement assembly 585

 NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

586 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Alphabetical parts list
Table 2-5 Alphabetical parts list

Description Part number Table and page

Flat Cable-WLED JC39-02120A Image scanner assembly on

page 580

Image scanner lamp JC97-04521A Image scanner assembly on

page 580

Image scanner scan glass JC97-04522B Image scanner assembly on

page 580

PCA scanner JC92-02781A Image scanner assembly on

page 580

Scanner assembly-DDC and lens JC97-04516A Image scanner assembly on

page 580

Step motor, ip JC31-00158A Image scanner assembly on

page 580

Tempered scan glass JC01-00101A Image scanner assembly on

page 580

Alphabetical parts list 587

 Numerical parts list
Table 2-6 Numerical parts list

Part number Description Table and page

JC01-00101A Tempered scan glass Image scanner assembly on

page 580

JC31-00158A Step motor, ip Image scanner assembly on

page 580

JC39-02120A Flat Cable-WLED Image scanner assembly on

page 580

JC92-02781A PCA scanner Image scanner assembly on

page 580

JC97-04516A Scanner assembly-DDC and lens Image scanner assembly on

page 580

JC97-04521A Image scanner lamp Image scanner assembly on

page 580

JC97-04522B Image scanner scan glass Image scanner assembly on

page 580

Image scanner, lower (LX)

View the image scanner, lower (LX) exploded view, parts list, and repair procedures.

Image scanner, lower (LX)

Parts diagram and parts list for the lower image scanner.

588 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Figure 2-504 Image scanner, lower (LX)

Table 2-104 Image scanner, lower (LX)

Ref Part number Description Qty Repair procedure

No

1 JC97-04509A Image scanner, ffc ccd 1 Not applicable

2 JC97-04512A Image scanner guide harness 1 Not applicable

(JC39-02131 WLED I/F Harness, JC92-02728A

WLED I/F PBA included)

3 JC97-04507A Image scanner, APS 1 Removal and replacement:

Scanner APS sensor on page
593

3-1 604-001453 Photo interrupter 2 Not applicable

4 JC97-04523B Image scanner lens 1 Removal and replacement:

Scanner assembly – CCD and
lens on page 590

Not shown JC39-02120A Flat Cable-WLED 1 Not applicable

Image scanner, lower (LX) 589

 Removal and replacement: Scanner assembly – CCD and lens
Learn how to remove and replace the scanner CDD and lens.

View a video of how to remove and replace the scanner CDD and lens (E72525-72535).

View a video of how to remove and replace the scanner CDD and lens (E77822-77830).

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 2-105 Part information

Part number Part description

JC97-04523B Scanner assembly -CDD and lens

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of
the printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

590 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 ○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

Remove the scanner glass

Follow these steps to remove the scanner glass.

■ CAUTION: Make sure not to be contaminated in scanner while scanner glass is removed.

Open the document-feeder cover, remove two screws, and then slide the scanner glass to the right
to remove it.

Figure 2-505 Remove scanner glass

Remove the scanner assembly CDD and lens

Follow these steps to remove the scanner assembly CDD and lens.

1. Remove four screws, and then release the imaging unit cover.

Figure 2-506 Remove screws and release imaging unit cover

Remove the scanner glass 591

 2. Disconnect the flat cable.

Figure 2-507 Disconnect flat cable

3. Remove two screws and release the scanner assembly CDD and lens.

CAUTION: Do not remove or adjust the other two screws shown as they require factory setting
only.

Figure 2-508 Remove screws and release scanner imaging unit

4. Place Imaging unit according to label number as -1/0/+1 then assemble plate-spring after assembly
of FFC into Imaging unit.

CAUTION: Do not remove or adjust the other two screws shown as they require factory setting
only.

592 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Figure 2-509 Place Imaging unit according to label number as -1/0/+1

Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Scanner APS sensor

This document provides the procedures to remove the APS sensor assembly.

View a video of removing and replacing the sensor (E72520-E72530).

View a video of removing and replacing the sensor (E77820-E77830).

Mean time to repair: 25 minutes

Unpack the replacement assembly 593

 Service level: Advanced

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Disconnect the power cable.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-106 Part information

Part number Part description

JC97-04507A APS sensor assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.

1. Remove the scanner glass

Follow these steps to remove the scanner glass.

■ CAUTION: Make sure not to be contaminated in scanner while scanner glass is removed.

594 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Open the document-feeder cover, remove two screws, and then slide the scanner glass to the right
to remove it.

Figure 2-510 Remove scanner glass

2. Remove the APS sensor

Follow these steps to remove the APS sensor.

1. Remove the joint board cover.

Figure 2-511 Remove joint board cover

Remove the APS sensor 595

 2. Remove one screw.

Figure 2-512 Remove screw

3. Disconnect the harness.

Figure 2-513 Disconnect harness

4. Remove two screws. Release the APS sensor.

Figure 2-514 Remove screws and release APS sensor

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

596 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Unpack the replacement assembly 597

 Alphabetical parts list
Table 2-5 Alphabetical parts list

Description Part number Table and page

Image scanner guide harness JC97-04512A Image scanner, lower (LX) on

page 589

Image scanner lens JC97-04523B Image scanner, lower (LX) on

page 589

Image scanner, APS JC97-04507A Image scanner, lower (LX) on

page 589

Image scanner, ffc ccd JC97-04509A Image scanner, lower (LX) on

page 589

Photo interrupter 604-001453 Image scanner, lower (LX) on

page 589

598 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Numerical parts list
Table 2-6 Numerical parts list

Part number Description Table and page

604-001453 Photo interrupter Image scanner, lower (LX) on

page 589

JC97-04507A Image scanner, APS Image scanner, lower (LX) on

page 589

JC97-04509A Image scanner, ffc ccd Image scanner, lower (LX) on

page 589

JC97-04512A Image scanner guide harness Image scanner, lower (LX) on

page 589

JC97-04523B Image scanner lens Image scanner, lower (LX) on

page 589

Second Exit (Optional)

View the second exit repair procedures.

Remove the second eixt (Optional)

Follow these steps to remove the second eixt.

1. Open the right door, then remove the 1 screw.

Figure 2-515 Remove the screw

Numerical parts list 599

 2. Remove 4 caps, then remove 4 screws.

Figure 2-516 Remove the screws

3. Pull the cover (callout 1) to the arrow direction carefully, and pull out the cover (callout 2) .

Figure 2-517 Remove the cover

4. Remove 2 connectors, then remove 1 screw.

Figure 2-518 Remove the connectors and the screw

600 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 5. Pull the left side of the second exit unit (Callout 1), then remove second exit unit.

Figure 2-519 Remove the second exit unit

Remove the return gate solenoid (Optional)

Follow these steps to remove the return gate solenoid.

1. Open the right door, then remove the 1 screw.

Figure 2-520 Remove the screw

Remove the return gate solenoid (Optional) 601

 2. Remove 4 caps, then remove 4 screws.

Figure 2-521 Remove the screws

3. Pull the cover (callout 1) to the arrow direction carefully, and pull out the cover (callout 2) .

Figure 2-522 Remove the cover

4. Remove 2 cables, then remove 1 screw.

Figure 2-523 Remove the connectors and the screw

602 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

5. Pull the left side of the second exit unit (Callout 1), then remove second exit unit.

Figure 2-524 Remove the second exit unit

6. Remove 2 screws, then pull out the solenoid to the arrow direction carefully.

Figure 2-525 Remove the screws

Remove the return gate solenoid (Optional) 603

 7. Remove 2 hooks(Callout1) and 1 plug(Callout 2). Then remove the solenoid(Callout 3)

Figure 2-526 Remove the solenoid

TIP: Reassembly tip

1. Be sure the wiring harness should be located under the solenoid (Callout 1)

2. you must assemble the arrow-shaped plastic into the hole in the solenoid (Callout 2)

604 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Dual cassette feeder (DCF)
Learn about the dual cassette feeder (DCF) exploded diagrams, parts lists, and repair procedures.

DCF main
View the DCF main exploded view, parts list, and repair procedures.

DCF main
Parts diagram and parts list for the DCF main.

Figure 2-527 DCF main

Table 2-107 DCF main

Ref Part number Description Qty Repair procedure

No

1 JC90-01666A Cassette, four Not applicable

2 JC63-04607B DCF, left cover Not applicable

8 JC90-01664A Cassette five Not applicable

9 6109-001138 Caster wheel 4 Not applicable

Dual cassette feeder (DCF) 605

 Table 2-107 DCF main (continued)

Ref Part number Description Qty Repair procedure

No

11 JC63-04606 DCF, front cover 2 Not applicable

B

16 JC93-00513A Main pickup 2 Not applicable

17 6602-003185 Timing belt, gear 1 Not applicable

18 JC90-01285A Right Door 1 Removal and replacement:

Dual-cassette feeder (DCF)
right door on page 608

19 JC63-04605 DCF, right cover 1 Not applicable

B

20 JC93-00018A Rear auto-size holder 2 Not applicable

21 JC93-00442 Drive assembly - main, (DCF pickup motor) 1 Removal and replacement:
B Dual-cassette feeder (DCF)
pickup motor on page 616

22 JC93-00447A Drive Feed Assy (DCF motor) 1 Removal and replacement:

Dual-cassette feeder (DCF)
motor on page 613

26 JC39-01692A Drive Feed Assy 1 Not applicable

29 JC39-01695A Cable, DCR Size Sensor 1 Not applicable

30 Y1F97-67001 PCA - MX4 DCF 1 Removal and replacement:

Dual-cassette feeder (DCF)
PCA on page 611

31 JC39-01690A IF Cable 1 Not applicable

32 JC63-04604 DCF, rear cover 1 Removal and replacement:

B Dual-cassette feeder (DCF)
rear cover on page 606

Not shown JC92-02622C PCA Paper Size Sensor 1 Not applicable

Removal and replacement: Dual-cassette feeder (DCF) rear cover

This document provides the procedures to remove the dual cassette feeder (DCF) rear cover assembly.

Mean time to repair: 5 minutes

Service level: Basic

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cable before attempting to service the printer.

606 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-108 Part information

Part number Part description

JC63-04604B Dual cassette feeder (DCF) rear cover assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.

1. Remove the dual cassette feeder (DCF) rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the dual cassette feeder (DCF) rear cover.

■ Remove four screw caps and four screws, and then remove the rear cover.

Figure 2-528 Remove the DCF rear cover

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.

Remove the dual cassette feeder (DCF) rear cover 607

 Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Dual-cassette feeder (DCF) right door

This document provides the procedures to remove the dual cassette feeder (DCF) right door assembly.

Meant time to repair: 5 minutes

Service level: Basic

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cable before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-109 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01285A DCF right door

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

608 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Post service test
Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.

1. Remove the DCF right door

Follow these steps to remove the DCF right door.

1. Remove four screw caps and four screws, and then remove the lower right cover.

Figure 2-529 Remove the lower right cover

2. Open the DCF right door and slide the hinge pin to the left. Make sure that the pin slides under the
tab (callout 1).

Figure 2-530 Slide the hinge pin

Remove the DCF right door 609

 3. Rotate the right edge of the door away from the feeder (callout 1), and then slide the door to the
right to remove it (callout 2).

Figure 2-531 Remove the DCF right door

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

610 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Removal and replacement: Dual-cassette feeder (DCF) PCA
This document provides the procedures to remove the dual cassette feeder (DCF) PCA assembly.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Intermediate

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cable before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-110 Part information

Part number Part description

Y1F97-67001 Dual cassette feeder (DCF) PCA assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.

1. Remove the dual cassette feeder (DCF) rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the dual cassette feeder (DCF) rear cover.

Removal and replacement: Dual-cassette feeder (DCF) PCA 611

 ■ Remove four screw caps and four screws, and then remove the rear cover.

Figure 2-532 Remove the DCF rear cover

2. Remove the DCF PCA

Follow these steps to remove the DCF PCA.

■ Disconnect eight connectors, remove three screws, and then remove the DCF PCA.

Figure 2-533 Remove the DCF PCA

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using

612 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Dual-cassette feeder (DCF) motor

This document provides the procedures to remove the DCF motor assembly.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Basic

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cable before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-111 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-00447A DCF motor

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.

1. Remove the dual cassette feeder (DCF) rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the dual cassette feeder (DCF) rear cover.

Removal and replacement: Dual-cassette feeder (DCF) motor 613

 ■ Remove four screw caps and four screws, and then remove the rear cover.

Figure 2-534 Remove the DCF rear cover

2. Remove the DCF motor

Follow these steps to remove the DCF motor.

1. Disconnect two connectors, and then open one retainer.

Figure 2-535 Disconnect two connectors and open one retainer

614 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 2. Remove three screws, and then remove the feed drive unit.

Figure 2-536 Remove the feed drive unit

3. Remove two screws, and then remove the feed motor.

Figure 2-537 Remove the feed motor

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

Unpack the replacement assembly 615

 http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Dual-cassette feeder (DCF) pickup motor

This document provides the procedures to remove the DCF pickup motor assembly.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Basic

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cable before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-112 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-00442B DCF pickup motor assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

616 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 After performing service
Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.

1. Remove the dual cassette feeder (DCF) rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the dual cassette feeder (DCF) rear cover.

■ Remove four screw caps and four screws, and then remove the rear cover.

Figure 2-538 Remove the DCF rear cover

2. Remove the DCF pickup motor

Follow these steps to remove the DCF pickup motor.

■ Disconnect the motor connector. remove two screws, and then remove the DCF pickup motor.

Figure 2-539 Remove the DCF pickup motor

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Remove the dual cassette feeder (DCF) rear cover 617

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

618 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Alphabetical parts list
Table 2-5 Alphabetical parts list

Description Part number Table and page

Cable, DCR Size Sensor JC39-01695A DCF main on page 605

Cassette five JC90-01664A DCF main on page 605

Cassette, four JC90-01666A DCF main on page 605

Caster wheel 6109-001138 DCF main on page 605

DCF, front cover JC63-04606B DCF main on page 605

DCF, left cover JC63-04607B DCF main on page 605

DCF, rear cover JC63-04604B DCF main on page 605

DCF, right cover JC63-04605B DCF main on page 605

Drive Feed Assy JC39-01692A DCF main on page 605

Drive Feed Assy (DCF motor) JC93-00447A DCF main on page 605

Drive assembly - main, (DCF pickup motor) JC93-00442B DCF main on page 605

IF Cable JC39-01690A DCF main on page 605

Main pickup JC93-00513A DCF main on page 605

PCA - MX4 DCF Y1F97-67001 DCF main on page 605

PCA Paper Size Sensor JC92-02622C DCF main on page 605

Rear auto-size holder JC93-00018A DCF main on page 605

Right Door JC90-01285A DCF main on page 605

Timing belt, gear 6602-003185 DCF main on page 605

Alphabetical parts list 619

 Numerical parts list
Table 2-6 Numerical parts list

Part number Description Table and page

6109-001138 Caster wheel DCF main on page 605

6602-003185 Timing belt, gear DCF main on page 605

JC39-01690A IF Cable DCF main on page 605

JC39-01692A Drive Feed Assy DCF main on page 605

JC39-01695A Cable, DCR Size Sensor DCF main on page 605

JC63-04604B DCF, rear cover DCF main on page 605

JC63-04605B DCF, right cover DCF main on page 605

JC63-04606B DCF, front cover DCF main on page 605

JC63-04607B DCF, left cover DCF main on page 605

JC90-01285A Right Door DCF main on page 605

JC90-01664A Cassette five DCF main on page 605

JC90-01666A Cassette, four DCF main on page 605

JC92-02622C PCA Paper Size Sensor DCF main on page 605

JC93-00018A Rear auto-size holder DCF main on page 605

JC93-00442B Drive assembly - main, (DCF pickup motor) DCF main on page 605

JC93-00447A Drive Feed Assy (DCF motor) DCF main on page 605

JC93-00513A Main pickup DCF main on page 605

Y1F97-67001 PCA - MX4 DCF DCF main on page 605

620 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

DCF main frame pickup 1
Parts diagram and parts list for the main frame pickup 1.

Figure 2-540 DCF main frame pickup 1

Table 2-113 DCF main frame pickup 1

Ref Part number Description Qty Repair procedure

No

0 JC93-00513A DCF, main pickup 2 Not applicable

1 JC93-00510A Main Pickup Sub Assy 2 Not applicable

2 0640-001381 Photo interrupter 2 Not applicable

3 JC66-03288 Feed pulley 2 Not applicable

A

5 JC61-04717A Second pickup guide 2 Not applicable

6 JC66-03287A Idle feed roller 2 Not applicable

DCF main frame pickup 1 621

 Table 2-113 DCF main frame pickup 1 (continued)

Ref Part number Description Qty Repair procedure

No

7 JC63-03342 Feed Mylar 2 Not applicable

A

DCF main frame pickup

View the DCF main frame pickup exploded view, parts list, and repair procedures.

DCF main frame pickup

Parts diagram and parts list for the DCF main frame pickup.

Figure 2-541 DCF main frame pickup

Table 2-114 DCF main frame pickup

Ref Part number Description Qty Repair procedure

No

0 JC93-00510A Main Pickup lower and upper 2 Removal and replacement:

Dual-cassette feeder (DCF)
pickup units on page 623

1 JC93-00540 Tray 2–x rollers 6 Not applicable

A

622 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Table 2-114 DCF main frame pickup (continued)

Ref Part number Description Qty Repair procedure

No

7-4 JC67-00455A Coupler, torque limiter 2 Not applicable

7-7 JC61-01367A Fixer, e-ring 2 Not applicable

Removal and replacement: Dual-cassette feeder (DCF) pickup units

This document provides the procedures to remove the dual cassette feeder (DCF) pickup units
assembly.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Intermediate

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cable before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-115 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-00510A Dual cassette feeder (DCF) pickup units assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Copy, scan, or print a document. Verify the document copies, scans, or prints correctly.

Removal and replacement: Dual-cassette feeder (DCF) pickup units 623

 1. Remove the Dual cassette feeder (DCF) pickup units
Follow these steps to remove the Dual cassette feeder (DCF) pickup units.

1. Remove the DCF right door.

2. Remove two screws, and then remove the cable cover.

Figure 2-542 Remove two screws and the cable cover

3. At the front of the printer, remove five screws, and then remove two brackets.

Figure 2-543 Remove five screws and two brackets

624 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 4. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove the wire harness from the cable guide
(callout 2). Remove eight screws (callout 3).

Figure 2-544 Disconnect two connectors and remove eight screws

5. Rotate both pickup units away from the feeder on the left (callout 1). Release the belt (callout 2) that
connects the two units. Slide the pickup units to the left (callout 3) to remove them.

Figure 2-545 Remove the pickup units

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Unpack the replacement assembly 625

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

626 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Alphabetical parts list
Table 2-5 Alphabetical parts list

Description Part number Table and page

Coupler, torque limiter JC67-00455A DCF main frame pickup on

page 622

Fixer, e-ring JC61-01367A DCF main frame pickup on

page 622

Main Pickup lower and upper JC93-00510A DCF main frame pickup on
page 622

Tray 2–x rollers JC93-00540A DCF main frame pickup on

page 622

Alphabetical parts list 627

 Numerical parts list
Table 2-6 Numerical parts list

Part number Description Table and page

JC61-01367A Fixer, e-ring DCF main frame pickup on

page 622

JC67-00455A Coupler, torque limiter DCF main frame pickup on

page 622

JC93-00510A Main Pickup lower and upper DCF main frame pickup on
page 622

JC93-00540A Tray 2–x rollers DCF main frame pickup on

page 622

628 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

DCF main frame pickup,upper
Parts diagram and parts list for the main frame pickup upper.

Figure 2-546 DCF main frame pickup upper

Table 2-116 DCF main frame pickup upper

Ref Part number Description Qty Repair procedure

No

0 JC93-00504 Main frame pickup, upper 2 Not applicable

A

3 JC66-03199A Actuator, empty pickup 2 Not applicable

4 JC66-00977A Clutch one way 4 Not applicable

5 JC66-00943 Gear-m, joint 2 Not applicable

A

6 JC66-00941A Gear-m, one way 2 Not applicable

7 JC66-00940 Gear-m, idle 2 Not applicable

A

12 JC61-01288A Holder-m, idle one way 2 Not applicable

14 0604-001393 Photo interrupter 4 Not applicable

DCF main frame pickup,upper 629

 High-capacity input (HCI) tray (workgroup)
View the high-capacity input (HCI) tray (workgroup) exploded diagrams and parts lists.

HCI main
View the HCI main exploded view, parts list, and repair procedures.

HCI main
Parts diagram and parts list for the HCI main.

Figure 2-547 HCI main

Table 2-117 HCI main

Ref Part number Description Qty Repair procedure

No

3 JC90-01727A Sub-pickup (HCI) 1 Removal and replacement:

HCI sub - pickup on page 631

6 JC90-01734A Takeaway (HCI) (right door) 1 Removal and replacement:

HCI right door on page 641

630 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Removal and replacement: HCI sub - pickup
This document provides the procedures to remove the HCI sub-pickup.

View a video of removing and replacing the sub-pickup assembly.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cable before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-118 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01727A HCI sub - pickup

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of
the printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

Remove the HCI rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the Remove the HCI rear cover.

Removal and replacement: HCI sub - pickup 631

 ■ Remove five screw caps (if installed), remove five screws, and then remove the rear cover.

Figure 2-548 Remove the HCI rear cover

Remove the HCI drive assembly - feed

Follow these steps to remove the Remove the HCI drive assembly - feed.

1. Open the right door, and then remove two screws.

Figure 2-549 Remove two screws

632 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

2. Release one tab, and then separate the rear edge of the right cover from the chassis.

Figure 2-550 Separate the rear edge of the right cover from the chassis

3. Disconnect one connector, and then release the wire harness from the retainer.

Figure 2-551 Disconnect one connector

Remove the HCI drive assembly - feed 633

 4. Remove three screws, and then remove the HCI drive assembly - feed.

Figure 2-552 Remove the HCI drive assembly - feed

Remove the HCI right door

Follow these steps to remove the Remove the HCI right door.

1. Remove four screw caps (if installed), and then remove four screws.

NOTE: If the feed drive assembly is removed, there are only two screws that secure this cover.

Figure 2-553 Remove four screws

634 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

2. Release one tab, and then separate the rear edge of the right cover from the chassis.

Figure 2-554 Separate the rear edge of the right cover from the chassis

3. Lift up on the cover while rotating it away from the chassis to release three bosses.

CAUTION: Do not attempt to fully remove the cover. Stop as shown below. Fully removing the
cover at this step will damage the remaining tab and boss on the cover

Figure 2-555 Release three bosses

Remove the HCI right door 635

 4. If the tray was not removed prior to servicing the HCI, remove it now. Look in the tray cavity and
locate the right cover front tab. Release this tab.

Figure 2-556 Release one tab

5. Remove the HCI right cover.

NOTE: The HCI right door will not stay in the latched potion when this cover is removed.

Figure 2-557 Remove the HCI right cover

636 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 6. Rotate the right door front hinge pin out of the holder, and then slide the right door towards the front
of the HCI to release the rear hinge pin and remove the door.

Figure 2-558 Remove the HCI right door

Remove the HCI drive assembly -sub pulley

Follow these steps to remove the Remove the HCI drive assembly -sub pulley.

1. Remove two screws, and then remove the black-plastic cover.

Figure 2-559 Remove the cover

Remove the HCI drive assembly -sub pulley 637

 2. Remove two screws, and then remove the drive assembly - sub-pulley.

Figure 2-560 Remove the HCI drive assembly - sub-pulley

Remove the HCI belt - timing gear

Follow these steps to remove the Remove the HCI belt - timing gear.

■ Remove the belt from the drive gear, and then remove it.

Figure 2-561 Remove the belt - timing gear

Remove the HCI sub - pickup

Follow these steps to remove the Remove the HCI sub - pickup.

638 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

1. Disconnect one connector, and then release three retainers.

Figure 2-562 Disconnect one connector

2. Remove two screws.

Figure 2-563 Remove two screws

Remove the HCI sub - pickup 639

 3. Rotate the front end of the sub - pickup away from the HCI, and then slide it toward the front to
remove it.

Figure 2-564 Remove the sub - pickup

Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

640 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Removal and replacement: HCI right door
This document provides the procedures to remove the HCI right door.

View a video of removing and replacing the sub-right door.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cable before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-119 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01734A HCI right door

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of
the printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

Remove the HCI rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the Remove the HCI rear cover.

Removal and replacement: HCI right door 641

 ■ Remove five screw caps (if installed), remove five screws, and then remove the rear cover.

Figure 2-565 Remove the HCI rear cover

Remove the HCI right door

Follow these steps to remove the Remove the HCI right door.

1. Remove four screw caps (if installed), and then remove four screws.

NOTE: If the feed drive assembly is removed, there are only two screws that secure this cover.

Figure 2-566 Remove four screws

642 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

2. Release one tab, and then separate the rear edge of the right cover from the chassis.

Figure 2-567 Separate the rear edge of the right cover from the chassis

3. Lift up on the cover while rotating it away from the chassis to release three bosses.

CAUTION: Do not attempt to fully remove the cover. Stop as shown below. Fully removing the
cover at this step will damage the remaining tab and boss on the cover

Figure 2-568 Release three bosses

Remove the HCI right door 643

 4. If the tray was not removed prior to servicing the HCI, remove it now. Look in the tray cavity and
locate the right cover front tab. Release this tab.

Figure 2-569 Release one tab

5. Remove the HCI right cover.

NOTE: The HCI right door will not stay in the latched potion when this cover is removed.

Figure 2-570 Remove the HCI right cover

644 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 6. Rotate the right door front hinge pin out of the holder, and then slide the right door towards the front
of the HCI to release the rear hinge pin and remove the door.

Figure 2-571 Remove the HCI right door

Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Unpack the replacement assembly 645

 Alphabetical parts list
Table 2-5 Alphabetical parts list

Description Part number Table and page

Sub-pickup (HCI) JC90-01727A HCI main on page 630

Takeaway (HCI) (right door) JC90-01734A HCI main on page 630

646 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Numerical parts list
Table 2-6 Numerical parts list

Part number Description Table and page

JC90-01727A Sub-pickup (HCI) HCI main on page 630

JC90-01734A Takeaway (HCI) (right door) HCI main on page 630

HCI sub - frame

View the HCI sub - frame exploded view, parts list, and repair procedures.

HCI sub - frame

Parts diagram and parts list for the HCI sub - frame.

Figure 2-572 HCI sub - frame

Table 2-120 HCI sub - frame

Ref Part number Description Qty Repair procedure

No

2 6602-003185 Belt timing gear (HCI) 1 Removal and replacement:

HCI belt - timing gear on page
648

Numerical parts list 647

 Table 2-120 HCI sub - frame (continued)

Ref Part number Description Qty Repair procedure

No

9 6109-001138 Caster wheel (HCI) 4 Removal and replacement:

HCI caster wheel on page
662

12 JC61-04660A Plate guide post upper (HCI) 3 Removal and replacement:

HCI guide post and guide post
plate on page 664

13 JC61-04659A Plate guide post (HCI) 3 Removal and replacement:

HCI guide post and guide post
plate on page 664

23 JC92-02738G Printed circuit assembly (HCI) 1 Removal and replacement:

HCI PCA on page 657

24 JC39-02600 Main electrical connector (HCI) 3 Removal and replacement:

A HCI main electrical connector
on page 659

Removal and replacement: HCI belt - timing gear

This document provides the procedures to remove the HCI belt - timing gear.

View a video of removing and replacing the belt - timing gear.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cable before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-121 Part information

Part number Part description

6602-003185 HCI belt - timing gear

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

648 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 After performing service
Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of
the printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

Remove the HCI rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the Remove the HCI rear cover.

■ Remove five screw caps (if installed), remove five screws, and then remove the rear cover.

Figure 2-573 Remove the HCI rear cover

Remove the HCI drive assembly - feed

Follow these steps to remove the Remove the HCI drive assembly - feed.

Remove the HCI rear cover 649

 1. Open the right door, and then remove two screws.

Figure 2-574 Remove two screws

2. Release one tab, and then separate the rear edge of the right cover from the chassis.

Figure 2-575 Separate the rear edge of the right cover from the chassis

650 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 3. Disconnect one connector, and then release the wire harness from the retainer.

Figure 2-576 Disconnect one connector

4. Remove three screws, and then remove the HCI drive assembly - feed.

Figure 2-577 Remove the HCI drive assembly - feed

Remove the HCI right door

Follow these steps to remove the Remove the HCI right door.

1. Remove four screw caps (if installed), and then remove four screws.

NOTE: If the feed drive assembly is removed, there are only two screws that secure this cover.

Remove the HCI right door 651

 Figure 2-578 Remove four screws

2. Release one tab, and then separate the rear edge of the right cover from the chassis.

Figure 2-579 Separate the rear edge of the right cover from the chassis

3. Lift up on the cover while rotating it away from the chassis to release three bosses.

CAUTION: Do not attempt to fully remove the cover. Stop as shown below. Fully removing the
cover at this step will damage the remaining tab and boss on the cover

652 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Figure 2-580 Release three bosses

4. If the tray was not removed prior to servicing the HCI, remove it now. Look in the tray cavity and
locate the right cover front tab. Release this tab.

Figure 2-581 Release one tab

5. Remove the HCI right cover.

NOTE: The HCI right door will not stay in the latched potion when this cover is removed.

Remove the HCI right door 653

 Figure 2-582 Remove the HCI right cover

6. Rotate the right door front hinge pin out of the holder, and then slide the right door towards the front
of the HCI to release the rear hinge pin and remove the door.

Figure 2-583 Remove the HCI right door

Remove the HCI drive assembly -sub pulley

Follow these steps to remove the Remove the HCI drive assembly -sub pulley.

654 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 1. Remove two screws, and then remove the black-plastic cover.

Figure 2-584 Remove the cover

2. Remove two screws, and then remove the drive assembly - sub-pulley.

Figure 2-585 Remove the HCI drive assembly - sub-pulley

Remove the HCI belt - timing gear

Follow these steps to remove the Remove the HCI belt - timing gear.

Remove the HCI belt - timing gear 655

 ■ Remove the belt from the drive gear, and then remove it.

Figure 2-586 Remove the belt - timing gear

Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

656 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Removal and replacement: HCI PCA
This document provides the procedures to remove the HCI PCA.

View a video of removing and replacing the PCA.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cable before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-122 Part information

Part number Part description

JC92-02738G HCI PCA

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of
the printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

Remove the HCI rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the Remove the HCI rear cover.

Removal and replacement: HCI PCA 657

 ■ Remove five screw caps (if installed), remove five screws, and then remove the rear cover.

Figure 2-587 Remove the HCI rear cover

Remove the Remove the HCI PCA

Follow these steps to remove the HCI PCA.

■ Disconnect five connectors (callout 1), remove three screws, and then remove the HCI PCA.

Figure 2-588 Remove the HCI PCA

Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

658 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: HCI main electrical connector

This document provides the procedures to remove the HCI main electrical connector.

View a video of removing and replacing the main electrical connector.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cable before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-123 Part information

Part number Part description

JC39-02600A HCI main electrical connector

Removal and replacement: HCI main electrical connector 659

 Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of
the printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

Remove the HCI rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the Remove the HCI rear cover.

■ Remove five screw caps (if installed), remove five screws, and then remove the rear cover.

Figure 2-589 Remove the HCI rear cover

Remove the main electrical connector

Follow these steps to remove the HCI main electrical connector.

■ Do the following:

a. Squeeze two tabs and release one connector (callout 1; black and white wire harness) from the
chassis, and then release five retainers.

660 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 b. Disconnect one connector (callout 2; on the HCI PCA), and then release two retainers.

c. Remove one ground screw (callout 3; green wire).

d. Remove two shoulder screws (callout 4); main electrical connector), and then remove the main
connector.

Figure 2-590 Remove the HCI main electrical connector

4
2

Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 661

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: HCI caster wheel

This document provides the procedures to remove the HCI caster.

View a video of removing and replacing the caster.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cable before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-124 Part information

Part number Part description

6109-001138 HCI caster wheel

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of
the printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

662 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Post service test
Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

Remove the HCI caster wheel

Follow these steps to remove the HCI caster.

■ Carefully position the HCI on its side, remove four screws, and then remove the HCI caster wheel.

Figure 2-591 Remove the HCI caster wheel

Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Remove the HCI caster wheel 663

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: HCI guide post and guide post plate
This document provides the procedures to remove the HCI guide post and guide post plate.

View a video of removing and replacing the guide post and guide post plate.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cable before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-125 Part information

Part number Part description

JC61-04660A HCI guide post

JC61-04659A HCI guide post plate

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of
the printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

664 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Post service test
Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

Remove the HCI guide post upper and guide post plates
Follow these steps to remove the HCI guide post upper and guide post plates.

1. Remove four screws, and then remove the HCI guide post upper and guide post plates.

Figure 2-592 Remove the HCI guide post upper and guide post plates

2. Separate the guide post upper (callout 1) and guide post (callout 2) plates.

Figure 2-593 Separate the HCI guide post upper and guide post plates

Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

Remove the HCI guide post upper and guide post plates 665
 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

666 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Alphabetical parts list
Table 2-5 Alphabetical parts list

Description Part number Table and page

Belt timing gear (HCI) 6602-003185 HCI sub - frame on page 647

Caster wheel (HCI) 6109-001138 HCI sub - frame on page 647

Main electrical connector (HCI) JC39-02600A HCI sub - frame on page 647

Plate guide post (HCI) JC61-04659A HCI sub - frame on page 647

Plate guide post upper (HCI) JC61-04660A HCI sub - frame on page 647

Printed circuit assembly (HCI) JC92-02738G HCI sub - frame on page 647

Alphabetical parts list 667

 Numerical parts list
Table 2-6 Numerical parts list

Part number Description Table and page

6109-001138 Caster wheel (HCI) HCI sub - frame on page 647

6602-003185 Belt timing gear (HCI) HCI sub - frame on page 647

JC39-02600A Main electrical connector (HCI) HCI sub - frame on page 647

JC61-04659A Plate guide post (HCI) HCI sub - frame on page 647

JC61-04660A Plate guide post upper (HCI) HCI sub - frame on page 647

JC92-02738G Printed circuit assembly (HCI) HCI sub - frame on page 647

HCI sub - pickup upper/lower

View the HCI sub - pickup upper/lower exploded view, parts list, and repair procedures.

HCI sub - pickup upper/lower

Parts diagram and parts list for the HCI sub - pickup upper/lower.

668 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Figure 2-594 HCI sub - pickup upper/lower

Table 2-126 HCI sub - pickup upper/lower

Ref Part number Description Qty Repair procedure

No

9 JC67– HCI kit - HP LaserJet E7 tray 2-z rollers 1 Removal and replacement:
00455A (coupler torque limiter) (HCI) HCI kit - HP LaserJet E7 tray
rollers on page 670

HCI sub - pickup upper/lower 669

 Table 2-126 HCI sub - pickup upper/lower (continued)

Ref Part number Description Qty Repair procedure

No

11 JC93– HCI kit - HP LaserJet E7 tray 2-x rollers 2 Removal and replacement:
00504A (separation) (HCI) HCI kit - HP LaserJet E7 tray
rollers on page 670

15 JC93– HCI kit - HP LaserJet E7 tray 2-z rollers (pick/ 1 Removal and replacement:
00540A feed) (HCI) HCI kit - HP LaserJet E7 tray
rollers on page 670

Removal and replacement: HCI kit - HP LaserJet E7 tray rollers

This document provides the procedures to remove the HCI kit - HP LaserJet E7 tray rollers.

View a video of removing and replacing the HP LaserJet E7 tray rollers.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cable before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-127 Part information

Part number Part description

JC67–00455A HCI kit — HP LaserJet E7 tray 2–z rollers (coupler torque limiter) (HCI)

JC93–00504A HCI kit — HP LaserJet E7 tray 2–z rollers (separation) (HCI)

JC93–00540A HCI kit — HP LaserJet E7 tray 2–z rollers (pick/feed) (HCI)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

670 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 ○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of
the printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

Remove the HCI tray

Follow these steps to remove the HCI tray.

1. Pull the tray fully out of the HCI, and then at the left side of the tray release the hook lever on the
tray.

TIP: Slightly pull out on the left side of the tray so that the hook lever remains unlatched.

Figure 2-595 Release the tray left side hook lever

Remove the HCI tray 671

 2. At the right side of the tray push in on the slide lock (callout 1) to release it, and then pull the tray
away from the HCI (callout 2).

Figure 2-596 Release the tray right-side slide lock

2 1

3. Continue to slide the tray away from the HCI to remove it.

Figure 2-597 Remove the tray

Remove the HCI LaserJet E7 tray rollers

Follow these steps to remove the HCI E7 tray rollers.

672 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

1. Look up into the tray cavity, and locate the feed (callout 1), pick (callout 2), and separation (callout 3)
rollers.

Figure 2-598 Locate the feed, pick, and separation rollers

1
2

3
2. Release one tab (for each roller), and then slide the roller off of the shaft.

NOTE: Open the right door before attempting to remove the rollers.

Figure 2-599 Remove the rollers

3. Slide the coupler (torque limiter) off of the separation roller shaft.

Reinstallation tip: When the coupler (torque limiter) is installed, make sure it is fully seated on the
separation roller shaft. If it is not fully seated, the separation roller will not correctly install on the
shaft.

Remove the HCI LaserJet E7 tray rollers 673

 Figure 2-600 Remove the coupler (torque limiter)

Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

674 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Alphabetical parts list
Table 2-5 Alphabetical parts list

Description Part number Table and page

HCI kit - HP LaserJet E7 tray 2-x rollers (separation) (HCI) JC93–00504A HCI sub - pickup upper/lower on
page 669

HCI kit - HP LaserJet E7 tray 2-z rollers (coupler torque limiter) JC67–00455A HCI sub - pickup upper/lower on
(HCI) page 669

HCI kit - HP LaserJet E7 tray 2-z rollers (pick/feed) (HCI) JC93–00540A HCI sub - pickup upper/lower on
page 669

Alphabetical parts list 675

 Numerical parts list
Table 2-6 Numerical parts list

Part number Description Table and page

JC67–00455A HCI kit - HP LaserJet E7 tray 2-z rollers (coupler torque limiter) HCI sub - pickup upper/lower on
(HCI) page 669

JC93–00504A HCI kit - HP LaserJet E7 tray 2-x rollers (separation) (HCI) HCI sub - pickup upper/lower on
page 669

JC93–00540A HCI kit - HP LaserJet E7 tray 2-z rollers (pick/feed) (HCI) HCI sub - pickup upper/lower on
page 669

HCI drive
View the HCI drive exploded view, parts list, and repair procedures.

HCI drive
Parts diagram and parts list for the HCI drive.

676 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Figure 2-601 HCI drive

Table 2-128 HCI drive

Ref Part number Description Qty Repair procedure

No

1 JC93-00447A Drive assembly - feed (HCI) 1 Removal and replacement:

HCI drive assembly - feed on
page 678

HCI drive 677

 Table 2-128 HCI drive (continued)

Ref Part number Description Qty Repair procedure

No

1-6 JC31-00033B Motor - feed (HCI) 1 Removal and replacement:

HCI motor - feed drive on
page 682

2-3 JC31-00109A Motor - lifter drive right (HCI) 1 Removal and replacement:
HCI motor - lift drive right and
motor - lift drive left on page
687

2-3 JC31-00125A Motor - lifter drive left (HCI) 1 Removal and replacement:
HCI motor - lift drive right and
motor - lift drive left on page
687

3 JC93-01465A Drive assembly- sub-pulley (HCI) 1 Removal and replacement:

HCI drive assembly - sub-
pulley on page 692

4-5 JC93-00452 Motor - step drive (HCI) 1 Removal and replacement:

A HCI motor - step drive on
page 690

Removal and replacement: HCI drive assembly - feed

This document provides the procedures to remove the HCI drive assembly - feed.

View a video of removing and replacing the drive assembly - feed.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cable before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-129 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-00447A HCI drive assembly - feed

678 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of
the printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

Remove the HCI rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the Remove the HCI rear cover.

■ Remove five screw caps (if installed), remove five screws, and then remove the rear cover.

Figure 2-602 Remove the HCI rear cover

Remove the HCI drive assembly - feed

Follow these steps to remove the Remove the HCI drive assembly - feed.

Remove the HCI rear cover 679

 1. Open the right door, and then remove two screws.

Figure 2-603 Remove two screws

2. Release one tab, and then separate the rear edge of the right cover from the chassis.

Figure 2-604 Separate the rear edge of the right cover from the chassis

680 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 3. Disconnect one connector, and then release the wire harness from the retainer.

Figure 2-605 Disconnect one connector

4. Remove three screws, and then remove the HCI drive assembly - feed.

Figure 2-606 Remove the HCI drive assembly - feed

Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Unpack the replacement assembly 681

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: HCI motor - feed drive

This document provides the procedures to remove the HCI motor - feed drive.

View a video of removing and replacing the motor - feed drive.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cable before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-130 Part information

Part number Part description

JC31-00033B HCI motor - feed drive

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

682 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 After performing service
Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of
the printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

Remove the HCI rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the Remove the HCI rear cover.

■ Remove five screw caps (if installed), remove five screws, and then remove the rear cover.

Figure 2-607 Remove the HCI rear cover

Remove the HCI drive assembly - feed

Follow these steps to remove the Remove the HCI drive assembly - feed.

Remove the HCI rear cover 683

 1. Open the right door, and then remove two screws.

Figure 2-608 Remove two screws

2. Release one tab, and then separate the rear edge of the right cover from the chassis.

Figure 2-609 Separate the rear edge of the right cover from the chassis

684 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 3. Disconnect one connector, and then release the wire harness from the retainer.

Figure 2-610 Disconnect one connector

4. Remove three screws, and then remove the HCI drive assembly - feed.

Figure 2-611 Remove the HCI drive assembly - feed

Remove the HCI motor - feed drive

Follow these steps to remove the HCI motor - feed drive.

Remove the HCI motor - feed drive 685

 ■ Remove two e-rings, remove two gears, and then remove two screws to separate the HCI motor -
feed drive.

Figure 2-612 Remove the HCI motor - feed drive

Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

686 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Removal and replacement: HCI motor - lift drive right and motor - lift drive left
This document provides the procedures to remove the HCI motor - lift drive right and motor - lift drive
left.

View a video of removing and replacing the motor - lift drive right and motor - lift drive left.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cable before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-131 Part information

Part number Part description

JC31-00109A HCI motor - lift drive right

JC31-00125A HCI motor - lift drive left

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of
the printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

Removal and replacement: HCI motor - lift drive right and motor - lift drive left 687
 Remove the HCI rear cover
Follow these steps to remove the Remove the HCI rear cover.

■ Remove five screw caps (if installed), remove five screws, and then remove the rear cover.

Figure 2-613 Remove the HCI rear cover

Remove the HCI motor - lift drive right and motor - lift drive left
Follow these steps to remove the Remove the HCI motor - lift drive right and motor - lift drive left.

1. Disconnect two connectors, remove four screws, and the remove the HCI motor - lift drive right and
motor - lift drive left.

NOTE: It might take some force to release the assembly from the chassis.

Figure 2-614 Remove the HCI motor - lift drive right and motor - lift drive left

688 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 2. Do one or both of the following:

● To remove the right-lift drive motor (callout 1): remove three screws.

● To remove the left-lift drive motor (callout 2): remove three screws.

Figure 2-615 Remove the HCI tray right- and left-lift drive motors

Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 689

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: HCI motor - step drive

This document provides the procedures to remove the HCI motor - step drive.

View a video of removing and replacing the motor - step drive.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cable before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-132 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-00452A HCI motor - step drive

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of
the printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

690 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Post service test
Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

Remove the HCI rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the Remove the HCI rear cover.

■ Remove five screw caps (if installed), remove five screws, and then remove the rear cover.

Figure 2-616 Remove the HCI rear cover

Remove the HCI motor - step drive

Follow these steps to remove the HCI motor - step drive.

■ Disconnect the one connector, remove two screws, and remove the HCI motor - step drive.

TIP: It might be easier to disconnect the connector after the motor is removed from the bracket.

Remove the HCI rear cover 691

 Figure 2-617 Remove the HCI motor - step drive

Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: HCI drive assembly - sub-pulley

This document provides the procedures to remove the HCI drive assembly - sub-pulley.

692 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 View a video of removing and replacing the sub-pulley.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cable before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-133 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-01465A HCI drive assembly - sub-pulley

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of
the printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

Remove the HCI rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the Remove the HCI rear cover.

Remove the HCI rear cover 693

 ■ Remove five screw caps (if installed), remove five screws, and then remove the rear cover.

Figure 2-618 Remove the HCI rear cover

Remove the HCI drive assembly - feed

Follow these steps to remove the Remove the HCI drive assembly - feed.

1. Open the right door, and then remove two screws.

Figure 2-619 Remove two screws

694 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

2. Release one tab, and then separate the rear edge of the right cover from the chassis.

Figure 2-620 Separate the rear edge of the right cover from the chassis

3. Disconnect one connector, and then release the wire harness from the retainer.

Figure 2-621 Disconnect one connector

Remove the HCI drive assembly - feed 695

 4. Remove three screws, and then remove the HCI drive assembly - feed.

Figure 2-622 Remove the HCI drive assembly - feed

Remove the HCI right door

Follow these steps to remove the Remove the HCI right door.

1. Remove four screw caps (if installed), and then remove four screws.

NOTE: If the feed drive assembly is removed, there are only two screws that secure this cover.

Figure 2-623 Remove four screws

696 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

2. Release one tab, and then separate the rear edge of the right cover from the chassis.

Figure 2-624 Separate the rear edge of the right cover from the chassis

3. Lift up on the cover while rotating it away from the chassis to release three bosses.

CAUTION: Do not attempt to fully remove the cover. Stop as shown below. Fully removing the
cover at this step will damage the remaining tab and boss on the cover

Figure 2-625 Release three bosses

Remove the HCI right door 697

 4. If the tray was not removed prior to servicing the HCI, remove it now. Look in the tray cavity and
locate the right cover front tab. Release this tab.

Figure 2-626 Release one tab

5. Remove the HCI right cover.

NOTE: The HCI right door will not stay in the latched potion when this cover is removed.

Figure 2-627 Remove the HCI right cover

698 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 6. Rotate the right door front hinge pin out of the holder, and then slide the right door towards the front
of the HCI to release the rear hinge pin and remove the door.

Figure 2-628 Remove the HCI right door

Remove the HCI drive assembly -sub pulley

Follow these steps to remove the Remove the HCI drive assembly -sub pulley.

1. Remove two screws, and then remove the black-plastic cover.

Figure 2-629 Remove the cover

Remove the HCI drive assembly -sub pulley 699

 2. Remove two screws, and then remove the drive assembly - sub-pulley.

Figure 2-630 Remove the HCI drive assembly - sub-pulley

Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

700 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Alphabetical parts list
Table 2-5 Alphabetical parts list

Description Part number Table and page

Drive assembly - feed (HCI) JC93-00447A HCI drive on page 677

Drive assembly- sub-pulley (HCI) JC93-01465A HCI drive on page 677

Motor - feed (HCI) JC31-00033B HCI drive on page 677

Motor - lifter drive left (HCI) JC31-00125A HCI drive on page 677

Motor - lifter drive right (HCI) JC31-00109A HCI drive on page 677

Motor - step drive (HCI) JC93-00452A HCI drive on page 677

Alphabetical parts list 701

 Numerical parts list
Table 2-6 Numerical parts list

Part number Description Table and page

JC31-00033B Motor - feed (HCI) HCI drive on page 677

JC31-00109A Motor - lifter drive right (HCI) HCI drive on page 677

JC31-00125A Motor - lifter drive left (HCI) HCI drive on page 677

JC93-00447A Drive assembly - feed (HCI) HCI drive on page 677

JC93-00452A Motor - step drive (HCI) HCI drive on page 677

JC93-01465A Drive assembly- sub-pulley (HCI) HCI drive on page 677

HCI sub - cassette

View the HCI sub - cassette exploded view, parts list, and repair procedures.

HCI sub - cassette

Parts diagram and parts list for the HCI sub - cassette.

702 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Figure 2-631 HCI sub - cassette

Table 2-134 HCI sub - cassette

Ref Part number Description Qty Repair procedure

No

2-16 JC81-07468A Bracket sensor (HCI) 1 Removal and replacement:

HCI photo interrupter and
sensor bracket on page 710

2-38 0604-001393 Photo interrupter (HCI) 1 Removal and replacement:

HCI photo interrupter and
sensor bracket on page 710

2-39 JC90-01723A Sub-paper side right (HCI) 1 Removal and replacement:

HCI sub-paper side right on
page 703

Removal and replacement: HCI sub-paper side right

This document provides the procedures to remove the HCI sub-paper side right.

View a video of removing and replacing the sub-paper side right.

Removal and replacement: HCI sub-paper side right 703

 Mean time to repair:

Service level:

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cable before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-135 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01723A HCI sub-paper side right

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of
the printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

Remove the HCI tray

Follow these steps to remove the HCI tray.

1. Pull the tray fully out of the HCI, and then at the left side of the tray release the hook lever on the
tray.

TIP: Slightly pull out on the left side of the tray so that the hook lever remains unlatched.

704 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Figure 2-632 Release the tray left side hook lever

2. At the right side of the tray push in on the slide lock (callout 1) to release it, and then pull the tray
away from the HCI (callout 2).

Figure 2-633 Release the tray right-side slide lock

2 1

Remove the HCI tray 705

 3. Continue to slide the tray away from the HCI to remove it.

Figure 2-634 Remove the tray

Remove the HCI sub-paper side right

Follow these steps to remove the HCI sub-paper side right.

1. Look into the tray, disconnect one connector, and then remove one screw.

Figure 2-635 Disconnect connector and remove one screw

2. Slide the sub-paper side right assembly to the left to release it, and then slightly lit it up.

CAUTION: Do not attempt to completely remove the assembly. It is still attached to the tray by a
wire harness and ground wire.

706 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Figure 2-636 Release the sub-paper side right assembly

2 1

3. Remove one screw, and then release the wire harness from the retainer.

Figure 2-637 Remove one screw and release the wire harness

Remove the HCI sub-paper side right 707

 4. Remove one screw.

Figure 2-638 Remove one screw

5. Raise the paper shelf, hold the sub-paper side right assembly up and out of the way, and then
remove the sheet-metal cover.

Figure 2-639 Remove the cover

6. Disconnect three connectors, and then release the wire harness from the retainers.

TIP: Fully raise the paper shelf to access two connectors.

708 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Figure 2-640 Disconnect three connectors

7. Disconnect two connectors, release the wire harnesses from the guides, and then remove the
sub-paper side right assembly.

Figure 2-641 Remove the sub-paper side right assembly

Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Unpack the replacement assembly 709

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: HCI photo interrupter and sensor bracket

This document provides the procedures to remove the HCI photo interrupter and sensor bracket.

View a video of removing and replacing the sensor and bracket.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cable before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-136 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 HCI photo interrupter

JC81-07468A HCI sensor bracket

710 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of
the printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

Remove the HCI tray

Follow these steps to remove the HCI tray.

1. Pull the tray fully out of the HCI, and then at the left side of the tray release the hook lever on the
tray.

TIP: Slightly pull out on the left side of the tray so that the hook lever remains unlatched.

Figure 2-642 Release the tray left side hook lever

Remove the HCI tray 711

 2. At the right side of the tray push in on the slide lock (callout 1) to release it, and then pull the tray
away from the HCI (callout 2).

Figure 2-643 Release the tray right-side slide lock

2 1

3. Continue to slide the tray away from the HCI to remove it.

Figure 2-644 Remove the tray

Remove the HCI photo interrupter and sensor bracket

Follow these steps to remove the HCI photo interrupter and sensor bracket.

■ Raise the paper shelf, disconnect one connector, remove one screw, and then remove the HCI photo
interrupter and sensor bracket.

NOTE: It might be easier to disconnect the connector after the screw is removed.

712 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Figure 2-645 Remove the HCI photo interrupter and sensor bracket

Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Unpack the replacement assembly 713

 Alphabetical parts list
Table 2-5 Alphabetical parts list

Description Part number Table and page

Bracket sensor (HCI) JC81-07468A HCI sub - cassette on page 703

Photo interrupter (HCI) 0604-001393 HCI sub - cassette on page 703

Sub-paper side right (HCI) JC90-01723A HCI sub - cassette on page 703

714 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Numerical parts list
Table 2-6 Numerical parts list

Part number Description Table and page

0604-001393 Photo interrupter (HCI) HCI sub - cassette on page 703

JC81-07468A Bracket sensor (HCI) HCI sub - cassette on page 703

JC90-01723A Sub-paper side right (HCI) HCI sub - cassette on page 703

Numerical parts list 715

 3 Problem solving

Learn about problem solving.

Control panel messages document (CPMD)

Learn about the printer control panel messages document (CPMD).

NOTE: A complete CPMD is not included in this service manual.

Click here for the HP Color LaserJet Managed MFP E77822-E77830 series CPMD, or click here for the
HP Color LaserJet Managed MFP E78323-E78330 series CPMD.

Error codes (types and structure)

Error codes and control-panel messages display on the printer control panel to indicate the current
printer status or situations that might require action. Error codes are numerical, or alphanumerical, and
have a set structure with six characters (example: 13.WX.YZ).

● The first two characters are numeric and represent the system component that is causing the error.
For example, in error code 10.22.15, 10 = Supplies for HP LaserJets.

● The remaining four characters (W, X, Y, and Z values) further define the error.

HP LaserJet and HP PageWide Enterprise error codes are documented in the control panel message
document (CPMD) for each printer.

The CPMD is a comprehensive list of error codes, diagnostic and troubleshooting steps to clear or
resolve the error, and other helpful information such as service mode pins and part numbers.

The CPMD is continually updated and republished with the latest information for the following error
codes.

Table 3-1 ERROR CODES: The first two characters

Error code System Component System Error Description

10.WX.YZ Supplies (LaserJet) Supply error or supply memory error.

11.WX.YZ Real-time clock Internal error with the clock on the formatter.

13.WX.YZ Jam (LaserJet) Paper jam or open door jam error.

15.WX.YZ Jam (PageWide) Paper jam or open door jam error.

17.WX.YZ Supplies (PageWide) Supply error or supply memory error.

20.WX.YZ Printer memory Insufficient memory or buffering error.

21.WX.YZ Page Page complexity causing a decompression error

when trying to process job.

30.WX.YZ Scanner Flatbed scanner error occurring inside the unit.

31.WX.YZ Document feeder Document feeder, scanner, or jam error.

32.WX.YZ Backup, restore, or reset Backup, restore, or reset notification or error.

716 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-1 ERROR CODES: The first two characters (continued)

Error code System Component System Error Description

33.WX.YZ Security Backup, Disk, EFI BIOS, Firmware integrity

(SureStart), or Trusted Platform Module (TPM)
notification or error.

40.WX.YZ Input/Output (I/O) Partition manager, secure erase, or USB

accessory error.

41.WX.YZ Fuser, Laser scanner, or Paper path Miscellaneous error including general and
misprint or mismatch errors typically involving
(but not limited to) the fuser, the laser scanner,
or the paper path.

42.WX.YZ Firmware Firmware failure involving the Event Log, Shell,

System Manager, or other component.

44.WX.YZ Firmware Firmware failure involving a digital sending

component.

45.WX.YZ OXPd/Web Kit (PageWide) Informational notifications involving the OXPd

Web Kit (communications log).

46.WX.YZ Engine (LaserJet) Engine communication error.

47.WX.YZ Firmware Job parser or printer calibration error.

48.WX.YZ Firmware PJA job accounting, job management, or job

pipeline error.

49.WX.YZ Firmware Firmware communication error.

50.WX.YZ Fuser (LaserJet) Fuser error.

51.WX.YZ Laser scanner (LaserJet) Laser scanner beam error.

52.WX.YZ Laser scanner (LaserJet) Laser scanner startup error.

54.WX.YZ Sensor Sensor error (not jam related).

55.WX.YZ DC controller (LaserJet) DC controller communication error.

56.WX.YZ Paper handling (LaserJet) Paper input/output or accessory error.

57.WX.YZ Fan Fan error.

58.WX.YZ Sensor Engine sensor failure.

59.WX.YZ Motor (LaserJet) Motor error.

60.WX.YZ Tray motor error (LaserJet) Tray lifting or pick up error.

61.WX.YZ Engine (PageWide) Print engine error with the 8–bit data package.

62.WX.YZ System (LaserJet) LaserJet internal system error.

Print bar (PageWide) PageWide print system error.

63.WX.YZ Engine (LaserJet) General engine error (electrical, communication,

etc.).

65.WX.YZ Connector Output accessory connection error.

66.WX.YZ Output accessory Output accessory error.

67.WX.YZ Input accessory Input accessory connection error

69.WX.YZ Duplexer Duplexer error.

Error codes (types and structure) 717

 Table 3-1 ERROR CODES: The first two characters (continued)

Error code System Component System Error Description

70.WX.YZ DC controller (LaserJet) DC controller firmware error.

76.WX.YZ DC controller (LaserJet) Power supply fluctuations causes formatter and

DC controller communication issue and results
them not to be in synchronization.

80.WX.YZ Managed device Embedded Jetdirect error.

81.WX.YZ Near Field Communication (NFC) Wireless, Bluetooth or internal EIO error.

82.WX.YZ Memory (hard disk, EMMC, etc.) Disk hardware error.

90.WX.YZ Internal diagnostics Internal test of systems (i.e. disk, CPB, display) or
interconnection error.

98.WX.YZ Hard disk Hard disk partition error.

99.WX.YZ Firmware installer Remote Firmware Upgrade (RFU), firmware install

(engine or accessory), or disk error.

How to search for printer documentation

Find printer documentation using the internal HP portals.

The CPMD, error codes, and other support documentation for each printer is found on the internal HP
portals GCSN and WISE (formerly SAW). GCSN is available to HP channel partners and WISE is available
to call agents, service technicians, and other HP internal users. The level of detail available will depend
on your access credentials.

How to search WISE for printer documentation

These instructions are for HP internal use by call agents, service technicians, and other internal users.
View a video of how to find support content in WISE.

To view a list of control panel message documents per printer in WISE, enter document ID c05048451, to
locate CPMD list.

Go to WISE and enter this document ID c05791539 for written instructions.

How to search GCSN for printer documentation

These instructions are for internal use by HP Channel Partners. View a video of how find support content
in GCSN, or follow the steps below.

1. On the Home screen in GCSN, open Technical information using one of the following two methods:

● Type TINF in the Speedcode field found in the upper right corner and press Enter, or

● On the Home page, click Technical information in the left pane.

718 Chapter 3 Problem solving

 Figure 3-1 GCSN home page

2. Under Product Search, select the Type, Category, Family, and Series that match your product model
(leave the Model field as blank or the default).

NOTE: Make sure to login to GCSN using your service-qualified credentials to access the most
comprehensive content list available. To find out how to become service-qualified, contact your HP
representative.

Figure 3-2 Sample product search criteria (GCSN)

3. Click Add Favorites and then click Add to add the printer to your Favorites list and allow you to
bypass the Product Search fields next time for that particular model (optional).

How to search for printer documentation 719

 Figure 3-3 Add favorites (GCSN)

4. Clear all of the high-level check boxes.

Figure 3-4 Clear search criteria (GCSN)

5. Select the check boxes for the document types for which you want to search.

NOTE: Select only the high-level Manuals and Guides search option if you are not sure in which
type of manual or guide the content might be listed.

Figure 3-5 Select search criteria (GCSN)

6. Select Submit.

720 Chapter 3 Problem solving

 7. If needed, click Back To selection Criteria and narrow your search (the maximum allowed search
result is 100 documents).

NOTE: Do not select the Top Issue option unless you only want to view top issues for that model.
All other available content is filtered out.

Table 3-2 Information type selections

Technical information type Select this checkbox

Control panel message document (CPMD) CPMD-Map

List of all CPMDs per product Support Information

Installation Guide or Hardware Install Guide Maintenance/Service Guide or Install Guide

Service cost document Install Guide or Service Guide/Manual

Service guide or Service manual Service Guide/Manual

Self-solve or troubleshooting document Support Information

User manual or User guide User Guide

Warranty and Legal Guide Warranty Statement

Troubleshooting process
Learn about the troubleshooting process.

Determine the problem source

When the printer malfunctions or encounters an unexpected situation, the printer control panel alerts
you to the situation. This section contains a pre-troubleshooting checklist to filter out many possible
causes of the problem. A troubleshooting flowchart helps you diagnose the root cause of the problem.
The remainder of this chapter provides steps for correcting problems.

● Use the troubleshooting flowchart to pinpoint the root cause of hardware malfunctions. The
flowchart guides you to the section of this chapter that contains steps for correcting the
malfunction.

Before beginning any troubleshooting procedure, check the following issues:

● Are supply items within their rated life?

● Are supply items Genuine HP supplies?

● Does the configuration page reveal any configuration errors?

NOTE: The customer or service provider is responsible for checking supplies and for using supplies
that are in good condition.

Power subsystem
Learn about the power subsystem.

Troubleshooting process 721

 Power-on checks
The basic printer functions should start up when the printer is connected into an electrical outlet and
the power switch is pushed to the on position. If the printer does not start, use the information in this
section to isolate and solve the problem.

If the control-panel display remains blank, random patterns display, or asterisks remain on the control-
panel display, perform power-on checks to find the cause of the problem.

Power-on troubleshooting overview

If the control panel is blank 1 minute after turning on the printer, check the following items:

During normal operation, a cooling fan begins to spin briefly after the printer power is turned on. Place
your hand over the vents at the rear of the printer, next to the formatter, or on the on the rear of the
scanner. If the fan is operating, you will feel air passing out of the printer. You can lean close to the printer
and hear the fan operating.

A fan begins to blow on the right door (fuser), and then the control panel goes through a series of set
up functions. The main motor turns on (unless the left door or cartridge access door is open, a jam
condition is sensed, or the paper-path sensors are damaged). You might be able to visually and audibly
determine if the main motor is turned on.

If the fan and main motor are operating correctly, the next troubleshooting step is to isolate print engine,
formatter, and control panel problems.

1. Make sure that the printer is connected directly into an active electrical outlet (not a power strip)
that delivers the correct voltage.

2. Make sure that the power switch is in the on position, and then verify that the LED is on.

3. Make sure that the fan runs briefly, which indicates that the power supply is operational.

4. Depress the button on the back of the control panel to test the control panel functionality.

5. Make sure that the control-panel display wire harness is connected.

6. Remove any external solutions, and then try to turn the printer on again.

Troubleshooting a blank display, black display, no display, or no power situation

Customers usually report that the control-panel display is not showing anything. It is very important to
collect as much information as possible from the customer about the issue to help resolve it.

Following are some printer behaviors the customer might encounter:

● The control panel is completely blank (no LEDs or back light).

● The control panel is blank, but there might be LEDs illuminated.

● The control panel is blank (LEDs are on or flashing) and the back light is on (but no text visible).

Following are some possible causes of a blank control-panel display:

● No power to the printer.

● The control panel contrast setting is not correctly adjusted.

● The formatter connector(s) are not fully seated into the connector(s) on the DC controller, or the
connectors are not fully seated on the formatter.

722 Chapter 3 Problem solving

 ● A faulty component is installed on the formatter (for example a memory DIMM, fax PCA, network
PCA, USB device, or other component).

● The formatter is defective.

● The control panel connector is not fully seated, or the control panel is defective.

● The DC controller is defective.

Following are some questions to ask the customer:

● Was the printer newly install or has the printer been properly functioning?

– For a new install, investigate to see if there was any shipping damage to the printer.

– Did the customer notice any damage to the shipping box or any visible damage to the printer?

● What happened just prior to the control panel going blank?

– Was the printer serviced recently, a power outage occurred?

– Has a lightning storm recently occurred?

– Did the customer recently add a memory DIMM or install a third-party component?

● Make sure to get a complete description of the failure.

– Is the control-panel display completely blank (might be faint text and no back light)?

– Is the control-panel display back light on?

– Has a print job been sent to the printer? The customer might report that their print jobs seemed
to print but when they go to the printer the control-panel display is blank.

Recommended actions
If the control-panel display is completely blank (no LEDs illuminated or no back light) check to see if the
printer is getting power. Listen for fans or any printer initialization sounds when the power is turned on.

If there are no signs of power, then perform the following:

1. Make sure that the printer is plugged directly into an active electrical outlet (not a power strip or
interruptible power supply) that delivers the correct voltage.

TIP: Try using a different power cable if possible.

2. Turn the printer power on, and make sure that the fan(s) run briefly (this indicates that the power
supply is operational).

3. Check if the yellow LED on formatter is flashing. If so, there is a communication issue between the
formatter and the control panel.

4. Turn the printer power off.

5. Make sure that the control-panel display wire harness (and/or flat cable) is properly connected (and
fully seated), and then turn the printer power on again.

6. Check control panel diagnostics by pressing the button on the back of the control panel to run
different diagnostic tests.

Recommended actions 723

 7. Verify the status LEDs are illuminated, but the control-panel display is blank. If applicable: Check
if the contrast setting is adjusted to very low. If so, try turning the contrast knob to see if the
control-panel display becomes visible.

8. From a host computer, send a print job to the printer.

NOTE: If the print job correctly prints, then the problem is most likely to a defective control panel.

9. Turn the printer power off, and then make sure that the memory DIMM is installed in the correct slot
and is fully seated.

NOTE: For some printers, there may be more than one memory DIMM installed. Some printers
have third-party solutions/applications or fonts that use memory.

10. Remove all of the components/accessories installed on the formatter (for example, hard drive,
solid-state drive, memory DIMM(s), fax PCA, network PCA, USB devices, or other devices).

● Make sure that the formatter is fully seated.

IMPORTANT: This is important because the formatter or a component on the formatter might
be defective or shorted, which causes the printer to lose power.

11. Reinstall the formatter. Make sure that it makes a good connection and is fully seated.

Make sure that all of the connectors on the formatter are correctly connected and fully seated.

12. Turn the printer power on, and then check the control-panel display.

13. If the printer control panel is properly working, replace each removed component (one at a time) to
determine which one is causing the problem.

CAUTION: Turn the printer power off, and then on again, after replacing a component on the
formatter.

14. If the control-panel display is still blank after performing the above troubleshooting steps, and the
control panel diagnostics do not function, replace the control panel. If the control panel diagnostics
are functioning, then replace the formatter.

Control panel checks

Learn about the control panel checks.

Control panel diagnostic flowcharts

Learn about the control panel diagnostic flowcharts.

Use the flowcharts in this section to troubleshoot the following control panel problems.

● Touchscreen is blank, white, or dim (no image).

● Touchscreen is slow to respond or requires multiple presses to respond.

● Touchscreen has an unresponsive zone.

● No control panel sound.

● Home button is unresponsive.

● Hardware integration pocket (HIP) is not functioning (control panel functional).

724 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Touchscreen black, white, or dim (no image)
Learn about the touchscreen black, white, or dim (no image).

NOTE: To open the diagnostic function, press the button on the back of the control panel.

Figure 3-6 Touchscreen blank, white, or dim (no image)

Black display White display Dim display

(no backlight (no image) (no image)
or image)

Is the Home button

Y
illuminated
(bright white)?
Is the product in bright
Open the sunlight?
diagnostic function. If yes, move the
N
product to a
different location.

Touch the display or Home button

to exit sleep mode. Make sure that
the product is plugged in and
the power is turned on. Does an image
appear on the Y
control panel?
Open the
diagnostic function.
Perform the
N backlight test.

Turn the product power off.

Does the display
Y Inspect and reseat the
turn on?
control panel cables.
Remove and reseat the
formatter cables.
Make sure that the
Problem solved.
formatter LEDs function. Is the backlight
N Y Y
adjustable?

Are the formatter

LEDs functioning? Problem fixed? Y

Do not replace the control panel.

N Turn the product power off.
Check connection and cables on the formatter
and at the comtrol panel.

Turn the product power off. N

Remove and reseat the formatter
cables.
Do not replace the control panel.
N

Replace the
control panel.

Touchscreen has an unresponsive zone

Learn about how the touchscreen has an unresponsive zone.

NOTE: To open the diagnostic function, press the button on the back of the control panel.

Touchscreen black, white, or dim (no image) 725

 Figure 3-7 Touchscreen has an unresponsive zone
Touchscreen
has an
unresponsive
zone

Is the area of the

touchscreen you are touching
greyed out (intentionally
deactivated)?

Open the
diagnostic function.
Perform the
touch test.

Does the previously

inactive area respond
to a touch?

Y
Turn the product
power off,
and then
on again.

Replace the Does the previously

N inactive area respond
control panel.
to a touch?

Do not replace the

control panel.

No control panel sound

Learn what to do when there is no control panel sound.

NOTE: To open the diagnostic function, press the button on the back of the control panel.

726 Chapter 3 Problem solving

 Figure 3-8 No control panel sound

Control panel
has no
sound

Open the following menus:

Administration
Display Settings
Key Press Sound
Select the following:
On
Save

Can sounds
be heard?

N
Y

Open the
diagnostic function.
Perform the sound test.

Can sounds
be heard?
Y

N
Do not replace the
control panel.
Turn the product power off.
Remove the control panel.
Check the cables to the speaker.
Replace the control panel. N Reseat the cables to the speaker.
Turn the product power on.
Can sounds be heard?

Home button is unresponsive

Learn what to do when the home button is unresponsive.

NOTE: To open the diagnostic function, press the button on the back of the control panel.

Home button is unresponsive 727

 Figure 3-9 Home button is unresponsive
Home button
unresponsive
Note: If illuminated: continue.
If not illuminated: verify that
the power is turned on,
the printer is not in sleep mode,
turn the power off, and
then on again.

Open the
diagnostic function.
Perform the Home
button test.

Does the virtual LED

illuminate green when
the Home button is pressed?

Turn the product power off,

and then on again.

Open the
diagnostic function.
Perform the
Home button test.

Does the virtual LED

illuminate green when
the Home button is pressed?
Y

Replace the Do not replace the

control panel. control panel.

Hardware integration pocket (HIP) is not functioning (control panel functional)

Learn about when the hardware integration pocket (HIP) is not functioning (control panel functional).

728 Chapter 3 Problem solving

 Figure 3-10 Hardware integration pocket (HIP) is not functioning (control panel functional)

Hardware integration
pocket (HIP)
not functional
(control panel
functional)

Check that all installed hardware integration

pocket devices are within HP specifications.
The control panel provides only 0.5 Amps to
the port. If an installed device attempts to draw
more power than is provided, the port is
automatically disabled. Troubleshoot third-party
devices with the device manufacturer.

Individual component diagnostics

Learn about individual component diagnostics.

Tools for troubleshooting: LED diagnostics

LED, engine, and individual diagnostics can identify and troubleshoot printer problems.

Understand lights on the formatter

Three LEDs on the formatter indicate that the printer is functioning correctly.

Figure 3-11 LEDs

Table 3-3 LEDs

Item Description

1 Heartbeat LED

2 HP Jetdirect LEDs

Individual component diagnostics 729

 HP Jetdirect LEDs
Learn about the HP Jetdirect LEDs.

The embedded HP Jetdirect print server has two LEDs. The yellow LED indicates network activity, and
the green LED indicates the link status. A blinking yellow LED indicates network traffic. If the green LED is
off, a link has failed.

For link failures, check all the network cable connections. In addition, try to manually configure the link
settings on the embedded print server by using the printer control-panel menus.

1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, select Settings.

2. Open the following menus:

● Networking

● Ethernet

● Link Speed

3. Select the appropriate link speed, and then select OK.

Tools for troubleshooting: Engine diagnostics

The printer contains extensive internal engine diagnostics that help in troubleshooting print quality,
paper path, noise, assembly, and timing issues.

Defeating interlocks
Different tests can be used to isolate different types of issues. For assembly or noise isolation, run the
diagnostic test when the toner cartridge door or right door is open.

Defeating the door interlocks allows observation of the paper pick operation (and view the page enter
registration).

WARNING! Be careful when performing printer diagnostics to avoid risk of injury. Only trained service
personnel should open and run the diagnostics with a door open. Never touch any of the power
supplies when the printer is turned on.

Defeat the toner cartridge door interlock

Learn how to defeat the toner cartridge door interlock.

1. Open the toner cartridge door.

2. Insert a folded piece of paper into the slot.

TIP: Fold a stiff piece of paper, for example a business card or index card, into two 10 mm (.375 in)
strips, and insert the strips into the slot for the cartridge door logic switches.

730 Chapter 3 Problem solving

 Figure 3-12 Defeat the toner cartridge door interlock

Defeat the right door interlock

Learn how to defeat the right door interlock.

1. Open the right door.

2. Insert a folded piece of paper into the slot.

TIP: Fold a stiff piece of paper, for example a business card or index card, into two 10 mm (.375 in)
strips, and insert the strips into the slot for the front door logic switches.

Figure 3-13 Defeat the right door interlock

Tools for troubleshooting

Use the procedure below to test various printer mechanical and electromechanical assemblies.

Defeat the right door interlock 731

 Individual component diagnostics (special-mode test)
Learn about the individual component diagnostics (special-mode test).

This test activates individual parts independently to isolate problems.

Each component test can be performed once or repeatedly.

Each component test can be performed once or repeatedly.

NOTE: The cartridge door interlocks must be defeated to run the component tests.

1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, scroll to and touch the Support Tools button.

2. Select one of the following tests:

● Continuous Scan

● Run Fax Test

3. Select the component test options for the test.

Tools for troubleshooting

Learn about tools for troubleshooting.

Problem-solving checklist
Follow these steps when trying to solve a problem with the printer.

Step 1: Check that the printer power is on

Learn how to check that the printer power is on.

1. Make sure that the printer is plugged in and turned on. The power button should be lit with a white
light. If it is not, press the power button. If the power button does not light up, check the following
conditions.

● Make sure that the power cable is connected to the printer and the outlet.

● Check the power source by connecting the power cable to a different outlet.

2. If the printer motors do not rotate, make sure that the toner cartridges are installed and that the
doors are all closed. The control panel displays messages to indicate these problems.

Step 2: Check the control panel for error messages

Learn how to check the control panel for error messages.

The control panel should indicate ready status. If an error message appears, resolve the error.

Print a supplies status page to ensure that the supplies are not at or over end of life.

NOTE: HP long-life consumable and maintenance kit life specifications are estimations. Actual
individual life or yield during normal use will vary depending on usage, environment, media, and other
factors. Estimated life is not an implied warranty.

732 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Step 3: Test print functionality
Learn how to test print functionality.

1. From the control panel Home screen, touch the Reports button.

2. Open the Reports menu, touch the Configuration/Status Pages menu, select the Configuration
Page item, and then touch the Print button to print the report.

3. If the report does not print, make sure that paper is loaded in the tray, and check the control panel
to see if paper is jammed inside the printer.

NOTE: Make sure that the paper in the tray meets specifications for this printer.

Step 4: Test copy functionality

Learn how to test copy functionality.

1. Place the configuration page into the ADF and make a copy. If paper does not feed smoothly
through the ADF, you might need to clean the ADF rollers and separation pad. Make sure that the
paper meets specifications for this printer.

2. Place the configuration page onto the scanner glass and make a copy.

3. If the print quality on the copied pages is not acceptable, clean the scanner glass and the small
glass strip.

Step 5: Test the fax sending functionality

Learn how to test the fax sending functionality.

1. From the control panel Home screen, touch the Support Tools button.

2. Open the Troubleshooting menu, and then open the Diagnostics Tools menu. Touch the Run Fax Test
button to test the fax functionality.

3. Touch the Fax on the printer control panel, and then touch the Start Fax button.

Step 6: Test the fax receiving functionality

Learn how to test the fax receiving functionality.

1. From the control panel Home screen, touch the Support Tools button.

2. Touch the Troubleshooting menu, and then open the Diagnostics Tests menu. Touch the Run Fax
Test button to test the fax functionality.

3. Use another fax machine to send a fax to the printer.

4. Review and reset the printer fax settings.

Step 7: Try sending a print job from a computer

Learn how to try sending a print job from a computer.

1. Use a word-processing program to send a print job to the printer.

2. If the job does not print, make sure that you selected the correct printer driver.

3. Uninstall and then reinstall the printer software.

Step 3: Test print functionality 733

 Step 8: Test the Plug and Print USB Drive printing functionality
Learn how to test the plug and print USB drive printing functionality.

1. Load a .PDF document or .JPEG photo onto a USB flash drive, and insert it in the USB port near the
control panel.

2. The USB Flash Drive menu opens. Try printing the document or photo.

3. If no documents are listed, try a different type of USB flash drive.

Factors that affect printer performance

Several factors affect the time it takes to print a job:

● The software program that you are using and its settings

● The use of special paper (such as heavy paper or custom-size paper)

● Printer processing and download time

● The complexity and size of graphics

● The speed of the computer you are using

● The USB or network connection

● Whether the printer is printing in color or in monochrome

● The type of USB drive, if you are using one

● Environmental factors, such as low temperature or high humidity

Print menu map

Learn how to print the menu map.

To more easily navigate individual settings, print a report of the complete Reports menu.

1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, scroll to and touch the Reports button.

2. Open the Configuration/Status Pages menu.

3. Select the Settings Menu Map option.

4. Touch the Print button to print the report.

TIP: Multiple report pages can be selected, and then printed together.

Print current settings pages

Learn how to print current settings pages.

Printing the current settings page provides a map of the user configurable settings that might be helpful
in the troubleshooting process.

1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, scroll to and touch the Reports button.

2. Open the Configuration/Status Pages menu.

734 Chapter 3 Problem solving

 3. Select the Current Settings Page option.

4. Touch the Print button to print the report.

TIP: Multiple report pages can be selected, and then printed together.

Print event log

Printing the event log might be helpful in the troubleshooting process. For more information, see the
Interpret control-panel messages and event log entries section in the printer troubleshooting manual.

Print the event log from the Reports menu from a touchscreen control panel
Learn how to print the event log from the Reports menu from a touchscreen control panel.

1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, scroll to and touch the Support Tools button.

2. Open the following menus:

● Troubleshooting

● Event Log

3. The event log displays on the screen. To print it, touch the Print button.

Print the event log from the Service menu from a touchscreen control panel
Learn how to print the event log from the Service menu from a touchscreen control panel.

1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, scroll to and touch the Support Tools button.

2. Open the Service menu.

3. Enter the following service access code for the printer:

● Access code: 04082517

4. Touch the Event Log item.

Clear the event log from a touchscreen control panel

Learn how to clear the event log from a touchscreen control panel.

1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, scroll to and touch the Support Tools button.

2. Open the Service menu.

3. On the sign-in screen, select the Service Access Code option from the drop-down list.

4. Enter the following service access code for the printer:

● Access code: 04082517

5. Select the trash icon to clear the event log.

Pre-boot menu options

The Pre-boot menus are available prior to the printer initializing.

Print event log 735

 CAUTION: The Format Disk option (printers with a hard-disk drive only) performs a disk initialization
for the entire disk. The operating system, firmware files, and third party files (among other files) will be
completely lost. HP does not recommend this action.

TIP: The Pre-boot menu can be remotely accessed by using a telnet network protocol to establish an
administration connection to the printer. See Remote Admin on page 745.

Open the Pre-boot menu from a touchscreen control panel

Learn how to open the Pre-boot menu from a touchscreen control panel.

1. Touch the middle of the control-panel display when you see the 1/8 under the logo.

Figure 3-14 Open the Pre-boot menu

1 2

2. On the Pre-boot menu screen, use the following buttons to navigate the tests.

Figure 3-15 Pre-boot menu

Table 3-4 Pre-boot screen buttons

Use this button to see more information about a selected item.

736 Chapter 3 Problem solving

 Table 3-4 Pre-boot screen buttons (continued)

Use this button to scroll up through menu items.

Use this button to select a highlighted menu item.

Use this button to scroll down through menu items.

Use this button to go back to the previous menu.

Not used.

Use this button to exit a diagnostic test.

3. Use the arrow buttons on the touchscreen to navigate the Pre-boot menu.

4. Touch the OK button to select a menu item.

Cold reset using the Pre-boot menu from a touchscreen control panel
Learn how to cold reset using the Pre-boot menu from a touchscreen control panel.

CAUTION: This procedure resets all printer configurations and settings to factory defaults (customer
configurations and settings are lost).

1. Touch the middle of the control-panel display when you see the 1/8 under the logo.

Figure 3-16 Open the Pre-boot menu

1 2

2. Use the button to highlight the +3:Administrator item, and then touch the OK button.

3. Use the button to highlight the +8:Startup Options item, and then touch the OK button.

Cold reset using the Pre-boot menu from a touchscreen control panel 737
 4. Use the button to highlight the 2 Cold Reset item, and then touch the OK button to select it.

5. Touch the Home button to return to the main Pre-boot menu and highlight the 1:Continue item, and
then touch the OK button.

NOTE: The printer will initialize.

NOTE: Some of the pre-boot options in the following tables are not supported by the current version
of the printer firmware and are included for information only. Future versions of firmware will support
these options.

Table 3-5 Pre-boot menu options (1 of 7)

Menu option First level Second level Third level Description

Continue Selecting the Continue item exits the Pre-boot menu

and continues the normal boot process.

If a selection is not made in the initial menu within

30 seconds, the printer returns to a normal boot (the
same as selecting Continue).

If the user navigates to another menu, the timeout

does not apply.

Sign In Enter the administrator PIN or service PIN if one is

required to open the Pre-boot menu.

Administrator This item navigates to the Administrator submenus.

If authentication is required (and the user is not

already signed in) the Sign In prompt displays. The
user is required to sign in.

Download Network This item initiates a Pre-boot firmware download

process. A USB Thumbdrive option will work on all
USB FutureSmart printers. USB or Network connections
are not currently supported.
USB
Thumbdrive

Format Disk This item reinitializes the disk and cleans all disk
partitions.

CAUTION: Selecting the Format Disk item

removes all data.

A delete confirmation prompt is not provided.

The system is not bootable after this action and

a 99.09.67 error displays on the control panel. A
firmware download must be performed to return
the system to a bootable state.

738 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-5 Pre-boot menu options (1 of 7) (continued)

Menu option First level Second level Third level Description

Partial Clean This item reinitializes the disk (removing all data
except the firmware repository where the master
firmware bundle is downloaded and saved).

CAUTION: Selecting the Partial Clean item

removes all data except the firmware repository. A
delete confirmation prompt is not provided.

CAUTION: This procedure resets all printer

configurations and settings to factory defaults
(customer configurations and settings are lost).

This allows a user to reformat the disk by removing

the firmware image from the active directory
without having to download new firmware code
(printer remains bootable).

Change Select this item to set or change the administrator

Password password.

Clear Password Select the Clear Password item to remove a

password from the Administrator menu. Before the
password is actually cleared, a message will be
shown asking to confirm that the password should
be cleared. Press the OK button to confirm the
action.

When the confirmation prompt displays, press the

OK button to clear the password.

Table 3-6 Pre-boot menu options (2 of 7)

Menu option First level Second level Third level Description

Administrator Manage Disk Clear disk Select the Clear disk item to enable using an
external device for job storage. Job storage is
normally enabled only for the Boot device. This will
be grayed out unless the 99.09.68 error is displayed.

Lock Disk Select the Lock Disk item to lock (mate) a new
secure disk to this printer.

The secure disk already locked to this printer will

remain accessible to this printer. Use this function
to have more than one encrypted disk accessible by
the printer when using them interchangeably.

The data stored on the secure disk locked to this

printer always remains accessible to this printer.

Leave Unlocked Select the Leave Unlocked item to use a new secure
disk in an unlocked mode for a single service event.
The secure disk that is already locked to this printer
will remain accessible to this printer and uses the
old disk's encryption password with the new disk.

The secure disk that is already locked to this printer

remains accessible to this printer.

Cold reset using the Pre-boot menu from a touchscreen control panel 739
 Table 3-6 Pre-boot menu options (2 of 7) (continued)

Menu option First level Second level Third level Description

Clear Disk Pwd Select the Clear Disk Pwd item to continue using the
non-secure disk and clear the password associated
with the yet-to-be installed secure disk.

CAUTION: Data on the missing secure disk will be

permanently inaccessible.

Retain Password Select the Retain Password item to use the non-
secure disk for this session only, and then search
for the missing secure disk in future sessions.

Boot Device Secure Select the Secure Erase item to erase all of the data
Erase on the disk and unlock it if required.

This might take a long time.

NOTE: The system will be unusable until the system

files are reinstalled. The ATA secure-erase
command is a one-pass overwrite, which erases the
entire disk including firmware. The disk remains an
encrypted disk.

Erase/ Select the Erase/Unlock item to cryptographically

Unlock erase all data on the disk and unlock the disk to
allow a user to gain access to it from any printer.

NOTE: The system will be unusable until the system

files are reinstalled. It erases the encryption key. The
encryption key is erased, so the disk becomes a non-
encrypted disk.

Get Status This item provides disk status information if any is

available.

Table 3-7 Pre-boot menu options (3 of 7)

Menu option First level Second level Third level Description

Administrator Manage Disk Internal Select the Internal Device item to erase the internal
Device device or get a status about the internal device.

Secure Select the Secure Erase item to erase all of the data
Erase on the disk and unlock it if required.

This might take a long time.

NOTE: The system will be unusable until the

system files are reinstalled. The ATA secure-erase
command erases the entire disk, including firmware.
The disk remains an encrypted disk.

Erase/ Select the Erase/Unlock item to cryptographically

Unlock erase all of the data on disk and unlock the disk to
allow the user to gain access to it from any printer.

NOTE: The system will be unusable until the

system files are reinstalled. The HP High
Performance Secure Hard Disk is erased.

Get Status This item provides disk status information if any is

available.

740 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-7 Pre-boot menu options (3 of 7) (continued)

Menu option First level Second level Third level Description

External Select the External Device item to erase the

Device external device or get status about the external
device.

Secure Select the Secure Erase item to erase all of the data
Erase on the disk and unlock it if required.

This might take a long time.

NOTE: The system will be unusable until the

system files are reinstalled.

The ATA secure-erase command erases the entire

disk, including firmware. The disk remains an
encrypted disk.

Erase/ Select the Erase/Unlock item to cryptographically

Unlock erase all of the data on disk and unlock the disk to
allow a user to gain access to it from any printer.

NOTE: The system will be unusable until the

system files are reinstalled. The encryption key is
erased, so the disk becomes a non-encrypted disk.

Get Status This item provides disk status information if any is

available.

Table 3-8 Pre-boot menu options (4 of 7)

Menu option First level Second level Third level Description

Administrator Configure LAN IP Mode The network can be configured to obtain the
[DHCP] network settings from a DHCP server or as static.
NOTE: This
configuration is Use this item for automatic IP address acquisition
only active when from the DHCP server.
the Pre-boot
menu is open.

IP Mode Use this item to manually assign the network

[STATIC] addresses.

IP Address Use this item to manually enter the IP addresses.

Subnet Mask Use this item to manually enter the subnet mask.

Default Use this item to manually enter the default

Gateway gateway.

Save Select the Save item to save the manual settings.

Table 3-9 Pre-boot menu options (5 of 7)

Menu option First level Second level Third level Description

Administrator Startup Options Select the Startup Options item to specify options
that can be set for the next time the printer is
turned on and initializes to the Ready state.

Cold reset using the Pre-boot menu from a touchscreen control panel 741
 Table 3-9 Pre-boot menu options (5 of 7) (continued)

Menu option First level Second level Third level Description

Show Revision Not currently functional: Select the Show Revision

item to allow the printer to initialize and show the
firmware version when the printer reaches the
Ready state.

Once the printer power is turned on the next time,

the Show Revision item is unchecked so that the
firmware revision is not shown.

Cold Reset Select the Cold Reset item to clear the IP address
and all customer settings. (This item also returns
all settings to factory defaults.)

NOTE: Items in the Service menu are not reset.

Skip Disk Load Select the Skip Disk Load item to disable installed
third-party applications.

Skip Cal Select the Skip Cal item to skip the printer
calibration for the very next power-initialization
cycle only.

Lock Service CAUTION: Select the Lock Service item to lock

the Service menu access (both in the Pre-boot
menu and the Device Maintenance menu).

Service personnel must have the administrator

remove the Lock Service setting before they can
open the Service menu.

Skip FSCK Select the Skip FSCK item to disable Chkdisk/

ScanVolume during startup.

First Power Not currently functional: This item allows the

printer to initialize as if it is the first time it has
been turned on.

For example, the user is prompted to configure

first-time settings like date/time, language, and
other settings.

Select this item so that it is enabled for the next

time the printer power is turned on.

When the printer power is turned on the next time,

this item is unchecked so that the pre-configured
settings are used during configuration, and the
first-time setting prompt is not used.

Embedded Select the Embedded Jetdirect Off item to disable

Jetdirect Off the embedded HP Jetdirect.

By default this item is unchecked so that

HP Jetdirect is always enabled.

WiFi Accessory Select the WiFi Accessory item to enable the

wireless accessory.

742 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-10 Pre-boot menu options (6 of 7)

Menu option First level Second level Third level Description

Administrator Diagnostics Diagnostic items are

useful to diagnose
hardware components
and their interface
connections. Use these
items to troubleshoot
specific hardware
components, and the
interface between
them and other
components.

Memory Do Not Run Use the Do Not Run

item to exclude the
Memory diagnostic
when executing
multiple diagnostics.

Short Use the Short item to

select a brief memory
test.

NOTE: This test

requires about four
minutes to execute.

Long Use the Long item

to select an extended
memory test.

NOTE: This test

requires about twenty
minutes to execute.

Disk Do Not Run Use the Do Not Run

item to exclude the
Disk diagnostic when
executing multiple
diagnostics.

Short Use the Short item to

select a brief firmware
self-test.

NOTE: This test

requires about two or
three minutes to
execute.

Long Use the Long item

to select an extended
firmware self-test.

NOTE: This test

requires about sixty
minutes to execute.

Optimized Use the Optimized

item to select a test
that checks the active
sectors on the disk.

NOTE: This test

requires about thirty
minutes to execute.

Cold reset using the Pre-boot menu from a touchscreen control panel 743
 Table 3-10 Pre-boot menu options (6 of 7) (continued)

Menu option First level Second level Third level Description

Raw Use the Raw item

to select a test that
checks every sector on
the disk.

NOTE: This test

requires about fifty
minutes to execute.

Smart Use the Smart item

to select a very brief
test that checks the
drive self-monitoring
analysis and reporting
technology (SMART)
status—the drive
detects and reports
reliability indicators
to help anticipate
disk failures (SMART
status).

CPB Use the CPB item to

verify the integrity of
the copy processor
board (CPB) and
the formatter PCA
connections.

Interconnect Use the Interconnect

item to verify the
integrity of the
interconnect PCA (ICB)
and its connections.

Run Selected Select the Run

Selected item to
execute a selected
test.

NOTE: If more than

one test is selected,
they are executed in
sequence.

Table 3-11 Pre-boot menu options (7 of 7)

Menu option First level Second level Third level Description

Administrator Remote Admin Start Telnet The Remote Admin item allows a service technician to
access to the printer Pre-boot menu remotely, and to
navigate the menu selections from a remote location.

IMPORTANT: A Remote Admin connection must be

initiated by a person that is physically present at the
printer.

This person will also need to provide a randomly

generated PIN to the remote service technician.
NOTE: For more information about using the
Remote Admin function, see Remote Admin on page
745.

744 Chapter 3 Problem solving

 Table 3-11 Pre-boot menu options (7 of 7) (continued)

Menu option First level Second level Third level Description

Stop Telnet

Refresh IP

System Triage Copy Logs If the device will not boot to the Ready state, or the
diagnostic log feature found in the Troubleshooting
menu is not accessible, then use the System Triage
item to copy the diagnostic logs to a USB flash drive
at the next printer start up.

The files can then be sent to HP to help diagnose the

problem.

Change Svc Use this item to change the Service menu personal
PWD identification number (PIN).

Reset Svc PWD If the Service menu personal identification number

(PIN) has been changed. Use this item to reset it to the
original PIN.

Service Tools Reset Password Use this item to reset the Pre-boot administrator
password.

Subsystems For manufacturing use only. Do not change these

values.

Developer Tools Netexec

Remote Admin
The Remote Admin feature allows remote access the printer Pre-boot menu (BIOS environment). The
printer functions as a telnet server which uses the telnet networking protocol to transmit text data. Any
computer (with telnet installed and enabled) can function as the telnet client to remotely display and
interact with the Pre-boot menu.

IMPORTANT: While the Remote Admin function allows remote access the Pre-boot menu, for security
reasons the Remote Admin connection must be initiated by a person that is physically present at the
printer.

This section describes the following Remote Admin items.

Required software and network connection

Before using the Remote Admin feature, make sure that the telnet network protocol is installed, and
enabled, on the remote telnet client computer.

NOTE: This section describes enabling and configuring the telnet feature for computers using a
Windows® operating system.

HP recommends that the telnet client computer be a Windows based system, however, there are
other operating systems that support the telnet network protocol. For information about enabling and
configuring the telnet network protocol for other operating systems, see the owner's manual for that
operating system.

Telnet client
All computers using the Windows operating system have the telnet client installed, however, the telnet
client function might not be enabled by default.

Remote Admin 745

 NOTE: The figures and menus in this section are for the Windows 7 Enterprise® operating system.
Screens and menu selections might vary slightly for other operating systems.

1. Use the Start menu to open the Control Panel, and then click the Programs item to select it.

Figure 3-17 Open the Control Panel

2. Click the Turn Windows features on or off item to select it.

Figure 3-18 Turn Windows features on or off

3. In the Windows Features box, scroll down to Telnet Client. If the check box is not checked, click the
box to select it, and then click the OK button.

TIP: If the check box is already checked then the telnet client function is already enabled. Click the
Cancel button.

746 Chapter 3 Problem solving

 Figure 3-19 Enable the telnet client feature

Network connection
The remote telnet client computer must have direct network access to the printer for the Remote Admin
function to operate. This means that the telnet client computer must be on the same network as the
printer. The Remote Admin function cannot be accessed through a network firewall or other remote
access network security programs.

If a private network is not accessible, ask the network administrator to set up a virtual private network
(VPN) connection to the network.

Connect a remote connection

Learn how to connect a remote connection using telnet.

Start the telnet server function at the printer

For security reasons the Remote Admin feature must be initiated by a person that is physically present
at the printer. The following steps must be performed by a person that is physically present at the printer.

NOTE: This person might need to sign in with an administrator or service password depending on how
the printer is configured.

1. Turn the printer on.

2. The HP logo displays on the printer control panel. When a "1/8" with an underscore displays, touch
the middle of the screen to open the Pre-boot menu.

Network connection 747

 3. Use the arrow buttons on the touchscreen to scroll down and highlight the +3:Administrator item,
and then touch the OK button to select it.

Figure 3-20 Select the +3:Administrator item

4. Use the arrow buttons on the touchscreen to scroll down and highlight the +A:Remote Admin item,
and then touch the OK button to select it.

Figure 3-21 Select the +A:Remote Admin item

5. Use the arrow buttons on the touchscreen to scroll down and highlight the 1:Start Telnet item, and
then touch the OK button to select it.

Figure 3-22 Select the 1:Start Telnet item

6. Do one of the following

● If a connecting message displays briefly, go to step 7..

Figure 3-23 Telnet connecting message

● If an error message displays, use the steps below to identify the problem.

748 Chapter 3 Problem solving

 Figure 3-24 Telnet error message

a. The printer network cable is not correctly connected.

b. The BIOS LAN settings are incorrect.

○ The printer should be configured to use a static IP address, but is configured to use
DHCP instead.

○ The printer is configured to use a static IP address, but the IP address is incorrect.

c. The printer is correctly configured to use DHCP, but the DHCP server is not turned on or is
malfunctioning.

7. When the printer telnet server function is initialized, the following screen appears. Use the
information on this screen to connect the remote telnet client computer to the printer.

NOTE: The printer is now ready to receive remote telnet client commands.

● IP: The static or dynamically allocated IP address for the printer.

● Port: The standard telnet port (23).

● Pin: A randomly generated 4-digit personal identification number (PIN).

Figure 3-25 Telnet server function initialized

Start the telnet client function at the remote computer

The following steps establish a Remote Admin connection from a remote computer to the printer.

Start the telnet client function at the remote computer 749

 1. From the Start menu click Run to open a dialog box, type cmd in the Open field, and then click the
OK button to open a Windows command window.

Figure 3-26 Open a command window

2. From any displayed directory, type telnet at the prompt, and then press the Enter key.

Figure 3-27 Start a telnet session

3. Type o <IP ADDRESS> at the telnet prompt, and then press the Enter key.

NOTE: For <IP ADDRESS>, substitute the IP address that was displayed in step 7. in Start the
telnet server function at the printer on page 747.

TIP: If the telnet connection fails to establish a connection, the printer is probably behind a firewall
or on a different network that the remote telnet client computer. See Network connection on page
747.

750 Chapter 3 Problem solving

 Figure 3-28 Establish a telnet connection

4. Type the PIN that was displayed in step 7. in Start the telnet server function at the printer on page
747 at the prompt, and then press the Enter key.

IMPORTANT: Make sure to type the PIN correctly. After five incorrect PIN entries, the printer
terminates the Remote Admin connection. The Remote Admin feature must be re-initiated at the
printer. See Start the telnet server function at the printer on page 747.

Figure 3-29 Enter the PIN

5. The following screen displays when the correct PIN is entered and the Remote Admin connection
is successful. For information about the Pre-boot menu and options, see Pre-boot menu options on
page 735.

NOTE: Because a Remote Admin connection is an unsecure telnet network protocol connection,
the following Pre-boot menu items are disabled for the remote telnet client computer.

● The +3:Administrator menu 4:Change Password item.

● The +3:Administrator menu 5:Clear Password item.

● The +3:Administrator menu 6:Disk Manage item.

Start the telnet client function at the remote computer 751

 Figure 3-30 Remote Admin window

Disconnect a remote connection

Learn how to disconnect a remote connection.

The Remote Admin connection can be terminated from the printer control panel or the remote telnet
client computer.

NOTE: The following procedure describes terminating a Remote Admin connection from the remote
telnet client computer.

1. From the Pre-boot main menu, use the arrow buttons on the keyboard to scroll down to the
+3:Administrator item, and then press the Enter key.

Figure 3-31 Access the administrator menu

752 Chapter 3 Problem solving

 2. Use the arrow buttons on the keyboard to scroll down to the +A:Remote Admin item, and then press
the Enter key.

Figure 3-32 Access the remote admin menu

3. Use the arrow buttons on the keyboard to scroll down to the 2:Stop Telnet item, and then press the
Enter key. The Remote Admin connection between the printer and the remote telnet client computer
terminates.

IMPORTANT: The printer remains in the Pre-boot menu. Have the person that is physically present
at the printer do the following:

● Touch the Home button to return to the main Pre-boot menu and highlight the 1:Continue item,
and then touch the OK button. The printer will continue to initialize.

Figure 3-33 Terminate the telnet connection

Control panel menus

You can perform basic printer setup by using the Settings menu. Use the HP Embedded Web Server for
more advanced printer setup. To open the HP Embedded Web Server, enter the printer IP address or
host name in the address bar of a web browser.

Reports menu
To display: At the printer control panel, select Reports.

In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting.

Control panel menus 753

 Table 3-12 Reports menu

First level Second level Values Description

Configuration/Status Pages Settings Menu Map Print Shows a map of the entire
Settings menu and the
View selected values for each
setting.

Current Settings Page Print Shows the current printer

settings.
View

Configuration Page Print Shows the printer settings

and installed accessories.
View

How to Connect Page Print Shows the IP address, the

host name, and the hardware
View (MAC) address for the printer
if it is connected to a network.

Supplies Status Page Print Shows the approximate

remaining life for the
View supplies; reports statistics
on total number of pages
and jobs processed, serial
number, page counts, and
maintenance information.

HP provides approximations
of the remaining life for
the supplies as a customer
convenience. The actual
remaining supply levels
might be different from the
approximations provided.

Usage Page Print Shows a count of all paper

sizes that have passed
View through the printer; lists
whether they were simplex,
duplex, monochrome, or color;
and reports the page count.

File Directory Page Print Shows the file name and

folder name for files that are
View stored in the printer memory.

Web Services Status Page Print Shows the detected Web

Services for the printer.
View

HP Flex Build Configuration Print Shows installed Flex

Page Build components and
View replacement history.

NOTE: 877/826/786/731
printers only.

Event Log Print Displays or prints event logs

listing event code, date/time,
View cycles and repetitions on the
printer.

Paper Path Page Print Shows paper path usage on

the printer.
View

754 Chapter 3 Problem solving

 Table 3-12 Reports menu (continued)

First level Second level Values Description

Fax Reports (MFP fax models Fax Activity Log Print Contains a list of the faxes
only) that have been sent from or
View received by this printer.

Billing Codes Report Print Provides a list of billing codes

that have been used for
View outgoing faxes. This report
shows how many sent faxes
were billed to each code.

Blocked Fax List Print Provides a list of phone

numbers that are blocked
View from sending faxes to this
printer.

Fax Call Report Print Provides a detailed report of

the last fax operation, either
View sent or received.

Other Pages PCL Font List Print Prints the available PCL fonts.

PS Font List Print Prints the available PS fonts.

Secure Drum Data Erase Print Prints the secure drum data
erase pattern to overwrite
any residual image data that
might be left on the drum
from the previous print job.

Settings menu
To display: At the printer control panel, select the Settings menu.

In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting.

Table 3-13 Settings menu

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

General Date/Time Date/Time Format Date Format DD/MMM/YYYY Use the Date/Time
Settings Settings menu to
MMM/DD/YYYY specify the date
and time and
YYYY/MMM/DD to configure date/
time settings.

Time Format 12 hour (AM/PM) Select the format

that the printer
24 hours uses to show the
date and time, for
example 12-hour
format or 24-hour
format.

Date/Time Date Select the time Select the time

zone from a list. zone, date, and
time that the
printer uses.

Time Select the date

from a pop-up
calendar.

Settings menu 755

 Table 3-13 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Time Zone Select the time

from a pop-up
keypad.

Energy Sleep Schedule A list of + (Add) Use to configure

Settings scheduled the printer
events Edit to automatically
displays. wake up or go to
Delete sleep at specific
times on specific
days. Using this
feature saves
energy.

NOTE: You must

configure the date
and time settings
before you can use
this feature.

New event Event Type Select whether to

add or edit a Wake
event or a Sleep
event, and then
select the time
and the days for
the wake or sleep
event.

Time Set the wake or

sleep event time
parameters.

Event Days Select days of the Set the wake or

week from a list. sleep event day
parameters.

Sleep Settings Sleep After Range: 1 to 110 Set the number

Inactivity minutes of minutes after
which the printer
Shut Down Default = 0 enters Sleep or
minutes Auto Off mode.
Touch the existing
number to open
the virtual keypad,
and then increase
or decrease
the number of
minutes.

Display Display Brightness Manual The Manual Use to specify the

Settings setting uses a intensity of the
slider to manually LCD control panel
control the display display.
brightness.

System Sound On* Use to specify

whether you hear
Off a sound when you
touch the screen
or press buttons
on the control
panel.

756 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-13 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Language Settings Language Select from a Use to select a

list of languages different language
that the printer for control panel
supports. messages and
specify the default
keyboard layout.
When you select a
new language, the
keyboard layout
automatically
changes to match
the factory default
for the selected
language.

Keyboard Each language has Select the default

Layout a default keyboard keyboard layout
layout. To change that matches the
Flow models it, select from a list language you want
only of layouts. to use.

Information Show connection Use this menu

Screen information* item to display or
hide connection
Hide connection information on the
information Home screen.

DisplayDate and Yes* Select whether to

Time display or hide the
No date and time on
the control panel
Home screen.

Job Status Fewer* Use this feature

Notifications to control how
More many job status
notifications
appear while a job
is proceeding

● If the setting
is Fewer,
there will only
be a
notification to
indicate the
job has been
added to the
job queue
(except Fa,
which always
indicates
success or
failure).

● If the setting
is More, there
will be status
notifications
while the job
is proceeding
including a
completion
notification.

Settings menu 757

 Table 3-13 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Inactivity Timeout Range: 10-300 Specifies the

seconds amount of time
that elapses
Default = 60 between any
seconds activity on the
control panel and
when the printer
resets to the
default settings.
When the timeout
expires, the control
panel display
returns to the
Home menu, and
any user signed in
to the printer is
signed out.

Clearable On Use this feature

Warnings to set the period
Job* that a clearable
warning displays
on the control
panel. If the
On setting is
selected, clearable
warnings appear
until the Clearable
Warnings button is
pressed. If the Job
setting is selected,
clearable warnings
stay on the display
during the job
that generated
the warning and
disappear from
the display when
the next job starts.

Continuable Auto-continue (10 Use this option

Events seconds)* to configure the
printer behavior
Touch OK to when the printer
continue encounters certain
errors. If the
Auto-continue (10
seconds) option
is selected, the
job will continue
after 10 seconds.
If the Touch OK
to continue option
is selected, the
job will stop and
require the user
to touch the
OK button before
continuing.

758 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-13 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Enable Enabled* Use this feature

Device USB to enable or
Disabled disable the USB
port, which allows
connecting to a
computer by using
a USB device.

Jam Auto* This printer

Recovery provides a jam
Off recovery feature
that reprints
On jammed pages.
Select one of the
following options:

Auto: The printer

attempts to
reprint jammed
pages when
sufficient memory
is available. This is
the default setting.

Off: The printer

does not attempt
to reprint jammed
pages. Because no
memory is used
to store the most
recent pages,
performance is
optimal.

NOTE: When
using this option, if
the printer runs
out of paper and
the job is being
printed on both
sides, some pages
can be lost.

On: The printer

always reprints
jammed pages.
Additional memory
is allocated to
store the last few
pages printed. This
might cause a
decrease in overall
performance.

Auto Enabled The printer

Recovery attempts to
Disabled* reprint jammed
pages when
sufficient memory
is available. This is
the default setting.

Settings menu 759

 Table 3-13 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Enable Disabled Use the Enable

AutoSend AutoSend menu
Enabled* to enable or
disable the
AutoSned feature.
The AutoSend
feature enables
your product
to periodically
send product
configuration
information
including serial
number, event
logs, page usage
counts, and
supplies status
information to HP
web addresses
(URLs), or
email addresses.
Information sent
to HP is used to
improve products
and services, and
to monitor the
product if you
have a relationship
with HP that
provides you
serives such as
proactive cartidge
replacement,
pay-per-page
contracts, support
agreements, or
usage tracking.

Hold Off Print Enabled* Enable this feature

Job if you want to
Disabled prevent print jobs
from starting while
a user is initiating
a copy job from
the control panel.
Held print jobs
start printing after
the copy job is
finished, provided
that no other copy
job is in the print
queue.

Copy/Print Copy Image Preview Display a preview

Settings of the image
before printing it.

Enable Print Enabled Enables the printer

from USB to open a file from
Drive Disabled* a USB drive.

760 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-13 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Manage Job Sort Order Job Name* This option

Stored Jobs allows you list
Date the jobs either
alphabetically or
chronologically.

Retain Temporary Do not retain* Sets which

Jobs After Reboot temporary jobs will
Personal jobs only be retained in the
event of a printer
All temporary jobs reboot.

Temporary Job 1-300 Configure global

Storage Limit settings for jobs
Default = 32 that are stored
in the printer
memory.

The Temporary
Job Storage Limit
feature specifies
the number of
temporary jobs
that can be stored
on the printer. The
maximum allowed
value is 300.

Temporary Stored Off* Configure global

Job Retention settings for jobs
30 minutes that are stored
in the printer
1 hour memory.

4 hours The Temporary

Stored Job
1 day Retention feature
specifies the
3 days number of
temporary jobs
1 week that can be stored
on the printer. The
4 weeks maximum allowed
value is 300.

Standard Stored Off* Configure global

Job Retention settings for jobs
30 minutes that are stored
in the printer
1 hour memory.

4 hours The Temporary

Stored Job
1 day Retention feature
specifies the
3 days number of
standard jobs that
1 week can be stored on
the printer. The
4 weeks maximum allowed
value is 300.

Settings menu 761

 Table 3-13 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Default Print Number of Copies Range: Sets the default

Options 1-32000 number of copies
for a copy
Default = 1 job. This default
applies when the
Copy function or
the Quick Copy
function is initiated
from the printer
Home screen.

Paper Selection Select from a Configures the

list of sizes default paper size
that the used for print jobs.
printer
supports.

Default Custom X Dimension Range: 3-8.5 Configures the

Paper Size inches default paper size
that is used when
Default = 8.5 the user selects
inches Custom as the
paper size for a
print job.

Y Dimension Range: 5-14

inches

Default = 14
inches

Use Inches Enabled*

Disabled

Output Sides 1-sided* Use to indicate

whether the
2-sided original document
is printed on one
or both sides,
and whether the
copies should be
printed on one or
both sides. For
example, select
the 1-sided original,
2-sided output
option when the
original is printed
on one side, but
you want to make
two-sided copies.

Fit to Page (PDF) On Use this feature to

reduce or enlarge
Off* the image/content
of each page to
fit the currently
selected paper
size.

762 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-13 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Fit to Page (TIFF, On* Use this feature to

BMP, JPG, PNG) reduce or enlarge
Off the image/content
of each page to
fit the currently
selected paper
size.

Quality and Speed Quick View

Normal*

Fine Lines

Settings menu 763

 Table 3-13 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Edge Control Automatic* The Edge Control

setting determines
Off how edges are
rendered. Edge
Light Control has
two components:
Normal adaptive
halftoning and
Maximum trapping. Adaptive
halftoning
increases edge
sharpness.
Trapping reduces
the effect
of color-plane
misregistration by
overlapping the
edges of adjacent
objects slightly..

● Automatic:
The printer
uses the
default Edge
Control
setting.

● Off: Turns off

both trapping
and adaptive
halftoning.

● Light: Sets
trapping at a
minimal level,
and adaptive
halftoning is
on.

● Normal:
Trapping is at
a medium
level and
adaptive
halftoning is
on.

● Maximum:
Trapping is at
the highest
level, and
adaptive
halftoning is
on.

764 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-13 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Halftone Automatic* Use this feature to

control the default
Smooth halftone screen
that the printer
Detail uses for print jobs.

Select from the

following options:

● Automatic:
The halftone
screen
frequency is
picked
automatically
by the printer
to provide the
best print
quality for a
range of
content.

● Smooth: Low
frequency
halftone
screen
optimized for
printing
smooth
gradients and
vector
graphics.

● Detail: High
frequency
halftone
screen
optimized for
printing
detailed
content, such
as
photographs.

Settings menu 765

 Table 3-13 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Neutral Grays Automatic* Neutral Grays

determine the
Black Only method for
creating gray
CMYK Gray colors in text,
graphics, and
photographs.

● Automatic:
The printer
combines
colors for
each
document
element to
provide high-
quality output
for most
color printing
needs.

● Black Only:
Generates
neutral colors
(black and
shades of
gray) by using
only the black
color. This
guarantees
neutral colors
without a
color cast
(tint of a
particular
color).

● CMYK Gray:
Generates
neutral colors
(black and
shades of
gray) by
combining
the printer
colors. This
method
produces
smoother
gradients and
transitions to
other colors,
and it
produces the
darkest black.

766 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-13 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Envelope Off* Use this feature

Rotate to enable rotation
90 Degrees when printing on
envelopes.
180 degrees
Envelopes are
usually loaded
into the printer
as short-edge
feed. However,
if the Envelope
Rotate function is
enabled, you can
load envelopes as
long-edge feed.
The printer rotates
the image to be
printed so that it
appears correctly
on the envelopes.

● Off (default):
Load
envelopes in
short-edge
feed
direciton.

● 90 degrees:
Load
envelopes in
long-edge
feed
direction.

● 180 degrees:
Load
envelopes in
short-edge
feed direction
with the flap
on the bottom
side.

PCL and Suppress Blank Off* When set to On,

PostScript Pages any blank pages
Settings On will not be printed.

Courier Font Regular* Select which

version of the
Dark Courier font you
want to use. The
factory default
setting is Regular,
which uses an
average stroke
width. The Dark
setting can be
used if a heavier
Courier font is
needed.

Settings menu 767

 Table 3-13 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Print PS Errors Enabled Use this feature

to select whether
Disabled* a PostScript (PS)
error page is
printed when the
printer encounters
a PS error.

Print PDF Errors Enabled Selects whether a

PDF error page is
Disabled* printed when the
printer encounters
a PDF error.

Personality Auto* Configures the

default print
PCL language or
personality for the
PS printer. Normally
you should not
PDF change the printer
language. If you
change the setting
to a specific
printer language,
the printer does
not automatically
switch from one
language to
another unless
specific software
commands are
sent to it.

PCL Font Settings Font Source Internal Selects the font

source for the
Disk resident user-soft default
font. The list of
available options
varies depending
on the installed
printer options.

Font Number Range: 0-110 Specifies the

font number for
Default = 0 the user-soft
default font using
the source that
is specified in
the Font Source
menu. The printer
assigns a number
to each font and
lists it on the PCL
font list. The font
number displays in
the Font # column
of the printout.

768 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-13 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Font Pitch Range: 0.44-99.99 If the Font Source

option and the
Default = 10 Font Number
setting indicate a
contour font, then
use this feature
to select a default
pitch (for a fixed-
spaced font).

PCL Settings Form Length Range: 5-128 Controls the PCL

print-command
Default = 60 options. PCL is
a set of printer
commands that
HP developed to
provide access to
printer features.

Use the Form

Length feature
to select the
user-soft default
vertical form
length.

Orientation Portrait* Select the

orientation that is
Landscape most often used
for copy or scan
originals. Select
the Portrait option
if the short edge is
at the top or select
the Landscape
option if the long
edge is at the top.

Symbol Set Select from a list Select any one of

of symbol sets. several available
symbol sets from
the control panel.
A symbol set
is a unique
grouping of all the
characters in a
font. The factory
default value
for this option
is PC-8. Either
PC-8 or PC-850
are recommended
for line-draw
characters.

Settings menu 769

 Table 3-13 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Append CR No* Configure whether

to LF a carriage return
Yes (CR) is appended
to each line feed
(LF) encountered
in backwards-
compatible PCL
jobs (pure text, no
job control). Select
Yes to append the
carriage return.
The default setting
is No. Some
environments,
such as UNIX,
indicate a new line
by using only the
line-feed control
code. This option
allows the user
to append the
required carriage
return to each line
feed.

Media Standard* Use to select

Source and maintain input
Mapping Classic trays by number
when you are not
using the printer
driver, or when the
software program
has no option for
tray selection. The
following options
are available:

Standard: Tray
numbering is
based on newer
HP LaserJet
models.

Classic: Tray
numbering is
based on
HP LaserJet 4 and
older models.

770 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-13 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Print Quality Adjust paper types Select from a list If print quality
of paper types problems occur,
use this menu to
Reset Paper Types adjust the Print
Mode for the
paper type in use.
If a user-defined
type (enabled in
the Embedded
Web Server) has
preprinted content
that makes the
sides of the paper
different, set the
paper type as
Marked Paper.

Customize Colors RGB: Office (sRGB)

NOTE: Color
CMYK: SWOP printers only.

Manage Use Requested Exclusively* Controls how the

Trays Tray printer handles
First jobs that have
specified a
specific input tray.
Two options are
available:

Exclusively: The
printer never
selects a different
tray when the user
has indicated that
a specific tray
should be used,
even if that tray is
empty.

First: The printer

pulls from another
tray if the
specified tray
is empty, even
though the
user specifically
indicated a tray for
the job.

Settings menu 771

 Table 3-13 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Manually Feed Always* Indicate whether

Prompt a prompt should
Unless loaded appear when the
type or size for a
job does not match
the specified
tray and the
printer pulls from
the multipurpose
tray instead.
Two options are
available:

Always: A prompt
always displays
before using the
multipurpose tray.

Unless loaded: A
message displays
only if the
multipurpose tray
is empty.

Size/Type Prompt Display* Controls whether

the tray
Do not display configuration
message displays
whenever a
tray is closed.
Two options are
available:

Display: Shows the

tray configuration
message when a
tray is closed. The
user is able to
configure the tray
settings directly
from this message.

Do not display:
Prevents the
tray configuration
message from
automatically
appearing.

772 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-13 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Use Another Tray Allow* Use to turn on

or off the control
Do not allow panel prompt to
select another tray
when the specified
tray is empty.
Two options are
available:

Enabled: When
this option is
selected, the user
is prompted either
to add paper to the
selected tray or to
choose a different
tray.

Disabled: When
this option is
selected, the
user is not
given the option
of selecting a
different tray. The
printer prompts
the user to add
paper to the tray
that was initially
selected.

Alternative Off* Use to load

Letterhead Mode letterhead or
On preprinted paper
into the tray the
same way for all
print jobs, whether
you are printing
to one side of
the sheet or to
both sides of the
sheet. When this
option is selected,
load the paper
as you would for
printing on both
sides. See the user
documentation
that came with
the printer for
instructions about
loading letterhead
for printing on both
sides. When this
option is selected,
the printer speed
slows to the
speed required for
printing on both
sides.

Settings menu 773

 Table 3-13 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Duplex Blank Automatic* Controls how the

Pages printer handles
Always two-sided jobs
(duplexing). Two
options are
available:

Auto: Enables
Smart Duplexing,
which instructs
the printer not
to process blank
pages.

Yes: Disables
Smart Duplexing
and forces the
duplexer to flip the
sheet of paper
even if it is
printed on only one
side. This might
be preferable for
certain jobs that
use paper types
such as letterhead
or prepunched
paper.

Image Rotation Left to right* The Image

Rotation setting
Right to left allows alternatives
affecting how
Alternate preprinted paper
is loaded into the
tray

NOTE: For
stapled print or
copy jobs, make
sure the Staple/
Collate setting
matches the
Image Rotation
setting as to which
side of paper (left
or right) you want
stapled. If these
setting do not
match each other,
you will need to
change the loading
orientation of the
paper so that the
job is stapled in the
correct spot.

774 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-13 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Override A4/Letter Yes* Prints on letter-size

paper when an A4
No job is sent but
no A4-size paper
is loaded in the
printer (or to print
on A4 paper when
a letter-size job
is sent but no
letter-size paper
is loaded). This
option will also
override A3 with
ledger-size paper
and ledger with
A3-size paper.

Unsupported Size Use default size Use this feature

Behavior automatically* to print documents
that are on a
Prompt for user paper size that the
response product does not
support

● Select Use
default size
automatically
to use the
paper size
selected in
Default Print
Options.

● Select
Prompt for
user
response to
be asked to
use the size
selected in
Default Print
Options or to
cancel the
job.

Settings menu 775

 Table 3-13 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Rotate Offset Automatic Use this feature

to separate each
NOTE: When set Off* copy by rotating
to Automatic, its position in
rotation does not the output bin.
occur if: Two options are
available:
● The tray is
specified in Off: Jobs are
the job and printed normally
the User with separating
Selected Tray each copy.
setting is set
to Exclusively. Automatic: Copies
are rotated
● The specified automatically.
bin in the job
does not
support both
orientations.

● The job is
uncollated.

● The job is
collated, but
only has one
sheet per
copy.

● The job has

mixed paper
size or type.

● The user
selects a
different
paper after
the job has
started.

● A job setting
works only
with a
specific
orientation.

● The Job
Offset setting
is available
and set to On.

Tray Priority Tray 4 You can set the

tray priority. If
Tray 3 first setting is
Tray 1, the printer
Tray 2 automatically
prints from Tray 1
Tray 1 after the current
tray runs out of
paper.

776 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-13 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Tray Protection NOTE: You can When this option

select all but one is chosen, the
of the trays. At selected tray will
least one tray be protected. This
must be prevents paper
unselected at all from being fed if
times Use Another Tray
is enabled. If you
Tray 4 select Tray 1, for
example, then Tray
Tray 3 1 is excluded when
using another tray.
Tray 2

Tray 1

Paper Out Action Auto Continue Specify the action

Time-Out the printer will take
when the paper
Auto Continue configured for the
Action print job does not
match the paper
loaded in the input
tray

Scan/Digital Scan+ Image Make optional* Use this menu to

Send Settings Preview configure settings
Require preview that affect scan
apps.
Disable preview

E-mail E-mail Setup Use to configure

Settings settings that
NOTE: Email apply to sending
Settings only documents
through email or
saving documents
to a folder on the
network or on a
USB multi-drive.

The E-mail
Setup Wizard
feature configures
the printer to
send scanned
images as email
attachments. To
open the printer
HP Embedded
Web Server and
set up the email
notification server,
enter the printer IP
address into a Web
browser.

Settings menu 777

 Table 3-13 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Image Preview Make optional* Defines the default

job options for
Require preview each function. If
you do not specify
Disable preview the job options
when creating
the job, the
default options are
used. For complete
setup, go to the
HP Embedded
Web Server by
typing the IP
address of the
printer into a Web
browser.

Use the Image

Preview feature to
scan a document
and display a
preview before
completing the job.
Select whether
this feature is
available on the
printer.

Make optional: The

feature is optional,
depending on the
user who is signed
in.

Require preview
Previews are
required for all
users.

Disable preview:
Previews are
disabled for all
users.

778 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-13 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Network Image Preview Make optional* Defines the default

Folder job options for
Settings Require preview each function. If
you do not specify
Disable preview the job options
when creating
the job, the
default options are
used. For complete
setup, go to the
HP Embedded
Web Server by
typing the IP
address of the
printer into a Web
browser.

Use the Image

Preview feature to
scan a document
and display a
preview before
completing the job.
Select whether
this feature is
available on the
printer.

Make optional: The

feature is optional,
depending on the
user who is signed
in.

Require preview
Previews are
required for all
users.

Disable preview:
Previews are
disabled for all
users.

Settings menu 779

 Table 3-13 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

SharePoint Image Preview Make optional* Defines the default

Settings job options for
Require preview each function. If
you do not specify
Disable preview the job options
when creating
the job, the
default options are
used. For complete
setup, go to the
HP Embedded
Web Server by
typing the IP
address of the
printer into a Web
browser.

Use the Image

Preview feature to
scan a document
and display a
preview before
completing the job.
Select whether
this feature is
available on the
printer.

Make optional: The

feature is optional,
depending on the
user who is signed
in.

Require preview
Previews are
required for all
users.

Disable preview:
Previews are
disabled for all
users.

780 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-13 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Scan to USB Image Preview Make optional* Defines the default

Drive job options for
Settings Require preview each function. If
you do not specify
Disable preview the job options
when creating
the job, the
default options are
used. For complete
setup, go to the
HP Embedded
Web Server by
typing the IP
address of the
printer into a Web
browser.

Use the Image

Preview feature to
scan a document
and display a
preview before
completing the job.
Select whether
this feature is
available on the
printer.

Make optional: The

feature is optional,
depending on the
user who is signed
in.

Require preview
Previews are
required for all
users.

Disable preview:
Previews are
disabled for all
users.

Settings menu 781

 Table 3-13 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Digital Allow Use of a DSS Disabled Configure how

Sending Server the printer
Software Enabled* interacts with the
Setup Allow Transfer to HP Digital Sending
New DSS server Software (DSS)
server. HP DSS
handles digital
sending tasks,
such as faxing,
emailing, and
sending scanned
documents to a
network folder
or USB storage
device.

Use the Allow Use

of a DSS Server
and Allow Transfer
to New DSS
server options
to configure the
printer to use
HP DSS.

Fax Internal Fax Line 1

Modem
Setup Line 2

Fax Send Image Preview

Settings

Fax Dialing Line Monitor Off These settings

Settings Volume control how the
Low* fax modem dials
the outgoing fax
High number when
faxes are sent.

Dialing Mode Tone*

Pulse

Redial 1-5 Minutes

Interval
Default = 5
minutes

Fax Send Fast*

Speed
Medium

Slow

Dialing Prefix

Detect Dial
Tone

Redial on Range: 0-9

Error
Default = 2

782 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-13 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Redial on No Range: 0-2

Answer
Default = 0

Redial on Range: 0-9

Busy
Default = 3

General Fax Send Fax Number Enabled If this feature

Settings Confirmation is enabled, you
Disabled* must enter the fax
number twice.

Fax Line Automatic*

Selection
Line 1

Line 2

PC Fax Send Enabled* Enables users

who have the
Disabled correct driver
installed to send
faxes through the
printer from their
computers.

Error Line 1* Enabled* When error-

Correction correction mode
Mode Line 2* Disabled is enabled
and an error
occurs during fax
transmission, the
printer sends or
receives the error
portion again.

Fax Header Prepend* Use to prepend

or overlay the fax
Overlay header page.

Settings menu 783

 Table 3-13 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Billing Code Enable Billing Off* When billing codes

Settings Codes are enabled, a
On prompt displays
that asks the
user to enter the
billing code for an
outgoing fax. This
prompt does not
appear if the Allow
users to edit billing
codes check box is
not checked.

You can also

use the billing
codes report in the
Reports menu to
view the list of the
billing codes that
have been used
for faxes that have
been sent from the
printer. The list is
grouped by billing
code and also
shows fax details.
This feature can be
used for billing or
usage tracking.

Default Specify a default

Billing Code billing code for
faxing. If you
specify a default
billing code, this
code displays in
the Billing Code
field when the
user sends an
outgoing fax. If this
field is blank, no
default billing code
is provided for the
user.

Minimum Range: 1-16 Specify the

Length required length of
Default = 1 the billing code.
Billing codes can
be between 1 and
16 characters long.

Allow users Off

to edit billing
codes On*

Fax Receive Fax Receive Setup Ring Volume Off Use to configure
Settings settings for
Low* receiving faxes.

High

Rings To Range: 1-6

Answer
Default = 1

784 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-13 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Fax Receive Fast*

Speed
Medium

Slow

Fax Printing Always store faxes If you have

Schedule concerns about
Always print faxes* the security of
private faxes, use
Use Fax Printing this feature to
Schedule store faxes rather
than having them
automatically
print. Open the Fax
Printing Schedule
sub-menu, and
then you can
choose to always
store faxes, always
print them, or you
can set up a
schedule for each
day of the week.

Schedule + (Add) Print incoming If you are using

faxes a fax printing
Touch this to Edit schedule, use this
set up a fax Store incoming menu to configure
printing Delete (trash faxes when to print
schedule if can) faxes.
you selected Time
the Use Fax
Printing Event Days
Schedule
option.

Settings menu 785

 Table 3-13 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Blocked Fax Fax Number The blocked fax

Numbers to Block list can contain
up to 30 numbers.
When the printer
receives a call
from one of
the blocked fax
numbers, it deletes
the incoming fax.
It also logs
the blocked fax
in the activity
log along with
job-accounting
information.

Add blocked
numbers: Enter a
fax number into
the Fax Number
to Block field, and
then touch the
arrow button to
add a new number
to the blocked fax
list.

To remove blocked
numbers: Select a
number and touch
the Delete button
to delete it from
the blocked fax list.

To clear all blocked

numbers: Touch
the Delete All
button to clear all
of the numbers
from the blocked
fax list.

You also can use

the Blocked Fax
List report in the
Information menu
to view the list of
the fax numbers
that have been
blocked on this
printer.

786 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-13 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Default Job Notification Do not notify* Configure

Options to receive
Notify when job notification about
completes the status of a
sent document.
Notify only if job
fails Do not notify:
Turns off this
feature.

Notify when
job completes:
Select to receive
notification for this
job only.

Notify only
if job fails:
Select to receive
notification only if
the job is not sent
successfully.

Print E-mail: Select

to receive the
E-mail* notification in an
email. Touch the
text box following
Email Address, and
then enter the
email address for
the notification.

Include NOTE: When

Thumbnail sending an analog
fax, select Include
Thumbnail to
receive a
thumbnail image
of the first page of
the fax in your
notification.

Notification Touch this text

E-mail field, provide the
address email address to
which you want
notifications sent,
and then touch the
OK button.

Stamp On Use this option to

Received add the date, time,
Faxes Off* sender’s phone
number, and page
number to each
page of the faxes
that this printer
receives.

Settings menu 787

 Table 3-13 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Fit to Page On* Use to shrink faxes

that are larger
Off than Letter-size or
A4-size so that
they can fit onto
a Letter-size or
A4-size page. If
this feature set
to Disabled, faxes
larger than Letter
or A4 will flow
across multiple
pages.

Paper Tray Automatic*

Select from a list

of the trays.

Out Sides 1-sided* Use to describe

the layout for each
2-sided side of the original
document. First
Page flips up select whether the
original document
is printed on one
side or both sides.

Fax Enable Fax Disabled* Use to forward

Forwarding Forwarding received faxes
Enabled to another fax
machine.

Type of Fax All faxes Use to select the

Job to type of fax jobs
Forward Sent faxes that you want
forwarded.
Received faxes*

Fax IP Fax
Forwarding
Method Internal Modem*

Fax Provide the

Forwarding forwarding phone
Number number, and then
touch the OK
button.

Clear Fax Clears all events

Activity Log from the fax
activity log.

788 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-13 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Manage Low Warning Black 0 %* Set the estimated

Supplies Thresholds Cartridge percentage at
0 %* which the printer
Cyan notifies you when
Cartridge 0 %* a toner cartridge is
very low.
Magenta 0 %*
Cartridge
10 %*
Yellow
Cartridge

Document
feeder kit

Low Warning On Displays a

Threshold message on the
Message Off control panel when
a cartridge is very
low.

Very Low Black Cartridge Stop

Behavior
Color Cartridges Continue

Document Feeder Prompt to continue

Kit

Staples Stop

Prompt to continue

Delay Very Stop Yellow Cartridge 0 After a supply

Low Message pages* reaches the very
Continue low state, the
Magenta warning message
Cartridge 0 pages* can be delayed by
a specified page
Cyan Cartridge 0 count.
pages*

Black Cartridge 0
pages*

Restrict Enable Use this feature

Color Use to enable, restrict,
Disable Color or disable color
printing or copying.
Color if allowed*

Settings menu 789

 Table 3-13 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Color/Black Auto Instructs the

Mix printer when
Mostly Color to switch
Pages between color
and monochrome
Mostly Black printing modes for
Pages the best overall
performance.

Auto: Uses the

mode that is
appropriate for
the first page
of the job. If
necessary, the
printer switches
modes during the
middle of a job and
then stays in that
mode until the job
is finished.

Mostly Color
Pages: The printer
uses color mode
for all jobs, even if
the job contains no
color pages.

Mostly Black
Pages: The printer
uses monochrome
mode until it
detects a color
page. The printer
switches back
to monochrome
mode when
it detects
a sequence
of several
monochrome
pages.

790 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-13 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Store Usage On supplies The Store Usage

Data Data provides
Not on supplies a way to
suppress the toner
cartridges from
storing most of
the information
gathered
exclusively for
the purpose of
understanding the
usage of the
printer. Select
the On supplies
setting to store
the data on the
toner cartridge
memory chip.
Select the Not
on supplies setting
to suppress the
information from
being stored on
the memory chip.

Supply Off* Select to

Protection permanently
Protect Supplies protect cartridges
so that they can
be used only in this
product or fleet of
products.

Cartridge Off* Set Authorized

Policy HP to allow
Authorized HP only genuine HP
cartridges to be
used in this
product.

Reset Document Feeder After replacing a

Supplies Kit supply kit, select it
from the list and
touch "Reset."

Manage Job Offset On

Stapler/
Stacker Off

Developer Use this menu

Options to configure
developer settings
for the product.

Networking Ethernet INFORMATION PRINT YES Yes: Prints a page

SECURITY that contains the
REPORT NO* current security
settings on the
HP Jetdirect print
server.

No: A security
settings page is
not printed.

Settings menu 791

 Table 3-13 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

TCP/IP HOST NAME Use the arrow An alphanumeric

buttons to edit the string, up to
host name. 32 characters,
used to identify
NPIXXXXXX* the printer. This
name is listed on
the HP Jetdirect
configuration
page. The default
host name is
NPIxxxxxx, where
xxxxxx is the
last six digits of
the LAN hardware
(MAC) address.

IPV4 CONFIG BOOTP Specifies the

SETTINGS METHOD method that TCP/
DHCP* IPv4 parameters
will be configured
AUTO IP on the HP Jetdirect
print server.
MANUAL
Bootp (Bootstrap
Protocol): Use
for automatic
configuration from
a BootP server.

DHCP (Dynamic
Host Configuration
Protocol): Use
for automatic
configuration from
a DHCPv4 server.
If selected and
a DHCP lease
exists, the DHCP
Release menu and
the DHCP Renew
menu are available
to set DHCP lease
options.

Auto IP: Use

for automatic
link-local IPv4
addressing. An
address in the
form 169.254.x.x
is assigned
automatically.

If you set this

option to the
Manual setting,
use the Manual
Settings menu to
configure TCP/IPv4
parameters.

DHCP YES
RELEASE
NO*

792 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-13 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

DHCP YES
RENEW
NO*

PRIMARY RANGE: 0-255 Specify the IP

DNS address (n.n.n.n) of
DEFAULT = a Primary Domain
xxx.xxx.xx.xx Name System
(DNS) Server.

Secondary Range: 0-255 Specify the IP

DNS address (n.n.n.n) of
Default = 0.0.0.0 a Secondary DNS
Server.

IPV6 ENABLE OFF Use this item to

SETTINGS enable or disable
ON* IPv6 operation on
the print server.

Off: IPv6 is
disabled.

On: IPv6 is
enabled.

ADDRESS MANUAL Use this item

SETTINGS to enable
and manually
ENABLE configure a TCP/
IPv6 address.
ADDRESS

Settings menu 793

 Table 3-13 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

DHCPV6 ROUTER Router Specified:

POLICY SPECIFIED The stateful
auto-configuration
ROUTER method to be used
UNAVAILABLE* by the print server
is determined by
ALWAYS a router. The
router specifies
whether the print
server obtains
its address,
its configuration
information, or
both from a
DHCPv6 server.

Router
Unavailable: If
a router is
not available,
the print server
should attempt to
obtain its stateful
configuration from
a DHCPv6 server.

Always: Whether a
router is available,
the print server
always attempts to
obtain its stateful
configuration from
a DHCPv6 server.

PRIMARY RANGE: 0-255 Specify the IP

DNS address (n.n.n.n) of
DEFAULT = a Primary Domain
xxx.xxx.xx.xx Name System
(DNS) Server.

SECONDARY RANGE: 0-255 Specify the IP

DNS address (n.n.n.n) of
DEFAULT = 0.0.0.0 a Secondary DNS
Server.

794 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-13 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

PROXY Specifies the proxy

SERVER server to be
used by embedded
applications in the
printer. A proxy
server is typically
used by network
clients for Internet
access. It caches
Web pages, and
provides a degree
of Internet security
for those clients.

To specify a
proxy server, enter
its IPv4 address
or fully-qualified
domain name. The
name can be up to
255 octets.

For some
networks, you
might need to
contact your
Internet Service
Provider (ISP) for
the proxy server
address.

PROXY PORT DEFAULT = 00080 Enter the port

number used by
the proxy server
for client support.
The port number
identifies the port
reserved for proxy
activity on your
network, and can
be a value from 0
to 65535.

IDLE DEFAULT = 0270 The time period,

TIMEOUT in seconds, after
which an idle
TCP print data
connection is
closed (default
is 270 seconds,
0 disables the
timeout).

SECURITY SECURE WEB HTTPS REQUIRED*

HTTPS OPTIONAL

IPSEC KEEP

DISABLE*

FIREWALL KEEP

DISABLE*

Settings menu 795

 Table 3-13 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

802.1X RESET

KEEP*

ANNOUNCE ENABLE*
MENT AGENT
DISABLE

RESET YES
SECURITY
NO*

FIPS KEEP

RESET & REBOOT

DEVICE

LINK SPEED AUTO*

10T HALF

10T FULL

10T AUTO

100TX HALF

100TX FULL

100TX AUTO

1000T FULL

I/O Timeout 15* seconds

Range: 5 to 300

Copy menu
To display: At the printer control panel, select the Copy menu.

In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting.

Table 3-14 Copy menu

First level Second level Third level Values Description

Sides Original Sides 1-sided* Use to indicate whether

the original document
2-sided is printed on one or
both sides.

Output Sides 1-sided Use to indicate whether

the copies should be
2-sided printed on one or both
sides.

796 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-14 Copy menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Values Description

Color/Black (color Automatically detect* Select how the copy

printers only) should be printed.
Color
Automatically detect:
Black/Gray Prints color documents
in color, and black and
white documents in
black and white. For
mixed documents, the
printer will determine
whether to print in
color or black and
white.

Color: Prints
documents in color.

Black: Prints
documents in black
and white or grayscale.

Quick Sets and Load

Defaults
Save

Options Sides Original Sides 1-sided

2-sided

Output Sides 1-sided

2-sided

Color/Black (color Automatically detect* Select how the copy

printers only) should be printed.
Color
Automatically detect:
Black/Gray Prints color documents
in color, and black and
white documents in
black and white. For
mixed documents, the
printer will determine
whether to print in
color or black and
white.

Color: Prints
documents in color.

Black: Prints
documents in black
and white or grayscale.

Copy menu 797

 Table 3-14 Copy menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Values Description

Watermark None* Use this feature to add

a watermark to the
Text document

Secure ● Text: Text is placed

at the center of
the page.

● Secure:
Background text
and pattern that
is barely visible on
the first copy of a
document.

Stamps Top Left Select up to six

preset positions for a
Top Center stamp and configure
the content that will
Top Right be printed there.
Some positions might
Bottom Left require selecting the
stamp from a list of
Bottom Center predefined options.

Bottom Right

798 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-14 Copy menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Values Description

Image Overlay Add New Image Use this feature to add

an image to each page
None* of a copy job.

After scanning and

saving the desired
image from the control
panel, this image will
be placed behind the
content on each page
of the copy job.

NOTE: To use this

feature, the images
must be scanned from
the scanner glass.

Follow these steps to

copy using an overlay
image.

1. Touch Image
Overlay, touch
Add New Image,
and then follow
the on-screen
instructions to
scan the desired
image from the
scanner glass.

TIP: For best

results, use the
same paper size
and the same
orientation for the
saved image and
the copy job.

2. Select the saved

image that you
want to add to
each page of the
copy job.

3. Start the copy

job, or select the
Preview option
to preview the
output.

Staple None* Sets the position of the

staple on the page.
Top left angled

Two left

Two to

Top right angled

Two right

Top left or right

Copy menu 799

 Table 3-14 Copy menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Values Description

Hole Punch None*

Three left

Two left

Three top

Two top

Three right

Two right

Two bottom

Four left

Four right

Four left or top

C-fold Max sheets folded Controls the C-fold

together action of the booklet
maker.
Inward fold; opens left
or up

Inward fold; opens right

or down

Outward fold; opens

left or up

Outward fold; opens

right or down

Scan mode Standard Document Book Mode allows the

user to scan pages
Book Mode from a book.

2–sided ID 2–sided ID allows the

user to scan both sides
of an identification
card onto one sheet.

800 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-14 Copy menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Values Description

Reduce/Enlarge Automatic* Use to scale the

size of the document
Manual up or down. Select
one of the predefined
● 25% percentages, or select
the Scaling field and
● 50% type a percentage
between 25 and
● 63% (Letter to 400. The Auto option
Statement) automatically scales
the image to fit the
● 64% (11x17 to paper size in the tray.
Letter)
NOTE: To reduce the
● 77% (11x17 to image, select a scaling
Legal) percentage that is less
than 100. To enlarge the
● 78% (Legal to image, select a scaling
Letter) percentage that is
greater than 100.
● 85% (Letter to
Exec)

● 100% (Letter to
Legal)

● 105% (Exec to
Letter)

● 122% (Legal to
11x17)

● 131% (Letter to
11x17)

● 131% (Statement
to Letter)

● 150%

● 200%

● 400%

● Custom1

● Custom2

Image Shift Off* Use this feature to

shift the content of
Automatically center the page. This is useful
for moving the image
Manual away from punched
holes, staples, folds, or
binding edges.

Original Size Select from a list of Describes the page

sizes that the printer size of the original
supports. document.

Copy menu 801

 Table 3-14 Copy menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Values Description

Paper Selection Paper Size For the best color and

image quality, select
Paper Type the appropriate paper
type from the control
Paper Tray panel menu or from the
print driver.

Booklet Booklet Format (Checkbox) Use to copy two or

more pages onto one
sheet of paper so you
can fold the sheets
in the center to form
a booklet. The printer
arranges the pages
in the correct order.
For example, if the
original document has
eight pages, the printer
prints pages 1 and 8 on
the same sheet.

Content Orientation Portrait* For some features to

work correctly, you
Landscape must specify the way
the content of the
original document is
placed on the page.
Portrait orientation
means the short edge
of the page is along
the top. Landscape
orientation means the
long edge of the page
is along the top. In
the Orientation area,
select whether the
original document has
a portrait or landscape
orientation.

Pages per Sheet One (1) Copies multiple pages

onto one sheet of
Two (2) paper.

Four (4) NOTE: Before using

this screen, use the
Content Orientation
screen to describe the
original document
orientation.

Image Adjustment Sharpness Adjust the Sharpness

setting to clarify or
soften the image. For
example, increasing the
sharpness could make
text appear crisper,
but decreasing it could
make photographs
appear smoother.

802 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-14 Copy menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Values Description

Darkness Use to improve the

overall quality of the
copy.

Adjust the Darkness

setting to increase or
decrease the amount
of white and black in
the colors.

Contrast Adjust the Contrast

setting to increase
or decrease the
difference between the
lightest and darkest
color on the page.

Background Cleanup Adjust the Background

Cleanup setting if you
are having trouble
copying a faint image.

Automatic Tone

Auto Paper Color

Removal

Optimize Text/Picture Text Use this setting to

optimize the output for
Mixed* a particular type of
content.
Printed picture
Use Text for documents
Photograph that contain mostly
text. This option is
also best suited for
scanning documents
with highlighter marks.

Use Mixed for

documents that
contain a mix of text
and graphics.

Use Printed picture

for line drawings
and preprinted images,
such as magazine
clippings or pages
from books. If you
see bands of irregular
intensity on copies,
try selecting Printed
picture to improve the
quality.

Use Photograph for

photographic prints.

Copy menu 803

 Table 3-14 Copy menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Values Description

Erase Edges Front Side Use this menu item

to remove blemishes,
● Top edge such as dark borders
or staple marks, by
● Bottom edge cleaning the specified
edges of the scanned
● Left edge image. In each of
the text boxes enter
● Right edge the measurements, in
millimeters or inches,
Back Side for how much of the top
edge, bottom edge, left
● Top edge edge, and right edge to
clean.
● Bottom edge

● Left edge

● Right edge

Collate Collate on (Sets in If you are making more

page order)* than one copy, select
the Collate on (Sets
Collate off (Pages in page order) option
grouped) to assemble the pages
in the correct order in
each set of copies.

Select the Collate off

(Pages grouped) option
to group the same
pages together. For
example, if you are
making five copies of
an original document
that has two pages,
all five first pages
would be grouped
together and all five
second pages would
be grouped together.

Blank Page Off* When enabled, blank

Suppression pages found in the
Suppress Blank Pages original document are
not included in the
output document.

Automatically Off* Enable this feature

Straighten prior to scanning
Automatically to automatically
Straighten on straighten the scanned
image when pages
are skewed during
scanning.

804 Chapter 3 Problem solving

 Table 3-14 Copy menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Values Description

Output Bin Automatically select

Output bin 1

Output bin 2

Alternate bin

Lower booklet bin

Standard bin

Upper bin

Middle bin

Scan menu
To display: At the printer control panel, select the Scan menu.

In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting.

Table 3-15 Scan menu

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Scan to Email File Type and File Type Select File Type and
Resolution Resolution to select the
● PDF* file format for the scanned
image. Each file type has
● PDF/A sub-settings, some of which
affect resolution and file size.
● JPEG

● TIFF

● MTIFF

● XPS

Resolution

● 600 dpi

● 400 dpi

● 200 dpi*

● 150 dpi

● 75 dpi

Quality and File Size

● Very Low (smaller file)

● Low

● Medium*

● High

● Very High (larger file)

Scan menu 805

 Table 3-15 Scan menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Original 1-sided* Use this feature to describe

Sides the layout for each side of the
2-sided original document

Pages Flip Up Use 1-sided for originals that

are printed on one side of the
page.

Use 2-sided for originals that

are printed on both sides of
the page.

Select Pages Flip Up for

originals that flip on the top/
bottom edge of the page,
such as calendars.

Color/Black Automatically detect color or If Automatically detect color

black or black is selected and the
current settings do not allow
Automatically detect color or scanning in black, pages will
gray be scanned in grayscale.

Color

Black/Gray

Black

Watermark None* Use this feature to add a

watermark to the document
Text
Text: Text is placed at the
center of the page.

Stamps Top Left Select up to six preset

positions for a stamp
Top Center and configure the content
that will be printed there.
Top Right Some positions might require
selecting the stamp from a
Bottom Left list of predefined options.

Bottom Center

Bottom Right

806 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-15 Scan menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Scan Mode Standard Document Use this feature to provide

information about the type of
Book document to be scanned and
to change the format of the
2-sided ID output.

Prompt for Additional Pages Use Standard Document

to scan regular documents
using default scan settings.

Use Prompt for Additional

Pages to create a single job
from multiple scans without
having to do a preview.

Use Book to scan the pages

of an open book and to print
the pages on separate sheets
of paper.

Use 2-sided ID to scan both

sides of an ID and print them
on one side of a sheet of
paper.

Original Size Select from a list of sizes that Describes the page size of
the printer supports. the original document.

Content Automatically detect For some features to work

Orientation correctly, you must specify
Portrait* the way the content of
the original document is
Landscape placed on the page. Portrait
orientation means the short
edge of the page is along the
top. Landscape orientation
means the long edge of the
page is along the top.

Use Automatically detect

when the format of the
original document is known
to specifically work with the
Automatically detect setting.
Using Automatically detect is
not recommended in other
circumstances.

Scan menu 807

 Table 3-15 Scan menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Image Sharpness Use this feature to improve

Adjustment the quality of the scanned
Darkness image.

Contrast Adjusting Sharpness clarifies

or soften the image.
Background Cleanup Increasing the sharpness
could make text appear
Automatic Tone crisper, but decreasing it
could make photographs
Auto Paper Color Removal appear smoother.

Adjusting Darkness
increases or decreases the
amount of white and black in
the colors.

Adjusting Contrast increases

or decreases the difference
between the lightest and
darkest color on the page.

Adjust Background Cleanup

to improve copying a faint
image.

Automatic Tone options

automatically adjusts
the Darkness, Contrast,
and Background Cleanup
settings.

The Auto Paper Color

Removal option dynamically
adjusts the color balance and
lightness of the background.
Slide left: Most white paper
with normal brightness is
output as white background
in the scanned output.
Slider right: Very colorful
paper/background colors are
converted to white in the
scanned output.

808 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-15 Scan menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Optimize Automatically detect Use this setting to optimize

Text/Picture the output for a particular
Text type of content.

Mixed* Use Text for documents that

contain mostly text. This
Printed Picture option is also best suited for
scanning documents with a
Photograph highlighter.

Use Mixed for documents

that contain a mix of text and
graphics.

Use Printed Picture for line

drawings and preprinted
images, such as magazine
clippings or pages from
books. If you see bands of
irregular intensity on copies,
try selecting Printed Picture
to improve the quality.

Use Photograph for

photographic prints.

Erase Edges Front Side Use this feature to remove

blemishes, such as dark
● Top Edge borders or staple marks, by
cleaning the specified edges
● Bottom Edge of the scanned image. In each
of the text boxes enter the
● Left Edge measurements, in millimeters
or inches, for how much of the
● Right Edge top edge, bottom edge, left
edge, and right edge to clean.
Back Side

● Top Edge

● Bottom Edge

● Left Edge

● Right Edge

Cropping Do not crop* Use this menu item to specify

Options a method to automatically
Crop to Paper crop the scan for digital
sending. Use the Crop to
Crop to Content Paper option to crop the scan
to the edge of the document
being scanned. Use the Crop
to Content option to scan the
smallest possible area that
has detectable content.

NOTE: The Crop to Paper

option is effective only when
you scan pages by using the
document feeder. It has an
unpredictable effect for
pages that you scan from the
glass.

Scan menu 809

 Table 3-15 Scan menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Automaticall Off* Enable this feature prior to

y Straighten scanning to automatically
Automatically Straighten straighten the scanned image
when pages are skewed
during scanning.

Blank Page Off* Use this feature to prevent

Suppression blank pages in the original
Suppress Blank Pages document from being
included in the output
document.

Create Off* Use this item to enable the

Multiple Files product to separate scanned
Maximum Pages Per File output into multiple files.

Blank Page Separator (E877, Touch the Create Multiple

E826, E785, E731 z bundles Files checkbox. Enter the
only) maximum number of pages
for each output file in the
Barcode Page Separator Maximum Pages Per File field.
(E877, E826, E785, E731 z
bundles only) When a file type that does
not support multiple pages
is selected, such as JPEG
or TIFF, this feature is
ignored. When scanning front
and back sides, two pages
are generated per original
document.

When scanning to email,

the configuration option that
specifies the maximum six of
the email also interacts with
this feature. In this case, the
more restrictive of the two
settings will take effect.

Notification Do Not Notify* Use this feature to receive

notification about the status
Notify When Job Completes of the sent document.

Notify Only If Job Fails ● SelectDo Not Notify to

turn off this feature

● Select Notify When Job

Completes to receive
notification for this job
only.

● Select Notify Only If

Job Fails to receive
notification only if
the job is not sent
successfully

Signing and Signing A digitally signed email

Encryption ensures the recipient that you
Encrypt sent this email. An encrypted
message can be opened only
by the recipient.

810 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-15 Scan menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Scan to Folder Paths

Network
Folder

File Name

Quick Sets
and Defaults

Options File Type and File Type Select File Type and
Resolution Resolution to select the
Resolution file format for the scanned
image. Each file type has
Quality and File Size sub-settings, some of which
affect resolution and file size.
High Compression (smaller
file)

PDF Encryption

Original 1-sided* Use this feature to describe

Sides the layout for each side of the
2-sided original document

Pages Flip Up Use 1-sided for originals that

are printed on one side of the
page.

Use 2-sided for originals that

are printed on both sides of
the page.

Select Pages Flip Up for

originals that flip on the top/
bottom edge of the page,
such as calendars.

Color/Black Automatically detect* Use to enable or disable color

scanning.
Color
Automatically detect:
Black/Gray Automatically scans
documents in color if at least
Black one page has color.

Color: Scans documents in

color.

Black/Gray: Scans
documents in grayscale.

Black: Scans documents in

black and white with a
compressed file size.

Scan menu 811

 Table 3-15 Scan menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Scan Mode Standard document* Use this feature to provide

information about the type of
Book document to be scanned and
to change the format of the
2-sided ID output

● Prompt for additional Use Standard document to

pages scan regular documents
using the default scan
settings.

Use Prompt for additional

pages to create a single job
from multiple scans without
having to do a preview.

Use Book to scan the pages

of an open book and to print
the pages on separate sheets
of paper.

Use 2-sided ID to scan both

sides of an ID and print them
on one side of a sheet of
paper.

Original Size Select from a list of Use to describe the page size
supported sizes. of the original document.

Content Orientation Portrait* For some features to work

Orientation correctly, you must specify
Landscape the way the content of
the original document is
placed on the page. Portrait
orientation means the short
edge of the page is along the
top. Landscape orientation
means the long edge of
the page is along the top.
In the Orientation area,
select whether the original
document has a portrait or
landscape orientation.

812 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-15 Scan menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Image Sharpness Use this feature to improve

Adjustment the quality of the scanned
Darkness image.

Contrast Adjusting Sharpness clarifies

or soften the image.
Background Cleanup Increasing the sharpness
could make text appear
crisper, but decreasing it
could make photographs
appear smoother.

Adjusting Darkness
increases or decreases the
amount of white and black in
the colors.

Adjusting Contrast increases

or decreases the difference
between the lightest and
darkest color on the page.

Adjust Background Cleanup

to improve copying a faint
image.

Contrast Adjust the Contrast setting

to increase or decrease
the difference between the
lightest and darkest color on
the page.

Background Adjust the Background

Cleanup Cleanup setting if you are
having trouble copying a faint
image.

Sharpness Adjust the Sharpness

setting to clarify or soften
the image. For example,
increasing the sharpness
could make text appear
crisper, but decreasing it
could make photographs
appear smoother.

Automatic The printer automatically

Tone adjusts the Darkness,
Contrast, and Background
Cleanup settings to the most
appropriate for the scanned
document.

Auto Paper
Color
Removal
(Flow models
only)

Default Select this to make the

selected Image Adjustment
setting the default value.

Scan menu 813

 Table 3-15 Scan menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Optimize Text Use this setting to optimize

Text/Picture the output for a particular
Mixed* type of content.

Printed picture Use Text for documents that

contain mostly text. This
Photograph option is also best suited
for scanning documents with
highlighter marks.

Use Mixed for documents

that contain a mix of text and
graphics.

Use Printed picture for line

drawings and preprinted
images, such as magazine
clippings or pages from
books. If you see bands of
irregular intensity on copies,
try selecting Printed picture
to improve the quality.

Use Photograph for

photographic prints.

Erase Edges Use inches Use this menu item to remove

blemishes, such as dark
Back side erase borders or staple marks, by
cleaning the specified edges
Front side erase of the scanned image. In each
of the text boxes enter the
measurements, in millimeters
or inches, for how much of the
top edge, bottom edge, left
edge, and right edge to clean.

Cropping Do not crop Use this menu item to

Options automatically crop the scan
Crop to content for digital sending. Use the
Crop to content option to
Crop to paper scan the smallest possible
area that has detectable
content.

Blank Page Off* Use to prevent blank pages

Suppression in the original document from
Suppress Blank being included in the output
document.

Automaticall Off* Enable this feature prior to

y Straighten scanning to automatically
Automatically Straighten straighten the scanned image
when pages are skewed
during scanning.

Multi-feed Off Use this feature to prevent

Detection multiple pages being fed
On* through the document feeder
during document scans.
● Automatically Retry
(E877. E826 z bundles
only)

814 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-15 Scan menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Create Off* Use this item to enable the

Multiple Files product to separate scanned
Maximum pages per file output into multiple files.

● White page Touch the Create Multiple

Files checkbox. Enter the
● Red/pink page maximum number of pages
for each output file in the
● Green page Maximum pages per file field.

● Yellow page When a file type that does

not support multiple pages
● Any color page is selected, such as JPEG
or TIFF, this feature is
ignored. When scanning front
and back sides, two pages
are generated per original
document.

When scanning to email,

the configuration option that
specifies the maximum size
of the email also interacts
with this feature. In this case,
the more restrictive of the two
settings will take effect.

Notification Do not notify Configure to receive

notification about the status
Notify when job completes of a sent document.

Notify only if job fails Do not notify: Turns off this

feature.

Notify when job completes:

Select to receive notification
for this job only.

Notify only if job fails: Select

to receive notification only
if the job is not sent
successfully.

Scan to USB Folder Path

Drive

File Name

Quick Set
Defaults

Options File Type and File Type Select File Type and
Resolution Resolution to select the
Resolution file format for the scanned
image. Each file type has
Quality and File Size sub-settings, some of which
affect resolution and file size.
High Compression (smaller
file)

PDF Encryption

Scan menu 815

 Table 3-15 Scan menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Original sides 1-sided Use to describe the layout

for each side of the
2-sided original document. First
select whether the original
document is printed on one
side or both sides. Then touch
the Orientation setting to
indicate whether the original
has portrait or landscape
orientation. If it is printed on
both sides, also select the
2-sided format that matches
the original document.

Color/Black Automatically detect* Use to enable or disable color

scanning.
Color
Automatically detect:
Black/Gray Automatically scans
documents in color if at least
Black one page has color.

Color: Scans documents in

color.

Black/Gray: Scans
documents in grayscale.

Black: Scans documents in

black and white with a
compressed file size.

Original Size Select from a list of Use to describe the page size
supported sizes. of the original document.

Content Automatically detect For some features to work

Orientation correctly, you must specify
Portrait* the way the content of
the original document is
Landscape placed on the page. Portrait
orientation means the short
edge of the page is along the
top. Landscape orientation
means the long edge of
the page is along the top.
In the Orientation area,
select whether the original
document has a portrait or
landscape orientation.

Use Automatically Detect

when the format of the
original document is known
to specifically work with the
Automatically Detect setting.
Using Automatically Detect is
not recommended in other
circumstances.

816 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-15 Scan menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Image Darkness Sharpness Use this feature to improve

Adjustment the quality of the scanned
Darkness image.

Contrast Adjusting Sharpness clarifies

or soften the image.
Background Cleanup Increasing the sharpness
could make text appear
Automatic tone crisper, but decreasing it
could make photographs
Auto Paper Color Removal appear smoother.

Adjusting Darkness
increases or decreases the
amount of white and black in
the colors.

Adjusting Contrast increases

or decreases the difference
between the lightest and
darkest color on the page.

Adjust Background Cleanup

to improve copying a faint
image.

Automatic Tone options

automatically adjusts
the Darkness, Contrast,
and Background Cleanup
settings.

The Auto Paper Color

Removal option dynamically
adjusts the color balance and
lightness of the background.
Slide left: Most white paper
with normal brightness is
output as white background
in the scanned output.
Slider right: Very colorful
paper/background colors are
converted to white in the
scanned output.

Contrast Adjust the Contrast setting

to increase or decrease
the difference between the
lightest and darkest color on
the page.

Background Adjust the Background

Cleanup Cleanup setting if you are
having trouble copying a faint
image.

Sharpness Adjust the Sharpness

setting to clarify or soften
the image. For example,
increasing the sharpness
could make text appear
crisper, but decreasing it
could make photographs
appear smoother.

Scan menu 817

 Table 3-15 Scan menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Automatic The printer automatically

Tone adjusts the Darkness,
Contrast, and Background
Cleanup settings to the most
appropriate for the scanned
document.

Auto Paper
Color
Removal
(Flow models
only)

Default Select this to make the

selected Image Adjustment
setting the default value.

Optimize Manually Adjust* Use to optimize the output for

Text/Picture a particular type of content.
Text You can optimize the output
for text, printed pictures, or a
Printed picture mixture.

Photograph Manually Adjust: Use to

manually optimize the setting
for text or for pictures.

Text: Use to optimize the text

portion of the copy when text
and/or pictures are on the
original.

Printed picture: Use for

line drawings and preprinted
images, such as magazine
clippings or pages from
books.

Photograph: Best suited for

making copies of printed
pictures.

Erase Edges Use inches Use this menu item to remove

blemishes, such as dark
Back side erase borders or staple marks, by
cleaning the specified edges
Front side erase of the scanned image. In each
of the text boxes enter the
measurements, in millimeters
or inches, for how much of the
top edge, bottom edge, left
edge, and right edge to clean.

Cropping Do not crop Use this menu item to

Options automatically crop the scan
Crop to content for digital sending. Use the
Crop to content option to
Crop to paper scan the smallest possible
area that has detectable
content.

818 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-15 Scan menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Automaticall Off* Enable this feature prior to

y Straighten scanning to automatically
Automatically Straighten straighten the scanned image
when pages are skewed
during scanning.

Blank Page Off* Use to prevent blank pages

Suppression in the original document from
Suppress Blank Pages being included in the output
document.

Multi-feed Off Use this feature to prevent

Detection multiple pages being fed
On* through the document feeder
during document scans.
● Automatically retry
(E877, E826 z bundles
only)

Create Off* Use this item to enable the

Multiple Files product to separate scanned
Maximum pages per file output into multiple files.

Blank page separator (E877, Touch the Create Multiple

E826, E785, E731 z bundles Files checkbox. Enter the
only) maximum number of pages
for each output file in the
● White page Maximum pages per file field.

● Red/pink page When a file type that does

not support multiple pages
● Green page is selected, such as JPEG
or TIFF, this feature is
● Yellow page ignored. When scanning front
and back sides, two pages
● Any color page are generated per original
document.
Barcode page separator
(E877, E826, E785, E731 z When scanning to email,
bundles only) the configuration option that
specifies the maximum size
of the email also interacts
with this feature. In this case,
the more restrictive of the two
settings will take effect.

Notification Do not notify Configure to receive

notification about the status
Notify when job completes of a sent document.

Notify only if job fails Do not notify: Turns off this

feature.

Notify when job completes:

Select to receive notification
for this job only.

Notify only if job fails: Select

to receive notification only
if the job is not sent
successfully.

Scan menu 819

 Table 3-15 Scan menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Include Select Include Thumbnail to

Thumbnail receive a thumbnail image of
the first page of the job in
your notification.

Scan to Job Sides Original Sides

Storage
● 1-sided

● 2-sided

Output Sides

● 1-sided

● 2-sided

Color/Black Automatically detect Use to enable or disable color

scanning.
Color*
Automatically detect:
Black/Gray Automatically scans
documents in color if at least
Black one page has color.

Color: Scans documents in

color.

Black/Gray: Scans
documents in grayscale.

Black: Scans documents in

black and white with a
compressed file size.

Scan Mode Standard document*

Book

2-sided ID

Reduce/ Automatic*
Enlarge
Manual

Image Shift Off*

Automatically center

Manual

Original Size Select from a list of Use to describe the page size
supported sizes. of the original document.

Paper Paper Size

Selection
Paper Type

Paper Tray

Booklet Booklet Format

820 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-15 Scan menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Content Automatically detect For some features to work

Orientation correctly, you must specify
Portrait* the way the content of
the original document is
Landscape placed on the page. Portrait
orientation means the short
edge of the page is along the
top. Landscape orientation
means the long edge of the
page is along the top.

Use Automatically detect

when the format of the
original document is known
to specifically work with the
Automatically detect setting.
Using Automatically detect is
not recommended in other
circumstances.

Pages per One

Sheet
Two

Four (right, then down)

Four (down, then right)

Image Sharpness Use this feature to improve

Adjustment the quality of the scanned
Darkness image.

Contrast Adjust Sharpness to clarify

or soften the image.
Background Cleanup Increasing the sharpness
could make text appear
crisper, but decreasing it
could make photographs
appear smoother.

Adjusting Darkness
increases or decreases the
amount of white and black in
the colors.

Adjusting Contrast increases

or decreases the difference
between the lightest and
darkest color on the page.

Adjust Background Cleanup

to improve copying a faint
image.

Scan menu 821

 Table 3-15 Scan menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Optimize Automatically detect Use this setting to optimize

Text/Picture the output for a particular
Text type of content.

Mixed* Use Text for documents that

contain mostly text. This
Printed picture option is also best suited
for scanning documents with
Photograph highlighter marks.

Use Mixed for documents

that contain a mix of text and
graphics.

Use Printed picture for line

drawings and preprinted
images, such as magazine
clippings or pages from
books. If you see bands of
irregular intensity on copies,
try selecting Printed picture
to improve the quality.

Use Photograph for

photographic prints.

Erase Edges Front Side Use this feature to remove

blemishes, such as dark
● Top Edge borders or staple marks, by
cleaning the specified edges
● Bottom Edge of the scanned image. In each
of the text boxes enter the
● Left Edge measurements, in millimeters
or inches, for how much of the
● Right Edge top edge, bottom edge, left
edge, and right edge to clean.
Back Side

● Top Edge

● Bottom Edge

● Left Edge

● Right Edge

Collate Collate*

Collate off

Blank Page Off* Use this feature to prevent

Suppression blank pages in the original
Suppress Blank Pages document from being
included in the output
document.

Automaticall Off* Enable this feature prior to

y Straighten scanning to automatically
Automatically Straighten on straighten the scanned image
when pages are skewed
during scanning.

822 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-15 Scan menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Multi-feed Off Use this feature to prevent

Detection multiple pages being fed
On* through the document feeder
during document scans.
● Automatically Retry
(E877. E826 z bundles
only)

Scan to Save Use this feature to save

Sharepoint Settings the current settings as the
default settings for an app or
to create a new Quick Set.
First configure the desired
options. Then touch Save
and choose to either save
the current settings as the
default settings for the app or
as a new Quick Set.

File Type and File Type Select File Type and

Resolution Resolution to select the
Resolution file format for the scanned
image. Each file type has
Quality and File Size sub-settings, some of which
affect resolution and file size.
High Compression (smaller
file)

PDF Encryption

Original Auto (keep sides with content) Use this feature to describe
Sides the layout for each side of the
1-sided* original document

2-sided Use 1-sided for originals that

are printed on one side of the
Pages Flip Up page.

Use 2-sided for originals that

are printed on both sides of
the page.

Select Pages Flip Up for

originals that flip on the top/
bottom edge of the page,
such as calendars.

Color/Black Automatically detect color or If Automatically detect color

black or black is selected and the
current settings do not allow
Automatically detect color or scanning in black, pages will
gray be scanned in grayscale.

Color

Black/Gray

Black

Scan menu 823

 Table 3-15 Scan menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Stamps Top Left Select up to six preset

positions for a stamp
Top Center and configure the content
that will be printed there.
Top Right Some positions might require
selecting the stamp from a
Bottom Left list of predefined options.

Bottom Center

Bottom Right

Scan Mode Standard Document Use this feature to provide

information about the type of
Book document to be scanned and
to change the format of the
2-sided ID output.

Prompt for Additional Pages Use Standard Document

to scan regular documents
using default scan settings.

Use Prompt for Additional

Pages to create a single job
from multiple scans without
having to do a preview.

Use Book to scan the pages

of an open book and to print
the pages on separate sheets
of paper.

Use 2-sided ID to scan both

sides of an ID and print them
on one side of a sheet of
paper.

Content Automatically detect For some features to work

Orientation correctly, you must specify
Portrait* the way the content of
the original document is
Landscape placed on the page. Portrait
orientation means the short
edge of the page is along the
top. Landscape orientation
means the long edge of the
page is along the top.

Use Automatically detect

when the format of the
original document is known
to specifically work with the
Automatically detect setting.
Using Automatically detect is
not recommended in other
circumstances.

824 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-15 Scan menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Image Sharpness Use this feature to improve

Adjustment the quality of the scanned
Darkness image.

Contrast Adjusting Sharpness clarifies

or soften the image.
Background Cleanup Increasing the sharpness
could make text appear
Automatic tone crisper, but decreasing it
could make photographs
Auto Paper Color Removal appear smoother.

Adjusting Darkness
increases or decreases the
amount of white and black in
the colors.

Adjusting Contrast increases

or decreases the difference
between the lightest and
darkest color on the page.

Adjust Background Cleanup

to improve copying a faint
image.

Automatic Tone options

automatically adjusts
the Darkness, Contrast,
and Background Cleanup
settings.

The Auto Paper Color

Removal option dynamically
adjusts the color balance and
lightness of the background.
Slide left: Most white paper
with normal brightness is
output as white background
in the scanned output.
Slider right: Very colorful
paper/background colors are
converted to white in the
scanned output.

Scan menu 825

 Table 3-15 Scan menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Optimize Automatically detect Use this setting to optimize

Text/Picture the output for a particular
Text type of content.

Mixed* Use Text for documents that

contain mostly text. This
Printed picture option is also best suited for
scanning documents with a
Photograph highlighter.

Use Mixed for documents

that contain a mix of text and
graphics.

Use Printed picture for line

drawings and preprinted
images, such as magazine
clippings or pages from
books. If you see bands of
irregular intensity on copies,
try selecting Printed Picture
to improve the quality.

Use Photograph for

photographic prints.

Erase Edges Front Side Use this feature to remove

blemishes, such as dark
● Top Edge borders or staple marks, by
cleaning the specified edges
● Bottom Edge of the scanned image. In each
of the text boxes enter the
● Left Edge measurements, in millimeters
or inches, for how much of the
● Right Edge top edge, bottom edge, left
edge, and right edge to clean.
Back Side

● Top Edge

● Bottom Edge

● Left Edge

● Right Edge

Cropping Do not crop* Use this menu item to specify

Options a method to automatically
Crop to Paper crop the scan for digital
sending. Use the Crop to
Crop to Content Paper option to crop the scan
to the edge of the document
being scanned. Use the Crop
to Content option to scan the
smallest possible area that
has detectable content.

NOTE: The Crop to Paper

option is effective only when
you scan pages by using the
document feeder. It has an
unpredictable effect for
pages that you scan from the
glass.

826 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-15 Scan menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Blank Page Off* Use this feature to prevent

Suppression blank pages in the original
Suppress Blank Pages document from being
included in the output
document.

Create Off* Use this item to enable the

Multiple Files product to separate scanned
Maximum pages per file output into multiple files.

Blank page separator (E877, Touch the Create Multiple

E826, E785, E731 z bundles Files checkbox. Enter the
only) maximum number of pages
for each output file in the
Barcode page separator Maximum Pages Per File field.
(E877, E826, E785, E731 z
bundles only) When a file type that does
not support multiple pages
is selected, such as JPEG
or TIFF, this feature is
ignored. When scanning front
and back sides, two pages
are generated per original
document.

When scanning to email,

the configuration option that
specifies the maximum six of
the email also interacts with
this feature. In this case, the
more restrictive of the two
settings will take effect.

Notification Do not notify* Use this feature to receive

notification about the status
Notify When Job Completes of the sent document.

Notify Only If Job Fails ● Select Do not notify to

turn off this feature

● Select Notify When Job

Completes to receive
notification for this job
only.

● Select Notify Only If

Job Fails to receive
notification only if
the job is not sent
successfully

Remote Scan Use the Remote Scan

Request Request app to scan and
send documents requested
by a remote computer.

Remote scans are initiated on

a computer with applications
such as TWAIN Software
or other AirPrint Compatible
devices

Scan menu 827

 Table 3-15 Scan menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Scan+ Common Scan Redact and Sign Scan Shortcuts can be used
Shortcuts to quickly set up a job for
OCR specialty tasks.

Document Separation

Barcode Separation

Sticky Notes and Envelopes

2-sided ID

Auto Sense Fastest Scan Speeds Auto Sense Presets make it

Preset easy to optimize a scan job
Best Productivity for fastest scan speeds or
(Recommended) best productivity.

● Fastest Scan Speeds

disables some
automatic features,
which requires less
image processing and
allows scanning at
the fastest speeds
available.

● Best Productivity
enables several
automatic features,
including automatic
sides, automatic content
orientation, automatic
image straightening,
and automatic image
optimization.

NOTE: Unlike Quick Sets,

Auto Sense Preset presets do
not affect destinations and
recipients.

Watermark None* Use this feature to add a

watermark to the document
Text
● Text: Text is placed at the
center of the page.

Stamps Top Left Select up to six preset

positions for a stamp
Top Center and configure the content
that will be printed there.
Top Right Some positions might require
selecting the stamp from a
Bottom Left list of predefined options.

Bottom Center

Bottom Right

828 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-15 Scan menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Notification Do not notify* Use this feature to receive

notification about the status
Notify When Job Completes of the sent document.

Notify Only If Job Fails ● Select Do not notify to

turn off this feature

● Select Notify When Job

Completes to receive
notification for this job
only.

● Select Notify Only If

Job Fails to receive
notification only if
the job is not sent
successfully

Scan Color/Black Automatically detect color or If Automatically detect color

black or black is selected and the
current settings do not allow
Automatically detect color or scanning in black, pages will
gray be scanned in grayscale.

Color

Black/Gray

Black

Create Off* Use this item to enable the

Multiple Files product to separate scanned
Maximum pages per file output into multiple files.

Blank page separator Touch the Create Multiple

Files check box. Enter the
Barcode page separator maximum number of pages
for each output file in the
Maximum Pages Per File field.

When a file type that does

not support multiple pages
is selected, such as JPEG
or TIFF, this feature is
ignored. When scanning front
and back sides, two pages
are generated per original
document.

When scanning to email,

the configuration option that
specifies the maximum size
of the email also interacts
with this feature. In this case,
the more restrictive of the two
settings will take effect.

Signing and Signing A digitally signed email

Encryption ensures the recipient that you
Encrypt sent this email. An encrypted
message can be opened only
by the recipient.

Scan menu 829

 Table 3-15 Scan menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Cropping Do not crop* Use this menu item to specify

Options a method to automatically
Crop to Paper crop the scan for digital
sending. Use the Crop to
Crop to Content Paper option to crop the scan
to the edge of the document
being scanned. Use the Crop
to Contentoption to scan the
smallest possible area that
has detectable content.

NOTE: The Crop to Paper

option is effective only when
you scan pages by using the
document feeder. It has an
unpredictable effect for
pages that you scan from the
glass.

Copy Number of Copies (1 to 9999) Use this feature to set the

Copies number of printed copies.

Output Sides 1-sided* Use this feature to set the

layout and format for the
2-sided output.

Pages flip-up Select from the following

options:

● Use 1-sided for originals

that are printed on one
side of the page.

● Use 2-sided for originals

that are printed on both
sides of the page.

● Select Pages flip-up for

originals othat flip on the
top/bottom edge of the
page, such as calendars.

Color/Black Automatically detect* Automatically detect: Prints

color documents in color, and
Color black and white documents
in black and white. For mixed
Black/Gray documents, the product will
determine whether to print in
color or black and white.

Color: Prints documents in

color.

Black/Gray: Prints documents

in grayscale.

830 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-15 Scan menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Paper Paper Size Use this feature to select the

Selection paper for the job.
Paper Type
Use Paper Size or Paper
Paper Tray Type to enable the printer
to automatically find the
selected paper size or type.

Use Paper Tray to select a

source tray. Depending on the
administrator's setting, the
product will either print from
that tray first, or it will limit
printing from that tray.

Fax Resolution Standard (100 x 200dpi) Select the resolution for

outgoing faxes. If you
Fine (200 x 200dpi) increase the resolution, faxes
might be clearer but they
Superfine (300 x 300dpi) could transmit more slowly.

Auto Sense Original Auto (keep sides with content) Use this feature to describe
Sides the layout for each side of the
1-sided* original document

2-sided Use 1-sided for originals that

are printed on one side of the
Pages Flip Up page.

Use 2-sided for originals that

are printed on both sides of
the page.

Select Pages Flip Up for

originals that flip on the top/
bottom edge of the page,
such as calendars.

Original Size Select from a list of Use to describe the page size
supported sizes. of the original document.

Content Automatically detect For some features to work

Orientation correctly, you must specify
Portrait* the way the content of
the original document is
Landscape placed on the page. Portrait
orientation means the short
edge of the page is along the
top. Landscape orientation
means the long edge of the
page is along the top.

Use Automatically detect

when the format of the
original document is known
to specifically work with the
Automatically detect setting.
Using Automatically detect is
not recommended in other
circumstances.

Scan menu 831

 Table 3-15 Scan menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Image Sharpness Use this feature to improve

Adjustment the quality of the scanned
Darkness image.

Contrast Adjusting Sharpness clarifies

or soften the image.
Background Cleanup Increasing the sharpness
could make text appear
Automatic Tone crisper, but decreasing it
could make photographs
Auto Paper Color Removal appear smoother.

Adjusting Darkness
increases or decreases the
amount of white and black in
the colors.

Adjusting Contrast increases

or decreases the difference
between the lightest and
darkest color on the page.

Adjust Background Cleanup

to improve copying a faint
image.

Automatic Tone options

automatically adjusts
the Darkness, Contrast,
and Background Cleanup
settings.

The Auto Paper Color

Removal option dynamically
adjusts the color balance and
lightness of the background.
Slide left: Most white paper
with normal brightness is
output as white background
in the scanned output.
Slider right: Very colorful
paper/background colors are
converted to white in the
scanned output.

832 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-15 Scan menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Optimize Automatically detect Use this setting to optimize

Text/Picture the output for a particular
Text type of content.

Mixed* Use Text for documents that

contain mostly text. This
Printed picture option is also best suited for
scanning documents with a
Photograph highlighter.

Use Mixed for documents

that contain a mix of text and
graphics.

Use Printed picture for line

drawings and preprinted
images, such as magazine
clippings or pages from
books. If you see bands of
irregular intensity on copies,
try selecting Printed Picture
to improve the quality.

Use Photograph for

photographic prints.

Automaticall Off* Enable this feature prior to

y Straighten scanning to automatically
Automatically Straighten straighten the scanned image
when pages are skewed
during scanning.

Multi-feed Off Use this feature to prevent

Detection multiple pages being fed
On* through the document feeder
during document scans.
● Automatically Retry
(E877. E826 z bundles
only)

Blank Page Off* Use this feature to prevent

Suppression blank pages in the original
Suppress Blank Pages document from being
included in the output
document.

Advanced File Type and File Type Select File Type and
Resolution Resolution to select the
Resolution file format for the scanned
image. Each file type has
Quality and File Size sub-settings, some of which
affect resolution and file size.
High Compression (smaller
file)

DF EncryptionP

Scan menu 833

 Table 3-15 Scan menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Scan Mode Standard Document Use this feature to provide

information about the type of
Book document to be scanned and
to change the format of the
2-sided ID output.

Prompt for Additional Pages Use Standard Document

to scan regular documents
using default scan settings.

Use Prompt for Additional

Pages to create a single job
from multiple scans without
having to do a preview.

Use Book to scan the pages

of an open book and to print
the pages on separate sheets
of paper.

Use 2-sided ID to scan both

sides of an ID and print them
on one side of a sheet of
paper.

Erase Edges Front Side Use this feature to remove

blemishes, such as dark
● Top Edge borders or staple marks, by
cleaning the specified edges
● Bottom Edge of the scanned image. In each
of the text boxes enter the
● Left Edge measurements, in millimeters
or inches, for how much of the
● Right Edge top edge, bottom edge, left
edge, and right edge to clean.
Back Side

● Top Edge

● Bottom Edge

● Left Edge

● Right Edge

Fax menu (when a fax option is installed)

To display: At the printer control panel, select the Fax menu.

In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting.

Table 3-16 Fax menu (fax models only)

First level Second level Third level Values Description

Dialing Prefix

Fax Recipients

Quick Sets and

Defaults

834 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-16 Fax menu (fax models only) (continued)

First level Second level Third level Values Description

Options Original Sides 1-sided* Use to describe

the layout for each
2-sided side of the original
document. First select
whether the original
document is printed
on one side or both
sides. Then touch the
Orientation setting to
indicate whether the
original has portrait or
landscape orientation.
If it is printed on both
sides, also select the
2-sided format that
matches the original
document.

Watermark None* Use this feature to add

a watermark to the
Text document.

● Watermark Text ● Text: Text is placed

at the center of
● Text Font the page.

● Text Size NOTE: Flow models

only.
● Text Color

Stamps None* Select up to six

preset positions for a
Top Left stamp and configure
the content that will
Top Center be printed there.
Some positions might
Top Right require selecting the
stamp from a list of
Bottom Left predefined options.

Bottom Center NOTE: Flow models

only.
Bottom Right

Resolution Standard (100 x Select the resolution

200dpi)* for outgoing faxes.
If you increase the
Fine (200 x 200dpi) resolution, faxes might
be clearer but they
Superfine (300 x could transmit more
300dpi) slowly. Some file types,
for example a file that
will be processed with
OCR, require a specific
resolution. When these
file types are selected,
the Resolution setting
might be automatically
changed to a valid
value.

Original Size Select from a list of Use to describe the

sizes that the printer page size of the
supports. original document.

Fax menu (when a fax option is installed) 835

 Table 3-16 Fax menu (fax models only) (continued)

First level Second level Third level Values Description

Content Orientation Orientation Portrait* For some features to

work correctly, you
Landscape must specify the way
the content of the
original document is
placed on the page.

Portrait: This setting

means the short edge
of the page is along the
top.

Landscape: This
setting means the long
edge of the page is
along the top.

Image Adjustment Sharpness Use to improve the

overall quality of
Darkness the copy. Adjust
the darkness and
Contrast sharpness, and you
can use the
Background Cleanup Background Cleanup
setting to remove
Automatic tone faint images from
the background or
Auto Paper Color to remove a light
Removal background color.

Adjust the Darkness

setting to increase or
decrease the amount
of white and black in
the colors.

Adjust the Contrast

setting to increase
or decrease the
difference between the
lightest and darkest
color on the page.

Adjust the Background

Cleanup setting if you
are having trouble
copying a faint image.

Adjust the Sharpness

setting to clarify or
soften the image. For
example, increasing
the sharpness could
make text appear
crisper, but decreasing
it could make
photographs appear
smoother.

836 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-16 Fax menu (fax models only) (continued)

First level Second level Third level Values Description

Optimize Text/Picture Manually Adjust* Optimize For: Optimizes the output

for a particular type
Automatically detect Text of content. You can
optimize the output for
NOTE: Flow models Mixed text, printed pictures, or
only. a mixture.
Printed picture
Manually Adjust: Use to
Photograph manually optimize the
setting for text or for
pictures.

Text: Use to optimize

the text portion of the
copy where text and/or
pictures are on the
original.

Printed picture: Use

for line drawings
and preprinted images,
such as magazine
clippings or pages
from books.

Photograph: Best
suited for making
copies of printed
pictures.

Fax Line Selection Automatic* HP MFP Analog Dual

Fax 810 Accessory
Line 1 needs to be installed

Line 2

Blank Page Disabled* Prevents blank pages

Suppression in the original
Enabled document from being
included in the output
document.

Automatically Off* Enable this feature

Straighten prior to scanning to
Automatically automically straighten
Straighten* the scanned image
when pages are
skewed during
scanning.

Fax menu (when a fax option is installed) 837

 Table 3-16 Fax menu (fax models only) (continued)

First level Second level Third level Values Description

Notification Do not notify* Use to receive

notification about the
Notify when job status of a sent
completes document.

Notify only if job fails Do Not Notify: Turns off

this feature.

Notify When Job

Completes: Select to
receive notification for
this job only.

Notify Only If Job

Fails: Select to receive
notification only if
the job is not sent
successfully.

Print menu
To display: At the printer control panel, select the Print menu.

In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting.

Table 3-17 Print Options menu

First level Second level Values Description

Print from Job Storage Stored Job to Print Untitled Print a job stored on the
printer.
Stored Faxes

Print from USB Drive USB File to Print Choose file to print on USB Print a job stored on a USB
drive. drive.

Fax Polling Fax Polling Number Use the Fax Polling app to
print faxes sent to another fax
machine.

Supplies menu
To display: At the printer control panel, select the Supplies menu.

In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting.

Table 3-18 Supplies menu

First level Values Description

Supplies Summary

Black Cartridge Status

Cyan Cartridge Order HP Part

Magenta Cartridge Pages Printed

Yellow Cartridge Approximate Pages Remaining

838 Chapter 3 Problem solving

 Table 3-18 Supplies menu (continued)

First level Values Description

Toner Collection Unit Status

Document Feeder Kit Order HP Part

Stapler 1

Trays menu
To display: At the printer control panel, select the Trays menu.

In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting.

Table 3-19 Trays menu

First level Second level Values Description

Tray 1 Size Select paper size from a list Choose the paper size for the
of supported sizes. tray
Tray 2–x

Type Select paper type from a list Choose the paper type for
of supported types. the tray.

Troubleshooting menu
To display: At the product control panel, select the Support Tools menu, and then select the
Troubleshooting menu.

In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting.

Trays menu 839

 Table 3-20 Troubleshooting

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Configuration/ ● Settings Select

Status Pages Menu Map the configuration/
Status reports to
● Current review, and then
Settings touch the Print or
Page View button.

● Configuration
Page

● How to
Connect
Page

● Supplies
Status Page

● sage Page

● File Directory
Page

● Web Services
Status Page

● Color Usage
Job Log

Reports

Other Pages ● Demonstratio

n Page

● RGB Samples

● CMYK
Samples

● PCL Font List

● PS Font List

Event Log Print Prints the 50 most

recent events in
the Event Log.
For each event,
the printed log
shows the error
number, page
count, error code,
and description or
personality.

Paper Path Page View Shows how many

pages were
Print printed from each
tray.

840 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-20 Troubleshooting (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Fax (Fax is Fax T.30 Trace Print T.30 Report Print Use to print
optional) or configure the
fax T.30 trace
report. T.30 is
the standard
that specifies
handshaking,
protocols, and
error correction
between fax
machines.

When to Print Never Configure the

Report automatically T.30 report to
print* print after certain
events. You can
Print after every choose to print
fax the report after
every fax job, every
Print only after fax fax job sent, every
send jobs fax job received,
every send error,
Print after any fax or every receive
error error.

Print only after fax

send errors

Print only after fax

receive errors

Fax V.34 Normal* Use to disable

V.34 modulations if
Off several fax failures
have occurred
or if phone line
conditions require
it.

Fax Speaker Mode Normal* Used by a

technician to
Diagnostic evaluate and
diagnose fax
issues by listening
to the sounds of
fax modulations

Fax Log Entries On The standard fax

log includes basic
Off* information such
as the time and
whether the fax
was successful.
The detailed
fax log shows
the intermediate
results of the redial
process not shown
in the standard fax
log.

Print Quality Pages Print Fuser Test Print Use to print pages
Page that help you
resolve problems
with print quality.

Troubleshooting menu 841

 Table 3-20 Troubleshooting (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Diagnostic Tests

Continuous Scan 2-sided

Run Fax Test Start Use this menu

to perform a
test on specific
components within
the product to
determine whether
the components
are functioning
correctly.

Retrieve Insert a US drive Create files

Diagnostic Data into the USB that contain
port. The exported information about
data might the product that
contain personally can help identify
identifiable the cause of
information. problems.

Generate Debug Start

Data

Maintenance menu
Learn about the Maintenance menu.

Backup/Restore menu
To display: At the product control panel, select Support Tools and then Maintenance, and then select the
Backup/Restore menu.

In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting.

Table 3-21 Backup/Restore menu

First level Second level Third level Values Description

Backup Data Enable Scheduled Backup Time Enter a time

Backups

Days Between Enter the number of

Backups days

Backup Now

Export Last Backup

Restore Data Insert a USB drive that

contains the backup
file.

Calibration/Cleaning menu
To display: At the product control panel, select the Maintenance menu, and then select the Calibrate/
Cleaning menu.

842 Chapter 3 Problem solving

In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting.

Table 3-22 Calibrate/Cleaning menu

First level Second level Values Description

Calibration/Cleaning Page Print Use to process the cleaning

page that was created by
using the Create Cleaning
Page menu. The process
takes up to 1.5 minutes.

Calibration Start The product automatically

calibrates itself at various
times. However, you can
calibrate the product
immediately if you see
problems with print quality.
Use this feature to perform a
full calibration, which can take
up to three minutes. Use this
calibration if the color layers
seem to be shifted on the
page.

Before calibrating the

product, make sure that the
Ready indicator displays on
the control-panel display. If
a job is in progress, the
calibration occurs when that
job is complete.

Calibration/Cleaning menu 843

 Table 3-22 Calibrate/Cleaning menu (continued)

First level Second level Values Description

Delay Calibration at Wake/ No Delay Controls the timing of power-

Power On on calibration when the
Delay 15 minutes product wakes up or is turned
on.

Wake: Select if you are not

using the feature and want to
print jobs immediately when
the product wakes up or is
turned on, before calibration
begins.

No: The product will calibrate

immediately when it wakes up
or is turned on. The product
will not print any jobs until it
finishes calibrating.

Yes: Enables the product that

is asleep to accept print
jobs before it calibrates. It
might start calibrating before
it has printed all the jobs
it has received. This option
allows quicker printing when
coming out of sleep mode or
when you turn the product
on, but print quality might be
reduced.

NOTE: For the best results,

allow the product to calibrate
before printing. Print jobs
performed before calibration
might not be of the highest
quality.

USB Firmware Upgrade menu

To display: At the product control panel, select the Maintenance menu, and then select the USB
Firmware Upgrade menu.

Insert a USB storage device with a firmware upgrade bundle into the USB port, and follow the on-screen
instructions.

Clear paper jams

Learn about clearing paper jams.

Paper jam locations

Learn about paper jam locations.

844 Chapter 3 Problem solving

 1

1 Tray 1

2 Tray 2

3 Tray 3

13.A1 tray 1 paper jam

Learn about A1 tray 1 paper jams.

Use the following procedure to check for paper in all possible jam locations related to the Tray 1. When a
jam occurs, the control panel might display a message and an animation that assists in clearing the jam.

● 13.A1.XX Jam in tray 1

1. Gently remove the jammed paper.

2. Open and then close the front door to resume

printing.

13.A1 tray 1 paper jam 845

 13.A2, 13.A3 tray 2, tray 3 paper jam
Learn about A2, 13.A3 tray 2, tray 3 paper jams.

Use the following procedure to check for paper in all possible jam locations related to Tray 2 or Tray 3.
When a jam occurs, the control panel might display a message and an animation that assists in clearing
the jam.

● 13.A2.XX Jam in tray 2

● 13.A3.XX Jam in tray 3

CAUTION: The fuser can be hot while the printer is in use. Wait for the fuser to cool before handling it.

NOTE: The procedure to clear a paper jam in Tray 3 is the same as for Tray 2. Only Tray 2 is shown
here.

1. Open the right door.

846 Chapter 3 Problem solving

2. Gently remove any jammed paper.

3. Close the right door.

13.A2, 13.A3 tray 2, tray 3 paper jam 847

 4. Open the tray.

5. Gently remove any jammed paper.

848 Chapter 3 Problem solving

6. Close the tray. Printing automatically resumes.

Clear paper jams in the Bottom HCI

Learn about clearing paper jams in the bottom HCI.

1. Open the HCI.

Clear paper jams in the Bottom HCI 849

 2. Remove any jammed paper.

3. Close the HCI.

Service mode (tech mode)

Learn about service mode (tech mode).

In service (tech) mode, the technician can check the printer and perform various tests to isolate the
cause of a malfunction. While in service mode, the printer still performs all normal operations.

Entering service mode

Learn about entering service mode.

1. From the control panel, select Support tools and then Service.

2. Enter the Service PIN ID.

● 04077817

850 Chapter 3 Problem solving

 3. Select Service tools.

Figure 3-34 Service tools view

Service mode menu tree

Learn about the service mode menu tree.

Figure 3-35 Information

Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4

Information General Engine Board Serial

Number

Supply Status Customer Replacement Toner CMYK

Unit

Field Replacement Unit Imaging Unit (Drum) CMYK

Service mode menu tree 851

 Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4

Development Unit

Toner Collection Unit

Image Transfer Belt (ITB)

ITB Cleaner

Fuser

Tray x rollers

ADF Pickup Roller

ADF Separation Roller

Software Version System Firmware Version

Main Firmware Version

Engine Firmware Version

Boot ROM Version

File System Version

ADF Firmware Version

Finisher Version

Scanner Version

Scan Control Version

Tray 2-5 Version

Fuser Version

Transfer Version

Toner Version

Print CMS Version

Copy CMS Version

Scan CMS Version

Print Reports Supplies Information

Usage Counter

Error Information

Fax Protocol Dump (Line 1)

Fax Protocol Dump (Line 2)

Fax Diagnostics (Line 1)

Fax Diagnostics (Line 2)

Auto Color Registration

Job Duty

Auto Toning History

Full Auto Color Registration

852 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4

ID Calibration History

Maintenance

Toner Event

Export Reports RTF Format

XML Format

PDF Format

Figure 3-36 Maintenance counts

Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4

Maintenance counts Part Replacement Count Toner Cartridge CMYK

Imaging Unit (Drum) CMYK

Development Unit
(Developer CMYK

Image Transfer Belt (ITB)

ITB Cleaner

Transfer Roller/T2 Roller

Fuser

Tray x rollers

Filter

ADF Pickup Roller

ADF Seperation Roller

Service mode menu tree 853

 Figure 3-37 Diagnostics

Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4

Diagnostics Engine Diagnostics General Engine Board

Serial Number

Engine Diagnostics Engine NVM Initialization

Engine NVM Read/Write

Engine Test Routines

Fax Diagnostics Fax NVM Read/Write

Fax Test Routines

Scanner Diagnostics Shading Test Shade and Print Report

Print Last Shade Report

Shade and Print Report

(ADF)

P Print Last Shade Report

(ADF)

Scanner/ADF NVM Read/ ADF Pickup Roller Count

Write

ADF Separation Roller

Count

Simplex Registration Value

(Registration 1)

Duplex Registration Value

(Registration 2)

Width Guide Max Value

Width Guide Min Value

USM 0 Ref Value

USM 1 Ref Value

854 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4

Scanner/ADF Test Routines Chose from a list of tests.

Adjustment Print Adjustment Image Position

Print Margin Test

Copy Adjustment Image Position

Scan Area Adjustment Automatic Adjustment

Manual Adjustment

ADF Adjustment Automatic Adjustment

Manual Adjustment

ACS ACS Page Adjustment [1–5]: 5*

Image Management ACR Reference Full

Adjustment

Cancel ACR Reference

Adjustment

Auto Color Registration

Full Auto Color Registration

Customer Color

Auto Tone Adjustment

Activation

Auto Tone Adjustment

Setting Standard Tone

Cancel Setting Standard

Tone

Auto Color Balance

Cancel Auto Color Balance

Manual Tone Adjustment

Print Test Patterns EP Calibration Pattern 1

Contone

EP Calibration Pattern 2
Halftone

Tone Curve Int Calibration

YM Pattern

Tone Curve Int Calibration

CK Pattern

Tone Curve Ext

Measurement Page

Black Mechanical Banding

Page

Cyan Mechanical Banding

Page

Magenta Mechanical
Banding Page

Service mode menu tree 855

 Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4

Color Registration Check

for Motion

MSOK Test EEPROM Test

Figure 3-38 Service functions

Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4

Service Functions Main Memory Clear

Debug Log Info

Job Status

TR Control Mode TR Control Mode Paper Group/Paper Side/

Paper Direction/T2 PWM

Vertical Streak Correction

Drain Off

On

Low Temperature Idling

Mode

Capture Log

IP Setting IP address (manual entry)

Subnet Mask (manual

entry)

Default Gateway (manual

entry)

Footer

FW Upgrade

File Dump Mode Enable Dump Generate RGBa

856 Chapter 3 Problem solving

 Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4

Generate Raw File

Generate CMYK

No Print Mode

Debugging Mode

Max Output file No 10

Enable

Retrieve Dump Image Safely Remove USB

Retrieve Dump Image

Delete Dump Image Delete Dump Image

Disable Dump Disable

Copy Original Thickness Thin (42-60 g/m2)

Normal*

Thick (163-220 g/m2)

Scan Original Thickness Thin (42-60 g/m2)

Normal*

Thick (163-220 g/m2)

Altitude Adjustment Normal (~1,000 m/3,280 ft)*

High 1 (~2,000 m/6562 ft)

High 2 (~3000 m/9842 ft)

High 3 (~4000 m/13123 ft)

High 4 (~5000 m/16404 ft)

Humidity Normal*

High 1

High 2

High 3

Vapor Mode

Booklet Sub Tray

Event Logging

Information
Learn more service mode information.

General
Learn general information about the menus.

Information 857
 Information > General

This menu displays the following information:

● Printer serial number

● Ethernet IP address

● Ethernet Mac address

● Optional Ethernet IP address

● Optional Ethernet Mac address

● Total printed impressions

● Installed date and time

Supply status
Learn about supply status.

Information > Supply Status > Customer Replacement Unit

● This menu displays the printer’s customer replacement unit status. Users can select one item in the
list to check the information of the selected unit.

Field replacement unit (FRU)

Information > Supply Status > Field Replacement Unit

● This menu displays the printer’s field replacement unit status. Users can select one item in the list to
check the information of the selected unit.

In this menu, there are five columns: Item, Threshold, Status, Count, and Maximum Life.

● Status: This column shows the current status of the selected item.

– OK: The current count is smaller than the default warning value.

– Check: The current count is bigger than the default warning value.

– OFF: The current count exceeds the maximum life.

● Count: This column shows the current count of the selected item.

● Maximum Life: This column shows the maximum capacity of the selected item.

The technician can edit the default warning value within the given threshold.

Selecting some items will enable the reset button to reset the current count to zero after replacing the
unit.

Software version
Learn about the software version.

858 Chapter 3 Problem solving

 Information > Software Version

● This menu displays the version of the software installed on the printer.

Print reports
Learn how to print reports.

Information > Print Reports

This menu displays reports that can be printed from the system. The following reports are available to
print:

● Supplies Information

● Auto Toning History

Information > Print Reports > Auto Toning History

NOTE: TRC means Tone Reproduction Curve.

This report shows a history of execution of the TRC control. The TRC control preserves color
consistency against changes in supplies resulting from long-time use and environmental change. The
purpose of the history report is to check if the TRC control is working normally.

● If the TRC control performs normally, Pass count must be a non-zero value and Fail count must be
zero.

● If Fail count is not zero, check the image density sensor.

Maintenance counts
Learn about Maintenance counts.

Part replacement count

Learn about part replacement count.

This section provides detailed information about the service mode Maintenance Counts tab

Fault Count

Maintenance Counts > Part Replacement Count

Maintenance Counts > Part Replacement Count

● This menu displays fault counts. The technician can select one fault group and press OK to see
detailed fault descriptions. The detailed fault description window displays engine diagnostic codes,
descriptions of the fault, and the number of occurrences.

The following table shows the fault groups defined for the system:

Table 3-23 Fault Count

Item Item Item

A1 Motor H2 Output (Bins) System S3 Scan System

Print reports 859

 Table 3-23 Fault Count (continued)

Item Item Item

A2 Fan M1 Input (Trays) System S5 UI System

A3 Sensor M2 Media Path System S6 Network System

C1 Toner Cartridge Unit M3 Output (Bins) System S7 HDD System

C3 Imaging Unit M4 ADF System U1 Fusing Unit

C7 Fusing Unit S1 Video System U2 Laser Scanner Assembly Unit

H1 Input (Trays) System S2 Engine System

Part Replacement Count

Maintenance Counts > Part Replacement Count

Maintenance Counts > Part Replacement Count

● This menu displays the replacement counts for the system parts. Users can select one group and
press OK to see the exact name of the part and the occurrence of the replacement.

The following table shows replaceable parts groups of the system:

Table 3-24 Part Replacement Count

Unit Item Sensing Method

Toner Cartridge Toner (Black) Auto Sensing

Imaging Unit Imaging Unit (Black) Auto Sensing

Fuser Fuser Auto Sensing

ITB ITB Count Clear

ITB Cleaner ITB Cleaner Count Clear

Transfer Roller Transfer Roller Count Clear

Roller Tray 2 Roller Count Clear

Roller Tray 3 Roller Count Clear

Roller Tray 4 Roller Count Clear

Roller Tray 5 Roller Count Clear

ADF Roller ADF Pick Roller Count Clear

ADF Roller ADF Separation Roller Count Clear

Filter Ozone filter

Diagnostics
Learn about diagnostics.

Engine diagnostics
Learn about the engine diagnostics.

860 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Diagnostics > Engine Diagnostics > Engine NVM Initialization

● This menu initializes all engine NVM values to the default.

Diagnostics > Engine Diagnostics > Engine NVM Read/Write

Table 3-25 Engine Diagnostics (Engine NVM Read/Write)

Purpose To change a configuration value for the engine firmware

Operation procedure When the main NVM Read/Write window displays, users can
navigate through the list of codes with descriptions and
saved values.

Users can also input a code through the text box to find a
configuration value directly.

After selecting one value, press the Edit button to open an

interface for user input.

Table 3-26 Engine NVM Read/Write codes

Code Display Meaning Default Max/Min

109–0200 Standby Center Temperature offset 10 10

109–0201 Standby Side Temperature offset 10 10

109-0205 Warmup Center Temperature offset 10 10

109-0206 Warmup Side Temperature offset 10 10

109-0255 Thin Center Temperature offset

109-0256 Thin Side Temperature offset 10 10

109-0265 Plain Center Temperature offset 10 10

109-0266 Plain Side Temperature offset 10 10

109-0275 Heavy Center Temperature offset 10

109-0276 Heavy Side Temperature offset 10 10

109-0280 Extra Heavy Center Temperature offset 10 10

109-0281 Extra Heavy Side Temperature offset 10 10

109-0290 Cardstock Center Temperature offset 10 10

109-0291 Cardstock Side Temperature offset 10 10

109-0300 Envelopes Center Temperature offset 10 10

109-0301 Envelopes Side Temperature offset 10 10

109-0305 Labels Center Temperature offset 10 10

109-0306 Labels Side Temperature offset 10 10

109-0310 Thick Center Temperature offset 10 10

109-0311 Thick Side Temperature offset 10 10

109-0315 Recycled Center Temperature offset 10 10

109-0316 Recycled Side Temperature offset 10 10

Engine diagnostics 861

 Table 3-26 Engine NVM Read/Write codes (continued)

Code Display Meaning Default Max/Min

109-0320 Special Center Temperature offset 10 10

109-0321 Special Side Temperature offset 10 10

109-0325 1200 dpi_thin Center Temperature offset 10 10

109-0326 1200 dpi_thin Side Temperature offset 10 10

109-0330 1200 dpi_plain Center Temperature offset 10 10

109-0331 1200 dpi_plain Side Temperature offset 10 10

109-0335 1200 dpi_thick Center Temperature offset 10 10

109-0336 1200 dpi_thick Side Temperature offset 10 10

112–0120 Manual Color Registration X-O TDistant from hsync to lsync 100 200/0
ffset Yellow (multi-hsync) for yellow

112–0130 Manual Color Registration X-O Distant from hsync to lsync 100 200/0
ffset Magenta (multi-hsync) for Magenta

112–0140 Manual Color Registration X- Distant from hysnc to lysync 100 200/0
Offset Cyan (multi-hysync) for cyan

112–0150 Manual Color Registration X- Distant from hysnc to lysync 100 200/0
Offset Black (multi-hysync) for black

112–0160 Manual Color Registration Y- Distant from psync to image 100 200/0
Offset Yellow area for Yellow

112–0170 Manual Color Registration Y- Distant from psync to image 100 200/0
Offset Magenta area for Magenta

112–0180 Manual Color Registration Y- Distant from psync to image 100 200/0
Offset Cyan area for Cyan

112–0190 Manual Color Registration Y- Distant from psync to image 100 200/0
Offset Black area for Black

112–0240 Manual Color Registration Left Image area left width for yellow 500 1000/0
Width Yellow

112–0250 Manual Color Registration Image area right width for 500 1000/0
Right Width Yellow yellow

112–0260 Manual Color Registration Left Image area left width for 500 1000/0
Width Magenta magenta

112–0270 Manual Color Registration Image area right width for 500 1000/0
Right Width Magenta magenta

112–0280 Manual Color Registration Left Image area left width for cyan 500 1000/0
Width Cyan

112–0290 Manual Color Registration Image area right width for cyan 500 1000/0
Right Width Cyan

112–0300 Manual Color Registration Left Image area left width for black 500 1000/0
Width Black

112–0310 Manual Color Registration Image area right width for black 500 1000/0
Right Width Black

112–0320 Color Registration Laser Laser Scanner Assembly skew 100 200/0
Scanner Assembly Skew Yellow for yellow

862 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-26 Engine NVM Read/Write codes (continued)

Code Display Meaning Default Max/Min

112–0330 Color Registration Laser Laser Scanner Assembly skew 100 200/0
Scanner Assembly Skew for magenta
Magenta

112–0340 Color Registration Laser Laser Scanner Assembly skew 100 200/0
Scanner Assembly Skew Cyan for cyan

Engine test routines

● Diagnostics > Engine Diagnostics > Engine Test Routines

Table 3-27 Engine Diagnostics (Engine Test Routines)

Purpose To perform test routines for the engine

Operation procedure When the main Engine Test Routines window displays, users
can navigate through the list of routines and descriptions
that display. Users can directly input an EDC code through
the text box to search for a routine. A maximum of three
routines can be selected at the same time.

After selecting one or more routines, press the OK button to

open the test window. The selected routines will display and
users can start/start the selected test routine.

Verification N/A

Specification N/A

Reference See the following table.

Table 3-28 Engine Test Routines codes

Code Display Meaning

100-000 Main BLDC Motor Main BLDC Motor is On/Off

0

100-000 Main BLDC Motor Slow Main BLDC Motor Slow On/Off
1

100-004 Yellow Drum Motor

1

100-004 Magenta Drum Motor

2

100-004 Cyan Drum Motor

3

100-004 Black Drum Motor

4

100-004 Yellow Drum Motor Ready

6

100-004 Magenta Drum Motor Ready

7

Engine diagnostics 863

 Table 3-28 Engine Test Routines codes (continued)

Code Display Meaning

100-004 Cyan Drum Motor Ready

8

100-004 Black Drum Motor Ready Detects if black drum motor is running at normal
9 speed

100-008 ITB Engage Motor

0

100-009 ITB Engage Sensor

0

100-001 Main BLDC Motor Ready Detects if Main BLDC Motor is running at normal
0 speed

100-0120 Exit Motor Forward Fast Exit Motor Forward Fast On/Off

100-013 Exit Motor Forward Slow Exit Motor Forward Slow On/Off
0

100-0131 Exit Motor Backward

100-0132 Exit Motor Backward Slow

100-014 Duplex Motor Forward Duplex motor forward on/off

0

100-0141 Duplex Motor Forward Slow Duplex motor forward slow on/off

100-016 Duplex Fan 1 Run Start/stop duplex fan 1 run

0

100-018 Duplex Fan 1 Run Ready Detects if duplex fan 1 is running at normal speed
0

100-020 Tray 2 Elevating Motor Tray 2 elevate motor on/off

0

100-021 Tray 3 Elevating Motor Tray 3 elevate motor on/off (optional)

0

100-022 Tray 4 Elevating Motor Tray 4 elevate motor on/off (optional)

0

100-023 Tray 5 Elevating Motor Tray 5 elevate motor on/off (optional)

0

100-024 Waste Toner Motor

0

100-0241 Waste Toner LED Waste Toner LED on/off

100-025 Waste Toner Full Sensor Detects if the Waste Toner is full
0

100-026 SMPS Fan Run Start/stop SMPS fan run

0

100-027 SMPS Fan Run Ready Detects if SMPS fan is running at normal speed
0

100-034 Feed Motor

0

100-0341 Feed Motor Slow

864 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-28 Engine Test Routines codes (continued)

Code Display Meaning

100-037 Tray 2 Pickup Motor Tray 2 motor is on/off

0

100-0371 Tray 2 Pickup Motor Slow Tray 2 motor slow on/off

100-038 Tray 3 Pickup Motor Tray 3 motor is on/off

0

100-038 Tray 3 Pickup Motor Slow Tray 3 motor slow on/off

1

100-039 Tray 4 Pickup Motor Tray 4 motor is on/off

0

100-0391 Tray 4 Pickup Motor Slow Tray 4 motor slow on/off

100-039 Tray 4 Pickup Motor Slowest Tray 4 motor slowest on/off

2

100-040 Tray 5 Pickup Motor Tray 5 motor is on/off

0

100-040 Tray 5 Pickup Motor Slow Tray 5 motor slow on/off

1

100-0411 Registration Motor Slow Registration motor slow on/off

100-0412 Registration Motor Slowest Registration motor slowest on/off

100-043 Exit 2 Motor Forward Exit 2 motor is on/off

0

100-043 Exit 2 Motor Forward Slow Exit 2 motor slow on/off

1

100-044 Exit 2 Motor Backward Exit 2 Motor is On/Off

0

100-0441 Exit 2 Motor Backward Slow Exit 2 Motor Slow Backward On/Off

100-045 ITB Motor

0

100-046 Ready ITB

0

100-047 DCF Feed Motor DCF Feed Motor is On/Off

0

101-005 Registration Clutch Engages drive to registration roller

0

101-0121 Tray 2 Feed Motor Slow Tray 2 Feed Motor Slow On/Off

101-0130 T2 Feed Motor T2 Feed Motor On/Off

101-0131 Tray 3 Feed Motor Slow Tray 3 Feed Motor Slow On/Off

101-0141 Tray 4 Feed Motor Slow Tray 4 Feed Motor Slow On/Off

101-0151 Tray 5 Feed Motor Slow Tray 5 Feed Motor Slow On/Off

101-0190 Out bin Full Sensor Detects when paper is at Out bin Full Sensor

101-0191 Out-bin 2 Full Sensor Detects when paper is at Out-bin 2 Full Sensor

101-0270 Tray 1 Clutch Tray 1 Clutch On/Off

Engine diagnostics 865

 Table 3-28 Engine Test Routines codes (continued)

Code Display Meaning

101-0271 Tray 1 Solenoid Tray 1 Solenoid On/Off

101-0280 Return Gate Solenoid Return Gate Solenoid On/Off

102-000 Tray 2 Home Position Detects when Tray 2 is closed

0

102-0010 Tray 2 Paper Empty Sensor Detects when paper is in Tray 2

102-0041 Tray 2 Paper Size Read Detects size of paper in Tray 2

102-005 Tray 2 Stack Height Sensor Detects if paper in Tray 2 is elevated to the sensor
0

102-0070 Tray 3 Home Position Detects when Tray 3 is closed

102-008 Tray 3 Paper Empty Sensor Detects when paper is in Tray 3

0

102-0111 Tray 3 Paper Size Read Detects size of paper in Tray 3

102-0120 Tray 3 Stack Height Sensor Detects if paper in Tray 3 is elevated to the sensor

102-0140 Tray 4 Home Position Detects when Tray 4 is closed

102-0150 Tray 4 Paper Empty Sensor Detects when paper is in Tray 4

102-0181 Tray 4 Paper Size Read Detects size of paper in Tray 4

102-0190 Tray 4 Stack Height Sensor Detects if paper in Tray 4 is elevated to the sensor

102-0210 Tray 5 Home Position Detect when Tray 5 is closed

102-022 Tray 5 Paper Empty Sensor Detects when paper is in Tray 5

0

102-0251 Tray 5 Size Read Detects paper size in Tray 5

102-026 Tray 5 Stack Height Sensor Detects if paper in Tray 5 is elevated to the sensor
0

102-028 Tray 1 Paper Empty Sensor Detects when paper is in Tray 1

0

102-0281 Tray 1 Paper Size Read Detects paper size in Tray 1

102-029 Feed 1 Sensor Detects when paper is at the Feed 1 sensor

0

102-030 Tray 3 Feed Sensor (or Door Open) Detects when paper is at Tray 3 Feed sensor
0 (Optional)

102-032 Tray 4 Feed Sensor (or Door Open) Detects when paper is at Tray 4 Feed sensor
0 (Optional)

102-034 Tray 5 Feed Sensor (or Door Open) Detects when paper is at Tray 5 Feed sensor
0 (Optional)

102-035 DCF Feed Cover Open

2

102-036 Registration Sensor Detects when paper is at the registration sensor

0

102-0361 Fuser Out Sensor Detects when paper is at the fuser out sensor.

102-0371 Exit 2 Sensor Detects when paper is at exit 2 sensor.

866 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-28 Engine Test Routines codes (continued)

Code Display Meaning

102-038 Duplex Jam 1 Sensor Detects when paper is at duplex jam 1 sensor.
0

102-043 Front Cover Sensor Detects status of front cover

5

102-043 Side Cover Sensor Detects status of side cover

6

104-000 Waste Install Sensor Detects if waste is installed

0

106-020 HVPS Installed Detect HVPS unit

0

107-0162 Yellow Eraser On Yellow eraser lamp on/off

107-0163 Magenta Eraser On Magenta eraser lamp on/off

107-0164 Cyan Eraser On Cyan eraser lamp on/off

107-0165 Black Eraser On Black eraser lamp on/off

107-0169 Black Eraser Detect Detect black eraser status

109-002 Fuser Fan Run Ready

0

109-003 Fuser Motor Forward Fuser motor forward on/off

0

109-003 Fuser Motor Backward Fuser Motor Backward On/Off

1

109-003 Fuser Motor Ready Detects if Fuser Motor runs at each speed
4

109-004 Fuser Fan Run

0

109-014 Fuser Gap Home Sensor Detects if the fuser press is located Home position
0

109-020 Detect Fuser Relay Detect fuser relay status

0

109-0210 Detect Zero Cross Period Detect zero cross period

109-030 Fuser Installed Detect fuser unit

0

110-000 LSU Motor 1 Run Ready Detects if LSU motor 1 runs at normal speed
0

110-006 LSU Motor 1 Run LSU motor 1 on/off

0

110-0140 110-0140 LSU HSync1

110-0170 LSU HSync 4 DetectsLSU HSync 4 (black)

110-0200 LSU Installed

110-0320 LSU Shutter Open

111-0000 Toner Dispense Motor Yellow

Engine diagnostics 867

 Table 3-28 Engine Test Routines codes (continued)

Code Display Meaning

111-0010 Toner Dispense Motor Magenta

111-0020 Toner Dispense Motor Cyan

111-0030 Toner Dispense Motor Black Toner dispense (supply) motor on/off

111-0040 Toner Sensor Yellow

111-0050 Toner Sensor Magenta

111-0060 Toner Sensor Cyan

111-0070 Toner Sensor Black TC sensor in developer tank

111-0110 Toner Control Voltage Yellow Yellow toner voltage on/off

111-0120 Toner Control Voltage Magenta Magenta toner voltage on/off

111-0130 Toner Control Voltage Cyan Cyan toner voltage on/off

111-0140 Toner Control Voltage Black Black toner voltage on/off

Scanner diagnostics
Learn about the scanner diagnostics.

Shading test

● Diagnostics > Scanner Diagnostics > Shading Test

868 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-29 Scanner Diagnostics (Shading Test)

Purpose ● To check the quality of scanned images, especially if there might be defects in optical
devices such as the lens, mirror, or lamp.

● Check the quality problem as shown below:

Operation For the Image Scanner Unit

Procedure
Press Shade and Print report to see if the current shading value is correct. Mono, red, green,
and blue gray shading values will be shown on the printed report. When the previous shading
value is needed, press “Print Last Shade Report”.

For the Flow ADF unit

1. Load the shading sheet on the ADF tray.

2. Enter SCV mode. Select the following menu items:

Diagnostics > Scanner Diagnostics > Shading Test > Shade and Print Report (ADF)

Press Print Last Shade Report (ADF) for the previous shading value report.

3. Check if the printed results are correct.

NOTE:

● When executing ADF shading, use only the shading sheet (JC63–05055A).

● A Shading Test for the ADF unit must be completed after replacing the ADF unit or main
board.

Verification Look at the bottom of the report page for a "RESULTS : OK" message.

Scanner/Flow ADF NVM Read/Write

● Diagnostics > Scanner Diagnostics > Scanner/Flow ADF NVM Read/Write

Scanner diagnostics 869

 Table 3-30 Scanner Diagnostics (Scanner/Flow ADF NVM Read/Write)

Purpose To read and/or write values in the scanner and ADF

memory.

Operation Procedure When the main NVM Read/Write window displays,

users can navigate through the list of codes with
descriptions and saved values. Users can also directly
input a code through the text box to search for an
NVM.

After selecting a code, the Edit button will be enabled

only if the code is writable.

If the selected code is writable and the Edit button

is enabled, press the button to configure the desired
value for the code.

Verification N/A

Specification N/A

Reference See the following table.

Table 3-31 Scanner/Flow ADF NVM Read/Write codes

Code NVM description Default Flow ADF ADF

05-0000 Pick Up Count 0 O O

05-0001 Separation Roller Count 0 O O

05-0030 Simplex Registration Value 0 X O

(Registration 1)

05-0040 Duplex Registration Value 0 O

(Registration 2)

05-0050 Width Guide Max Value Depends on O O

ADF

05-0060 Width Guide Min Value Depends on O O

ADF

Scanner/Flow ADF test routines

● Diagnostics > Scanner Diagnostics > Scanner/Flow ADF Test Routines

Table 3-32 Scanner Diagnostics (Scanner/Flow ADF Test Routines)

Purpose To perform test routines for the scanner and Flow ADF.

Operation Procedure When the main Scanner/ADF Test Routines window displays, users can
navigation through the list of routines and descriptions that display.
Users can input a code through the text box to search for a routine.

After selecting a routine, press OK to open the test window that lists the
selected routine. Users can start/stop the selected test routine.

Verification N/A

Specification N/A

Reference See the following table.

870 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-33 Scanner/Flow ADF Test Routines codes

Code Name Value Flow ADF ADF

06-0000 Scanner Original High/Low O O

Size Detecting
Sensor 1

06-0001 Scanner Original High/Low O O

Size Detecting
Sensor 2

06-0010 Scanner Cover High/Low O O

Open/Close Sensor
1

06-0011 Scanner Cover High/Low O O

Open/Close Sensor
2

06-0020 Scanner Platen Start/Stop O O

Motor Forward

06-0030 Scanner Platen Start/Stop O O

Motor Backward

06-0040 Scanner Platen High/Low O O

Home Position
Sensor

05-0000 Document Length .1 High/Low O O

Sensor

05-0001 Document Length .2 High/Low O O

Sensor

05-0020 Document Cover High/Low O O

Open Sensor

05-0040 Document Detect High/Low O O

Sensor

05-0050 Document Feed High/Low O O

Sensor

05-0060 Document Simplex High/Low O O

Registration Sensor

05–0061 Document Duplex X

Registration Sensor

05-0070 Document Scan High/Low O O

Read Sensor 1

05-0071 Document Scan High/Low O X

Read Sensor 2

05-0080 Document Exit High/Low O

Sensor

05-0110 Document Motor Start/Stop O

Forward

05-0111 Document Motor Start/Stop O

Backward

05-0123 Document width 1 High/Low

MSO Sensor

Scanner diagnostics 871

 Table 3-33 Scanner/Flow ADF Test Routines codes (continued)

Code Name Value Flow ADF ADF

05-0124 Document width 2 High/Low

MSO Sensor

05-0125 Document width 3 High/Low

MSO Sensor

05-0130 Document Pickup Start/Stop

Motor Forward

05-0131 Document Pickup Start/Stop

Motor Backward

05-0140 Document Pickup High/Low O O

Roller Detect
Sensor

05-0151 Document Stacker High/Low O

Lift Lower Sensor

05-0152 Document Stacker

Lift Home Position
Sensor

05-0153 Document Scan-ln

Release Sensor

05-0154 Document
Separation Up
Down Sensor

05-0160 Document Start/Stop O X

Registration 1 Motor
Forward

05-0162 Document Start/Stop O X

Registration 1 Motor
Backward

05-0170 Document Start/Stop

Registration 2
Motor Forward

05-0171 Document Start/Stop

Registration 2
Motor Backward

05-0180 Document Stacker Start/Stop

Lift Motor Forward

05-0181 Document Stacker Start/Stop

Lift Motor Backward

05–0182 Document Exit

Motor Forward

05–0183 Document Exit

Motor Backward

05–0184 Document Pickup

Release Motor
Forward

05–0185 Document Pickup

Release Motor
Backward

872 Chapter 3 Problem solving

 Table 3-33 Scanner/Flow ADF Test Routines codes (continued)

Code Name Value Flow ADF ADF

05–0186 Document Scan

ln Release Motor
Forward

05–0187 Document Scan

ln Release Motor
Backward

05-0190 Document Width 10Bit (0~1023) O O

Guide ADC Sensor

05–0191 Document USM

ADC Sensor

05–0192 Document USM

Calibration Test

05-0210 Document Jig Test Start/Stop O O

Low Speed Simplex

05-0230 Document Jig Test Start/Stop O O

High Speed Simplex

Adjustment
Learn about the print adjustment.

Print adjustment

● Diagnostics > Adjustment > Print Adjustment > Image Position

Table 3-34 Print Adjustment (Image Position)

Purpose Manually adjust the position of the printed image on

the paper in the print engine.

Operational Procedure 1. Select a tray to adjust.

2. Change the adjustment value using the + or -

buttons, then press the OK button to save the
changes.

● Simplex Leading Edge

● Simplex Side Edge

● Duplex Leading Edge

● Duplex Side Edge

NOTE:

● Adjustment must be done for each tray (Tray

1, 2, 3, 4, and MP).

● Do not choose ALL for the tray selection.

● Adjust for the tray with each new tray

selection.

3. Print out the test pattern and check if the image

is adjusted. If not, repeat Step 2.

Adjustment 873
 ● Diagnostics > Adjustment > Print Adjustment > Print Margin Test

This menu is used to print out the test pattern manually.

Copy adjustment

● Diagnostics > Adjustment > Copy Adjustment > Image Position

Table 3-35 Copy Adjustment (Image Position)

Purpose Manually adjust the position of the copied image on the paper in the
copy engine.

Operation Procedure NOTE: Before copy adjustment:

● Make sure that the initial values of margin adjustment are the same
as the values of the print adjustment.

● Perform an adjustment for each tray. Do not choose All for tray
selection, as this can confuse the adjustment.
NOTE:

● Complete adjustment for each tray (Tray 1, 2, 3, 4, and MP).

● Do not choose All for tray selection.

● Adjust for the tray with each new tray selection.

1. Locate the Scanner A/S Chart at the scanner glass.

2. Change the adjustment value using the + or - button, and then press
OK to save the changes.

● Simplex Leading Edge

● Simplex Side Edge

● Duplex Leading Edge

● Duplex Side Edge

3. Print out the test pattern and check if the image has moved. If not,
repeat Step 2.

Scan area adjustment

● Diagnostics > Adjustment > Scan Area Adjustment > Automatic Adjustment

874 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-36 Scan Area Adjustment (Automatic Adjustment)

Purpose To correct the image position and magnification of

scanned images automatically.

Operation Procedure 1. Locate the Scanner A/S chart at the scanner

glass.

Note that the Lead Edge arrows point to the left

side of the scanner glass and are placed face
down. The Scanner A/S Chart comes in two sizes,
A4 and Letter.

2. Press OK. A scan begins and the system will

automatically calculate the proper value based
on the scanning result of the chart.

3. The new value saves to the system.

4. Scan the Scanner A/S Chart and send it to a

PC. The chart must be scanned from the scanner
glass.

5. To check the image position, compare the

position of the scale marks (a, b) from the chart to
the scanned image.

6. To check the magnification, compare the length

of line c from the chart to the scanned image.

NOTE: Specifications:

● a, b: 10, ± 1.5 mm

● c: 190, ± 1.5 mm

● Diagnostics > Adjustment > Scan Area Adjustment > Manual Adjustment

Adjustment 875
 Table 3-37 Scan Area Adjustment (Manual Adjustment)

Purpose To correct the position and magnification of scanned images manually.

Operation 1. Choose one item from the table. There are three items to choose from:
Procedure
● Image Position — Leading Edge (Unit: mm, Scale: 0.1, Min/Max: -6/+6)

● Image Position — Side Edge (Unit: mm, Scale: 0.1, Min/Max: -6/+6)

● Magnification — Vertical Direction (Unit: %, Min/Max: 98.5/101.5)

2. Select one item and press the Edit button.

3. Change the adjustment value using the arrow button.

4. Image position (a, b): If the current value is smaller than the specification, press +,
otherwise press -.

5. Magnification (c): If the current value is smaller than the specification, press -,
otherwise, press +.

6. Press the OK button to apply the new value to the system.

7. Scan the Scanner A/S Chart and send it to a PC. The chart must be scanned from
the scanner glass.

8. To check the image position, compare the position of the scale marks (a, b) from the
chart to the scanned image.

9. To check the magnification, compare the length of line c from the chart to the
scanned image.

NOTE: Specifications:

● a, b: 10, ± 1.5 mm

● c: 190, ± 1.5 mm

ADF adjustment

● Diagnostics > Adjustment > ADF Adjustment > Automatic Adjustment

876 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-38 ADF Adjustment (Automatic Adjustment)

Purpose To correct the image position and magnification of images scanned with the
Flow ADF/ADF automatically.

Operation Procedure 1. Locate the Scanner A/S chart on the ADF tray.

2. Press OK. A scan begins and the system will automatically calculate the
proper value based on the scanning result of the chart.

3. The new value saves to the system.

4. Scan the Scanner A/S Chart and send it to a PC. The chart must be
scanned from the Flow ADF/ADF.

5. To check the image position, compare the position of the scale marks (a,
b) from the chart to the scanned image.

6. To check the magnification, compare the length of line c from the chart
to the scanned image.

NOTE: Specifications:

● a, b: 10, ± 1.5 mm

● c: 190, ± 1.5 mm
NOTE: After executing the ADF adjustment, perform a shading test.
Refer to Scanner Diagnostics.

● Diagnostics > Adjustment > ADF Adjustment > Manual Adjustment

Adjustment 877
 Table 3-39 ADF Adjustment (Manual Adjustment)

Purpose To correct the position and magnification of scanned images manually.

Operation 1. Choose one item from the table. There are three items to choose from:
procedure
● Image Position — Leading Edge (Unit: mm, Scale: 0.1, Min/Max: -6/+6)

● Image Position — Side Edge (Unit: mm, Scale: 0.1, Min/Max: -6/+6)

● Magnification — Vertical Direction (Unit: %, Min/Max: 98.5/101.5)

2. Select one item and press the Edit button.

3. Change the adjustment value using the arrow button.

4. Image position (a, b): If the current value is smaller than the specification, press +,
otherwise press -.

5. Magnification (c): If the current value is smaller than the specification, press -, otherwise,
press +.

6. Press the OK button to apply the new value to the system.

7. Scan the Scanner A/S Chart and send it to a PC. The chart must be scanned from the Flow
ADF/ADF.

8. To check the image position, compare the position of the scale marks (a, b) from the chart
to the scanned image.

9. To check the magnification, compare the length of line c from the chart to the scanned
image.

NOTE: Specifications:

● a, b: 10, ± 1.5 mm

● c: 190, ± 1.5 mm

NOTE: After executing the ADF adjustment, perform a shading test. Refer to Scanner
Diagnostics.

Image management
Learn about image management.

Auto tone adjustment activation

● Diagnostics > Image Management > Auto Tone Adjustment Activation > Normal

878 Chapter 3 Problem solving

 Table 3-40 Auto Tone Adjustment Activation (Normal)

Purpose To correct image quality when density of the image

is poor. Normal TRC Control is recommended after
changing a unit, such as a toner cartridge, imaging
unit, and PTB, or after restarting the printer.

Operation Procedure 1. Select On or Off for Normal TRC Control

execution.

● Off: Normal TRC Control will not execute.

● On: Normal TRC Control will execute during

the determined conditions,

2. Change the execution condition(s) of Normal TRC

Control.

● Page Count: The system executes Normal

TRC Control based on the count of printed
pages since the last execution.

● Time Left Alone: The system executes

Normal TRC Control when the system
returns from a power save mode and the
rest time exceeds the configured value.

Verification Print out a test job and make sure the image quality
has recovered.

● Diagnostics > Image Management > Auto Tone Adjustment Activation > Full

Table 3-41 Auto Tone Adjustment Activation (Full)

Purpose To correct image quality when any OPC drum is

replaced, the life of the OPC drum is changed, the
density of the image is poor, or the temperature and/or
humidity in the room changes suddenly.

Operation Procedure 1. Select On or Off for Full TRC Control execution.

● Off: Full TRC Control will not execute.

● On: Full TRC Control will execute during the

determined conditions,

2. Change the execution condition(s) of Full TRC

Control.

● Page Count: The system executes Full TRC

Control based on the count of printed pages
since the last execution.

● Time Left Alone: The system executes Full

TRC Control when the system returns from
a power save mode and the rest time
exceeds the configured value.

Verification Print out a test job and make sure the image quality
has recovered.

Print test patterns

Learn about the print test patterns.

Print test patterns 879

 Diagnostics > Print Test Patterns >Skew Pattern

● The skew pattern stored in the machine will be printed out as the selected size.

Service functions
Learn about service functions.

Main memory clear

Learn about the main memory clear.

Service Functions > Main Memory Clear

● This function resets the main memory of the system to the factory default setting. This function can
be used to reset the system to the initial value when the product is functioning abnormally. User
configured values return to the default values.

To clear the main memory, select the country/region where the system is located, and restart the
printer.

Debug log
Learn about the debug log.

Service Functions > Debug Log

● This function sets the system log message level. Users can select three options:

– Off: This option disables the logging option.

– Job Status: This option only enables the logging of user created jobs.

– Details: This option enables all the logging options of the running tasks of the system. This
option might affect the performance of certain system operations. Use this option when the
system performs abnormally and engineers need to investigate the problem.

Capture log
Learn about the capture log.

Service Functions > Capture Log

● This function copies all the saved logs in the system to a USB flash drive as a .zip file. The size of the
system log could reach up to 1 GB. If the system log size becomes very large, it will take a longer time
to copy to the USB flash drive.

1. Connect the USB flash drive to the printer.

2. Tap the Service Mode app.

3. Go to Service Functions > Debug Log and change the debug log level to INFO.

4. Go to Service Functions > Capture Log.

5. Select All or Period. If selecting Period, enter the start and end date.

880 Chapter 3 Problem solving

 6. Press the Capture Log button.

7. Once the log is completed, a completion message will display. Restore the debug log level to
JOB STATUS.

NOTE: If the system log size becomes very large, it will take longer to copy to the USB flash
drive.

8. Check that the Log File has been saved to the USB flash drive.

Transfer assembly control mode

Learn about the transfer assembly control mode.

Service Functions > Transfer Assembly Control Mode

Table 3-42 Transfer Assembly Control Mode

●
Purpose To correct transfer related problems. This function can be used to change the
transfer value to optimize image quality to a certain type of paper.

Operation Procedure ● T2 Control Mode

– Choose the paper group, paper side, and paper direction.

– Adjust PWM value based on the problem type.

○ Blur: Increase PWM value

○ Poor Transfer: Increase PWM value

○ Re-transfer: Decrease PWM value

○ White Spot: Decrease PWM value

○ OPC Cylic Ghost: Decrease PWM value

Verification Print a test job and make sure the transfer problem has been resolved.

Specification N/A

Reference N/A

Transfer assembly control mode 881

 Envelope rotate
Learn about the envelope rotate function.

Service Functions > Envelope Rotate

● This menu enables rotation when printing on an envelope. The machine usually guides loaded
envelopes with SEF direction. If this function is enabled, the user can load an envelope with LEF
direction and the machine will rotate the image for printing on the envelope.

This function provides the following setting options:

– Off (default): Load envelope SEF direction

– 90 degrees: Load envelope LEF direction.

– 180 degrees: Load envelope SEF direction with flap on bottom side.

NOTE: If the paper source is Auto, the device will feed from the Tray 1 because the LEF envelope
can only be loaded in the Tray 1 according to paper specification.

If the length of envelope is over the maximum size of the custom width, the device will not rotate
the image and determine that the direction of the envelope is SEF. For example, the A4 model
supports custom sizes like W 98–216 ~ L148–356. This model does not support C5 Env (162x229) DL
Env (110x220), No 9 Env (98x225), No 10 Env (105x241) rotation.

Print quality troubleshooting guide

Learn about print quality troubleshooting.

Image quality problems and solutions

Learn about print-quality troubleshooting.

Print quality defects can be caused by printer components, consumables, media, internal software,
external software applications, and environmental conditions.

To successfully troubleshoot print quality problems, eliminate as many variables as possible.

First, generate prints using printable pages using laser paper. Use paper from an unopened ream that
has been acclimated to room temperature. Make sure that genuine HP toner is installed in the printer.

882 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Figure 3-39 A/S chart (A3)

Image quality problems and solutions 883

 Figure 3-40 A/S chart

Table 3-43 A/S chart

Item Description Use

[1] Grid pattern For adjusting margin and

magnification

[2] Black patches For adjusting skew error

[3] Barcode For checking the reproduction of the

barcode

[4] Note area For recording the date, conditions,

and so on.

[A] Halftone band For checking banding and jitter (K

50%)

[B, L] Resolution patterns For checking resolution

[C, D, E] Images For checking color reproduction

[F] Map image For checking fine line reproduction

[G] Color patches For checking color reproduction and

uniformity

[H] Gradation pattern For checking tone reproduction of

seven colors (C, M, Y, K, R, G, B/
10~100%)

884 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-43 A/S chart (continued)

Item Description Use

[I] Color/Mono text For checking the reproduction of

color, mono text

[J] Multilingual feature For checking the reproduction of

small text

[K] White gap pattern For checking color to color, color to

mono white gap

[M] Rulers For checking the magnification error

(unit: cm)

[N] Rulers For checking the magnification error

(unit: inch)

How to analyze image defects

See the following flowchart.

TIP: Depending on the remaining life of the part, the cause of the defect can vary. Check the
remaining life of the part.

Check for defects even if the defect is not repeated.

Image quality problems and solutions 885

 Figure 3-41 Defect analysis flowchart

Vertical black lines

Learn about vertical black lines.

886 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Figure 3-42 Typical faulty images

Table 3-44 Troubleshooting procedure

Step Check item Action

1 Charge roller (CR) is contaminated. Check if the CR is contaminated.

Replace the Drum unit if there are additional

problems.

2 ITB is contaminated. Check if the ITB is contaminated.

● The ITB cleaning is poor.

● The ITB clean-blade is partially broken.

Replace the ITB Cleaner if there are additional

problems.

Vertical black lines 887

 Table 3-44 Troubleshooting procedure (continued)

Step Check item Action

3 Scanner unit is contaminated. Wipe the surface of the contaminated parts with a
soft cloth.
● Scan glass contamination
CAUTION: The scanner unit contains fragile parts.
● Mirror contamination Use caution while cleaning.

● CCD sensor contamination

Vertical light or white lines

Learn about vertical light or white lines.

Figure 3-43 Typical faulty images

888 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-45 Troubleshooting procedure

Step Check item Action

1 A foreign substance is between the magnetic roller Remove the foreign substance.
and the blade.

No toner on magnetic roller.

Make the hook (transparency sheet is recommended.)

Put the hook into the gap between magnetic roller and
blade.

Pull out foreign substances.

2 The developer in the developer unit is empty or the ● Check the life remaining of the developer unit on
developer unit life has expired. the supply information report.

– If its life has expired, replace the developer

unit.

● Check if the developer layer on magnetic roller is

uniform.

– If the developer layer is short, replace the

developer unit.

3 The laser beam path is blocked. Clean the laser scanner assembly window.

(Foreign substance is on the laser scanner assembly

window.)

Vertical light or white lines 889

 Table 3-45 Troubleshooting procedure (continued)

Step Check item Action

4 The OPC is scratched or contaminated in a vertical Replace the drum unit.

direction.

890 Chapter 3 Problem solving

 Table 3-45 Troubleshooting procedure (continued)

Step Check item Action

5 ITB cleaner or T2 transfer unit is contaminated with Clean the paper dust stick on a regular basis.
paper dust build up.

● ITB cleaner contamination

NOTE: The paper dust stick (Callout 1 ) may vary

depending on the product.

NOTE: Clean the paper dust stick on a regular basis

in order to prevent horizontal light band. Frequent
cleaning can help maintain product quality.
● T2 contamination (Callout 1) & Image defect
HP recommends to clean this item when replacing
TCU at a minimum.

Horizontal periodic black lines, dots

Learn about horizontal periodic black lines and dots.

Horizontal periodic black lines, dots 891

 Figure 3-44 Typical faulty images

Table 3-46 Troubleshooting procedure

Step Check item Action

1 Horizontal periodic band or dot (CR 37.7 mm). Clean the contaminated surface on the charge roller
with a soft cloth and alcohol.
● The surface of the Charge Roller (CR) is
contaminated. If the surface is scratched, replace the drum unit.

● CR is scratched.

2 Horizontal periodic band (CR, 37.7 mm). Replace the drum unit.

CR in poor condition.

3 OPC is damaged. Replace the drum unit.

Horizontal periodic light/dark band, dots

Learn about horizontal periodic light/dark band and dots.

892 Chapter 3 Problem solving

 Figure 3-45 Typical faulty images

Table 3-47 Troubleshooting procedure

Step Check item Action

1 Horizontal periodic bands (OPC, 94.2 mm) This problem is likely to resolve itself over time.

● OPC was exposed for too long. If the problem persists, replace the drum unit.

● Damage was caused by a high voltage in a short

amount of time.

2 Horizontal periodic bands (magnetic roller, 31.4 mm) Replace developer unit.

The magnetic roller is in poor condition.

V-groove of the surface of magnetic roller is not

uniform.

Foggy image
Learn about foggy images.

Foggy image 893

 Figure 3-46 Typical faulty images

Table 3-48 Troubleshooting procedure

Step Cause Action

1 Voltage of OPC motor is abnormally low. Replace the drum unit.

2 HVPS operates abnormally. Replace the HVPS board.

HVPS is damaged or broken.

3 Toner is over supplied by abnormal TC sensor. Replace the toner cartridge.

4 Voltage of OPC motor is abnormally low. Check the transfer assembly connection in the HVPS.

Transfer assembly voltage is abnormally high. Check if the transfer assembly roller spring in the ITB
is connected correctly.

Replace HVPS.

Light image
Learn about light image.

Figure 3-47 Typical faulty images

894 Chapter 3 Problem solving

 Table 3-49 Troubleshooting procedure

Step Cause Action

1 Toner cartridge is not installed correctly. Check if the toner is installed completely

Make sure that the latching mechanism is correctly

engaged.

2 Toner not distributed in the toner cartridge. Hold the toner cartridge horizontally and shake it side
to side several times to evenly distribute the toner.

3 Output voltage of HVPS is abnormally low. Check if the toner level is sufficient. If not, replace the
toner cartridge.
● Color density decreases.
Check if the toner supply shutter is opened.

4 Output voltage of HVPS is abnormally low. Replace HVPS.

● Color density decreases.

5 TC down and toner spills. Replace the developer unit.

6 Toner spills by eraser. Check if the eraser is contaminated.

Replace the drum unit or developer unit.

Blurred image
Learn about blurred images.

Figure 3-48 Typical faulty images

Table 3-50 Troubleshooting procedure

Step Cause Action

1 High humidity and/or the quality of the paper. Use new, high quality paper.

2 T2 transfer voltage is low. Turn up the T2 transfer voltage.

Blurred image 895

 Table 3-50 Troubleshooting procedure (continued)

Step Cause Action

3 Connection between HVPS and THV is incorrect. Check if the connection between T2 high voltage
terminal and HVPS THV terminal is correct.

Check if the connection between the HVPS and ITB is

correct.

4 HVPS operates abnormally. Replace the HVPS.

Incorrect color registration

Learn about the incorrect color registration defect.

Figure 3-49 Typical faulty images

Text of lines appear jagged, unclear, or blurred. This defect is usually caused by a faulty laser/scanner
diode.

NOTE: Feed direction (callout 1).

896 Chapter 3 Problem solving

 Table 3-51 Troubleshooting procedure

Step Cause Action

1 CPR sensor is contaminated. Execute CPR manually.

2 Environment has changed. To recognize the environment change, execute CPR

after a certain amount of time.

3 Belt surface is contaminated. Remove the ITB. If the surface of the belt is
contaminated, clean it with soft cloth.

Uneven pitch and jitter image

Learn about uneven pitch and jitter image.

Figure 3-50 Typical faulty images

Table 3-52 Troubleshooting procedure

Step Cause Action

1 Under 3 mm periodic jitters or horizontal bands have Remove foreign substance from the drive gears.
occurred.
Grease the drive gears.

● Developer unit gears

● Drum unit gears

● Main drive unit gears.

If the problem persists, replace the abnormal units.

● Developer unit

● Drum unit

● Main drive unit

2 Under 1 mm periodic jitter or horizontal bands have Check if the laser scanner assembly is assembled
occurred. correctly. If not, replace the screws.

Replace the laser scanner assembly.

Skewed image
Learn about skewed images.

Uneven pitch and jitter image 897

 Figure 3-51 Typical faulty images

Table 3-53 Troubleshooting procedure

Step Check item Action

1 Is the tray properly installed? Reinstall the tray correctly.

2 Is too much paper loaded in the tray? Remove some paper.

3 Are the paper guides properly set? Adjust the paper guides.

4 Is the surface of the pickup/reverse/feed Clean or replace the contaminated roller.

roller dirty?

5 Is the Flow ADF installed and adjusted Reinstall the Flow ADF unit.
properly?
Adjust the Flow ADF skew.

6 Is the intermediate transfer belt installed Reinstall the ITB unit.

properly?

Poor fusing performance

Learn about poor fusing performance.

898 Chapter 3 Problem solving

 Figure 3-52 Typical faulty images

Table 3-54 Troubleshooting procedure

Step Cause Action

1 Check the paper type. Check that the paper type displayed on the control
panel is the same type of paper being used for the
Depending on what type of paper is used, print speed print job.
varies.

● Plain (71~90g/), Thick (91~105g/): Full Speed

● Heavy weight (106~175g/): Half Speed

● Envelope (75~90 g/), Label (120~150 g/): Half

Speed

2 The fuser unit is worn out. Replace the fuser unit.

3 Check the surface of the fuser belt and pressure Replace the fuser unit.
roller for scratches.

4 Check the temperature control system for problems. Check the non-contact thermistor sensor

● Thermistor is broken or operates abnormally

● Halogen lamp is broken or operates abnormally

Check the halogen lamp.

If parts are broken, replace the broken parts or the

fuser unit.

5 Check if the pressure control system operates Check the pressure control system.
properly.
If the problem persists, replace the fuser unit.

6 Paper is wrapped on the heating roller. Remove the wrapped paper and print a test page.

If the problem persists, replace the fuser unit.

Stain on the paper back side

Learn about the stain on the paper back side.

Stain on the paper back side 899

 Figure 3-53 Typical faulty images

Table 3-55 Troubleshooting procedure

Step Cause Action

1 Is the transfer roller dirty or worn out? Clean or replace the transfer roller assembly.

2.1 Is there any stain caused by poor cleaning on the ITB? Clean the ITB.

If the problem persists, replace the ITB unit.

2.2 Is the ITB cleaning blade in proper contact with the Take off the ITB and check that the ITB cleaning blade
ITB? pressure spring and the pressure hook are installed
correctly.

3.1 Are the fuser belt and pressure roller dirty? Clean the fuser belt and pressure roller.

3.2 Check the pressure roller surface for damage or Replace the fuser unit.
scratches.

Duplex blur, white spot blur on color print-out

Learn about the duplex blur, white spot blur on color print-out defect.

Figure 3-54 Typical faulty images

Troubleshooting procedure

1. Enter SVC Mode → Service Functions → TR Control Mode.

900 Chapter 3 Problem solving

 2. Select T2 Control Mode.

3. Select the paper setting based on the site. (Paper Group, Paper Side, Paper Direction).

4. Increase value for T2 PWM and check if the blur problem is resolved.

5. When the problem persists after changing the T2 Control Mode values, change the T1 Control Mode
values.

6. Decrease the value for each color and see whether the symptom disappears.

In this case, [-4] was applied and solved the blur.

7. As there can be variation for each device, change T1, T2 and observe the results.

Adjusting the laser scanner assembly skew error

Learn about adjusting the laser scanner assembly skew error.

1. Check the skew error.

a. Execute the CPR.

Machine Setup > General Settings > Image Management > Auto Color Registration

b. Print the CPR report.

SVC (Tech) Mode > Information > Print Reports > Auto Color Registration

c. Check [Y] [M] [C] Skew Data in CPR report.

Figure 3-55 Skew Data (CPR report)

NOTE: If CPR fails, do not refer to [Y] [M] [C] Skew Data.

When CPR is done successfully, correct [Y] [M] [C] Skew Data is updated on the CPR report for the
current laser scanner assembly.

2. Adjust the skew error.

a. Open the front cover. Remove the toner collection unit.

b. There are three skew holes for YMC color. Insert the Phillips screwdriver and adjust CW, CCW
referred to adjustment amount.

Adjusting the laser scanner assembly skew error 901

 Figure 3-56 YMC skew holes

c. The standard skew value is 200. If the skew data in the CPR report is 200, skew adjustment is
unnecessary.

d. Adjustment method:

NOTE: One click is equal to 1/7 dot.

● Skew Data < 200: Rotate the driver in a counterclockwise direction. Example: Skew Data is
192: 200 — 192 = 8. Click CCW rotation.

● Skew Data = 200: No adjustment needed.

● Skew Data > 200: Rotate the driver in a clockwise direction. Example: Skew Data is 213: 213
– 200 = 13. Click CW rotation.

902 Chapter 3 Problem solving

 Figure 3-57 Skew adjustment

3. Check the skew error again.

a. Execute the CPR after the skew adjustment.

b. Print the CPR report.

c. Check the [Y] [M] [C] skew error.

d. If the value for YMC is 200±7, complete the skew adjustment

NOTE: If the value does not meet the target, repeat steps 1–3.

Adjusting the flow ADF/ADF skew

Learn about adjusting the ADF/ADF skew.

Adjusting the flow ADF/ADF skew 903

 1. Open the ADF. Loosen the two screws securing both hinges.

Figure 3-58 Open ADF and loosen screws

2. Adjust the position of the ADF hinge according to the skew status.

Figure 3-59 Adjust ADF hinge

904 Chapter 3 Problem solving

a. If the skew image is similar to the following example, adjust the hinge unit in the direction of the
arrow. (1 scale = >1.0 mm skew adjustment)

Figure 3-60 Adjust hinge

Adjusting the flow ADF/ADF skew 905

 b. If the skew image is like the following example, adjust the hinge unit in the direction of the
arrow. (1 scale = >1.0 mm skew adjustment)

Figure 3-61 Adjust hinge

3. Detach the ADF sponge after adjusting the skew. Place the ADF sponge on the scanner glass.
Close the ADF unit to attach the sponge.

Adjust Scan skew error

Learn about adjusting the scan skew.

906 Chapter 3 Problem solving

1. Disassemble holder-right which hold glass assy and then separate screw cap and screw from
Platen

Figure 3-62 Disassemble holder-right

2. Disassemble glass from Platen as lifting right side of glass and then pull to right way.

CAUTION: Should wear clean gloves when deal glass to prevent contamination

Figure 3-63 Disassemble glass

3. Mark on R,S screw with pen to recognize how much rotate screw.

a. Adjust R,S screw according to below guide.

b. Example : Top skew error occur as clockwise 1.5mm on A3 size document.

● Firstly rotate S screw clockwise as a rotation.

Adjust Scan skew error 907

 ● Then rotate R screw clockwise as half rotation. (Should adjust R screw after S screw
adjustment at half ratio of S screw adjustment)

Figure 3-64 Recognize how much rotate screw.

TIP: Assemble

Progress 1,2,3 step in reverse order; assemble glass & holder-right.

908 Chapter 3 Problem solving

4 Electrical-mechanical diagrams

Learn about the electrical-mechanical diagrams.

PCAs, Boards, and Laser Scanning Unit (LSU)

Learn about the electrical-mechanical relationships diagram for the PCAs, Boards, and Laser Scanning
Unit (LSU).

Electrical-mechanical diagrams 909

 Figure 4-1 Formatter

Engine Controller
Board (ECB)
CN1, MAC0
JC82-00540A MX0P
MX0N
1
2
MX1P 3
8GR94-60003 MX2P
MX2N
4
5 JC39-02567A
MX1N 6
MX3P 7
MX3N 8
LED1 9
3.3V_SLP 10
LED0 11
3.3V_SLP 12

CN16, PCIe
SDA3_TIGER 1
DGND 2
SCL3_TIGER 3
PEX_TX_P 4
DGND 5
PEX_TX_N 6
PEX_RX_P 7
DGND 8 JC39-02552A
PEX_RX_N 9
PEX_REFCLK_P_TIGER 10
DGND 11
PEX_REFCLK_N_TIGER 12
N.C 13
DGND 14
nRST_DRAGON 15
WAKE_DRAGON 16
DGND 17
nEN_PCIe 18
EN_SYSPWR_DRAGON 19

CN17, GPIO

nSENS_PAPER_DSDF_TIGER 1
nRST_REQ_TIGER 2
COVER_OPEN_PLATEN1_TIGER 3
DGND 4
nCOVER_OPEN_FRONT_TIGER 5
ZEROCROSS_TIGER
nTRAY_OPEN_TIGER
6
7 JC39-02553A Formatter
N.C 8
DGND
DGND
9
10
X3A92-60006(dn)
EN_WKUP_PWR
RESERVED_OUT1
nTIGER_PCIeRDY
11
12
13
Y3K99-60005(z)
DGND 14
RESERVED_IN_2 15
nDRAGON_PCIeRDY 16

HP
Formatter

ECB

LVPS
FDB

Red color text for 77822, 77825, 77830

Blue color text for 78323, 78325, 78330

910 Chapter 4 Electrical-mechanical diagrams

Figure 4-2 Low Voltage Power Supply (LVPS) and Fuser Drive Board (FDB)
JC82-00540A Engine Controller
8GR94-60003 Board (ECB)
CN4, FDB Interface
Formatter 1 ZEROCROSS_IN
2 DGND
3 DGND
4 ON_SMPS_RELAY
5 24V1
6 ON_FUSER_RELAY
ECB 7 FUSER 24V
8 DGND
9 ON_FUSER_SIDE
10 ON_FUSER_CENTER
11 OUT_ FAN_DEVE
LVPS FAN 12 nDETECT_FAN_DEVE_CON
13 DGND
14 nEN_24V_SMPS2_O
15 DGND
16 TRAY OPEN1
17 DGND
18 ADC_PAPER_SIZE1
19 1.8V
20 TRAY OPEN2
1.8V/24V 21 DGND
22 ADC_PAPER_SIZE2
LVPS 23 1.8V
24 OUT_ FAN_SMPS1
FDB 25 nDETECT_FAN_SMPS1_CON
26 DGND
27 ADC_SMPS1_TEMP_ CON
28 nEN_24V_SMPS1_O
29 DGND
30 N.C

CN2, LVPS TYPE5H

1 5V1
2 5V2
3 24V1
JC39-02564A 4
5
24V2
24V3
5V/24V 6 24V4
8GR94-50002 7 DGN D
8 DGN D
9 DGN D
10 DGN D
11 DGN D
12 DGN D

JC39-02558A
24V 1.8V 1.8V 24V

LVPS FAN PAPER SIZE1 PAPER SIZE2 DEVE FAN

24V 24V 5V/24V

10

11
12
10
3

9
4
5
2

7
8
6
1

3
n EN_24V_SM PS_O 2
1

9
4
5
2

7
8
6
1
TYPE5H SIG N A L

LVPS TYPE 5H
ON_FUSER_CENTER
ON_FUSER_RELAY
ON_SMPS_RELAY

ON_FUSER_SIDE
ZERO_CROSS_IN

HEATER I/F
FUSER_24V
MAIN IF

DGND
DGND
DGND
DGND
DGND
DGND
D G ND

D G ND

24V1
24V2
24V3
24V4
JC39-01584A

5V1
5V2
1
DGND
DGND

DGND

HEATER
24V1

HEATER
2

Fuser Drive Board LVPS TYPE5H

JC39-01583A
HEATER S/W (FDB) JC44-00250A, V2
FDB / LVPS
JC 39-01585A

FDB / LVPS
1
8GR94-60002, V2 JC44-00249A, V1
HEATER S/W 2 LIVE 1
HEATER S/W 1 LIVE
3 8GR94-60001, V1 NEUTRAL 2 2 NEUTRAL
DGND
DGND
DGND
5V5
5V4
4 5V3

LVPS TYPE 5H
M A IN SW ITC H
M A IN SW ITC H

1
6

2
5
4
3
3 CO M M O N

2 N EU TRA L
1 LA M P1
2 LA M P2
FU SER

IN LET

1 LIVE

JC39-02558A
2
1

3
4

1
DGND
DGND
DGND
5V4
5V3
5V2
LVPS TYPE 5H

JC39-02076A JC39-01582A
JC39-01581A
GND
M A IN S/W

INLET

Formatter
AC

Red color text for 77822, 77825, 77830

Blue color text for 78323, 78325, 78330

PCAs, Boards, and Laser Scanning Unit (LSU) 911

 Figure 4-3 High Voltage Power Supply (HVPS) and Laser Scanning Unit (LSU)

Engine Controller Board (ECB)

CN37, HVPS PWR
JC82-00540A
LSU SHUT/SKEW MOT 8GR94-60003
1 24V1_LP
2 24V1_LP
3 24V1_LP
4 24V1_LP
5 3.3V_LP
6 DGND
7 DGND
8 DGND
9 DGND
10 DGND
11 A_LSU_SHUT(N.C)
12 nA_LSU_SHUT(N.C)
13 B_LSU_SHUT(N.C)
14 nB_LSU_SHUT(N.C)
3.3V/24V 15 5V2_LP(N.C)
16 DGND(N.C)
17 nSENS_LSU_SHUT1(N.C)
18 5V2_LP(N.C)
19 DGND(N.C)
20 nSENS_LSU_SHUT2(N.C)
21 A_SKEW_Y(N.C)
22 nA_SKEW_Y(N.C)
23 B_SKEW_Y(N.C)
24 nB_SKEW_Y(N.C)
25 A_SKEW_M(N.C)
26 nA_SKEW_M(N.C)
27 B_SKEW_M(N.C) CN25, HVPS COLOR
28 nB_SKEW_M(N.C)
29 A_SKEW_C(N.C) 1 PWM_DEV_DC_Y_CON
30 nA_SKEW_C(N.C) 2 PWM_ITHV_Y_CON
31 B_SKEW_C(N.C) 3 PWM_AC_VPP_Y_CON
32 nB_SKEW_C(N.C) 4 nEN_AC_Y_CON
5 PWM_AC_PREQ_CON
6 PWM_MHV_Y_CON
7 PWM_FUSER_BIAS_CON
8 PWM_SAW_CON
9 PWM_THV_CON
10 PWM_THV_CLEAN_CON
CN29, LSU COLOR 11 ADC_THV_P_CON
12 ADC_HVPS_24_CON
1 DGND 13 PWM_DEV_DC_K_CON
2 DGND 14 PWM_DEV_DC_C_CON
3 nVDO_Y_B1_DN_CON 15 PWM_DEV_DC_M_CON
4 nVDO_Y_B1_DP_CON 16 PWM_ITHV_K_CON
5 DGND 17 PWM_ITHV_C_CON
HVPS 6 nHSYNC_Y_DN 18 PWM_ITHV_M_CON
JC39-02561A 7 nHSYNC_Y_DP 19 ADC_MHV_K_CON
JC44-00212C 1
. 8 DGND 20 ADC_MHV_C_CON
. 8RG94-50001 9 nSH_LSU_Y_1B_OUT 21 ADC_MHV_M_CON
JC44-00212D . 10 nLDON_Y_OUT 22 ADC_MHV_Y_CON
. 3.3V/24V 11 DGND 23 PWM_MHV_K_CON
. 12 PWM_LD_POWER_Y_OUT 24 PWM_MHV_C_CON
32 13 DGND 25 PWM_MHV_M_CON
14 nVDO_M_B1_DN_CON 26 PWM_AC_VPP_K_CON
27 PWM_AC_VPP_C_CON
35
. Flexible Flat Cable (FFC) 15
16
nVDO_M_B1_DP_CON
DGND 28 PWM_AC_VPP_M_CON
. 29 nEN_AC_K_CON
. JC39-02114A 17
18
nSH_LSU_M_1B_OUT
nLDON_M_OUT 30 nEN_AC_C_CON
.
19 DGND 31 nEN_AC_M_CON
.
20 PWM_LD_POWER_M_OUT 32 ADC_ITHV_K_CON
1 5V/24V 33 ADC_ITHV_C_CON
1

21 DGND
.

34 ADC_ITHV_M_CON
.

22 nVDO_C_B1_DN_CON
.

23 nVDO_C_B1_DP_CON 35 ADC_ITHV_Y_CON
.
.
50

24 DGND
25 nSH_LSU_C_1B_OUT
26 nLDON_C_OUT
5V/24V 27 DGND
28 PWM_LD_POWER_C_OUT
29 DGND
Laser Scanning Unit 30 nVDO_K_B1_DN_CON
31 nVDO_K_B1_DP_CON
(LSU) 32 DGND
33 nHSYNC_K_DN
LSU 34
35
nHSYNC_K_DP
DGND
JC97-04864A 36
37
nSH_LSU_K_1B_OUT
nLDON_K_OUT
38 DGND
39 PWM_LD_POWER_K_OUT
40 DGND
41 ADC_LSU_TEMP_CON
42 5V2_LP_LSU
43 5V2_LP_LSU
44 CLK_LSU_OUT
45 nREADY_LSU_IN
46 nSTART_LSU_OUT
47 DGND
48 24V3
49 24V3
50 nDETECT_LSU

Red color text for 77822, 77825, 77830

Blue color text for 78323, 78325, 78330

912 Chapter 4 Electrical-mechanical diagrams

 Figure 4-4 Temp/Humidity sensor
Engine Controller Board
(ECB)
CN31, HUMIDITY
ADC_OUT_TEMP 1
DGND 2 JC39-02583A
ADC_OUT_HUMI 3
3.3V_SLP 4
3.3V
3.3V
4
Temp/Humidity sensor 3
2
JC32-00015A 1

Exit section
Learn about the electrical-mechanical relationships diagram for the exit section.

Exit section 913

 Figure 4-5 Exit section

JC39-01607A
3
2
1
1
2
3

5V 5V
1
2
JC39-02075A 3

Exit 1 full sensor

0604-001393

Engine Controller Board (ECB)

CN6, EXIT

1 5V2_LP
2 DGND
3 nSENS_PAPER_EXIT1
5V 4 5V2_SLP
5 DGND
6 nSENS_P_BINFULL_EXIT1
7 A_EXIT2
8 nA_EXIT2
9 nB_EXIT2
10 B_EXIT2
11 PWM_RETURN_DUPLEX
12 24V3
13 5V2_LP
14 DGND
15 nSENS_T1_POS
16 5V2_LP
17 DGND
18 nSENS_PAPER_EXIT2
19 5V2_SLP
20 DGND
21 nSENS_P_BINFULL_EXIT2
22 nDETECT_EXIT2
23 DGND
24 DGND
25 COVER_OPEN_SIDE
26 nCOVER_OPEN_SIDE
27 OUT_FAN_FUSER
28 nDETECT_FAN_FUSER_CON
29 DGND
30 N.C

Drive section
Learn about the electrical-mechanical relationships diagram for the drive section.

914 Chapter 4 Electrical-mechanical diagrams

Figure 4-6 Main drive assembly
Engine Controller Board
(ECB)
CN47, PH DRIVER
1 DIR_BLDC_MAIN
2 CLK_BLDC_MAIN
3 nREADY_BLDC_MAIN
4 nEN_BLDC_MAIN
5 GAIN_BLDC_MAIN
6 BRAKE_BLDC_MAIN
7 DGND
8 DGND
9 24V1_LP
10 24V1_LP
11 DGND
12 nSENS_PAPER_FEED1
13 5V2_LP
14 DGND
15 nSENS_P_REGI
16 5V2_LP
17 REGI_CLUTCH_CON Engine Controller Board
18 24V1_LP
19 MP_CLUTCH_CON
(ECB)
20 24V1_LP CN22, OPC DRIVE
21 FEED_CLUTCH_CON CN22 ? OPC DRIVE
22 24V1_LP 1 DIR_BLDC_OPC_K
23 A_T1 2 CLK_BLDC_OPC_K
24V 24 nA_T1 3 nREADY_BLDC_OPC_K
25 nB_T1 4 nEN_BLDC_OPC_K
26 B_T1 24V 5 GAIN_BLDC_OPC_K
27 DIR_BLDC_ITB(OPC_M)
6 BRAKE_BLDC_OPC_K
7 DGND
28 CLK_BLDC_ITB(OPC_M)
8 DGND
29 nREADY_BLDC_ITB(OPC_M) 9 24V2
30 nEN_BLDC_ITB(OPC_M) 10 24V2
24V 31 GAIN_BLDC_ITB(OPC_M) 11 DIR_BLDC_OPC_C
32 BRAKE_BLDC_ITB(OPC_M) 12 CLK_BLDC_OPC_C
JC39-02074A 33 DGND 13 nREADY_BLDC_OPC_C
34 DGND 24V 14 nEN_BLDC_OPC_C
35 15 GAIN_BLDC_OPC_C
24V1_LP
36 16 BRAKE_BLDC_OPC_C
24V1_LP 17 DGND
18 DGND
19 24V2
20 24V2
24V 21 DIR_BLDC_OPC_M
22 CLK_BLDC_OPC_M
23 nREADY_BLDC_OPC_M
24 nEN_BLDC_OPC_M
JC39-01635A 25 GAIN_BLDC_OPC_M
26 BRAKE_BLDC_OPC_M
24V 27 DGND
28 DGND
4

29 24V2
3

OPC Y
2

5V 30 24V2
1

Phase 31
3

DIR_BLDC_OPC_Y
2
1

Sensor 32 CLK_BLDC_OPC_Y
ITB Engage Motor 5V OPC M 0604-001393 33 nREADY_BLDC_OPC_Y
Phase 34 nEN_BLDC_OPC_Y
3

JC93-00452A
2

35 GAIN_BLDC_OPC_Y
1

Sensor 24V 36 BRAKE_BLDC_OPC_Y

5V 0604-001393 1
2 24V 37 DGND
10

.
.
9
.
3

Engine Controller Board 38

2

OPC C DGND
1

OPC K 24V 39 24V2

(ECB) Phase Phase 40 24V2
1
2
10

.
.
9
.

Sensor Sensor
CN19 , OPC SENSOR
0604-001393 0604-001393 24V
5V2_LP 1
1
2
10

.
.
9
.

ON_ERASER_K 2 5V
3.3V_CRUM 3 3 24V
2
SDA_CRUM_DEVE_K 4 OPC Y BLDC
1
2
10

.
.
9
.

1
SCL_CRUM_DEVE_K 5
DGND 6 Motor
10
5V2_LP 7 JC39-02079A 9 JC31-00123A
ON_ERASER_C 8
.
. OPC M BLDC
.
3.3V_CRUM 9 24V 2 Motor
1
SDA_CRUM_DEVE_C 10 JC31-00123A
SCL_CRUM_DEVE_C 11
ITB BLDC Motor OPC C BLDC
DGND 12 Motor
5V2_LP 13 5V JC31-00123A
DGND 14 OPC K BLDC JC31-00123A
nSENS_OPC_HOME_K 15 Motor
5V2_LP 16 5V
DGND 17 JC31-00123A
nSENS_OPC_HOME_C 18
5V2_LP 19
ON_ERASER_M 20
3.3V_CRUM 21
SDA_CRUM_DEVE_M 22
SCL_CRUM_DEVE_M 23
DGND 24
5V2_LP 25
ON_ERASER_Y 26
3.3V_CRUM 27
SDA_CRUM_DEVE_Y 28
SCL_CRUM_DEVE_Y 29
DGND 30
5V2_LP 31 5V
DGND 32
nSENS_OPC_HOME_M 33
5V2_LP 34 5V
DGND 35
nSENS_OPC_HOME_Y 36

Drive section 915

 Figure 4-7 Registration & Tray 1 (MP) drive assembly
Engine Controller Board
(ECB)
CN47, PH DRIVER
1 DIR_BLDC_MAIN
2 CLK_BLDC_MAIN
3 nREADY_BLDC_MAIN
4 nEN_BLDC_MAIN
24V 5 GAIN_BLDC_MAIN
6 BRAKE_BLDC_MAIN
7 DGND
8 DGND
9 24V1_LP
10 24V1_LP
11 DGND
12 nSENS_PAPER_FEED1
13 5V2_LP
14 DGND
15 nSENS_P_REGI
24V 16 5V2_LP
17 REGI_CLUTCH_CON
18 24V1_LP
19 MP_CLUTCH_CON
20 24V1_LP
24V 21 FEED_CLUTCH_CON
REGISTRATION 22 24V1_LP
23 A_T1
DRIVE ASSY 24 nA_T1
JC39-02074A
25 nB_T1
26 B_T1
27 DIR_BLDC_ITB(OPC_M)
28 CLK_BLDC_ITB(OPC_M)
29 nREADY_BLDC_ITB(OPC_M)
30 nEN_BLDC_ITB(OPC_M)
24V 31 GAIN_BLDC_ITB(OPC_M)
32 BRAKE_BLDC_ITB(OPC_M)
REGI ClUTCH, JC47-00037A 33 DGND
34 DGND
35 24V1_LP
36 24V1_LP
24V

MP DRIVE ASSY MP ClUTCH

JC47-00037A

10
9
8
7
6
5

24V
4
3
2
1

MAIN BLDC MOTOR

JC31-00123B

916 Chapter 4 Electrical-mechanical diagrams

Figure 4-8 Fuser and Exit drive assembly
Engine Controller Board
(ECB)
CN40, FUSER
1 5V2_LP
2 FUSER_CRUM
3 nSENS_FUSER_POS1
4 DGND
5 SDA2_CRUM_FUSER
6 SCL2_CRUM_FUSER
7 DGND
8 NC_C_TD
9 NC_C_TC
10 THERM_SIDE2
11 THERM_SIDE1
12 DGND
13 NC_S_TD
14 NC_S_TC
15 DIR_BLDC_FUSER
16 CLK_BLDC_FUSER
17 nREADY_BLDC_FUSER
18 nEN_BLDC_FUSER
24V 19 GAIN_BLDC_FUSER
EXIT DRIVE ASSY 20 BRK_BLDC_FUSER
21 DGND
22 DGND
23 24V3
24 24V3
25 A_EXIT1
24V 26 nA_EXIT1
FUSER DRIVE ASSY
4
3 24V 27 nB_EXIT1
2
1 28 B_EXIT1

JC39-02076A
EXIT1 STEP
MOTOR, JC93-00452A
10
FUSER REDUCTION GEAR 9
8
7
6
5
4
3
24V
2
1

FUSER BLDC
MOTOR, JC31-00123B

Drive section 917

 Figure 4-9 Paper feed drive assembly

24V

4
3
2
1
PAPER FEED DRIVE MOTOR
JC31-00033B

Engine Controller Board

(ECB)
CN47, PH DRIVER
1 DIR_BLDC_MAIN
2 CLK_BLDC_MAIN
3 nREADY_BLDC_MAIN
4 nEN_BLDC_MAIN
5 GAIN_BLDC_MAIN
6 BRAKE_BLDC_MAIN
7 DGND
8 DGND
9 24V1_LP
10 24V1_LP
11 DGND
12 nSENS_PAPER_FEED1
13 5V2_LP
14 DGND
15 nSENS_P_REGI
16 5V2_LP
17 REGI_CLUTCH_CON
18 24V1_LP
19 MP_CLUTCH_CON
20 24V1_LP
21 FEED_CLUTCH_CON
22 24V1_LP
23 A_T1
JC39-02074A 24V 24 nA_T1
25 nB_T1
26 B_T1
27 DIR_BLDC_ITB(OPC_M)
28 CLK_BLDC_ITB(OPC_M)
29 nREADY_BLDC_ITB(OPC_M)
30 nEN_BLDC_ITB(OPC_M)
31 GAIN_BLDC_ITB(OPC_M)
32 BRAKE_BLDC_ITB(OPC_M)
33 DGND
34 DGND
35 24V1_LP
36 24V1_LP

918 Chapter 4 Electrical-mechanical diagrams

Figure 4-10 Toner supply drive assembly

TONER K
DC MOTOR 2 24V
1

5V

3
2
1
TONER K
COUNT
SENSOR
TONER C 24V
2
DC MOTOR 1

5V Engine Controller Board

3

(ECB)
2
1

JC39-02456A
CN15, Toner bottle
24V
TONER C 1 nA_TONER_DC_K
COUNT 2 DGND
5V 3 5V2_LP
SENSOR
4 DGND
5 TONER_COUNT_K_CON
TONER M 24V 6 nA_TONER_DC_C
DC MOTOR 2 24V 7 DGND
1
5V 8 5V2_LP
9 DGND
10 TONER_COUNT_C_CON
11 3.3V_CRUM
5V 12 SDA_CRUM_BOTTLE_K
13 SCL_CRUM_BOTTLE_K
3
2

14
1

DGND
15 3.3V_CRUM
16 SDA_CRUM_BOTTLE_C
TONER M 17 SCL_CRUM_BOTTLE_C
18 DGND
COUNT 24V 19 nA_TONER_DC_M
SENSOR 20 DGND
5V 21 5V2_LP
22 DGND
TONER Y 24V
2 23 TONER_COUNT_M_CON
DC MOTOR 1 24V 24 nA_TONER_DC_Y
25 DGND
26 5V2_LP
5V
27 DGND
5V 28 TONER_COUNT_Y_CON
29 3.3V_CRUM
3
2

30 SDA_CRUM_BOTTLE_M
1

31 SCL_CRUM_BOTTLE_M
32 DGND
33 3.3V_CRUM
TONER Y 34 SDA_CRUM_BOTTLE_Y
COUNT 35 SCL_CRUM_BOTTLE_Y
SENSOR 36 DGND

Drive section 919

 Figure 4-11 Paper pickup drive assembly

Pickup drive 1
JC93-00442C

4
3
2
1

24V

Pickup drive 2
JC93-00442C
4
3
2
1

24V

Engine Controller Board

(ECB)
CN46, PICKUP
1 5V2_LP
2 DGND
3 PAPER_EMPTY1
4 5V2_LP
5 DGND
6 nSENS_PAPER_LIFT1
7 A_PICKUP1
24V 8 nA_PICKUP1
JC39-02078A nB_PICKUP1
9
10 B_PICKUP1

11 A_FEED
12 nA_FEED
13 nB_FEED
14 B_FEED
15 5V2_LP
16 DGND
17 PAPER_EMPTY2
18 5V2_LP
19 DGND
20 nSENS_PAPER_LIFT2
21 DGND
22 nSENS_PAPER_FEED2
23 5V2_LP
24 A_PICKUP2
25 nA_PICKUP2
26 nB_PICKUP2
24V 27 B_PICKUP2
28 N.C

920 Chapter 4 Electrical-mechanical diagrams

Paper handling section
Learn about the electrical-mechanical relationships diagram for the paper handling section.

Figure 4-12 First & Second pickup assembly

Engine Controller Board
(ECB)
CN46, PICKUP
1 6
2 5 1 5V2_LP
5V
3 4 2 DGND
JC39-01588A
4 3 3 PAPER_EMPTY2
5 2
EMPTY2 SENSOR 6 1 4 5V2_LP
5V
 5 DGND
3 6 nSENS_PAPER_LIFT2
5V
2
3 7 A_PICKUP1
5V 1
2 8 nA_PICKUP1
1 LIFT2 SENSOR 9 nB_PICKUP1

10 B_PICKUP1
11 A_FEED
12 nA_FEED
JC39-02078A 13 nB_FEED
14 B_FEED
5V
15 5V2_LP
16 DGND
17 PAPER_EMPTY3
18 5V2_LP
19 DGND
5V 20 nSENS_PAPER_LIFT3
1 6 21 DGND
2 5 22 nSENS_PAPER_FEED2
3 4 23 5V2_LP
JC39-01588A
4 3
5 2 24 A_PICKUP2
6 1 25 nA_PICKUP2
EMPTY3 SENSOR 26 nB_PICKUP2

3 27 B_PICKUP2
5V 28 N.C
2
3 1
5V 2
1 LIFT3 SENSOR


Paper handling section 921

 Figure 4-13 Registration assembly

REGISTRATION
SENSOR, 3
0604-001502 2
1 5V

Engine Controller Board

(ECB)
CN47, PH DRIVER
1 DIR_BLDC_MAIN
2 CLK_BLDC_MAIN
JC39-01473A 3 nREADY_BLDC_MAIN
4 nEN_BLDC_MAIN
5 GAIN_BLDC_MAIN
6 BRAKE_BLDC_MAIN
7 DGND
8 DGND
9 24V1_LP
10 24V1_LP
FEED1 SENSOR DGND
1 6 5V 11
5V 2 5 12 nSENS_PAPER_FEED1
3 4 13 5V2_LP
JC39-02113A 4 3
JC39-02074A
1 3 14 DGND
2 2 5V 5 2
15 nSENS_P_REGI
3 1 6 1 5V 16 5V2_LP
17 REGI_CLUTCH_CON
18 24V1_LP
19 MP_CLUTCH_CON
20 24V1_LP
21 FEED_CLUTCH_CON
22 24V1_LP
23 A_T1
24 nA_T1
25 nB_T1
26 B_T1
27 DIR_BLDC_ITB(OPC_M)
28 CLK_BLDC_ITB(OPC_M)
29 nREADY_BLDC_ITB(OPC_M)
30 nEN_BLDC_ITB(OPC_M)
31 GAIN_BLDC_ITB(OPC_M)
32 BRAKE_BLDC_ITB(OPC_M)
33 DGND
34 DGND
35 24V1_LP
36 24V1_LP

922 Chapter 4 Electrical-mechanical diagrams

Frame section
Learn about the electrical-mechanical relationships diagram for the frame section.

Figure 4-14 Front frame

Front Cover Open Switch
JC93-00466A
2 3.3V
1

5V 3
2
Engine Controller Board 1
(ECB) TCU Waste
Installation sensor
CN32, Front color
0604-001393
DGND 1
4
TC_VIN_K 2 24V 3
24V1_LP 3 2 TCU Motor
TSEN_VCONT_K 4 JC39-02080A 1 Assembly
DGND 5 3.3V JC93-00894A
nCOVER_FRONT_CON 6
4
5V1_SLP 7 5V 5V 3
DGND 8 2
TCU Waste Level Sensor
nDETECT_WASTE_INST_CON 9 1 JC93-00492A
A_WASTE 10
nA_WASTE 11 24V
nB_WASTE 12
B_WASTE 13
DGND 14
TC_VIN_C 15
24V1_LP 16
TSEN_VCONT_C 17
DGND 18
TC_VIN_M 19 Engine Controller Board
24V1_LP 20 (ECB)
TSEN_VCONT_M 21
DGND 22 CN23, Shutter
TC_VIN_Y 23
24V1_LP 24 1 DGND
TSEN_VCONT_Y 25 2 DMOT_ACRSHUTTER
26 3 5V2_LP
N.C
4 DGND
5 nSENS_ACR_SHUTTER_HOME
1 4 6 DGND
5V 5V ADC_WASTE_LEVEL_CON
2 3 7
JC39-01295A 3 2
JC39-02084A 8 ON_WTB_LED
4 1 9 5V2_LP

Frame section 923

 Figure 4-15 Rear frame

Side Cover Open Switch

JC93-01467A

1
2
3
3.3V

JC39-02075A

Engine Controller Board

(ECB)

CN6, EXIT
1 5V2_LP
2 DGND
3 nSENS_PAPER_EXIT1
4
3 1.8V 4 5V2_SLP
2 5 DGND
1 6 nSENS_P_BINFULL_EXIT1
7 A_EXIT2
Paper Size Sensor 1 8 nA_EXIT2
JC93-00018B 9 nB_EXIT2
10 B_EXIT2
4
3 1.8V 11 PWM_RETURN_DUPLEX
2 12 24V3
1 13 5V2_LP
14 DGND
Paper Size Sensor 2 Engine Controller Board 15 nSENS_T1_POS
JC93-00018B 16 5V2_LP
(ECB) 17 DGND
18 nSENS_PAPER_EXIT2
CN4, FDB IF 19 5V2_SLP
1 20 DGND
ZEROCROSS_IN
2 21 nSENS_P_BINFULL_EXIT2
DGND
3 22 nDETECT_EXIT2
DGND
4 23 DGND
ON_SMPS_RELAY
5 24V1 24 DGND
JC39-02564A 6 ON_FUSER_RELAY 25 COVER_OPEN_SIDE
3.3V 26 nCOVER_OPEN_SIDE
7 FUSER 24V
8 DGND 27 OUT_FAN_FUSER
9 ON_FUSER_SIDE 28 nDETECT_FAN_FUSER_CON
10 ON_FUSER_CENTER 29 DGND
11 OUT_FAN_DEVE 30 N.C
12 nDETECT_FAN_DEVE_CON
13 DGND
14 nEN_24V_SMPS2_O
15 DGND
16 TRAY OPEN1
1.8V 17 DGND
18 ADC_PAPER_SIZE1
19 1.8V
20 TRAY OPEN2
1.8V 21 DGND
22 ADC_PAPER_SIZE2
23 1.8V
24 OUT_FAN_SMPS1
25 nDETECT_FAN_SMPS1_CON
26 DGND
27 ADC_SMPS1_TEMP_CON
28 nEN_24V_SMPS1_O
29 DGND
30 N.C

924 Chapter 4 Electrical-mechanical diagrams

Figure 4-16 Automatic color registration (ACR) assembly

Inner Temperature Sensor

2 5V
1
1
2 5V
3
5

1
CTD Rear Sensor
2 5V JC32-00014A
3
4
5

CTD Center Sensor

1
2
JC32-00014A
3 5V
5

CTD Front Sensor

JC32-00014A
Engine Controller Board
(ECB)
CN12, ID SENSOR
1 ACR_P_REAR
5V 2 5V_ACR
3 DGND
4 ACR_LED_REAR

5 ACR_P_FRONT
5V 6 5V_ACR
7 DGND
JC39-02077A 8 ACR_LED_FRONT
JC39-02763A 9 CTD_P_CENT
10 5V_ACR
5V 11 DGND
12 CTD_S_CENT
13 CTD_LED_CENT
5V 14 ADC_INNER_TEMP_CON
15 DGND
16 N.C

Red color text for E77422, E77428

Blue color text for E78223, E78228

Frame section 925

 Figure 4-17 Feed sensor
< MAIN FRAME >
Engine Controller Board
FEED SENSOR 1 (ECB)
3
2 CN46, PICKUP
1
1 5V2_LP
5V 2 DGND
3 PAPER_EMPTY1
4 5V2_LP
5 DGND
1 3 6 nSENS_PAPER_LIFT1
JC39-01589A
2 2
5V 3 1 7 A_PICKUP1
8 nA_PICKUP1
JC39-02078A 9 nB_PICKUP1
10 B_PICKUP1

11 A_FEED
3 12 nA_FEED
2
1
5V 5V 13 nB_FEED
14 B_FEED
FEED SENSOR 2 15 5V2_LP
16 DGND
17 PAPER_EMPTY2
18 5V2_LP
19 DGND
20 nSENS_PAPER_LIFT2
21 DGND
Engine Controller Board 22 nSENS_PAPER_FEED2
23 5V2_LP
(ECB)
24 A_PICKUP2
JC39-02113A 25
CN47, PH DRIVER nA_PICKUP2
26 nB_PICKUP2
1 DIR_BLDC_MAIN 27 B_PICKUP2
2 CLK_BLDC_MAIN 28 N.C
3 nREADY_BLDC_MAIN
4 nEN_BLDC_MAIN
5 GAIN_BLDC_MAIN
6 BRAKE_BLDC_MAIN
7 DGND
8 DGND
9 24V1_LP
10 24V1_LP
1 6 11 DGND
2 5 JC39-02074A
12 nSENS_PAPER_FEED1
5V 3 4 5V 13 5V2_LP
4 3 14 DGND
5 2 15 nSENS_P_REGI
6 1 16 5V2_LP
17 REGI_CLUTCH_CON
18 24V1_LP
19 MP_CLUTCH_CON
20 24V1_LP
21 FEED_CLUTCH_CON
22 24V1_LP
23 A_T1
24 nA_T1
25 nB_T1
26 B_T1
27 DIR_BLDC_ITB(OPC_M)
28 CLK_BLDC_ITB(OPC_M)
29 nREADY_BLDC_ITB(OPC_M)
30 nEN_BLDC_ITB(OPC_M)
31 GAIN_BLDC_ITB(OPC_M)
32 BRAKE_BLDC_ITB(OPC_M)
33 DGND
34 DGND
35 24V1_LP
36 24V1_LP

Fuser section
Learn about the electrical-mechanical relationships diagram for the fuser section.

926 Chapter 4 Electrical-mechanical diagrams

 Figure 4-18 Fuser assembly

Engine Controller Board

(ECB)
CN40, FUSER
4
3 4 Fuser Position
2 3
2 Sensor 1 1 5V2_LP
NC Thermistor JC39-01336A 3 2 2 FUSER_CRUM
2 3 5V 3 nSENS_FUSER_POS1
5V 1
5V 4
NC Thermistor 5
14
4 DGND
6
13
5 SDA2_CRUM_FUSER
7 6 SCL2_CRUM_FUSER
12
8
5V 11 7 DGND

1
2
3
9
10 8 NC_C_TD
Fuser 6
5 JC39-01677A 10
9 5V
4 9 NC_C_TC
EEPROM 3
1
8
10 THERM_SIDE2 (Mono only)
2
1 5V 2
7
JC39-02076A
6 11 THERM_SIDE1 (Mono only)
3
5
4
4 12 DGND
5 13 NC_S_TD
3
6
7
2 14 NC_S_TC
1 DIR_BLDC_FUSER
8 15
9 16 CLK_BLDC_FUSER
10
17 nREADY_BLDC_FUSER
11
18 nEN_BLDC_FUSER
19 GAIN_BLDC_FUSER
20 BRK_BLDC_FUSER
21 DGND
22 DGND
23 24V3
24 24V3
25 A_EXIT1
26 nA_EXIT1
27 nB_EXIT1
28 B_EXIT1

Right door section

Learn about the electrical-mechanical relationships diagram for the right door section.

Right door section 927

 Figure 4-19 Right door assembly

Engine Controller Board

(ECB)
CN36, SIDE
5V2_SLP 15 1
1 14 2
DGND 2 13 3
12 4
nSENS_P_MP_EMPTY 3 11 5
10 6
MP_SOL_CON 4 9 7
8 8
24V3 5
24V 7
6
9
10
A_DUP 6 5 11
4 12
nA_DUP 7 3 13
nB_DUP 8 2 14
1 15
B_DUP 9 30 16
JC39-01601A 29 17
5V2_LP 10 28 18
27 19
DGND 11 26 20
nSENS_P_FUSER_OUT 12 5V 25 21
24 22
23 23
OUT_FAN_DUPLEX2 13 22 24
nDETECT_FAN_DUPLEX2_CON 14 21 25
20 26
DGND 15 19 27

(N.C) 16 24V 18
17
28
29
16 30
(N.C) 17
(N.C) 18 JC39-02704A
5V2_LP 19
DGND 20
nSENS_CURL2 21

5V2_LP 22 24V 3
DGND 23 2
3 1
nSENS_JAM_DUPLEX 24
2
OUT_FAN_DUPLEX1 25 24V 1 Dupelx 1 Fan
nDETECT_FAN_DUPLEX1_CON 26 JC31-00160C
24V
DGND 27 Duplex 2 Fan
1.8V 28 JC31-00160C
ADC_MP_SIZE 29
DGND 30

5V 3
2
1
Fuser Out Sensor
0604-001393
4
3
2
24V 1
Duplex Step
Motor
JC95-01510A

928 Chapter 4 Electrical-mechanical diagrams

Figure 4-20 Tray 1 assembly

24V

TRAY1(MP) SOLENOID
JC33-00029B

3
2
Tray 1(MP) 1
Empty Sensor
0604-001393 5V

JC39-01604A
Engine Controller Board (ECB)
CN36, SIDE
5V 1 30
2 29
5V 1 3 3 28 5V 1 5V2_SLP
2 2
3 1
4 27 2 DGND
JC39-02704A 5
.
26
. JC39-01601A 3 nSENS_P_MP_EMPTY
1 2 24V . .
24V
2 1 . . 4 MP_SOL_CON
30 1
24V 5 24V3
6 A_DUP
7 nA_DUP
8 nB_DUP
9 B_DUP
10 5V2_LP
11 DGND
12 nSENS_P_FUSER_OUT
13 OUT_FAN_DUPLEX2
14 nDETECT_FAN_DUPLEX2_CON
15 DGND
16 (N.C)
17 (N.C)
18 (N.C)
19 5V2_LP
20 DGND
21 nSENS_CURL2
22 5V2_LP
23 DGND
24 nSENS_JAM_DUPLEX
25 OUT_FAN_DUPLEX1
26 nDETECT_FAN_DUPLEX1_CON
27 DGND
28 1.8V
29 ADC_MP_SIZE
30 DGND

Right door section 929

 Figure 4-21 Right door duplex

Curl 2
Sensor
0604-001393
3
5V 2
1
3
5V 2 5V 3
1 2
Curl 1 1
Sensor
Duplex Jam
0604-001393
Sensor
0604-001393

Engine Contorller Board

CN36, Side
CN36 (Right door)
- SIDE
1 5V2_SLP
2 DGND
3 nSENS_P_MP_EMPTY
4 MP_SOL_CON
5 24V3
6 A_DUP
7 nA_DUP
8 nB_DUP
9 B_DUP
1 15 10 5V2_LP
2 14
JC39-01603A 3 13
11 DGND
4 12 12 nSENS_P_FUSER_OUT
5 11 13 OUT_FAN_DUPLEX2
6 10 14 nDETECT_FAN_DUPLEX2_CON
7 9 15 DGND
8 8
9 7 5V 16 5V2_LP
1 9 10 6 17 DGND
2 8 11 5 18 nSENS_CURL1
5V 3 7 12 4 19 5V2_LP
13 3 5V
4 6 20 DGND
14 2
5 5 JC39-02704A 15 1 21 nSENS_CURL2
5V 6 4 16 30 5V 22 5V2_LP
7 3 17 29 23 DGND
8 2 5V 18 28 JC39-01601A
24 nSENS_JAM_DUPLEX
19 27
5V 9 1
20 26 25 OUT_FAN_DUPLEX1
5V 21 25 26 nDETECT_FAN_DUPLEX1_CON
22 24 27 DGND
23 23 28 1.8V
5V 24 22
25 21
29 ADC_MP_SIZE
26 20 30 DGND
27 19
28 18
29 17
30 16

930 Chapter 4 Electrical-mechanical diagrams

 Figure 4-22 Right door output

5V 3
2
1
Fuser out sensor
0604-001393

JC39-01604A

Engine Contorller Board

(ECB)
CN36, Side
CN36 (Right door)
- SIDE
1 5V2_SLP
2 DGND
3 nSENS_P_MP_EMPTY
4 MP_SOL_CON
5 24V3
1 30 6 A_DUP
. . 7 nA_DUP
. .
8 nB_DUP
. .
9 B_DUP
1 3 JC39-02704A 10 21 JC39-01601A 10 5V2_LP
2 2 11 20 11 DGND
5V 3 1 5V 12 19 5V 12 nSENS_P_FUSER_OUT
. . 13 OUT_FAN_DUPLEX2
. . 14 nDETECT_FAN_DUPLEX2_CON
. . 15 DGND
30 1 16 (N.C)
17 (N.C)
18 (N.C)
19 5V2_LP
20 DGND
21 nSENS_CURL2
22 5V2_LP
23 DGND
24 nSENS_JAM_DUPLEX
25 OUT_FAN_DUPLEX1
26 nDETECT_FAN_DUPLEX1_CON
27 DGND
28 1.8V
29 ADC_MP_SIZE
30 DGND

Scanner section
Learn about the electrical-mechanical relationships diagram for the scanner section.

Scanner section 931

 Figure 4-23 Scanner assembly (1 of 2)
Engine Controller Board (ECB)

CN14, CCDM I/F

50 GND
49 MCLKP
48 MCLKN
47 GND
46 SEN
45 SCLK
44 SDI
43 GND
42 TRIG
41 RESETb
40 SDO
39 GND
38 LVDO4N
LVDO4N 37 LVDO4P

LVDO3N

LVDO2N

LVDO1N

LVDO0N
LVDO4P

LVDO3P

LVDO2P

LVDO1P

LVDO0P
36 GND
RESETb
MCLKN
MCLKP

LVCKN
LVCKP
35 LVDO3N
SCLK

TRIG

3.3V
3.3V
3.3V
3.3V
3.3V
3.3V
3.3V
3.3V
GND

GND

GND

GND

GND

GND

GND

GND

GND

GND

GND
GND

GND
GND
SDO
SEN

10V
10V
10V
10V
SDI

34 LVDO3P

5V
5V
5V
5V
CCD PCA

33 GND
32 LVCKN
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
31 LVCKP
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

30 GND
29 LVDO2N
28 LVDO2P
27 GND
26 LVDO1N
25 LVDO1P
24 GND
23 LVDO0N
22 LVDO0P
21 GND
JC39-02119A 20 3.3V
19 3.3V
18 3.3V
17 3.3V
16 3.3V
15 3.3V
14 3.3V
13 3.3V
12 GND
11 GND
10 5V
9 5V
8 5V
7 5V
Platen Cover Open2 Sensor 6 GND
5V JC97-04516A 5 GND
Platen Scanner 4 10V
Scan Joint 3 10V
Home Detect Step Motor 2 10V
PCA JC31-00158A 1 10V
Sensor
JC92-02781A
5V
24V CN13, Scanner I/F

34 SCAN_MTR_MS1
33 SCAN_MTR_MS2
32 PWM_SCAN_MTR
31 24V
30 SCAN_MTR_DIR
29 24V
28 nEN_MTR_PLS
27 24V
26 SCAN_MTR_PLS
25 24V
JC39-02129A 24 PWM_WLED_CTL
23 GND
22 nFLAT_COVER_OPEN2
21 5V
20 nFLAT_COVER_OPEN1
19 5V
5V 5V JC39-02128A 18 nCCD_HOME
24V 17 GND
16 nAPS_SENOSR2
15 5VS
6
5
4
3
2
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
Cover open/ Home Sensor

14 nAPS_SENSOR1
Step Motor

13 GND
nFLAT_COVER_OPEN2

nB_SCAN_MTR
nA_SCAN_MTR

B_SCAN_MTR
A_SCAN_MTR

12 nDETECT_ADF
11 3.3V
10 nSENS_PAPER_ADF
Scan Joint PCA 9 GND
nCCD_HOME

24V

24V

8 nSENS_P_POS1
JC92-02781A 7 GND
6 TXD_DADF
GND

GND

5 GND
5V

5V

4 RXD_DADF
3 GND
2 nRST_DADF
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

1 nSENS_P_POS2
nFLAT_COVER_OPEN2

nFLAT_COVER_OPEN1

nSENS_PAPER_ADF
PWM_SCAN_MTR

PWM_WLED_CTL
SCAN_MTR_MS1
SCAN_MTR_MS2
Scanner I/F

SCAN_MTR_PLS

nAPS_SENSOR1
nAPS_SENOSR2

nSENS_P_POS1

nSENS_P_POS2
SCAN_MTR_DIR

nEN_MTR_PLS

nDETECT_ADF
nCCD_HOME

nRST_DADF
RXD_DADF
TXD_DADF
3.3V
GND

GND

GND

GND

GND
GND

GND
24V

24V

24V

24V

5VS
5V

5V

932 Chapter 4 Electrical-mechanical diagrams

 Figure 4-24 Scanner assembly (2 of 2)
SSA Interface sub board
Scan Joint PCA, JC92-02781A
Cover open Sensor
JC39-02132A 3.3V WLED / APS / Cover sensor

APS SENSOR

5V

JC39-02130A
5V
5V WLED
APS sensor1 JC39-02131A
0604-001453 6.6V
5V

LED 6.6V APS sensor2, 0604-001453

(Lamp for scanner
JC97-04521A) JC39-02120A

3.3V
Platen_Cover_Open
Sensor
(magnetic)

Document feeder section

Learn about the electrical-mechanical relationships diagram for the document feeder section.

Document feeder section 933

 Figure 4-25 Document feeder (1 of 2)

5V
3
2
5V Paper Lenth 3 Sensor
1 3 0604-001393
RADF PCA Paper Width 1 3
2 5V
JC92-03002B Sensor 1 2
0604-001393 1
3
Paper Width 2 Sensor 2 5V 3
5V 0604-001393 Paper 1 2 5V
Lenth 2 Sensor 1

0604-001393 Paper Lenth 2 Sensor

0604-001393
Exit Sensor
0604-001393
0

Scan Joint PCA RADF PCA I/F Length , width Sensor

JC92-02781A -2mm / 10x2p -1.5mm / 15x1p

24V 1 1 24V 5V 1 5V
24V 2 2 24V GND 2
24V 3 3 24V nSENS_P_LENGTH1 3
24V 4 4 24V
24V 5 5 24V 5V 4 5V
GND 6 6 GND GND 5
5V 7 7 5V nSENS_P_LENGTH2 6
5V 8 8 5V
GND 9
JC39-02133A 9 GND 5V 7 5V
5VS 10 10 5VS GND 8 JC39-01625A
nRESET_ADF 11 24V 11 nRESET_ADF nSENS_P_WIDTH1 9
RXD 12 12 RXD
TXD 13 13 TXD 5V 10 5V
POS1 14 14 POS1 GND 11
nDETECT_P_ADF 15 15 nDETECT_P_ADF nSENS_P_WIDTH2 12
nDETECT_ADF 16 16 nDETECT_ADF
GND 17 17 GND 5V 13 5V
GND 18 18 GND GND 14
GND 19 19 GND nSENS_P_WIDTH3 15
GND 20 20 GND

EXIT SENSOR
-2mm / 3x1p RADF PCA
5V 3 5V 1 5V JC92-03002B
2 2 GND
JC39-01623A 3 nSENS_P_EXIT
JC39-02451A 1

934 Chapter 4 Electrical-mechanical diagrams

 Figure 4-26 Document feeder (2 of 2)

24V
5V 5V 5V
Regi Clutch 3 3 3
JC47-00033G 2 5V2 2
1 1 1
Cover Open Detect ADF Motor
Sensor Sensor JC31-00156C
0604-001393 Regi Sensor 0604-001393
9
0604-001393 8
7
6
5
3.3V
24V 4
3
2
Exit Idle 1
3 Sensor Pickup
2
1 0604-001393 Clutch
5V JC47-00033G 24V
EXIT SOLENOID
JC33-00007A

(;,7,'/(6(1625 5HJL&RYHURSHQGHWHFW6HQVRU
-1.5mm / 3x1p -1.5mm / 9x1p

͢ ͦ· 5V
JC39-01622A ͢ ͦ· ͣ ͸Ϳ͵
JC39-01627A ͣ ͸Ϳ͵ ͤ Ο΄ͶͿ΄ΐ΁ΐ΃Ͷ͸ͺ͢
5V ͤ Ο΄ͶͿ΄ΐ΁ΐͶΉͺ΅ΐͺ͵ͽͶ
ͥ ͦ· 5V
ͦ ͸Ϳ͵ JC39-01627A
ͶΩΚΥ͑ΤΠΝΖΟΠΚΕ ͧ Ο΄ͶͿ΄ΐ΁ΐʹ΀·Ͷ΃ΐ΀΁ͶͿ
-2mm / 2x1p

͢ ΁Έ;ΐͶΉͺ΅ΐ΄΀ͽ
ͨ ͦ· 5V
ͩ ͸Ϳ͵
ͣ ͣͥ· ͪ Ο΄ͶͿ΄ΐ΁ΐ͵Ͷ΅Ͷʹ΅
24V

RADF PCA
JC92-03002B
΄ΔΒΟ͑ΤΖΟΤΠΣ͑͠ΡΚΔΜΦΡ͝΃ΖΘΚ͑ʹΝΦΥΔΙ
-1.5mm / 7x1p ;ΠΥΠΣ
-1.5mm / 9x1p
͢ ͦ·
ͣ ͸Ϳ͵ ͢ ͷ͸ʹͼ͢
ͤ Ο΄ͶͿ΄ΐ΁ΐ΄ʹͲͿ ͣ ͹Έ͢
ͤ ͹·͢
24V ͢ ͣ 24V ͥ ͣͥ· ͥ ͹Ά͢ JC39-01621A
ͣ ͢ ͦ ΁ͺʹͼΆ΁ΐʹͽΆ΅ʹ͹ΐʹ ͦ ͸Ϳ͵
ͧ ͤͤ͟·
3.3V
JC39-01627A ͧ ͣͥ· ͨ Έ͢
͢ ͣ ͨ ΃Ͷ͸ͺΐʹͽΆ΅ʹ͹ΐʹ ͩ ·͢
ͣ ͢ 24V ͪ Ά͢
24V

Image formation section

Learn about the electrical-mechanical relationships diagram for the image formation section.

Image formation section 935

 Figure 4-27 Image transfer belt (ITB) assembly
Engine Controller Board (ECB)
CN6, EXIT
1 5V2_LP
2 DGND
3 nSENS_PAPER_EXIT1
4 5V2_SLP
5 DGND
6 nSENS_P_BINFULL_EXIT1
7 A_EXIT2
8 nA_EXIT2
9 nB_EXIT2
10 B_EXIT2
11 PWM_RETURN_DUPLEX
12 24V3
5V 1 8 5V 5V 13 5V2_LP
2 7 14 DGND
JC39-01629A 3 6 JC39-02075A 15 nSENS_T1_POS
4 5 16 5V2_LP
5 4 17 DGND
6 3 18 nSENS_PAPER_EXIT2
7 2 19 5V2_SLP
8 1
20 DGND
21 nSENS_P_BINFULL_EXIT2
22 nDETECT_EXIT2
23 DGND
24 DGND
25 COVER_OPEN_SIDE
26 nCOVER_OPEN_SIDE
27 OUT_FAN_FUSER
28 nDETECT_FAN_FUSER_CON
29 DGND
30 N.C

5V
T1 position
3
2
1

sensor
0604-001393

936 Chapter 4 Electrical-mechanical diagrams

Figure 4-28 Toner cartridges
Engine Controller Board
(ECB)

CN15, Toner bottle

nA_TONER_DC_K 1
DGND 2
5V2_LP 3
DGND 4 TONER K CRUM
TONER_COUNT_K_CON 5 3
nA_TONER_DC_C 6 2
DGND 7 3.3V 1
5V2_LP 8
DGND 9
TONER_COUNT_C_CON 10
3.3V_CRUM 11
SDA_CRUM_BOTTLE_K 12 3.3V
TONER C CRUM
SCL_CRUM_BOTTLE_K 13
DGND 14
3.3V_CRUM 15 3.3V 3
2
SDA_CRUM_BOTTLE_C 16 3.3V 1
SCL_CRUM_BOTTLE_C 17
DGND 18
nA_TONER_DC_M 19
DGND 20
5V2_LP 21
DGND 22
TONER_COUNT_M_CON 23 JC39-02081A 3
nA_TONER_DC_Y 24 2
DGND 25 3.3V 1
5V2_LP 26
DGND 27
TONER M CRUM
TONER_COUNT_Y_CON 28
3.3V_CRUM 29
SDA_CRUM_BOTTLE_M 30
SCL_CRUM_BOTTLE_M 31 3.3V
DGND 32
3.3V_CRUM 33 3
SDA_CRUM_BOTTLE_Y 34 2
SCL_CRUM_BOTTLE_Y 35 3.3V 1
DGND 36 3.3V
TONER Y CRUM

Image formation section 937

 Figure 4-29 TC sensor

TC SENSOR
(C,M,Y,K)

Engine Controller Board

(ECB)

CN32, Front color 4 1 4

24V 3 2 24V 3
2 3 2
DGND 1 1 4 JC39-01675A 1
TC_VIN_K 2 24V TC K SENSOR
24V1_LP 3 JC39-02080A
TSEN_VCONT_K 4
DGND 5
nCOVER_FRONT_CON 6 4 1 4
24V 3 2 24V 3
5V1_SLP 7 2 3 2
DGND 8 JC39-01675A
1 4 1 TC C SENSOR
nDETECT_WASTE_INST_CON 9
A_WASTE 10
nA_WASTE 11
nB_WASTE 12
B_WASTE 13 4 1 4
24V 3 2 24V 3
DGND 14 2 3 2
TC_VIN_C 15 JC39-02080A JC39-01675A 1
1 4 TC M SENSOR
24V1_LP 16 24V
TSEN_VCONT_C 17
DGND 18
TC_VIN_M 19 JC39-02080A
24V1_LP 20 24V 4 1 4
24V 24V 3
3 2
TSEN_VCONT_M 21 2
2 3 JC39-01675A
DGND 22 1 4 1 TC Y SENSOR
23 JC39-02080A
TC_VIN_Y
24V1_LP 24 24V
TSEN_VCONT_Y 25
N.C 26

938 Chapter 4 Electrical-mechanical diagrams

 Figure 4-30 Toner crum & eraser sensor

DEVE CRUM
(C,M,Y,K)

ERASER SENSOR
(C,M,Y,K)

5V 2
2 1 1 5V 2
1 2 1
Engine Controller Board DEVE K CRUM
MODULAR
(ECB) PBA
JC39-01658A
1
4 1
CN19 , OPC SENSOR
3.3V 3 2 2
2 3 3
5V2_LP 5V 3.3V
1 JC39-02079A 1 4 4
ON_ERASER_K 2 ERASER K SENSOR
3.3V_CRUM 3
SDA_CRUM_DEVE_K 4
SCL_CRUM_DEVE_K 5 3.3V 2 1 5V
DGND 6
5V 2
1 2 1
5V2_LP 7 DEVE C CRUM
ON_ERASER_C 8 5V MODULAR
3.3V_CRUM 9 JC39-02079A4 PBA 1 JC39-01658A 1
SDA_CRUM_DEVE_C 10 2
SCL_CRUM_DEVE_C 11 3 2
3.3V 3
DGND 12 3.3V 2 3 3.3V
1 4 4
5V2_LP 13
DGND 14
ERASER C SENSOR
nSENS_OPC_HOME_K 15
5V2_LP 16 5V
DGND 17 5V 2 1 2
nSENS_OPC_HOME_C 18 1 2 1
5V2_LP 19
5V DEVE M CRUM
ON_ERASER_M 20 MODULAR JC39-01658A
3.3V_CRUM 21 4 PBA 1 1
SDA_CRUM_DEVE_M
JC39-02079A
22 3 2 2
SCL_CRUM_DEVE_M 23 3.3V 2 3 3
DGND 24 3.3V 3.3V
1 4 4
5V2_LP 25
ON_ERASER_Y 26 5V ERASER M SENSOR
3.3V_CRUM 27
SDA_CRUM_DEVE_Y 28 5V
SCL_CRUM_DEVE_Y 29 2 1 5V 2
DGND 30 JC39-02079A 1 2 1
5V2_LP 31 3.3V DEVE Y CRUM
DGND 32 MODULAR
nSENS_OPC_HOME_M 33
JC39-01658A
4 PBA 1 1
5V2_LP 34 3 2 2
DGND 35 3.3V 2 3 3
nSENS_OPC_HOME_Y 36 1 4 3.3V
4
ERASER Y SENSOR

Optional dual-cassette feeder (DCF)

Learn about the electrical-mechanical relationships diagram for the optional dual-cassette feeder
(DCF).

Optional dual-cassette feeder (DCF) 939

 Figure 4-31 Pickup motor 1/2, feed motor, paper size sensor 1/2 and cover open sensor (DCF)
DCF PCA (Y1F97-67001) JC39-01690A
Engine Controller
CN7, Engine interface
Board (ECB)

CN3, Side cover open

24V4 1 24V
nSIDECOVER_OPEN 2

CN5, Motor interface

N.C 1
N.C 2
A_FEED 3
nA_FEED 4 24V
nB_FEED 5
B_FEED 6
N.C 7
N.C 8
A_PICKUP1 9
nA_PICKUP1 10 24V
nB_PICKUP1 11 JC39-01691A
B_PICKUP1 12 Cover open sensor
A_PICKUP2 13 with harness 24V
nA_PICKUP2 14 24V (JC39-01696A)
nB_PICKUP2 15
B_PICKUP2 16
N.C 17
Pickup motor 1 4
CN9, Paper size 1,2 3
(JC93-00452A), 2
nCASSETTE1_OPEN 1 1
24V
GND 2 4
ADC_P_SIZE1 3 3.3V Pickup motor 2 3
(JC93-00452A) 2 24V
3.3V 4 1
nCASSETTE2_OPEN 5 6
GND 6 4
ADC_P_SIZE2 7 3 24V
3.3V 1
3.3V 8
Feed motor
JC39-01695A
(JC31-00033B)
3.3V
4
3
2
Paper size sensor 1
1 (JC93-00018B)
4
3 Paper size sensor 2
3.3V
2 (JC93-00018B)
1

940 Chapter 4 Electrical-mechanical diagrams

Figure 4-32 Feed sensor 1, empty sensor 1, and lift sensor 1 for Tray 4 (DCF)

Feed sensor 1
(0604-001381) Pickup assembly for tray 4

3
5V 2
1

DCF PCA
(Y1F97-67001)
CN6, Sensor interface
5V 1 5V_SUSP
1 9
2 GND
2 8
3 7
3 nSENS_P_EMPTY1
4 6 4 5V_SUSP
5V 5
5 5 GND
JC39-01692A
6 4 6 nSENS_LIFT1_LIMIT
7 3 7 GND
JC39-01693A 8 2 8 nSENS_P_FEED1
9 1 5V
9 5V_SUSP
10 5V_SUSP
11 GND
12 nSENS_P_EMPTY2
13 5V_SUSP
14 GND
15 nSENS_LIFT2_LIMIT
16 GND
17 nSENS_P_FEED2
18 5V_SUSP

3
5V
2
1
5V 3 Empty
2 sensor 1
1 Lift (0604-001393)
sensor 1
(0604-001393)

Optional dual-cassette feeder (DCF) 941

 Figure 4-33 Feed sensor 2, empty sensor 2, and lift sensor 2 for Tray 5 (DCF)

Feed sensor 2
(0604-001381) Pickup assembly for tray 5
3
2
5V 1

DCF PCA
(Y1F97-67001)
CN6, Sensor interface
1 5V_SUSP
2 GND
3 nSENS_P_EMPTY1
4 5V_SUSP
5 GND
6 nSENS_LIFT1_LIMIT
7 GND
8 nSENS_P_FEED1
JC39-01693A 9 5V_SUSP
1 9
2 8 5V
10 5V_SUSP
3 7 11 GND
4 6 12 nSENS_P_EMPTY2
5 5 JC39-01692A 13 5V_SUSP
6 4 14 GND
7 3 5V 15 nSENS_LIFT2_LIMIT
8 2
9 1 16 GND
17 nSENS_P_FEED2
5V 18 5V_SUSP

3
2 5V
3 1
2 Empty
5V sensor 2
1 Lift
sensor 2 (0604-001393)
(0604-001393)

Optional high-capacity input (HCI)

Learn about the electrical-mechanical relationships diagram for the optional high-capacity input (HCI).

942 Chapter 4 Electrical-mechanical diagrams

Figure 4-34 Pickup, feed and lift motors, cover and cassette sensors (HCI)

Cover open sensor

with harness 24V

Pickup/lift 1 motor
4
24V 3 (JC93-00452A)
3 5V
2
2
1
1
Cassette installation
sensor
(0604-001393)
6
Feed motor
24V 4 (JC31-00033B)
3
1
JC39-02601A Shift motor
Lift 2 motor
(JC31-00109A) (JC31-00125A)
24V 2 2 24V
JC39-02282A 1 1

CN601 CN901
B_PICK_LIFT1 1 3.3V 1
nB_PICK_LIFT1 2 SENS_P_EMPTY_SUB 2
nA_PICK_LIFT1 3 24V SENS_P_SUB_HOME 3
A_PICK_LIFT1 4 SENS_P_LEVEL_MAIN2 4
B_FEED 5 SENS_P_LEVEL_MAIN1 5
nB_FEED 6 SENS_P_SUB_END 6
nA_FEED 7 24V SENS_KNOCKUP_HOME 7 JC39-02286A

A_FEED 8 HCI PCA SENS_SOL_HOME 8

DGND 9 (JC92-02738G) NC 9
nSIDE_C_OPEN_IN 10 24V SENS_P_LEVEL_SUB2 10
SENS_P_LEVEL_SUB1 11
CN902 GND 12
LIMIT_SW_OUT 1 24V OUT_SOL_P_GATE 13
OUT_DCMOT_LIFT2 2 24V 14
NC 3 VCC 15
5V
OUT_DCMOT_SHIFT1 4 24V DGND 16
OUT_DCMOT_SHIFT2 5 SENS_NO_CST 17
NC 6

Optional high-capacity input (HCI) 943

 Figure 4-35 PCA, sub PCA and ECB (HCI)

HCI PCA (JC92-02738G)

CN301
nSYNC_TRAY 1
nCMD_REQ_TRAY 2
DETECT_TRAY_OPEN 3
NC 4
nDETECT_TRAY (DGND) 5
DGND 6
DGND 7 Engine
DGND 8 Controller
DGND 9 JC39-02600A
Board
24V 10
24V 11
(ECB)
24V 12
5V 13
5V 14
5VS 15
nRST_TRAY 16
RXD_ENG2TRAY 17
TXD_TRAY2ENG 18

CN901 CN5
3.3V 1 8 3.3V
SENS_P_EMPTY_SUB 2 9 nP_EMPTY_R
7 7
SENS_P_SUB_HOME 3 6 6 10 HOME2
SENS_P_LEVEL_MAIN2 4 5 5 11 nP_LEVEL2_F
SENS_P_LEVEL_MAIN1 5 4 4 12 nP_LEVEL1_F
3 3
SENS_P_SUB_END 6 13 END
2 2
SENS_KNOCKUP_HOME 7 JC39-02286A 1 1 JC39-02356A 14 HOME1
SENS_SOL_HOME 8 7 7 1 SOL_HOME
6 6 2 GND
NC 9
5 5
SENS_P_LEVEL_SUB2 10 4 4 3 nP_LEVEL2_R
SENS_P_LEVEL_SUB1 11 3 3 4 nP_LEVEL1_R
GND 12 2 2 5 GND
1 1
OUT_SOL_P_GATE 13 6 SOL_A
24V 14 7 SOL_B
VCC 15
DGND 16
HCI sub PCA
SENS_NO_CST 17 (JC92-02792A)

944 Chapter 4 Electrical-mechanical diagrams

Figure 4-36 Feed, limit, empty and main sensors (HCI)

Feed sensor
(0604-001393)
Limit switch 3
2
with harness 1 5V
5V

Main limit sensor

(0604-001393)
3
5V 2
1
3
5V 2
1 Empty main
sensor
(0604-001393)

JC39-02602A

HCI PCA (JC92-02738G)

CN502
1 VCC
5V
2 GND
1 14 3 SENS_P_EMPTY_MAIN
2 13
3 12 4 VCC
4 11 5V
5 GND
5 10
6 9 6 SENS_P_MAIN_LIMIT
7 8 JC39-02280A 7 GND
8 7
8 SENS_PREFEED
9 6
10 5 9 VCC
11 4 10 GND
12 3 5V
13 2 11 SENS_PATH
14 1 12 VCC

5V 13 LIMIT_SW_IN
14 LIMIT_SW_OUT

Optional high-capacity input (HCI) 945

 Figure 4-37 Level and home sensors (HCI)

CN6 HCI sub PCA

1 SOL_B (JC92-02792A)
2 NC CN4
24V
3 SOL_A VCC 1
GND 2 3.3V

CN1 nP_LEVEL1_R 3
1 VCC VCC 4
1 3 3.3V 3.3V
2 GND GND 5
2 2
3 1 3 nP_LEVEL1_F nP_LEVEL2_R 6
JC39-02352A
4 3 4 VCC VCC 7
5 2 5 GND GND 8 3.3V
6 1 3.3V
6 nP_LEVEL2_F SOL_HOME 9

JC39-02351A JC39-02355A

Level1 front Level1 rear sensor

sensor (0604-001393)
(0604-001393) 3
3
3.3V 3.3V 3
3.3V 2 3.3V
2 24V Solenoid 3 1 2
1 with harness 2 1
3 (JC33-00031B) 1 Level2 rear
2 Solenoid
3.3V 1 Level2 front sensor sensor
home
(0604-001393) (0604-001393)
sensor
(0604-001393)

946 Chapter 4 Electrical-mechanical diagrams

Figure 4-38 Empty and end sensors (HCI)

HCI sub PCA (JC92-02792A)

CN2 CN 3
1 VCC VCC 1
3.3V 3.3V
2 GND GND 2
3 HOME1 nP_EMPTY_R 3
4 VCC VCC 4
3.3V 3.3V
5 GND GND 5
6 END HOME2 6
NC 7

JC39-02352A
End sensor JC39-02352A
3.3V 3
2 (0604-001393) Home 2 sensor
1
(0604-001393)
3.3V 3 3.3V
3 2
2 3 1
1 Home1 sensor Empty sensor 2
(0604-001393) 1 3.3V
(0604-001393)

Optional high-capacity input (HCI) 947

 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Learn about the stapler/stacker and booklet maker.

Product specification and description

Learn about product specifications and descriptions.

Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher view

Learn about the front view and rear view of the stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher.

Figure 5-1 Stapler/stacker finisher - front view

C1

C4

C3

C2

Figure 5-2 Booklet finisher - front view

C3’

C5

Table 5-1 Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher - front view

Item Part name Part number Orderable(*)

C1 Front door JC90-01444B

C2 Caster cover JC63-04985B (*)

948 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Table 5-1 Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher - front view (continued)

Item Part name Part number Orderable(*)

C3 Left lower cover (Stapler/stacker) JC63-05001B (*)

C3' Left lower cover (Booklet) JC90-01417B (*)

C4 Left upper cover JC90-01475B (*)

C5 Booklet output tray JC61-07253B, JC63-04978B (*)

(*) This part is in ordering system.

Figure 5-3 Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher - rear view

C6
2

C7
C8

Table 5-2 Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher - rear view

Item Part name Part number Orderable(*)

C6 Top Output tray JC63-04996B

JC63-05003B (*)

C7 Main output tray JC63-05002B

C8 Rear cover JC63-04988B (*)

(*) This part is in ordering system.

Figure 5-4 Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher - top view

C9

C10

Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher view 949

 Table 5-3 Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher - top view

Item Part name Part number Orderable(*)

C9 Top cover JC90-01446B

C10 Top door JC90-01445B (*)

(*) This part is in ordering system.

Figure 5-5 Booklet finisher – front-right view

C11

C14 C12

C13

Table 5-4 booklet finisher - front-right view

Item Part name Part number Orderable(*)

C11 Right upper cover JC90-01448B (*)

C12 Front cover JC63-04986B

C13 Front lower cover JC63-04987B

C14 Booklet front cover JC90-01478B

(*) This part is in ordering system.

Detailed Specifications
Learn about the detailed specifications of the stapler-stacker finisher and booklet maker.

Stapler-stacker finisher
Table 5-5 Stapler-stacker finisher detailed specifications

Item Stapler-stacker finisher Booklet maker

Speed PPM 18.3~70,(70ppm) 18.3~70,(70ppm)

Stack Capacity Main 3,000 sheets 2,000 sheets

(A4/Letter 80gsm)
Top 250 sheets 250 sheets

950 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Table 5-5 Stapler-stacker finisher detailed specifications (continued)

Item Stapler-stacker finisher Booklet maker

Paper Size Main Statement SEF ~ 320 x 457 Statement SEF ~ 320 x 457

Top 98 x 148 ~ 13" x 19.2" (330×1200) 98 x 148 ~ 13" x 19.2" (330×1200)

Paper Weight Main 52 ~ 350 gsm 52 ~ 350 gsm

Top 52 ~ 300 gsm 52 ~ 300 gsm

Offset (Non Staple) 15mm(minimum) 15mm(minimum)

※Exception SRA3 and larger size.

Staple Clinching position ● Front/Rear Corner(45°,Flat) ● Front/Rear Corner(45°,Flat)

● Dual ● Dual

Paper weight 52~256 gsm 52~256 gsm

Capacity 65 sheets (90gsm) 65 sheets (90gsm)

Cartridge Capacity 5,000 clinching/cartridge 5,000 clinching/cartridge

Offline Yes Yes

Hole Punch Paper weight 52 ~ 300 gsm 52 ~ 300 gsm

available unit (Auto NA2/3, EU2/4, Swedish NA2/3, EU2/4, Swedish

change)

Booklet maker
Table 5-6 Booklet maker specifications

Item Description

Set Speed PPM 18.3~70(70ppm)

See Footnote: 1

Paper size B5 SEF ~ 12'' x 18''

Paper weight 60 ~ 120 gsm

Staple + Fold Capacity(80gsm) 25 sheets

Fold Capacity(80gsm) 5 sheets

Tray Capacity 5 sets / 25 sheets

Staple Cartridge Capacity 5,000 clinching/cartridge

Detailed Specifications 951

 Table 5-6 Booklet maker specifications (continued)

Item Description

C - Folding 3 sheets

Letter SEF, A4 SEF (52~90gsm)

1 The output speed of booklet making is the same as the device's printing speed, which varies depending on paper size, printing
mode, etc. Depending on specific usage conditions, such as the paper size used and the number of copies, the output speed
may decrease by up to 90% of the product's maximum output speed.

Physical
Table 5-7 Physical

Module Option Size Module Weight Packed Weight

(Reference) W X D X H [mm] [Kg] [Kg]

Stapler-stacker 751.7 x 610 x 1016.4 40 62

Booklet maker 751.7 x 610 x 1016.4 62 84.5

Hole punch 80 x 485 x 235 2.8 4.1

Paper size
Table 5-8 Paper size specification

Name Paper size Orientati Output Staple position Punch Booklet C- Folding
on Maker

mm Inches direction Main tray Top tray Corner DUAL NA 2/3 EU Swedis
2/4H h 4H

52-350 Of 52-300g 45° Flat 2 3 2 4

g fse H H H H
t

A5 210 8.3X5. LEF O O O X F/R O O X O X O X X

X14 8
8

State 216 8.5X5. LEF O O O X F/R O O X O X O X X

ment X14 5
0

Letter 279 11X8.5 LEF O O O F/R X O O O O O O X X

X21
6

A4 297 8.3X11. LEF O O O F/R X O O O O O O X X

X21 7
0

B5(JIS) 257 10.1×7.2 LEF O O O F/R X O O O O X O X X

X18
2

B5(ISO 250 9.8×6.9 LEF O O O F/R X O O O O X O X X

) X17
6

952 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Table 5-8 Paper size specification (continued)

Name Paper size Orientati Output Staple position Punch Booklet C- Folding
on Maker

mm Inches direction Main tray Top tray Corner DUAL NA 2/3 EU Swedis
2/4H h 4H

52-350 Of 52-300g 45° Flat 2 3 2 4

g fse H H H H
t

Execut 267 10.5X7. LEF O O O F/R X O O O O O O X X

ive X18 3
4

No 9 98X 3.9X8. SEF X X O X X X X X X X X X X

Env 225 9

Monar 98.4 3.9×7.5 SEF X X O X X X X X X X X X X

ch Env ×19
0.5

Postca 101. 4.0×6.0 SEF X X O X X X X X X X X X X

rd 6×1
52.4
4x6

A6 105 4.1X5.8 SEF X X O X X X X X X X X X X

X14
8

No 10 105 4.1×9.5 SEF X X O X X X X X X X X X X

Env ×241

DL Env 110× 4.3×8.7 SEF X X O X X X X X X X X X X

220

C6 Env 114× 4.5×6.4 SEF X X O X X X X X X X X X X

162

B6 128 5.0x7.2 SEF X X O X X X X X X X X X X

x18
2

State 140 5.5X8. SEF O X O X X X O X O X O X X

ment X21 5
6

A5 148 5.8X8. SEF O X O X X X O X O X O X X

X21 3
0

C5 Env 162 6.4×9.0 SEF X X O X X X X X X X X X X

×22
9

B5(ISO 176× 6.9×9.8 SEF O O O X F/R X O X O X O X X

) 250

B5(JIS) 182 7.2X10.1 SEF O O O X F/R X O X O X O O X

X25
7

Execut 184 7.3X10. SEF O O O X F/R X O X O X O O X

ive X26 5
7

Detailed Specifications 953

 Table 5-8 Paper size specification (continued)

Name Paper size Orientati Output Staple position Punch Booklet C- Folding
on Maker

mm Inches direction Main tray Top tray Corner DUAL NA 2/3 EU Swedis
2/4H h 4H

52-350 Of 52-300g 45° Flat 2 3 2 4

g fse H H H H
t

16k 195 7.7X10. SEF O O O X F/R O O X O X O O X

X27 6
0

A4 210 8.3X11. SEF O O O X F/R O O X O X O O O

X29 7
7

Legal 216 8.5X14 SEF O O O X F/R O O X O X O O X

X35
6

Letter 216 8.5X11 SEF O O O X F/R O O X O X O O O

X27
9

Folio 216 8.5X13 SEF O O O X F/R O O X O X O O X

X33
0

Oficio 215. 8.5×13. SEF O O O X F/R O O X O X O O X

9×3 5
42.9

C4 Env 229 9.1X12. SEF X X O X X X X X X X X X X

×32 8
4

Tabloid 254 10 SEF O O O F/R X O O O O X O O X

X37 X14.7
4

B4 257 10X14. SEF O O O F/R X O O O X O O O X

X36 3
4

8K 270 10.6X1 SEF O O O F/R X O O O O O O O X

X39 5.4
0

Ledger 279 11X17 SEF O O O F/R X O O O O O O O X

X43
2

A3 297 11.7X16. SEF O O O F/R X O O O O O O O X

X42 5
0

Tabloid 304. 12×18 SEF O X O X X X X X X X X O X

8×4
Extra 57.2

SRA3 320 12.6×17. SEF O X O X X X X X X X X X X

×45 7
0

954 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Table 5-8 Paper size specification (continued)

Name Paper size Orientati Output Staple position Punch Booklet C- Folding
on Maker

mm Inches direction Main tray Top tray Corner DUAL NA 2/3 EU Swedis
2/4H h 4H

52-350 Of 52-300g 45° Flat 2 3 2 4

g fse H H H H
t

13"x19. 330 13x19.2 SEF X X O X X X X X X X X X X

2" x48
7

Custo W9 W3.86- - X NA O NA NA NA N N N N NA NA NA
m 8-32 12.59 A A A A
0
L5.5-18
L13
9.7-
457.
2

* “F/R” means front side and rear side can be supported.

Media performance
Table 5-9 Media performance

Paper Type Function

Main Tray Top Tray Staple HP BM

Cover Content C-Fold

Plain (71-90 g/m2) O O O O O O O

Thick (91-105 g/m2) O O O O O X X

Heavy weight (106-175 g/m2) O O O O O X X

Extra Heavy weight 1 (176-216 O O O O O X X

g/m²)

Extra Heavy weight 2 (217-256 O O O O O X X

g/m2)

Extra Heavy weight 3 (257-300 O O X O O X X

g/m2)

Extra Heavy weight 4 (301-325 O X X X X X X

g/m2)

Thin (60-70 g/m2) O O O O O O O

Cotton (75-90 g/m2) O O X X X X X

Colored (75-90 g/m2) O O O O O O O

Pre-Printed (75-90 g/m2) O O O O O O O

Recycled (60-90 g/m2) O O O O O O O

Detailed Specifications 955

 Table 5-9 Media performance (continued)

Paper Type Function

Main Tray Top Tray Staple HP BM

Cover Content C-Fold

Bond O O O O O O X

Archive (75-105 g/m2) O O O O O O X

Letterhead O O O O O O X

Pre-Punched O O O X X X X

Thin Cardstock (105-163 g/m2) O O O O X X X

Thick Cardstock (170-216 g/m2) O O O X X X X

Heavy Cardstock (217-256 g/m2) O O O X X X X

Extra Heavy Cardstock 1(257-300 O O X X X X X

g/m²)

Extra Heavy Cardstock 2(301-325 O X X X X X X

g/m2)

Thin Glossy (106-169 g/m2) O O O O O X X

Thick Glossy (170-216 g/m²) O O O X O X X

Heavy Glossy (217-256 g/m2) O O O X O X X

Envelope (75-90 g/m2) X O X X X X X

Thick Envelope (217-256 g/m2) X O X X X X X

Transparency (138~146 gsm) O O X X X X X

Labels (120~150 gsm) X O X X X X X

Tab O O X O X X X

Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher system

Learn about the Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher system.

Overview
Learn about the overview of the Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher.

Work flow
Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher work flow

956 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Figure 5-6 Work flow overview
6. Top output tray
14. Paper holding 5. Top exit
4. Tray diverter
13. Main output tray
3. Punch
2. Entrance
7. Main exit 1. Bridge
8. Paddle
10. Tamper
12. Ejector
9. End fence 15. Buffer
11. Stapler

16. Booklet entrance

19. Booklet presser
24. Booklet exit
23. Booklet diverter 21. Booklet stapler
17. Booklet paddle
22. Booklet fold
20. Booklet tamper
25. Booklet output tray
18. Booklet end fence

Table 5-10 work flow overview

Item Unit Description

1 Bridge unit Moves paper from the printer to the finisher.

2 Entrance unit Allows paper to move into the finisher.

3 Punch unit(optional) Holes in a specific location on paper sheet.

4 Tray diverter unit Changes the paper direction whether it is main output tray or top output tray.

5 Top exit unit Moves paper from the diverter to the top output tray.

6 Top output tray unit Stacks paper that completed its printing job.

7 Main exit unit Moves paper from the diverter unit to the ejector unit with forward direction or to the
buffer unit with backward direction.

8 Paddle unit Pushes to the end fence to be aligned towards top and bottom of the paper.

9 End fence unit Sets the standard position of the paper to be aligned towards top and bottom of the
paper.

10 Tamper unit Aligns the paper on the right and left side of the paper.

11 Stapler unit Staples a bundle of an aligned documents.

12 Ejector unit Transfers a stapled paper loaded at the end fence unit to the output tray.

13 Main output tray unit Stacks paper that completed its printing job.

Overview 957
 Table 5-10 work flow overview (continued)

Item Unit Description

14 Paper holding unit Keeps paper static and controls the output tray movement.

15 Buffer unit Maintains paper inside the unit for a while or moves it to the booklet maker.

16 Booklet entrance unit Receives the paper into the booklet maker.

17 Booklet paddle unit Pushes to the booklet end fence.

18 Booklet end fence unit Supports paper that enters from the booklet paddle unit, then moves paper to the
designated position for folding and stapling.

19 Booklet presser unit Presses paper that enters to the booklet tamper unit to prevent paper shuffled.

20 Booklet tamper unit Aligns the paper on the right and left side of the paper to make booklet.

21 Booklet stapler unit Staples a bundle of aligned documents to make a booklet.

22 Booklet fold unit Fold a bundle of aligned documents as a booklet.

23 Booklet diverter unit Changes the paper direction to the booklet exit unit or the location to make c-fold.

24 Booklet exit unit Moves paper to the booklet output tray.

25 Booklet output tray unit Stacks the bundle of booklet.

Sensor
Figure 5-7 Sensor – Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher_1

S12
S11 S1

S10 S2

S9
S3

S8 S4

S5
S7
S6

Table 5-11 Sensor – Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher_1

No Name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Type Description

S1 Bridge entrance JC32-00020A (*) 113-2070 Paper sensor Checks whether paper comes into
sensor the bridge entrance unit.

S2 Bridge door 0604-001393 (*) 113-2180 Photo Checks whether the bridge door is
sensor interrupter opened.

958 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Table 5-11 Sensor – Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher_1 (continued)

No Name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Type Description

S3 Bridge exit 0604-001393 (*) 113-2071 Photo Checks whether paper comes into
sensor interrupter the bridge exit unit.

S4 Tray diverter 0604-001415 (*) 113-2020 Photo Checks whether the tray diverter
home sensor interrupter locates at the home position.

S5 Main exit cam 0604-001393 (*) 113-2000 Photo Check whether the main exit CAM
home sensor interrupter locates at the home position.

S6 Front tamper 0604-001393 (*) 113-2120 Photo Checks whether the front tamper
home sensor interrupter locates at the home position.

S7 End fence home 0604-001393 (*) 113-2050 Photo Checks whether the end fence
sensor interrupter locates at the home position.

S8 Paddle home 0604-001393 (*) 113-2060 Photo Checks whether the paddle
sensor interrupter locates at the home position.

S9 Rear tamper 0604-001393 (*) 113-2130 Photo Checks whether the rear tamper
home sensor interrupter locates at the home position.

S10 Main exit JC32-00020A (*) 113-2090 Paper sensor Checks whether paper comes into
sensor the main exit unit.

S11 Top exit sensor 0604-001393 (*) 113-2091 Photo Checks whether paper comes into
interrupter the top exit unit.

S12 Entrance JC32-00020A (*) 113-2080 Paper sensor Checks whether paper comes into
sensor the entrance unit.
(*) This part is in ordering system.

Figure 5-8 Sensor – Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher_2

S35 S13
S34
S14
S33
S15

S32 S16

S31
S17
S30 S18
S29
S19
S28 S20
S21
S27
S26 S22
S23
S25
S24

Overview 959
 Table 5-12 Sensor – Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher_2

No Name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Type Description

S13 Buffer sensor JC32-00020A (*) 113-2100 Paper sensor Checks whether paper exits out of
the buffer unit

S14 Ejector sensor JC32-00020A (*) 113-2170 Paper sensor Checks whether paper is on the
ejector or not.

S15 Top output tray JC82-01039A (*) 113-2145 LED IR, Photo TR Checks whether the top output
paper full tray is full or not.
sensor

S16 Buffer home 0604-001393 (*) 113-2210 Photo Checks whether the buffer roller
sensor interrupter and the idle roller whether
attached or detached.

S17 Front Paper 0604-001393 (*) 113-2141 Photo Checks whether the location of
holding sensor interrupter the paper holding actuator for
controlling the position of the main
output tray.

S18 Front door JC39-02309A 113-2182 Switch Check whether the front door is
switch open.

S19 Manual staple 0604-001415 (*) 113-2160 Photo Check whether the paper comes
sensor interrupter into the manual staple position.

S2 Main output JC82-01039A (*) 113-2140 LED IR, Photo TR Check whether the main output
0 tray top of stack tray reaches the top of stack.
sensor

S21 Stapler front 0604-001393 (*) 113-2113 Photo Makes the stapler positioned
sensor interrupter in accordance with the manual
stapling position.

S2 Paper holding 0604-001393 (*) 113-2010 Photo Checks whether the paper holding
2 home sensor interrupter actuator locates at the home
position.

S2 Ejector2 motor 0604-001415 (*) 113-2041 Photo Checks whether the ejector2
3 sensor interrupter motor is operational.

S24 Stapler mid 0604-001393 (*) 113-2112 Photo Make the stapler positioned at the
front sensor interrupter exact stapling position.

S2 Stapler mid rear 0604-001393 (*) 113-2111 Photo Make the stapler positioned at the
5 sensor interrupter exact stapling position.

S2 Main output 0604-001415 (*) 113-2144 Photo Checks whether the lower limit of
6 tray lower limit interrupter the output tray (=output tray is full).
sensor

S27 Ejector1 motor 0604-001415 (*) 113-2032 Photo Checks whether the ejector1
sensor interrupter motor is operational.

S2 Ejector1 end 0604-001415 (*) 113-2030 Photo Checks whether the ejector1
8 sensor interrupter locates at the end position.

S2 Ejector1 home 0604-001415 (*) 113-2031 Photo Checks whether the ejector1
9 sensor interrupter locates at the home position.

S3 Stapler rear 0604-001393 (*) 113-2110 Photo Checks whether the stapler
0 sensor interrupter locates at the home(rear) position.

S31 Rear paper 0604-001393 (*) 113-2142 Photo Checks whether the location of
holding sensor interrupter the paper holding actuator for
controlling the position of the main
output tray.

960 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Table 5-12 Sensor – Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher_2 (continued)

No Name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Type Description

S3 Ejector2 home 0604-001415 (*) 113-2040 Photo Checks whether the ejector2
2 sensor interrupter locates at the home position.

S3 Main output 0604-001393 (*) 113-2143 Photo Checks whether the Main output
3 tray motor interrupter tray motor is operational.
sensor

S3 Main output JC39-02316A 113-2190 Switch Checks whether the main output
4 tray top of stack tray reaches at the top of stack.
switch

S3 Top door switch JC39-02310A 113-2181 Switch Checks whether the top door is
5 open.
(*) This part is in ordering system.

Figure 5-9 Sensor – Booklet finisher

S46
S36 S37
S45

S44 S38

S39

S43 S40

S41
S42

Table 5-13 Sensor – Booklet finisher

No Name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Type Description

S36 Booklet 0604-001415 (*) 113-3100 Photo Checks whether paper comes
entrance interrupter into the bridge entrance unit.
sensor

S37 Booklet 0604-001393 (*) 113-3130 Photo Checks whether the booklet
presser home interrupter presser locates at the home
sensor position.

S38 Booklet tamper 0604-001393 (*) 113-3080 Photo Checks whether the booklet
home sensor interrupter tamper locates at the home
position.

S39 Booklet c-fold 0604-001393 (*) 113-3050 Photo Checks whether the booklet c-
blade home interrupter fold blade locates at the home
sensor position.

Overview 961
 Table 5-13 Sensor – Booklet finisher (continued)

No Name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Type Description

S40 Booklet 0604-001415 (*) 113-3060 Photo Checks whether the booklet
diverter home interrupter diverter locates at the home
sensor position.

S41 Booklet paddle 0604-001393 (*) 113-3090 Photo Checks whether the booklet
home sensor interrupter paddle locates at the home
position.

S42 Booklet end 0604-001393 (*) 113-3000 Photo Checks whether the booklet
fence home interrupter end fence locates at the home
sensor position.

S43 Booklet output JC82-01039A (*) 113-2150 LED IR, Photo Checks whether paper goes out
tray sensor TR on the booklet output tray.

S44 Booklet exit JC32-00020A (*) 113-3120 Paper sensor Checks whether paper comes
sensor into the booklet exit unit.

S45 Booklet blade 0604-001393 (*) 113-3040 Photo Checks whether the booklet blade
home sensor interrupter locates at the home position.

962 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Table 5-13 Sensor – Booklet finisher (continued)

No Name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Type Description

S46 Booklet tamper JC32-00020A (*) 113-3110 Paper sensor Checks whether paper comes
sensor into the booklet tamper unit.
(*) This part is in ordering system.

Figure 5-10 Sensor – Paper path

S15 S11 S10 S4

S12
S1

S13 S3
S20

S36

S26

S43

S46

S44
S43

Overview 963
 Motor and solenoid
Figure 5-11 Motor, solenoid – Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher

M13 M14
M12

M11

M10 M1
SL1
M9 M2

M3
M8

M7 M4
M5
M6

Table 5-14 Motor, solenoid – Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher

No Name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Type Description

M1 Paddle motor JC93-01001A (*) 113-3580 Step motor Rotates the paddle and moves the
paddle pusher up and downward
at the same time.

M2 Main exit cam JC93-01155A (*) 113-2500 Step motor Rotates the main exit cam to
motor detach the exit roller from the exit
idle roller.

M3 End fence JC93-01001A (*) 113-2590 Step motor Moves front and rear end fence
motor depending on paper size(width) so
that paper is well arranged at the
end fence.

M4 Front tamper JC93-01001A (*) 113-2630 Step motor Moves the front tamper unit.
motor

M5 Ejector2 motor JC93-01168A 113-2540 DC motor Moves the ejector2 and grabs
paper.

M6 Ejector1 motor JC93-01168A 113-2530 DC motor Moves the ejector1 forward and
backward

M7 Paper holding JC93-01156A (*) 113-2510 Step motor Moves paper holding actuator
motor up when paper goes out to the
output tray

M8 Stapler position JC31-00163A (*) 113-2620 Hybrid Step Moves the stapler.
motor motor

M9 Rear tamper JC93-01001A (*) 113-2640 Step motor Moves the rear tamper unit.
motor

SL1 Buffer Solenoid JC33-00038A (*) 113-2670 Solenoid Holds paper not to fall out to the
booklet maker during buffering
task.

964 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Table 5-14 Motor, solenoid – Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher (continued)

No Name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Type Description

M10 Buffer motor JC93-01152A (*) 113-2660 Step motor Moves paper to the buffer space
or the booklet maker.

M11 Main output JC31-00178B (*) 113-2610 DC motor Moves the main output tray up
tray motor and down.

M12 Entrance motor JC31-00163B (*) 113-2570 Hybrid Step Operates the entrance roller,
motor middle roller, and top middle roller
when driving in the forward and
moves the diverter cam when
driving in the backward.

M13 Exit motor JC31-00163B (*) 113-2580 Hybrid Step Rotates the main exit roller and
motor the top exit roller.

M14 Bridge motor JC31-00163B (*) 113-2560 Hybrid Step Rotates the bridge entrance roller,
motor the bridge middle roller and the
bridge exit roller.
(*) This part is in ordering system.

Figure 5-12 Motor, solenoid – Booklet finisher

M23 M15

M16
M22
M17
M21
M18

M19
M20 SL2 71

Table 5-15 Motor, solenoid – Booklet finisher

No Name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Type Description

M15 Booklet JC93-01152A (*) 113-3500 Step motor Rotates the booklet entrance
entrance motor roller.

M16 Booklet JC93-01155A (*) 113-3570 Step motor Operates the booklet presser.
presser motor

M17 Booklet C-fold JC93-01154A (*) 113-3590 Step motor Drives the booklet c-fold blade
blade motor and the moving guide.

M18 Booklet JC93-01153A (*) 113-3560 Step motor Drives the booklet diverter
diverter motor

Overview 965
 Table 5-15 Motor, solenoid – Booklet finisher (continued)

No Name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Type Description

M19 Booklet paddle JC93-01001A (*) 113-3580 Step motor Rotates the booklet paddle.
motor

M20 Booklet end JC93-01155A (*) 113-3530 Step motor Moves the booklet end fence up
fence motor and down.

M21 Booklet Fold JC31-00144A (*) 113-3510 BLDC motor Rotates the booklet fold roller,
motor the booklet c-fold roller, and the
booklet exit roller.

M22 Booklet blade JC31-00144A (*) 113-3550 BLDC motor Drives the booklet blade.
motor

M23 Booklet tamper JC93-01155A (*) 113-3540 Step motor Moves the booklet tamper unit.
motor

SL2 Booklet end JC33-00038A (*) 113-3520 Solenoid Operates the gripper of the
fence solenoid booklet end fence to grip paper
that comes in the booklet end
fence.
(*) This part is in ordering system.

NOTE: The motor sensor which is mounted near the driving motor detects whether the motor is
operating or not. If a motor doesn’t work properly, an event code only for the motor will occur. On the
other hand, the home position sensor is installed for the purpose of checking the reference position or
location when the specific unit is operating.

Figure 5-13 Motor sensor in the ejector unit

Motor sensor

Motor

Figure 5-14 Home sensor in the stapler unit

Home sensor

966 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Roller
Figure 5-15 Roller - Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher

R9
R1
R2

R8
R3
R7
R4
R6 R5

Table 5-16 Roller - Stapler/stacker finisher

No Name Part number Orderable(*) Drive motor Description

R1 Bridge exit roller JC66-04732A (*) Bridge motor Moves paper from the machine to the
bridge unit.

R2 Bridge middle JC66-04732A (*) Bridge motor Moves paper from the machine to the
roller bridge unit.

R3 Bridge entrance JC66-04733A (*) Bridge motor Moves paper from the machine to the
roller bridge unit

R4 Entrance roller JC66-04722A (*) Entrance Moves paper from the entrance unit to
motor the exit unit

R5 Middle roller JC66-04724A (*) Entrance Moves paper from the entrance unit to
motor the exit unit

R6 Buffer roller JC66-05161A Buffer motor Moves paper to the booklet maker, and
makes the gap between the buffer roller
and the idle roller so that paper stays
for the buffering.

R7 Main exit roller JC66-04726A (*) Exit motor Moves paper to the ejector unit or the
Main exit cam buffer unit and makes the gap between
motor the main exit roller and the idle roller so
that paper stays for the buffering.

R8 Top middle roller JC66-04725A (*) Entrance Moves paper to the top output tray.
motor

Overview 967
 Table 5-16 Roller - Stapler/stacker finisher (continued)

No Name Part number Orderable(*) Drive motor Description

R9 Top exit roller JC66-04727A (*) Exit motor Moves paper to the top output tray.
(*) This part is in ordering system.

Figure 5-16 Roller – Booklet finisher

R10
R13

R11

R12

Table 5-17 Roller – Booklet finisher

No Name Part number Orderable(*) Drive motor Description

R10 Booklet entrance JC66-04717A Booklet Moves paper from the machine to the
roller entrance bridge unit.
motor

R11 Booklet fold roller JC66-04748A Booklet fold Presses a stack of paper to fold
motor completely.

R12 Booklet c-fold JC66-04744A (*) Booklet fold In case of c-fold, presses a stack of
roller motor paper to fold completely.

968 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Table 5-17 Roller – Booklet finisher (continued)

No Name Part number Orderable(*) Drive motor Description

R13 Booklet exit roller JC66-04721A (*) Booklet fold Moves paper to the booklet output tray
motor unit
(*) This part is in ordering system.

PCA
Figure 5-17 PCA

P1

P3

P2

Table 5-18 PCA

No Name Part number Orderable(*) Description

P1 Manual staple PCA JC92-02789B This PCA shows the manual stapling condition
and accepts the button input for manual staple.

P2 Booklet maker PCA JC92-02789B (*) This PCA controls the booklet maker module
and consists of the micro-controller and driver
ICs.

P3 Finisher main PCA JC92-02968A (*) This PCA controls the finisher modules and
consists of the micro-controller and driver ICs.

Overview 969
 Table 5-18 PCA (continued)

No Name Part number Orderable(*) Description

Not Hole punch PCA - This PCA controls the hole punch module and
shown consists of the micro-controller and driver ICs.
(*) This part is in ordering system.

Bridge unit
The Bridge Unit is the asset to transfer paper from the printer to the finisher. The bridge entrance sensor
(S1) detects paper entering the bridge unit from the printer. In the same way, the bridge exit sensor (S3)
checks that the paper leaves from the bridge unit to the finisher. The bridge motor (M14) drive the bridge
entrance roller, bridge middle roller, and bridge exit roller. It makes paper moves through the bridge unit.
The jam removal door locating at the front side of the unit helps user to remove the jammed paper.

Figure 5-18 Bridge unit overview

R1
R2
M14 R3

S1

S2
S3

Figure 5-19 Bridge unit detail view

R3 R2 R1

M14
S2

S1

U1
S3

970 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Table 5-19 Bridge unit parts information

No Part Name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Description

U1 Bridge unit JC90-01772B (*) Moves paper from the printer to the
finisher.

S2 Bridge door sensor 0604-001393 (*) 113-2180 Detects if the bridge door is open.

S1 Bridge entrance JC32-00020A (*) 113-2070 Checks whether paper comes into the
sensor bridge entrance unit.

S3 Bridge exit sensor 0604-001393 (*) 113-2071 Checks whether paper move out of the
bridge unit.

M14 Bridge motor JC31-00163B (*) 113-2560 Rotates the bridge entrance roller, the
bridge middle roller and the bridge exit
roller.

R3 Bridge entrance JC66-04733A (*) Moves paper from the machine to the
roller bridge unit.

R2 Bridge middle JC66-04732A (*) Moves paper from the machine to the
roller bridge unit.

R1 Bridge exit roller JC66-04732A (*) Moves paper from the bridge unit to the
finisher entrance unit.
(*) This part is in ordering system.

Entrance unit
Entrance unit moves paper from the bridge unit to the inside of the finisher.The Entrance sensor (S12)
installed at the right side of the unit senses that the paper is entering the unit. The Entrance motor (M12)
rotates forward to drive the entrance roller and the middle roller to move paper to the exit unit.

Figure 5-20 Entrance unit overview

M12 S12

R4
R5

Entrance unit 971

 Figure 5-21 Entrance unit detail view - front

R4
R5

R3
R4

Figure 5-22 Entrance unit detail view - rear

M12

Figure 5-23 Entrance unit detail view - right

S12

Table 5-20 Entrance unit parts information

No Part Name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Description

S12 Entrance sensor JC32-00020A (*) 113-2080 Detects whether paper enters at the
entrance unit.

972 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Table 5-20 Entrance unit parts information (continued)

No Part Name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Description

M12 Entrance motor JC31-00163B (*) 113-2570 Operates the entrance roller and middle
roller when driving forward.

R4 Entrance roller JC66-04722A (*) Moves paper from the entrance unit to
the exit unit.

R5 Middle roller JC66-04724A (*) Moves paper from the entrance unit to
the exit unit.
(*) This part is in ordering system.

Punch unit (optional)

Learn about the punch unit of the Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher.

The punch unit is a device that punches holes in a specific location on a sheet of paper. The punch unit is
positioned right after the entrance unit.

● HP LaserJet Hole Punch 2/3 Accessory —Y1G10A

● HP LaserJet Hole Punch 2/4 Accessory — Y1G11A

● HP LaserJet Hole Punch Swedish Accessory — Y1G12A

NOTE: Puncher types are various depending on the country.

In case of 2/3 hole punch, the 5 hole-punches are mounted in the punch unit. As the punch motor rotates
forward, the inner gear moves to the right and the 3 hole-punches are moved downward to make the
holes on the paper. When making 2 holes, the motor rotates in the backward direction and the inner gear
rotates to the left to drill two holes. The travel distance and position of the hole-punches are detected
and controlled by the 3 punch position sensors.

Figure 5-24 Punch unit overview

Punch unit (optional) 973

 Figure 5-25 Punch unit detail view
5 6 1 2

5 4 3

Table 5-21 Punch unit parts information

Item Part name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Description

U1 Punch unit

2-3 hole Y1G10A (*)

2-4 hole Y1G11A (*)

Swedish hole Y1G12A (*)

1 Punch scan home 113-4000 Detects the home position of

sensor the punch unit

3 Punch scan edge 113-4010 Check the paper width to make

sensor hole on the right position of
113-4011 paper.

113-4012

113-4013

2 Punch scan motor 113-4500 Transmits the force to move

the punch unit in the horizontal
direction.

4 Punch position sensor 113-4020 Detects the travel distance and

position of the hole-punches.
113-4030

113-4031

5 Punch motor sensor 113-4040 Checks whether the punch

motor is operational

6 Punch motor 113-4510 Transmits the force to make

holes on the paper
(*) This part is in system.

Punch unit operation

1. A paper enters into the punch unit, and it is aligned to drill holes.

2. The motor rotates forward or backward, then the punch rail in the punch unit moves in order to move
the punch hole makers (callout 1).

974 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 2

3. The punch position sensors determine the punch rail location (callout 2). It drives the punch hole
makers up and down to make holes (callout 3).

4. In some paper size, paper might be jammed in a place where punch hole maker is located. Therefore,
the punch unit moves left and right (callout 4).

Punch unit (optional) 975

 Tray diverter unit
Learn about the Tray diverter unit of the Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher.

The tray diverter unit is responsible for determining the paper feed direction so that paper can be
ejected to the main output tray or top output tray.

The entrance motor (M12) rotates this unit. When the entrance motor rotates backward, the phase of the
divertor cam (callout1) changes so that the paper path direction changes. The tray diverter home sensor
(S4) checks whether the tray diverter is located at the home position or not. (callout2).

Figure 5-26 Tray diverter unit overview

M12 1

S4

976 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Figure 5-27 Tray diverter unit detail view – front-top

Figure 5-28 Tray diverter unit detail view – rear

S4

Table 5-22 Tray diverter unit parts information

Item Part name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Description

1 Tray diverter JC61-07205A Selects the paper path of either

the main output tray or the top
output tray

2 Tray diverter cam JC66-04560A 113-2520 Changes the paper path

S4 Tray diverter home 0604-001415 (*) 113-2020 Checks whether home position
sensor of the tray diverter

M12 Entrance motor JC31-00163B (*) Operates the tray diverter cam
when driving in the backward
direction.
(*) This part is in ordering system.

Tray diverter unit operation

1. When printing or copying documents, the entrance motor operates backward so that the diverter
cam (Callout 2) can be rotate.

Tray diverter unit 977

 2. The direction of the tray diverter(callout1) is changed to the main output tray or the top output tray
by the tray diverter cam(callout2).

2
7RSRXWSXWWUD\GLUHFWLRQ 0DLQRXWSXWWUD\GLUHFWLRQ

Top exit unit

Learn about the Top exit unit of the Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher.

The top exit unit sends paper from the tray diverter unit to the top output tray unit.

The top exit sensor(S11) detects paper entry into the top exit unit. The entrance motor(M12) drives the top
middle roller, and the exit motor(M13) transmit the force to rotate the top exit roller so that paper moves
to the top output tray unit.

Figure 5-29 Top exit unit overview

M13 M12

S11

R8

R9

978 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-30 Top exit unit detail view – front-top

S11

R9

Table 5-23 Top exit unit parts information

Item Part name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Description

S11 Top exit sensor 0604-001393 (*) 113-2091 Checks whether paper has
entered at the top exit unit

M12 Entrance motor JC31-00163B (*) 113-2570 Rotates the top middle roller
when driving in the forward
direction.

M13 Exit motor JC31-00163B (*) 113-2580 Rotates the top exit roller

R8 Top middle roller JC66-04725A (*) Moves paper to the top output
tray

R9 Top exit roller JC66-04727A (*) Moves paper to the top output
tray
(*) This part is in ordering system.

Top output tray unit

Learn about the Top output tray unit of the Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher.

The top output tray unit loads discharged paper from the finisher.

It has the paper pull sensor(S15) to detect whether the tray is full with paper.

Top output tray unit 979

 Figure 5-31 Top output tray unit overview

S15

Figure 5-32 Top output tray unit detail view – front-left

S15

Table 5-24 Top output tray unit parts information

Item Part name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Description

1 Top output tray JC63-04996B Loads ejected paper

JC63-05003B (*)

S15 Top output tray JC82-01039A (*) 113-2145 Detects whether paper
paper full sensor is fully staked on the
(receiver, led) output tray.
(*) This part is in ordering system.

Main exit unit

Learn about the Main exit unit of the Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher.

The main exit unit delivers paper from the tray diverter unit to the ejector unit or buffer unit.

980 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

The main exit sensor (S10) detects whether paper comes in from main exit unit. The exit motor (M13)
drives the main exit roller to send the paper to the ejector unit or buffer unit.

Figure 5-33 Main exit unit overview

M13

S5

M2

R7

S10

Figure 5-34 Main exit unit detail view – (front-rear)

M13

R7

S5
M2

Main exit unit 981

 Table 5-25 Main exit unit parts information

Item Part name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Description

S10 Main exit sensor JC32-00020A (*) 113-2090 Detects whether paper entered
at the main exit unit

M13 Exit motor JC31-00163B (*) 113-2580 Rotates the main exit roller

R7 Main exit roller JC66-04726A (*) Moves paper to the ejector unit
or the buffer unit

1 Main exit cam Adjusts the gap between the

main exit roller and the idle
roller for the buffering. (*Please
refer to ‘buffer unit’)

S5 Main exit cam home 0604-001393 (*) 113-2000 Detects the home position of
sensor the main exit cam

M2 Main exit cam motor JC93-01155A (*) 113-2500 Rotates the main exit cam.
(*) This part is in ordering system.

Main exit unit operation

1. The exit motor(M13) drives forward so that paper will moves towards the ejector unit.

2. On the other hand, if the exit motor rotates backwards paper moves towards the buffer unit.

982 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Paddle unit
Learn about the Paddle unit of the Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher.

The paddle unit rotates the rubber paddles mounted on the shaft to move paper to the end fence unit,
allowing paper to be arranged well for the next job. The paddle presser is mounted behind the rubber
paddles and presses the end of paper to help paper be stacked well at the end fence unit. The Paddle
home sensor (S8) checks the home position to drive the paddles. And the paddle motor(M1) drives the
paddle and paddle presser.

Figure 5-35 Paddle unit overview

Paddle unit 983

 Figure 5-36 Paddle unit detail view - front

Figure 5-37 Paddle unit detail view - left

Table 5-26 Paddle unit parts information

Item Part name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Description

1 Paddle JC90-01480A Moves paper into the end fence

unit

2 Paddle presser JC61-07206A Presses the end of bent paper

helps paper to be loaded well at
the end fence unit

S8 Paddle home sensor 0604-001393 (*) 113-2060 Detect the home position of the
paddle

M1 Paddle motor JC93-01001A (*) 113-2600 Rotates the paddle, and moves
the paddle presser up and
downward at the same time
(*) This part is in ordering system.

Paddle unit operation

1. A paper falls downward by exit unit.

2. The paddles rotate to make a paper moves into the end fence unit. (callout 1)

984 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 3. The paddle presser presses the end of a paper so as not to be scattered. (callout 2).

End fence unit

Learn about the End fence unit of the Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher.

The paddle unit moves paper to the end fence unit. The end fence unit sets the standard position of the
paper to be aligned towards top and bottom of the paper.

End fence motor(M3) operates the two end fences and adjust width of them in order to stack paper
correctly. The end fence home sensor(S7) detects the home position of the end fence.

Figure 5-38 End fence unit overview

End fence unit 985

 Figure 5-39 End fence unit detail view – front

Figure 5-40 End fence unit detail view - left

Table 5-27 End fence unit parts information

Item Part name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Description

1 End fence Aligns top and bottom side of

paper.

S7 End fence home 0604-001393 (*) 113-2050 Detects the home position of
sensor the end fence

M3 End fence motor JC93-01001A (*) 113-2590 Moves front and rear end fence
depending on paper size(width)
so that paper arranged well at
the end fence
(*) This part is in ordering system.

End fence unit operation

1. The end fence motor(M3) moves the front and rear end fences in the arrow direction (callout 1)
depending on paper width.

986 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 2. Paper goes into the end fence unit by the paddle unit. (callout 2)

3. At the same time the end fence unit aligns paper to the direction of yellow line. (callout 3)

Tamper unit
Learn about the Tamper unit of the Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher.

The tamper unit functions to align the left and right sides of a bundle of paper. When a certain amount
of paper is collected after printing, the tamper unit hits the left and right ends of the paper to align the
paper correctly.

Each tamper has a motor on the back side that delivers driving force to move. The tamper home sensors
are mounted on the back side of the unit to check the home position of the tamper unit.

Tamper unit 987

 Figure 5-41 Tamper unit overview

2 S9

M4

S6 1

Figure 5-42 Tamper unit detail view - left

Figure 5-43 Tamper unit detail view - left-right

M9
2 1

S9

S6 M4

988 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Table 5-28 tamper unit parts information

Item Part name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Description

1 Front tamper JC82-00901A (*) Aligns left and right side of

paper.

S6 Front tamper home 0604-001393 (*) 113-2120 Detects the home position of
sensor the tamper unit.

M4 Front tamper motor JC93-01001A (*) 113-2630 Moves the front tamper unit.

2 Rear tamper JC82-00898A (*) Aligns left and right side of

paper.

S9 Rear tamper home 0604-001393 (*) 113-2130 Detects the home position of
sensor the tamper unit.

M9 Rear tamper motor JC93-01001A (*) 113-2640 Moves the front tamper unit.
(*) This part is in ordering system.

Tamper unit operation

1. A stack of paper is arranged at the end fence unit.

2. The left and right tampers arrange them.

3. In case of offset printing, the tamper unit arranges the next bundle to be shifted. (callout 3)

Tamper unit 989

 Stapler unit
Learn about the Stapler unit of the Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher.

Stapler unitis a device installed inside the finisher that staples a bundle of aligned documents.
Documents are collected as a bundle by the tamper unit and the end fence unit for stapling, then
stapler assembly staples the bundle. There are 6 options to make a bundle.

Figure 5-44 Stapling options

The stapler unit moves using the stapler motor(M8) installed inside. The one home sensor (rear sensor,
S30) and two position sensors (mid-front,S24 and mid-rear sensor,S25) are mounted so that the stapler
can be positioned in the exact stapling position whether it is stapled on the left, the right, or at the center
of the document. Stapling is done by the motor inside the stapler assembly.

In addition, manual staple feature is available on the front-upper side of the finisher. The manual staple
sensor(S19) detects whether a stack of paper comes into the manual staple location or not. The front
sensor (stapler front sensor, S21) makes the stapler moves at the manual staple location.

990 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Figure 5-45 Stapler unit overview

Figure 5-46 Stapler unit detail view - front

Figure 5-47 Stapler unit detail view

M8

S21

S30 S25 S24

Table 5-29 Stapler unit parts information

Item Part name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Description

1 Stapler unit JC82-00894A (*) Staples a bundle of paper

2 Staple cartridge JC81-09882B (*) 113-2115 Staple cartridge

113-2116

S21 Stapler front sensor 0604-001393 (*) 113-2113 Detect the stapler at the
manual stapling position

Stapler unit 991

 Table 5-29 Stapler unit parts information (continued)

Item Part name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Description

S24 Stapler mid-front 0604-001393 (*) 113-2112 Detect the stapler location
sensor

S25 Stapler mid-rear 0604-001393 (*) 113-2111 Detect the stapler location
sensor

S30 Stapler rear sensor 0604-001393 (*) 113-2110 Detect the home position of the
stapler

S19 Manual staple sensor 0604-001415 (*) 113-2160 Detect paper when manual
stapling

M8 Stapler position motor JC31-00163A (*) 113-2620 Moves the stapler

(*) This part is in ordering system.

Stapler unit operation

1. The stapler position motor drives the stapler assembly to direction 1.

2. The stapler assembly moves through the rail using three stapler position sensors (callout2) and
staples a stack of paper.

3. In case of staple cartridge replacement, the stapler moves to direction 3.

992 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 4. For manual stapling, the stapler moves in direction 4.

Ejector unit
Learn about the ejector unit of the Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher.

The ejector unit ejects a bundle of paper out to the main output tray. The ejector unit consists of ejector1
and ejector2.

The ejector1 moves a stapled paper loaded at the end fence unit to the ejector2 unit. During this
process, the ejector1 motor transmits the driving force to the ejector1 unit. And ejector1 motor sensor
checks the ejector1 motor operation. And the ejector1 home sensor detects the home position of the
ejector1. The ejector1 end sensor detects the end position of the ejector1.

When the paper arrives at the ejector2 unit, the ejector2 grabs a stack of paper and ejects it onto the
main output tray. The ejector2 motor is responsible for this process, and the ejector2 motor sensor
helps it to be controlled correctly. In addition, the ejector2 home sensor checks the location of the
ejector2.

Figure 5-48 Ejector unit overview

1
2

M5

S23
S32
M6

S27

Ejector unit 993

 Figure 5-49 Ejector unit detail view - left

S32
S23

S27 M6 M5

Table 5-30 Ejector unit parts information

Item Part name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Description

Ejector unit JC90-01409A (*)

S14 Ejector sensor JC32-00020A (*) 113-2170 Detects whether paper

is on the ejector or not.

1 Ejector1 Moves the stack of

paper from the end
fence to the ejector2

S29 Ejector1 home 0604-001415 (*) 113-2031 Detects the home

sensor position of the ejector1

S28 Ejector1 end 0604-001415 (*) 113-2030 Detects the end

sensor position of the ejector1

S27 Ejector1 motor 0604-001415 (*) 113-2032 Detects whether the

sensor Ejector1 motor rotates

M6 Ejector1 motor JC93-01168A 113-2530 Moves the ejector1

forward and backward

2 Ejector2 Moves paper from the

ejector1 to the main
output tray

S32 Ejector2 home 0604-001415 (*) 113-2040 Detects the home

sensor position of the ejector2

S23 Ejector2 motor 0604-001415 (*) 113-2041 Detects the ejector2

sensor motor rotation

994 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Table 5-30 Ejector unit parts information (continued)

Item Part name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Description

M5 Ejector2 motor JC93-01168A 113-2540 Moves the ejector2 and

grabs paper
(*) This part is in ordering system.

Ejector unit operation

1. The ejector1(callout1) pushes aligned paper at the end fence unit to ejector2 unit(callout2).

S28
1

S29 S14

S27
M6

2. The ejector2(callout2) picks up paper, then moves forward to the main output tray direction.

S23
S32

M5

Ejector unit 995

 Main output tray unit
Learn about the Main output tray unit of the Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher.

Printouts are stacked on the main output tray (C7). The main output tray moves up and down along the
rails inside the finisher, and the main output tray motor (M11) controls those movements according to the
signals of the front & rear paper holding sensor. Main output tray motor sensor (S33) checks whether
the main output tray motor rotates properly.

When main output tray hits the lower limit sensor of the main output tray (S26), the machine detects that
paper tray is full. The main output tray top of stack sensor(S20) detects that the main output tray is on
the top.

Figure 5-50 Main output tray unit overview

M11
S34
S33
S20

C7

S26

996 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Figure 5-51 Main output tray unit detail view - left

S20

C7

S26

Figure 5-52 Main output tray unit detail view - rear

S33

M11

Table 5-31 Main output tray unit parts information

Item Part name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Description

C7 Main output tray JC63-05002B Stacking plate for ejected paper

S20 Main output tray top of JC82-01039A (*) 113-2140 Checks the upper limit of main
stack sensor (receiver, output tray
led)

Main output tray unit 997

 Table 5-31 Main output tray unit parts information (continued)

Item Part name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Description

S6 Main output tray lower 0604-001415 (*) 113-2144 Detects the lowest position of
limit sensor the output tray

S33 Main output tray motor 0604-001393 (*) 113-2143 Detects whether the main
sensor output tray motor rotates

M11 Main output tray motor JC31-00178B (*) 113-2610 Moves the main output tray up
and down
JC90-01415B (*)

S34 Main output tray top of JC39-02316A 113-2190 Checks the upper limit of main
stack switch output tray so that detects
abnormal movement of output
tray
(*) This part is in ordering system.

Paper holding unit

Learn about the Paper holding unit of the Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher.

The paper holding unit holds printouts on the main output tray. It has a sensor that detects the height of
stacked paper so that the output tray moves up and down to stack paper in a stable manner.

The paper holding motor(M7) lifts the paper holding actuator when printouts come out to the main
output tray. The paper holding home sensor(S22) detects the location of paper holding actuator at the
home position. The front & rear paper holding sensor (S17, S31) checks the volume of printouts on the
main output tray and makes the main output tray move downward

Figure 5-53 Paper holding unit overview

S31
S17

M7 S22

998 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Figure 5-54 Paper holding unit detail view - left
1

S17 S31

S22

Figure 5-55 Paper holding unit detail view - left

M7

Table 5-32 paper holding unit parts information

Item Part name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Description

1 Paper holding actuator Control the height of the main

output tray and hold printouts
so as not to be scattered

S17 Front paper holding 0604-001393 (*) 113-2141 Detects stacked paper position
sensor

S31 Rear paper holding 0604-001393 (*) 113-2142 Detects stacked paper position
sensor

S22 Paper holding home 0604-001393 (*) 113-2010 Detects the home position of
sensor paper holding actuator

M7 Paper holding motor JC90-01414A (*) 113-2510 Lift paper holding actuator up
when printouts delivered to the
main output tray

Paper holding unit 999

 Table 5-32 paper holding unit parts information (continued)

Item Part name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Description

2 Left upper cover JC90-01475B

(*) This part is in ordering system.

paper holding unit operation

1. When printouts are delivered to the main output tray, a paper holding motor moves paper holding
actuator upward to create a paper path to prevent jam (callout1).

2. When printouts are stacked on top of the main output tray, the paper holding actuator goes down to
hold them(callout2).

3. As paper stacks up on the main output tray, the paper holding actuator is lifted by papers. The front
& rear paper holding sensors make the main output tray moves downward to store more printouts.
(callout3)

1000 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 4. As printouts are stacked on the main output tray, the tray goes down. When it reaches at the end of
its moving range (callout 4), the main output tray touches the lower limit sensor. The sensor detects
that the main output tray is full of printouts.

Buffer unit
Learn about the diverter unit of the Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher.

The buffer unit keeps paper inside the unit or moves them to the booklet maker.

The buffer diverter creates a paper path so that paper can move to the buffer unit, and the buffer
sensor detects whether paper moved out from the buffer unit. The buffer motor controls buffer roller,
and buffer home sensors checks the location of buffer rollers. The buffer solenoid holds papers so that
they do not fall into the booklet maker while buffering.

NOTE: buffering: It is to maintain print speed when users print multiple copies continuously.

The 1st page of a print job stays in the buffer unit for a moment while the previous job is being ejected.
After the previous print job was ejected, the 1st and 2nd page of the job move to the ejector unit
together.

Buffer unit 1001

 Figure 5-56 Buffer unit overview

SL1

M10

R6

S13

S16

Figure 5-57 Buffer unit detail view - front

S16

R6

Figure 5-58 Buffer unit detail view - rear

M10

1002 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Figure 5-59 Buffer unitdetail view - top

SL1

Table 5-33 Buffer unit parts information

Item Part name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Description

1 Buffer diverter JC61-07204A Makes the way to the buffer

space

S13 Buffer sensor JC32-00020A (*) 113-2100 Detects whether paper has
moved out from the buffer unit

S16 Buffer home sensor 0604-001393 (*) 113-2210 Detects the home position of
the buffer roller.

M10 Buffer motor JC93-01152A (*) 113-2660 Moves paper to the buffer
space or the booklet maker

SL1 Buffer solenoid JC33-00038A (*) 113-2670 Holds paper to prevent them
from falling out to the booklet
maker during buffering

R6 Buffer roller JC66-05161A Moves paper to the booklet

maker or makes the gap so that
paper stays in this space.
(*) This part is in ordering system.

Buffer unit operation

1. When the buffer motor rotates backward to move the cam, the buffer roller(R6) can have gap and
then paper can stay inside the buffer unit

a. When the exit motor rotates backward to drive the main exit roller(R7), paper moves to the buffer
unit through the buffer diverter(callout1).

Buffer unit 1003

 b. The main exit cam motor moves the main exit cam so that the main exit roller(R7) is separated
with the idle roller to have a gap, and then paper can stay in this place for a while.

c. When the next sheet comes to the main exit unit, the main exit motor turns the man exit cam so
that the main exit roller is attached to the idle roller.

d. he exit motor rotates forward and operates the main exit roller. It makes 2 paper moves to the
ejector together.

1004 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 2. In case of booklet job, the buffer unit moves paper to the booklet maker.

a. The buffer motor rotates, the buffer roller(R6) is attached to the idle roller.

b. When paper arrives at the main exit unit, the exit motor rotates backward and moves the main
exit roller(R7) so that paper moves to the buffer unit through the buffer diverter.

c. The buffer motor rotates the buffer roller to move paper to the booklet maker.

Booklet entrance unit

Learn about the Booklet entrance unit of the booklet finisher.

The booklet entrance unit receives paper into the booklet maker. The entrance sensor(S36) detects
whether the paper enters the entrance unit. The entrance motor(M15) drives the booklet entrance
roller(R10) to move the paper.

Booklet entrance unit 1005

 Figure 5-60 Booklet entrance unit overview

Figure 5-61 Booklet entrance unit detail view

Table 5-34 Entrance unit parts information

Item Part name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Description

S36 Booklet entrance 0604-001415 (*) 113-3100 Detects whether paper has
sensor come into the booklet entrance
unit

M15 Booklet entrance JC93-01152A (*) 113-3500 Drives the booklet entrance
motor roller

R10 Booklet entrance roller JC66-04717A Moves paper into the booklet
maker
(*) This part is in ordering system.

Booklet paddle unit

Learn about the Booklet paddle unit of the booklet finisher.

1006 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

The booklet paddle unit pushes paper to the booklet end fence by rotating the rubber paddles. The
booklet paddle motor (M19) rotates two booklet paddles, and the booklet paddle home sensor(S41)
connected to the lower booklet paddle checks the home position of the booklet paddle.

Figure 5-62 Booklet paddle unit overview

Figure 5-63 Booklet paddle unit detail view

Table 5-35 booklet paddle unit parts information

Item Part name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Description

1 Upper booklet paddle JC66-04718A Moves paper to the booklet end

fence unit

Booklet paddle unit 1007

 Table 5-35 booklet paddle unit parts information (continued)

Item Part name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Description

1 Lower booklet paddle JC90-01429A Moves paper to the booklet end

fence unit

JC61-07225A (*)

JC66-04719A (*)

S41 Booklet paddle home 0604-001393 (*) 113-2590 Check the home position of the
sensor booklet paddle

M19 Booklet paddle motor JC93-01001A (*) 113-3580 Drives two booklet paddles
(*) This part is in ordering system.

Booklet end fence unit

Learn about the Booklet end fence unit of the booklet finisher.

The booklet end fence unit supports paper that enters from the booklet paddle unit, then moves paper
to the designated position for folding and stapling. The Booklet end fence motor (M20) moves the
booklet end fence up and down. The booklet end fence home sensor (S42) checks the home position of
the booklet end fence. The booklet end fence solenoid (SL2) drives the clamp to hold paper that comes
into the booklet end fence.

Figure 5-64 Booklet end fence unit overview

1008 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Figure 5-65 Booklet end fence unit detail view - left

Figure 5-66 Booklet end fence unit detail view - right

Table 5-36 booklet end fence unit parts information

Item Part name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Description

1 Booklet end fence JC90-01432A Supports paper, then moves it

to the designated location to
fold or staple

S42 Booklet end fence 0604-001393 (*) 113-3000 Checks the home position of
home sensor the booklet end fence

M18 Booklet end fence JC93-01155A (*) 113-3530 Moves the booklet end fence up
motor and down

Sl2 Booklet end fence JC33-00038A (*) 113-3520 drives the clamp to hold paper
solenoid that comes into the booklet end
fence
(*) This part is in ordering system.

Booklet end fence unit operation

1. The booklet end fence is located at the home position (callout1). When the booklet maker starts its
job, the end fence goes to the direction 2.

Booklet end fence unit 1009

 2. The booklet end fence unit supports paper comes from the booklet paddle unit and holds paper so
as not to be scattered(callout3). Then it moves to the certain location to fold or staple it (callout 4).

Booklet presser unit

Learn about the Booklet presser unit of the booklet finisher.

The booklet presser unit sort print pages that enter to the booklet maker in order.The Booklet presser
motor (M16) moves the booklet presser, and the booklet presser home sensor (S37) checks whether the
booklet presser is at the home position.

1010 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Figure 5-67 Booklet presser unit overview

Figure 5-68 Booklet presser unit detail view

Table 5-37 Booklet presser unit parts information

Item Part name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Description

1 Booklet presser JC61-07237A Accumulates paper from the

entrance unit not to be shuffled

S37 Booklet presser home 0604-001393 (*) 113-3130 Checks the home position of
sensor the booklet presser

Booklet presser unit 1011

 Table 5-37 Booklet presser unit parts information (continued)

Item Part name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Description

M16 Booklet presser motor JC93-01155A (*) 113-3570 Drives the booklet presser
(*) This part is in ordering system.

Booklet presser unit operation

1. Paper comes into the booklet presser unit (callout1). At this time the presser is located on the left
side of the finisher (callout 2).

2. After paper exits the entrance roller, the booklet presser hits the end of paper. (callout 3).

3. When a next sheet arrives at the unit, it will fall on the left side of the previous sheet pushed by the
booklet presser (callout 4).

1012 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Booklet tamper unit
Learn about the Booklet tamper unit of the booklet finisher.

The booklet tamper unit aligns the left and right side of documents for stapling or folding.

The booklet tamper motor(M23) adjusts the booklet tampers’ width according to paper size. The booklet
tamper home sensor(S38) checks the home position of the booklet tamper.

Figure 5-69 Booklet tamper unit overview

Booklet tamper unit 1013

 Figure 5-70 Booklet tamper unit detail view

Table 5-38 Booklet tamper unit parts information

Item Part name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Description

1 Booklet tamper JC90-01431A Aligns documents for stapling

or folding.

S38 Booklet tamper home 0604-001393 (*) 113-3080 Checks the home position of
sensor the booklet tamper

M23 Booklet tamper motor JC93-01155A (*) 113-3540 Drives the booklet tamper

S46 Booklet tamper sensor JC32-00020A (*) 113-3110

(*) This part is in ordering system.

Booklet tamper unit operation

■ When a certain amount of paper is collected, the booklet tamper unit hits the left and right sides of
the paper to align the paper correctly.

1014 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Booklet stapler unit
Learn about the Booklet stapler unit of the booklet finisher.

Booklet stapler unitis a device installed inside the booklet maker that staples a bundle of aligned
documents as a booklet.

There is only 1 option to make a bundle. If the user selects the option, this unit staples at the two location
in the middle of stacks.

Figure 5-71 Booklet staple option

Booklet stapler unit 1015

 Figure 5-72 Booklet stapler unit overview

Figure 5-73 Booklet stapler unit detail view

Table 5-39 Booklet stapler unitparts information

Item Part name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Description

1 Booklet stapler JC81-08274B

2 Booklet stapler JC81-09881B (*) 113-3020

cartridge
113-3030
(*) This part is in ordering system.

Booklet stapler unit operation

1. When a stack of sheets is collected in booklet end fence unit, the booklet end fence(callout2)
changes its location to be stapled.

1016 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 2. The booklet stapler(callout1) staples at the middle of stacks.

Booklet fold unit

Learn about the Booklet fold unit of the booklet finisher.

The booklet fold unit is a device installed inside the booklet maker that folds a bundle of aligned
documents as a This unit consists of 2 types of blades: blade and c-fold blade. So, it creates two types of
output.

Figure 5-74 Fold options

The booklet blade motor (M22) drives the booklet blades and lightly folds the stack of paper. The folded
paper passes through the booklet fold rollers to be fully folded. The booklet blade home sensor (S45)
checks the home position of the booklet blade, and the booklet fold motor (M21) drives the rollers that
enable folding.

In case of c-fold, the booklet c-fold blade motor(M17) drives the booklet c-fold blade and lightly folds the
stack of paper once more. The folded paper passes through the booklet c-fold roller to be fully folded.
The booklet c-fold blade home sensor(S39) checks the home position of the c-fold blade.

Booklet fold unit 1017

 Figure 5-75 Booklet fold unit overview – right-rear

Figure 5-76 Booklet fold unit overview – left-front

1018 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Figure 5-77 Booklet fold unit detail view - right

Figure 5-78 Booklet fold unit detail view – left

Figure 5-79 Booklet fold unit detail view – left-front

Booklet fold unit 1019

 Table 5-40 Booklet fold unit parts information

Item Part name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Description

1 Booklet blade JC93-01163A Pushes a stack of paper to fold.

S45 Booklet blade home 0604-001393 (*) 113-3040 Checks the home position of
sensor the booklet blade.

M22 Booklet blade motor JC31-00144A (*) 113-3550 Drives the booklet blade

M21 Booklet fold motor JC31-00144A (*) 113-3510 Drives the booklet roller and c-
fold blade

R11 Booklet fold roller JC66-04748A Presses a stack of paper to be

fully folded

2 Booklet c-fold blade JC61-07366A Pushes a stack of paper to fold

for the c-fold task

S39 Booklet c-fold blade 0604-001393 (*) 113-3050 Checks the home position of
home sensor the booklet c-fold blade

M17 Booklet c-fold blade JC93-01154A (*) 113-3590 Drives the booklet c-fold blade
motor

R12 Booklet c-fold roller JC66-04744A (*) In case of c-fold, presses

a stack of paper to fold
completely.
(*) This part is in ordering system.

Booklet fold unit operation

1. In case of v-fold.

a. After a stack of paper is collected at a booklet end fence unit, the booklet end fence(callout1)
moves to a designated location.

b. The booklet blade motor(M22) drives the booklet blade(callout2) to push the center of paper.

c. Paper enters between the booklet fold rollers(R11) by the booklet blade and it is completely
folded between the rollers.

1020 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 d. The folded paper stack is discharged to the booklet output tray via the booklet exit roller(R13).

2. In case of c-fold

a. After a stack of paper is collected at a booklet end fence unit, the booklet end fence(callout1) is
moved to a designated location.

b. The booklet blade motor(M22) drives the booklet blade(callout2) to push one-third of paper.

c. he paper enters between the booklet fold rollers(R11) by the booklet blade and it is completely
folded between the rollers.

d. The folded sheets move to s location where they will be c-folded by a booklet diverter.

e. The booklet c-fold blade motor(M17) drives the booklet c-fold blade(callout3), pokes two-thirds of
paper.

f. Paper enters between the booklet c-fold roller(R12) and the booklet fold roller by the booklet
c-fold blade and it is completely folded between the rollers.

Booklet diverter unit

Learn about the Booklet diverter unit of the booklet finisher.

The booklet diverter unit determines a paper path to allow the stack of folded paper to exit to the booklet
output tray during the v-fold. In case of c-fold, it makes another paper path so folded sheets can move
to a location that can be c-folded. The booklet diverter motor(M18) drives the booklet diverter, and the
booklet diverter home sensor(S40) checks whether the booklet diverter is at the home position

Booklet diverter unit 1021

 Figure 5-80 Booklet diverter unit overview

M18

S40

Figure 5-81 Booklet diverter unit detail view – left-front

M18

S40

1022 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Table 5-41 Booklet diverter unit parts information

Item Part name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Description

1 Booklet diverter JC90-01398A Determines the paper path for

either the booklet exit unit or
the location for c-fold

S40 Booklet diverter home 0604-001415 (*) 113-3060 Checks the home position of
sensor the booklet diverter

M18 Booklet diverter motor JC93-01153A (*) 113-3560 Drives the booklet diverter
(*) This part is in ordering system.

Booklet diverter unit operation

1. In case of v-fold, the booklet diverter(callout1) determines the paper path so that the folded sheets
exit to the booklet exit unit and into the booklet output tray.

2. On the other hand, in c-fold, it makes another paper path to fold it by c-fold blade(callout2).

Booklet exit unit

Learn about the Booklet exit unit of the booklet finisher.

The booklet exit unit ejects a stack of v-fold paper to the booklet output tray unit. The booklet exit
sensor(S44) detects paper entry into the booklet exit unit, and the booklet fold motor(M19) drives the
booklet exit roller(R4) to discharge paper.

Booklet exit unit 1023

 Figure 5-82 Booklet exit unit overview – front-right

Figure 5-83 Booklet exit unit detail view

Table 5-42 Booklet exit unit parts information

Item Part name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Description

S44 Booklet exit sensor JC32-00020A (*) 113-3120 Check whether paper has come
into the booklet unit

M21 Booklet fold motor JC31-00144A (*) 113-3510 Drives the booklet exit roller

R13 Booklet exit roller JC66-04721A (*) Moves paper to the booklet
output tray unit
(*) This part is in ordering system.

Booklet output tray unit

Learn about the Booklet output tray unit of the booklet finisher.

1024 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

The booklet output tray unit is the place where the ejected paper is stacked. The booklet output tray
sensor(S43) detects whether paper is on the booklet output tray or not.

Figure 5-84 Booklet output tray unit overview

Figure 5-85 Booklet output tray unit detail view

Booklet output tray unit 1025

 Table 5-43 Booklet output tray unit parts information

Item Part name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Description

1 Booklet output tray JC61-07253B (*) Stores paper stacks from the
booklet exit unit
JC63-04978B (*)

S43 Booklet output tray JC82-01039A (*) 113-2150 Detects whether paper is on the
sensor booklet output tray.pa
(*) This part is in ordering system.

How to print large number of booklets

Y1G07A Booklet finisher is support available to print a large number of booklets.

1. Remove the booklet output tray (Callout 1).

2. Install the booklet sub tray at the booklet output (Callout 2).

NOTE:

● The booklet sub tray is included in the Booklet finisher product box. If a user misses the part,
order and use the new part.

● Booklet sub tray part number : JC61-07088A

1026 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 3. Install a box to store printouts(Callout 3).

PCA connection information

Learn about the PCA connection information.

PCA connection information 1027

 Figure 5-86 Stapler / Stacker finisher system - PCA connection information

Table 5-44 Stapler/Stacker finisher system - PCA connectors, parts, and diagnostics information

Connector Motor Diagnostics Sensor, Switch Diagnostics Solenoid, PCA Diagnostics

CN1 MainPCA
interface

CN2 Front door switch(S35) 113-2181

CN3 Top door switch(S18) 113-2182

CN4 Entrance 113-2570 Buffer sensor(S13) 113-2100

motor(M12)

Entrance sensor(S12) 113-2080

Tray diverter home 113-2020

sensor(S4)

Buffer home 113-2210

sensor(S16)

Top exit sensor(S11) 113-2091

Main exit sensor(S10) 113-2090

1028 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Table 5-44 Stapler/Stacker finisher system - PCA connectors, parts, and diagnostics information (continued)

Connector Motor Diagnostics Sensor, Switch Diagnostics Solenoid, PCA Diagnostics

CN5 Rear tamper 113-2640 Front tamper home 113-2120 Manual staple
motor(M9) sensor(S6) PCA(P3)

Buffer 113-2660 Paddle home sensor(S8) 113-2060

motor(M10)

Paddle 113-2600 Top output tray paper 113-2145

motor(M1) full sensor(S15)

End fence 113-2590 Rear tamper home 113-2130

motor(M3) sensor(S9)

CN6 Bridge 113-2560 Bridge entrance 113-2070

motor(M14) sensor(S1)

Bridge door sensor(S2) 113-2180

Bridge exit sensor(S3) 113-2143

CN7 Punch unit

CN8 Exit motor(M13) 113-2580 Main output tray motor 113-2143

sensor(S33)

Main output 113-2610 Top output tray paper 113-2145

tray motor(M11) full sensor(S15)

CN9 Main output tray top of 113-2190

stack switch(S34)

CN10 Staple clinch Staple home sensor

motor

Stapler 113-2620 Staple ready sensor

position motor
(M8)

Staple low sensor

Stapler rear 113-2110

sensor(S30)

Stapler mid front 113-2112

sensor(S24)

Stapler mid rear 113-2111

sensor(S25)

CN11 Ejector2 113-2540 Ejector2 motor 113-2041

motor(M5) sensor(S23)

Ejector1 113-2530 Ejector1 motor 113-2032

motor(M6) sensor(S27)

Ejector2 home 113-2040

sensor(S32)

Ejector sensor(S14) 113-2170

Ejector1 end 113-2030

sensor(S28)

Ejector1 home 113-2031

sensor(S29)

PCA connection information 1029

 Table 5-44 Stapler/Stacker finisher system - PCA connectors, parts, and diagnostics information (continued)

Connector Motor Diagnostics Sensor, Switch Diagnostics Solenoid, PCA Diagnostics

CN12 Front tamper 113-2630 Manual staple 113-2160

motor(M4) sensor(S19)

End fence home 113-2050

sensor(S7)

Stapler front 113-2113

sensor(S21)

CN13 Paper holding 113-2510 Booklet output tray 113-2150

motor(M7) sensor(S43)

CN14 Main output top of stack 113-2140

sensor(S20)

Rear paper holding 113-2142

sensor(S31)

Front paper holding 113-2141

sensor(S17)

Paper holding home 113-2010

sensor(S22)

Main output top of stack 113-2140

sensor(S20)

CN15 Booklet
interface

CN16 Log

CN17 Main exit cam 113-2500 Main exit cam home 113-2000
motor(M2) sensor(S5)

Buffer 113-2670
solenoid(SL1)

Figure 5-87 Booklet finisher system - PCA connection information

1030 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Table 5-45 Booklet finisher system - PCA connectors, parts, and diagnostics information

Connector Motor Diagnostics Sensor Diagnostics Switch, Solenoid, Diagnostics

PCA

CN1 Stapler/
Stacker
interface

CN4 Booklet staple Booklet entrance 113-3100

motor sensor(S36)

Booklet staple low

sensor

Booklet staple home

sensor

CN5 Booklet presser 113-2580 Booklet presser 113-3130

motor(M16) home sensor(S37)

Booklet entrance 113-2100

motor(S13)

CN6 Booklet tamper 113-3540 Booklet blade home 113-3040

motor(M23) sensor(S45)

Booklet tamper 113-3080

home sensor(S38)

Booklet tamper 113-3110

sensor(S46)

CN7 Booklet paddle 113-3580 Booklet paddle 113-3090

motor(M19) home sensor(S41)

Booklet diverter 113-3560 Booklet diverter 113-3060

motor(M18) home sensor(S40)

CN8 Booklet c-fold blade 113-3590 Booklet exit 113-3120

motor(M17) sensor(S44)

Booklet c-fold blade 113-3050

home sensor(S39)

CN9 Booklet end fence 113-3530 Booklet end fence 113-3000 Booklet end fence
motor(M20) home sensor(S42) solenoid(SL2)

CN10 Booklet fold 113-3510 113-3520

motor(M21)

Booklet blade 113-3550

motor(M22)

Service approach
Learn about the service approach of the inner finisher.

CAUTION: When working on the product, do not pick up the unit by the output tray, which will detach
under the weight of the product.

Precautions when replacing parts

Learn about precautions when replacing parts.

Service approach 1031

 Precautions when replacing parts
Learn about precautions when replacing parts.

Precautions when assembling and disassembling

● Use only HP approved replacement parts. Make sure that the part number, product name, voltage,
and current or temperature ratings are correct. Failure to do so might result in damage to the
machine, circuit overload, fire, or electric shock.

● Do not make unauthorized changes or additions to the printer. Unauthorized changes might cause
the printer to malfunction and create electric shock or fire hazards.

● Use caution when dismantling the unit. Take note of the location of each screw or other part. This
printer contains different kinds of screws. Using the wrong screw might lead to system failure, short
circuit or electric shock.

● Do not disassemble the laser scanner assembly. Once the laser scanner assembly is
disassembled, dust might enter the mirror chamber and will seriously degrade print quality. There
are no serviceable parts inside the laser scanner assembly.

● Regularly check the condition of the power cable, plug and socket. Bad contacts might lead to
overheating and fire. Damaged cables might lead to electric shock or unit malfunction.

Precautions when handling PCAs

Static electricity might damage a PCA. Use approved, anti-static precautions when handling or storing a
PCA. Service personnel should use grounded ESD straps and/or mats when handling PCAs.

● Precautions when moving and storing a PCA

– Keep PCA in a conductive case, anti-static bag, or wrapped in aluminum foil.

– Do not store a PCA where it is exposed to direct sunlight.

● Precautions when replacing a PCA

– Disconnect power cables before disconnecting other cables.

– Do not touch any soldered connections, connector terminals, or other electronic parts when
handling insulated parts.

● Precautions when checking a PCA

– Touch a grounded area of the printer chassis to discharge static electric charge before
touching a PCA.

– Do not touch a PCA with bare hands or metal objects. Doing so might create a short circuit or
cause electric shock. Use caution when handling a PCA with moving parts such as sensors,
motors, or lamps, as they might become very hot.

– Use caution when fitting and removing screws. Watch for hidden screens. Make sure that the
correct screw is used and make sure that when toothed washers are removed, they are refitted
in their original positions.

– Place the product on an ESD workstation or mat, or use an ESD strap (if one is available). If
an ESD workstation, mat, or strap is not available, ground yourself by touching the sheet-metal
chassis before touching an ESD-sensitive part.

1032 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Releasing plastic latches
Many of the parts are held in place with plastic latches. The latches might easily break. Be careful when
releasing them. To remove such parts, press the hook end of the latch away from the part to which it is
latched.

Precautions when handling PCA

Static electric might damage a PCA. Use approved, anti-static precautions when handling or storing a
PCA. Service personnel should use grounded ESD straps and/or mats when handling PCAs.

● Precautions when moving and storing a PCA

– Keep PCA in a conductive case, anti-static bag, or wrapped in aluminum foil.

– Do not store a PCA where it is exposed to direct sunlight.

● Precautions when replacing a PCA

– Disconnect power cables before disconnecting other cables.

– Do not touch any soldered connections, connector terminals, or other electronic parts when
handling insulated parts.

● Precautions when checking a PCA

– Touch a grounded area of the printer chassis to discharge static electric charge before
touching a PCA.

– Do not touch a PCA with bare hands or metal objects. Doing so might create a short circuit or
cause electric shock. Use caution when handling a PCA with moving parts such as sensors,
motors, or lamps, as they might become very hot.

– Use caution when fitting and removing screws. Watch for hidden screens. Make sure that the
correct screw is used and make sure that when toothed washers are removed, they are refitted
in their original positions.

– Place the product on an ESD workstation or mat, or use an ESD strap (if one is available). If
an ESD workstation, mat, or strap is not available, ground yourself by touching the sheet-metal
chassis before touching an ESD-sensitive part.

Releasing plastic latches

Learn about releasing plastic latches.

Many of the parts are held in place with plastic latches. The latches can break easily; release them
carefully. To remove such parts, press the hook end of the latch away from the part to which it is latched.

Precautions when handling PCA 1033

 Before performing service
Learn what to do before performing service.

● Remove all paper from the product.

● Turn off the power using the power button.

● Unplug the power cable and interface cable or cables.

● Place the product on an ESD workstation or mat, or use an ESD strap (if one is available). If an
ESD workstation, mat, or strap is not available, ground yourself by touching the sheet-metal chassis
before touching an ESD-sensitive part.

● Remove the toner cartridges.

● Remove the Tray 2 cassette.

ESD precautions
Learn the importance of electrostatic discharge.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Look for the ESD reminder
when removing printer parts. Always perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If
an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground
before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

After performing service

Learn what to do after performing service.

● Verify that the service performed was successful.

● Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

● Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

● Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new
issues.

● Verify that the printer is in better condition than when you arrived, cosmetically and electrically.

1034 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Post-service test
Perform the following tests to verify that the repair or replacement was successful:

Print-quality test
Learn about the print-quality test.

1. Verify that you have completed the necessary reassembly steps.

2. Make sure that the tray contains clean, unmarked paper.

3. Attach the power cord and interface cable or interface cables, and then turn on the product.

4. Print a configuration page.

5. Print a print quality page, and then verify that there are no lines, streaks, banding, or other print
quality defects.

6. Send a print job from the host computer, and then verify that the output meets expectations.

Order parts by authorized service providers

Find information about ordering parts and supplies for the printer.

Ordering
Order parts by authorized service providers.

Table 5-46 Ordering

Item or provider Description

Order supplies and paper www.hp.com/go/suresupply

Order parts from authorized service providers www.hp.com/buy/parts or partsurfer.hp.com

Order through service or support providers Contact an HP-authorized service or support provider.

Order using the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS) To access, in a supported web browser on your
computer, enter the printer IP address or host name
in the address/URL field. The EWS contains a link to
the HP SureSupply web site, which provides options for
purchasing Original HP supplies.

Orderable parts
Not all of the parts shown in the exploded assembly diagrams are orderable parts.

Refer to the tables following the diagrams or the alphabetical/numerical parts lists to determine if a part
is orderable.

Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement (stapler/ stacker and

booklet finishers)
Learn about parts, diagrams, removal and replacement (stapler/ stacker and booklet finishers)

Post-service test 1035

 NOTE: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work
at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-
metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-
sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

Parts, diagrams (stapler/stacker)

Learn about parts, diagrams (stapler/stacker)

NOTE: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work
at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-
metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-
sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

1036 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Cover & hanress

Cover & hanress

Parts diagram and parts list for the cover and hanress.

Figure 5-88 cover

2 21

18

12

17
6

19 16

7 13
5
13
9 14
20 22

8 24
3 14
23
15-1

15-2

Table 5-47 cover

Ref Description Part number Qty Orderable

2 Finisher mount bracket JC90-01442A 1 (*)

3 Caster cover JC63-04985B 1 (*)

4 Front cover JC63-04986B 1 (*)

5 Front lower cover JC63-04987B 1 (*)

6 Rear cover JC63-04988B 1 (*)

Cover & hanress 1037

 Table 5-47 cover (continued)

Ref Description Part number Qty Orderable

7 Top output tray upper JC63-04996B 1 (*)

8 Main output tray JC63-05002B 1 (*)

9 Top output tray lower JC63-05003B 1 (*)

12 Bridge unit JC90-01772B 1 (*)

13 Booklet maker JC82-00905A 1 (*)

14 Left lower cover (Stacker-stapler) JC90-01771B 1 (*)

14 Left lower cover (Booklet) JC90-01417B 1 (*)

15-1 Booklet output tray JC61-07253B 1 (*)

15-2 Booklet output tray cover JC63-04978B 1 (*)

16 Front door JC90-01444B 1 (*)

17 Top door JC90-01445B 1 (*)

18 Top cover JC90-01446B 1 (*)

19 Left upper cover JC90-01475B 1 (*)

20 Booklet front cover JC90-01478B 1 (*)

21 Right upper cover JC90-01448B 1 (*)

22 Hinge JC66-04767A 1 (*)

23 Caster JC61-07452A 4 (*)

24 Caster fix nut JC61-07444A 4 (*)

Table 5-48 harness

Ref Description Part number Qty Orderable

Not shown Harness, finisher to copier PWR JC39-02308A 1 (*)

Not shown Harness, 3K finisher to copier PWR JC39-02308A 1 (*)

Not shown Harness, 3K finisher rear upper JC39-02312A 1 (*)

Not shown Harness, 3K finisher front upper JC39-02313A 1 (*)

Not shown Harness, 3K finisher punch relay JC39-02314A 1 (*)

Not shown Harness, 3K finisher staple relay JC39-02315A 1 (*)

Not shown Harness, 3K finisher eject relay JC39-02317A 1 (*)

Not shown Harness, 3K finisher front lower JC39-02318A 1 (*)

Not shown Harness, 3K finisher stack relay JC39-02319A 1 (*)

Not shown Harness, 3k finisher exit path JC39-02322A 1 (*)

Not shown Harness, 3K Finisher Bridge Sub JC39-02327A 1 (*)

Not shown Harness, 3K Finisher Bridge Pa JC39-02328A 1 (*)

Not shown Stack full harness JC39-02331A 1 (*)

1038 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

(*) This part is in ordering system.

Cover & hanress 1039

 Front door, Top door, Top cover, Right upper cover
Parts diagram and parts list for the front door, top door, top cover, right upper cover.

Figure 5-89 Front door, Top door, Top cover, Right upper cover

16
17

16-1

18 21
18-1
18-2
18-3

18-4

Table 5-49 Front door, Top door, Top cover, Right upper cover

Ref Description Part number Qty Orderable

16 Front door JC90-01444B 1 (*)

16-1 Cover link JC63-05004A 1 (*)

17 Top door JC90-01445B 1 (*)

18 Top cover JC90-01446B 1 (*)

18-1 Manual staple PCA JC92-02789B 1 (*)

18-2 Magnet JC81-08263A 1 (*)

18-3 Manual staple button LED JC64-00996A 1 (*)

18-4 Manual staple button JC64-00995A 1 (*)

21 Right upper cover JC90-01448B 1 (*)

(*) This part is in ordering system.

1040 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Bridge unit

Upper bridge
Parts diagram and parts list for the bridge unit, upper bridge.

Figure 5-90 Bridge unit, Upper bridge

2-2
2-1

3
2-3

Table 5-50 Bridge unit, Upper bridge

Ref Description Part number Qty Orderable

1 Bridge unit JC90-01772B 1 (*)

2 Upper bridge unit JC90-01406B 1

2-1 Bridge entrance sensor JC32-00020A 1 (*)

2-2 Spring JC61-07431A 4 (*)

2-3 Spring JC61-07430A 2 (*)

3 Lower bridge unit JC90-01401B 1

Bridge unit 1041

 (*) This part is in ordering system.

1042 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Lower bridge
Parts diagram and parts list for the bridge unit, lower bridge.

Figure 5-91 Bridge unit, Lower bridge

3-2

3-1

3-3

3-4 3-6
3 3-5

3-7

Table 5-51 Bridge unit, Lower bridge

Ref Description Part number Qty Orderable

3 Lower bridge unit JC90-01401B 1

3-1 Bridge entrance roller JC66-04733A 1

3-2 Bridge middle roller JC66-04732A 1 (*)

3-3 Bridge exit roller JC66-04732A 4 (*)

3-4 Bridge exit actuator JC66-04569A 2 (*)

3-5 Bridge exit sensor 0604-001393 1

3-6 Bridge door sensor 0604-001393 1 (*)

3-7 Bridge motor JC31-00163B 1 (*)

Lower bridge 1043

 (*) This part is in ordering system.

1044 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Entrance unit

Entrance unit
Parts diagram and parts list for the entrance unit.

Figure 5-92 Entrance unit

4

7
9
5

10

3
1

11
6

Table 5-52 Entrance unit

Ref Description Part number Qty Orderable

1 Entrance unit JC90-01449A 1 (*)

2 Entrance roller JC66-04722A 1 (*)

3 Middle roller JC66-04724A 1 (*)

4 Entrance motor assembly JC90-01459A 1 (*)

5 Gear JC66-04656A 3

Entrance unit 1045

 Table 5-52 Entrance unit (continued)

Ref Description Part number Qty Orderable

6 Gear JC66-04546A 1

7 Belt 6602-003646 1

8 Belt 6602-003647 1 (*)

9 Belt 6602-003645 1 (*)

10 Bushing 6601-001478 2 (*)

11 Bushing 6601-002584 2 (*)

(*) This part is in ordering system.

1046 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Entrance unit, Entrance motor
Parts diagram and parts list for the entrance unit, entrance motor.

Figure 5-93 Entrance unit, Entrance motor

4 4-1
1

1-1
1-2

Table 5-53 Entrance unit, Entrance motor

Ref Description Part number Qty Orderable

1 Entrance unit JC90-01449A 1 (*)

1-1 Spring JC61-07408A 2 (*)

1-2 Entrance sensor JC32-00020A 1 (*)

4 Entrance motor assembly JC90-01459A 1 (*)

4-1 Entrance motor JC31-00163B 1 (*)

(*) This part is in ordering system.

Entrance unit, Entrance motor 1047

 Tray diverter unit

Tray diverter unit

Parts diagram and parts list for the tray diverter unit.

Figure 5-94 Tray diverter unit

6

8
1

4
3 9

5
2

Table 5-54 Tray diverter unit

Ref Description Part number Qty Orderable

1 Top jam cover assembly JC90-01455A 1 (*)

1048 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Table 5-54 Tray diverter unit (continued)

Ref Description Part number Qty Orderable

2 Tray diverter home sensor 0604-001415 1 (*)

3 Tray diverter cam JC90-01458A 1 (*)

4 Bushing JC61-00423A 1 (*)

5 Belt 6602-003639 1 (*)

6 Top door switch JC39-02310A 1 (*)

7 Frame mount JC61-06663A 1 (*)

8 Frame mount side bracket JC90-01442A 1 (*)

9 Clutch JC90-01474A 1 (*)

(*) This part is in ordering system.

Tray diverter unit 1049

 Tray jam cover, Tray diverter CAM
Parts diagram and parts list for the tray jam cover, tray diverter CAM.

Figure 5-95 Tray jam cover, Tray diverter CAM

1-6

1-4
1-5
1-1

1
1-7

1-2
1-3

Table 5-55 Tray jam cover, Tray diverter CAM

Ref Description Part number Qty Orderable

1 Top jam cover assembly JC90-01455A 1 (*)

1-1 Seal JC62-01328A 1 (*)

1-2 Spring JC61-07417A 1 (*)

1-3 Spring JC61-07415A 1 (*)

1-4 Spring JC61-07410A 1 (*)

1-5 Spring JC61-07409A 1 (*)

1-6 Tray diverter JC61-07205A 1 (*)

1-7 Tray jam cover JC61-07196A 1 (*)

3 Tray diverter cam JC90-01458A 1 (*)

3-1 Pin JC70-40360A 1 (*)

(*) This part is in ordering system.

1050 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Top output tray unit, Top exit unit, Main exit unit

Top output tray unit, Top exit unit, Main exit unit
Parts diagram and parts list for the top output tray unit, top exit unit, main exit unit.

Figure 5-96 Top output tray unit, Top exit unit, Main exit unit
1

6 3
4
13

8
12
5

9
14
12
10 7

11

Table 5-56 Top output tray unit, Top exit unit, Main exit unit

Ref Description Part number Qty Orderable

1 Top output tray JC63-04995B 1 (*)

2 Top lower feed assembly JC90-01454A 1 (*)

3 Top exit roller JC66-04727A 1 (*)

4 Top middle roller JC66-04725A 1 (*)

5 Main output tray motor assembly JC90-01415B 1 (*)

Top output tray unit, Top exit unit, Main exit unit 1051
 Table 5-56 Top output tray unit, Top exit unit, Main exit unit (continued)

Ref Description Part number Qty Orderable

6 Exit motor assembly JC90-01459A 1 (*)

7 Main exit CAM motor assembly JC90-01453A 1 (*)

8 Gear JC66-04657A 2

9 Clutch JC90-01404A 1 (*)

10 Gear JC66-04602A 1 (*)

11 Front door switch JC39-02310A 1 (*)

12 Top output tray paper full sensor JC82-01039A 1 (*)

13 Top-brush exit JC67-00818A 1 (*)

14 Belt 6602-003649 1 (*)

(*) This part is in ordering system.

1052 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Top lower cover, Exit motor, Main exit CAM motor
Parts diagram and parts list for the top lower cover, exit motor, main exit CAM motor.

Figure 5-97 Top lower cover, Exit motor, Main exit CAM motor
2-4

2-2
2-1

2-3

6
6-1 7

7-1

7-2

Table 5-57 Top lower cover, Exit motor, Main exit CAM motor

Ref Description Part number Qty Orderable

2 Top lower feed assembly JC90-01454A 1 (*)

2-1 Top exit actuator JC66-04525A 1 (*)

2-2 Spring JC61-07411A 1 (*)

2-3 Top exit sensor 0604-001393 1 (*)

2-4 Main exit sensor JC32-00020A 1 (*)

6 Exit motor assembly JC90-01459A 1 (*)

6-1 Exit motor JC31-00163B 1 (*)

7 Main exit CAM motor assembly JC90-01453A 1 (*)

Top lower cover, Exit motor, Main exit CAM motor 1053
 Table 5-57 Top lower cover, Exit motor, Main exit CAM motor (continued)

Ref Description Part number Qty Orderable

7-1 Main exit CAM motor JC93-01155A 1 (*)

7-2 Main exit CAM home sensor 0604-001393 1 (*)

(*) This part is in ordering system.

1054 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Main exit unit, Paddle unit, End fence unit

Main exit unit, Paddle unit, End fence unit

Parts diagram and parts list for the main exit unit, paddle unit, end fence unit.

Figure 5-98 Main exit unit, Paddle unit, End fence unit
23

2 1
3
4
18

19

16

17
14
11

15
5
12 13
6

7
8
20

10 9

22
21

Table 5-58 Main exit unit, Paddle unit, End fence unit

Ref Description Part number Qty Orderable

1 Main exit CAM guide JC90-01451A 1 (*)

2 Main exit CAM JC66-04561A 3

3 Main exit CAM shaft JC66-04715A 1

4 Pin JC70-40360A 3 (*)

5 Main exit roller JC66-04726A 1 (*)

6 Paddle pesser JC61-07206A 1 (*)

Main exit unit, Paddle unit, End fence unit 1055

 Table 5-58 Main exit unit, Paddle unit, End fence unit (continued)

Ref Description Part number Qty Orderable

7 Paddle JC90-01480A 1 (*)

7-1 Paddle wing JC90-01463A 2 (*)

7-2 Paddle mid JC90-01462A 1 (*)

8 Brush JC67-00819A 1 (*)

9 Brush JC67-00820A 1 (*)

10 Main output tray top of stack switch JC39-02316A 1 (*)

11 Paddle motor assembly JC90-01461A 1 (*)

11-1 Paddle motor JC93-01001A 1 (*)

11-2 Paddle home sensor 0604-001393 1 (*)

12 Paddle home gear JC66-04558A 1

13 End fence motor JC90-01467A 1 (*)

14 Belt 6602-003270 1 (*)

15 Belt 6602-003640 1 (*)

16 CAM JC66-04562A 1

17 CAM guide JC66-04526A 1 (*)

18 End fence JC90-01466A 1 (*)

19 Spring JC61-07414A 2 (*)

20 Main output tray top of stack switch guide JC61-07189A 1 (*)

21 Main output tray top of stack switch lower JC61-07192A 1 (*)

guide

22 Ground JC63-04984A 1 (*)

23 Brush JC67-00817A 1 (*)

(*) This part is in ordering system.

1056 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Paddle, Paddle motor
Parts diagram and parts list for the paddle, paddle motor.

Figure 5-99 Paddle, Paddle motor

11

11-1

7-1
7-2 11-2

Table 5-59 Paddle, Paddle motor

Ref Description Part number Qty Orderable

7 Paddle JC90-01480A 1 (*)

7-1 Paddle wing JC90-01463A 2 (*)

7-2 Paddle mid JC90-01462A 1 (*)

11 Paddle motor assembly JC90-01461A 1 (*)

11-1 Paddle motor JC93-01001A 1 (*)

11-2 Paddle home sensor 0604-001393 1 (*)

(*) This part is in ordering system.

Paddle, Paddle motor 1057

 Tamper unit, Ejector unit, Stapler unit, Main PCA

Tamper unit, Ejector unit, Stapler unit, Main PCA

Parts diagram and parts list for the tamper unit, ejector unit, stapler unit, main PCA.

Figure 5-100 Tamper unit, Ejector unit, Stapler unit, Main PCA

6 5

Table 5-60 Tamper unit, Ejector unit, Stapler unit, Main PCA

Ref Description Part number Qty Orderable

1 Front tamper unit JC82-00901A 1 (*)

2 Rear tamper unit JC82-00898A 1 (*)

3 Ejector unit JC90-01409A 1 (*)

4 Stapler unit JC82-00894A 1 (*)

5 Stapler cartridge JC81-09882B 1 (*)

6 Finisher main PCA JC92-02968A 1 (*)

7 Roller JC66-04523A 1 (*)

(*) This part is in ordering system.

1058 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Tamper unit
Parts diagram and parts list for the tamper unit.

Figure 5-101 Tamper unit

1-2
1-3

1-4

1-1

2-2

2-3

2-1

Table 5-61 Tamper unit

Ref Description Part number Qty Orderable

1 Front tamper unit JC82-00901A 1 (*)

1-1 Front tamper home sensor 0604-001393 1 (*)

1-2 Front tamper motor JC93-01001A 1 (*)

1-3 End fence home sensor 0604-001393 1 (*)

1-4 Belt 6602-003644 1 (*)

2 Rear tamper unit JC82-00898A 1 (*)

2-1 Rear tamper home sensor 0604-001393 1 (*)

2-2 Rear tamper motor JC93-01001A 1 (*)

2-3 Belt 6602-003644 1 (*)

Tamper unit 1059

 (*) This part is in ordering system.

1060 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Ejector unit
Parts diagram and parts list for the ejector unit.

Figure 5-102 Ejector unit

3

3-5

3-1 3-2
3-7
3-3

3-9
3-6

3-4
3-10
3-8

Table 5-62 Ejector unit

Ref Description Part number Qty Orderable

3 Ejector unit JC90-01409A 1 (*)

3-1 Ejector sensor JC32-00020A 1 (*)

3-2 Ejector1 home sensor 0604-001415 1 (*)

3-3 Ejector1 end sensor 0604-001415 1 (*)

3-4 Ejector1 motor sensor 0604-001415 1 (*)

3-5 Ejector1 motor assembly JC90-01411A 1 (*)

3-6 Ejector1 motor JC93-01168A 1 (*)

3-7 Ejector2 home sensor 0604-001415 1 (*)

3-8 Ejector2 motor sensor 0604-001415 1 (*)

3-9 Ejector2 motor assembly JC90-01410A 1 (*)

3-10 Ejector2 motor JC93-01168A 1 (*)

(*) This part is in ordering system.

Ejector unit 1061

 Paper holding unit, Main output tray unit

Paper holding unit, Main output tray unit

Parts diagram and parts list for the paper holding unit, main output tray unit.

Figure 5-103 Paper holding unit, Main output tray unit

11

4 10

8
9

12

3 6

2 1

Table 5-63 Paper holding unit, Main output tray unit

Ref Description Part number Qty Orderable

1 Left upper cover JC90-01475B 1 (*)

2 Left lower cover(Booklet finisher) JC90-01417B 1 (*)

2 Left lower cover(Stapler-stacker finisher) JC90-01771B 1 (*)

3 Main output tray JC63-05002B 1 (*)

4 Main output tray motor aseembly JC90-01415B 1 (*)

1062 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Table 5-63 Paper holding unit, Main output tray unit (continued)

Ref Description Part number Qty Orderable

5 Paper holding motor JC90-01414A 1 (*)

6 Belt 6602-003652 2 (*)

7 Gear JC66-04663A 4

8 Gear JC66-04605A 1

9 Gear JC61-07305A 1

10 Spring JC61-07429A 1

11 Main output tray top of stack switch JC39-02316A 1 (*)

12 Main output tray support JC61-06668A 2 (*)

(*) This part is in ordering system.

Paper holding unit, Main output tray unit 1063

 Left upper cover
Parts diagram and parts list for the left upper cover.

Figure 5-104 Left upper cover

1-3
1-5 1-2


1-1
1-6 1-4

1-7

1-7

Table 5-64 Left upper cover

Ref Description Part number Qty Orderable

1 Left upper cover JC90-01475B 1 (*)

1-1 Paper holding home sensor 0604-001393 1 (*)

1-2 Front paper holding sensor 0604-001393 1 (*)

1-3 Rear paper holding sensor 0604-001393 1 (*)

1-4 Left upper cover JC63-04999B 1 (*)

1-5 Spring JC61-07428A 1 (*)

1-6 Spring JC61-07427A 1 (*)

1-7 Main output tray top of stack sensor JC82-01039A 1 (*)

(*) This part is in ordering system.

1064 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Left lower cover
Parts diagram and parts list for the left lower cover.

Figure 5-105 Left lower cover

2 2

stapler-stacker booklet finisher

2-3
2-1 2-3
2-2 2-1
2-2
2-5

2-4

Table 5-65 Left lower cover

Ref Description Part number Qty Orderable

2 Left lower cover (Booklet finisher) JC90-01417B 1 (*)

2 Left lower cover (Stapler-stacker finisher) JC90-01771B 1 (*)

2-1 Main output tray lower limit switch 0604-001415 1 (*)

2-2 Main output tray lower limit actuator JC81-07930A 1 (*)

2-3 Spring JC81-09396A 1 (*)

2-4 Spring (Booklet finisher) JC61-07407A 1 (*)

2-5 Booklet output tray sensor (Booklet finisher) JC82-01039A 1 (*)

(*) This part is in ordering system.

Left lower cover 1065

 Main output tray motor, Paper holding motor
Parts diagram and parts list for the main output tray motor, paper holding motor.

Figure 5-106 Main output tray motor, paper holding motor

5

4
4-1

4-5 5-1
4-4

4-2

4-3

5-2

Table 5-66 Main output tray motor, paper holding motor

Ref Description Part number Qty Orderable

4 Main output tray motor assembly JC90-01415B 1 (*)

4-1 Pin JC70-40542A 1 (*)

4-2 Gear JC81-07637A 1 (*)

4-3 Main output tray motor JC31-00178B 1 (*)

4-4 Bearing 6601-001478 1 (*)

4-5 Main output tray motor sensor 0604-001415 1 (*)

5 Paper holding motor assembly JC90-01414A 1 (*)

5-1 Paper holding motor JC93-01156A 1 (*)

5-2 Gear JC66-04604A 1 (*)

(*) This part is in ordering system.

1066 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Cover & hanress

Buffer unit
Parts diagram and parts list for the buffer unit.

Figure 5-107 Buffer unit

3-1

6
7
4

10
9

Table 5-67 Buffer unit

Ref Description Part number Qty Orderable

1 Buffer diverter assembly JC90-01674A 1 (*)

2 Front jam cover assembly JC90-01457A 1 (*)

3 Budder roller assembly JC90-01672A 1 (*)

Cover & hanress 1067

 Table 5-67 Buffer unit (continued)

Ref Description Part number Qty Orderable

3-1 Buffer roller JC66-05161A 1

4 Buffer solenoid JC90-01675A 1 (*)

5 Buffer motor JC93-01152A 1 (*)

6 Gear JC66-04582A 1 (*)

7 Belt 6602-003641 1

8 Manual staple sensor 0604-001415 1 (*)

9 Manual staple actuator JC66-04528A 1 (*)

10 Buffer jam cover JC90-01450A 1 (*)

(*) This part is in ordering system.

1068 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Buffer diverter, Front jam cover
Parts diagram and parts list for the buffer diverter, front jam cover.

Figure 5-108 Buffer diverter, Front jam cover

2-2
1

1-4
2-1
1-2 2

1-5

1-3 1-1

Table 5-68 Buffer diverter, Front jam cover

Ref Description Part number Qty Orderable

1 Buffer diverter assembly JC90-01674A 1 (*)

1-1 Spring JC61-07413A 2 (*)

1-2 Spring JC61-07409A 2 (*)

1-3 Bufer diverter JC61-07204A 1 (*)

1-4 Buffer home sensor 0604-001393 1 (*)

1-5 Buffer sensor JC32-00020A 1 (*)

2 Front jam cover assembly JC90-01457A 1 (*)

2-1 Magnet JC81-08263A 1 (*)

2-2 Spring JC61-07418A 1 (*)

(*) This part is in ordering system.

Buffer diverter, Front jam cover 1069

 Parts, diagrams (Booklet finisher)
Learn about parts, diagrams (booklet finisher)

NOTE: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work
at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-
metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-
sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

Booklet maker
Parts diagram and parts list for the booklet maker.

Figure 5-109 Booklet maker

2
4

5
3

Table 5-69 Booklet maker

Ref Description Part number Qty Orderable

1 Booklet maker JC82-00905A 1 (*)

2 Booklet front cover JC90-01478B 1 (*)

3 Booklet maker PCA JC92-02790B 1 (*)

1070 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Table 5-69 Booklet maker (continued)

Ref Description Part number Qty Orderable

4 Rail 6102-003369 2 (*)

5 Harness guide JC90-01477A 1 (*)

(*) This part is in ordering system.

Booklet maker 1071

 Booklet entrance unit, Booklet presser unit

Booklet entrance unit, Booklet presser unit

Parts diagram and parts list for the booklet entrance unit, booklet presser unit.

Figure 5-110 Booklet entrance unit, Booklet presser unit

1

Table 5-70 Booklet entrance unit, Booklet presser unit

Ref Description Part number Qty Orderable

1 Booklet entrance unit JC90-01424A 1

2 Booklet entrance-presser motor assembly JC90-01425A 1 (*)

3 Booklet entrace roller JC66-04717A 1 (*)

4 Booklet presser unit JC61-07237A 1

(*) This part is in ordering system.

1072 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Booklet entrance, Booklet entrance-presser motor
Parts diagram and parts list for the booklet entrance, booklet entrance-presser motor.

Figure 5-111 Booklet entrance, Booklet entrance-presser motor

1

2-3 2-1
1-2

1-5 1-1

1-4

2-2
1-3

Table 5-71 Booklet entrance, Booklet entrance-presser motor

Ref Description Part number Qty Orderable

1 Booklet entrance unit JC90-01424A 1

1-1 Booklet entrance sensor 0604-001415 1 (*)

1-2 Booklet entrance actuator JC66-04520A 1 (*)

1-3 Booklet presser guide JC61-07331A 1

1-4 Booklet presser guide actuator JC66-04644A 1 (*)

1-5 Bushing JC61-02372A 2 (*)

2 Booklet entrance-presser motor assembly JC90-01425A 1 (*)

2-1 Booklet entrance motor JC93-01152A 1 (*)

2-2 Booklet presser motor JC93-01155A 1 (*)

2-3 Booklet presser home sensor 0604-001393 1 (*)

(*) This part is in ordering system.

Booklet entrance, Booklet entrance-presser motor 1073

 Booklet stapler unit
Parts diagram and parts list for the booklet stapler unit.

Figure 5-112 Booklet stapler unit

1
2

Table 5-72 Booklet stapler unit

Ref Description Part number Qty Orderable

1 Booklet stapler unit JC81-08274B 1 (*)

2 Booklet stapler cartridge JC81-09881B 2 (*)

3 Spring JC61-07398A 1 (*)

4 Spring JC61-07397A 2 (*)

(*) This part is in ordering system.

1074 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Booklet tamper unit
Parts diagram and parts list for the booklet tamper unit.

Figure 5-113 Booklet tamper unit

1-3

1-1

1-4 1-2

Table 5-73 Booklet tamper unit

Ref Description Part number Qty Orderable

1 Booklet tamper unit JC90-01431A 1

1-1 Booklet tamper home sensor 0604-001393 1 (*)

1-2 Booklet tamper motor JC93-01155A 1 (*)

1-3 Booklet tamper sensor JC32-00020A 1 (*)

1-4 Bushing JC61-00423A 2 (*)

(*) This part is in ordering system.

Booklet tamper unit 1075

 Booklet fold unit, Booklet diverter unit, Booklet exit unit

Booklet fold unit, Booklet diverter unit, Booklet exit unit

Parts diagram and parts list for the booklet fold unit, booklet diverter unit, booklet exit unit.

Figure 5-114 Booklet fold unit, Booklet diverter unit, Booklet exit unit

12

10
6
5

11
4
3

Table 5-74 Booklet fold unit, Booklet diverter unit, Booklet exit unit

Ref Description Part number Qty Orderable

1 Booklet c-fold blade assembly JC90-01438A 1 (*)

2 Booklet exit unit JC90-01400A 1 (*)

3 Booklet diverter JC90-01398A 1 (*)

4 Booklet diverter motor assembly JC90-01397A 1 (*)

5 Booklet c-fold blade motor assembly JC90-01396A 1 (*)

6 Booklet fold motor assembly JC90-01436A 1 (*)

7 Gear JC66-04573A 1 (*)

8 Bushing 6601-003037 3

9 Bushing JC61-00426A 1 (*)

10 Bushing JC61-00423A 2 (*)

11 Bushing JC61-02372A 1 (*)

1076 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Table 5-74 Booklet fold unit, Booklet diverter unit, Booklet exit unit (continued)

Ref Description Part number Qty Orderable

12 Gear JC90-01479A 1 (*)

(*) This part is in ordering system.

Booklet fold unit, Booklet diverter unit, Booklet exit unit 1077
 Booklet c-fold blade, Booklet exit, Booklet diverter
Parts diagram and parts list for the booklet c-fold blade, booklet exit, booklet diverter.

Figure 5-115 Booklet c-fold blade, Booklet exit, Booklet diverter

1-1

1-2-1
1-3

1-2

2
3
2-2

2-3

2-4
3-1
2-1

Table 5-75 Booklet c-fold blade, Booklet exit, Booklet diverter

Ref Description Part number Qty Orderable

1 Booklet c-fold blade assembly JC90-01438A 1 (*)

1-1 Booklet sub exit roller assembly JC90-01395A 1 (*)

1-2 Booklet c-fold blade JC90-01394A 1 (*)

1-2-1 Spring JC61-07391A 2 (*)

1-3 Jam guide sheet JC63-05044A 3 (*)

2 Booklet exit unit JC90-01400A 1 (*)

2-1 Booklet c-fold roller JC66-04744A 1

2-2 Booklet exit roller JC66-04721A 1 (*)

2-3 Bushing JC61-00426A 4 (*)

1078 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Table 5-75 Booklet c-fold blade, Booklet exit, Booklet diverter (continued)

Ref Description Part number Qty Orderable

2-4 E-ring 6044-000129 2 (*)

3 Booklet diverter JC90-01398A 1 (*)

3-1 Booklet exit sensor JC32-00020A 1 (*)

(*) This part is in ordering system.

Booklet c-fold blade, Booklet exit, Booklet diverter 1079

 Booklet diverter motor, Booklet c-fold motor, Booklet fold motor
Parts diagram and parts list for the booklet diverter motor, booklet c-fold motor, booklet fold motor.

Figure 5-116 Booklet diverter motor, Booklet c-fold motor, Booklet fold motor

6
6-3

6-1

6-2

5-1
5-3

5-2

4-1

4-2

Table 5-76 Booklet diverter motor, Booklet c-fold motor, Booklet fold motor

Ref Description Part number Qty Orderable

4 Booklet diverter motor assembly JC90-01397A 1 (*)

4-1 Booklet diverter motor JC93-01153A 1 (*)

1080 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Table 5-76 Booklet diverter motor, Booklet c-fold motor, Booklet fold motor (continued)

Ref Description Part number Qty Orderable

4-2 Booklet diverter home sensor 0604-001415 1 (*)

5 Booklet c-fold blade motor assembly JC90-01396A 1 (*)

5-1 Booklet c-fold blade motor JC93-01154A 1 (*)

5-2 Booklet c-fold blade home sensor 0604-001393 1 (*)

5-3 Gear JC66-04579A 1 (*)

6 Booklet fold motor assembly JC90-01436A 1 (*)

6-1 Booklet fold motor JC31-00144A 1 (*)

6-2 Gear JC66-04592A 1 (*)

6-3 Gear JC66-04593A 1 (*)

(*) This part is in ordering system.

Booklet diverter motor, Booklet c-fold motor, Booklet fold motor 1081
 Booklet fold roller
Parts diagram and parts list for the booklet fold roller.

Figure 5-117 Booklet fold roller

2-1
2

Table 5-77 Booklet fold roller

Ref Description Part number Qty Orderable

1 Booklet fold roller JC66-04748A 2 (*)

2 Booklet fold exit JC90-01399A 1 (*)

2-1 C-ring 6044-000159 1 (*)

1082 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

(*) This part is in ordering system.

Booklet fold roller 1083

 Booklet blade motor, Booklet blade
Parts diagram and parts list for the booklet blade motor, booklet blade.

Figure 5-118 Booklet blade motor, Booklet blade

1 1
1-3

1-2
1-1

2-1 2

2-2

2-3

Table 5-78 Booklet blade motor, Booklet blade

Ref Description Part number Qty Orderable

1 Booklet blade motor assembly JC90-01435A 1 (*)

1-1 Gear JC66-04595A 1 (*)

1-2 Gear JC66-04594A 1 (*)

1-3 Booklet blade motor JC31-00144A 1 (*)

1084 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Table 5-78 Booklet blade motor, Booklet blade (continued)

Ref Description Part number Qty Orderable

2 Booklet blade assembly JC90-01437A 1 (*)

2-1 Gear JC66-04591A 1 (*)

2-2 Bushing JC61-00423A 1 (*)

2-3 Bushing JC61-00426A 2 (*)

(*) This part is in ordering system.

Booklet blade motor, Booklet blade 1085

 Booklet paddle unit
Parts diagram and parts list for the booklet paddle unit.

Figure 5-119 Booklet paddle unit

4
2

4-1

2
4

2-2
2-1

Table 5-79 Booklet paddle unit

Ref Description Part number Qty Orderable

1 Upper booklet paddle JC66-04718A 1 (*)

2 Lower booklet paddle JC90-01429A 1 (*)

2-1 Lower booklet paddle wing JC61-07225A 1 (*)

2-2 Lower booklet paddle mid JC66-04719A 1 (*)

3 Booklet paddle home sensor 0604-001393 1 (*)

4 Booklet paddle motor assembly JC90-01430A 1 (*)

4-1 Booklet paddle motor JC93-01001A 1 (*)

(*) This part is in ordering system.

1086 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Booklet end fence unit
Parts diagram and parts list for the booklet end fence unit.

Figure 5-120 Booklet end fence unit

1-5 1-2

1 1-3 1-4

1-6
1-7

1-1

Table 5-80 Booklet end fence unit

Ref Description Part number Qty Orderable

1 Booklet end fence unit JC90-01432A 1

1-1 Booklet end fence motor JC93-01155A 1 (*)

1-2 Spring JC61-07403A 1 (*)

1-3 Spring JC61-07401A 1 (*)

1-4 Solenoid JC33-00038A 1 (*)

1-5 Booklet end fence home sensor 0604-001393 1 (*)

1-6 Spring JC61-07400A 1 (*)

1-7 Gear JC66-04583A 1 (*)

Booklet end fence unit 1087

 (*) This part is in ordering system.

1088 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Booklet maker base
Parts diagram and parts list for the booklet maker base.

Figure 5-121 Booklet maker base

1-1
1-2

2
2

Booklet maker base 1089

 Table 5-81 Booklet maker base

Ref Description Part number Qty Orderable

1 Booklet maker base JC90-01476A 1 (*)

1-1 Spring JC61-07392A 1 (*)

1-2 Booklet maker base support JC61-07279A 1 (*)

2 Booklet output jam cover JC90-01433A 1 (*)

(*) This part is in ordering system.

Bridge unit

Removal and replacement: Bridge entrance sensor (S1)

Learn how to remove and replace the bridge entrance sensor.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the bridge entrance sensor on the
finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-82 Part information

Part number Part description

JC32-00020A Bridge entrance sensor

1090 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the bridge from the machine

Follow these steps to remove the bridge from the machine.

1. Open the front door (callout 1)

Figure 5-122 Open the front door

Remove the bridge from the machine 1091

 2. Pull the locker out (callout 1)

Figure 5-123 Pull the locker out

3. Separate the finisher from the printer and disconnect the two connectors (callout 1)

Figure 5-124 Separate the finisher from the printer and disconnect the two connectors

1092 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 4. Pull out the bridge unit(Callout 1) from the printer

Figure 5-125 Pull out the bridge unit

2. Remove the bridge rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the bridge rear cover.

■ Remove four screws(callout 1) and the bridge rear cover.

Figure 5-126 Remove the bridge rear cover

3. Remove the bridge door

Follow these steps to remove the bridge door.

Remove the bridge rear cover 1093

 1. Remove four screws(callout 1) and remove the metal holders each side then disconnect one
connector(callout 2)

Figure 5-127 Remove the screws and a connector

2. Lift the bridge door up(callout 1) and then remove the bridge door(callout 2)

Figure 5-128 Remove the bridge door

4. Remove the bridge paper guide

Follow these steps to remove the bridge paper guide.

1094 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 ■ Remove thirteen screws(callout 1~3) and remove the bridge paper guide(callout 4) from the bridge
door

Figure 5-129 Remove the bridge paper guide

5. Remove the bridge entrance sensor (S1)

Follow these steps to remove the bridge entrance sensor (S1).

1. Unplug one connector (callout 1)

Figure 5-130 Unplug one connector

Remove the bridge entrance sensor (S1) 1095

 2. Use a tweezer to remove the bridge entrance sensor (S1, callout 1)

Figure 5-131 Remove the bridge entrance sensor

6. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Bridge motor (M14)

Learn how to remove and replace the bridge motor.

1096 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the bridge motor on the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-83 Part information

Part number Part description

JC31-00163B Bridge motor

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the bridge from the machine

Follow these steps to remove the bridge from the machine.

Remove the bridge from the machine 1097

 1. Open the front door (callout 1)

Figure 5-132 Open the front door

2. Pull the locker out (callout 1)

Figure 5-133 Pull the locker out

1098 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 3. Separate the finisher from the printer and disconnect the two connectors (callout 1)

Figure 5-134 Separate the finisher from the printer and disconnect the two connectors

4. Pull out the bridge unit(Callout 1) from the printer

Figure 5-135 Pull out the bridge unit

2. Remove the bridge rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the bridge rear cover.

Remove the bridge rear cover 1099

 ■ Remove four screws(callout 1) and the bridge rear cover.

Figure 5-136 Remove the bridge rear cover

3. Remove the bridge motor (M14)

Follow these steps to remove the bridge motor (M14).

1. Remove three screws(callout 1)

Figure 5-137 Remove three screws

2. Disconnect one connector(callout 1)

NOTE: It located on the bottom of the bridge

1100 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-138 Disconnect one connector

3. Remove the belt (callout 1)

Figure 5-139 Remove the belt

Remove the bridge motor (M14) 1101

 4. Remove the Bridge motor (M14, callout1)

Figure 5-140 Remove the Bridge motor

4. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Bridge exit sensor (S3)

Learn how to remove and replace the bridge exit sensor.

1102 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the bridge exit sensor on the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-84 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Bridge exit sensor

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the bridge from the machine

Follow these steps to remove the bridge from the machine.

Remove the bridge from the machine 1103

 1. Open the front door (callout 1)

Figure 5-141 Open the front door

2. Pull the locker out (callout 1)

Figure 5-142 Pull the locker out

1104 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 3. Separate the finisher from the printer and disconnect the two connectors (callout 1)

Figure 5-143 Separate the finisher from the printer and disconnect the two connectors

4. Pull out the bridge unit(Callout 1) from the printer

Figure 5-144 Pull out the bridge unit

2. Remove the bridge exit sensor (S3)

Follow these steps to remove the bridge exit sensor (S3).

1. Unplug one connector

NOTE: Bridge exit sensor(callout 1) located on the bottom of the bridge

Remove the bridge exit sensor (S3) 1105

 Figure 5-145 Unplug one connector

Figure 5-146 Unplug one connector

1106 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 2. Use a tweezer to remove the bridge exit sensor(S3, callout1)

Figure 5-147 Remove the bridge exit sensor

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Bridge door sensor (S2)

Learn how to remove and replace the bridge door sensor.

Unpack the replacement assembly 1107

 Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the bridge door sensor on the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-85 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Bridge door sensor

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the bridge from the machine

Follow these steps to remove the bridge from the machine.

1108 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Open the front door (callout 1)

Figure 5-148 Open the front door

2. Pull the locker out (callout 1)

Figure 5-149 Pull the locker out

Remove the bridge from the machine 1109

 3. Separate the finisher from the printer and disconnect the two connectors (callout 1)

Figure 5-150 Separate the finisher from the printer and disconnect the two connectors

4. Pull out the bridge unit(Callout 1) from the printer

Figure 5-151 Pull out the bridge unit

2. Remove the bridge door sensor (S2)

Follow these steps to remove the bridge door sensor (S2).

1110 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Bridge door sensor(callout 1) located on the bottom of the bridge

Figure 5-152 Location of the bridge door sensor

2. Open the bridge door to remove the bridge door sensor (S2)

Figure 5-153 Open the bridge door

Remove the bridge door sensor (S2) 1111

 3. Use a tweezer to remove the bridge door sensor(S2, callout 1)

Figure 5-154 Remove the bridge door sensor

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

1112 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Covers

Removal and replacement: Right upper cover

Learn how to remove and replace the right upper cover.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the right upper cover on the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-86 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01448B Right upper cover

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Covers 1113
 Post service test
Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

■ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove
three sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the
cover away from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-155 Remove the right upper cover

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

1114 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Top cover

Learn how to remove and replace the top cover.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the top cover of the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-87 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01446B Top cover

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Removal and replacement: Top cover 1115

 ○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

■ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove
three sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the
cover away from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-156 Remove the right upper cover

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

1116 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and
then remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-157 Remove six screws

2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two
machine screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-158 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the top cover (finisher) 1117

 Figure 5-159 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Front door

Learn how to remove and replace the front door.

1118 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the front door for the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-88 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01444B Front door

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Small, flat-blade screwdriver

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

Remove the right upper cover (finisher) 1119

 ■ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove
three sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the
cover away from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-160 Remove the right upper cover

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and
then remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-161 Remove six screws

1120 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two
machine screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-162 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-163 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the front door (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front door (finisher).

Remove the front door (finisher) 1121

 1. Lift the top hinge pin up to release it from the retainer.

Figure 5-164 Lift the top hinge pin

2. Pull the top hinge pin up to remove it.

Figure 5-165 Remove the top hinge pin

1122 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

3. Use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to release the lower hinge pin from the retainer, and then rotate
it away from the finisher.

Figure 5-166 Release the lower hinge pin

4. Support the door with one hand, and then pull the lower hinge pin straight up to remove it.

Figure 5-167 Remove the lower hinge pin

5. Support the door with one hand, and then remove one screw (callout 1) to release the strap. Remove
the front door.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the front door (finisher) 1123

 Figure 5-168 Remove the front door

4. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Rear cover

Learn how to remove and replace the rear cover.

1124 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the rear cover for the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-89 Part information

Part number Part description

JC63-04988B Rear cover

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

Remove the right upper cover (finisher) 1125

 ■ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove
three sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the
cover away from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-169 Remove the right upper cover

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and
then remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-170 Remove six screws

1126 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two
machine screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-171 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-172 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

Remove the rear cover (finisher) 1127

 1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw
caps and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-173 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Figure 5-174 Remove the rear cover

4. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1128 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Front cover

Learn how to remove and replace the front cover.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the front cover for the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Removal and replacement: Front cover 1129

 Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-90 Part information

Part number Part description

JC63-04986B Front cover

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Small, flat-blade screwdriver

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

■ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove
three sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the
cover away from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

1130 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-175 Remove the right upper cover

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and
then remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-176 Remove six screws

Remove the top cover (finisher) 1131

 2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two
machine screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-177 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-178 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the front door (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front door (finisher).

1132 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Lift the top hinge pin up to release it from the retainer.

Figure 5-179 Lift the top hinge pin

2. Pull the top hinge pin up to remove it.

Figure 5-180 Remove the top hinge pin

Remove the front door (finisher) 1133

 3. Use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to release the lower hinge pin from the retainer, and then rotate
it away from the finisher.

Figure 5-181 Release the lower hinge pin

4. Support the door with one hand, and then pull the lower hinge pin straight up to remove it.

Figure 5-182 Remove the lower hinge pin

5. Support the door with one hand, and then remove one screw (callout 1) to release the strap. Remove
the front door.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

1134 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-183 Remove the front door

4. Remove the front cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front cover (finisher).

1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 5-184 Remove the jam-access knob

2. If the punch unit is installed, remove the punch waste bin (callout 1).

Remove the front cover (finisher) 1135

 3. Remove one screw (callout 1) on top of the front cover.

Figure 5-185 Remove one screw

4. Remove five machine screws (callout 1), and then remove the front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-186 Remove the front cover

5. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

1136 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Front lower cover

Learn how to remove and replace the front lower cover.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the front lower cover for the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Removal and replacement: Front lower cover 1137

 Table 5-91 Part information

Part number Part description

JC63-04987B Front lower cover

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Small, flat-blade screwdriver

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

■ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove
three sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the
cover away from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

1138 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-187 Remove the right upper cover

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and
then remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-188 Remove six screws

Remove the top cover (finisher) 1139

 2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two
machine screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-189 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-190 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the front door (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front door (finisher).

1140 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Lift the top hinge pin up to release it from the retainer.

Figure 5-191 Lift the top hinge pin

2. Pull the top hinge pin up to remove it.

Figure 5-192 Remove the top hinge pin

Remove the front door (finisher) 1141

 3. Use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to release the lower hinge pin from the retainer, and then rotate
it away from the finisher.

Figure 5-193 Release the lower hinge pin

4. Support the door with one hand, and then pull the lower hinge pin straight up to remove it.

Figure 5-194 Remove the lower hinge pin

5. Support the door with one hand, and then remove one screw (callout 1) to release the strap. Remove
the front door.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

1142 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-195 Remove the front door

4. Remove the front cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front cover (finisher).

1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 5-196 Remove the jam-access knob

2. If the punch unit is installed, remove the punch waste bin (callout 1).

Remove the front cover (finisher) 1143

 3. Remove one screw (callout 1) on top of the front cover.

Figure 5-197 Remove one screw

4. Remove five machine screws (callout 1), and then remove the front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-198 Remove the front cover

5. Remove the front lower cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front lower cover (finisher).

■ Remove three machine screws (callout 1), and then remove the front lower cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

1144 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-199 Remove the front lower cover

6. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Caster cover

Learn how to remove and replace the caster cover.

Unpack the replacement assembly 1145

 Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the caster cover on the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-92 Part information

Part number Part description

JC63-04985B Caster cover

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the booklet output tray

Follow these steps to remove the booklet output tray.

1146 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 1. Raise the booklet output tray up (callout 1), and then pull it away from the finisher (callout 2) to
remove it.

Figure 5-200 Remove the booklet output tray

2. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation
instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly

Special installation instructions: booklet output tray

Position thetabs (callout 1) on the tray into the slots (callout 2) on the finisher.

Figure 5-201 Install the booklet output tray

2. Remove the caster cover

Follow these steps to remove the caster cover.

Remove the caster cover 1147

 1. Remove two screw caps and two self-tapping screws (callout 1). Remove two screw caps and two
machine screws (callout 2).

Figure 5-202 Remove four screws

2. Rotate the left edge of the cover away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide the cover to the
left (callout 2) to remove it.

TIP: Make sure that two tabs (callout 3) are positioned under the front lower cover when
reinstalling the caster cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Figure 5-203 Remove the caster cover

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1148 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Left lower cover

Learn how to remove and replace the left lower cover.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the left lower cover on the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Removal and replacement: Left lower cover 1149

 Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-93 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01771B Left lower cover (for stapler/stacker finisher)

JC90-01417B Left lower cover (for booklet finisher)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Small, flat-blade screwdriver

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

■ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove
three sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the
cover away from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

1150 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-204 Remove the right upper cover

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and
then remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-205 Remove six screws

Remove the top cover (finisher) 1151

 2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two
machine screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-206 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-207 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the front door (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front door (finisher).

1152 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Lift the top hinge pin up to release it from the retainer.

Figure 5-208 Lift the top hinge pin

2. Pull the top hinge pin up to remove it.

Figure 5-209 Remove the top hinge pin

Remove the front door (finisher) 1153

 3. Use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to release the lower hinge pin from the retainer, and then rotate
it away from the finisher.

Figure 5-210 Release the lower hinge pin

4. Support the door with one hand, and then pull the lower hinge pin straight up to remove it.

Figure 5-211 Remove the lower hinge pin

5. Support the door with one hand, and then remove one screw (callout 1) to release the strap. Remove
the front door.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

1154 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-212 Remove the front door

4. Remove the front cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front cover (finisher).

1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 5-213 Remove the jam-access knob

2. If the punch unit is installed, remove the punch waste bin (callout 1).

Remove the front cover (finisher) 1155

 3. Remove one screw (callout 1) on top of the front cover.

Figure 5-214 Remove one screw

4. Remove five machine screws (callout 1), and then remove the front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-215 Remove the front cover

5. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

1156 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw
caps and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-216 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Figure 5-217 Remove the rear cover

6. Remove the booklet output tray

Follow these steps to remove the booklet output tray.

Remove the booklet output tray 1157

 1. Raise the booklet output tray up (callout 1), and then pull it away from the finisher (callout 2) to
remove it.

Figure 5-218 Remove the booklet output tray

2. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation
instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly

Special installation instructions: booklet output tray

Position thetabs (callout 1) on the tray into the slots (callout 2) on the finisher.

Figure 5-219 Install the booklet output tray

7. Remove the caster cover

Follow these steps to remove the caster cover.

1158 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 1. Remove two screw caps and two self-tapping screws (callout 1). Remove two screw caps and two
machine screws (callout 2).

Figure 5-220 Remove four screws

2. Rotate the left edge of the cover away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide the cover to the
left (callout 2) to remove it.

TIP: Make sure that two tabs (callout 3) are positioned under the front lower cover when
reinstalling the caster cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Figure 5-221 Remove the caster cover

8. Remove the left lower cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the left lower cover (finisher).

Remove the left lower cover (finisher) 1159

 1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

NOTE: Raisethe lower output tray as needed to access the screws.

Figure 5-222 Remove four screws

2. Slide the shield down (callout 1) to release it from four tabs (callout 2), and then rotate it away from
the finisher (callout 3).

CAUTION: The shield is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the
shield.

TIP: Position the shield under the four tabs (callout 2) when reinstalling it.

Figure 5-223 Release the lower shield

1160 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 3. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove the shield.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-224 Disconnect two connectors

4. If you are replacing the left lower cover, locate three sensors (callout 1) on the back of the left lower
cover. Remove these sensors and transfer them to the replacement part.

Figure 5-225 Remove the left lower cover

9. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

Unpack the replacement assembly 1161

 http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Left upper cover

Learn how to remove and replace the left upper cover.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the left upper cover on the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

1162 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Table 5-94 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01475B Left upper cover

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Small, flat-blade screwdriver

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

■ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove
three sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the
cover away from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the right upper cover (finisher) 1163

 Figure 5-226 Remove the right upper cover

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and
then remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-227 Remove six screws

1164 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two
machine screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-228 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-229 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the front door (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front door (finisher).

Remove the front door (finisher) 1165

 1. Lift the top hinge pin up to release it from the retainer.

Figure 5-230 Lift the top hinge pin

2. Pull the top hinge pin up to remove it.

Figure 5-231 Remove the top hinge pin

1166 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

3. Use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to release the lower hinge pin from the retainer, and then rotate
it away from the finisher.

Figure 5-232 Release the lower hinge pin

4. Support the door with one hand, and then pull the lower hinge pin straight up to remove it.

Figure 5-233 Remove the lower hinge pin

5. Support the door with one hand, and then remove one screw (callout 1) to release the strap. Remove
the front door.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the front door (finisher) 1167

 Figure 5-234 Remove the front door

4. Remove the front cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front cover (finisher).

1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 5-235 Remove the jam-access knob

2. If the punch unit is installed, remove the punch waste bin (callout 1).

1168 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 3. Remove one screw (callout 1) on top of the front cover.

Figure 5-236 Remove one screw

4. Remove five machine screws (callout 1), and then remove the front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-237 Remove the front cover

5. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

Remove the rear cover (finisher) 1169

 1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw
caps and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-238 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Figure 5-239 Remove the rear cover

6. Remove the booklet output tray

Follow these steps to remove the booklet output tray.

1170 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 1. Raise the booklet output tray up (callout 1), and then pull it away from the finisher (callout 2) to
remove it.

Figure 5-240 Remove the booklet output tray

2. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation
instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly

Special installation instructions: booklet output tray

Position thetabs (callout 1) on the tray into the slots (callout 2) on the finisher.

Figure 5-241 Install the booklet output tray

7. Remove the caster cover

Follow these steps to remove the caster cover.

Remove the caster cover 1171

 1. Remove two screw caps and two self-tapping screws (callout 1). Remove two screw caps and two
machine screws (callout 2).

Figure 5-242 Remove four screws

2. Rotate the left edge of the cover away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide the cover to the
left (callout 2) to remove it.

TIP: Make sure that two tabs (callout 3) are positioned under the front lower cover when
reinstalling the caster cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Figure 5-243 Remove the caster cover

8. Remove the left lower cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the left lower cover (finisher).

1172 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

NOTE: Raisethe lower output tray as needed to access the screws.

Figure 5-244 Remove four screws

2. Slide the shield down (callout 1) to release it from four tabs (callout 2), and then rotate it away from
the finisher (callout 3).

CAUTION: The shield is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the
shield.

TIP: Position the shield under the four tabs (callout 2) when reinstalling it.

Figure 5-245 Release the lower shield

Remove the left lower cover (finisher) 1173

 3. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove the shield.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-246 Disconnect two connectors

4. If you are replacing the left lower cover, locate three sensors (callout 1) on the back of the left lower
cover. Remove these sensors and transfer them to the replacement part.

Figure 5-247 Remove the left lower cover

9. Remove the left upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the left upper cover (finisher).

1174 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Bring the lower output tray down by positioning the shaft of a screwdriver on the clutch (callout 1)
and gently pressing to the right to release the clutch. Hold the clutch in the released position and
lower the tray (callout 2) to the lowest position.

Figure 5-248 Lower the output tray

2. Remove six machine screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-249 Remove six screws

3. Rotate the lower edge of the shield away fromthe finisher (callout 1), and then slide the shield down
(callout 2) to release it from two tabs (callout 3).

CAUTION: The shield is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the
shield.

TIP: Position the shield under the two tabs (callout 3) when reinstalling it.

Remove the left upper cover (finisher) 1175

 Figure 5-250 Release the shield

4. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove the upper shield assembly.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-251 Disconnect one connector

1176 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 5. If you are replacing the left upper cover, locate three sensors (callout 1) on the back of the left upper
cover. Remove these sensors and transfer them to the replacement part.

Figure 5-252 Remove the left upper cover

10. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Unpack the replacement assembly 1177

 Removal and replacement: Booklet finisher front cover
Learn how to remove and replace the booklet front cover.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the booklet front cover on the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-95 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01478B Booklet front cover

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1178 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Remove the booklet front cover
Follow these steps to remove the booklet front cover.

■ Slide the booklet maker slightly away from the finisher (callout 1). Remove one screw (callout 2), and
then slide the green knob away from the booklet maker to remove it (callout 3). Remove four screws
(callout 4), and then remove the booklet front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Figure 5-253 Remove five screws and the cover

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Remove the booklet front cover 1179

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Entrance unit

Removal and replacement: Entrance motor (M12)

Learn how to remove and replace the feed entrance motor.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the entrance motor on the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-96 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01459A Entrance motor assembly

JC31-00163B Entrance motor

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

1180 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 ○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

■ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove
three sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the
cover away from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-254 Remove the right upper cover

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

Remove the right upper cover (finisher) 1181

 1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and
then remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-255 Remove six screws

2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two
machine screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-256 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

1182 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-257 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw
caps and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-258 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Remove the rear cover (finisher) 1183

 Figure 5-259 Remove the rear cover

4. Remove the entrance motor (M12)

Follow these steps to remove the entrance motor (M12).

■ Release one retainer (callout 1), and then disconnect one connector (callout 2). Remove two screws
(callout 3), and then remove the entrance motor.

TIP: Make sure that the belt (callout 4) is positioned on the gear behind the motor when reinstalling
the motor.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-260 Remove the entrance motor

5. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1184 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Punch unit

Removal and replacement: Dummy feed guide

Learn how to remove and replace the dummy feed guide.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the dummy feed guide on the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

Punch unit 1185

 ○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-97 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-01161A Dummy feed guide

Y1G10-67901 HP LaserJet Hole Punch 2/3 Accessory

Y1G11-67901 HP LaserJet Hole Punch 2/4 Accessory

Y1G12-67901 HP LaserJet Hole Punch Swedish Accessory

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

■ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove
three sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the
cover away from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

1186 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-261 Remove the right upper cover

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and
then remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-262 Remove six screws

Remove the top cover (finisher) 1187

 2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two
machine screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-263 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-264 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

1188 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw
caps and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-265 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Figure 5-266 Remove the rear cover

4. Remove the dummy feed guide (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the dummy feed guide (finisher).

Remove the dummy feed guide (finisher) 1189

 ■ At the rear of the finisher, remove two screws (callout 1), and then remove the dummy feed guide
(callout 2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-267 Remove two screws and the feed guide

5. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

1190 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Tray diverter unit

HP LaserJet Managed MFP E82540-E82560, E87640-E87660, E82540du-E82560du, E87640du-

E87660du, E72525-E72535, E77822-E77830 - Removal and replacement: Top jam access cover
Learn how to remove and replace the top jam cover assembly.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the top jam cover assembly for the
finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-98 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01455A Top jam cover assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Tray diverter unit 1191

 ○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

■ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove
three sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the
cover away from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-268 Remove the right upper cover

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

1192 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and
then remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-269 Remove six screws

2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two
machine screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-270 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the top cover (finisher) 1193

 Figure 5-271 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the front door (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front door (finisher).

1. Lift the top hinge pin up to release it from the retainer.

Figure 5-272 Lift the top hinge pin

1194 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

2. Pull the top hinge pin up to remove it.

Figure 5-273 Remove the top hinge pin

3. Use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to release the lower hinge pin from the retainer, and then rotate
it away from the finisher.

Figure 5-274 Release the lower hinge pin

Remove the front door (finisher) 1195

 4. Support the door with one hand, and then pull the lower hinge pin straight up to remove it.

Figure 5-275 Remove the lower hinge pin

5. Support the door with one hand, and then remove one screw (callout 1) to release the strap. Remove
the front door.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-276 Remove the front door

4. Remove the front cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front cover (finisher).

1196 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 5-277 Remove the jam-access knob

2. If the punch unit is installed, remove the punch waste bin (callout 1).

3. Remove one screw (callout 1) on top of the front cover.

Figure 5-278 Remove one screw

4. Remove five machine screws (callout 1), and then remove the front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the front cover (finisher) 1197

 Figure 5-279 Remove the front cover

5. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw
caps and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-280 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

1198 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-281 Remove the rear cover

6. Remove the exit motor (M13)

Follow these steps to remove the exit motor (M13).

■ Release one retainer (callout 1), and then disconnect one connector (callout 2). Remove two screws
(callout 3), and then remove the exit motor.

TIP: Make sure that the belt (callout 4) is positioned on the gear behind the motor when reinstalling
the motor.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-282 Remove the exit motor

7. Remove the top jam access cover

Follow these steps to remove the top jam access cover.

Remove the exit motor (M13) 1199

 1. At the rear of the finisher, remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-283 Remove two screws

2. Remove the top jam access cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-284 Remove the top jam access cover

8. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.

1200 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Tray diverter

Learn how to remove and replace the tray diverter.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the tray diverter on the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-99 Part information

Part number Part description

JC61-07205A Tray diverter

Removal and replacement: Tray diverter 1201

 Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

■ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove
three sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the
cover away from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-285 Remove the right upper cover

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

1202 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and
then remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-286 Remove six screws

2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two
machine screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-287 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the top cover (finisher) 1203

 Figure 5-288 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw
caps and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-289 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

1204 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-290 Remove the rear cover

4. Remove the tray diverter

Follow these steps to remove the tray diverter.

1. Remove two screws(callout 1) to take out the exit motor (callout 2)

Figure 5-291 Take out the exit motor

Remove the tray diverter 1205

 2. Remove two screws (callout 1)

Figure 5-292 Remove two screws

3. Pull the top jam cover assembly out.

Figure 5-293 Pull the top jam cover assembly out

1206 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 4. Remove the tray diverter (callout 1) from top jam cover assembly.

Figure 5-294 Remove the tray diverter

5. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

Unpack the replacement assembly 1207

 IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Tray diverter home sensor (S4)

Learn how to remove and replace the tray diverter home sensor.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the tray diverter home sensor on the
finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-100 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001415 Tray diverter home sensor

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

1208 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 After performing service
○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

■ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove
three sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the
cover away from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-295 Remove the right upper cover

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

Remove the right upper cover (finisher) 1209

 1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and
then remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-296 Remove six screws

2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two
machine screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-297 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

1210 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-298 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the front door (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front door (finisher).

1. Lift the top hinge pin up to release it from the retainer.

Figure 5-299 Lift the top hinge pin

Remove the front door (finisher) 1211

 2. Pull the top hinge pin up to remove it.

Figure 5-300 Remove the top hinge pin

3. Use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to release the lower hinge pin from the retainer, and then rotate
it away from the finisher.

Figure 5-301 Release the lower hinge pin

1212 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 4. Support the door with one hand, and then pull the lower hinge pin straight up to remove it.

Figure 5-302 Remove the lower hinge pin

5. Support the door with one hand, and then remove one screw (callout 1) to release the strap. Remove
the front door.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-303 Remove the front door

4. Remove the front cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front cover (finisher).

Remove the front cover (finisher) 1213

 1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 5-304 Remove the jam-access knob

2. If the punch unit is installed, remove the punch waste bin (callout 1).

3. Remove one screw (callout 1) on top of the front cover.

Figure 5-305 Remove one screw

4. Remove five machine screws (callout 1), and then remove the front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

1214 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-306 Remove the front cover

5. Remove the tray diverter home sensor (S4)

Follow these steps to remove the tray diverter home sensor (S4).

1. Disconnect one connector(callout 1)

Figure 5-307 Disconnect one connector

Remove the tray diverter home sensor (S4) 1215

 2. Remove the green handle (callout 1)

Figure 5-308 Remove the green handle

3. Remove the belt (callout 1)

Figure 5-309 Remove the belt

1216 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 4. Remove two screws(callout 1) and remove the bracket (callout 2) to reach out the tray diverter home
sensor

Figure 5-310 Remove two screws and remove the bracket

5. Remove the tray diverter home sensor (S4, callout 1)

Figure 5-311 Remove the tray diverter home sensor

6. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch

Unpack the replacement assembly 1217

 the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Top exit unit

Removal and replacement: Top lower feed assembly

Learn how to remove and replace the top lower feed assembly.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the top lower feed assembly for the
finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-101 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01454A Top lower feed assembly

1218 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

■ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove
three sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the
cover away from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-312 Remove the right upper cover

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

Remove the right upper cover (finisher) 1219

 1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and
then remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-313 Remove six screws

2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two
machine screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-314 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

1220 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-315 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the front door (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front door (finisher).

1. Lift the top hinge pin up to release it from the retainer.

Figure 5-316 Lift the top hinge pin

Remove the front door (finisher) 1221

 2. Pull the top hinge pin up to remove it.

Figure 5-317 Remove the top hinge pin

3. Use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to release the lower hinge pin from the retainer, and then rotate
it away from the finisher.

Figure 5-318 Release the lower hinge pin

1222 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 4. Support the door with one hand, and then pull the lower hinge pin straight up to remove it.

Figure 5-319 Remove the lower hinge pin

5. Support the door with one hand, and then remove one screw (callout 1) to release the strap. Remove
the front door.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-320 Remove the front door

4. Remove the front cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front cover (finisher).

Remove the front cover (finisher) 1223

 1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 5-321 Remove the jam-access knob

2. If the punch unit is installed, remove the punch waste bin (callout 1).

3. Remove one screw (callout 1) on top of the front cover.

Figure 5-322 Remove one screw

4. Remove five machine screws (callout 1), and then remove the front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

1224 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-323 Remove the front cover

5. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw
caps and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-324 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Remove the rear cover (finisher) 1225

 Figure 5-325 Remove the rear cover

6. Remove the exit motor (M13)

Follow these steps to remove the exit motor (M13).

■ Release one retainer (callout 1), and then disconnect one connector (callout 2). Remove two screws
(callout 3), and then remove the exit motor.

TIP: Make sure that the belt (callout 4) is positioned on the gear behind the motor when reinstalling
the motor.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-326 Remove the exit motor

7. Remove the top jam access cover

Follow these steps to remove the top jam access cover.

1226 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 1. At the rear of the finisher, remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-327 Remove two screws

2. Remove the top jam access cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-328 Remove the top jam access cover

8. Remove the top lower feed assembly (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top lower feed assembly (finisher).

Remove the top lower feed assembly (finisher) 1227

 1. At the front of the printer, remove two screws (callout 1) on the main exit cam motor housing, and
then tilt the motor aside to access the screws under it.

Figure 5-329 Remove two screws

2. At the front of the finisher, remove three self-tapping screws (callout 1), and then disconnect one
connector (callout 2).

Figure 5-330 Remove three screws and disconnect one connector

1228 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

3. At the rear of the finisher, remove three machine screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-331 Remove three screws

4. At the top of the finisher, lift the feed assembly straight up to disengage two tabs on the bottom and
remove the assembly.

Figure 5-332 Remove the top lower feed assembly

5. If you are replacing the top lower feed assembly, locate two sensors (callout 1) and one connector
(callout 2) on the back of the assembly. Remove these items and transfer them to the replacement
part.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the top lower feed assembly (finisher) 1229

 Figure 5-333 Locate sensors and connector

9. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

HP LaserJet Managed MFP E82540-E82560, E87640-E87660, E82540du-E82560du, E87640du-

E87660du, E72525-E72535, E77822-E77830 - Removal and replacement: Top exit sensor (S11)
Learn how to remove and replace the top exit sensor.

1230 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the top exit sensor for the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-102 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Top exit sensor

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

Remove the right upper cover (finisher) 1231

 ■ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove
three sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the
cover away from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-334 Remove the right upper cover

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and
then remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-335 Remove six screws

1232 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two
machine screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-336 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-337 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the front door (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front door (finisher).

Remove the front door (finisher) 1233

 1. Lift the top hinge pin up to release it from the retainer.

Figure 5-338 Lift the top hinge pin

2. Pull the top hinge pin up to remove it.

Figure 5-339 Remove the top hinge pin

1234 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

3. Use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to release the lower hinge pin from the retainer, and then rotate
it away from the finisher.

Figure 5-340 Release the lower hinge pin

4. Support the door with one hand, and then pull the lower hinge pin straight up to remove it.

Figure 5-341 Remove the lower hinge pin

5. Support the door with one hand, and then remove one screw (callout 1) to release the strap. Remove
the front door.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the front door (finisher) 1235

 Figure 5-342 Remove the front door

4. Remove the front cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front cover (finisher).

1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 5-343 Remove the jam-access knob

2. If the punch unit is installed, remove the punch waste bin (callout 1).

1236 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 3. Remove one screw (callout 1) on top of the front cover.

Figure 5-344 Remove one screw

4. Remove five machine screws (callout 1), and then remove the front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-345 Remove the front cover

5. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

Remove the rear cover (finisher) 1237

 1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw
caps and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-346 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Figure 5-347 Remove the rear cover

6. Remove the exit motor (M13)

Follow these steps to remove the exit motor (M13).

1238 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 ■ Release one retainer (callout 1), and then disconnect one connector (callout 2). Remove two screws
(callout 3), and then remove the exit motor.

TIP: Make sure that the belt (callout 4) is positioned on the gear behind the motor when reinstalling
the motor.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-348 Remove the exit motor

7. Remove the top jam access cover

Follow these steps to remove the top jam access cover.

1. At the rear of the finisher, remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-349 Remove two screws

2. Remove the top jam access cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the top jam access cover 1239

 Figure 5-350 Remove the top jam access cover

8. Remove the top lower feed assembly (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top lower feed assembly (finisher).

1. At the front of the printer, remove two screws (callout 1) on the main exit cam motor housing, and
then tilt the motor aside to access the screws under it.

Figure 5-351 Remove two screws

1240 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

2. At the front of the finisher, remove three self-tapping screws (callout 1), and then disconnect one
connector (callout 2).

Figure 5-352 Remove three screws and disconnect one connector

3. At the rear of the finisher, remove three machine screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-353 Remove three screws

Remove the top lower feed assembly (finisher) 1241

 4. At the top of the finisher, lift the feed assembly straight up to disengage two tabs on the bottom and
remove the assembly.

Figure 5-354 Remove the top lower feed assembly

5. If you are replacing the top lower feed assembly, locate two sensors (callout 1) and one connector
(callout 2) on the back of the assembly. Remove these items and transfer them to the replacement
part.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-355 Locate sensors and connector

9. Remove the top exit sensor(S11)

Follow these steps to remove the top exit sensor(S11).

1242 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 1. Remove one screw(callout 1) at the top lower feed assembly.

Figure 5-356 Remove one screw and then top lower feed assembly

2. Remove harness(callout 1) and top exit sensor(S11, callout 2)

Figure 5-357 Remove harness and then top exit sensor

10. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 1243

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Top output tray unit

Removal and replacement: Top output tray

Learn how to remove and replace the top output tray.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the top output tray on the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-103 Part information

Part number Part description

JC63-04995B Top output tray

Required tools
● No special tools are needed to remove or install this assembly.

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

1244 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 ○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the top output tray

Follow these steps to remove the top output tray.

■ Raise the end of the top output tray (callout 1), and then lift it away from the finisher (callout 2) to
remove it.

Figure 5-358 Remove the top output tray

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using

Remove the top output tray 1245

 disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

HP LaserJet Managed MFP E82540-E82560, E87640-E87660, E82540du-E82560du, E87640du-

E87660du, E72525-E72535, E77822-E77830 - Top output tray paper full sensor (S15)
Learn how to remove and replace the top output tray paper full sensor.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the top output tray paper full sensor for
the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-104 Part information

Part number Part description

JC82-01039A Top output tray paper full sensor

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

1246 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 ○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

■ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove
three sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the
cover away from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-359 Remove the right upper cover

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

Remove the right upper cover (finisher) 1247

 1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and
then remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-360 Remove six screws

2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two
machine screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-361 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

1248 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-362 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the front door (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front door (finisher).

1. Lift the top hinge pin up to release it from the retainer.

Figure 5-363 Lift the top hinge pin

Remove the front door (finisher) 1249

 2. Pull the top hinge pin up to remove it.

Figure 5-364 Remove the top hinge pin

3. Use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to release the lower hinge pin from the retainer, and then rotate
it away from the finisher.

Figure 5-365 Release the lower hinge pin

1250 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 4. Support the door with one hand, and then pull the lower hinge pin straight up to remove it.

Figure 5-366 Remove the lower hinge pin

5. Support the door with one hand, and then remove one screw (callout 1) to release the strap. Remove
the front door.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-367 Remove the front door

4. Remove the front cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front cover (finisher).

Remove the front cover (finisher) 1251

 1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 5-368 Remove the jam-access knob

2. If the punch unit is installed, remove the punch waste bin (callout 1).

3. Remove one screw (callout 1) on top of the front cover.

Figure 5-369 Remove one screw

4. Remove five machine screws (callout 1), and then remove the front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

1252 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-370 Remove the front cover

5. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw
caps and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-371 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Remove the rear cover (finisher) 1253

 Figure 5-372 Remove the rear cover

6. Remove top output tray paper full sensor (S15)

Follow these steps to remove top output tray paper full sensor (S15).

1. At the front of the finisher, remove screw (callout 1), disconnect the connector (callout 2) and then
remove the sensor assembly (callout 3)

Figure 5-373 Remove screw and connector and sensor assy

1254 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

2. Remove top output tray paper full sensor- detector (callout 1).

Figure 5-374 Remove top output tray paper full sensor

3. At the rear of the finisher, remove four screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-375 Remove four screws

Remove top output tray paper full sensor (S15) 1255

 4. Remove screw (callout 1), disconnect the connector (callout 2), and then remove the sensor
assembly (callout 3).

Figure 5-376 Remove screw and connector and sensor assy

5. Remove top output tray paper full sensor- emitter (callout 1).

Figure 5-377 Remove top output tray paper full sensor

7. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

1256 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Main exit unit

Removal and replacement: Main exit sensor (S10)

Learn how to remove and replace the main exit sensor.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the main exit sensor for the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-105 Part information

Part number Part description

JC32-00020A Main exit sensor

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

Main exit unit 1257

 After performing service
○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

■ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove
three sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the
cover away from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-378 Remove the right upper cover

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

1258 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and
then remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-379 Remove six screws

2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two
machine screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-380 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the top cover (finisher) 1259

 Figure 5-381 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the front door (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front door (finisher).

1. Lift the top hinge pin up to release it from the retainer.

Figure 5-382 Lift the top hinge pin

1260 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

2. Pull the top hinge pin up to remove it.

Figure 5-383 Remove the top hinge pin

3. Use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to release the lower hinge pin from the retainer, and then rotate
it away from the finisher.

Figure 5-384 Release the lower hinge pin

Remove the front door (finisher) 1261

 4. Support the door with one hand, and then pull the lower hinge pin straight up to remove it.

Figure 5-385 Remove the lower hinge pin

5. Support the door with one hand, and then remove one screw (callout 1) to release the strap. Remove
the front door.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-386 Remove the front door

4. Remove the front cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front cover (finisher).

1262 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 5-387 Remove the jam-access knob

2. If the punch unit is installed, remove the punch waste bin (callout 1).

3. Remove one screw (callout 1) on top of the front cover.

Figure 5-388 Remove one screw

4. Remove five machine screws (callout 1), and then remove the front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the front cover (finisher) 1263

 Figure 5-389 Remove the front cover

5. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw
caps and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-390 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

1264 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-391 Remove the rear cover

6. Remove the exit motor (M13)

Follow these steps to remove the exit motor (M13).

■ Release one retainer (callout 1), and then disconnect one connector (callout 2). Remove two screws
(callout 3), and then remove the exit motor.

TIP: Make sure that the belt (callout 4) is positioned on the gear behind the motor when reinstalling
the motor.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-392 Remove the exit motor

7. Remove the top jam access cover

Follow these steps to remove the top jam access cover.

Remove the exit motor (M13) 1265

 1. At the rear of the finisher, remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-393 Remove two screws

2. Remove the top jam access cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-394 Remove the top jam access cover

8. Remove the top lower feed assembly (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top lower feed assembly (finisher).

1266 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. At the front of the printer, remove two screws (callout 1) on the main exit cam motor housing, and
then tilt the motor aside to access the screws under it.

Figure 5-395 Remove two screws

2. At the front of the finisher, remove three self-tapping screws (callout 1), and then disconnect one
connector (callout 2).

Figure 5-396 Remove three screws and disconnect one connector

Remove the top lower feed assembly (finisher) 1267

 3. At the rear of the finisher, remove three machine screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-397 Remove three screws

4. At the top of the finisher, lift the feed assembly straight up to disengage two tabs on the bottom and
remove the assembly.

Figure 5-398 Remove the top lower feed assembly

5. If you are replacing the top lower feed assembly, locate two sensors (callout 1) and one connector
(callout 2) on the back of the assembly. Remove these items and transfer them to the replacement
part.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

1268 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-399 Locate sensors and connector

9. Remove the main exit sensor(S10)

Follow these steps to remove the main exit sensor(S10).

■ Remove one screw (callout 1) and main exit sensor (S10; callout 2) at the top lower feed assembly.

Figure 5-400 Remove the main exit sensor

10. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using

Remove the main exit sensor(S10) 1269

 disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Exit motor (M13)

Learn how to remove and replace the exit motor.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the exit motor on the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-106 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01459A Exit motor assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

1270 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 ○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

■ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove
three sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the
cover away from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-401 Remove the right upper cover

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

Remove the right upper cover (finisher) 1271

 1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and
then remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-402 Remove six screws

2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two
machine screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-403 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

1272 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-404 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw
caps and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-405 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Remove the rear cover (finisher) 1273

 Figure 5-406 Remove the rear cover

4. Remove the exit motor (M13)

Follow these steps to remove the exit motor (M13).

■ Release one retainer (callout 1), and then disconnect one connector (callout 2). Remove two screws
(callout 3), and then remove the exit motor.

TIP: Make sure that the belt (callout 4) is positioned on the gear behind the motor when reinstalling
the motor.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-407 Remove the exit motor

5. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

1274 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Main exit cam motor (M2)

Learn how to remove and replace the main exit cam motor.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the main exit cam motor on the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Removal and replacement: Main exit cam motor (M2) 1275

 Table 5-107 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01453A Main exit cam motor assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Small, flat-blade screwdriver

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

■ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove
three sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the
cover away from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

1276 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-408 Remove the right upper cover

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and
then remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-409 Remove six screws

Remove the top cover (finisher) 1277

 2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two
machine screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-410 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-411 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the front cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front cover (finisher).

1278 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 5-412 Remove the jam-access knob

2. If the punch unit is installed, remove the punch waste bin (callout 1).

3. Remove one screw (callout 1) on top of the front cover.

Figure 5-413 Remove one screw

4. Remove five machine screws (callout 1), and then remove the front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the front cover (finisher) 1279

 Figure 5-414 Remove the front cover

4. Remove the Main exit cam motor (M2)

Follow these steps to remove the Main exit cam motor (M2).

1. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove two screws (callout 2).

Figure 5-415 Disconnect two connectors and then two screws

1280 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

2. If you are replacing the gear, slide it off of the shaft

Figure 5-416 Slide the gear off of the shaft

3. If you are replacing the sensor (callout 1), remove it from the motor housing.

Figure 5-417 Remove the sensor

4. If you are replacing the motor, do the following.

Remove the Main exit cam motor (M2) 1281

 a. Remove two screws (callout 1)

b. Lower the motor (callout 1) and then pull it away from the housing (callout 2) to remove it.

5. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

1282 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Paddle unit

Removal and replacement: Paddle

Learn how to remove and replace the paddle.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the paddle for the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Paddle unit 1283

 Table 5-108 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01462A Paddle mid

JC90-01463A Paddle wing

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

■ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove
three sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the
cover away from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-418 Remove the right upper cover

1284 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)
Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and
then remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-419 Remove six screws

2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two
machine screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-420 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the top cover (finisher) 1285

 Figure 5-421 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the front door (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front door (finisher).

1. Lift the top hinge pin up to release it from the retainer.

Figure 5-422 Lift the top hinge pin

1286 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

2. Pull the top hinge pin up to remove it.

Figure 5-423 Remove the top hinge pin

3. Use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to release the lower hinge pin from the retainer, and then rotate
it away from the finisher.

Figure 5-424 Release the lower hinge pin

Remove the front door (finisher) 1287

 4. Support the door with one hand, and then pull the lower hinge pin straight up to remove it.

Figure 5-425 Remove the lower hinge pin

5. Support the door with one hand, and then remove one screw (callout 1) to release the strap. Remove
the front door.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-426 Remove the front door

4. Remove the front cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front cover (finisher).

1288 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 5-427 Remove the jam-access knob

2. If the punch unit is installed, remove the punch waste bin (callout 1).

3. Remove one screw (callout 1) on top of the front cover.

Figure 5-428 Remove one screw

4. Remove five machine screws (callout 1), and then remove the front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the front cover (finisher) 1289

 Figure 5-429 Remove the front cover

5. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw
caps and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-430 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

1290 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-431 Remove the rear cover

6. Remove the paddle (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the paddle (finisher).

1. At the front of the finisher, remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-432 Remove two screws

Remove the paddle (finisher) 1291

 2. At the rear of the finisher, remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-433 Remove two screws

3. Do not remove the frame (callout 1) but pull it one side.

Figure 5-434 Pull it one side

1292 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

4. At the front of the finisher, remove two screws (callout 1)

Figure 5-435 Remove two screws

5. At the rear of the finisher, remove four screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-436 Remove four screws

Remove the paddle (finisher) 1293

 6. Bring the lower output tray down by positioning the shaft of a screwdriver or tweezers on the clutch
(callout 1) and gently pressing to the right to release the clutch. Hold the clutch in the released
position and lower the tray (callout 2) to the lowest position.(S11)

Figure 5-437 Pressing to the right to release the clutch

7. At the rear of the finisher, remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-438 Remove two screws

1294 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

8. Remove two screws (callout 1)

Figure 5-439 Remove two screws

9. Take supporter of top output bin (callout 1) forward and put it down.

Figure 5-440 Take supporter of top output bin forward and put it down.

Remove the paddle (finisher) 1295

 10. Remove three paddles (callout 1) from shaft

Figure 5-441 Remove the paddle

7. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

1296 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Removal and replacement: Paddle home sensor (S8)
Learn how to remove and replace the paddle home sensor.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the paddle home sensor for the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-109 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Paddle home sensor

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Small, flat-blade screwdriver

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

Removal and replacement: Paddle home sensor (S8) 1297

 1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)
Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

■ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove
three sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the
cover away from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-442 Remove the right upper cover

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and
then remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-443 Remove six screws

1298 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two
machine screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-444 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-445 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the front door (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front door (finisher).

Remove the front door (finisher) 1299

 1. Lift the top hinge pin up to release it from the retainer.

Figure 5-446 Lift the top hinge pin

2. Pull the top hinge pin up to remove it.

Figure 5-447 Remove the top hinge pin

1300 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

3. Use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to release the lower hinge pin from the retainer, and then rotate
it away from the finisher.

Figure 5-448 Release the lower hinge pin

4. Support the door with one hand, and then pull the lower hinge pin straight up to remove it.

Figure 5-449 Remove the lower hinge pin

5. Support the door with one hand, and then remove one screw (callout 1) to release the strap. Remove
the front door.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the front door (finisher) 1301

 Figure 5-450 Remove the front door

4. Remove the front cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front cover (finisher).

1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 5-451 Remove the jam-access knob

2. If the punch unit is installed, remove the punch waste bin (callout 1).

1302 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 3. Remove one screw (callout 1) on top of the front cover.

Figure 5-452 Remove one screw

4. Remove five machine screws (callout 1), and then remove the front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-453 Remove the front cover

5. Remove the paddle home sensor (S8)

Follow these steps to remove the paddle home sensor (S8).

Remove the paddle home sensor (S8) 1303

 1. At the front of the finisher, remove two screws (callout 1) and disconnect two connectors (callout 2)

Figure 5-454 Remove two screws and disconnect two connectors

2. Disconnect connector from paddle home sensor

Figure 5-455 Disconnect connector from paddle home sensor

1304 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 3. Remove paddle home sensor (S8; callout1)

Figure 5-456 Remove paddle home sensor

6. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Unpack the replacement assembly 1305

 Removal and replacement: Paddle motor (M1)
Learn how to remove and replace the paddle motor.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the paddle motor for the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-110 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01461A Paddle motor assembly

JC93-01001A Paddle motor

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Small, flat-blade screwdriver

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

1306 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Post service test
Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

■ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove
three sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the
cover away from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-457 Remove the right upper cover

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

Remove the right upper cover (finisher) 1307

 1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and
then remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-458 Remove six screws

2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two
machine screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-459 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

1308 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-460 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the front door (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front door (finisher).

1. Lift the top hinge pin up to release it from the retainer.

Figure 5-461 Lift the top hinge pin

Remove the front door (finisher) 1309

 2. Pull the top hinge pin up to remove it.

Figure 5-462 Remove the top hinge pin

3. Use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to release the lower hinge pin from the retainer, and then rotate
it away from the finisher.

Figure 5-463 Release the lower hinge pin

1310 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 4. Support the door with one hand, and then pull the lower hinge pin straight up to remove it.

Figure 5-464 Remove the lower hinge pin

5. Support the door with one hand, and then remove one screw (callout 1) to release the strap. Remove
the front door.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-465 Remove the front door

4. Remove the front cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front cover (finisher).

Remove the front cover (finisher) 1311

 1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 5-466 Remove the jam-access knob

2. If the punch unit is installed, remove the punch waste bin (callout 1).

3. Remove one screw (callout 1) on top of the front cover.

Figure 5-467 Remove one screw

4. Remove five machine screws (callout 1), and then remove the front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

1312 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-468 Remove the front cover

5. Remove the paddle motor (M1)

Follow these steps to remove the paddle motor (M1).

1. At the front of the finisher, remove two screws (callout 1) and disconnect two connectors (callout 2)

Figure 5-469 Remove two screws and disconnect two connectors

Remove the paddle motor (M1) 1313

 2. Remove two screws (callout 1) and then remove paddle motor (M1; callout 2)

Figure 5-470 Remove the paddle motor

6. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

1314 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

End fence unit

Removal and replacement: End fence home sensor (S7)

Learn how to remove and replace the end fence home sensor.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the end fence home sensor on the
finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-111 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 End fence home sensor

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Small, flat-blade screwdriver

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

End fence unit 1315

 Post service test
Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

■ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove
three sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the
cover away from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-471 Remove the right upper cover

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

1316 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and
then remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-472 Remove six screws

2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two
machine screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-473 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the top cover (finisher) 1317

 Figure 5-474 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the front door (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front door (finisher).

1. Lift the top hinge pin up to release it from the retainer.

Figure 5-475 Lift the top hinge pin

1318 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

2. Pull the top hinge pin up to remove it.

Figure 5-476 Remove the top hinge pin

3. Use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to release the lower hinge pin from the retainer, and then rotate
it away from the finisher.

Figure 5-477 Release the lower hinge pin

Remove the front door (finisher) 1319

 4. Support the door with one hand, and then pull the lower hinge pin straight up to remove it.

Figure 5-478 Remove the lower hinge pin

5. Support the door with one hand, and then remove one screw (callout 1) to release the strap. Remove
the front door.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-479 Remove the front door

4. Remove the front cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front cover (finisher).

1320 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 5-480 Remove the jam-access knob

2. If the punch unit is installed, remove the punch waste bin (callout 1).

3. Remove one screw (callout 1) on top of the front cover.

Figure 5-481 Remove one screw

4. Remove five machine screws (callout 1), and then remove the front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the front cover (finisher) 1321

 Figure 5-482 Remove the front cover

5. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw
caps and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-483 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

1322 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-484 Remove the rear cover

6. Remove the booklet output tray

Follow these steps to remove the booklet output tray.

1. Raise the booklet output tray up (callout 1), and then pull it away from the finisher (callout 2) to
remove it.

Figure 5-485 Remove the booklet output tray

2. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation
instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly

Special installation instructions: booklet output tray

Position thetabs (callout 1) on the tray into the slots (callout 2) on the finisher.

Remove the booklet output tray 1323

 Figure 5-486 Install the booklet output tray

7. Remove the caster cover

Follow these steps to remove the caster cover.

1. Remove two screw caps and two self-tapping screws (callout 1). Remove two screw caps and two
machine screws (callout 2).

Figure 5-487 Remove four screws

2. Rotate the left edge of the cover away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide the cover to the
left (callout 2) to remove it.

TIP: Make sure that two tabs (callout 3) are positioned under the front lower cover when
reinstalling the caster cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

1324 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-488 Remove the caster cover

8. Remove the left lower cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the left lower cover (finisher).

1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

NOTE: Raisethe lower output tray as needed to access the screws.

Figure 5-489 Remove four screws

2. Slide the shield down (callout 1) to release it from four tabs (callout 2), and then rotate it away from
the finisher (callout 3).

CAUTION: The shield is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the
shield.

TIP: Position the shield under the four tabs (callout 2) when reinstalling it.

Remove the left lower cover (finisher) 1325

 Figure 5-490 Release the lower shield

3. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove the shield.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-491 Disconnect two connectors

1326 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 4. If you are replacing the left lower cover, locate three sensors (callout 1) on the back of the left lower
cover. Remove these sensors and transfer them to the replacement part.

Figure 5-492 Remove the left lower cover

9. Remove the left upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the left upper cover (finisher).

1. Bring the lower output tray down by positioning the shaft of a screwdriver on the clutch (callout 1)
and gently pressing to the right to release the clutch. Hold the clutch in the released position and
lower the tray (callout 2) to the lowest position.

Figure 5-493 Lower the output tray

Remove the left upper cover (finisher) 1327

 2. Remove six machine screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-494 Remove six screws

3. Rotate the lower edge of the shield away fromthe finisher (callout 1), and then slide the shield down
(callout 2) to release it from two tabs (callout 3).

CAUTION: The shield is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the
shield.

TIP: Position the shield under the two tabs (callout 3) when reinstalling it.

Figure 5-495 Release the shield

4. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove the upper shield assembly.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

1328 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-496 Disconnect one connector

5. If you are replacing the left upper cover, locate three sensors (callout 1) on the back of the left upper
cover. Remove these sensors and transfer them to the replacement part.

Figure 5-497 Remove the left upper cover

10. Remove the ejector unit (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the ejector unit (finisher).

Remove the ejector unit (finisher) 1329

 1. Rotate the green wheel to move the staple unit to the center of the finisher.

Figure 5-498 Move the staple unit to the center

2. Release one retainer (callout 1), and then disconnect three connectors (callout 2).

Figure 5-499 Disconnect three connectors

1330 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

3. Remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-500 Remove two screws

4. At the left side of the finisher, remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-501 Remove one screw

Remove the ejector unit (finisher) 1331

 5. Press up on the hinge (callout 1), release one tab (callout 2), and then rotate the sensor away from
the finisher (callout 3).

Figure 5-502 Rotate the sensor

6. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-503 Remove one screw

1332 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

7. Look inside the finisher through the stapler opening in the front and pull down to release and
remove one shaft (callout 1) on the front tamper unit.

Figure 5-504 Remove the front tamper shaft

8. At the rear of the finisher, disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove three screws
(callout 2).

Figure 5-505 Disconnect two connectors and remove three screws

Remove the ejector unit (finisher) 1333

 9. At the left side of the finisher, remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-506 Remove one screw

10. Look inside the finisher through the stapler opening in the rear and pull down to release and remove
one shaft (callout 1) on the rear tamper unit.

Figure 5-507 Remove the rear tamper shaft

1334 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

11. At the left side of the finisher, disconnect one connector (callout 1).

Figure 5-508 Disconnect one connector

12. At the rear of the finisher, disconnect one connector (callout 1).

Figure 5-509 Disconnect one connector

Remove the ejector unit (finisher) 1335

 13. At the rear of the finisher, press the wire retainer to the right to access and remove two screws
(callout 1).

Figure 5-510 Disconnect one connector

14. At the front of the finisher, remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-511 Remove two screws

1336 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

15. Lift the inside edges of the front and rear tampers up.

Figure 5-512 Lift the edges of the tampers

16. Rotate the rear edge of the ejector unit away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide it toward
the rear of the finisher (callout 2) to remove it. Make sure that the PCA (callout 3) stays clear of the
sheet metal frame.

Figure 5-513 Remove the ejector unit

17. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation
instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

Special installation instructions: Ejector unit

Remove the ejector unit (finisher) 1337

 a. When the front tamper shaft is removed, the retainer arm that held the one end of the shaft
will drop down. When reinstalling the shaft, raise the retainer arm and position the end of the
shaft in the notch (callout 1).

b. When the rear tamper shaft is removed, the retainer arm that held the one end of the shaft will
drop down. When reinstalling the shaft, raise the retainer arm and position the end of the shaft
in the notch (callout 1).

11. Remove the front tamper unit

Follow these steps to remove the front tamper unit.

1338 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 ■ Lift the front tamper away from the finisher to remove it

Figure 5-514 Remove the front tamper

12. Remove the end of fence home sensor(S7)

Follow these steps to remove the end of fence home sensor(S7).

■ At the front tamper, disconnect the connector(callout 1) and remove end fence home sensor(S7,
callout 2)

Figure 5-515 Remove end fence home sensor

13. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

Remove the end of fence home sensor(S7) 1339

 http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

HP LaserJet Managed MFP E82540-E82560, E87640-E87660, E82540du-E82560du, E87640du-

E87660du, E72525-E72535, E77822-E77830 - Removal and replacement: End fence motor (M3)
Learn how to remove and replace the end fence motor.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the end fence motor for the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

1340 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Table 5-112 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01467A End fence motor

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

■ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove
three sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the
cover away from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-516 Remove the right upper cover

Remove the right upper cover (finisher) 1341

 2. Remove the top cover (finisher)
Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and
then remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-517 Remove six screws

2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two
machine screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-518 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

1342 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-519 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the front door (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front door (finisher).

1. Lift the top hinge pin up to release it from the retainer.

Figure 5-520 Lift the top hinge pin

Remove the front door (finisher) 1343

 2. Pull the top hinge pin up to remove it.

Figure 5-521 Remove the top hinge pin

3. Use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to release the lower hinge pin from the retainer, and then rotate
it away from the finisher.

Figure 5-522 Release the lower hinge pin

1344 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 4. Support the door with one hand, and then pull the lower hinge pin straight up to remove it.

Figure 5-523 Remove the lower hinge pin

5. Support the door with one hand, and then remove one screw (callout 1) to release the strap. Remove
the front door.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-524 Remove the front door

4. Remove the front cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front cover (finisher).

Remove the front cover (finisher) 1345

 1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 5-525 Remove the jam-access knob

2. If the punch unit is installed, remove the punch waste bin (callout 1).

3. Remove one screw (callout 1) on top of the front cover.

Figure 5-526 Remove one screw

4. Remove five machine screws (callout 1), and then remove the front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

1346 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-527 Remove the front cover

5. Remove the end fence motor(M3)

Follow these steps to remove the end fence motor(M3).

1. At the front of the finisher, remove two screws(callout 1) and disconnect connector(callout 2)

Figure 5-528 Remove two screws and disconnect connector

Remove the end fence motor(M3) 1347

 2. Remove two screws(callout 1) and end fence motor (M3, callout 1)

Figure 5-529 Remove end fence motor

6. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

1348 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Tamper unit

Front tamper

HP LaserJet Managed MFP E82540-E82560, E87640-E87660, E82540du-E82560du, E87640du-E87660du, E72525-

E72535, E77822-E77830 - Removal and replacement: Front tamper unit
Learn how to remove and replace the front tamper unit.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the front tamper unit on the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-113 Part information

Part number Part description

JC82-00901A Front tamper

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Small, flat-blade screwdriver

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

Tamper unit 1349

 ○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

■ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove
three sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the
cover away from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-530 Remove the right upper cover

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

1350 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and
then remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-531 Remove six screws

2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two
machine screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-532 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the top cover (finisher) 1351

 Figure 5-533 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the front door (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front door (finisher).

1. Lift the top hinge pin up to release it from the retainer.

Figure 5-534 Lift the top hinge pin

1352 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

2. Pull the top hinge pin up to remove it.

Figure 5-535 Remove the top hinge pin

3. Use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to release the lower hinge pin from the retainer, and then rotate
it away from the finisher.

Figure 5-536 Release the lower hinge pin

Remove the front door (finisher) 1353

 4. Support the door with one hand, and then pull the lower hinge pin straight up to remove it.

Figure 5-537 Remove the lower hinge pin

5. Support the door with one hand, and then remove one screw (callout 1) to release the strap. Remove
the front door.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-538 Remove the front door

4. Remove the front cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front cover (finisher).

1354 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 5-539 Remove the jam-access knob

2. If the punch unit is installed, remove the punch waste bin (callout 1).

3. Remove one screw (callout 1) on top of the front cover.

Figure 5-540 Remove one screw

4. Remove five machine screws (callout 1), and then remove the front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the front cover (finisher) 1355

 Figure 5-541 Remove the front cover

5. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw
caps and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-542 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

1356 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-543 Remove the rear cover

6. Remove the booklet output tray

Follow these steps to remove the booklet output tray.

1. Raise the booklet output tray up (callout 1), and then pull it away from the finisher (callout 2) to
remove it.

Figure 5-544 Remove the booklet output tray

2. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation
instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly

Special installation instructions: booklet output tray

Position thetabs (callout 1) on the tray into the slots (callout 2) on the finisher.

Remove the booklet output tray 1357

 Figure 5-545 Install the booklet output tray

7. Remove the caster cover

Follow these steps to remove the caster cover.

1. Remove two screw caps and two self-tapping screws (callout 1). Remove two screw caps and two
machine screws (callout 2).

Figure 5-546 Remove four screws

2. Rotate the left edge of the cover away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide the cover to the
left (callout 2) to remove it.

TIP: Make sure that two tabs (callout 3) are positioned under the front lower cover when
reinstalling the caster cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

1358 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-547 Remove the caster cover

8. Remove the left lower cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the left lower cover (finisher).

1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

NOTE: Raisethe lower output tray as needed to access the screws.

Figure 5-548 Remove four screws

2. Slide the shield down (callout 1) to release it from four tabs (callout 2), and then rotate it away from
the finisher (callout 3).

CAUTION: The shield is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the
shield.

TIP: Position the shield under the four tabs (callout 2) when reinstalling it.

Remove the left lower cover (finisher) 1359

 Figure 5-549 Release the lower shield

3. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove the shield.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-550 Disconnect two connectors

1360 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 4. If you are replacing the left lower cover, locate three sensors (callout 1) on the back of the left lower
cover. Remove these sensors and transfer them to the replacement part.

Figure 5-551 Remove the left lower cover

9. Remove the left upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the left upper cover (finisher).

1. Bring the lower output tray down by positioning the shaft of a screwdriver on the clutch (callout 1)
and gently pressing to the right to release the clutch. Hold the clutch in the released position and
lower the tray (callout 2) to the lowest position.

Figure 5-552 Lower the output tray

Remove the left upper cover (finisher) 1361

 2. Remove six machine screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-553 Remove six screws

3. Rotate the lower edge of the shield away fromthe finisher (callout 1), and then slide the shield down
(callout 2) to release it from two tabs (callout 3).

CAUTION: The shield is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the
shield.

TIP: Position the shield under the two tabs (callout 3) when reinstalling it.

Figure 5-554 Release the shield

4. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove the upper shield assembly.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

1362 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-555 Disconnect one connector

5. If you are replacing the left upper cover, locate three sensors (callout 1) on the back of the left upper
cover. Remove these sensors and transfer them to the replacement part.

Figure 5-556 Remove the left upper cover

10. Remove the ejector unit (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the ejector unit (finisher).

Remove the ejector unit (finisher) 1363

 1. Rotate the green wheel to move the staple unit to the center of the finisher.

Figure 5-557 Move the staple unit to the center

2. Release one retainer (callout 1), and then disconnect three connectors (callout 2).

Figure 5-558 Disconnect three connectors

1364 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

3. Remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-559 Remove two screws

4. At the left side of the finisher, remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-560 Remove one screw

Remove the ejector unit (finisher) 1365

 5. Press up on the hinge (callout 1), release one tab (callout 2), and then rotate the sensor away from
the finisher (callout 3).

Figure 5-561 Rotate the sensor

6. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-562 Remove one screw

1366 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

7. Look inside the finisher through the stapler opening in the front and pull down to release and
remove one shaft (callout 1) on the front tamper unit.

Figure 5-563 Remove the front tamper shaft

8. At the rear of the finisher, disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove three screws
(callout 2).

Figure 5-564 Disconnect two connectors and remove three screws

Remove the ejector unit (finisher) 1367

 9. At the left side of the finisher, remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-565 Remove one screw

10. Look inside the finisher through the stapler opening in the rear and pull down to release and remove
one shaft (callout 1) on the rear tamper unit.

Figure 5-566 Remove the rear tamper shaft

1368 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

11. At the left side of the finisher, disconnect one connector (callout 1).

Figure 5-567 Disconnect one connector

12. At the rear of the finisher, disconnect one connector (callout 1).

Figure 5-568 Disconnect one connector

Remove the ejector unit (finisher) 1369

 13. At the rear of the finisher, press the wire retainer to the right to access and remove two screws
(callout 1).

Figure 5-569 Disconnect one connector

14. At the front of the finisher, remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-570 Remove two screws

1370 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

15. Lift the inside edges of the front and rear tampers up.

Figure 5-571 Lift the edges of the tampers

16. Rotate the rear edge of the ejector unit away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide it toward
the rear of the finisher (callout 2) to remove it. Make sure that the PCA (callout 3) stays clear of the
sheet metal frame.

Figure 5-572 Remove the ejector unit

17. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation
instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

Special installation instructions: Ejector unit

Remove the ejector unit (finisher) 1371

 a. When the front tamper shaft is removed, the retainer arm that held the one end of the shaft
will drop down. When reinstalling the shaft, raise the retainer arm and position the end of the
shaft in the notch (callout 1).

b. When the rear tamper shaft is removed, the retainer arm that held the one end of the shaft will
drop down. When reinstalling the shaft, raise the retainer arm and position the end of the shaft
in the notch (callout 1).

11. Remove the front tamper unit

Follow these steps to remove the front tamper unit.

1372 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 ■ Lift the front tamper away from the finisher to remove it

Figure 5-573 Remove the front tamper

12. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Unpack the replacement assembly 1373

 Removal and replacement: Front tamper home sensor (S6)
Learn how to remove and replace the front tamper home sensor.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the front tamper home sensor on the
finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-114 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Front tamper home sensor

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Small, flat-blade screwdriver

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

1374 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Post service test
Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

■ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove
three sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the
cover away from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-574 Remove the right upper cover

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

Remove the right upper cover (finisher) 1375

 1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and
then remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-575 Remove six screws

2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two
machine screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-576 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

1376 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-577 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the front door (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front door (finisher).

1. Lift the top hinge pin up to release it from the retainer.

Figure 5-578 Lift the top hinge pin

Remove the front door (finisher) 1377

 2. Pull the top hinge pin up to remove it.

Figure 5-579 Remove the top hinge pin

3. Use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to release the lower hinge pin from the retainer, and then rotate
it away from the finisher.

Figure 5-580 Release the lower hinge pin

1378 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 4. Support the door with one hand, and then pull the lower hinge pin straight up to remove it.

Figure 5-581 Remove the lower hinge pin

5. Support the door with one hand, and then remove one screw (callout 1) to release the strap. Remove
the front door.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-582 Remove the front door

4. Remove the front cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front cover (finisher).

Remove the front cover (finisher) 1379

 1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 5-583 Remove the jam-access knob

2. If the punch unit is installed, remove the punch waste bin (callout 1).

3. Remove one screw (callout 1) on top of the front cover.

Figure 5-584 Remove one screw

4. Remove five machine screws (callout 1), and then remove the front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

1380 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-585 Remove the front cover

5. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw
caps and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-586 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Remove the rear cover (finisher) 1381

 Figure 5-587 Remove the rear cover

6. Remove the booklet output tray

Follow these steps to remove the booklet output tray.

1. Raise the booklet output tray up (callout 1), and then pull it away from the finisher (callout 2) to
remove it.

Figure 5-588 Remove the booklet output tray

2. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation
instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly

Special installation instructions: booklet output tray

Position thetabs (callout 1) on the tray into the slots (callout 2) on the finisher.

1382 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-589 Install the booklet output tray

7. Remove the caster cover

Follow these steps to remove the caster cover.

1. Remove two screw caps and two self-tapping screws (callout 1). Remove two screw caps and two
machine screws (callout 2).

Figure 5-590 Remove four screws

2. Rotate the left edge of the cover away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide the cover to the
left (callout 2) to remove it.

TIP: Make sure that two tabs (callout 3) are positioned under the front lower cover when
reinstalling the caster cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Remove the caster cover 1383

 Figure 5-591 Remove the caster cover

8. Remove the left lower cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the left lower cover (finisher).

1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

NOTE: Raisethe lower output tray as needed to access the screws.

Figure 5-592 Remove four screws

2. Slide the shield down (callout 1) to release it from four tabs (callout 2), and then rotate it away from
the finisher (callout 3).

CAUTION: The shield is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the
shield.

TIP: Position the shield under the four tabs (callout 2) when reinstalling it.

1384 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-593 Release the lower shield

3. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove the shield.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-594 Disconnect two connectors

Remove the left lower cover (finisher) 1385

 4. If you are replacing the left lower cover, locate three sensors (callout 1) on the back of the left lower
cover. Remove these sensors and transfer them to the replacement part.

Figure 5-595 Remove the left lower cover

9. Remove the left upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the left upper cover (finisher).

1. Bring the lower output tray down by positioning the shaft of a screwdriver on the clutch (callout 1)
and gently pressing to the right to release the clutch. Hold the clutch in the released position and
lower the tray (callout 2) to the lowest position.

Figure 5-596 Lower the output tray

1386 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

2. Remove six machine screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-597 Remove six screws

3. Rotate the lower edge of the shield away fromthe finisher (callout 1), and then slide the shield down
(callout 2) to release it from two tabs (callout 3).

CAUTION: The shield is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the
shield.

TIP: Position the shield under the two tabs (callout 3) when reinstalling it.

Figure 5-598 Release the shield

4. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove the upper shield assembly.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the left upper cover (finisher) 1387

 Figure 5-599 Disconnect one connector

5. If you are replacing the left upper cover, locate three sensors (callout 1) on the back of the left upper
cover. Remove these sensors and transfer them to the replacement part.

Figure 5-600 Remove the left upper cover

10. Remove the ejector unit (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the ejector unit (finisher).

1388 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Rotate the green wheel to move the staple unit to the center of the finisher.

Figure 5-601 Move the staple unit to the center

2. Release one retainer (callout 1), and then disconnect three connectors (callout 2).

Figure 5-602 Disconnect three connectors

Remove the ejector unit (finisher) 1389

 3. Remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-603 Remove two screws

4. At the left side of the finisher, remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-604 Remove one screw

1390 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

5. Press up on the hinge (callout 1), release one tab (callout 2), and then rotate the sensor away from
the finisher (callout 3).

Figure 5-605 Rotate the sensor

6. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-606 Remove one screw

Remove the ejector unit (finisher) 1391

 7. Look inside the finisher through the stapler opening in the front and pull down to release and
remove one shaft (callout 1) on the front tamper unit.

Figure 5-607 Remove the front tamper shaft

8. At the rear of the finisher, disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove three screws
(callout 2).

Figure 5-608 Disconnect two connectors and remove three screws

1392 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

9. At the left side of the finisher, remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-609 Remove one screw

10. Look inside the finisher through the stapler opening in the rear and pull down to release and remove
one shaft (callout 1) on the rear tamper unit.

Figure 5-610 Remove the rear tamper shaft

Remove the ejector unit (finisher) 1393

 11. At the left side of the finisher, disconnect one connector (callout 1).

Figure 5-611 Disconnect one connector

12. At the rear of the finisher, disconnect one connector (callout 1).

Figure 5-612 Disconnect one connector

1394 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

13. At the rear of the finisher, press the wire retainer to the right to access and remove two screws
(callout 1).

Figure 5-613 Disconnect one connector

14. At the front of the finisher, remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-614 Remove two screws

Remove the ejector unit (finisher) 1395

 15. Lift the inside edges of the front and rear tampers up.

Figure 5-615 Lift the edges of the tampers

16. Rotate the rear edge of the ejector unit away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide it toward
the rear of the finisher (callout 2) to remove it. Make sure that the PCA (callout 3) stays clear of the
sheet metal frame.

Figure 5-616 Remove the ejector unit

17. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation
instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

Special installation instructions: Ejector unit

1396 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 a. When the front tamper shaft is removed, the retainer arm that held the one end of the shaft
will drop down. When reinstalling the shaft, raise the retainer arm and position the end of the
shaft in the notch (callout 1).

b. When the rear tamper shaft is removed, the retainer arm that held the one end of the shaft will
drop down. When reinstalling the shaft, raise the retainer arm and position the end of the shaft
in the notch (callout 1).

11. Remove the front tamper unit

Follow these steps to remove the front tamper unit.

Remove the front tamper unit 1397

 ■ Lift the front tamper away from the finisher to remove it

Figure 5-617 Remove the front tamper

12. Remove the front tamper home sensor(S6)

Follow these steps to remove the front tamper home sensor(S6).

1. Remove two screws (callout 1) at front tamper.

Figure 5-618 Remove two screws

1398 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 2. Remove one screw (callout 1)

Figure 5-619 Remove one screw

3. Remove front tamper home sensor(S6, callout 1)

Figure 5-620 Remove front tamper home sensor

13. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Unpack the replacement assembly 1399

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Front tamper motor (M4)

Learn how to remove and replace the front tamper motor.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the front tamper motor on the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

1400 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Table 5-115 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-01001A Front tamper motor

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

■ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove
three sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the
cover away from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-621 Remove the right upper cover

Remove the right upper cover (finisher) 1401

 2. Remove the top cover (finisher)
Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and
then remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-622 Remove six screws

2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two
machine screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-623 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

1402 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-624 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the front door (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front door (finisher).

1. Lift the top hinge pin up to release it from the retainer.

Figure 5-625 Lift the top hinge pin

Remove the front door (finisher) 1403

 2. Pull the top hinge pin up to remove it.

Figure 5-626 Remove the top hinge pin

3. Use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to release the lower hinge pin from the retainer, and then rotate
it away from the finisher.

Figure 5-627 Release the lower hinge pin

1404 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 4. Support the door with one hand, and then pull the lower hinge pin straight up to remove it.

Figure 5-628 Remove the lower hinge pin

5. Support the door with one hand, and then remove one screw (callout 1) to release the strap. Remove
the front door.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-629 Remove the front door

4. Remove the front cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front cover (finisher).

Remove the front cover (finisher) 1405

 1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 5-630 Remove the jam-access knob

2. If the punch unit is installed, remove the punch waste bin (callout 1).

3. Remove one screw (callout 1) on top of the front cover.

Figure 5-631 Remove one screw

4. Remove five machine screws (callout 1), and then remove the front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

1406 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-632 Remove the front cover

5. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw
caps and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-633 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Remove the rear cover (finisher) 1407

 Figure 5-634 Remove the rear cover

6. Remove the booklet output tray

Follow these steps to remove the booklet output tray.

1. Raise the booklet output tray up (callout 1), and then pull it away from the finisher (callout 2) to
remove it.

Figure 5-635 Remove the booklet output tray

2. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation
instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly

Special installation instructions: booklet output tray

Position thetabs (callout 1) on the tray into the slots (callout 2) on the finisher.

1408 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-636 Install the booklet output tray

7. Remove the caster cover

Follow these steps to remove the caster cover.

1. Remove two screw caps and two self-tapping screws (callout 1). Remove two screw caps and two
machine screws (callout 2).

Figure 5-637 Remove four screws

2. Rotate the left edge of the cover away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide the cover to the
left (callout 2) to remove it.

TIP: Make sure that two tabs (callout 3) are positioned under the front lower cover when
reinstalling the caster cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Remove the caster cover 1409

 Figure 5-638 Remove the caster cover

8. Remove the left lower cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the left lower cover (finisher).

1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

NOTE: Raisethe lower output tray as needed to access the screws.

Figure 5-639 Remove four screws

2. Slide the shield down (callout 1) to release it from four tabs (callout 2), and then rotate it away from
the finisher (callout 3).

CAUTION: The shield is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the
shield.

TIP: Position the shield under the four tabs (callout 2) when reinstalling it.

1410 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-640 Release the lower shield

3. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove the shield.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-641 Disconnect two connectors

Remove the left lower cover (finisher) 1411

 4. If you are replacing the left lower cover, locate three sensors (callout 1) on the back of the left lower
cover. Remove these sensors and transfer them to the replacement part.

Figure 5-642 Remove the left lower cover

9. Remove the left upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the left upper cover (finisher).

1. Bring the lower output tray down by positioning the shaft of a screwdriver on the clutch (callout 1)
and gently pressing to the right to release the clutch. Hold the clutch in the released position and
lower the tray (callout 2) to the lowest position.

Figure 5-643 Lower the output tray

1412 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

2. Remove six machine screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-644 Remove six screws

3. Rotate the lower edge of the shield away fromthe finisher (callout 1), and then slide the shield down
(callout 2) to release it from two tabs (callout 3).

CAUTION: The shield is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the
shield.

TIP: Position the shield under the two tabs (callout 3) when reinstalling it.

Figure 5-645 Release the shield

4. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove the upper shield assembly.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the left upper cover (finisher) 1413

 Figure 5-646 Disconnect one connector

5. If you are replacing the left upper cover, locate three sensors (callout 1) on the back of the left upper
cover. Remove these sensors and transfer them to the replacement part.

Figure 5-647 Remove the left upper cover

10. Remove the ejector unit (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the ejector unit (finisher).

1414 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Rotate the green wheel to move the staple unit to the center of the finisher.

Figure 5-648 Move the staple unit to the center

2. Release one retainer (callout 1), and then disconnect three connectors (callout 2).

Figure 5-649 Disconnect three connectors

Remove the ejector unit (finisher) 1415

 3. Remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-650 Remove two screws

4. At the left side of the finisher, remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-651 Remove one screw

1416 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

5. Press up on the hinge (callout 1), release one tab (callout 2), and then rotate the sensor away from
the finisher (callout 3).

Figure 5-652 Rotate the sensor

6. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-653 Remove one screw

Remove the ejector unit (finisher) 1417

 7. Look inside the finisher through the stapler opening in the front and pull down to release and
remove one shaft (callout 1) on the front tamper unit.

Figure 5-654 Remove the front tamper shaft

8. At the rear of the finisher, disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove three screws
(callout 2).

Figure 5-655 Disconnect two connectors and remove three screws

1418 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

9. At the left side of the finisher, remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-656 Remove one screw

10. Look inside the finisher through the stapler opening in the rear and pull down to release and remove
one shaft (callout 1) on the rear tamper unit.

Figure 5-657 Remove the rear tamper shaft

Remove the ejector unit (finisher) 1419

 11. At the left side of the finisher, disconnect one connector (callout 1).

Figure 5-658 Disconnect one connector

12. At the rear of the finisher, disconnect one connector (callout 1).

Figure 5-659 Disconnect one connector

1420 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

13. At the rear of the finisher, press the wire retainer to the right to access and remove two screws
(callout 1).

Figure 5-660 Disconnect one connector

14. At the front of the finisher, remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-661 Remove two screws

Remove the ejector unit (finisher) 1421

 15. Lift the inside edges of the front and rear tampers up.

Figure 5-662 Lift the edges of the tampers

16. Rotate the rear edge of the ejector unit away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide it toward
the rear of the finisher (callout 2) to remove it. Make sure that the PCA (callout 3) stays clear of the
sheet metal frame.

Figure 5-663 Remove the ejector unit

17. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation
instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

Special installation instructions: Ejector unit

1422 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 a. When the front tamper shaft is removed, the retainer arm that held the one end of the shaft
will drop down. When reinstalling the shaft, raise the retainer arm and position the end of the
shaft in the notch (callout 1).

b. When the rear tamper shaft is removed, the retainer arm that held the one end of the shaft will
drop down. When reinstalling the shaft, raise the retainer arm and position the end of the shaft
in the notch (callout 1).

11. Remove the front tamper unit

Follow these steps to remove the front tamper unit.

Remove the front tamper unit 1423

 ■ Lift the front tamper away from the finisher to remove it

Figure 5-664 Remove the front tamper

12. Remove the front tamper motor (M4)

Follow these steps to remove the front tamper motor (M4).

1. Remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-665 Remove two screws

2. Release the belt (callout 1), and then remove the front tamper motor.

TIP: Make sure that the belt is routed correctly when reinstalling the motor.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

1424 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-666 Release the belt and remove the motor

13. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Rear tamper

Unpack the replacement assembly 1425

 Removal and replacement: Rear tamper unit
Learn how to remove and replace the rear tamper unit.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the rear tamper unit on the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-116 Part information

Part number Part description

JC82-00898A Rear tamper

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Small, flat-blade screwdriver

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1426 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)
Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

■ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove
three sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the
cover away from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-667 Remove the right upper cover

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and
then remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-668 Remove six screws

Remove the right upper cover (finisher) 1427

 2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two
machine screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-669 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-670 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the front door (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front door (finisher).

1428 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Lift the top hinge pin up to release it from the retainer.

Figure 5-671 Lift the top hinge pin

2. Pull the top hinge pin up to remove it.

Figure 5-672 Remove the top hinge pin

Remove the front door (finisher) 1429

 3. Use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to release the lower hinge pin from the retainer, and then rotate
it away from the finisher.

Figure 5-673 Release the lower hinge pin

4. Support the door with one hand, and then pull the lower hinge pin straight up to remove it.

Figure 5-674 Remove the lower hinge pin

5. Support the door with one hand, and then remove one screw (callout 1) to release the strap. Remove
the front door.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

1430 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-675 Remove the front door

4. Remove the front cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front cover (finisher).

1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 5-676 Remove the jam-access knob

2. If the punch unit is installed, remove the punch waste bin (callout 1).

Remove the front cover (finisher) 1431

 3. Remove one screw (callout 1) on top of the front cover.

Figure 5-677 Remove one screw

4. Remove five machine screws (callout 1), and then remove the front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-678 Remove the front cover

5. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

1432 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw
caps and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-679 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Figure 5-680 Remove the rear cover

6. Remove the booklet output tray

Follow these steps to remove the booklet output tray.

Remove the booklet output tray 1433

 1. Raise the booklet output tray up (callout 1), and then pull it away from the finisher (callout 2) to
remove it.

Figure 5-681 Remove the booklet output tray

2. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation
instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly

Special installation instructions: booklet output tray

Position thetabs (callout 1) on the tray into the slots (callout 2) on the finisher.

Figure 5-682 Install the booklet output tray

7. Remove the caster cover

Follow these steps to remove the caster cover.

1434 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 1. Remove two screw caps and two self-tapping screws (callout 1). Remove two screw caps and two
machine screws (callout 2).

Figure 5-683 Remove four screws

2. Rotate the left edge of the cover away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide the cover to the
left (callout 2) to remove it.

TIP: Make sure that two tabs (callout 3) are positioned under the front lower cover when
reinstalling the caster cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Figure 5-684 Remove the caster cover

8. Remove the left lower cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the left lower cover (finisher).

Remove the left lower cover (finisher) 1435

 1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

NOTE: Raisethe lower output tray as needed to access the screws.

Figure 5-685 Remove four screws

2. Slide the shield down (callout 1) to release it from four tabs (callout 2), and then rotate it away from
the finisher (callout 3).

CAUTION: The shield is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the
shield.

TIP: Position the shield under the four tabs (callout 2) when reinstalling it.

Figure 5-686 Release the lower shield

1436 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 3. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove the shield.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-687 Disconnect two connectors

4. If you are replacing the left lower cover, locate three sensors (callout 1) on the back of the left lower
cover. Remove these sensors and transfer them to the replacement part.

Figure 5-688 Remove the left lower cover

9. Remove the left upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the left upper cover (finisher).

Remove the left upper cover (finisher) 1437

 1. Bring the lower output tray down by positioning the shaft of a screwdriver on the clutch (callout 1)
and gently pressing to the right to release the clutch. Hold the clutch in the released position and
lower the tray (callout 2) to the lowest position.

Figure 5-689 Lower the output tray

2. Remove six machine screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-690 Remove six screws

3. Rotate the lower edge of the shield away fromthe finisher (callout 1), and then slide the shield down
(callout 2) to release it from two tabs (callout 3).

CAUTION: The shield is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the
shield.

TIP: Position the shield under the two tabs (callout 3) when reinstalling it.

1438 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-691 Release the shield

4. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove the upper shield assembly.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-692 Disconnect one connector

Remove the left upper cover (finisher) 1439

 5. If you are replacing the left upper cover, locate three sensors (callout 1) on the back of the left upper
cover. Remove these sensors and transfer them to the replacement part.

Figure 5-693 Remove the left upper cover

10. Remove the ejector unit (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the ejector unit (finisher).

1. Rotate the green wheel to move the staple unit to the center of the finisher.

Figure 5-694 Move the staple unit to the center

1440 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

2. Release one retainer (callout 1), and then disconnect three connectors (callout 2).

Figure 5-695 Disconnect three connectors

3. Remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-696 Remove two screws

Remove the ejector unit (finisher) 1441

 4. At the left side of the finisher, remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-697 Remove one screw

5. Press up on the hinge (callout 1), release one tab (callout 2), and then rotate the sensor away from
the finisher (callout 3).

Figure 5-698 Rotate the sensor

1442 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

6. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-699 Remove one screw

7. Look inside the finisher through the stapler opening in the front and pull down to release and
remove one shaft (callout 1) on the front tamper unit.

Figure 5-700 Remove the front tamper shaft

Remove the ejector unit (finisher) 1443

 8. At the rear of the finisher, disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove three screws
(callout 2).

Figure 5-701 Disconnect two connectors and remove three screws

9. At the left side of the finisher, remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-702 Remove one screw

1444 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

10. Look inside the finisher through the stapler opening in the rear and pull down to release and remove
one shaft (callout 1) on the rear tamper unit.

Figure 5-703 Remove the rear tamper shaft

11. At the left side of the finisher, disconnect one connector (callout 1).

Figure 5-704 Disconnect one connector

Remove the ejector unit (finisher) 1445

 12. At the rear of the finisher, disconnect one connector (callout 1).

Figure 5-705 Disconnect one connector

13. At the rear of the finisher, press the wire retainer to the right to access and remove two screws
(callout 1).

Figure 5-706 Disconnect one connector

1446 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

14. At the front of the finisher, remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-707 Remove two screws

15. Lift the inside edges of the front and rear tampers up.

Figure 5-708 Lift the edges of the tampers

Remove the ejector unit (finisher) 1447

 16. Rotate the rear edge of the ejector unit away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide it toward
the rear of the finisher (callout 2) to remove it. Make sure that the PCA (callout 3) stays clear of the
sheet metal frame.

Figure 5-709 Remove the ejector unit

17. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation
instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

Special installation instructions: Ejector unit

a. When the front tamper shaft is removed, the retainer arm that held the one end of the shaft
will drop down. When reinstalling the shaft, raise the retainer arm and position the end of the
shaft in the notch (callout 1).

1448 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 b. When the rear tamper shaft is removed, the retainer arm that held the one end of the shaft will
drop down. When reinstalling the shaft, raise the retainer arm and position the end of the shaft
in the notch (callout 1).

11. Remove the rear tamper unit

Follow these steps to remove the rear tamper unit.

■ Lift the rear tamper away from the finisher to remove it

NOTE: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-710 Remove therear tamper

12. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

Remove the rear tamper unit 1449

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Rear tamper home sensor (S9)

Learn how to remove and replace the rear tamper home sensor.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the rear tamper home sensor on the
finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

1450 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-117 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Rear tamper home sensor

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Small, flat-blade screwdriver

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

■ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove
three sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the
cover away from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the right upper cover (finisher) 1451

 Figure 5-711 Remove the right upper cover

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and
then remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-712 Remove six screws

1452 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two
machine screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-713 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-714 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the front door (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front door (finisher).

Remove the front door (finisher) 1453

 1. Lift the top hinge pin up to release it from the retainer.

Figure 5-715 Lift the top hinge pin

2. Pull the top hinge pin up to remove it.

Figure 5-716 Remove the top hinge pin

1454 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

3. Use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to release the lower hinge pin from the retainer, and then rotate
it away from the finisher.

Figure 5-717 Release the lower hinge pin

4. Support the door with one hand, and then pull the lower hinge pin straight up to remove it.

Figure 5-718 Remove the lower hinge pin

5. Support the door with one hand, and then remove one screw (callout 1) to release the strap. Remove
the front door.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the front door (finisher) 1455

 Figure 5-719 Remove the front door

4. Remove the front cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front cover (finisher).

1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 5-720 Remove the jam-access knob

2. If the punch unit is installed, remove the punch waste bin (callout 1).

1456 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 3. Remove one screw (callout 1) on top of the front cover.

Figure 5-721 Remove one screw

4. Remove five machine screws (callout 1), and then remove the front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-722 Remove the front cover

5. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

Remove the rear cover (finisher) 1457

 1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw
caps and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-723 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Figure 5-724 Remove the rear cover

6. Remove the booklet output tray

Follow these steps to remove the booklet output tray.

1458 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 1. Raise the booklet output tray up (callout 1), and then pull it away from the finisher (callout 2) to
remove it.

Figure 5-725 Remove the booklet output tray

2. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation
instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly

Special installation instructions: booklet output tray

Position thetabs (callout 1) on the tray into the slots (callout 2) on the finisher.

Figure 5-726 Install the booklet output tray

7. Remove the caster cover

Follow these steps to remove the caster cover.

Remove the caster cover 1459

 1. Remove two screw caps and two self-tapping screws (callout 1). Remove two screw caps and two
machine screws (callout 2).

Figure 5-727 Remove four screws

2. Rotate the left edge of the cover away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide the cover to the
left (callout 2) to remove it.

TIP: Make sure that two tabs (callout 3) are positioned under the front lower cover when
reinstalling the caster cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Figure 5-728 Remove the caster cover

8. Remove the left lower cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the left lower cover (finisher).

1460 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

NOTE: Raisethe lower output tray as needed to access the screws.

Figure 5-729 Remove four screws

2. Slide the shield down (callout 1) to release it from four tabs (callout 2), and then rotate it away from
the finisher (callout 3).

CAUTION: The shield is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the
shield.

TIP: Position the shield under the four tabs (callout 2) when reinstalling it.

Figure 5-730 Release the lower shield

Remove the left lower cover (finisher) 1461

 3. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove the shield.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-731 Disconnect two connectors

4. If you are replacing the left lower cover, locate three sensors (callout 1) on the back of the left lower
cover. Remove these sensors and transfer them to the replacement part.

Figure 5-732 Remove the left lower cover

9. Remove the left upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the left upper cover (finisher).

1462 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Bring the lower output tray down by positioning the shaft of a screwdriver on the clutch (callout 1)
and gently pressing to the right to release the clutch. Hold the clutch in the released position and
lower the tray (callout 2) to the lowest position.

Figure 5-733 Lower the output tray

2. Remove six machine screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-734 Remove six screws

3. Rotate the lower edge of the shield away fromthe finisher (callout 1), and then slide the shield down
(callout 2) to release it from two tabs (callout 3).

CAUTION: The shield is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the
shield.

TIP: Position the shield under the two tabs (callout 3) when reinstalling it.

Remove the left upper cover (finisher) 1463

 Figure 5-735 Release the shield

4. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove the upper shield assembly.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-736 Disconnect one connector

1464 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 5. If you are replacing the left upper cover, locate three sensors (callout 1) on the back of the left upper
cover. Remove these sensors and transfer them to the replacement part.

Figure 5-737 Remove the left upper cover

10. Remove the ejector unit (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the ejector unit (finisher).

1. Rotate the green wheel to move the staple unit to the center of the finisher.

Figure 5-738 Move the staple unit to the center

Remove the ejector unit (finisher) 1465

 2. Release one retainer (callout 1), and then disconnect three connectors (callout 2).

Figure 5-739 Disconnect three connectors

3. Remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-740 Remove two screws

1466 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

4. At the left side of the finisher, remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-741 Remove one screw

5. Press up on the hinge (callout 1), release one tab (callout 2), and then rotate the sensor away from
the finisher (callout 3).

Figure 5-742 Rotate the sensor

Remove the ejector unit (finisher) 1467

 6. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-743 Remove one screw

7. Look inside the finisher through the stapler opening in the front and pull down to release and
remove one shaft (callout 1) on the front tamper unit.

Figure 5-744 Remove the front tamper shaft

1468 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

8. At the rear of the finisher, disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove three screws
(callout 2).

Figure 5-745 Disconnect two connectors and remove three screws

9. At the left side of the finisher, remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-746 Remove one screw

Remove the ejector unit (finisher) 1469

 10. Look inside the finisher through the stapler opening in the rear and pull down to release and remove
one shaft (callout 1) on the rear tamper unit.

Figure 5-747 Remove the rear tamper shaft

11. At the left side of the finisher, disconnect one connector (callout 1).

Figure 5-748 Disconnect one connector

1470 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

12. At the rear of the finisher, disconnect one connector (callout 1).

Figure 5-749 Disconnect one connector

13. At the rear of the finisher, press the wire retainer to the right to access and remove two screws
(callout 1).

Figure 5-750 Disconnect one connector

Remove the ejector unit (finisher) 1471

 14. At the front of the finisher, remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-751 Remove two screws

15. Lift the inside edges of the front and rear tampers up.

Figure 5-752 Lift the edges of the tampers

1472 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

16. Rotate the rear edge of the ejector unit away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide it toward
the rear of the finisher (callout 2) to remove it. Make sure that the PCA (callout 3) stays clear of the
sheet metal frame.

Figure 5-753 Remove the ejector unit

17. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation
instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

Special installation instructions: Ejector unit

a. When the front tamper shaft is removed, the retainer arm that held the one end of the shaft
will drop down. When reinstalling the shaft, raise the retainer arm and position the end of the
shaft in the notch (callout 1).

Remove the ejector unit (finisher) 1473

 b. When the rear tamper shaft is removed, the retainer arm that held the one end of the shaft will
drop down. When reinstalling the shaft, raise the retainer arm and position the end of the shaft
in the notch (callout 1).

11. Remove the rear tamper unit

Follow these steps to remove the rear tamper unit.

■ Lift the rear tamper away from the finisher to remove it

NOTE: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-754 Remove therear tamper

12. Remove the rear tamper home sensor(S9)

Follow these steps to remove the rear tamper home sensor(S9).

1474 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Remove two screws(callout 1) at the rear tamper.

Figure 5-755 Remove two screws

2. Remove one screw in front side(callout 1)

Figure 5-756 Remove one screw

Remove the rear tamper home sensor(S9) 1475

 3. Remove rear tamper home sensor(S9, callout 1)

Figure 5-757 Remove rear tamper home sensor

13. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

1476 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Removal and replacement: Rear tamper motor (M9)
Learn how to remove and replace the rear tamper motor.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the rear tamper motor on the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-118 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-01001A Rear tamper motor

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

Removal and replacement: Rear tamper motor (M9) 1477

 1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)
Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

■ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove
three sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the
cover away from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-758 Remove the right upper cover

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and
then remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-759 Remove six screws

1478 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two
machine screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-760 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-761 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the front door (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front door (finisher).

Remove the front door (finisher) 1479

 1. Lift the top hinge pin up to release it from the retainer.

Figure 5-762 Lift the top hinge pin

2. Pull the top hinge pin up to remove it.

Figure 5-763 Remove the top hinge pin

1480 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

3. Use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to release the lower hinge pin from the retainer, and then rotate
it away from the finisher.

Figure 5-764 Release the lower hinge pin

4. Support the door with one hand, and then pull the lower hinge pin straight up to remove it.

Figure 5-765 Remove the lower hinge pin

5. Support the door with one hand, and then remove one screw (callout 1) to release the strap. Remove
the front door.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the front door (finisher) 1481

 Figure 5-766 Remove the front door

4. Remove the front cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front cover (finisher).

1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 5-767 Remove the jam-access knob

2. If the punch unit is installed, remove the punch waste bin (callout 1).

1482 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 3. Remove one screw (callout 1) on top of the front cover.

Figure 5-768 Remove one screw

4. Remove five machine screws (callout 1), and then remove the front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-769 Remove the front cover

5. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

Remove the rear cover (finisher) 1483

 1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw
caps and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-770 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Figure 5-771 Remove the rear cover

6. Remove the booklet output tray

Follow these steps to remove the booklet output tray.

1484 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 1. Raise the booklet output tray up (callout 1), and then pull it away from the finisher (callout 2) to
remove it.

Figure 5-772 Remove the booklet output tray

2. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation
instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly

Special installation instructions: booklet output tray

Position thetabs (callout 1) on the tray into the slots (callout 2) on the finisher.

Figure 5-773 Install the booklet output tray

7. Remove the caster cover

Follow these steps to remove the caster cover.

Remove the caster cover 1485

 1. Remove two screw caps and two self-tapping screws (callout 1). Remove two screw caps and two
machine screws (callout 2).

Figure 5-774 Remove four screws

2. Rotate the left edge of the cover away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide the cover to the
left (callout 2) to remove it.

TIP: Make sure that two tabs (callout 3) are positioned under the front lower cover when
reinstalling the caster cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Figure 5-775 Remove the caster cover

8. Remove the left lower cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the left lower cover (finisher).

1486 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

NOTE: Raisethe lower output tray as needed to access the screws.

Figure 5-776 Remove four screws

2. Slide the shield down (callout 1) to release it from four tabs (callout 2), and then rotate it away from
the finisher (callout 3).

CAUTION: The shield is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the
shield.

TIP: Position the shield under the four tabs (callout 2) when reinstalling it.

Figure 5-777 Release the lower shield

Remove the left lower cover (finisher) 1487

 3. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove the shield.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-778 Disconnect two connectors

4. If you are replacing the left lower cover, locate three sensors (callout 1) on the back of the left lower
cover. Remove these sensors and transfer them to the replacement part.

Figure 5-779 Remove the left lower cover

9. Remove the left upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the left upper cover (finisher).

1488 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Bring the lower output tray down by positioning the shaft of a screwdriver on the clutch (callout 1)
and gently pressing to the right to release the clutch. Hold the clutch in the released position and
lower the tray (callout 2) to the lowest position.

Figure 5-780 Lower the output tray

2. Remove six machine screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-781 Remove six screws

3. Rotate the lower edge of the shield away fromthe finisher (callout 1), and then slide the shield down
(callout 2) to release it from two tabs (callout 3).

CAUTION: The shield is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the
shield.

TIP: Position the shield under the two tabs (callout 3) when reinstalling it.

Remove the left upper cover (finisher) 1489

 Figure 5-782 Release the shield

4. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove the upper shield assembly.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-783 Disconnect one connector

1490 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 5. If you are replacing the left upper cover, locate three sensors (callout 1) on the back of the left upper
cover. Remove these sensors and transfer them to the replacement part.

Figure 5-784 Remove the left upper cover

10. Remove the ejector unit (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the ejector unit (finisher).

1. Rotate the green wheel to move the staple unit to the center of the finisher.

Figure 5-785 Move the staple unit to the center

Remove the ejector unit (finisher) 1491

 2. Release one retainer (callout 1), and then disconnect three connectors (callout 2).

Figure 5-786 Disconnect three connectors

3. Remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-787 Remove two screws

1492 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

4. At the left side of the finisher, remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-788 Remove one screw

5. Press up on the hinge (callout 1), release one tab (callout 2), and then rotate the sensor away from
the finisher (callout 3).

Figure 5-789 Rotate the sensor

Remove the ejector unit (finisher) 1493

 6. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-790 Remove one screw

7. Look inside the finisher through the stapler opening in the front and pull down to release and
remove one shaft (callout 1) on the front tamper unit.

Figure 5-791 Remove the front tamper shaft

1494 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

8. At the rear of the finisher, disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove three screws
(callout 2).

Figure 5-792 Disconnect two connectors and remove three screws

9. At the left side of the finisher, remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-793 Remove one screw

Remove the ejector unit (finisher) 1495

 10. Look inside the finisher through the stapler opening in the rear and pull down to release and remove
one shaft (callout 1) on the rear tamper unit.

Figure 5-794 Remove the rear tamper shaft

11. At the left side of the finisher, disconnect one connector (callout 1).

Figure 5-795 Disconnect one connector

1496 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

12. At the rear of the finisher, disconnect one connector (callout 1).

Figure 5-796 Disconnect one connector

13. At the rear of the finisher, press the wire retainer to the right to access and remove two screws
(callout 1).

Figure 5-797 Disconnect one connector

Remove the ejector unit (finisher) 1497

 14. At the front of the finisher, remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-798 Remove two screws

15. Lift the inside edges of the front and rear tampers up.

Figure 5-799 Lift the edges of the tampers

1498 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

16. Rotate the rear edge of the ejector unit away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide it toward
the rear of the finisher (callout 2) to remove it. Make sure that the PCA (callout 3) stays clear of the
sheet metal frame.

Figure 5-800 Remove the ejector unit

17. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation
instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

Special installation instructions: Ejector unit

a. When the front tamper shaft is removed, the retainer arm that held the one end of the shaft
will drop down. When reinstalling the shaft, raise the retainer arm and position the end of the
shaft in the notch (callout 1).

Remove the ejector unit (finisher) 1499

 b. When the rear tamper shaft is removed, the retainer arm that held the one end of the shaft will
drop down. When reinstalling the shaft, raise the retainer arm and position the end of the shaft
in the notch (callout 1).

11. Remove the rear tamper unit

Follow these steps to remove the rear tamper unit.

■ Lift the rear tamper away from the finisher to remove it

NOTE: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-801 Remove therear tamper

12. Remove the rear tamper motor (M9)

Follow these steps to remove the rear tamper motor (M9).

1500 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 1. Remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-802 Remove two screws

2. Release the belt (callout 1), and then remove the rear tamper motor.

TIP: Make sure that the belt is routed correctly when reinstalling the motor.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-803 Release the belt and remove the motor

13. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

Unpack the replacement assembly 1501

 http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Stapler unit

Removal and replacement: Stapler unit

Learn how to remove and replace the stapler unit.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the stapler unit on the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

1502 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-119 Part information

Part number Part description

JC82-00894A Stapler unit

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

■ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove
three sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the
cover away from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the right upper cover (finisher) 1503

 Figure 5-804 Remove the right upper cover

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and
then remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-805 Remove six screws

1504 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two
machine screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-806 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-807 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the front door (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front door (finisher).

Remove the front door (finisher) 1505

 1. Lift the top hinge pin up to release it from the retainer.

Figure 5-808 Lift the top hinge pin

2. Pull the top hinge pin up to remove it.

Figure 5-809 Remove the top hinge pin

1506 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

3. Use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to release the lower hinge pin from the retainer, and then rotate
it away from the finisher.

Figure 5-810 Release the lower hinge pin

4. Support the door with one hand, and then pull the lower hinge pin straight up to remove it.

Figure 5-811 Remove the lower hinge pin

5. Support the door with one hand, and then remove one screw (callout 1) to release the strap. Remove
the front door.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the front door (finisher) 1507

 Figure 5-812 Remove the front door

4. Remove the front cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front cover (finisher).

1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 5-813 Remove the jam-access knob

2. If the punch unit is installed, remove the punch waste bin (callout 1).

1508 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 3. Remove one screw (callout 1) on top of the front cover.

Figure 5-814 Remove one screw

4. Remove five machine screws (callout 1), and then remove the front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-815 Remove the front cover

5. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

Remove the rear cover (finisher) 1509

 1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw
caps and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-816 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Figure 5-817 Remove the rear cover

6. Remove the stapler unit

Follow these steps to remove the stapler unit.

1510 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Rotate the green wheel to move the staple unit to the front until it stops.

Figure 5-818 Move the staple unit to the front

2. Lower the green latch (callout 1), and then slide the staple cartridge away from the finisher to
remove it (callout 2).

Figure 5-819 Remove the staple cartridge

Remove the stapler unit 1511

 3. At the back of the finisher, release one retainer (callout 1), disconnect two connectors (callout 2),
and then remove two screws (callout 3).

Figure 5-820 Disconnect three connectors and remove two screws

4. At the front of the finisher, disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove two screws
(callout 2).

Figure 5-821 Disconnect one connector and remove two screws

5. Lift up, and then slide the staple unit to the front of the finisher to remove it.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

1512 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-822 Remove the staple unit

7. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Stapler front sensor (S21)

Learn how to remove and replace the stapler front sensor.

Unpack the replacement assembly 1513

 Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the stapler front sensor on the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-120 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Stapler front sensor

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

1514 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 ■ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove
three sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the
cover away from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-823 Remove the right upper cover

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and
then remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-824 Remove six screws

Remove the top cover (finisher) 1515

 2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two
machine screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-825 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-826 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the front door (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front door (finisher).

1516 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Lift the top hinge pin up to release it from the retainer.

Figure 5-827 Lift the top hinge pin

2. Pull the top hinge pin up to remove it.

Figure 5-828 Remove the top hinge pin

Remove the front door (finisher) 1517

 3. Use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to release the lower hinge pin from the retainer, and then rotate
it away from the finisher.

Figure 5-829 Release the lower hinge pin

4. Support the door with one hand, and then pull the lower hinge pin straight up to remove it.

Figure 5-830 Remove the lower hinge pin

5. Support the door with one hand, and then remove one screw (callout 1) to release the strap. Remove
the front door.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

1518 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-831 Remove the front door

4. Remove the front cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front cover (finisher).

1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 5-832 Remove the jam-access knob

2. If the punch unit is installed, remove the punch waste bin (callout 1).

Remove the front cover (finisher) 1519

 3. Remove one screw (callout 1) on top of the front cover.

Figure 5-833 Remove one screw

4. Remove five machine screws (callout 1), and then remove the front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-834 Remove the front cover

5. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

1520 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw
caps and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-835 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Figure 5-836 Remove the rear cover

6. Remove the stapler unit

Follow these steps to remove the stapler unit.

Remove the stapler unit 1521

 1. Rotate the green wheel to move the staple unit to the front until it stops.

Figure 5-837 Move the staple unit to the front

2. Lower the green latch (callout 1), and then slide the staple cartridge away from the finisher to
remove it (callout 2).

Figure 5-838 Remove the staple cartridge

1522 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

3. At the back of the finisher, release one retainer (callout 1), disconnect two connectors (callout 2),
and then remove two screws (callout 3).

Figure 5-839 Disconnect three connectors and remove two screws

4. At the front of the finisher, disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove two screws
(callout 2).

Figure 5-840 Disconnect one connector and remove two screws

5. Lift up, and then slide the staple unit to the front of the finisher to remove it.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the stapler unit 1523

 Figure 5-841 Remove the staple unit

7. Remove the stapler front sensor(S21)

Follow these steps to remove the stapler front sensor(S21).

■ Remove stapler front sensor from staple unit.

Figure 5-842 Remove the stapler front sensor

8. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

1524 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Stapler mid-front sensor (S24)

Learn how to remove and replace the stapler mid-front sensor.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the stapler mid-front sensor on the
finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Removal and replacement: Stapler mid-front sensor (S24) 1525

 Table 5-121 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Stapler mid-front sensor

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

■ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove
three sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the
cover away from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-843 Remove the right upper cover

1526 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)
Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and
then remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-844 Remove six screws

2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two
machine screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-845 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the top cover (finisher) 1527

 Figure 5-846 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the front door (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front door (finisher).

1. Lift the top hinge pin up to release it from the retainer.

Figure 5-847 Lift the top hinge pin

1528 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

2. Pull the top hinge pin up to remove it.

Figure 5-848 Remove the top hinge pin

3. Use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to release the lower hinge pin from the retainer, and then rotate
it away from the finisher.

Figure 5-849 Release the lower hinge pin

Remove the front door (finisher) 1529

 4. Support the door with one hand, and then pull the lower hinge pin straight up to remove it.

Figure 5-850 Remove the lower hinge pin

5. Support the door with one hand, and then remove one screw (callout 1) to release the strap. Remove
the front door.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-851 Remove the front door

4. Remove the front cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front cover (finisher).

1530 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 5-852 Remove the jam-access knob

2. If the punch unit is installed, remove the punch waste bin (callout 1).

3. Remove one screw (callout 1) on top of the front cover.

Figure 5-853 Remove one screw

4. Remove five machine screws (callout 1), and then remove the front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the front cover (finisher) 1531

 Figure 5-854 Remove the front cover

5. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw
caps and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-855 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

1532 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-856 Remove the rear cover

6. Remove the stapler unit

Follow these steps to remove the stapler unit.

1. Rotate the green wheel to move the staple unit to the front until it stops.

Figure 5-857 Move the staple unit to the front

Remove the stapler unit 1533

 2. Lower the green latch (callout 1), and then slide the staple cartridge away from the finisher to
remove it (callout 2).

Figure 5-858 Remove the staple cartridge

3. At the back of the finisher, release one retainer (callout 1), disconnect two connectors (callout 2),
and then remove two screws (callout 3).

Figure 5-859 Disconnect three connectors and remove two screws

1534 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 4. At the front of the finisher, disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove two screws
(callout 2).

Figure 5-860 Disconnect one connector and remove two screws

5. Lift up, and then slide the staple unit to the front of the finisher to remove it.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-861 Remove the staple unit

7. Remove the stapler mid-front sensor(S24)

Follow these steps to remove the stapler mid-front sensor(S24).

Remove the stapler mid-front sensor(S24) 1535

 1. Turn over staple unit and disconnect the connector(callout 1)

Figure 5-862 Disconnect the connector

2. Remove stapler mid-rear sensor(S24, callout 1) from staple unit.

Figure 5-863 Remove stapler mid-rear sensor

8. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

1536 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Stapler mid-rear sensor (S25)

Learn how to remove and replace the stapler mid-rear sensor.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the stapler mid-rear sensor on the
finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Removal and replacement: Stapler mid-rear sensor (S25) 1537

 Table 5-122 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Stapler mid-rear sensor

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

■ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove
three sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the
cover away from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-864 Remove the right upper cover

1538 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)
Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and
then remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-865 Remove six screws

2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two
machine screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-866 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the top cover (finisher) 1539

 Figure 5-867 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the front door (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front door (finisher).

1. Lift the top hinge pin up to release it from the retainer.

Figure 5-868 Lift the top hinge pin

1540 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

2. Pull the top hinge pin up to remove it.

Figure 5-869 Remove the top hinge pin

3. Use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to release the lower hinge pin from the retainer, and then rotate
it away from the finisher.

Figure 5-870 Release the lower hinge pin

Remove the front door (finisher) 1541

 4. Support the door with one hand, and then pull the lower hinge pin straight up to remove it.

Figure 5-871 Remove the lower hinge pin

5. Support the door with one hand, and then remove one screw (callout 1) to release the strap. Remove
the front door.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-872 Remove the front door

4. Remove the front cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front cover (finisher).

1542 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 5-873 Remove the jam-access knob

2. If the punch unit is installed, remove the punch waste bin (callout 1).

3. Remove one screw (callout 1) on top of the front cover.

Figure 5-874 Remove one screw

4. Remove five machine screws (callout 1), and then remove the front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the front cover (finisher) 1543

 Figure 5-875 Remove the front cover

5. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw
caps and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-876 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

1544 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-877 Remove the rear cover

6. Remove the stapler unit

Follow these steps to remove the stapler unit.

1. Rotate the green wheel to move the staple unit to the front until it stops.

Figure 5-878 Move the staple unit to the front

Remove the stapler unit 1545

 2. Lower the green latch (callout 1), and then slide the staple cartridge away from the finisher to
remove it (callout 2).

Figure 5-879 Remove the staple cartridge

3. At the back of the finisher, release one retainer (callout 1), disconnect two connectors (callout 2),
and then remove two screws (callout 3).

Figure 5-880 Disconnect three connectors and remove two screws

1546 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 4. At the front of the finisher, disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove two screws
(callout 2).

Figure 5-881 Disconnect one connector and remove two screws

5. Lift up, and then slide the staple unit to the front of the finisher to remove it.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-882 Remove the staple unit

7. Remove the stapler mid-rear sensor(S25)

Follow these steps to remove the stapler mid-rear sensor(S25).

Remove the stapler mid-rear sensor(S25) 1547

 1. Turn over staple unit and disconnect the connector(callout 1)

Figure 5-883 Disconnect the connector

2. Remove stapler mid-rear sensor(S24, callout 1) from staple unit.

Figure 5-884 Remove stapler mid-rear sensor

8. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

1548 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Stapler rear sensor (S30)

Learn how to remove and replace the stapler rear sensor.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the stapler rear sensor on the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Removal and replacement: Stapler rear sensor (S30) 1549

 Table 5-123 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Stapler rear sensor

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

■ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove
three sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the
cover away from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-885 Remove the right upper cover

1550 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)
Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and
then remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-886 Remove six screws

2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two
machine screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-887 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the top cover (finisher) 1551

 Figure 5-888 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the front door (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front door (finisher).

1. Lift the top hinge pin up to release it from the retainer.

Figure 5-889 Lift the top hinge pin

1552 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

2. Pull the top hinge pin up to remove it.

Figure 5-890 Remove the top hinge pin

3. Use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to release the lower hinge pin from the retainer, and then rotate
it away from the finisher.

Figure 5-891 Release the lower hinge pin

Remove the front door (finisher) 1553

 4. Support the door with one hand, and then pull the lower hinge pin straight up to remove it.

Figure 5-892 Remove the lower hinge pin

5. Support the door with one hand, and then remove one screw (callout 1) to release the strap. Remove
the front door.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-893 Remove the front door

4. Remove the front cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front cover (finisher).

1554 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 5-894 Remove the jam-access knob

2. If the punch unit is installed, remove the punch waste bin (callout 1).

3. Remove one screw (callout 1) on top of the front cover.

Figure 5-895 Remove one screw

4. Remove five machine screws (callout 1), and then remove the front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the front cover (finisher) 1555

 Figure 5-896 Remove the front cover

5. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw
caps and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-897 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

1556 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-898 Remove the rear cover

6. Remove the stapler unit

Follow these steps to remove the stapler unit.

1. Rotate the green wheel to move the staple unit to the front until it stops.

Figure 5-899 Move the staple unit to the front

Remove the stapler unit 1557

 2. Lower the green latch (callout 1), and then slide the staple cartridge away from the finisher to
remove it (callout 2).

Figure 5-900 Remove the staple cartridge

3. At the back of the finisher, release one retainer (callout 1), disconnect two connectors (callout 2),
and then remove two screws (callout 3).

Figure 5-901 Disconnect three connectors and remove two screws

1558 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 4. At the front of the finisher, disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove two screws
(callout 2).

Figure 5-902 Disconnect one connector and remove two screws

5. Lift up, and then slide the staple unit to the front of the finisher to remove it.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-903 Remove the staple unit

7. Remove the stapler rear sensor(S30)

Follow these steps to remove the stapler rear sensor(S30).

Remove the stapler rear sensor(S30) 1559

 1. Remove stapler rear sensor(callout 1, S30) from staple unit.

Figure 5-904 Remove stapler rear sensor from staple unit.

2. Disconnect the connector(callout 1) from stapler rear sensor.

Figure 5-905 Disconnect the connector from stapler rear sensor.

8. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

1560 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Manual staple sensor (S19)

Learn how to remove and replace the manual staple sensor.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the manual staple sensor for the
finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Removal and replacement: Manual staple sensor (S19) 1561

 Table 5-124 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001415 Manual staple sensor

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Small, flat-blade screwdriver

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

■ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove
three sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the
cover away from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

1562 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-906 Remove the right upper cover

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and
then remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-907 Remove six screws

Remove the top cover (finisher) 1563

 2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two
machine screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-908 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-909 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the front door (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front door (finisher).

1564 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Lift the top hinge pin up to release it from the retainer.

Figure 5-910 Lift the top hinge pin

2. Pull the top hinge pin up to remove it.

Figure 5-911 Remove the top hinge pin

Remove the front door (finisher) 1565

 3. Use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to release the lower hinge pin from the retainer, and then rotate
it away from the finisher.

Figure 5-912 Release the lower hinge pin

4. Support the door with one hand, and then pull the lower hinge pin straight up to remove it.

Figure 5-913 Remove the lower hinge pin

5. Support the door with one hand, and then remove one screw (callout 1) to release the strap. Remove
the front door.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

1566 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-914 Remove the front door

4. Remove the front cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front cover (finisher).

1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 5-915 Remove the jam-access knob

2. If the punch unit is installed, remove the punch waste bin (callout 1).

Remove the front cover (finisher) 1567

 3. Remove one screw (callout 1) on top of the front cover.

Figure 5-916 Remove one screw

4. Remove five machine screws (callout 1), and then remove the front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-917 Remove the front cover

5. Remove the manual staple sensor(S19)

Follow these steps to remove the manual staple sensor(S19).

1568 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 ■ At the front of the finisher, disconnect the connector(callout 1) and remove manual staple sensor(S19,
callout 2).

Figure 5-918 Remove the manual staple sensor

6. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.

Unpack the replacement assembly 1569

 Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Stapler position motor (M8)

Learn how to remove and replace the stapler position motor.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the stapler position motor on the
finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-125 Part information

Part number Part description

JC31-00163A Stapler position motor

1570 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

■ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove
three sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the
cover away from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-919 Remove the right upper cover

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

Remove the right upper cover (finisher) 1571

 1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and
then remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-920 Remove six screws

2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two
machine screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-921 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

1572 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-922 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the front door (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front door (finisher).

1. Lift the top hinge pin up to release it from the retainer.

Figure 5-923 Lift the top hinge pin

Remove the front door (finisher) 1573

 2. Pull the top hinge pin up to remove it.

Figure 5-924 Remove the top hinge pin

3. Use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to release the lower hinge pin from the retainer, and then rotate
it away from the finisher.

Figure 5-925 Release the lower hinge pin

1574 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 4. Support the door with one hand, and then pull the lower hinge pin straight up to remove it.

Figure 5-926 Remove the lower hinge pin

5. Support the door with one hand, and then remove one screw (callout 1) to release the strap. Remove
the front door.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-927 Remove the front door

4. Remove the front cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front cover (finisher).

Remove the front cover (finisher) 1575

 1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 5-928 Remove the jam-access knob

2. If the punch unit is installed, remove the punch waste bin (callout 1).

3. Remove one screw (callout 1) on top of the front cover.

Figure 5-929 Remove one screw

4. Remove five machine screws (callout 1), and then remove the front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

1576 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-930 Remove the front cover

5. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw
caps and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-931 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Remove the rear cover (finisher) 1577

 Figure 5-932 Remove the rear cover

6. Remove the stapler unit

Follow these steps to remove the stapler unit.

1. Rotate the green wheel to move the staple unit to the front until it stops.

Figure 5-933 Move the staple unit to the front

1578 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

2. Lower the green latch (callout 1), and then slide the staple cartridge away from the finisher to
remove it (callout 2).

Figure 5-934 Remove the staple cartridge

3. At the back of the finisher, release one retainer (callout 1), disconnect two connectors (callout 2),
and then remove two screws (callout 3).

Figure 5-935 Disconnect three connectors and remove two screws

Remove the stapler unit 1579

 4. At the front of the finisher, disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove two screws
(callout 2).

Figure 5-936 Disconnect one connector and remove two screws

5. Lift up, and then slide the staple unit to the front of the finisher to remove it.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-937 Remove the staple unit

7. Remove the stapler position motor(M8)

Follow these steps to remove the stapler position motor(M8).

1580 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 1. Remove two screws(callout 1)

Figure 5-938 Remove two screws

2. Remove stapler position motor(M8, callout1) from staple unit.

Figure 5-939 Remove stapler position motor

8. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Unpack the replacement assembly 1581

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Ejector unit

Removal and replacement: Ejector unit

Learn how to remove and replace the ejector unit.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the ejector unit on the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

1582 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Table 5-126 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01409A Ejector unit

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Small, flat-blade screwdriver

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

■ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove
three sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the
cover away from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the right upper cover (finisher) 1583

 Figure 5-940 Remove the right upper cover

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and
then remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-941 Remove six screws

1584 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two
machine screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-942 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-943 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the front door (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front door (finisher).

Remove the front door (finisher) 1585

 1. Lift the top hinge pin up to release it from the retainer.

Figure 5-944 Lift the top hinge pin

2. Pull the top hinge pin up to remove it.

Figure 5-945 Remove the top hinge pin

1586 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

3. Use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to release the lower hinge pin from the retainer, and then rotate
it away from the finisher.

Figure 5-946 Release the lower hinge pin

4. Support the door with one hand, and then pull the lower hinge pin straight up to remove it.

Figure 5-947 Remove the lower hinge pin

5. Support the door with one hand, and then remove one screw (callout 1) to release the strap. Remove
the front door.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the front door (finisher) 1587

 Figure 5-948 Remove the front door

4. Remove the front cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front cover (finisher).

1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 5-949 Remove the jam-access knob

2. If the punch unit is installed, remove the punch waste bin (callout 1).

1588 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 3. Remove one screw (callout 1) on top of the front cover.

Figure 5-950 Remove one screw

4. Remove five machine screws (callout 1), and then remove the front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-951 Remove the front cover

5. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

Remove the rear cover (finisher) 1589

 1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw
caps and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-952 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Figure 5-953 Remove the rear cover

6. Remove the booklet output tray

Follow these steps to remove the booklet output tray.

1590 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 1. Raise the booklet output tray up (callout 1), and then pull it away from the finisher (callout 2) to
remove it.

Figure 5-954 Remove the booklet output tray

2. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation
instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly

Special installation instructions: booklet output tray

Position thetabs (callout 1) on the tray into the slots (callout 2) on the finisher.

Figure 5-955 Install the booklet output tray

7. Remove the caster cover

Follow these steps to remove the caster cover.

Remove the caster cover 1591

 1. Remove two screw caps and two self-tapping screws (callout 1). Remove two screw caps and two
machine screws (callout 2).

Figure 5-956 Remove four screws

2. Rotate the left edge of the cover away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide the cover to the
left (callout 2) to remove it.

TIP: Make sure that two tabs (callout 3) are positioned under the front lower cover when
reinstalling the caster cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Figure 5-957 Remove the caster cover

8. Remove the left lower cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the left lower cover (finisher).

1592 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

NOTE: Raisethe lower output tray as needed to access the screws.

Figure 5-958 Remove four screws

2. Slide the shield down (callout 1) to release it from four tabs (callout 2), and then rotate it away from
the finisher (callout 3).

CAUTION: The shield is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the
shield.

TIP: Position the shield under the four tabs (callout 2) when reinstalling it.

Figure 5-959 Release the lower shield

Remove the left lower cover (finisher) 1593

 3. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove the shield.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-960 Disconnect two connectors

4. If you are replacing the left lower cover, locate three sensors (callout 1) on the back of the left lower
cover. Remove these sensors and transfer them to the replacement part.

Figure 5-961 Remove the left lower cover

9. Remove the left upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the left upper cover (finisher).

1594 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Bring the lower output tray down by positioning the shaft of a screwdriver on the clutch (callout 1)
and gently pressing to the right to release the clutch. Hold the clutch in the released position and
lower the tray (callout 2) to the lowest position.

Figure 5-962 Lower the output tray

2. Remove six machine screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-963 Remove six screws

3. Rotate the lower edge of the shield away fromthe finisher (callout 1), and then slide the shield down
(callout 2) to release it from two tabs (callout 3).

CAUTION: The shield is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the
shield.

TIP: Position the shield under the two tabs (callout 3) when reinstalling it.

Remove the left upper cover (finisher) 1595

 Figure 5-964 Release the shield

4. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove the upper shield assembly.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-965 Disconnect one connector

1596 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 5. If you are replacing the left upper cover, locate three sensors (callout 1) on the back of the left upper
cover. Remove these sensors and transfer them to the replacement part.

Figure 5-966 Remove the left upper cover

10. Remove the ejector unit (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the ejector unit (finisher).

1. Rotate the green wheel to move the staple unit to the center of the finisher.

Figure 5-967 Move the staple unit to the center

Remove the ejector unit (finisher) 1597

 2. Release one retainer (callout 1), and then disconnect three connectors (callout 2).

Figure 5-968 Disconnect three connectors

3. Remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-969 Remove two screws

1598 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

4. At the left side of the finisher, remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-970 Remove one screw

5. Press up on the hinge (callout 1), release one tab (callout 2), and then rotate the sensor away from
the finisher (callout 3).

Figure 5-971 Rotate the sensor

Remove the ejector unit (finisher) 1599

 6. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-972 Remove one screw

7. Look inside the finisher through the stapler opening in the front and pull down to release and
remove one shaft (callout 1) on the front tamper unit.

Figure 5-973 Remove the front tamper shaft

1600 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

8. At the rear of the finisher, disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove three screws
(callout 2).

Figure 5-974 Disconnect two connectors and remove three screws

9. At the left side of the finisher, remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-975 Remove one screw

Remove the ejector unit (finisher) 1601

 10. Look inside the finisher through the stapler opening in the rear and pull down to release and remove
one shaft (callout 1) on the rear tamper unit.

Figure 5-976 Remove the rear tamper shaft

11. At the left side of the finisher, disconnect one connector (callout 1).

Figure 5-977 Disconnect one connector

1602 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

12. At the rear of the finisher, disconnect one connector (callout 1).

Figure 5-978 Disconnect one connector

13. At the rear of the finisher, press the wire retainer to the right to access and remove two screws
(callout 1).

Figure 5-979 Disconnect one connector

Remove the ejector unit (finisher) 1603

 14. At the front of the finisher, remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-980 Remove two screws

15. Lift the inside edges of the front and rear tampers up.

Figure 5-981 Lift the edges of the tampers

1604 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

16. Rotate the rear edge of the ejector unit away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide it toward
the rear of the finisher (callout 2) to remove it. Make sure that the PCA (callout 3) stays clear of the
sheet metal frame.

Figure 5-982 Remove the ejector unit

17. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation
instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

Special installation instructions: Ejector unit

a. When the front tamper shaft is removed, the retainer arm that held the one end of the shaft
will drop down. When reinstalling the shaft, raise the retainer arm and position the end of the
shaft in the notch (callout 1).

Remove the ejector unit (finisher) 1605

 b. When the rear tamper shaft is removed, the retainer arm that held the one end of the shaft will
drop down. When reinstalling the shaft, raise the retainer arm and position the end of the shaft
in the notch (callout 1).

11. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

1606 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Ejector1

Removal and replacement: Ejector1 motor sensor (S27)

Learn how to remove and replace the ejector1 motor sensor.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the ejector1 motor sensor on the
finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-127 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001415 Ejector1 motor enor

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Small, flat-blade screwdriver

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Ejector1 1607
 Post service test
Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

■ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove
three sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the
cover away from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-983 Remove the right upper cover

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

1608 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and
then remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-984 Remove six screws

2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two
machine screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-985 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the top cover (finisher) 1609

 Figure 5-986 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the front door (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front door (finisher).

1. Lift the top hinge pin up to release it from the retainer.

Figure 5-987 Lift the top hinge pin

1610 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

2. Pull the top hinge pin up to remove it.

Figure 5-988 Remove the top hinge pin

3. Use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to release the lower hinge pin from the retainer, and then rotate
it away from the finisher.

Figure 5-989 Release the lower hinge pin

Remove the front door (finisher) 1611

 4. Support the door with one hand, and then pull the lower hinge pin straight up to remove it.

Figure 5-990 Remove the lower hinge pin

5. Support the door with one hand, and then remove one screw (callout 1) to release the strap. Remove
the front door.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-991 Remove the front door

4. Remove the front cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front cover (finisher).

1612 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 5-992 Remove the jam-access knob

2. If the punch unit is installed, remove the punch waste bin (callout 1).

3. Remove one screw (callout 1) on top of the front cover.

Figure 5-993 Remove one screw

4. Remove five machine screws (callout 1), and then remove the front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the front cover (finisher) 1613

 Figure 5-994 Remove the front cover

5. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw
caps and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-995 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

1614 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-996 Remove the rear cover

6. Remove the booklet output tray

Follow these steps to remove the booklet output tray.

1. Raise the booklet output tray up (callout 1), and then pull it away from the finisher (callout 2) to
remove it.

Figure 5-997 Remove the booklet output tray

2. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation
instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly

Special installation instructions: booklet output tray

Position thetabs (callout 1) on the tray into the slots (callout 2) on the finisher.

Remove the booklet output tray 1615

 Figure 5-998 Install the booklet output tray

7. Remove the caster cover

Follow these steps to remove the caster cover.

1. Remove two screw caps and two self-tapping screws (callout 1). Remove two screw caps and two
machine screws (callout 2).

Figure 5-999 Remove four screws

2. Rotate the left edge of the cover away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide the cover to the
left (callout 2) to remove it.

TIP: Make sure that two tabs (callout 3) are positioned under the front lower cover when
reinstalling the caster cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

1616 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-1000 Remove the caster cover

8. Remove the left lower cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the left lower cover (finisher).

1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

NOTE: Raisethe lower output tray as needed to access the screws.

Figure 5-1001 Remove four screws

2. Slide the shield down (callout 1) to release it from four tabs (callout 2), and then rotate it away from
the finisher (callout 3).

CAUTION: The shield is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the
shield.

TIP: Position the shield under the four tabs (callout 2) when reinstalling it.

Remove the left lower cover (finisher) 1617

 Figure 5-1002 Release the lower shield

3. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove the shield.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1003 Disconnect two connectors

1618 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 4. If you are replacing the left lower cover, locate three sensors (callout 1) on the back of the left lower
cover. Remove these sensors and transfer them to the replacement part.

Figure 5-1004 Remove the left lower cover

9. Remove the left upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the left upper cover (finisher).

1. Bring the lower output tray down by positioning the shaft of a screwdriver on the clutch (callout 1)
and gently pressing to the right to release the clutch. Hold the clutch in the released position and
lower the tray (callout 2) to the lowest position.

Figure 5-1005 Lower the output tray

Remove the left upper cover (finisher) 1619

 2. Remove six machine screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-1006 Remove six screws

3. Rotate the lower edge of the shield away fromthe finisher (callout 1), and then slide the shield down
(callout 2) to release it from two tabs (callout 3).

CAUTION: The shield is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the
shield.

TIP: Position the shield under the two tabs (callout 3) when reinstalling it.

Figure 5-1007 Release the shield

4. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove the upper shield assembly.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

1620 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-1008 Disconnect one connector

5. If you are replacing the left upper cover, locate three sensors (callout 1) on the back of the left upper
cover. Remove these sensors and transfer them to the replacement part.

Figure 5-1009 Remove the left upper cover

10. Remove the ejector unit (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the ejector unit (finisher).

Remove the ejector unit (finisher) 1621

 1. Rotate the green wheel to move the staple unit to the center of the finisher.

Figure 5-1010 Move the staple unit to the center

2. Release one retainer (callout 1), and then disconnect three connectors (callout 2).

Figure 5-1011 Disconnect three connectors

1622 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

3. Remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-1012 Remove two screws

4. At the left side of the finisher, remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-1013 Remove one screw

Remove the ejector unit (finisher) 1623

 5. Press up on the hinge (callout 1), release one tab (callout 2), and then rotate the sensor away from
the finisher (callout 3).

Figure 5-1014 Rotate the sensor

6. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-1015 Remove one screw

1624 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

7. Look inside the finisher through the stapler opening in the front and pull down to release and
remove one shaft (callout 1) on the front tamper unit.

Figure 5-1016 Remove the front tamper shaft

8. At the rear of the finisher, disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove three screws
(callout 2).

Figure 5-1017 Disconnect two connectors and remove three screws

Remove the ejector unit (finisher) 1625

 9. At the left side of the finisher, remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-1018 Remove one screw

10. Look inside the finisher through the stapler opening in the rear and pull down to release and remove
one shaft (callout 1) on the rear tamper unit.

Figure 5-1019 Remove the rear tamper shaft

1626 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

11. At the left side of the finisher, disconnect one connector (callout 1).

Figure 5-1020 Disconnect one connector

12. At the rear of the finisher, disconnect one connector (callout 1).

Figure 5-1021 Disconnect one connector

Remove the ejector unit (finisher) 1627

 13. At the rear of the finisher, press the wire retainer to the right to access and remove two screws
(callout 1).

Figure 5-1022 Disconnect one connector

14. At the front of the finisher, remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-1023 Remove two screws

1628 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

15. Lift the inside edges of the front and rear tampers up.

Figure 5-1024 Lift the edges of the tampers

16. Rotate the rear edge of the ejector unit away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide it toward
the rear of the finisher (callout 2) to remove it. Make sure that the PCA (callout 3) stays clear of the
sheet metal frame.

Figure 5-1025 Remove the ejector unit

17. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation
instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

Special installation instructions: Ejector unit

Remove the ejector unit (finisher) 1629

 a. When the front tamper shaft is removed, the retainer arm that held the one end of the shaft
will drop down. When reinstalling the shaft, raise the retainer arm and position the end of the
shaft in the notch (callout 1).

b. When the rear tamper shaft is removed, the retainer arm that held the one end of the shaft will
drop down. When reinstalling the shaft, raise the retainer arm and position the end of the shaft
in the notch (callout 1).

11. Remove the ejector1 motor sensor(S27)

Follow these steps to remove the ejector1 motor sensor(S27).

1630 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Disconnect the connector(callout 1) from ejector1 motor(callout 2, M6) of ejector unit.

Figure 5-1026 Disconnect the connector

2. Remove two screws(callout 1).

Figure 5-1027 Remove two screws

Remove the ejector1 motor sensor(S27) 1631

 3. Remove the ejector1 motor from ejector unit, disconnect the connector(callout 1), and then remove
the ejector1 motor sensor(S27, callout 2)

Figure 5-1028 Remove the ejector1 motor sensor

12. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

1632 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Removal and replacement: Ejector1 motor (M6)
Learn how to remove and replace the ejector1 motor.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the ejector1 motor on the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-128 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-01168A Ejector1 motor

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Small, flat-blade screwdriver

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

Removal and replacement: Ejector1 motor (M6) 1633

 1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)
Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

■ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove
three sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the
cover away from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1029 Remove the right upper cover

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and
then remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-1030 Remove six screws

1634 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two
machine screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-1031 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1032 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the front door (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front door (finisher).

Remove the front door (finisher) 1635

 1. Lift the top hinge pin up to release it from the retainer.

Figure 5-1033 Lift the top hinge pin

2. Pull the top hinge pin up to remove it.

Figure 5-1034 Remove the top hinge pin

1636 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

3. Use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to release the lower hinge pin from the retainer, and then rotate
it away from the finisher.

Figure 5-1035 Release the lower hinge pin

4. Support the door with one hand, and then pull the lower hinge pin straight up to remove it.

Figure 5-1036 Remove the lower hinge pin

5. Support the door with one hand, and then remove one screw (callout 1) to release the strap. Remove
the front door.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the front door (finisher) 1637

 Figure 5-1037 Remove the front door

4. Remove the front cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front cover (finisher).

1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 5-1038 Remove the jam-access knob

2. If the punch unit is installed, remove the punch waste bin (callout 1).

1638 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 3. Remove one screw (callout 1) on top of the front cover.

Figure 5-1039 Remove one screw

4. Remove five machine screws (callout 1), and then remove the front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1040 Remove the front cover

5. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

Remove the rear cover (finisher) 1639

 1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw
caps and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-1041 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Figure 5-1042 Remove the rear cover

6. Remove the booklet output tray

Follow these steps to remove the booklet output tray.

1640 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 1. Raise the booklet output tray up (callout 1), and then pull it away from the finisher (callout 2) to
remove it.

Figure 5-1043 Remove the booklet output tray

2. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation
instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly

Special installation instructions: booklet output tray

Position thetabs (callout 1) on the tray into the slots (callout 2) on the finisher.

Figure 5-1044 Install the booklet output tray

7. Remove the caster cover

Follow these steps to remove the caster cover.

Remove the caster cover 1641

 1. Remove two screw caps and two self-tapping screws (callout 1). Remove two screw caps and two
machine screws (callout 2).

Figure 5-1045 Remove four screws

2. Rotate the left edge of the cover away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide the cover to the
left (callout 2) to remove it.

TIP: Make sure that two tabs (callout 3) are positioned under the front lower cover when
reinstalling the caster cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Figure 5-1046 Remove the caster cover

8. Remove the left lower cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the left lower cover (finisher).

1642 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

NOTE: Raisethe lower output tray as needed to access the screws.

Figure 5-1047 Remove four screws

2. Slide the shield down (callout 1) to release it from four tabs (callout 2), and then rotate it away from
the finisher (callout 3).

CAUTION: The shield is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the
shield.

TIP: Position the shield under the four tabs (callout 2) when reinstalling it.

Figure 5-1048 Release the lower shield

Remove the left lower cover (finisher) 1643

 3. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove the shield.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1049 Disconnect two connectors

4. If you are replacing the left lower cover, locate three sensors (callout 1) on the back of the left lower
cover. Remove these sensors and transfer them to the replacement part.

Figure 5-1050 Remove the left lower cover

9. Remove the left upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the left upper cover (finisher).

1644 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Bring the lower output tray down by positioning the shaft of a screwdriver on the clutch (callout 1)
and gently pressing to the right to release the clutch. Hold the clutch in the released position and
lower the tray (callout 2) to the lowest position.

Figure 5-1051 Lower the output tray

2. Remove six machine screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-1052 Remove six screws

3. Rotate the lower edge of the shield away fromthe finisher (callout 1), and then slide the shield down
(callout 2) to release it from two tabs (callout 3).

CAUTION: The shield is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the
shield.

TIP: Position the shield under the two tabs (callout 3) when reinstalling it.

Remove the left upper cover (finisher) 1645

 Figure 5-1053 Release the shield

4. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove the upper shield assembly.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1054 Disconnect one connector

1646 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 5. If you are replacing the left upper cover, locate three sensors (callout 1) on the back of the left upper
cover. Remove these sensors and transfer them to the replacement part.

Figure 5-1055 Remove the left upper cover

10. Remove the ejector unit (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the ejector unit (finisher).

1. Rotate the green wheel to move the staple unit to the center of the finisher.

Figure 5-1056 Move the staple unit to the center

Remove the ejector unit (finisher) 1647

 2. Release one retainer (callout 1), and then disconnect three connectors (callout 2).

Figure 5-1057 Disconnect three connectors

3. Remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-1058 Remove two screws

1648 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

4. At the left side of the finisher, remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-1059 Remove one screw

5. Press up on the hinge (callout 1), release one tab (callout 2), and then rotate the sensor away from
the finisher (callout 3).

Figure 5-1060 Rotate the sensor

Remove the ejector unit (finisher) 1649

 6. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-1061 Remove one screw

7. Look inside the finisher through the stapler opening in the front and pull down to release and
remove one shaft (callout 1) on the front tamper unit.

Figure 5-1062 Remove the front tamper shaft

1650 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

8. At the rear of the finisher, disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove three screws
(callout 2).

Figure 5-1063 Disconnect two connectors and remove three screws

9. At the left side of the finisher, remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-1064 Remove one screw

Remove the ejector unit (finisher) 1651

 10. Look inside the finisher through the stapler opening in the rear and pull down to release and remove
one shaft (callout 1) on the rear tamper unit.

Figure 5-1065 Remove the rear tamper shaft

11. At the left side of the finisher, disconnect one connector (callout 1).

Figure 5-1066 Disconnect one connector

1652 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

12. At the rear of the finisher, disconnect one connector (callout 1).

Figure 5-1067 Disconnect one connector

13. At the rear of the finisher, press the wire retainer to the right to access and remove two screws
(callout 1).

Figure 5-1068 Disconnect one connector

Remove the ejector unit (finisher) 1653

 14. At the front of the finisher, remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-1069 Remove two screws

15. Lift the inside edges of the front and rear tampers up.

Figure 5-1070 Lift the edges of the tampers

1654 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

16. Rotate the rear edge of the ejector unit away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide it toward
the rear of the finisher (callout 2) to remove it. Make sure that the PCA (callout 3) stays clear of the
sheet metal frame.

Figure 5-1071 Remove the ejector unit

17. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation
instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

Special installation instructions: Ejector unit

a. When the front tamper shaft is removed, the retainer arm that held the one end of the shaft
will drop down. When reinstalling the shaft, raise the retainer arm and position the end of the
shaft in the notch (callout 1).

Remove the ejector unit (finisher) 1655

 b. When the rear tamper shaft is removed, the retainer arm that held the one end of the shaft will
drop down. When reinstalling the shaft, raise the retainer arm and position the end of the shaft
in the notch (callout 1).

11. Remove the ejector1 motor(M6)

Follow these steps to remove the ejector1 motor(M6).

1. Disconnect the connector(callout 1) from ejector1 motor(M6, callout 2) of ejector unit.

Figure 5-1072 Disconnect the connector

1656 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 2. Remove two screws(callout 1).

Figure 5-1073 Remove two screws

3. Remove the ejector1 motor from ejector unit and remove two screws(callout 1)

Figure 5-1074 Remove the ejector1 motor

12. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Unpack the replacement assembly 1657

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Ejector2 unit

Removal and replacement: Ejector2 home sensor (S32)

Learn how to remove and replace the ejector2 home sensor.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the ejector2 home sensor on the
finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

1658 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Table 5-129 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001415 Ejector2 home sensor

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Small, flat-blade screwdriver

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

■ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove
three sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the
cover away from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the right upper cover (finisher) 1659

 Figure 5-1075 Remove the right upper cover

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and
then remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-1076 Remove six screws

1660 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two
machine screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-1077 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1078 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the front door (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front door (finisher).

Remove the front door (finisher) 1661

 1. Lift the top hinge pin up to release it from the retainer.

Figure 5-1079 Lift the top hinge pin

2. Pull the top hinge pin up to remove it.

Figure 5-1080 Remove the top hinge pin

1662 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

3. Use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to release the lower hinge pin from the retainer, and then rotate
it away from the finisher.

Figure 5-1081 Release the lower hinge pin

4. Support the door with one hand, and then pull the lower hinge pin straight up to remove it.

Figure 5-1082 Remove the lower hinge pin

5. Support the door with one hand, and then remove one screw (callout 1) to release the strap. Remove
the front door.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the front door (finisher) 1663

 Figure 5-1083 Remove the front door

4. Remove the front cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front cover (finisher).

1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 5-1084 Remove the jam-access knob

2. If the punch unit is installed, remove the punch waste bin (callout 1).

1664 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 3. Remove one screw (callout 1) on top of the front cover.

Figure 5-1085 Remove one screw

4. Remove five machine screws (callout 1), and then remove the front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1086 Remove the front cover

5. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

Remove the rear cover (finisher) 1665

 1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw
caps and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-1087 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Figure 5-1088 Remove the rear cover

6. Remove the booklet output tray

Follow these steps to remove the booklet output tray.

1666 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 1. Raise the booklet output tray up (callout 1), and then pull it away from the finisher (callout 2) to
remove it.

Figure 5-1089 Remove the booklet output tray

2. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation
instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly

Special installation instructions: booklet output tray

Position thetabs (callout 1) on the tray into the slots (callout 2) on the finisher.

Figure 5-1090 Install the booklet output tray

7. Remove the caster cover

Follow these steps to remove the caster cover.

Remove the caster cover 1667

 1. Remove two screw caps and two self-tapping screws (callout 1). Remove two screw caps and two
machine screws (callout 2).

Figure 5-1091 Remove four screws

2. Rotate the left edge of the cover away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide the cover to the
left (callout 2) to remove it.

TIP: Make sure that two tabs (callout 3) are positioned under the front lower cover when
reinstalling the caster cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Figure 5-1092 Remove the caster cover

8. Remove the left lower cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the left lower cover (finisher).

1668 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

NOTE: Raisethe lower output tray as needed to access the screws.

Figure 5-1093 Remove four screws

2. Slide the shield down (callout 1) to release it from four tabs (callout 2), and then rotate it away from
the finisher (callout 3).

CAUTION: The shield is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the
shield.

TIP: Position the shield under the four tabs (callout 2) when reinstalling it.

Figure 5-1094 Release the lower shield

Remove the left lower cover (finisher) 1669

 3. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove the shield.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1095 Disconnect two connectors

4. If you are replacing the left lower cover, locate three sensors (callout 1) on the back of the left lower
cover. Remove these sensors and transfer them to the replacement part.

Figure 5-1096 Remove the left lower cover

9. Remove the left upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the left upper cover (finisher).

1670 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Bring the lower output tray down by positioning the shaft of a screwdriver on the clutch (callout 1)
and gently pressing to the right to release the clutch. Hold the clutch in the released position and
lower the tray (callout 2) to the lowest position.

Figure 5-1097 Lower the output tray

2. Remove six machine screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-1098 Remove six screws

3. Rotate the lower edge of the shield away fromthe finisher (callout 1), and then slide the shield down
(callout 2) to release it from two tabs (callout 3).

CAUTION: The shield is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the
shield.

TIP: Position the shield under the two tabs (callout 3) when reinstalling it.

Remove the left upper cover (finisher) 1671

 Figure 5-1099 Release the shield

4. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove the upper shield assembly.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1100 Disconnect one connector

1672 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 5. If you are replacing the left upper cover, locate three sensors (callout 1) on the back of the left upper
cover. Remove these sensors and transfer them to the replacement part.

Figure 5-1101 Remove the left upper cover

10. Remove the ejector unit (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the ejector unit (finisher).

1. Rotate the green wheel to move the staple unit to the center of the finisher.

Figure 5-1102 Move the staple unit to the center

Remove the ejector unit (finisher) 1673

 2. Release one retainer (callout 1), and then disconnect three connectors (callout 2).

Figure 5-1103 Disconnect three connectors

3. Remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-1104 Remove two screws

1674 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

4. At the left side of the finisher, remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-1105 Remove one screw

5. Press up on the hinge (callout 1), release one tab (callout 2), and then rotate the sensor away from
the finisher (callout 3).

Figure 5-1106 Rotate the sensor

Remove the ejector unit (finisher) 1675

 6. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-1107 Remove one screw

7. Look inside the finisher through the stapler opening in the front and pull down to release and
remove one shaft (callout 1) on the front tamper unit.

Figure 5-1108 Remove the front tamper shaft

1676 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

8. At the rear of the finisher, disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove three screws
(callout 2).

Figure 5-1109 Disconnect two connectors and remove three screws

9. At the left side of the finisher, remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-1110 Remove one screw

Remove the ejector unit (finisher) 1677

 10. Look inside the finisher through the stapler opening in the rear and pull down to release and remove
one shaft (callout 1) on the rear tamper unit.

Figure 5-1111 Remove the rear tamper shaft

11. At the left side of the finisher, disconnect one connector (callout 1).

Figure 5-1112 Disconnect one connector

1678 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

12. At the rear of the finisher, disconnect one connector (callout 1).

Figure 5-1113 Disconnect one connector

13. At the rear of the finisher, press the wire retainer to the right to access and remove two screws
(callout 1).

Figure 5-1114 Disconnect one connector

Remove the ejector unit (finisher) 1679

 14. At the front of the finisher, remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-1115 Remove two screws

15. Lift the inside edges of the front and rear tampers up.

Figure 5-1116 Lift the edges of the tampers

1680 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

16. Rotate the rear edge of the ejector unit away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide it toward
the rear of the finisher (callout 2) to remove it. Make sure that the PCA (callout 3) stays clear of the
sheet metal frame.

Figure 5-1117 Remove the ejector unit

17. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation
instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

Special installation instructions: Ejector unit

a. When the front tamper shaft is removed, the retainer arm that held the one end of the shaft
will drop down. When reinstalling the shaft, raise the retainer arm and position the end of the
shaft in the notch (callout 1).

Remove the ejector unit (finisher) 1681

 b. When the rear tamper shaft is removed, the retainer arm that held the one end of the shaft will
drop down. When reinstalling the shaft, raise the retainer arm and position the end of the shaft
in the notch (callout 1).

11. Remove the ejector2 home sensor(S32)

Follow these steps to remove the ejector2 home sensor(S32).

1. Remove sensor(callout 1, S32) using tweezers from the ejector unit.

Figure 5-1118 Remove sensor

1682 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 2. Disconnect the connector(callout 1) from ejector2 home sensor.

Figure 5-1119 Disconnect the connector from ejector2 home sensor

12. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Unpack the replacement assembly 1683

 Removal and replacement: Ejector2 motor sensor (S23)
Learn how to remove and replace the ejector2 motor sensor.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the ejector2 motor sensor on the
finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-130 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001415 Ejector2 motor sensor

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Small, flat-blade screwdriver

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

1684 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Post service test
Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

■ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove
three sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the
cover away from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1120 Remove the right upper cover

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

Remove the right upper cover (finisher) 1685

 1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and
then remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-1121 Remove six screws

2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two
machine screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-1122 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

1686 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-1123 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the front door (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front door (finisher).

1. Lift the top hinge pin up to release it from the retainer.

Figure 5-1124 Lift the top hinge pin

Remove the front door (finisher) 1687

 2. Pull the top hinge pin up to remove it.

Figure 5-1125 Remove the top hinge pin

3. Use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to release the lower hinge pin from the retainer, and then rotate
it away from the finisher.

Figure 5-1126 Release the lower hinge pin

1688 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 4. Support the door with one hand, and then pull the lower hinge pin straight up to remove it.

Figure 5-1127 Remove the lower hinge pin

5. Support the door with one hand, and then remove one screw (callout 1) to release the strap. Remove
the front door.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1128 Remove the front door

4. Remove the front cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front cover (finisher).

Remove the front cover (finisher) 1689

 1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 5-1129 Remove the jam-access knob

2. If the punch unit is installed, remove the punch waste bin (callout 1).

3. Remove one screw (callout 1) on top of the front cover.

Figure 5-1130 Remove one screw

4. Remove five machine screws (callout 1), and then remove the front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

1690 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-1131 Remove the front cover

5. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw
caps and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-1132 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Remove the rear cover (finisher) 1691

 Figure 5-1133 Remove the rear cover

6. Remove the booklet output tray

Follow these steps to remove the booklet output tray.

1. Raise the booklet output tray up (callout 1), and then pull it away from the finisher (callout 2) to
remove it.

Figure 5-1134 Remove the booklet output tray

2. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation
instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly

Special installation instructions: booklet output tray

Position thetabs (callout 1) on the tray into the slots (callout 2) on the finisher.

1692 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-1135 Install the booklet output tray

7. Remove the caster cover

Follow these steps to remove the caster cover.

1. Remove two screw caps and two self-tapping screws (callout 1). Remove two screw caps and two
machine screws (callout 2).

Figure 5-1136 Remove four screws

2. Rotate the left edge of the cover away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide the cover to the
left (callout 2) to remove it.

TIP: Make sure that two tabs (callout 3) are positioned under the front lower cover when
reinstalling the caster cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Remove the caster cover 1693

 Figure 5-1137 Remove the caster cover

8. Remove the left lower cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the left lower cover (finisher).

1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

NOTE: Raisethe lower output tray as needed to access the screws.

Figure 5-1138 Remove four screws

2. Slide the shield down (callout 1) to release it from four tabs (callout 2), and then rotate it away from
the finisher (callout 3).

CAUTION: The shield is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the
shield.

TIP: Position the shield under the four tabs (callout 2) when reinstalling it.

1694 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-1139 Release the lower shield

3. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove the shield.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1140 Disconnect two connectors

Remove the left lower cover (finisher) 1695

 4. If you are replacing the left lower cover, locate three sensors (callout 1) on the back of the left lower
cover. Remove these sensors and transfer them to the replacement part.

Figure 5-1141 Remove the left lower cover

9. Remove the left upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the left upper cover (finisher).

1. Bring the lower output tray down by positioning the shaft of a screwdriver on the clutch (callout 1)
and gently pressing to the right to release the clutch. Hold the clutch in the released position and
lower the tray (callout 2) to the lowest position.

Figure 5-1142 Lower the output tray

1696 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

2. Remove six machine screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-1143 Remove six screws

3. Rotate the lower edge of the shield away fromthe finisher (callout 1), and then slide the shield down
(callout 2) to release it from two tabs (callout 3).

CAUTION: The shield is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the
shield.

TIP: Position the shield under the two tabs (callout 3) when reinstalling it.

Figure 5-1144 Release the shield

4. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove the upper shield assembly.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the left upper cover (finisher) 1697

 Figure 5-1145 Disconnect one connector

5. If you are replacing the left upper cover, locate three sensors (callout 1) on the back of the left upper
cover. Remove these sensors and transfer them to the replacement part.

Figure 5-1146 Remove the left upper cover

10. Remove the ejector unit (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the ejector unit (finisher).

1698 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Rotate the green wheel to move the staple unit to the center of the finisher.

Figure 5-1147 Move the staple unit to the center

2. Release one retainer (callout 1), and then disconnect three connectors (callout 2).

Figure 5-1148 Disconnect three connectors

Remove the ejector unit (finisher) 1699

 3. Remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-1149 Remove two screws

4. At the left side of the finisher, remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-1150 Remove one screw

1700 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

5. Press up on the hinge (callout 1), release one tab (callout 2), and then rotate the sensor away from
the finisher (callout 3).

Figure 5-1151 Rotate the sensor

6. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-1152 Remove one screw

Remove the ejector unit (finisher) 1701

 7. Look inside the finisher through the stapler opening in the front and pull down to release and
remove one shaft (callout 1) on the front tamper unit.

Figure 5-1153 Remove the front tamper shaft

8. At the rear of the finisher, disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove three screws
(callout 2).

Figure 5-1154 Disconnect two connectors and remove three screws

1702 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

9. At the left side of the finisher, remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-1155 Remove one screw

10. Look inside the finisher through the stapler opening in the rear and pull down to release and remove
one shaft (callout 1) on the rear tamper unit.

Figure 5-1156 Remove the rear tamper shaft

Remove the ejector unit (finisher) 1703

 11. At the left side of the finisher, disconnect one connector (callout 1).

Figure 5-1157 Disconnect one connector

12. At the rear of the finisher, disconnect one connector (callout 1).

Figure 5-1158 Disconnect one connector

1704 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

13. At the rear of the finisher, press the wire retainer to the right to access and remove two screws
(callout 1).

Figure 5-1159 Disconnect one connector

14. At the front of the finisher, remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-1160 Remove two screws

Remove the ejector unit (finisher) 1705

 15. Lift the inside edges of the front and rear tampers up.

Figure 5-1161 Lift the edges of the tampers

16. Rotate the rear edge of the ejector unit away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide it toward
the rear of the finisher (callout 2) to remove it. Make sure that the PCA (callout 3) stays clear of the
sheet metal frame.

Figure 5-1162 Remove the ejector unit

17. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation
instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

Special installation instructions: Ejector unit

1706 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 a. When the front tamper shaft is removed, the retainer arm that held the one end of the shaft
will drop down. When reinstalling the shaft, raise the retainer arm and position the end of the
shaft in the notch (callout 1).

b. When the rear tamper shaft is removed, the retainer arm that held the one end of the shaft will
drop down. When reinstalling the shaft, raise the retainer arm and position the end of the shaft
in the notch (callout 1).

11. Remove the ejector2 motor sensor(S23)

Follow these steps to remove the ejector2 motor sensor(S23).

Remove the ejector2 motor sensor(S23) 1707

 1. Disconnect the connector(callout 1) from ejector2 motor(M5, callout 2) of ejector unit.

Figure 5-1163 Disconnect the connector

2. Remove two screws(callout 1).

Figure 5-1164 Remove two screws

1708 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 3. Remove the ejector2 motor from ejector unit, disconnect the connector(callout 1), and then remove
the ejector2 motor sensor(S23, callout 2)

Figure 5-1165 Remove the ejector2 motor sensor

12. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Unpack the replacement assembly 1709

 Removal and replacement: Ejector2 motor (M5)
Learn how to remove and replace the ejector2 motor.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the ejector2 motor on the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-131 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-01168A Ejector2 motor

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Small, flat-blade screwdriver

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1710 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)
Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

■ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove
three sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the
cover away from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1166 Remove the right upper cover

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and
then remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-1167 Remove six screws

Remove the right upper cover (finisher) 1711

 2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two
machine screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-1168 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1169 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the front door (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front door (finisher).

1712 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Lift the top hinge pin up to release it from the retainer.

Figure 5-1170 Lift the top hinge pin

2. Pull the top hinge pin up to remove it.

Figure 5-1171 Remove the top hinge pin

Remove the front door (finisher) 1713

 3. Use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to release the lower hinge pin from the retainer, and then rotate
it away from the finisher.

Figure 5-1172 Release the lower hinge pin

4. Support the door with one hand, and then pull the lower hinge pin straight up to remove it.

Figure 5-1173 Remove the lower hinge pin

5. Support the door with one hand, and then remove one screw (callout 1) to release the strap. Remove
the front door.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

1714 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-1174 Remove the front door

4. Remove the front cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front cover (finisher).

1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 5-1175 Remove the jam-access knob

2. If the punch unit is installed, remove the punch waste bin (callout 1).

Remove the front cover (finisher) 1715

 3. Remove one screw (callout 1) on top of the front cover.

Figure 5-1176 Remove one screw

4. Remove five machine screws (callout 1), and then remove the front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1177 Remove the front cover

5. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

1716 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw
caps and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-1178 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Figure 5-1179 Remove the rear cover

6. Remove the booklet output tray

Follow these steps to remove the booklet output tray.

Remove the booklet output tray 1717

 1. Raise the booklet output tray up (callout 1), and then pull it away from the finisher (callout 2) to
remove it.

Figure 5-1180 Remove the booklet output tray

2. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation
instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly

Special installation instructions: booklet output tray

Position thetabs (callout 1) on the tray into the slots (callout 2) on the finisher.

Figure 5-1181 Install the booklet output tray

7. Remove the caster cover

Follow these steps to remove the caster cover.

1718 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 1. Remove two screw caps and two self-tapping screws (callout 1). Remove two screw caps and two
machine screws (callout 2).

Figure 5-1182 Remove four screws

2. Rotate the left edge of the cover away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide the cover to the
left (callout 2) to remove it.

TIP: Make sure that two tabs (callout 3) are positioned under the front lower cover when
reinstalling the caster cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Figure 5-1183 Remove the caster cover

8. Remove the left lower cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the left lower cover (finisher).

Remove the left lower cover (finisher) 1719

 1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

NOTE: Raisethe lower output tray as needed to access the screws.

Figure 5-1184 Remove four screws

2. Slide the shield down (callout 1) to release it from four tabs (callout 2), and then rotate it away from
the finisher (callout 3).

CAUTION: The shield is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the
shield.

TIP: Position the shield under the four tabs (callout 2) when reinstalling it.

Figure 5-1185 Release the lower shield

1720 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 3. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove the shield.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1186 Disconnect two connectors

4. If you are replacing the left lower cover, locate three sensors (callout 1) on the back of the left lower
cover. Remove these sensors and transfer them to the replacement part.

Figure 5-1187 Remove the left lower cover

9. Remove the left upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the left upper cover (finisher).

Remove the left upper cover (finisher) 1721

 1. Bring the lower output tray down by positioning the shaft of a screwdriver on the clutch (callout 1)
and gently pressing to the right to release the clutch. Hold the clutch in the released position and
lower the tray (callout 2) to the lowest position.

Figure 5-1188 Lower the output tray

2. Remove six machine screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-1189 Remove six screws

3. Rotate the lower edge of the shield away fromthe finisher (callout 1), and then slide the shield down
(callout 2) to release it from two tabs (callout 3).

CAUTION: The shield is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the
shield.

TIP: Position the shield under the two tabs (callout 3) when reinstalling it.

1722 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-1190 Release the shield

4. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove the upper shield assembly.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1191 Disconnect one connector

Remove the left upper cover (finisher) 1723

 5. If you are replacing the left upper cover, locate three sensors (callout 1) on the back of the left upper
cover. Remove these sensors and transfer them to the replacement part.

Figure 5-1192 Remove the left upper cover

10. Remove the ejector unit (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the ejector unit (finisher).

1. Rotate the green wheel to move the staple unit to the center of the finisher.

Figure 5-1193 Move the staple unit to the center

1724 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

2. Release one retainer (callout 1), and then disconnect three connectors (callout 2).

Figure 5-1194 Disconnect three connectors

3. Remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-1195 Remove two screws

Remove the ejector unit (finisher) 1725

 4. At the left side of the finisher, remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-1196 Remove one screw

5. Press up on the hinge (callout 1), release one tab (callout 2), and then rotate the sensor away from
the finisher (callout 3).

Figure 5-1197 Rotate the sensor

1726 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

6. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-1198 Remove one screw

7. Look inside the finisher through the stapler opening in the front and pull down to release and
remove one shaft (callout 1) on the front tamper unit.

Figure 5-1199 Remove the front tamper shaft

Remove the ejector unit (finisher) 1727

 8. At the rear of the finisher, disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove three screws
(callout 2).

Figure 5-1200 Disconnect two connectors and remove three screws

9. At the left side of the finisher, remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-1201 Remove one screw

1728 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

10. Look inside the finisher through the stapler opening in the rear and pull down to release and remove
one shaft (callout 1) on the rear tamper unit.

Figure 5-1202 Remove the rear tamper shaft

11. At the left side of the finisher, disconnect one connector (callout 1).

Figure 5-1203 Disconnect one connector

Remove the ejector unit (finisher) 1729

 12. At the rear of the finisher, disconnect one connector (callout 1).

Figure 5-1204 Disconnect one connector

13. At the rear of the finisher, press the wire retainer to the right to access and remove two screws
(callout 1).

Figure 5-1205 Disconnect one connector

1730 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

14. At the front of the finisher, remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-1206 Remove two screws

15. Lift the inside edges of the front and rear tampers up.

Figure 5-1207 Lift the edges of the tampers

Remove the ejector unit (finisher) 1731

 16. Rotate the rear edge of the ejector unit away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide it toward
the rear of the finisher (callout 2) to remove it. Make sure that the PCA (callout 3) stays clear of the
sheet metal frame.

Figure 5-1208 Remove the ejector unit

17. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation
instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

Special installation instructions: Ejector unit

a. When the front tamper shaft is removed, the retainer arm that held the one end of the shaft
will drop down. When reinstalling the shaft, raise the retainer arm and position the end of the
shaft in the notch (callout 1).

1732 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 b. When the rear tamper shaft is removed, the retainer arm that held the one end of the shaft will
drop down. When reinstalling the shaft, raise the retainer arm and position the end of the shaft
in the notch (callout 1).

11. Remove the ejector2 motor(M5)

Follow these steps to remove the ejector2 motor(M5).

1. Disconnect the connector(callout 1) from ejector2 motor(M5, callout 2) of ejector unit.

Figure 5-1209 Disconnect the connector

Remove the ejector2 motor(M5) 1733

 2. Remove two screws(callout 1).

Figure 5-1210 Remove two screws

3. Remove the ejector2 motor from ejector unit and remove two screws(callout 1)

Figure 5-1211 Remove the ejector2 motor

12. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

1734 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Main output tray unit

Removal and replacement: Main output tray top of stack sensor (S20)
Learn how to remove and replace the main output tray top of stack sensor.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the main output tray top of stack sensor
on the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Main output tray unit 1735

 Table 5-132 Part information

Part number Part description

JC82-01039A Main output tray top of stack sensor

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

■ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove
three sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the
cover away from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1212 Remove the right upper cover

1736 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)
Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and
then remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-1213 Remove six screws

2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two
machine screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-1214 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the top cover (finisher) 1737

 Figure 5-1215 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the front door (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front door (finisher).

1. Lift the top hinge pin up to release it from the retainer.

Figure 5-1216 Lift the top hinge pin

1738 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

2. Pull the top hinge pin up to remove it.

Figure 5-1217 Remove the top hinge pin

3. Use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to release the lower hinge pin from the retainer, and then rotate
it away from the finisher.

Figure 5-1218 Release the lower hinge pin

Remove the front door (finisher) 1739

 4. Support the door with one hand, and then pull the lower hinge pin straight up to remove it.

Figure 5-1219 Remove the lower hinge pin

5. Support the door with one hand, and then remove one screw (callout 1) to release the strap. Remove
the front door.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1220 Remove the front door

4. Remove the front cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front cover (finisher).

1740 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 5-1221 Remove the jam-access knob

2. If the punch unit is installed, remove the punch waste bin (callout 1).

3. Remove one screw (callout 1) on top of the front cover.

Figure 5-1222 Remove one screw

4. Remove five machine screws (callout 1), and then remove the front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the front cover (finisher) 1741

 Figure 5-1223 Remove the front cover

5. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw
caps and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-1224 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

1742 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-1225 Remove the rear cover

6. Remove the booklet output tray

Follow these steps to remove the booklet output tray.

1. Raise the booklet output tray up (callout 1), and then pull it away from the finisher (callout 2) to
remove it.

Figure 5-1226 Remove the booklet output tray

2. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation
instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly

Special installation instructions: booklet output tray

Position thetabs (callout 1) on the tray into the slots (callout 2) on the finisher.

Remove the booklet output tray 1743

 Figure 5-1227 Install the booklet output tray

7. Remove the caster cover

Follow these steps to remove the caster cover.

1. Remove two screw caps and two self-tapping screws (callout 1). Remove two screw caps and two
machine screws (callout 2).

Figure 5-1228 Remove four screws

2. Rotate the left edge of the cover away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide the cover to the
left (callout 2) to remove it.

TIP: Make sure that two tabs (callout 3) are positioned under the front lower cover when
reinstalling the caster cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

1744 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-1229 Remove the caster cover

8. Remove the left lower cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the left lower cover (finisher).

1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

NOTE: Raisethe lower output tray as needed to access the screws.

Figure 5-1230 Remove four screws

2. Slide the shield down (callout 1) to release it from four tabs (callout 2), and then rotate it away from
the finisher (callout 3).

CAUTION: The shield is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the
shield.

TIP: Position the shield under the four tabs (callout 2) when reinstalling it.

Remove the left lower cover (finisher) 1745

 Figure 5-1231 Release the lower shield

3. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove the shield.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1232 Disconnect two connectors

1746 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 4. If you are replacing the left lower cover, locate three sensors (callout 1) on the back of the left lower
cover. Remove these sensors and transfer them to the replacement part.

Figure 5-1233 Remove the left lower cover

9. Remove the left upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the left upper cover (finisher).

1. Bring the lower output tray down by positioning the shaft of a screwdriver on the clutch (callout 1)
and gently pressing to the right to release the clutch. Hold the clutch in the released position and
lower the tray (callout 2) to the lowest position.

Figure 5-1234 Lower the output tray

Remove the left upper cover (finisher) 1747

 2. Remove six machine screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-1235 Remove six screws

3. Rotate the lower edge of the shield away fromthe finisher (callout 1), and then slide the shield down
(callout 2) to release it from two tabs (callout 3).

CAUTION: The shield is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the
shield.

TIP: Position the shield under the two tabs (callout 3) when reinstalling it.

Figure 5-1236 Release the shield

4. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove the upper shield assembly.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

1748 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-1237 Disconnect one connector

5. If you are replacing the left upper cover, locate three sensors (callout 1) on the back of the left upper
cover. Remove these sensors and transfer them to the replacement part.

Figure 5-1238 Remove the left upper cover

10. Remove the main output tray top of stack sensor(S20)

Follow these steps to remove the main output tray top of stack sensor(S20).

Remove the main output tray top of stack sensor(S20) 1749

 ■ Remove detector and emitter sensor(S20, callout 1)

Figure 5-1239 Remove detector and emitter sensor

11. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

1750 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Main output tray top of stack switch (S34)
Learn how to remove and replace the main output tray top of stack switch.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the main output tray top of stack switch
on the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-133 Part information

Part number Part description

JC39-02316A Main output tray top of stack switch

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Small, flat-blade screwdriver

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

Removal and replacement: Main output tray top of stack switch (S34) 1751
 ○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

■ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove
three sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the
cover away from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1240 Remove the right upper cover

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

1752 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and
then remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-1241 Remove six screws

2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two
machine screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-1242 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the top cover (finisher) 1753

 Figure 5-1243 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the front door (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front door (finisher).

1. Lift the top hinge pin up to release it from the retainer.

Figure 5-1244 Lift the top hinge pin

1754 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

2. Pull the top hinge pin up to remove it.

Figure 5-1245 Remove the top hinge pin

3. Use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to release the lower hinge pin from the retainer, and then rotate
it away from the finisher.

Figure 5-1246 Release the lower hinge pin

Remove the front door (finisher) 1755

 4. Support the door with one hand, and then pull the lower hinge pin straight up to remove it.

Figure 5-1247 Remove the lower hinge pin

5. Support the door with one hand, and then remove one screw (callout 1) to release the strap. Remove
the front door.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1248 Remove the front door

4. Remove the front cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front cover (finisher).

1756 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 5-1249 Remove the jam-access knob

2. If the punch unit is installed, remove the punch waste bin (callout 1).

3. Remove one screw (callout 1) on top of the front cover.

Figure 5-1250 Remove one screw

4. Remove five machine screws (callout 1), and then remove the front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the front cover (finisher) 1757

 Figure 5-1251 Remove the front cover

5. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw
caps and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-1252 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

1758 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-1253 Remove the rear cover

6. Remove the main output tray of stack switch(S34)

Follow these steps to remove the main output tray of stack switch(S34).

1. At the front of the finisher, remove two screws(callout 1).

Figure 5-1254 Remove two screws

Remove the main output tray of stack switch(S34) 1759

 2. At the rear of the finisher, remove two screws(callout 1).

Figure 5-1255 Remove two screws

3. Do not remove the frame(callout 1) but pull it one side.

Figure 5-1256 Pull it one side

1760 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

4. At the front of the finisher, remove two screws(callout 1)

Figure 5-1257 Remove two screws

5. At the rear of the finisher, remove four screws(callout 1).

Figure 5-1258 Remove four screws

Remove the main output tray of stack switch(S34) 1761

 6. Bring the lower output tray down by positioning the shaft of a screwdriver or tweezers on the clutch
(callout 1) and gently pressing to the right to release the clutch. Hold the clutch in the released
position and lower the tray (callout 2) to the lowest position

Figure 5-1259 Pressing to the right to release the clutch

7. At the rear of the finisher, remove two screws(callout 1).

Figure 5-1260 Remove two screws

1762 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

8. Remove two screws(callout 1)

Figure 5-1261 Remove two screws

9. Separate two parts (callout 1,callout 2)

Figure 5-1262 Separate two parts

Remove the main output tray of stack switch(S34) 1763

 10. Separate two parts (callout 1,callout 2)

Figure 5-1263 Separate two parts

11. Disconnect the connector (callout 1) And switch(callout 2, S34)

Figure 5-1264 Disconnect the connector

7. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

1764 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Main output tray lower limit sensor (S26)
Learn how to remove and replace the main output tray lower limit sensor.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the main output tray lower limit sensor
on the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Removal and replacement: Main output tray lower limit sensor (S26) 1765
 Table 5-134 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001415 Main output tray lower limit sensor

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Small, flat-blade screwdriver

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

■ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove
three sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the
cover away from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

1766 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-1265 Remove the right upper cover

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and
then remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-1266 Remove six screws

Remove the top cover (finisher) 1767

 2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two
machine screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-1267 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1268 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the front door (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front door (finisher).

1768 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Lift the top hinge pin up to release it from the retainer.

Figure 5-1269 Lift the top hinge pin

2. Pull the top hinge pin up to remove it.

Figure 5-1270 Remove the top hinge pin

Remove the front door (finisher) 1769

 3. Use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to release the lower hinge pin from the retainer, and then rotate
it away from the finisher.

Figure 5-1271 Release the lower hinge pin

4. Support the door with one hand, and then pull the lower hinge pin straight up to remove it.

Figure 5-1272 Remove the lower hinge pin

5. Support the door with one hand, and then remove one screw (callout 1) to release the strap. Remove
the front door.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

1770 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-1273 Remove the front door

4. Remove the front cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front cover (finisher).

1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 5-1274 Remove the jam-access knob

2. If the punch unit is installed, remove the punch waste bin (callout 1).

Remove the front cover (finisher) 1771

 3. Remove one screw (callout 1) on top of the front cover.

Figure 5-1275 Remove one screw

4. Remove five machine screws (callout 1), and then remove the front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1276 Remove the front cover

5. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

1772 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw
caps and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-1277 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Figure 5-1278 Remove the rear cover

6. Remove the booklet output tray

Follow these steps to remove the booklet output tray.

Remove the booklet output tray 1773

 1. Raise the booklet output tray up (callout 1), and then pull it away from the finisher (callout 2) to
remove it.

Figure 5-1279 Remove the booklet output tray

2. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation
instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly

Special installation instructions: booklet output tray

Position thetabs (callout 1) on the tray into the slots (callout 2) on the finisher.

Figure 5-1280 Install the booklet output tray

7. Remove the caster cover

Follow these steps to remove the caster cover.

1774 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 1. Remove two screw caps and two self-tapping screws (callout 1). Remove two screw caps and two
machine screws (callout 2).

Figure 5-1281 Remove four screws

2. Rotate the left edge of the cover away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide the cover to the
left (callout 2) to remove it.

TIP: Make sure that two tabs (callout 3) are positioned under the front lower cover when
reinstalling the caster cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Figure 5-1282 Remove the caster cover

8. Remove the left lower cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the left lower cover (finisher).

Remove the left lower cover (finisher) 1775

 1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

NOTE: Raisethe lower output tray as needed to access the screws.

Figure 5-1283 Remove four screws

2. Slide the shield down (callout 1) to release it from four tabs (callout 2), and then rotate it away from
the finisher (callout 3).

CAUTION: The shield is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the
shield.

TIP: Position the shield under the four tabs (callout 2) when reinstalling it.

Figure 5-1284 Release the lower shield

1776 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 3. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove the shield.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1285 Disconnect two connectors

4. If you are replacing the left lower cover, locate three sensors (callout 1) on the back of the left lower
cover. Remove these sensors and transfer them to the replacement part.

Figure 5-1286 Remove the left lower cover

9. Remove the main output tray lower limit sensor(S26)

Follow these steps to remove the main output tray lower limit sensor(S26).

Remove the main output tray lower limit sensor(S26) 1777

 ■ Disconnect the connector(callout 1) and remove the sensor(S26, callout 2) from the lower shield
assembly.

Figure 5-1287 Remove the main output tray lower limit sensor

10. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

1778 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Removal and replacement: Main output tray motor sensor (S33)
Learn how to remove and replace the main output tray motor sensor.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the main output tray motor sensor on
the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-135 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Main output tray motor sensor

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

Removal and replacement: Main output tray motor sensor (S33) 1779
 1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)
Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

■ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove
three sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the
cover away from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1288 Remove the right upper cover

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and
then remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-1289 Remove six screws

1780 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two
machine screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-1290 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1291 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

Remove the rear cover (finisher) 1781

 1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw
caps and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-1292 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Figure 5-1293 Remove the rear cover

4. Remove the main output tray motor sensor (S33)

Follow these steps to remove the main output tray motor sensor (S33).

1782 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 1. Disconnect the connector (callout 1)

Figure 5-1294 Disconnect the connector

2. Remove the tape using tweezers and remove the sensor (S33, callout 1).

Figure 5-1295 Remove the sensor

5. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Unpack the replacement assembly 1783

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

HP LaserJet Managed MFP E82540-E82560, E87640-E87660, E82540du-E82560du, E87640du-

E87660du, E72525-E72535, E77822-E77830 - Removal and replacement: Main output tray motor
(M11)
Learn how to remove and replace the main output tray motor.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the main output tray motor on the
finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

1784 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Table 5-136 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01415B Main output tray motor assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

■ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove
three sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the
cover away from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1296 Remove the right upper cover

Remove the right upper cover (finisher) 1785

 2. Remove the top cover (finisher)
Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and
then remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-1297 Remove six screws

2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two
machine screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-1298 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

1786 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-1299 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw
caps and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-1300 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Remove the rear cover (finisher) 1787

 Figure 5-1301 Remove the rear cover

4. Remove the main output tray motor (M11)

Follow these steps to remove the main output tray motor (M11).

1. Bring the lower output tray down by positioning the shaft of a screwdriver on the clutch (callout 1)
and gently pressing to the right to release the clutch. Hold the clutch in the released position and
lower the tray (callout 2) to the lowest position

Figure 5-1302 Lower theoutput tray

1788 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

2. Open two retainers (callout 1), and then release the green wires (callout 2).

Figure 5-1303 Open two retainers

3. Disconnect three connectors (callout 1).

Figure 5-1304 Disconnect three connectors

Remove the main output tray motor (M11) 1789

 4. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then thread the cable up through the opening in the top of
the bracket.

Figure 5-1305 Disconnect one connector

5. Remove four screws (callout 1), and then remove the motor assembly.

Figure 5-1306 Remove four screws and the motor assembly

1790 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

6. Carefully pull the motor assembly away from the printer to remove it.

Figure 5-1307 Remove the motor assembly

7. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation
instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

Special installation instructions: Main tray moving motor (M11)

a. Before installing the motor assembly, slide the bushing (callout 1) off of the shaft.

Remove the main output tray motor (M11) 1791

 b. Align the flat edges on the bushing with the flat edges on the opening in the motor assembly
bracket, and then install the bushing.

c. Position the bushing over the shaft, and then install the motor assembly.

5. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

1792 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Paper holding unit

Removal and replacement: Paper holding home sensor (S22)

Learn how to remove and replace the paper holding home sensor.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the paper holding home sensor on the
finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Paper holding unit 1793

 Table 5-137 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Paper holding home sensor

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

■ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove
three sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the
cover away from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1308 Remove the right upper cover

1794 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)
Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and
then remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-1309 Remove six screws

2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two
machine screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-1310 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the top cover (finisher) 1795

 Figure 5-1311 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the front door (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front door (finisher).

1. Lift the top hinge pin up to release it from the retainer.

Figure 5-1312 Lift the top hinge pin

1796 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

2. Pull the top hinge pin up to remove it.

Figure 5-1313 Remove the top hinge pin

3. Use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to release the lower hinge pin from the retainer, and then rotate
it away from the finisher.

Figure 5-1314 Release the lower hinge pin

Remove the front door (finisher) 1797

 4. Support the door with one hand, and then pull the lower hinge pin straight up to remove it.

Figure 5-1315 Remove the lower hinge pin

5. Support the door with one hand, and then remove one screw (callout 1) to release the strap. Remove
the front door.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1316 Remove the front door

4. Remove the front cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front cover (finisher).

1798 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 5-1317 Remove the jam-access knob

2. If the punch unit is installed, remove the punch waste bin (callout 1).

3. Remove one screw (callout 1) on top of the front cover.

Figure 5-1318 Remove one screw

4. Remove five machine screws (callout 1), and then remove the front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the front cover (finisher) 1799

 Figure 5-1319 Remove the front cover

5. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw
caps and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-1320 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

1800 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-1321 Remove the rear cover

6. Remove the booklet output tray

Follow these steps to remove the booklet output tray.

1. Raise the booklet output tray up (callout 1), and then pull it away from the finisher (callout 2) to
remove it.

Figure 5-1322 Remove the booklet output tray

2. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation
instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly

Special installation instructions: booklet output tray

Position thetabs (callout 1) on the tray into the slots (callout 2) on the finisher.

Remove the booklet output tray 1801

 Figure 5-1323 Install the booklet output tray

7. Remove the caster cover

Follow these steps to remove the caster cover.

1. Remove two screw caps and two self-tapping screws (callout 1). Remove two screw caps and two
machine screws (callout 2).

Figure 5-1324 Remove four screws

2. Rotate the left edge of the cover away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide the cover to the
left (callout 2) to remove it.

TIP: Make sure that two tabs (callout 3) are positioned under the front lower cover when
reinstalling the caster cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

1802 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-1325 Remove the caster cover

8. Remove the left lower cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the left lower cover (finisher).

1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

NOTE: Raisethe lower output tray as needed to access the screws.

Figure 5-1326 Remove four screws

2. Slide the shield down (callout 1) to release it from four tabs (callout 2), and then rotate it away from
the finisher (callout 3).

CAUTION: The shield is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the
shield.

TIP: Position the shield under the four tabs (callout 2) when reinstalling it.

Remove the left lower cover (finisher) 1803

 Figure 5-1327 Release the lower shield

3. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove the shield.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1328 Disconnect two connectors

1804 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 4. If you are replacing the left lower cover, locate three sensors (callout 1) on the back of the left lower
cover. Remove these sensors and transfer them to the replacement part.

Figure 5-1329 Remove the left lower cover

9. Remove the left upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the left upper cover (finisher).

1. Bring the lower output tray down by positioning the shaft of a screwdriver on the clutch (callout 1)
and gently pressing to the right to release the clutch. Hold the clutch in the released position and
lower the tray (callout 2) to the lowest position.

Figure 5-1330 Lower the output tray

Remove the left upper cover (finisher) 1805

 2. Remove six machine screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-1331 Remove six screws

3. Rotate the lower edge of the shield away fromthe finisher (callout 1), and then slide the shield down
(callout 2) to release it from two tabs (callout 3).

CAUTION: The shield is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the
shield.

TIP: Position the shield under the two tabs (callout 3) when reinstalling it.

Figure 5-1332 Release the shield

4. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove the upper shield assembly.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

1806 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-1333 Disconnect one connector

5. If you are replacing the left upper cover, locate three sensors (callout 1) on the back of the left upper
cover. Remove these sensors and transfer them to the replacement part.

Figure 5-1334 Remove the left upper cover

10. Remove the paper holding home sensor(S22)

Follow these steps to remove the paper holding home sensor(S22).

Remove the paper holding home sensor(S22) 1807

 ■ Disconnect the connector(callout 1) and remove the sensor(S22, callout 2) from the upper shield
assembly.

Figure 5-1335 Remove the paper holding home sensor

11. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

1808 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Removal and replacement: Paper holding front sensor (S17)
Learn how to remove and replace the front paper holding sensor.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the front paper holding sensor on the
finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-138 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Front paper holding sensor

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

Removal and replacement: Paper holding front sensor (S17) 1809

 1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)
Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

■ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove
three sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the
cover away from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1336 Remove the right upper cover

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and
then remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-1337 Remove six screws

1810 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two
machine screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-1338 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1339 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the front door (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front door (finisher).

Remove the front door (finisher) 1811

 1. Lift the top hinge pin up to release it from the retainer.

Figure 5-1340 Lift the top hinge pin

2. Pull the top hinge pin up to remove it.

Figure 5-1341 Remove the top hinge pin

1812 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

3. Use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to release the lower hinge pin from the retainer, and then rotate
it away from the finisher.

Figure 5-1342 Release the lower hinge pin

4. Support the door with one hand, and then pull the lower hinge pin straight up to remove it.

Figure 5-1343 Remove the lower hinge pin

5. Support the door with one hand, and then remove one screw (callout 1) to release the strap. Remove
the front door.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the front door (finisher) 1813

 Figure 5-1344 Remove the front door

4. Remove the front cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front cover (finisher).

1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 5-1345 Remove the jam-access knob

2. If the punch unit is installed, remove the punch waste bin (callout 1).

1814 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 3. Remove one screw (callout 1) on top of the front cover.

Figure 5-1346 Remove one screw

4. Remove five machine screws (callout 1), and then remove the front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1347 Remove the front cover

5. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

Remove the rear cover (finisher) 1815

 1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw
caps and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-1348 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Figure 5-1349 Remove the rear cover

6. Remove the booklet output tray

Follow these steps to remove the booklet output tray.

1816 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 1. Raise the booklet output tray up (callout 1), and then pull it away from the finisher (callout 2) to
remove it.

Figure 5-1350 Remove the booklet output tray

2. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation
instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly

Special installation instructions: booklet output tray

Position thetabs (callout 1) on the tray into the slots (callout 2) on the finisher.

Figure 5-1351 Install the booklet output tray

7. Remove the caster cover

Follow these steps to remove the caster cover.

Remove the caster cover 1817

 1. Remove two screw caps and two self-tapping screws (callout 1). Remove two screw caps and two
machine screws (callout 2).

Figure 5-1352 Remove four screws

2. Rotate the left edge of the cover away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide the cover to the
left (callout 2) to remove it.

TIP: Make sure that two tabs (callout 3) are positioned under the front lower cover when
reinstalling the caster cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Figure 5-1353 Remove the caster cover

8. Remove the left lower cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the left lower cover (finisher).

1818 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

NOTE: Raisethe lower output tray as needed to access the screws.

Figure 5-1354 Remove four screws

2. Slide the shield down (callout 1) to release it from four tabs (callout 2), and then rotate it away from
the finisher (callout 3).

CAUTION: The shield is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the
shield.

TIP: Position the shield under the four tabs (callout 2) when reinstalling it.

Figure 5-1355 Release the lower shield

Remove the left lower cover (finisher) 1819

 3. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove the shield.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1356 Disconnect two connectors

4. If you are replacing the left lower cover, locate three sensors (callout 1) on the back of the left lower
cover. Remove these sensors and transfer them to the replacement part.

Figure 5-1357 Remove the left lower cover

9. Remove the paper holding sensor (S17)

Follow these steps to remove the paper holding sensor (S17).

1820 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 ■ Remove the sensor(callout 1, S17) from the upper shield assembly.

Figure 5-1358 Remove the paper holding sensor

10. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Paper holding rear sensor (S31)

Learn how to remove and replace the rear paper holding sensor.

Unpack the replacement assembly 1821

 Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the rear paper holding sensor on the
finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-139 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Rear paper holding sensor

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

1822 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 ■ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove
three sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the
cover away from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1359 Remove the right upper cover

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and
then remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-1360 Remove six screws

Remove the top cover (finisher) 1823

 2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two
machine screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-1361 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1362 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the front door (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front door (finisher).

1824 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Lift the top hinge pin up to release it from the retainer.

Figure 5-1363 Lift the top hinge pin

2. Pull the top hinge pin up to remove it.

Figure 5-1364 Remove the top hinge pin

Remove the front door (finisher) 1825

 3. Use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to release the lower hinge pin from the retainer, and then rotate
it away from the finisher.

Figure 5-1365 Release the lower hinge pin

4. Support the door with one hand, and then pull the lower hinge pin straight up to remove it.

Figure 5-1366 Remove the lower hinge pin

5. Support the door with one hand, and then remove one screw (callout 1) to release the strap. Remove
the front door.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

1826 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-1367 Remove the front door

4. Remove the front cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front cover (finisher).

1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 5-1368 Remove the jam-access knob

2. If the punch unit is installed, remove the punch waste bin (callout 1).

Remove the front cover (finisher) 1827

 3. Remove one screw (callout 1) on top of the front cover.

Figure 5-1369 Remove one screw

4. Remove five machine screws (callout 1), and then remove the front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1370 Remove the front cover

5. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

1828 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw
caps and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-1371 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Figure 5-1372 Remove the rear cover

6. Remove the booklet output tray

Follow these steps to remove the booklet output tray.

Remove the booklet output tray 1829

 1. Raise the booklet output tray up (callout 1), and then pull it away from the finisher (callout 2) to
remove it.

Figure 5-1373 Remove the booklet output tray

2. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation
instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly

Special installation instructions: booklet output tray

Position thetabs (callout 1) on the tray into the slots (callout 2) on the finisher.

Figure 5-1374 Install the booklet output tray

7. Remove the caster cover

Follow these steps to remove the caster cover.

1830 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 1. Remove two screw caps and two self-tapping screws (callout 1). Remove two screw caps and two
machine screws (callout 2).

Figure 5-1375 Remove four screws

2. Rotate the left edge of the cover away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide the cover to the
left (callout 2) to remove it.

TIP: Make sure that two tabs (callout 3) are positioned under the front lower cover when
reinstalling the caster cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Figure 5-1376 Remove the caster cover

8. Remove the left lower cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the left lower cover (finisher).

Remove the left lower cover (finisher) 1831

 1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

NOTE: Raisethe lower output tray as needed to access the screws.

Figure 5-1377 Remove four screws

2. Slide the shield down (callout 1) to release it from four tabs (callout 2), and then rotate it away from
the finisher (callout 3).

CAUTION: The shield is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the
shield.

TIP: Position the shield under the four tabs (callout 2) when reinstalling it.

Figure 5-1378 Release the lower shield

1832 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 3. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove the shield.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1379 Disconnect two connectors

4. If you are replacing the left lower cover, locate three sensors (callout 1) on the back of the left lower
cover. Remove these sensors and transfer them to the replacement part.

Figure 5-1380 Remove the left lower cover

9. Remove the rear paper holding sensor(S31)

Follow these steps to remove the rear paper holding sensor(S31).

Remove the rear paper holding sensor(S31) 1833

 ■ Remove the sensor(S31, callout 1) from the upper shield assembly.

Figure 5-1381 Remove the rear paper holding sensor

10. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Paper holding Motor (M7)

Learn how to remove and replace the paper holding Motor.

1834 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the paper holding Motor on the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-140 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01414A Paper holding motor assembly

JC93-01156A Paper holding motor

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

Remove the right upper cover (finisher) 1835

 ■ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove
three sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the
cover away from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1382 Remove the right upper cover

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and
then remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-1383 Remove six screws

1836 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two
machine screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-1384 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1385 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the front door (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front door (finisher).

Remove the front door (finisher) 1837

 1. Lift the top hinge pin up to release it from the retainer.

Figure 5-1386 Lift the top hinge pin

2. Pull the top hinge pin up to remove it.

Figure 5-1387 Remove the top hinge pin

1838 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

3. Use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to release the lower hinge pin from the retainer, and then rotate
it away from the finisher.

Figure 5-1388 Release the lower hinge pin

4. Support the door with one hand, and then pull the lower hinge pin straight up to remove it.

Figure 5-1389 Remove the lower hinge pin

5. Support the door with one hand, and then remove one screw (callout 1) to release the strap. Remove
the front door.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the front door (finisher) 1839

 Figure 5-1390 Remove the front door

4. Remove the front cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front cover (finisher).

1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 5-1391 Remove the jam-access knob

2. If the punch unit is installed, remove the punch waste bin (callout 1).

1840 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 3. Remove one screw (callout 1) on top of the front cover.

Figure 5-1392 Remove one screw

4. Remove five machine screws (callout 1), and then remove the front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1393 Remove the front cover

5. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

Remove the rear cover (finisher) 1841

 1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw
caps and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-1394 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Figure 5-1395 Remove the rear cover

6. Remove the booklet output tray

Follow these steps to remove the booklet output tray.

1842 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 1. Raise the booklet output tray up (callout 1), and then pull it away from the finisher (callout 2) to
remove it.

Figure 5-1396 Remove the booklet output tray

2. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation
instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly

Special installation instructions: booklet output tray

Position thetabs (callout 1) on the tray into the slots (callout 2) on the finisher.

Figure 5-1397 Install the booklet output tray

7. Remove the caster cover

Follow these steps to remove the caster cover.

Remove the caster cover 1843

 1. Remove two screw caps and two self-tapping screws (callout 1). Remove two screw caps and two
machine screws (callout 2).

Figure 5-1398 Remove four screws

2. Rotate the left edge of the cover away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide the cover to the
left (callout 2) to remove it.

TIP: Make sure that two tabs (callout 3) are positioned under the front lower cover when
reinstalling the caster cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Figure 5-1399 Remove the caster cover

8. Remove the left lower cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the left lower cover (finisher).

1844 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

NOTE: Raisethe lower output tray as needed to access the screws.

Figure 5-1400 Remove four screws

2. Slide the shield down (callout 1) to release it from four tabs (callout 2), and then rotate it away from
the finisher (callout 3).

CAUTION: The shield is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the
shield.

TIP: Position the shield under the four tabs (callout 2) when reinstalling it.

Figure 5-1401 Release the lower shield

Remove the left lower cover (finisher) 1845

 3. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove the shield.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1402 Disconnect two connectors

4. If you are replacing the left lower cover, locate three sensors (callout 1) on the back of the left lower
cover. Remove these sensors and transfer them to the replacement part.

Figure 5-1403 Remove the left lower cover

9. Remove the paper holding Motor (M7)

Follow these steps to remove the paper holding Motor (M7).

1846 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Release one retainer (callout 1), and then disconnect one connector (callout 2).

Figure 5-1404 Disconnect one connector

2. Remove two screws (callout 1), and then remove the motor and bracket.

Figure 5-1405 Remove two screws

Remove the paper holding Motor (M7) 1847

 3. Remove two screws (callout 1), and then remove the motor.

Figure 5-1406 Remove two screws and the motor

4. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation
instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly

Special installation instructions: paper holding Motor (M10)

When installing the motor and bracket, align the tab and slot on the motor bracket with the tab and
slot in the printer.

Figure 5-1407 Install the motor and bracket

10. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1848 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Buffer unit

Removal and replacement: Buffer motor (M10)

Learn how to remove and replace the buffer motor.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the buffer motor on the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

Buffer unit 1849

 ○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-141 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-01152A Buffer motor

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

■ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove
three sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the
cover away from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

1850 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-1408 Remove the right upper cover

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and
then remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-1409 Remove six screws

Remove the top cover (finisher) 1851

 2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two
machine screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-1410 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1411 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

1852 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw
caps and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-1412 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Figure 5-1413 Remove the rear cover

4. Remove the main exit cam motor(M10)

Follow these steps to remove the main exit cam motor(M10).

Remove the main exit cam motor(M10) 1853

 1. At the rear of the finisher, remove two screws(callout 1).

Figure 5-1414 Remove two screws

2. Disconnect the connector(callout 1)

Figure 5-1415 Disconnect the connector

5. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

1854 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Buffer solenoid (SL1)

Learn how to remove and replace the buffer solenoid.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the buffer solenoid on the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Removal and replacement: Buffer solenoid (SL1) 1855

 Table 5-142 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01675A Buffer solenoid

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

■ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove
three sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the
cover away from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1416 Remove the right upper cover

1856 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)
Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and
then remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-1417 Remove six screws

2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two
machine screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-1418 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the top cover (finisher) 1857

 Figure 5-1419 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw
caps and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-1420 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

1858 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-1421 Remove the rear cover

4. Remove the buffer solenoid(SL1)

Follow these steps to remove the buffer solenoid(SL1).

1. At the rear of the finisher, remove two screws(Callout 1)

Figure 5-1422 Remove two screws

Remove the buffer solenoid(SL1) 1859

 2. At the rear of the finisher, remove two screws(Callout 1)

Figure 5-1423 Remove two screws

3. Remove top jam cover assembly (Callout 1)

Figure 5-1424 Remove top jam cover assembly

1860 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 4. At the rear of the finisher, remove two screws(Callout 1)

Figure 5-1425 Remove two screws

5. Disconnect the connector(Callout 1) and remove the buffer solenoid(Callout 2)

Figure 5-1426 Remove the buffer solenoid

5. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Unpack the replacement assembly 1861

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Booklet maker

Removal and replacement: Booklet finisher

Learn how to remove and replace the booklet maker.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the booklet maker on the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

1862 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Table 5-143 Part information

Part number Part description

JC82-00905A Booklet maker

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

■ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove
three sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the
cover away from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1427 Remove the right upper cover

Remove the right upper cover (finisher) 1863

 2. Remove the top cover (finisher)
Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and
then remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-1428 Remove six screws

2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two
machine screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-1429 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

1864 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-1430 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw
caps and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-1431 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Remove the rear cover (finisher) 1865

 Figure 5-1432 Remove the rear cover

4. Remove the booklet maker

Follow these steps to remove the booklet maker.

1. Slide the booklet maker away from the finisher.

Figure 5-1433 Slide the booklet maker away from the finisher

1866 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

2. At the Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove one screw (callout 2).

Figure 5-1434 Disconnect one connector and remove one screw

3. Release the metal bracket through the opening in the sheet metal.

Figure 5-1435 Release the metal bracket

Remove the booklet maker 1867

 4. Remove one star-washer screw (callout 1), and then release the alignment pin (callout 2) on the right
side of the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1436 Remove one screw

5. Slide the right rail toward the finisher.

Figure 5-1437 Slide the right rail

1868 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

6. Remove one star-washer screw (callout 1) on the left side of the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1438 Remove one screw

7. Lift the booklet maker up on the left side while squeezing the right rail away from the finisher
slightly to clear the sheet metal. Remove the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1439 Remove the booklet maker

8. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation
instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

Special installation instructions: booklet maker

When installing the booklet maker, position the hooks on the rail under the slots on the booklet
maker.

Remove the booklet maker 1869

 Figure 5-1440 Position the hooks

9. When installed correctly, the arrow on the front of the booklet maker aligns with the arrow on the
finisher rail.

Figure 5-1441 Align arrows

1870 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 10. When installed correctly, the arrow on the back of the booklet maker aligns with the arrow on the
finisher rail.

Figure 5-1442 Align arrows

11. Extend the right rail away from the finisher and position it in the booklet maker slot.

Figure 5-1443 Extend the right rail

5. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Unpack the replacement assembly 1871

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Booklet entrance unit

Removal and replacement: Booklet entrance motor (M15)

Learn how to remove and replace the booklet entrance motor.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the booklet entrance motor on the
finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

1872 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Table 5-144 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-01152A Booklet entrance motor

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the booklet front cover

Follow these steps to remove the booklet front cover.

■ Slide the booklet maker slightly away from the finisher (callout 1). Remove one screw (callout 2), and
then slide the green knob away from the booklet maker to remove it (callout 3). Remove four screws
(callout 4), and then remove the booklet front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Figure 5-1444 Remove five screws and the cover

Remove the booklet front cover 1873

 2. Remove the booklet entrance motor (M15)
Follow these steps to remove the booklet entrance motor (M15).

■ Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove two screws (callout 2). Lift the motor away
from the booklet maker and release the belt (callout 3) from the back of the motor.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1445 Remove the booklet entrance motor

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

1874 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Booklet entrance sensor (S36)

Learn how to remove and replace the booklet entrance sensor.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the booklet entrance sensor on the
finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-145 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001415 Booklet entrance sensor

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

Removal and replacement: Booklet entrance sensor (S36) 1875

 ○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

■ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove
three sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the
cover away from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1446 Remove the right upper cover

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

1876 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and
then remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-1447 Remove six screws

2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two
machine screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-1448 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the top cover (finisher) 1877

 Figure 5-1449 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw
caps and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-1450 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

1878 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-1451 Remove the rear cover

4. Remove the booklet maker

Follow these steps to remove the booklet maker.

1. Slide the booklet maker away from the finisher.

Figure 5-1452 Slide the booklet maker away from the finisher

Remove the booklet maker 1879

 2. At the Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove one screw (callout 2).

Figure 5-1453 Disconnect one connector and remove one screw

3. Release the metal bracket through the opening in the sheet metal.

Figure 5-1454 Release the metal bracket

1880 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

4. Remove one star-washer screw (callout 1), and then release the alignment pin (callout 2) on the right
side of the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1455 Remove one screw

5. Slide the right rail toward the finisher.

Figure 5-1456 Slide the right rail

Remove the booklet maker 1881

 6. Remove one star-washer screw (callout 1) on the left side of the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1457 Remove one screw

7. Lift the booklet maker up on the left side while squeezing the right rail away from the finisher
slightly to clear the sheet metal. Remove the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1458 Remove the booklet maker

8. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation
instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

Special installation instructions: booklet maker

When installing the booklet maker, position the hooks on the rail under the slots on the booklet
maker.

1882 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-1459 Position the hooks

9. When installed correctly, the arrow on the front of the booklet maker aligns with the arrow on the
finisher rail.

Figure 5-1460 Align arrows

Remove the booklet maker 1883

 10. When installed correctly, the arrow on the back of the booklet maker aligns with the arrow on the
finisher rail.

Figure 5-1461 Align arrows

11. Extend the right rail away from the finisher and position it in the booklet maker slot.

Figure 5-1462 Extend the right rail

5. Remove the booklet entrance unit

Follow these steps to remove the booklet entrance unit.

1884 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Remove two screws(callout 1) then remove the black cover (callout 2)

Figure 5-1463 Remove two screws then remove the black cover

2. Remove two screws(callout 1) and disconnect one connector(callout 2)

Figure 5-1464 Remove two screws and disconnect one connector

Remove the booklet entrance unit 1885

 3. Remove two screws(callout 1)

Figure 5-1465 Remove two screws

4. Remove two screws(callout 1) to make it easy to pull off the booklet entrance unit (callout2)

Figure 5-1466 Remove two screws to make it easy to pull off the booklet entrance unit

1886 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 5. Remove the booklet entrance unit (callout 1)

Figure 5-1467 Remove the booklet entrance unit

6. Remove the booklet entrance sensor (S36)

Follow these steps to remove the booklet entrance sensor (S36).

1. Entrance unit (callout 1)

Figure 5-1468 Entrance unit

Remove the booklet entrance sensor (S36) 1887

 2. Unplug one connector (callout 1)

Figure 5-1469 Unplug one connector

3. Use a tweezer to remove the entrance sensor (S36, callout1)

Figure 5-1470 Remove the entrance sensor

7. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

1888 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Booklet paddle unit

Removal and replacement: Booklet paddle motor (M19)

Learn how to remove and replace the booklet paddle motor.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the booklet paddle motor on the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Booklet paddle unit 1889

 Table 5-146 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-01001A Booklet paddle motor

JC90-01430A Booklet paddle motor assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the booklet front cover

Follow these steps to remove the booklet front cover.

■ Slide the booklet maker slightly away from the finisher (callout 1). Remove one screw (callout 2), and
then slide the green knob away from the booklet maker to remove it (callout 3). Remove four screws
(callout 4), and then remove the booklet front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

1890 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-1471 Remove five screws and the cover

2. Remove the booklet paddle motor (M19)

Follow these steps to remove the booklet paddle motor (M19).

1. Remove two screws(callout 1)

Figure 5-1472 Remove two screws

Remove the booklet paddle motor (M19) 1891

 2. Remove the booklelt paddle motor (M19, callout1) and unplug one connector (callout 2)

Figure 5-1473 Remove the booklelt paddle motor and unplug one connector

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Booklet paddle home sensor (S41)

Learn how to remove and replace the booklet paddle home sensor.

1892 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the booklet paddle home sensor on the
finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-147 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Booklet paddle home sensor

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

Remove the right upper cover (finisher) 1893

 ■ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove
three sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the
cover away from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1474 Remove the right upper cover

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and
then remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-1475 Remove six screws

1894 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two
machine screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-1476 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1477 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

Remove the rear cover (finisher) 1895

 1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw
caps and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-1478 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Figure 5-1479 Remove the rear cover

4. Remove the booklet front cover

Follow these steps to remove the booklet front cover.

1896 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 ■ Slide the booklet maker slightly away from the finisher (callout 1). Remove one screw (callout 2), and
then slide the green knob away from the booklet maker to remove it (callout 3). Remove four screws
(callout 4), and then remove the booklet front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Figure 5-1480 Remove five screws and the cover

5. Remove the booklet right lower shield

Follow these steps to remove the booklet right lower shield.

1. Remove two screws at the front of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1481 Remove two screws

Remove the booklet right lower shield 1897

 2. Remove two screws at the back of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1482 Remove two screws

3. Slide the booklet maker out of the finisher (callout 1), and then rotate the top of the right lower shield
(callout 2) away from the booklet maker to remove it.

Figure 5-1483 Remove the right lower shield

6. Remove the booklet paddle motor (M19)

Follow these steps to remove the booklet paddle motor (M19).

1898 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 1. Remove two screws(callout 1)

Figure 5-1484 Remove two screws

2. Remove the booklelt paddle motor (M19, callout1) and unplug one connector (callout 2)

Figure 5-1485 Remove the booklelt paddle motor and unplug one connector

7. Remove the booklet paddle home sensor (S41)

Follow these steps to remove the booklet paddle home sensor (S41).

Remove the booklet paddle home sensor (S41) 1899

 1. Remove one e-clip on top of the white washer and then remove the white washer(callout 1)

Figure 5-1486 Remove white washer

2. Remove two belts (callout 1)

Figure 5-1487 Remove two belts

3. Remove the black actuator (callout 1)

Figure 5-1488 Remove the black actuator

1900 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 4. Unplug one connector (callout 1)

Figure 5-1489 Unplug one connector

5. Use a tweezer to remove the Booklet paddle home sensor (S41, callout 1) from the left side

Figure 5-1490 Use a tweezer to remove the Booklet paddle home sensor

8. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

Unpack the replacement assembly 1901

 IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Booklet end fence unit

Removal and replacement: Booklet end fence unit

Learn how to remove and replace the booklet end fence.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the booklet end fence on the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-148 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01432A Booklet end fence unit

1902 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

■ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove
three sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the
cover away from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1491 Remove the right upper cover

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

Remove the right upper cover (finisher) 1903

 1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and
then remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-1492 Remove six screws

2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two
machine screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-1493 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

1904 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-1494 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw
caps and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-1495 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Remove the rear cover (finisher) 1905

 Figure 5-1496 Remove the rear cover

4. Remove the booklet front cover

Follow these steps to remove the booklet front cover.

■ Slide the booklet maker slightly away from the finisher (callout 1). Remove one screw (callout 2), and
then slide the green knob away from the booklet maker to remove it (callout 3). Remove four screws
(callout 4), and then remove the booklet front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Figure 5-1497 Remove five screws and the cover

5. Remove the booklet right lower shield

Follow these steps to remove the booklet right lower shield.

1906 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Remove two screws at the front of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1498 Remove two screws

2. Remove two screws at the back of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1499 Remove two screws

Remove the booklet right lower shield 1907

 3. Slide the booklet maker out of the finisher (callout 1), and then rotate the top of the right lower shield
(callout 2) away from the booklet maker to remove it.

Figure 5-1500 Remove the right lower shield

6. Remove the fold stopper unit

Follow these steps to remove the fold stopper unit.

1. On the left side of the booklet maker, remove two screws through access openings in the jam
access cover (callout 1).

Figure 5-1501 Remove two screws

1908 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

2. Raise the jam access cover.

Figure 5-1502 Raise the jam access cover

3. Raise the booklet width guide.

Figure 5-1503 Raise the booklet width guide.

Remove the fold stopper unit 1909

 4. On the right side of the booklet maker, open two retainers (callout 1), and then disconnect three
connectors (callout 2).

Figure 5-1504 Disconnect three connectors

5. Remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-1505 Remove two screws

1910 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

6. Release the tab (callout 1) on the guide arm, and then slide the guide off of the shaft (callout 2) to
remove it.

Figure 5-1506 Release the guide arm

7. Lower the width guide to the lowest position.

Figure 5-1507 Lower the width guide

Remove the fold stopper unit 1911

 8. On the right side of the booklet maker, remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-1508 Remove one screw

9. Lift the right lower corner (callout 1) to clear the cable guide, and then slide the assembly to the
right (callout 2) to remove it.

Figure 5-1509 Remove the fold stopper unit

10. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation
instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse theremoval steps to finishinstalling theassembly.

Special installation instructions: Fold stopper unit

Loosen the two alignment screws (callout 1) and move the fold unit side to side to until the alignment
gauge is positioned on the center line. Tighten the screws and run a folded job through the finisher

1912 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 and verify that the fold is correct. If the fold is not correct, loosen the screws, adjust the alignment,
and run another fold job. Continue this process until the fold is correct.

Figure 5-1510 Adjust the alignment gauge

7. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Unpack the replacement assembly 1913

 Removal and replacement: End fence motor (M3)
Learn how to remove and replace the booklet end fence motor.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the booklet end fence motor on the
finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-149 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-01155A Booklet end fence motor

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1914 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Remove the booklet front cover
Follow these steps to remove the booklet front cover.

■ Slide the booklet maker slightly away from the finisher (callout 1). Remove one screw (callout 2), and
then slide the green knob away from the booklet maker to remove it (callout 3). Remove four screws
(callout 4), and then remove the booklet front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Figure 5-1511 Remove five screws and the cover

2. Remove the booklet right lower shield

Follow these steps to remove the booklet right lower shield.

1. Remove two screws at the front of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1512 Remove two screws

Remove the booklet front cover 1915

 2. Remove two screws at the back of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1513 Remove two screws

3. Slide the booklet maker out of the finisher (callout 1), and then rotate the top of the right lower shield
(callout 2) away from the booklet maker to remove it.

Figure 5-1514 Remove the right lower shield

3. Remove the booklet end fence motor (M20)

Follow these steps to remove the booklet end fence motor (M20).

■ Disconnect one connector (callout 1), remove two screws (callout 2), and then remove the booklet end
fence motor.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

1916 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-1515 Remove the booklet end fence motor

4. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Booklet end fence home sensor (S42)

Learn how to remove and replace the booklet end fence home sensor.

Unpack the replacement assembly 1917

 Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the booklet end fence home sensor on
the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-150 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Booklet end fence home sensor

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the booklet front cover

Follow these steps to remove the booklet front cover.

1918 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 ■ Slide the booklet maker slightly away from the finisher (callout 1). Remove one screw (callout 2), and
then slide the green knob away from the booklet maker to remove it (callout 3). Remove four screws
(callout 4), and then remove the booklet front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Figure 5-1516 Remove five screws and the cover

2. Remove the booklet right lower shield

Follow these steps to remove the booklet right lower shield.

1. Remove two screws at the front of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1517 Remove two screws

Remove the booklet right lower shield 1919

 2. Remove two screws at the back of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1518 Remove two screws

3. Slide the booklet maker out of the finisher (callout 1), and then rotate the top of the right lower shield
(callout 2) away from the booklet maker to remove it.

Figure 5-1519 Remove the right lower shield

3. Remove the Booklet end fence home sensor (S42)

Follow these steps to remove the Booklet end fence home sensor (S42).

1920 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 1. Unplug one connector(callout 1) at the left of the booklet make

Figure 5-1520 Unplug one connector

2. Remove the Booklet end fence home sensor (S42, callout 1) at the right of the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1521 Remove the Booklet end fence home sensor

4. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Unpack the replacement assembly 1921

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Booklet presser unit

Removal and replacement: Booklet presser

Learn how to remove and replace the booklet presser.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the booklet presser on the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

1922 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Table 5-151 Part information

Part number Part description

JC61-07237A Booklet presser

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

■ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove
three sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the
cover away from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1522 Remove the right upper cover

Remove the right upper cover (finisher) 1923

 2. Remove the top cover (finisher)
Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and
then remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-1523 Remove six screws

2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two
machine screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-1524 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

1924 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-1525 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw
caps and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-1526 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Remove the rear cover (finisher) 1925

 Figure 5-1527 Remove the rear cover

4. Remove the booklet maker

Follow these steps to remove the booklet maker.

1. Slide the booklet maker away from the finisher.

Figure 5-1528 Slide the booklet maker away from the finisher

1926 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

2. At the Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove one screw (callout 2).

Figure 5-1529 Disconnect one connector and remove one screw

3. Release the metal bracket through the opening in the sheet metal.

Figure 5-1530 Release the metal bracket

Remove the booklet maker 1927

 4. Remove one star-washer screw (callout 1), and then release the alignment pin (callout 2) on the right
side of the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1531 Remove one screw

5. Slide the right rail toward the finisher.

Figure 5-1532 Slide the right rail

1928 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

6. Remove one star-washer screw (callout 1) on the left side of the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1533 Remove one screw

7. Lift the booklet maker up on the left side while squeezing the right rail away from the finisher
slightly to clear the sheet metal. Remove the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1534 Remove the booklet maker

8. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation
instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

Special installation instructions: booklet maker

When installing the booklet maker, position the hooks on the rail under the slots on the booklet
maker.

Remove the booklet maker 1929

 Figure 5-1535 Position the hooks

9. When installed correctly, the arrow on the front of the booklet maker aligns with the arrow on the
finisher rail.

Figure 5-1536 Align arrows

1930 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 10. When installed correctly, the arrow on the back of the booklet maker aligns with the arrow on the
finisher rail.

Figure 5-1537 Align arrows

11. Extend the right rail away from the finisher and position it in the booklet maker slot.

Figure 5-1538 Extend the right rail

5. Remove the booklet entrance unit

Follow these steps to remove the booklet entrance unit.

Remove the booklet entrance unit 1931

 1. Remove two screws(callout 1) then remove the black cover (callout 2)

Figure 5-1539 Remove two screws then remove the black cover

2. Remove two screws(callout 1) and disconnect one connector(callout 2)

Figure 5-1540 Remove two screws and disconnect one connector

1932 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

3. Remove two screws(callout 1)

Figure 5-1541 Remove two screws

4. Remove two screws(callout 1) to make it easy to pull off the booklet entrance unit (callout2)

Figure 5-1542 Remove two screws to make it easy to pull off the booklet entrance unit

Remove the booklet entrance unit 1933

 5. Remove the booklet entrance unit (callout 1)

Figure 5-1543 Remove the booklet entrance unit

6. Remove the booklet presser

Follow these steps to remove the booklet presser.

1. Remove three screws (callout 1)

Figure 5-1544 Remove three screws

1934 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

2. Disconnect one connector (callout 1) and remove the motor unit (callout 2)

Figure 5-1545 Disconnect one connector and remove the motor unit

3. Remove one e-clip on top of the white gear then remove the white gear (callout 1)

Figure 5-1546 Remove one e-clip on top of the white gear then remove the white gear

Remove the booklet presser 1935

 4. Remove one e-clip on top of the bush then remove the bush (callout 1)

Figure 5-1547 Remove one e-clip on top of the bush then remove the bush

5. Band (callout2) the booklet presser (callout 1) out to make it easy to pull out (callout 3)

Figure 5-1548 Band the booklet presser out to make it easy to pull out

7. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

1936 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Booklet presser home sensor (S37)

Learn how to remove and replace the booklet presser home sensor.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the booklet presser home sensor on the
finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Removal and replacement: Booklet presser home sensor (S37) 1937

 Table 5-152 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Booklet presser home sensor

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the booklet front cover

Follow these steps to remove the booklet front cover.

■ Slide the booklet maker slightly away from the finisher (callout 1). Remove one screw (callout 2), and
then slide the green knob away from the booklet maker to remove it (callout 3). Remove four screws
(callout 4), and then remove the booklet front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Figure 5-1549 Remove five screws and the cover

1938 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

2. Remove the booklet presser home sensor (S37)
Follow these steps to remove the booklet presser home sensor (S37) .

1. Remove three screws (callout 1)

Figure 5-1550 Remove three screws

2. Use a tweezer to remove booklet presser home sensor (S37, callout 1)

Figure 5-1551 Remove booklet presser home sensor

Remove the booklet presser home sensor (S37) 1939

 3. Unplug one connector (callout 1)

Figure 5-1552 Unplug one connector

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

1940 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Removal and replacement: Booklet presser motor (M16)
Learn how to remove and replace the booklet presser motor.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the booklet presser motor on the
finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-153 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-01155A Booklet presser motor

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

Removal and replacement: Booklet presser motor (M16) 1941

 1. Remove the booklet front cover
Follow these steps to remove the booklet front cover.

■ Slide the booklet maker slightly away from the finisher (callout 1). Remove one screw (callout 2), and
then slide the green knob away from the booklet maker to remove it (callout 3). Remove four screws
(callout 4), and then remove the booklet front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Figure 5-1553 Remove five screws and the cover

2. Remove the booklet presser motor (M16)

Follow these steps to remove the booklet presser motor (M16).

■ Disconnect one connector (callout 1), remove two screws (callout 2), and then remove the booklet
presser motor.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

1942 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-1554 Remove the booklet presser motor

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Booklet tamper unit

Unpack the replacement assembly 1943

 Removal and replacement: Booklet tamper unit
Learn how to remove and replace the tray booklet tamper unit.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the booklet tamper unit on the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-154 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01431A Booklet tamper unit

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1944 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)
Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

■ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove
three sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the
cover away from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1555 Remove the right upper cover

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and
then remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-1556 Remove six screws

Remove the right upper cover (finisher) 1945

 2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two
machine screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-1557 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1558 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

1946 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw
caps and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-1559 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Figure 5-1560 Remove the rear cover

4. Remove the booklet maker

Follow these steps to remove the booklet maker.

Remove the booklet maker 1947

 1. Slide the booklet maker away from the finisher.

Figure 5-1561 Slide the booklet maker away from the finisher

2. At the Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove one screw (callout 2).

Figure 5-1562 Disconnect one connector and remove one screw

1948 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

3. Release the metal bracket through the opening in the sheet metal.

Figure 5-1563 Release the metal bracket

4. Remove one star-washer screw (callout 1), and then release the alignment pin (callout 2) on the right
side of the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1564 Remove one screw

Remove the booklet maker 1949

 5. Slide the right rail toward the finisher.

Figure 5-1565 Slide the right rail

6. Remove one star-washer screw (callout 1) on the left side of the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1566 Remove one screw

1950 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

7. Lift the booklet maker up on the left side while squeezing the right rail away from the finisher
slightly to clear the sheet metal. Remove the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1567 Remove the booklet maker

8. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation
instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

Special installation instructions: booklet maker

When installing the booklet maker, position the hooks on the rail under the slots on the booklet
maker.

Figure 5-1568 Position the hooks

Remove the booklet maker 1951

 9. When installed correctly, the arrow on the front of the booklet maker aligns with the arrow on the
finisher rail.

Figure 5-1569 Align arrows

10. When installed correctly, the arrow on the back of the booklet maker aligns with the arrow on the
finisher rail.

Figure 5-1570 Align arrows

1952 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 11. Extend the right rail away from the finisher and position it in the booklet maker slot.

Figure 5-1571 Extend the right rail

5. Remove the booklet front cover

Follow these steps to remove the booklet front cover.

■ Slide the booklet maker slightly away from the finisher (callout 1). Remove one screw (callout 2), and
then slide the green knob away from the booklet maker to remove it (callout 3). Remove four screws
(callout 4), and then remove the booklet front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Figure 5-1572 Remove five screws and the cover

6. Remove the booklet right lower shield

Follow these steps to remove the booklet right lower shield.

Remove the booklet front cover 1953

 1. Remove two screws at the front of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1573 Remove two screws

2. Remove two screws at the back of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1574 Remove two screws

1954 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 3. Slide the booklet maker out of the finisher (callout 1), and then rotate the top of the right lower shield
(callout 2) away from the booklet maker to remove it.

Figure 5-1575 Remove the right lower shield

7. Remove the booklet maker middle right shield

Follow these steps to remove the booklet maker middle right shield.

1. Remove two screws at the front of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1576 Remove two screws at the front of the booklet maker

Remove the booklet maker middle right shield 1955

 2. Remove two screws at the back of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1577 Remove two screws at the back of the booklet maker

8. Remove the booklet finisher upper right shield

Follow these steps to remove the booklet finisher upper right shield.

1. Remove two screws at the front of the booklet maker (callout 1)

Figure 5-1578 Remove two screws at the front of the booklet maker

1956 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

2. Remove two screws(callout 1) and one screw(callout 2) at the back of the booklet maker and then
remove the board cover.

Figure 5-1579 Remove the board cover

3. Remove two screws at the back of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1580 Remove two screws

4. Disconnect one connector at the front of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1581 Disconnect one connector

Remove the booklet finisher upper right shield 1957

 5. Disconnect one connector at the right of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1582 Disconnect one connector

9. Remove the booklet tamper and fold unit

Follow these steps to remove the booklet tamper and fold unit.

1. Remove two screws at the left of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1583 Remove two screws at the left of the booklet maker

1958 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

2. Remove three screws at the right of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1584 Remove three screws at the right of the booklet maker

3. Remove two screws at the front of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1585 Remove two screws at the front of the booklet maker

4. Remove two screws at the back of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1586 Remove two screws at the back of the booklet maker

Remove the booklet tamper and fold unit 1959

 5. Disconnect one connector at the right of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1587 Disconnect one connector

10. Remove the booklet tamper unit

Follow these steps to remove the booklet tamper unit.

1. Remove two screws and disconnect one connector (callout 2)

Figure 5-1588 Remove two screws

2. Booklet tamper unit (callout 1)

Figure 5-1589 Booklet tamper unit

11. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1960 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Booklet presser home sensor (S37)

Learn how to remove and replace the tray booklet tamper home sensor.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the booklet tamper home sensor on the
finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Removal and replacement: Booklet presser home sensor (S37) 1961

 Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-155 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Booklet tamper home sensor

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

■ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove
three sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the
cover away from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

1962 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-1590 Remove the right upper cover

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and
then remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-1591 Remove six screws

Remove the top cover (finisher) 1963

 2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two
machine screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-1592 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1593 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

1964 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw
caps and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-1594 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Figure 5-1595 Remove the rear cover

4. Remove the booklet maker

Follow these steps to remove the booklet maker.

Remove the booklet maker 1965

 1. Slide the booklet maker away from the finisher.

Figure 5-1596 Slide the booklet maker away from the finisher

2. At the Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove one screw (callout 2).

Figure 5-1597 Disconnect one connector and remove one screw

1966 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

3. Release the metal bracket through the opening in the sheet metal.

Figure 5-1598 Release the metal bracket

4. Remove one star-washer screw (callout 1), and then release the alignment pin (callout 2) on the right
side of the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1599 Remove one screw

Remove the booklet maker 1967

 5. Slide the right rail toward the finisher.

Figure 5-1600 Slide the right rail

6. Remove one star-washer screw (callout 1) on the left side of the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1601 Remove one screw

1968 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

7. Lift the booklet maker up on the left side while squeezing the right rail away from the finisher
slightly to clear the sheet metal. Remove the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1602 Remove the booklet maker

8. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation
instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

Special installation instructions: booklet maker

When installing the booklet maker, position the hooks on the rail under the slots on the booklet
maker.

Figure 5-1603 Position the hooks

Remove the booklet maker 1969

 9. When installed correctly, the arrow on the front of the booklet maker aligns with the arrow on the
finisher rail.

Figure 5-1604 Align arrows

10. When installed correctly, the arrow on the back of the booklet maker aligns with the arrow on the
finisher rail.

Figure 5-1605 Align arrows

1970 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 11. Extend the right rail away from the finisher and position it in the booklet maker slot.

Figure 5-1606 Extend the right rail

5. Remove the booklet front cover

Follow these steps to remove the booklet front cover.

■ Slide the booklet maker slightly away from the finisher (callout 1). Remove one screw (callout 2), and
then slide the green knob away from the booklet maker to remove it (callout 3). Remove four screws
(callout 4), and then remove the booklet front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Figure 5-1607 Remove five screws and the cover

6. Remove the booklet right lower shield

Follow these steps to remove the booklet right lower shield.

Remove the booklet front cover 1971

 1. Remove two screws at the front of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1608 Remove two screws

2. Remove two screws at the back of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1609 Remove two screws

1972 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 3. Slide the booklet maker out of the finisher (callout 1), and then rotate the top of the right lower shield
(callout 2) away from the booklet maker to remove it.

Figure 5-1610 Remove the right lower shield

7. Remove the booklet maker middle right shield

Follow these steps to remove the booklet maker middle right shield.

1. Remove two screws at the front of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1611 Remove two screws at the front of the booklet maker

Remove the booklet maker middle right shield 1973

 2. Remove two screws at the back of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1612 Remove two screws at the back of the booklet maker

8. Remove the booklet finisher upper right shield

Follow these steps to remove the booklet finisher upper right shield.

1. Remove two screws at the front of the booklet maker (callout 1)

Figure 5-1613 Remove two screws at the front of the booklet maker

1974 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

2. Remove two screws(callout 1) and one screw(callout 2) at the back of the booklet maker and then
remove the board cover.

Figure 5-1614 Remove the board cover

3. Remove two screws at the back of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1615 Remove two screws

4. Disconnect one connector at the front of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1616 Disconnect one connector

Remove the booklet finisher upper right shield 1975

 5. Disconnect one connector at the right of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1617 Disconnect one connector

9. Remove the booklet tamper and fold unit

Follow these steps to remove the booklet tamper and fold unit.

1. Remove two screws at the left of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1618 Remove two screws at the left of the booklet maker

1976 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

2. Remove three screws at the right of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1619 Remove three screws at the right of the booklet maker

3. Remove two screws at the front of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1620 Remove two screws at the front of the booklet maker

4. Remove two screws at the back of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1621 Remove two screws at the back of the booklet maker

Remove the booklet tamper and fold unit 1977

 5. Disconnect one connector at the right of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1622 Disconnect one connector

10. Remove the booklet tamper unit

Follow these steps to remove the booklet tamper unit.

1. Remove two screws and disconnect one connector (callout 2)

Figure 5-1623 Remove two screws

2. Booklet tamper unit (callout 1)

Figure 5-1624 Booklet tamper unit

11. Remove the booklet tamper home sensor (S38)

Follow these steps to remove the booklet tamper home sensor (S38).

1978 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 1. Remove four screws (callout 1) and unplug one connector (callout 2)

Figure 5-1625 Remove four screws

2. Use a tweezer to remove the booklet tamper home sensor (S38, callout 1)

Figure 5-1626 Remove booklet tamper home sensor

12. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 1979

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Booklet tamper motor (M23)

Learn how to remove and replace the tray booklet tamper motor.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the booklet tamper motor on the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-156 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-01155A Booklet tamper motor

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

1980 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 ○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

■ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove
three sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the
cover away from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1627 Remove the right upper cover

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

Remove the right upper cover (finisher) 1981

 1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and
then remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-1628 Remove six screws

2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two
machine screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-1629 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

1982 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-1630 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw
caps and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-1631 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Remove the rear cover (finisher) 1983

 Figure 5-1632 Remove the rear cover

4. Remove the booklet maker

Follow these steps to remove the booklet maker.

1. Slide the booklet maker away from the finisher.

Figure 5-1633 Slide the booklet maker away from the finisher

1984 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

2. At the Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove one screw (callout 2).

Figure 5-1634 Disconnect one connector and remove one screw

3. Release the metal bracket through the opening in the sheet metal.

Figure 5-1635 Release the metal bracket

Remove the booklet maker 1985

 4. Remove one star-washer screw (callout 1), and then release the alignment pin (callout 2) on the right
side of the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1636 Remove one screw

5. Slide the right rail toward the finisher.

Figure 5-1637 Slide the right rail

1986 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

6. Remove one star-washer screw (callout 1) on the left side of the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1638 Remove one screw

7. Lift the booklet maker up on the left side while squeezing the right rail away from the finisher
slightly to clear the sheet metal. Remove the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1639 Remove the booklet maker

8. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation
instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

Special installation instructions: booklet maker

When installing the booklet maker, position the hooks on the rail under the slots on the booklet
maker.

Remove the booklet maker 1987

 Figure 5-1640 Position the hooks

9. When installed correctly, the arrow on the front of the booklet maker aligns with the arrow on the
finisher rail.

Figure 5-1641 Align arrows

1988 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 10. When installed correctly, the arrow on the back of the booklet maker aligns with the arrow on the
finisher rail.

Figure 5-1642 Align arrows

11. Extend the right rail away from the finisher and position it in the booklet maker slot.

Figure 5-1643 Extend the right rail

5. Remove the booklet front cover

Follow these steps to remove the booklet front cover.

■ Slide the booklet maker slightly away from the finisher (callout 1). Remove one screw (callout 2), and
then slide the green knob away from the booklet maker to remove it (callout 3). Remove four screws
(callout 4), and then remove the booklet front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Remove the booklet front cover 1989

 Figure 5-1644 Remove five screws and the cover

6. Remove the booklet right lower shield

Follow these steps to remove the booklet right lower shield.

1. Remove two screws at the front of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1645 Remove two screws

1990 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 2. Remove two screws at the back of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1646 Remove two screws

3. Slide the booklet maker out of the finisher (callout 1), and then rotate the top of the right lower shield
(callout 2) away from the booklet maker to remove it.

Figure 5-1647 Remove the right lower shield

7. Remove the booklet maker middle right shield

Follow these steps to remove the booklet maker middle right shield.

Remove the booklet maker middle right shield 1991

 1. Remove two screws at the front of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1648 Remove two screws at the front of the booklet maker

2. Remove two screws at the back of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1649 Remove two screws at the back of the booklet maker

8. Remove the booklet finisher upper right shield

Follow these steps to remove the booklet finisher upper right shield.

1992 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Remove two screws at the front of the booklet maker (callout 1)

Figure 5-1650 Remove two screws at the front of the booklet maker

2. Remove two screws(callout 1) and one screw(callout 2) at the back of the booklet maker and then
remove the board cover.

Figure 5-1651 Remove the board cover

3. Remove two screws at the back of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1652 Remove two screws

Remove the booklet finisher upper right shield 1993

 4. Disconnect one connector at the front of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1653 Disconnect one connector

5. Disconnect one connector at the right of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1654 Disconnect one connector

9. Remove the booklet tamper and fold unit

Follow these steps to remove the booklet tamper and fold unit.

1994 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Remove two screws at the left of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1655 Remove two screws at the left of the booklet maker

2. Remove three screws at the right of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1656 Remove three screws at the right of the booklet maker

3. Remove two screws at the front of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1657 Remove two screws at the front of the booklet maker

Remove the booklet tamper and fold unit 1995

 4. Remove two screws at the back of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1658 Remove two screws at the back of the booklet maker

5. Disconnect one connector at the right of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1659 Disconnect one connector

10. Remove the booklet tamper unit

Follow these steps to remove the booklet tamper unit.

1. Remove two screws and disconnect one connector (callout 2)

Figure 5-1660 Remove two screws

1996 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 2. Booklet tamper unit (callout 1)

Figure 5-1661 Booklet tamper unit

11. Remove the booklet tamper motor (M23)

Follow these steps to remove the booklet tamper motor (M23).

1. Remove two screws (callout 1) and unplug one connector (callout 2)

Figure 5-1662 Remove two screws and unplug one connector

Remove the booklet tamper motor (M23) 1997

 2. Remove the booklet tamper motor (M23, callout 1)

Figure 5-1663 Remove the booklet tamper motor

12. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Booklet stapler unit

1998 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Removal and replacement: Booklet stapler unit
Learn how to remove and replace the tray booklet stapler unit.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the booklet stapler unit on the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-157 Part information

Part number Part description

JC81-08274B Booklet stapler unit

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

Removal and replacement: Booklet stapler unit 1999

 1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)
Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

■ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove
three sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the
cover away from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1664 Remove the right upper cover

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and
then remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-1665 Remove six screws

2000 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two
machine screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-1666 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1667 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

Remove the rear cover (finisher) 2001

 1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw
caps and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-1668 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Figure 5-1669 Remove the rear cover

4. Remove the booklet maker

Follow these steps to remove the booklet maker.

2002 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Slide the booklet maker away from the finisher.

Figure 5-1670 Slide the booklet maker away from the finisher

2. At the Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove one screw (callout 2).

Figure 5-1671 Disconnect one connector and remove one screw

Remove the booklet maker 2003

 3. Release the metal bracket through the opening in the sheet metal.

Figure 5-1672 Release the metal bracket

4. Remove one star-washer screw (callout 1), and then release the alignment pin (callout 2) on the right
side of the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1673 Remove one screw

2004 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

5. Slide the right rail toward the finisher.

Figure 5-1674 Slide the right rail

6. Remove one star-washer screw (callout 1) on the left side of the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1675 Remove one screw

Remove the booklet maker 2005

 7. Lift the booklet maker up on the left side while squeezing the right rail away from the finisher
slightly to clear the sheet metal. Remove the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1676 Remove the booklet maker

8. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation
instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

Special installation instructions: booklet maker

When installing the booklet maker, position the hooks on the rail under the slots on the booklet
maker.

Figure 5-1677 Position the hooks

2006 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

9. When installed correctly, the arrow on the front of the booklet maker aligns with the arrow on the
finisher rail.

Figure 5-1678 Align arrows

10. When installed correctly, the arrow on the back of the booklet maker aligns with the arrow on the
finisher rail.

Figure 5-1679 Align arrows

Remove the booklet maker 2007

 11. Extend the right rail away from the finisher and position it in the booklet maker slot.

Figure 5-1680 Extend the right rail

5. Remove the booklet front cover

Follow these steps to remove the booklet front cover.

■ Slide the booklet maker slightly away from the finisher (callout 1). Remove one screw (callout 2), and
then slide the green knob away from the booklet maker to remove it (callout 3). Remove four screws
(callout 4), and then remove the booklet front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Figure 5-1681 Remove five screws and the cover

6. Remove the Booklet c-fold blade unit

Follow these steps to remove the Booklet c-fold blade unit.

2008 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Remove two screws(callout 1) at the left of the booklet maker

Figure 5-1682 Remove two screws at the left of the booklet maker

2. Remove three screws(callout 1) at the front of the booklet maker to remove motor unit(callout 2) to
reach out to the screw.

Figure 5-1683 Remove three screws to remove motor unit to reach out to the screw

Remove the Booklet c-fold blade unit 2009

 3. Remove one screw(callout 1) at the front of the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1684 Remove one screw at the front of the booklet maker

4. Remove one screw(callout 1) at the rear of the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1685 Remove one screw at the rear of the booklet maker

2010 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 5. Take the booklet c-fold blade unit out from the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1686 Take the booklet c-fold blade unit out from the booklet maker

7. Remove the booklet stapler unit

Follow these steps to remove the booklet stapler unit.

1. Remove two screws (callout 1) at the front of the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1687 Remove two screws

Remove the booklet stapler unit 2011

 2. Remove two screws (callout 1) at the rear of the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1688 Remove two screws

3. Remove the metal frame (callout 1)

Figure 5-1689 Remove the metal frame

4. Remove two screws (callout 1) at the rear of the booklet maker to remove the board cover (callout 2)

Figure 5-1690 Remove the board cover

2012 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

5. Remove four screws (callout 1) and unplug the connector (callout 2) at the rear of the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1691 Remove four screws and unplug the connector

6. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-1692 Remove one screw

Remove the booklet stapler unit 2013

 7. Remove the connector cover (callout 1).

Figure 5-1693 Remove the connector cover

8. Remove one screw(callout 1) at the front of the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1694 Remove one screw

9. Remove one screw(callout 1) at the rear of the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1695 Remove one screw

2014 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

10. Remove two screws (callout 1) at the left of the booklet maker and pull the metal bracket (callout 2)
out each side.

Figure 5-1696 Remove two screws

11. Remove one screw(callout 1) and remove one screw(callout 2) (Remove two screws each side)

Figure 5-1697 Remove two screws each side

12. Remove two screws (callout 1) and remove the black cover (callout 2) and pull the stapler unit
(callout 3) out

Figure 5-1698 Pull the stapler unit

Remove the booklet stapler unit 2015

 8. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Booklet fold unit

Removal and replacement: Booklet blade

Learn how to remove and replace the tray booklet blade.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the booklet blade on the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

2016 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 ○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-158 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-01163A Booklet blade

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

■ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove
three sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the
cover away from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the right upper cover (finisher) 2017

 Figure 5-1699 Remove the right upper cover

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and
then remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-1700 Remove six screws

2018 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two
machine screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-1701 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1702 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

Remove the rear cover (finisher) 2019

 1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw
caps and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-1703 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Figure 5-1704 Remove the rear cover

4. Remove the booklet maker

Follow these steps to remove the booklet maker.

2020 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Slide the booklet maker away from the finisher.

Figure 5-1705 Slide the booklet maker away from the finisher

2. At the Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove one screw (callout 2).

Figure 5-1706 Disconnect one connector and remove one screw

Remove the booklet maker 2021

 3. Release the metal bracket through the opening in the sheet metal.

Figure 5-1707 Release the metal bracket

4. Remove one star-washer screw (callout 1), and then release the alignment pin (callout 2) on the right
side of the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1708 Remove one screw

2022 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

5. Slide the right rail toward the finisher.

Figure 5-1709 Slide the right rail

6. Remove one star-washer screw (callout 1) on the left side of the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1710 Remove one screw

Remove the booklet maker 2023

 7. Lift the booklet maker up on the left side while squeezing the right rail away from the finisher
slightly to clear the sheet metal. Remove the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1711 Remove the booklet maker

8. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation
instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

Special installation instructions: booklet maker

When installing the booklet maker, position the hooks on the rail under the slots on the booklet
maker.

Figure 5-1712 Position the hooks

2024 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

9. When installed correctly, the arrow on the front of the booklet maker aligns with the arrow on the
finisher rail.

Figure 5-1713 Align arrows

10. When installed correctly, the arrow on the back of the booklet maker aligns with the arrow on the
finisher rail.

Figure 5-1714 Align arrows

Remove the booklet maker 2025

 11. Extend the right rail away from the finisher and position it in the booklet maker slot.

Figure 5-1715 Extend the right rail

5. Remove the booklet front cover

Follow these steps to remove the booklet front cover.

■ Slide the booklet maker slightly away from the finisher (callout 1). Remove one screw (callout 2), and
then slide the green knob away from the booklet maker to remove it (callout 3). Remove four screws
(callout 4), and then remove the booklet front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Figure 5-1716 Remove five screws and the cover

6. Remove the booklet right lower shield

Follow these steps to remove the booklet right lower shield.

2026 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Remove two screws at the front of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1717 Remove two screws

2. Remove two screws at the back of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1718 Remove two screws

Remove the booklet right lower shield 2027

 3. Slide the booklet maker out of the finisher (callout 1), and then rotate the top of the right lower shield
(callout 2) away from the booklet maker to remove it.

Figure 5-1719 Remove the right lower shield

7. Remove the booklet maker middle right shield

Follow these steps to remove the booklet maker middle right shield.

1. Remove two screws at the front of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1720 Remove two screws at the front of the booklet maker

2028 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 2. Remove two screws at the back of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1721 Remove two screws at the back of the booklet maker

8. Remove the booklet finisher upper right shield

Follow these steps to remove the booklet finisher upper right shield.

1. Remove two screws at the front of the booklet maker (callout 1)

Figure 5-1722 Remove two screws at the front of the booklet maker

Remove the booklet finisher upper right shield 2029

 2. Remove two screws(callout 1) and one screw(callout 2) at the back of the booklet maker and then
remove the board cover.

Figure 5-1723 Remove the board cover

3. Remove two screws at the back of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1724 Remove two screws

4. Disconnect one connector at the front of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1725 Disconnect one connector

2030 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 5. Disconnect one connector at the right of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1726 Disconnect one connector

9. Remove the booklet tamper and fold unit

Follow these steps to remove the booklet tamper and fold unit.

1. Remove two screws at the left of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1727 Remove two screws at the left of the booklet maker

Remove the booklet tamper and fold unit 2031

 2. Remove three screws at the right of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1728 Remove three screws at the right of the booklet maker

3. Remove two screws at the front of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1729 Remove two screws at the front of the booklet maker

4. Remove two screws at the back of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1730 Remove two screws at the back of the booklet maker

2032 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 5. Disconnect one connector at the right of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1731 Disconnect one connector

10. Remove the booklet blade

Follow these steps to remove the booklet blade.

1. Remove two screws (callout 1) and disconnect one connector (callout 2)

Figure 5-1732 Remove two screws and disconnect one connector

2. Remove 7 screws (callout 1) and remove the booklet blade (callout 2)

Figure 5-1733 Remove 7 screws and remove the booklet blade

NOTE: Be sure to make the scale when you reassemble with the new blade

Remove the booklet blade 2033

 11. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Booklet blade home sensor (S45)

Learn how to remove and replace the tray booklet blade home sensor.

2034 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the booklet blade home sensor on the
finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-159 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Booklet blade home sensor

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

Remove the right upper cover (finisher) 2035

 ■ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove
three sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the
cover away from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1734 Remove the right upper cover

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and
then remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-1735 Remove six screws

2036 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two
machine screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-1736 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1737 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

Remove the rear cover (finisher) 2037

 1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw
caps and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-1738 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Figure 5-1739 Remove the rear cover

4. Remove the booklet maker

Follow these steps to remove the booklet maker.

2038 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Slide the booklet maker away from the finisher.

Figure 5-1740 Slide the booklet maker away from the finisher

2. At the Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove one screw (callout 2).

Figure 5-1741 Disconnect one connector and remove one screw

Remove the booklet maker 2039

 3. Release the metal bracket through the opening in the sheet metal.

Figure 5-1742 Release the metal bracket

4. Remove one star-washer screw (callout 1), and then release the alignment pin (callout 2) on the right
side of the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1743 Remove one screw

2040 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

5. Slide the right rail toward the finisher.

Figure 5-1744 Slide the right rail

6. Remove one star-washer screw (callout 1) on the left side of the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1745 Remove one screw

Remove the booklet maker 2041

 7. Lift the booklet maker up on the left side while squeezing the right rail away from the finisher
slightly to clear the sheet metal. Remove the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1746 Remove the booklet maker

8. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation
instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

Special installation instructions: booklet maker

When installing the booklet maker, position the hooks on the rail under the slots on the booklet
maker.

Figure 5-1747 Position the hooks

2042 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

9. When installed correctly, the arrow on the front of the booklet maker aligns with the arrow on the
finisher rail.

Figure 5-1748 Align arrows

10. When installed correctly, the arrow on the back of the booklet maker aligns with the arrow on the
finisher rail.

Figure 5-1749 Align arrows

Remove the booklet maker 2043

 11. Extend the right rail away from the finisher and position it in the booklet maker slot.

Figure 5-1750 Extend the right rail

5. Remove the booklet front cover

Follow these steps to remove the booklet front cover.

■ Slide the booklet maker slightly away from the finisher (callout 1). Remove one screw (callout 2), and
then slide the green knob away from the booklet maker to remove it (callout 3). Remove four screws
(callout 4), and then remove the booklet front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Figure 5-1751 Remove five screws and the cover

6. Remove the booklet right lower shield

Follow these steps to remove the booklet right lower shield.

2044 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Remove two screws at the front of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1752 Remove two screws

2. Remove two screws at the back of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1753 Remove two screws

Remove the booklet right lower shield 2045

 3. Slide the booklet maker out of the finisher (callout 1), and then rotate the top of the right lower shield
(callout 2) away from the booklet maker to remove it.

Figure 5-1754 Remove the right lower shield

7. Remove the booklet maker middle right shield

Follow these steps to remove the booklet maker middle right shield.

1. Remove two screws at the front of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1755 Remove two screws at the front of the booklet maker

2046 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 2. Remove two screws at the back of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1756 Remove two screws at the back of the booklet maker

8. Remove the booklet finisher upper right shield

Follow these steps to remove the booklet finisher upper right shield.

1. Remove two screws at the front of the booklet maker (callout 1)

Figure 5-1757 Remove two screws at the front of the booklet maker

Remove the booklet finisher upper right shield 2047

 2. Remove two screws(callout 1) and one screw(callout 2) at the back of the booklet maker and then
remove the board cover.

Figure 5-1758 Remove the board cover

3. Remove two screws at the back of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1759 Remove two screws

4. Disconnect one connector at the front of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1760 Disconnect one connector

2048 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 5. Disconnect one connector at the right of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1761 Disconnect one connector

9. Remove the booklet tamper and fold unit

Follow these steps to remove the booklet tamper and fold unit.

1. Remove two screws at the left of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1762 Remove two screws at the left of the booklet maker

Remove the booklet tamper and fold unit 2049

 2. Remove three screws at the right of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1763 Remove three screws at the right of the booklet maker

3. Remove two screws at the front of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1764 Remove two screws at the front of the booklet maker

4. Remove two screws at the back of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1765 Remove two screws at the back of the booklet maker

2050 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 5. Disconnect one connector at the right of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1766 Disconnect one connector

10. Remove the booklet blade home sensor (S45)

Follow these steps to remove the booklet blade home sensor (S45).

■ Disconnect one connector(callout 1) and remove the Booklet blade home sensor (S45, callout 2)

Figure 5-1767 Disconnect one connector and remove the Booklet blade home sensor

11. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

Remove the booklet blade home sensor (S45) 2051

 NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Booklet blade motor (M22)

Learn how to remove and replace the booklet blade motor.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the booklet blade motor on the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-160 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01435A Booklet blade motor assembly

JC31-00144A Booklet blade motor

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

2052 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 ○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the booklet front cover

Follow these steps to remove the booklet front cover.

■ Slide the booklet maker slightly away from the finisher (callout 1). Remove one screw (callout 2), and
then slide the green knob away from the booklet maker to remove it (callout 3). Remove four screws
(callout 4), and then remove the booklet front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Figure 5-1768 Remove five screws and the cover

2. Remove the booklet right lower shield

Follow these steps to remove the booklet right lower shield.

Remove the booklet front cover 2053

 1. Remove two screws at the front of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1769 Remove two screws

2. Remove two screws at the back of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1770 Remove two screws

2054 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 3. Slide the booklet maker out of the finisher (callout 1), and then rotate the top of the right lower shield
(callout 2) away from the booklet maker to remove it.

Figure 5-1771 Remove the right lower shield

3. Remove the booklet blade motor (M22)

Follow these steps to remove the booklet blade motor (M22).

■ Disconnect one connector (callout 1), remove four screws (callout 2), and then remove the booklet
blade motor.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1772 Remove the booklet blade motor

4. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

Remove the booklet blade motor (M22) 2055

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Booklet fold motor (M21)

Learn how to remove and replace the booklet fold motor.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the booklet fold motor on the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

2056 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-161 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01436A Booklet fold motor assembly

JC31-00144A Booklet fold motor

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

■ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove
three sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the
cover away from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the right upper cover (finisher) 2057

 Figure 5-1773 Remove the right upper cover

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and
then remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-1774 Remove six screws

2058 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two
machine screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-1775 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1776 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

Remove the rear cover (finisher) 2059

 1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw
caps and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-1777 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Figure 5-1778 Remove the rear cover

4. Remove the booklet fold motor (M21)

Follow these steps to remove the booklet fold motor (M21).

2060 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 ■ Disconnect one connector (callout 1), remove four screws (callout 2), and then remove the folding
roller motor.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1779 Remove the booklet fold motor

5. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2061

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Booklet c-fold blade

Learn how to remove and replace the booklet c-fold blade.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the booklet c-fold blade on the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-162 Part information

Part number Part description

JC61-07366A Booklet c-fold blade

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

2062 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 ○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

■ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove
three sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the
cover away from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1780 Remove the right upper cover

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

Remove the right upper cover (finisher) 2063

 1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and
then remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-1781 Remove six screws

2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two
machine screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-1782 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

2064 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-1783 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw
caps and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-1784 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Remove the rear cover (finisher) 2065

 Figure 5-1785 Remove the rear cover

4. Remove the booklet maker

Follow these steps to remove the booklet maker.

1. Slide the booklet maker away from the finisher.

Figure 5-1786 Slide the booklet maker away from the finisher

2066 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

2. At the Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove one screw (callout 2).

Figure 5-1787 Disconnect one connector and remove one screw

3. Release the metal bracket through the opening in the sheet metal.

Figure 5-1788 Release the metal bracket

Remove the booklet maker 2067

 4. Remove one star-washer screw (callout 1), and then release the alignment pin (callout 2) on the right
side of the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1789 Remove one screw

5. Slide the right rail toward the finisher.

Figure 5-1790 Slide the right rail

2068 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

6. Remove one star-washer screw (callout 1) on the left side of the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1791 Remove one screw

7. Lift the booklet maker up on the left side while squeezing the right rail away from the finisher
slightly to clear the sheet metal. Remove the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1792 Remove the booklet maker

8. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation
instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

Special installation instructions: booklet maker

When installing the booklet maker, position the hooks on the rail under the slots on the booklet
maker.

Remove the booklet maker 2069

 Figure 5-1793 Position the hooks

9. When installed correctly, the arrow on the front of the booklet maker aligns with the arrow on the
finisher rail.

Figure 5-1794 Align arrows

2070 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 10. When installed correctly, the arrow on the back of the booklet maker aligns with the arrow on the
finisher rail.

Figure 5-1795 Align arrows

11. Extend the right rail away from the finisher and position it in the booklet maker slot.

Figure 5-1796 Extend the right rail

5. Remove the booklet front cover

Follow these steps to remove the booklet front cover.

■ Slide the booklet maker slightly away from the finisher (callout 1). Remove one screw (callout 2), and
then slide the green knob away from the booklet maker to remove it (callout 3). Remove four screws
(callout 4), and then remove the booklet front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Remove the booklet front cover 2071

 Figure 5-1797 Remove five screws and the cover

6. Remove the Booklet c-fold blade unit

Follow these steps to remove the Booklet c-fold blade unit.

1. Remove two screws(callout 1) at the left of the booklet maker

Figure 5-1798 Remove two screws at the left of the booklet maker

2072 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

2. Remove three screws(callout 1) at the front of the booklet maker to remove motor unit(callout 2) to
reach out to the screw.

Figure 5-1799 Remove three screws to remove motor unit to reach out to the screw

3. Remove one screw(callout 1) at the front of the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1800 Remove one screw at the front of the booklet maker

Remove the Booklet c-fold blade unit 2073

 4. Remove one screw(callout 1) at the rear of the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1801 Remove one screw at the rear of the booklet maker

5. Take the booklet c-fold blade unit out from the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1802 Take the booklet c-fold blade unit out from the booklet maker

7. Remove the Booklet c-fold blade

Follow these steps to remove the Booklet c-fold blade.

2074 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

■ Remove four screws(callout 1) to remove the booklet c-fold blade

Figure 5-1803 Remove four screws to remove the booklet c-fold blade

NOTE:

● Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

● Make sure the metal located on the home position when you reassemble the unit.

You can make it by rotating the gear to the left direction.

TIP: Rotate the white gear (callout 1) to the left direction to make the metal (callout 2) to the home
postion.

Remove the Booklet c-fold blade 2075

 8. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

2076 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Removal and replacement: Booklet c-fold blade home sensor (S39)
Learn how to remove and replace the booklet c-fold blade home sensor.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the booklet c-fold blade home sensor on
the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-163 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Booklet c-fold blade home sensor

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

Removal and replacement: Booklet c-fold blade home sensor (S39) 2077
 1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)
Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

■ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove
three sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the
cover away from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1804 Remove the right upper cover

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and
then remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-1805 Remove six screws

2078 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two
machine screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-1806 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1807 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

Remove the rear cover (finisher) 2079

 1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw
caps and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-1808 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Figure 5-1809 Remove the rear cover

4. Remove the booklet maker

Follow these steps to remove the booklet maker.

2080 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Slide the booklet maker away from the finisher.

Figure 5-1810 Slide the booklet maker away from the finisher

2. At the Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove one screw (callout 2).

Figure 5-1811 Disconnect one connector and remove one screw

Remove the booklet maker 2081

 3. Release the metal bracket through the opening in the sheet metal.

Figure 5-1812 Release the metal bracket

4. Remove one star-washer screw (callout 1), and then release the alignment pin (callout 2) on the right
side of the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1813 Remove one screw

2082 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

5. Slide the right rail toward the finisher.

Figure 5-1814 Slide the right rail

6. Remove one star-washer screw (callout 1) on the left side of the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1815 Remove one screw

Remove the booklet maker 2083

 7. Lift the booklet maker up on the left side while squeezing the right rail away from the finisher
slightly to clear the sheet metal. Remove the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1816 Remove the booklet maker

8. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation
instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

Special installation instructions: booklet maker

When installing the booklet maker, position the hooks on the rail under the slots on the booklet
maker.

Figure 5-1817 Position the hooks

2084 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

9. When installed correctly, the arrow on the front of the booklet maker aligns with the arrow on the
finisher rail.

Figure 5-1818 Align arrows

10. When installed correctly, the arrow on the back of the booklet maker aligns with the arrow on the
finisher rail.

Figure 5-1819 Align arrows

Remove the booklet maker 2085

 11. Extend the right rail away from the finisher and position it in the booklet maker slot.

Figure 5-1820 Extend the right rail

5. Remove the booklet front cover

Follow these steps to remove the booklet front cover.

■ Slide the booklet maker slightly away from the finisher (callout 1). Remove one screw (callout 2), and
then slide the green knob away from the booklet maker to remove it (callout 3). Remove four screws
(callout 4), and then remove the booklet front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Figure 5-1821 Remove five screws and the cover

6. Remove the Booklet c-fold blade unit

Follow these steps to remove the Booklet c-fold blade unit.

2086 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Remove two screws(callout 1) at the left of the booklet maker

Figure 5-1822 Remove two screws at the left of the booklet maker

2. Remove three screws(callout 1) at the front of the booklet maker to remove motor unit(callout 2) to
reach out to the screw.

Figure 5-1823 Remove three screws to remove motor unit to reach out to the screw

Remove the Booklet c-fold blade unit 2087

 3. Remove one screw(callout 1) at the front of the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1824 Remove one screw at the front of the booklet maker

4. Remove one screw(callout 1) at the rear of the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1825 Remove one screw at the rear of the booklet maker

2088 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 5. Take the booklet c-fold blade unit out from the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1826 Take the booklet c-fold blade unit out from the booklet maker

7. Remove the booklet c-fold blade home sensor (S39)

Follow these steps to remove the booklet c-fold blade home sensor (S39).

1. Remove three screws(callout 1) at the front of the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1827 Remove three screws at the front of the booklet maker

Remove the booklet c-fold blade home sensor (S39) 2089

 2. Take motor unit (callout 1) out from the booklet maker and unplug one connector (callout 2)

Figure 5-1828 Take motor unit out from the booklet maker and unplug one connector

3. Remove the booklet c-fold blade home sensor (S39, callout 1)

Figure 5-1829 Remove the booklet c-fold blade home sensor

8. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch

2090 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Booklet c-fold blade motor (M17)

Learn how to remove and replace the booklet c-fold blade motor.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the booklet c-fold blade motor on the
finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com..

Table 5-164 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-01154A Booklet c-fold blade motor

JC90-01396A Booklet c-fold blade motor assembly

Removal and replacement: Booklet c-fold blade motor (M17) 2091

 Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the booklet front cover

Follow these steps to remove the booklet front cover.

■ Slide the booklet maker slightly away from the finisher (callout 1). Remove one screw (callout 2), and
then slide the green knob away from the booklet maker to remove it (callout 3). Remove four screws
(callout 4), and then remove the booklet front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Figure 5-1830 Remove five screws and the cover

2. Remove the booklet c-fold blade motor (M17)

Follow these steps to remove the booklet c-fold blade motor (M17).

2092 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Note the position of the alignment arrows on the upper white gear and the lower motor (callout 1).
These arrows must be aligned in these positions when the motor is reinstalled.

Figure 5-1831 Check arrow alignment

2. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1).

Figure 5-1832 Disconnect two connectors

Remove the booklet c-fold blade motor (M17) 2093

 3. Remove four screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-1833 Remove four screws (callout 1).

4. Remove one e-clip (callout 1) on top of the white gear. Remove the white gear (callout 2) and release
the belt (callout 3).

Figure 5-1834 Remove one e-clip, gear, and belt

5. Remove the bracket and motor from the booklet maker.

CAUTION: Do not pull on the shaft (callout 1) while removing the bracket and motor. The shaft
might become dislodged at the other end. If the shaft becomes dislodged, remove the booklet
maker PCA shield and PCA bracket to reinstall the shaft.

2094 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-1835 Remove the bracket and motor

6. Remove two screws (callout 1), and then remove the C fold motor.

Figure 5-1836 Remove two screws

7. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation
instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

Special installation instructions: C fold motor

Remove the booklet c-fold blade motor (M17) 2095

 a. When installing the motor, install one screw (callout 1) to hold the bracket in place while
installing the gear and belt.

b. Check the position of the alignment arrows on the upper white gear and the lower motor
(callout 1).

2096 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 c. If the arrows are not aligned, slightly pull up on the belt to create some slack around the gear
(callout 1), and then rotate the gear (callout 2) until the arrows align.

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2097

 Booklet diverter unit

Removal and replacement: Booklet diverter

Learn how to remove and replace the booklet diverter.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the booklet diverter on the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com..

Table 5-165 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01398A Booklet diverter

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

2098 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Post service test
Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

■ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove
three sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the
cover away from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1837 Remove the right upper cover

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

Remove the right upper cover (finisher) 2099

 1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and
then remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-1838 Remove six screws

2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two
machine screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-1839 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

2100 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-1840 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw
caps and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-1841 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Remove the rear cover (finisher) 2101

 Figure 5-1842 Remove the rear cover

4. Remove the booklet maker

Follow these steps to remove the booklet maker.

1. Slide the booklet maker away from the finisher.

Figure 5-1843 Slide the booklet maker away from the finisher

2102 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

2. At the Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove one screw (callout 2).

Figure 5-1844 Disconnect one connector and remove one screw

3. Release the metal bracket through the opening in the sheet metal.

Figure 5-1845 Release the metal bracket

Remove the booklet maker 2103

 4. Remove one star-washer screw (callout 1), and then release the alignment pin (callout 2) on the right
side of the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1846 Remove one screw

5. Slide the right rail toward the finisher.

Figure 5-1847 Slide the right rail

2104 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

6. Remove one star-washer screw (callout 1) on the left side of the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1848 Remove one screw

7. Lift the booklet maker up on the left side while squeezing the right rail away from the finisher
slightly to clear the sheet metal. Remove the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1849 Remove the booklet maker

8. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation
instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

Special installation instructions: booklet maker

When installing the booklet maker, position the hooks on the rail under the slots on the booklet
maker.

Remove the booklet maker 2105

 Figure 5-1850 Position the hooks

9. When installed correctly, the arrow on the front of the booklet maker aligns with the arrow on the
finisher rail.

Figure 5-1851 Align arrows

2106 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 10. When installed correctly, the arrow on the back of the booklet maker aligns with the arrow on the
finisher rail.

Figure 5-1852 Align arrows

11. Extend the right rail away from the finisher and position it in the booklet maker slot.

Figure 5-1853 Extend the right rail

5. Remove the booklet front cover

Follow these steps to remove the booklet front cover.

■ Slide the booklet maker slightly away from the finisher (callout 1). Remove one screw (callout 2), and
then slide the green knob away from the booklet maker to remove it (callout 3). Remove four screws
(callout 4), and then remove the booklet front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Remove the booklet front cover 2107

 Figure 5-1854 Remove five screws and the cover

6. Remove the Booklet c-fold blade unit

Follow these steps to remove the Booklet c-fold blade unit.

1. Remove two screws(callout 1) at the left of the booklet maker

Figure 5-1855 Remove two screws at the left of the booklet maker

2108 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

2. Remove three screws(callout 1) at the front of the booklet maker to remove motor unit(callout 2) to
reach out to the screw.

Figure 5-1856 Remove three screws to remove motor unit to reach out to the screw

3. Remove one screw(callout 1) at the front of the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1857 Remove one screw at the front of the booklet maker

Remove the Booklet c-fold blade unit 2109

 4. Remove one screw(callout 1) at the rear of the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1858 Remove one screw at the rear of the booklet maker

5. Take the booklet c-fold blade unit out from the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1859 Take the booklet c-fold blade unit out from the booklet maker

7. Remove the booklet diverter

Follow these steps to remove the booklet diverter.

2110 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Remove two screws (callout 1) at the rear of the booklet maker and remove the PCA cover (callout
2).

Figure 5-1860 Remove two screws at the rear of the booklet maker and remove the PCA cover

2. Remove one screw(callout 1) at the rear of the booklet maker to make it easy to disconnect the
connector.

Figure 5-1861 Remove one screw at the rear of the booklet maker

Remove the booklet diverter 2111

 3. Pull the connector cover (callout 1) and disconnect the one connector (callout 2)

Figure 5-1862 Pull the connector cover and disconnect the one connector

4. Remove two screws(callout 1)

Figure 5-1863 Remove two screws

2112 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

5. Remove the white bush

Figure 5-1864 Remove the white bush

6. Remove one e-clip on top of the black actuator (callout 1) and remove the black actuator and make
sure not to lose the pin(callout 2) when you pull out the black actuator.

Figure 5-1865 Remove one e-clip on top of the black actuator (callout 1) and remove the black
actuator

Remove the booklet diverter 2113

 7. Remove the white bush (callout 1).

Figure 5-1866 Remove the white bush

8. Pull the booklet diverter out from the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1867 ull the booklet diverter out from the booklet maker

8. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2114 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Booklet diverter home sensor (S40)

Learn how to remove and replace the booklet diverter home sensor.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the booklet diverter home sensor on the
finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com..

Removal and replacement: Booklet diverter home sensor (S40) 2115

 Table 5-166 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001415 Booklet diverter home sensor

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the booklet front cover

Follow these steps to remove the booklet front cover.

■ Slide the booklet maker slightly away from the finisher (callout 1). Remove one screw (callout 2), and
then slide the green knob away from the booklet maker to remove it (callout 3). Remove four screws
(callout 4), and then remove the booklet front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Figure 5-1868 Remove five screws and the cover

2116 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

2. Remove the booklet diverter home sensor (S40)
Follow these steps to remove the booklet diverter home sensor (S40).

1. Remove three screws (callout 1)

Figure 5-1869 Remove three screws

2. Unplug one connector (callout 1) and remove the booklet diverter home sensor (S40, callout 2)

Figure 5-1870 Remove the booklet diverter home sensor

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Remove the booklet diverter home sensor (S40) 2117

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Booklet diverter motor (M18)

Learn how to remove and replace the booklet diverter motor.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the booklet diverter motor on the
finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com..

2118 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Table 5-167 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01397A Booklet diverter motor assembly

JC93-01153A Booklet diverter motor

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the booklet front cover

Follow these steps to remove the booklet front cover.

■ Slide the booklet maker slightly away from the finisher (callout 1). Remove one screw (callout 2), and
then slide the green knob away from the booklet maker to remove it (callout 3). Remove four screws
(callout 4), and then remove the booklet front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Remove the booklet front cover 2119

 Figure 5-1871 Remove five screws and the cover

2. Remove the booklet diverter motor (M18)

Follow these steps to remove the booklet diverter motor (M18).

■ Disconnect one connector (callout 1), remove two screws (callout 2), and then remove the booklet
diverter motor.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1872 Remove the separate pawl motor

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

2120 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Booklet exit unit

Removal and replacement: Booklet exit sensor (S44)

Learn how to remove and replace the tray booklet exit sensor.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the booklet exit sensor on the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

Booklet exit unit 2121

 ○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com..

Table 5-168 Part information

Part number Part description

JC32-00020A Booklet exit sensor

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

■ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove
three sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the
cover away from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

2122 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-1873 Remove the right upper cover

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and
then remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-1874 Remove six screws

Remove the top cover (finisher) 2123

 2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two
machine screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-1875 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1876 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

2124 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw
caps and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-1877 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Figure 5-1878 Remove the rear cover

4. Remove the booklet maker

Follow these steps to remove the booklet maker.

Remove the booklet maker 2125

 1. Slide the booklet maker away from the finisher.

Figure 5-1879 Slide the booklet maker away from the finisher

2. At the Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove one screw (callout 2).

Figure 5-1880 Disconnect one connector and remove one screw

2126 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

3. Release the metal bracket through the opening in the sheet metal.

Figure 5-1881 Release the metal bracket

4. Remove one star-washer screw (callout 1), and then release the alignment pin (callout 2) on the right
side of the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1882 Remove one screw

Remove the booklet maker 2127

 5. Slide the right rail toward the finisher.

Figure 5-1883 Slide the right rail

6. Remove one star-washer screw (callout 1) on the left side of the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1884 Remove one screw

2128 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

7. Lift the booklet maker up on the left side while squeezing the right rail away from the finisher
slightly to clear the sheet metal. Remove the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1885 Remove the booklet maker

8. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation
instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

Special installation instructions: booklet maker

When installing the booklet maker, position the hooks on the rail under the slots on the booklet
maker.

Figure 5-1886 Position the hooks

Remove the booklet maker 2129

 9. When installed correctly, the arrow on the front of the booklet maker aligns with the arrow on the
finisher rail.

Figure 5-1887 Align arrows

10. When installed correctly, the arrow on the back of the booklet maker aligns with the arrow on the
finisher rail.

Figure 5-1888 Align arrows

2130 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 11. Extend the right rail away from the finisher and position it in the booklet maker slot.

Figure 5-1889 Extend the right rail

5. Remove the booklet front cover

Follow these steps to remove the booklet front cover.

■ Slide the booklet maker slightly away from the finisher (callout 1). Remove one screw (callout 2), and
then slide the green knob away from the booklet maker to remove it (callout 3). Remove four screws
(callout 4), and then remove the booklet front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Figure 5-1890 Remove five screws and the cover

6. Remove the Booklet c-fold blade unit

Follow these steps to remove the Booklet c-fold blade unit.

Remove the booklet front cover 2131

 1. Remove two screws(callout 1) at the left of the booklet maker

Figure 5-1891 Remove two screws at the left of the booklet maker

2. Remove three screws(callout 1) at the front of the booklet maker to remove motor unit(callout 2) to
reach out to the screw.

Figure 5-1892 Remove three screws to remove motor unit to reach out to the screw

2132 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

3. Remove one screw(callout 1) at the front of the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1893 Remove one screw at the front of the booklet maker

4. Remove one screw(callout 1) at the rear of the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1894 Remove one screw at the rear of the booklet maker

Remove the Booklet c-fold blade unit 2133

 5. Take the booklet c-fold blade unit out from the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1895 Take the booklet c-fold blade unit out from the booklet maker

7. Remove the booklet diverter

Follow these steps to remove the booklet diverter.

1. Remove two screws (callout 1) at the rear of the booklet maker and remove the PCA cover (callout
2).

Figure 5-1896 Remove two screws at the rear of the booklet maker and remove the PCA cover

2134 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

2. Remove one screw(callout 1) at the rear of the booklet maker to make it easy to disconnect the
connector.

Figure 5-1897 Remove one screw at the rear of the booklet maker

3. Pull the connector cover (callout 1) and disconnect the one connector (callout 2)

Figure 5-1898 Pull the connector cover and disconnect the one connector

Remove the booklet diverter 2135

 4. Remove two screws(callout 1)

Figure 5-1899 Remove two screws

5. Remove the white bush

Figure 5-1900 Remove the white bush

2136 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

6. Remove one e-clip on top of the black actuator (callout 1) and remove the black actuator and make
sure not to lose the pin(callout 2) when you pull out the black actuator.

Figure 5-1901 Remove one e-clip on top of the black actuator (callout 1) and remove the black
actuator

7. Remove the white bush (callout 1).

Figure 5-1902 Remove the white bush

Remove the booklet diverter 2137

 8. Pull the booklet diverter out from the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1903 ull the booklet diverter out from the booklet maker

8. Remove the booklet exit sensor (S44)

Follow these steps to remove the booklet exit sensor (S44).

1. Remove three screws (callout 1)

Figure 5-1904 Remove three screws

2. Unplug one connector (callout 1)

Figure 5-1905 Unplug one connector

2138 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 3. Remove the booklet exit sensor (S44, callout 1)

Figure 5-1906 Remove the booklet exit sensor

9. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Booklet output tray unit

Removal and replacement: Booklet output tray

Learn how to remove and replace the booklet output tray.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2139

 Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the booklet output tray on the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com..

Table 5-169 Part information

Part number Part description

JC61-07253B Booklet output tray

JC63-04978B Booklet output tray cover

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the booklet output tray

Follow these steps to remove the booklet output tray.

2140 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 1. Raise the booklet output tray up (callout 1), and then pull it away from the finisher (callout 2) to
remove it.

Figure 5-1907 Remove the booklet output tray

2. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation
instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly

Special installation instructions: booklet output tray

Position thetabs (callout 1) on the tray into the slots (callout 2) on the finisher.

Figure 5-1908 Install the booklet output tray

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2141

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

PCA

Removal and replacement: Main PCA

Learn how to remove and replace the main PCA.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the main PCA on the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

2142 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 ○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com..

Table 5-170 Part information

Part number Part description

JC92-02968A Finisher mainPCA

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

■ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove
three sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the
cover away from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the right upper cover (finisher) 2143

 Figure 5-1909 Remove the right upper cover

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and
then remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-1910 Remove six screws

2144 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two
machine screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-1911 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1912 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

Remove the rear cover (finisher) 2145

 1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw
caps and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-1913 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Figure 5-1914 Remove the rear cover

4. Remove the controller PCA

Follow these steps to remove the controller PCA.

2146 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 ■ Disconnect all of the connectors, remove four screws (callout 1), and then remove the controller PCA.

TIP: Refer to the figure below for correct positioning and connection of the cables.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1915 Remove the controller PCA

5. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2147

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Booklet finisher PCA

Learn how to remove and replace the booklet maker PCA.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the booklet maker PCA on the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com..

Table 5-171 Part information

Part number Part description

JC92-02789B Booklet finisher PCA

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

2148 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 ○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

■ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove
three sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the
cover away from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1916 Remove the right upper cover

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

Remove the right upper cover (finisher) 2149

 1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and
then remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-1917 Remove six screws

2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two
machine screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-1918 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

2150 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-1919 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw
caps and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-1920 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Remove the rear cover (finisher) 2151

 Figure 5-1921 Remove the rear cover

4. Remove the booklet maker

Follow these steps to remove the booklet maker.

1. Slide the booklet maker away from the finisher.

Figure 5-1922 Slide the booklet maker away from the finisher

2152 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

2. At the Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove one screw (callout 2).

Figure 5-1923 Disconnect one connector and remove one screw

3. Release the metal bracket through the opening in the sheet metal.

Figure 5-1924 Release the metal bracket

Remove the booklet maker 2153

 4. Remove one star-washer screw (callout 1), and then release the alignment pin (callout 2) on the right
side of the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1925 Remove one screw

5. Slide the right rail toward the finisher.

Figure 5-1926 Slide the right rail

2154 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

6. Remove one star-washer screw (callout 1) on the left side of the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1927 Remove one screw

7. Lift the booklet maker up on the left side while squeezing the right rail away from the finisher
slightly to clear the sheet metal. Remove the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1928 Remove the booklet maker

8. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation
instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

Special installation instructions: booklet maker

When installing the booklet maker, position the hooks on the rail under the slots on the booklet
maker.

Remove the booklet maker 2155

 Figure 5-1929 Position the hooks

9. When installed correctly, the arrow on the front of the booklet maker aligns with the arrow on the
finisher rail.

Figure 5-1930 Align arrows

2156 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 10. When installed correctly, the arrow on the back of the booklet maker aligns with the arrow on the
finisher rail.

Figure 5-1931 Align arrows

11. Extend the right rail away from the finisher and position it in the booklet maker slot.

Figure 5-1932 Extend the right rail

5. Remove the booklet maker PCA

Follow these steps to remove the booklet maker PCA.

Remove the booklet maker PCA 2157

 1. Remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-1933 Remove two screws

2. Remove one screw (callout 1), and then remove the metal cover.

Figure 5-1934 Remove one screw and the metal cover

3. Disconnect all of the connectors, remove four screws (callout 1), and then remove the booklet
maker PCA.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

2158 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-1935 Remove four screws and the PCA

6. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2159

 Problem solving
Learn about problem solving.

Control panel message document (CPMD)

Learn about the control panel message document (CPMD).

Refer to Error codes (types and structure) on page 716 for more details.

Clear paper jams

Learn about clearing paper jams.

Clear paper jams in the Booklet maker

Learn how to clear paper jams in the Booklet maker.

Clear jams in the top output area

Learn how to clear jams in the top output area.

1. Open the top cover.

2160 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 2. Lift the TF feeder, and then turn the knob while the TF feeder is lifted.

3. Remove any jammed paper.

Clear jams in the booklet maker paper path

Learn how to clear jams in the booklet maker paper path.

1. Open the booklet maker door.

Clear jams in the booklet maker paper path 2161

 2. Release the lever.

3. Turn the knob.

4. Remove the jammed paper.

Clear jams in the booklet maker booklet output area

Learn how to clear jams in the booklet maker booklet output area.

2162 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Open the booklet maker door.

2. Pull out the booklet maker assembly until it stops.

Clear jams in the booklet maker booklet output area 2163

 3. Turn the knob to advance the jammed paper.

4. Remove the jammed paper/booklet from the output area.

Clear jams in the booklet maker assembly-right-upper area

Learn how to clear paper jams in the booklet maker assembly-right-upper-area.

1. Open the booklet maker door.

2164 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 2. Pull out the booklet maker assembly until it stops.

3. Open the vertical tray by pulling outward on the green tab.

4. Remove the jammed paper.

Clear jams in the booklet maker assembly left middle area

Learn how to clear jams in the booklet maker assembly left-middle-area.

Clear jams in the booklet maker assembly left middle area 2165
 1. Open the booklet maker door.

2. Pull out the booklet maker assembly until it stops.

2166 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 3. Pull the green tab.

4. Remove the jammed paper.

5. Open the clear plastic door at the left bottom.

6. Remove the jammed paper.

Clear jams in the booklet maker assembly left lower area

Learn how to clear jams in the booklet maker assembly left-lower area.

Clear jams in the booklet maker assembly left lower area 2167
 1. Open the booklet maker door.

2. Pull out the booklet maker assembly until it stops.

3. Open the roller door.

4. Remove the jammed paper.

2168 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 5. Open the clear plastic door at the left bottom.

6. Remove the jammed paper.

Clear jams in the IPTU

Learn how to clear jams in the IPTU.

1. Lift the IPTU cover and clear any jammed paper inside the IPTU.

2. Close the IPTU cover.

Clear jams in the inner finisher (IF)

Learn how to clear jams in the inner finisher (IF).

Clear jams in the IPTU 2169

 1. Open the staple cartridge access door.

2. Rotate the lever to the left to release the hooks that secure the inner finisher (they hold the IF in
place).

3. Slide the inner finisher partially out.

2170 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

4. Release the lever to open the right cover on the inner finisher.

5. Lift the inner finisher jam access cover, and then remove any jammed paper inside the rear of the
inner finisher.

6. Close the inner finisher jam access cover.

7. Close the inner finisher right cover.

Clear jams in the inner finisher (IF) 2171

 8. Open the output side jam access cover, and then remove any jammed paper.

9. Close the output side jam access cover.

10. Slide the inner finisher in until it clicks into place.

11. Close the staple cartridge access door.

Clear paper jams in the High-volume finisher

Learn how to clear paper jams in the High-volume finisher.

1. Open the top cover.

2172 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 2. Lift the TF feeder, and then turn the knob while the TF feeder is lifted.

3. Remove any jammed paper.

Finisher system diagram

Learn about the finisher system diagram.

Finisher system consists of the FINISHER PCA, BOOKLET MAKER PCA, SWITCH PCA, and HOLE PUNCH
PCA.

Figure 5-1936 Finisher system diagram

PCA function

● FINISHER PCA

This PCA controls the finisher modules and consists of the micro-controller and driver ICs.

Finisher system diagram 2173

 ● SWITCH PCA

This PCA shows the manual stapling condition and accepts the button input for manual staple
operation.

● BOOKLET MAKER PCA

This PCA controls the booklet maker module and consists of the micro-controller and driver ICs.

● HOLE PUNCH PCA

This PCA controls the hole punch module and consists of the micro-controller and driver ICs.

2174 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

6 Inner finisher

Learn more about the inner finisher.

Product specification and description

Learn about product specifications and descriptions.

Inner finisher view

Learn about the front view and rear view of the inner finisher.

Front & rear view

Figure 6-1 Inner finisher system - front view

Figure 6-2 Inner finisher system - rear view

Inner finisher 2175

 Table 6-1 Inner finisher system - entrance unit parts information

Item Part name Part number Orderable(*)

C1 Front cover JC90-01321B (*)

C2 Top cover JC90-01323B (*)

C3 Middle cover JC90-01322B (*)

C4 Punch cover JC90-01343B (*)

C5 Output tray JC90-01337B (*)

C6 PCA cover JC63-04792B (*)

C7 Left cover JC90-01324B (*)

C8 Rear cover JC63-04750B (*)

1 Lock release handle JC66-04233A (*)

2 Main interface harness JC39-02169A (*)

Not shown Exit bin full JC90-01546A (*)

(*) This part is in ordering system.

NOTE: Exit bin full is included in the box

Detailed specifications
Learn about the detailed specifications of the inner finisher.

Table 6-2 General specifications

Item Description

Capacity 550 Sheets (Main 500, Top 50) @ 80gsm

Sensing Paper Jam/Tray Sensing/Stapler/Cover Open

Media Sizes ● Main: 98mm - 320mm x 139.7mm - 457.2mm (3.86in - 12.59in x 5.5in - 18in)

● Top: 98mm - 320mm x 148.0mm - 430.0mm (3.86in - 12.59in x 5.83in - 16.93in)

Media types Plain/Thick/Heavy weight/Thin/Cotton/Colored/Recycled/Bond/Archive/Pre-Punched/Cardstock/

Glossy/Envelope

Media Weight ● Main: 52-256 gsm (13.9-68.3 lb.)

● Top: 52-325 gsm (13.9-86.7 lb.)

2176 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 Table 6-2 General specifications (continued)

Item Description

Number of Bin 2 (Main/Top)

Dimension (W X D X H) 458 x 491 x 173 mm (18.0 X 19.3 X 6.8 inch)

Weight Net weight: 15 kg (33 lb.)

Packing weight: 18.39 kg (40.53 lb.)

Tray 1 Finishing 50 Sheets @ 80gsm

Capacity

Tray 1 Finishing Mode Stapling (Left, Right, Dual)/Punch (2/3, 2/4, Swedish)

Tray 2 Finishing 500 Sheets @ 80 gsm

Capacity

Table 6-3 Paper Size Specification

Name Paper size Orientation Output Staple position

mm Inches Direction Main tray Top tray Corner DUAL

52-256 g Offset 52-325 g 45° Flat

A5 210 x 148 8.3 x 5.8 LEF O O O X F/R1 O

Statement 216 x 140 8.5 x 5.5 LEF O O O X F/R1 O

Lt 279 x 216 11 x 8.5 LEF O O O F/R1 X O

A4 297 x 210 8.3 x 11.7 LEF O O O F/R1 X O

B5(JIS) 257 x 182 10.1 x 7.2 LEF O O O F/R1 X O

B5(ISO) 250 x 176 9.8 x 6.9 LEF O O O F/R1 X O

Executive 267 x 184 10.5 x 7.3 LEF O O O F/R1 X O

No 9 Env 98 x 225 3.9 x 8.9 SEF X X O X X X

Monarch Env 98.4 x 190.5 3.9 x 7.5 SEF X X O X X X

PostCard 4X6 101.6 x 152.4 4.0 x 6.0 SEF X X O X X X

A6 105 x 148 4.1 x 5.8 SEF X X O X X X

No 10 Env 105 x 241 4.1 x 9.5 SEF X X O X X X

DL Env 110 x 220 4.3 x 8.7 SEF X X O X X X

C6 Env 114 x 162 4.5 x 6.4 SEF X X O X X X

B6 128 x 182 5.0 x 7.2 SEF X X O X X X

Statement 140 x 216 5.5 x 8.5 SEF X X O X X X

A5 148 x 210 5.8 x 8.3 SEF O X O X X X

C5 Env 162 x 229 6.4 x 9.0 SEF X X 0 X X X

B5(ISO) 176 x 250 6.9 x 9.8 SEF O O O X F/R1 X

B5(JIS) 182 x 257 6.9 x 9.8 SEF O O O X F/R1 X

Detailed specifications 2177

 Table 6-3 Paper Size Specification (continued)

Name Paper size Orientation Output Staple position

mm Inches Direction Main tray Top tray Corner DUAL

52-256 g Offset 52-325 g 45° Flat

Executive 184 x 267 7.3 x 10.5 SEF O O O X F/R1 X

16k 195 x 270 7.7 x 10.6 SEF O O O X F/R1 O

A4 210 x 297 8.3 x 11.7 SEF O O O X F/R1 O

Legal 216 x 356 8.5 x 14 SEF O O O X F/R1 O

Letter 216 x 279 8.5 x 11 SEF O O O X F/R1 O

Folio 216 x 330 8.5 x 13 SEF O O O X F/R1 O

Oficio 215.9 x 8.5 x 13.5 SEF O O O X F/R1 O

342.9

C4 229 x 324 9.1 x 12.8 SEF X X O X X X

Tabloid 254 x 374 10 x 14.7 SEF O O O F/R1 X O

B4 257 x 364 10 x 14.3 SEF O O O F/R1 X O

8K 270 x 390 10.6 x 15.4 SEF O O O F/R1 X O

Ledger 279 x 432 11 x 17 SEF O O O F/R1 X O

A3 297 x 420 11.7 x 16.5 SEF O O O F/R1 X O

Tabloid Extra 304.8 x 12 x 18 SEF O X X X X X

457.2

SRA3 320 x 450 12.6 x 17.7 SEF O X X X X X

Custom W 98-320 ~ W3.9-12.6 ~ — O X O X X X

L 140-1200 L 5.5-47.2 (W 98-297 ~

L 140-1200)
1 “F/R” means front side and rear side can be supported.

Table 6-4 Punch specifications

Name Paper size Orientation Punch

mm Inches Direction NA 2/3 EU 2/4H Swedish

2H 3H 2H 4H 4H

A5 210 x 148 8.3 x 5.8 LEF 0 X O X O

Statement 216 x 140 8.5 x 5.5 LEF 0 X O X O

Lt 279 x 216 11 x 8.5 LEF O O O O O

A4 297 x 210 8.3 x 11.7 LEF O O O O O

B5 (JIS) 257 x 182 10.1 x 7.2 LEF O O O X O

B5 (ISO) 250 x 176 9.8 x 6.9 LEF O O O X O

Executive 267 x 184 10.5 x 7.3 LEF O O O O O

2178 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

Table 6-4 Punch specifications (continued)

Name Paper size Orientation Punch

mm Inches Direction NA 2/3 EU 2/4H Swedish

2H 3H 2H 4H 4H

No 9 Env 98 x 225 3.9 x 8.9 SEF X X X X X

Monarch 98.4 x 190.5 3.9 x 7.5 SEF X X X X X

Env

PostCard 101.6 x 152.4 4.0 x 6.0 SEF X X X X X

4X6

A6 105 x 148 4.1 x 5.8 SEF X X X X X

No 10 Env 105 x 241 4.1 x 9.5 SEF X X X X X

DL Env 110 x 220 4.3 x 8.7 SEF X X X X X

C6 Env 114 x 162 4.5 x 6.4 SEF X X X X X

B6 128 x 182 5.0 x 7.2 SEF X X X X X

Statement 140 x 216 5.5 x 8.5 SEF X X X X X

A5 148 x 210 5.8 x 8.3 SEF O X O X O

C5 Env 162 x 229 6.4 x 9.0 SEF X X X X X

B5(ISO) 176 x 250 6.9 x 9.8 SEF O X O X O

B5(JIS) 182 x 257 6.9 x 9.8 SEF O X O X O

Executive 184 x 267 7.3 x 10.5 SEF O X O X O

16k 195 x 270 7.7 x 10.6 SEF O X O X O

A4 210 x 297 8.3 x 11.7 SEF O X O X O

Legal 216 x 356 8.5 x 14 SEF O X O X O

Letter 216 x 279 8.5 x 11 SEF O X O X O

Folio 216 x 330 8.5 x 13 SEF O X O X O

Oficio 215.9 x 342.9 8.5 x 13.5 SEF O X O X O

C4 229 x 324 9.1 x 12.8 SEF X X X X X

Tabloid 254 x 374 10 x 14.7 SEF O O O X O

B4 257 x 364 10 x 14.3 SEF O O O X O

8K 270 x 390 10.6 x 15.4 SEF O O O O

Ledger 279 x 432 11 x 17 SEF O O O O O

A3 297 x 420 11.7 x 16.5 SEF O O O O O

Tabloid Extra 304.8 x 457.2 12 x 18 SEF X X X X X

SRA3 320 x 450 12.6 x 17.7 SEF X X X X X

Custom W 98-320 ~ W3.9-12.6 ~ — X X X X X

L 140-1200 L 5.5-47

Detailed specifications 2179

 Table 6-5 Media performance

Paper Type Function

Main Tray Top Tray Staple Punch

Plain (71-90 g/m2) O O O O

Thick (91-105 g/m2) O O O O

Heavy weight (106-175 g/m2) O O O O

Extra Heavy weight 1 (176-216 g/m²) O O O O

Extra Heavy weight 2 (217-256 g/m2) O O O O

Extra Heavy weight 3 (257-300 g/m2) X O X X

Extra Heavy weight 4 (301-325 g/m2) X O X X

Thin (60-70 g/m2) O O O O

Cotton (75-90 g/m2) O O O O

Colored (75-90 g/m2) O O O O

Pre-Printed (75-90 g/m2) O O O O

Recycled (60-90 g/m2) O O O O

Bond O O O O

Archive (75-105 g/m2) O O O O

LetterHead O O O O

Pre-Punched O O O X

Thin Cardstock (105-163 g/m2) O O O O

Thick Cardstock (170-216 g/m2) O O O X

Heavy Cardstock (217-256 g/m2) O O O X

Extra Heavy Cardstock 1(257-300 g/m²) X O X X

Extra Heavy Cardstock 2(301-325 g/m2) X O X X

Thin Glossy (106-169 g/m2) O O O O

Thick Glossy (170-216 g/m²) O O O X

Heavy Glossy (217-256 g/m2) O X X X

Envelope (75-90 g/m2) X O X X

Thick Envelope (217-256 g/m2) O X X X

Tab O X X O

Inner finisher system

Learn about the inner finisher system.

2180 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

Overview
Learn about the overview of the inner finisher.

Work flow
Figure 6-3 Inner finisher system - work flow overview

Table 6-6 Inner finisher system - work flow overview

Item Unit Description

1 Punch unit holes in a specific location on a sheet of paper

2 Entrance unit allows paper to move into the finisher

3 Diverter unit holds paper so that the newly printed paper can stay out for seconds while the
stapled bundle of paper moves to the output tray

4 Exit unit moves paper from the diverter unit to the ejector unit

5 Paper support unit prevents paper from being fallen down or bent when the long length paper such as
A3 is ejected from the exit unit

6 Main paddle unit moves paper to the sub paddle

7 Sub paddle unit moves paper to the end fence

8 End fence unit sets the standard position of the paper to be aligned towards top and bottom of the
paper

9 Tamper unit aligns the paper on the right and left side of the paper

10 Stapler unit performs stapling to a bundle of aligned documents

11 Ejector 1 unit transfers a stapled paper loaded at the end fence unit to the ejector2 unit

12 Ejector 2 unit grips a stack of paper up and ejects it onto the output tray

13 Output tray unit stacks the job ended paper

14 Paper holding unit controls the output tray movement

Overview 2181
 Sensor
Figure 6-4 Inner finisher system - sensor

Table 6-7 Inner finisher system - sensor

No Name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Type Description

S1 Entrance 0604-001381 (*) 113-0350 Photo emitter, Checks paper comes into the
sensor detector entrance unit

S2 Stapler position 0604-001393 113-0491 Photo Makes the stapler be positioned in

sensor interrupter the exact stapling position
113-0492

S3 Front cover JC39-01610A 113-0410 Cover open Checks whether the front cover is
switch switch closed or opened

S4 Main paddle 0604-001393 113-0370 Photo Checks the main paddle locates at
home sensor interrupter the home position

S5 Front tamper 0604-001393 113-0390 Photo Checks the front tamper locates at
home sensor interrupter the home position

S6 Output tray 0604-001393 113-0473 Photo Checks the output tray motor is
motor sensor interrupter operational

S7 Output tray JC90-01320A (*) 113-0472 Lower limit Checks the lower limit (=Output
lower limit switch tray is full) of the output tray
switch assembly

S8 Output tray top 0603-001309 (*) 113-0471 Photo TR Checks the upper limit of output
of stack sensor tray
(receiver)

S9 Paper holding 0604-001393 113-0470 Photo Checks the location of the paper
sensor interrupter holding actuator

S10 Ejector 2 home 0604-001393 113-0462 Photo Checks the ejector 2 locates at the
sensor interrupter home position.

2182 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

Table 6-7 Inner finisher system - sensor (continued)

No Name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Type Description

S11 Ejector 2 motor 0604-001393 113-0463 Photo Checks the ejector 2 motor is
sensor interrupter operational

S12 Paper support 0604-001393 113-0481 Photo Checks the paper support locates
home sensor interrupter at the home position

S13 Output tray top 0601-003440 113-0471 LED IR Checks the upper limit of output
of stack sensor tray
(led)

S14 Rear tamper 0604-001393 113-0380 Photo Checks the rear tamper locates at
home sensor interrupter the home position

S15 Top cover JC39-01610A (*) 113-0420 Cover open Checks whether the top cover is
switch switch closed or opened

S16 Ejector 1 home 0604-001393 113-0461 Photo Checks the ejector 1 locates at the
sensor interrupter home position

S17 End fence 0604-001381 (*) 113-0361 Photo emitter, Check paper comes into the end
sensor detector fence unit

S18 Punch waste 0604-001393 113-0620 Photo Detects the punch waste box is
box sensor interrupter installed

S19 Punch waste 0604-001381 (*) 113-0621 Photo emitter, Checks the punch waste box is full
full sensor detector

S2 Finisher 0604-001393 113-0000 Photo Checks the finisher is installed

0 docking sensor interrupter

S21 Exit sensor 0604-001415 (*) 113-0360 Photo Checks paper comes into the exit
interrupter unit
(*) This part is in ordering system.

Figure 6-5 Inner finisher system - Photo interrupter (0604-001393)

Overview 2183
 Figure 6-6 Inner finisher system - Photo emitter, detector (0604-001381)

Motor and solenoid

Figure 6-7 Inner finisher system - motor, solenoid

Table 6-8 Inner finisher system - motor, solenoid

No Name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostic Type Motor Description

s sensor

M1 Stapler JC93-00999A (*) 113-0581 Step motor Drives the stapler unit
position
motor

M2 Exit motor JC31-00169B (*) 113-0502 Step motor Drives the exit roller and the
sub paddle unit

M3 Main paddle JC93-01001A (*) 113-0510 Step motor Home Drives the main paddle unit
motor
assembly

M4 Output tray JC90-01334B (*) 113-0570 DC Motor Encoder Drives the output tray unit
motor
assembly

2184 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

Table 6-8 Inner finisher system - motor, solenoid (continued)

No Name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostic Type Motor Description

s sensor

M5 Rear tamper JC93-01001A (*) 113-0520 Step motor Home Drives the rear tamper unit
motor
assembly

M6 Ejector2 JC93-01168A 113-0562 DC Motor Home, Drives the ejector 2 unit

motor encoder
assembly

M7 Ejector1 JC93-00998A 113-0561 Step Motor Home Drives the ejector 1 unit
motor
assembly

M8 Paper JC93-00802B 113-0571 Step Motor Home Drives paper support unit
support
motor
assembly

M9 Front tamper JC93-01001A (*) 113-0530 Step Motor Home Drives the front tamper unit
motor
assembly

M10 Entrance JC90-01344A (*) 113-0501 Step Motor Drives the entrance roller and
motor the middle roller
assembly

SL1 Paper holding JC33-00037A (*) 113-0591 Solenoid Drives paper holding unit
solenoid
(*) This part is in ordering system.

The sensor mounted at the driving motor detects motor operation. If a motor doesn’t work properly, an
event code only for the motor will pop up.

Figure 6-8 Inner finisher system - motor sensor

The home position sensor is installed for the purpose of checking the reference point when the specific
unit is operating.

Overview 2185
 Figure 6-9 Inner finisher system - home sensor

Roller
Figure 6-10 Inner finisher system - roller

Table 6-9 Inner finisher system - roller

No Name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Type Description

R1 Entrance roller JC66-04243A (*) Roller Moves paper forward

R2 Middle roller JC66-04243A (*) Roller Moves paper forward

2186 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 Table 6-9 Inner finisher system - roller (continued)

No Name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Type Description

R3 Exit roller JC66-04244A (*) Roller Moves paper forward

(*) This part is in ordering system.

PCA
Figure 6-11 Inner finisher system - PCA

Table 6-10 Inner finisher system - roller

No Name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Type Description

1 Main PCA JC92-02774B (*)

2 Rear joint PCA JC92-02780A (*) Joint PCA between main PCA
and several parts punch, stapler,
entrance, and front door
(*) This part is in ordering system.

Punch unit (optional)

Learn about the punch unit of the inner finisher.

The punch unit is a device that punches holes in a specific location on a sheet of paper. The punch unit is
located immediately before the entrance unit and punches holes onto a paper.

● HP LaserJet Inner Finisher Hole2/3 Punch : Y1G02-67901

● HP LaserJet Inner Finisher Hole2/4 Punch : Y1G03-67901

● HP LaserJet Inner Finisher Swedish Punch : Y1G04-67901

NOTE: Puncher types vary depending on the country/region.

Punch unit (optional) 2187

 In case of 2/3 hole punch, the 5 hole-punches are mounted in the punch unit. As the punch motor rotates
clockwise, the inner gear moves to the right and the 3 hole-punches are moved downward to make holes.
When making 2 holes, the motor rotates in the counterclockwise direction and the inner gear rotates to
the left to drill two holes. The travel distance and position of the motor are detected and controlled by the
hole punch home sensor and the hole punch motor sensor.

Figure 6-12 Inner finisher system - punched hole location and pair

For more information, go to the HP WISE support portal and search for HP LaserJet Managed MFP - How
to use the hole punch (c05450959).
Figure 6-13 Inner finisher system - punch unit overview

2188 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

Figure 6-14 Inner finisher system - punch unit detail view

Table 6-11 Inner finisher system - punch unit parts information

Item Part name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Description

- Hole 2/3 Punch Y1G02-67901 (*) Punch unit assembly for hole
2/3
Hole 2/4 Punch Y1G03-67901
Punch unit assembly for hole
Swedish Punch Y1G04-67901 2/4

Punch cover JC90-01343B Punch unit assembly for

Swedish

Punch cover (for the finisher

punch is not installed)

1 Punch motor - 113-0610 Drives the entrance roller

connected by a belt

2 Punch motor sensor - 113-0600 Detects punch motor operation

3 Punch home sensor - 113-0612 Detects punchers’ home

position

Not Punch PBA 2-4 hole SS465-67001 (*)

show
n

Not Punch PBA 2-3 hole SS467-67001 (*)

show
n

Punch unit (optional) 2189

 Table 6-11 Inner finisher system - punch unit parts information (continued)

Item Part name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Description

Not Punch PBA Swedish SS466-67001 (*)

show
n
(*) This part is in system.

Figure 6-15 Inner finisher system - punch unit operation (3 holes)

Figure 6-16 Inner finisher system - punch unit operation (2 holes)

Entrance unit
Learn about the entrance unit of the inner finisher.

The entrance unit is located right after the punch unit. This unit is driven by entrance motor which is
installed on the rear of the finisher. This motor is connected to the entrance roller by a belt, which
transfers driving force to move paper from the printer to the finisher inside. If an error such as paper
jam occurs in the entrance unit, the entrance sensor detects the error and generates an event code
(13.60.xx).

2190 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 Figure 6-17 Inner finisher system - entrance unit overview

Figure 6-18 Inner finisher system - entrance unit detail view

Table 6-12 Inner finisher system - entrance unit parts information

Item Part name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Description

S1 Entrance sensor 0604-001381 (*) 113-0350 Detects paper if it comes into

the entrance unit

M10 Entrance motor JC90-01344A (*) 113-0501 Drives the entrance roller
assembly connected by a belt

- Entrance motor JC31-00169B (*)

R1 Entrance roller JC66-04243A (*) Moves paper forward

(*) This part is in ordering system.

Diverter unit
Learn about the diverter unit of the inner finisher.

The diverter unit holds paper so that the newly printed paper can wait for a few seconds until the stapled
bundle moves to the output tray. The diverter unit is used to change paper path, which is done by a
spring mounted on the diverter unit. When paper exit from the unit, it goes through the upper path of
the diverter. When the paper rolls back, it passes the lower paper path created by the diverter. Here, the
paper sits for a while until the next paper is ready to come out together.

Diverter unit 2191

 Figure 6-19 Inner finisher system - diverter unit overview

Figure 6-20 Inner finisher system - diverter unit detail view

Table 6-13 Inner finisher system - diverter unit parts information

Item Part name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Description

M10 Entrance motor JC90-01344A (*) 113-501 Drives the feed roller connected
assembly by a belt

Entrance motor JC31-00169B (*)

R2 Middle roller JC66-04243A (*) Drives paper forward installed

in front of the diverter

1 Diverter JC61-06392A Changes paper path when

paper goes backward

2192 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

Table 6-13 Inner finisher system - diverter unit parts information (continued)

Item Part name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Description

2 Diverter spring JC61-07269A Pulls the diverter to upward so

that it makes paper path to the
lower of the diverter
(*) This part is in ordering system.

Diverter unit operation

1. Paper goes forward to the output tray.

2. Exit roller stops after paper passes by the diverter unit.

3. Paper goes backward under the diverter unit.

Diverter unit 2193

 Exit unit
Learn about the exit unit of the inner finisher.

The exit unit is the part that moves paper from the diverter unit to the ejector unit. The exit unit
is powered by an exit motor installed on the front of the finisher. The motor and the exit roller are
connected by a single belt. The exit motor rotates in both the forward and reverse directions, since it
serves to return paper to a new paper path created by the diverter unit. The exit sensor is installed right
in front of exit roller. It generates an event code when a paper jam occurred.

Figure 6-21 Inner finisher system - exit unit overview

2194 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

Figure 6-22 Inner finisher system - exit unit detail view

Table 6-14 Inner finisher system - exit unit parts information

Item Part name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Description

1 Rear compile guide JC61-07450A (*) Guides to help paper move

through the paper path

2 Front compile guide JC61-07449A (*) Guides to help paper move

through the paper path

3 Exit sensor actuator JC66-04199A (*) 113-0360 Makes the sensor on and off by
checking paper

S21 Exit sensor 0604-001415 (*) 113-0360 Detects paper if it passes

through the exit unit

M2 Exit motor assembly JC90-01331A 113-0502 Drives the exit roller connected
by a belt

Exit motor JC31-00169B (*)

R3 Exit roller JC66-04244A (*) Moves paper to the ejector unit

(*) This part is in ordering system.

Exit unit operation

1. When rotating the exit motor counter clockwise, paper goes forward to the output tray.

Exit unit 2195

 2. When rotating the exit motor clockwise, paper goes backward to the end fence unit.

Paper support unit

Learn about the paper support unit of the inner finisher.

Paper support unit works to prevent the paper from falling out or being folded. Also, the newly printed
paper will not scatter papers already sitting on the output tray. Paper guides are installed on each front
and rear side of the finisher, these guides move towards the output tray when the paper exits, then the
guides return to the original position after the support operation is completed. The paper support home
sensor confirms the original position of the guide.

2196 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

Figure 6-23 Inner finisher system - paper support unit overview

Figure 6-24 Inner finisher system - paper support unit detail view

Table 6-15 Inner finisher system - paper support unit parts information

Item Part name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Description

1 Rear paper support JC90-01311A (*) Supports paper not to be

bended

2 Front paper support JC90-01310A (*) Supports paper not to be

bended

S12 Paper support home 0604-001393 113-0481 Detects the paper support
sensor guides locate at the home
position

M8 Paper support motor JC93-00802B 113-0571 Drives paper support guides

assembly from the home position to the
forward direction

Paper support unit 2197

 Table 6-15 Inner finisher system - paper support unit parts information (continued)

Item Part name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Description

Paper support motor JC31-00149A

(*) This part is in ordering system.

Paper support unit operation

Paper support unit is extended to the arrow direction to help paper is bent of fallen to the output tray.

Figure 6-25 Inner finisher system - paper support unit operation

Paddle unit
Learn about the paddle unit of the inner finisher.

The paddle unit consists of two paddle systems, a main paddle and a sub paddle. First, when paper is
discharged from the exit unit, the main paddle unit moves paper to the sub paddle. Then the sub paddle
unit moves paper to the end fence unit so that it can be ready to be stapled.

The main paddle unit is operated by the main paddle motor. The main paddle sensor detects the main
paddle position. The sub paddle unit rotates by the exit motor.

2198 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

Figure 6-26 Inner finisher system - paddle unit driving system overview (main paddle unit)

Figure 6-27 Inner finisher system - paddle unit driving system overview (sub paddle unit)

Figure 6-28 Inner finisher system - paddle unit driving system detail view (1/2)

Paddle unit 2199

 Figure 6-29 Inner finisher system - paddle unit driving system detail view (2/2)

Table 6-16 Inner finisher system - paddle unit parts information

Item Part name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Description

1 Main paddle JC90-01327A (*) Moves paper to the sub paddle

unit

1-a Main paddle kit JC82-01038A (*)

1-b Main paddle A JC63-04957A (*)

1-c Main paddle B JC63-04958A (*)

1-d Main paddle holder JC81-07560A (*)

2 Sub paddle JC90-01336A (*) Gets paper move to the end

fence and arrange them to be
stapled correctly

S4 Main paddle home 0604-001393 113-0370 Detects the home position of

sensor the main paddle

M3 Main paddle motor JC90-01331A (*) 113-0510 Drives the main paddle unit
assembly connected by a belt

Main paddle motor JC31-00149A

M2 Exit motor JC31-00169B (*) 113-0502 Drives the sub paddle unit
connected by a belt
(*) This part is in ordering system.

Paddle unit operation

1. Main paddles get paper moves to the sub paddle unit.

2200 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 2. Sub paddle unit gets paper goes to the end fence unit.

Tamper unit
Learn about the tamper unit of the inner finisher.

The tamper unit functions to align the left and right sides of a bundle of paper in order to staple it to the
correct position. When a certain amount of paper for stapling is collected after printing, the tamper unit
hits the left and right ends of the paper to align the paper correctly.

Each temper has a motor on the back side that delivers driving force to move. The temper unit sensors
are mounted on the back side of the unit, to check the position of the temper unit.

Tamper unit 2201

 Figure 6-30 Inner finisher system - tamper unit overview

Figure 6-31 Inner finisher system - tamper unit detail view (1/3)

Figure 6-32 Inner finisher system - tamper unit detail view (rear) (2/3)

2202 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

Figure 6-33 Inner finisher system - tamper unit detail view (front) (3/3)

Table 6-17 Inner finisher system - tamper unit parts information

Item Part name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Description

1 Front tamper JC82-00899A (*) Aligns left and right side of

paper

2 Rear tamper JC82-00900A (*) Aligns left and right side of

paper

M5 Rear tamper motor JC93-01001A (*) 113-0520 Drives the rear temper unit
assembly

Rear tamper motor JC31-00149A

S14 Rear tamper home 0604-001393 113-0380 Detects the reference position
sensor of the tamper unit

M9 Front tamper motor JC93-01001A (*) 113-0530 Drives the front tamper unit
assembly

Front tamper motor JC31-00149A

S5 Front tamper home 0604-001393 113-0390 Detects the reference position

sensor of the tamper unit
(*) This part is in ordering system.

Tamper unit operation

1. Paper is arranged at the end of the end fence unit.

Tamper unit 2203

 2. The left and right tampers arrange a stack of paper.

End fence unit

Learn about the end fence unit of the inner finisher.

The paddle unit moves paper to the end fence unit. The end fence unit sets the standard position of the
paper to be aligned towards top and bottom of the paper. The end fence is fixed onto the finisher, and the
end fence sensor can sense any paper entering the end fence unit.

2204 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

Figure 6-34 Inner finisher system - end fence unit overview

Figure 6-35 Inner finisher system - end fence unit detail view

Table 6-18 Inner finisher system - end fence unit parts information

Item Part name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Description

1 End fence JC61-06428A Aligns paper toward top and

bottom direction

2 End fence sensor 0604-001381 (*) 113-0361 Detects paper whether paper
exists in the end fence unit
(*) This part is in ordering system.

End fence unit operation

1. Paper goes into the end fence unit through the main paddle unit and sub paddle unit. At the same
time the end fence unit is aligned paper to the direction of yellow line.

End fence unit 2205

 2. The end fence sensor is checking whether paper goes into the end fence sensor.

Stapler unit
Learn about the stapler unit of the inner finisher.

Stapler unit is a device installed inside the finisher that staples a bundle of aligned documents.
Documents are collected as a bundle by the tamper unit and the end fence unit for stapling, then
stapler assembly staples the bundle. There are 6 options to make a bundle.

Figure 6-36 Inner finisher system - stapling options

The stapler unit moves using the stapler motor installed inside. The four stapler position sensors are
mounted so that the stapler can be positioned in the exact stapling position whether it is stapled on
the left, the right, or at the center of the document. Stapling is done by the motor inside the stapler
assembly.

2206 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

Figure 6-37 Inner finisher system - stapler unit overview

Figure 6-38 Inner finisher system - stapler unit detail view (1/2)

Figure 6-39 Inner finisher system - stapler unit detail view (2/2)

Stapler unit 2207

 Table 6-19 Inner finisher system - stapler unit parts information

Item Part name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Description

1 Stapler assembly JC59-00040A (*) Staples a bundle of paper

1-a Staple cartridge JC81-07408B (*) Staple cartridge

S2 Stapler position sensor 0604-001393 (*) 113-0491 Detects and moves the staple
assembly position to make a
113-0492 bundle of paper at the exact
location

M1 Stapler position motor JC93-00999A (*) 113-0581 Gets the staple assembly move
toward top and down direction
of paper
(*) This part is in ordering system.

Stapler unit operation

1. The stapler position motor delivers the stapler assembly to the horizontal direction (yellow line).

2. The stapler assembly checks front and rear home position and moves where the stapler position
sensors are located depending on stapling types.

2208 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

Ejector unit
Learn about the ejector unit of the inner finisher.

The ejector unit moves a bundle of stapled paper out. The ejector unit consists of ejector1 and ejector2.
The Ejector1 transfers a stapled paper loaded at the end fence unit to the ejector2 unit. During this
process, the ejector1 motor transmits the driving force to the ejector1 unit. And the ejector1 home
position sensor controls the movement of the ejector1. When the paper arrives at the ejector2 unit, the
ejector2 grabs a stack of paper and ejects it onto the output tray. The ejector2 motor is responsible for
this process, and the ejector2 motor sensor helps it to be controlled correctly. In addition, the ejector2
home position sensor is mounted to check the location of the ejector2.

Figure 6-40 Inner finisher system - ejector unit overview

Ejector unit 2209

 Figure 6-41 Inner finisher system - ejector unit detail view (1/3)

Figure 6-42 Inner finisher system - ejector unit detail view (2/3)

Figure 6-43 Inner finisher system - ejector unit detail view (3/3)

Table 6-20 Inner finisher system - ejector unit parts information

Item Part name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Description

NA Ejector SS456-61001 (*)

1 Ejector2 Not applicable Moves paper from the ejector 1

to the output tray

2 Ejector1 Not applicable Moves the stack of paper from

the end fence to the ejector2

S10 Ejector2 home sensor 0604-001393 (*) 113-0462 Detects the home position of
the ejector2

2210 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

Table 6-20 Inner finisher system - ejector unit parts information (continued)

Item Part name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Description

S16 Ejector1 home sensor 0604-001393 (*) 113-0461 Detects the home position of
the ejector1

3 Ejector motor JC90-01309A Moves the ejector1 and ejector2

assembly

M6 Ejector2 motor JC93-01168A (*) 113-0562 Moves the ejector2 forward and
assembly backward

Ejector2 motor JC31-00175A Detects the ejector2 motor

rotation

S11 Ejector2 motor sensor 0604-001393 (*) 113-0463

M7 Ejector1 motor JC93-00998A (*) 113-0561 Grabs a stack of paper, then

assembly move it to the output tray

Ejector1 motor JC31-00009C

(*) This part is in ordering system.

Ejector unit operation

1. Ejector 1 pushes aligned paper at the end fence unit to ejector 2 unit.

2. Ejector 2 grabs paper, then moves forward to the output tray unit direction.

Ejector unit 2211

 3. Ejector2 draws off paper on the output tray.

Output tray & paper holding unit

Learn about the output tray & paper holding unit of the inner finisher.

The output tray moves up and down along the rails inside the finisher, and the output tray motor controls
those movement according to the signals sent from the paper holding sensor. As paper stacks up on
the output tray, the paper holding unit is lifted by papers. When the paper holding sensor is touched, the
output tray moves downward.

The machine detects when the output tray is full as the output tray hits the lower limit switch. The output
tray top of stack sensor is mounted on both left and right sides for the case that the paper holding
sensor breaks down.

2212 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

The paper holding solenoid lifts the paper holding actuator up when a new bundle of paper come to the
output tray.

Figure 6-44 Inner finisher system - output tray unit overview

Figure 6-45 Inner finisher system - output tray unit detail view (1/2)

Figure 6-46 Inner finisher system - output tray unit detail view (2/2)

Table 6-21 Inner finisher system - output tray unit parts information

Item Part name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Description

1 Output tray JC90-01337B (*) Stacking plate for ejected paper

Output tray & paper holding unit 2213

 Table 6-21 Inner finisher system - output tray unit parts information (continued)

Item Part name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Description

M4 Output tray motor JC90-01334B (*) 113-0570 Moves the output tray up and
assembly down

Output tray motor JC31-00178B (*)

S6 Output tray motor 0604-001393 113-0473 Detects if the output tray motor
sensor is operational

2 Output tray frame JC90-01319A (*)

S7 Output tray lower limit JC90-01320A (*) 113-0472 Detects the lowest position of
switch the output tray

3 Output tray lower JC66-04200A (*) 113-0472 Detects the lowest position of
actuator the output tray

4 Output tray top of JC82-01039A (*) 113-0471 Detects abnormal movement of

stack sensor kit output tray (Output tray top of
stack sensor receiver + led)

S8 Output tray top of 0603-001309 (*)

stack sensor (receiver)

S13 Output tray top of 0601-003440

stack sensor (led)
(*) This part is in ordering system.

Figure 6-47 Inner finisher system - paper holding unit overview

2214 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

Figure 6-48 Inner finisher system - paper holding unit detail view

Table 6-22 Inner finisher system - output tray unit parts information

Item Part name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Description

1 Paper holding actuator JC90-01313A (*) Controls the output tray height,
and grabs stacked paper not to
be scattered

2 Paper holding kit JC90-01314A (*) Paper holding solenoid + Paper

holding sensor

SL1 Paper holding solenoid JC33-00037A (*) 113-0591 Moves paper holding actuator
up when paper goes out to the
output tray

S9 Paper holding sensor 0604-001393 113-0470 Detects stacked paper position

(*) This part is in ordering system.

Inner finisher system - output tray & paper holding unit operation
1. Paper holding unit helps paper stores stable on the output tray. Besides it detects amount of
stacked paper and get the output tray moves downward.

Output tray & paper holding unit 2215

 2. When paper goes out to the output tray, paper holding solenoid forcibly make paper holding
actuator goes upward to create the paper passage not to be jammed by the paper holding actuator.

3. As the paper accumulates, output tray moves downward. When it reaches at the end of the moving
range, output tray lower limit switch is pressed. The switch detects paper stacks full on the output
tray.

4. In case of fatal error in the output tray unit and paper holding unit, output tray top of stack sensor
makes the machine emergency stop so that output tray unit does not move upward.

2216 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

PCA connection information
Learn about the PCA connection information.

Figure 6-49 Inner finisher system - PCA connection information

PCA connection information 2217

 Table 6-23 Inner finisher system - PCA connectors, parts, and diagnostics information

CN No. Connector name Motor Sensor Switch & Solenoid

(Diagnostics) (Diagnostics) (Diagnostics)

CN1 Rear sensor ● Punch waste box

sensor (113-0620)

● Finisher docking
sensor (113-0000)

● Entrance sensor
(113-0350)

CN2 Rear ● Rear tamper motor ● Rear tamper home ● Top cover switch
(113-0520) sensor (113-0380) (113-0420)

● Paper support motor ● Output tray top

(113-0571) of stack sensor
(113-0471)

● Exit sensor
(113-0360)

● End fence sensor

(113-0361)

● Paper support home

sensor (113-0481)

CN3 Rear joint ● Stapler motor ● Stapler low ● Front cover switch
(113-0550) sensor(113-0440) (113-0420)

● Stapler position ● Stapler ready sensor

motor (113-0581) (113-0451)

● Entrance motor ● Stapler home

(113-0501) sensor(113-0430)

● Punch motor ● Stapler position

(113-0610) sensor (front home)
(113-0491)

● Stapler position
sensor (rear home)
(113-0492)

● Punch waste full

sensor (113-0621)

● Punch motor
sensor(113-0600)

● Punch home sensor

(113-0612)

CN4 Ejector ● Ejector2 motor ● Ejector2 motor

(113-0562) sensor (113-0463)

● Ejector1 motor ● Ejector2 home

(113-0561) sensor (113-0462)

● Ejector1 home
sensor (113-0461)

CN5 Main (to the main PBA)

2218 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 Table 6-23 Inner finisher system - PCA connectors, parts, and diagnostics information (continued)

CN No. Connector name Motor Sensor Switch & Solenoid

(Diagnostics) (Diagnostics) (Diagnostics)

CN6 Output tray lower limit ● Output tray lower

switch limit switch (113-0472)

CN7 Front ● Exit motor (113-0502) ● Output tray motor

sensor (113-0473)
● Main paddle motor
(113-0510) ● Main paddle home
sensor (113-0370)
● Output tray motor
(113-0570) ● Front tamper home
sensor (113-0390)
● Front tamper motor
(113-0530) ● Paper holding
sensor (113-0470)

● Output tray top

of stack sensor
(113-0471)

CN9 Paper holding solenoid ● Paper holding

solenoid (113-0591)

CN10 Stapler position sensor ● Stapler position

sensor (mid front) (-)

● Stapler position
sensor (mid rear) (-)

Service approach
Learn about the service approach of the inner finisher.

CAUTION: When working on the product, do not pick up the unit by the output tray, which will detach
under the weight of the product.

Precautions when replacing parts

Learn about precautions when replacing parts.

Precautions when replacing parts

Learn about precautions when replacing parts.

Precautions when assembling and disassembling

● Use only HP approved replacement parts. Make sure that the part number, product name, voltage,
and current or temperature ratings are correct. Failure to do so might result in damage to the
machine, circuit overload, fire, or electric shock.

● Do not make unauthorized changes or additions to the printer. Unauthorized changes might cause
the printer to malfunction and create electric shock or fire hazards.

● Use caution when dismantling the unit. Take note of the location of each screw or other part. This
printer contains different kinds of screws. Using the wrong screw might lead to system failure, short
circuit or electric shock.

Service approach 2219

 ● Do not disassemble the laser scanner assembly. Once the laser scanner assembly is
disassembled, dust might enter the mirror chamber and will seriously degrade print quality. There
are no serviceable parts inside the laser scanner assembly.

● Regularly check the condition of the power cable, plug and socket. Bad contacts might lead to
overheating and fire. Damaged cables might lead to electric shock or unit malfunction.

Precautions when handling PCAs

Static electricity might damage a PCA. Use approved, anti-static precautions when handling or storing a
PCA. Service personnel should use grounded ESD straps and/or mats when handling PCAs.

● Precautions when moving and storing a PCA

– Keep PCA in a conductive case, anti-static bag, or wrapped in aluminum foil.

– Do not store a PCA where it is exposed to direct sunlight.

● Precautions when replacing a PCA

– Disconnect power cables before disconnecting other cables.

– Do not touch any soldered connections, connector terminals, or other electronic parts when
handling insulated parts.

● Precautions when checking a PCA

– Touch a grounded area of the printer chassis to discharge static electric charge before
touching a PCA.

– Do not touch a PCA with bare hands or metal objects. Doing so might create a short circuit or
cause electric shock. Use caution when handling a PCA with moving parts such as sensors,
motors, or lamps, as they might become very hot.

– Use caution when fitting and removing screws. Watch for hidden screens. Make sure that the
correct screw is used and make sure that when toothed washers are removed, they are refitted
in their original positions.

– Place the product on an ESD workstation or mat, or use an ESD strap (if one is available). If
an ESD workstation, mat, or strap is not available, ground yourself by touching the sheet-metal
chassis before touching an ESD-sensitive part.

Releasing plastic latches

Many of the parts are held in place with plastic latches. The latches might easily break. Be careful when
releasing them. To remove such parts, press the hook end of the latch away from the part to which it is
latched.

Precautions when handling PCA

Static electric might damage a PCA. Use approved, anti-static precautions when handling or storing a
PCA. Service personnel should use grounded ESD straps and/or mats when handling PCAs.

● Precautions when moving and storing a PCA

– Keep PCA in a conductive case, anti-static bag, or wrapped in aluminum foil.

– Do not store a PCA where it is exposed to direct sunlight.

2220 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 ● Precautions when replacing a PCA

– Disconnect power cables before disconnecting other cables.

– Do not touch any soldered connections, connector terminals, or other electronic parts when
handling insulated parts.

● Precautions when checking a PCA

– Touch a grounded area of the printer chassis to discharge static electric charge before
touching a PCA.

– Do not touch a PCA with bare hands or metal objects. Doing so might create a short circuit or
cause electric shock. Use caution when handling a PCA with moving parts such as sensors,
motors, or lamps, as they might become very hot.

– Use caution when fitting and removing screws. Watch for hidden screens. Make sure that the
correct screw is used and make sure that when toothed washers are removed, they are refitted
in their original positions.

– Place the product on an ESD workstation or mat, or use an ESD strap (if one is available). If
an ESD workstation, mat, or strap is not available, ground yourself by touching the sheet-metal
chassis before touching an ESD-sensitive part.

Releasing plastic latches

Learn about releasing plastic latches.

Many of the parts are held in place with plastic latches. The latches can break easily; release them
carefully. To remove such parts, press the hook end of the latch away from the part to which it is latched.

Before performing service

Learn what to do before performing service.

● Remove all paper from the product.

● Turn off the power using the power button.

● Unplug the power cable and interface cable or cables.

● Place the product on an ESD workstation or mat, or use an ESD strap (if one is available). If an
ESD workstation, mat, or strap is not available, ground yourself by touching the sheet-metal chassis
before touching an ESD-sensitive part.

Releasing plastic latches 2221

 ● Remove the toner cartridges.

● Remove the Tray 2 cassette.

ESD precautions
Learn the importance of electrostatic discharge.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Look for the ESD reminder
when removing printer parts. Always perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If
an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground
before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

After performing service

Learn what to do after performing service.

● Verify that the service performed was successful.

● Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

● Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

● Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new
issues.

● Verify that the printer is in better condition than when you arrived, cosmetically and electrically.

Post-service test
Perform the following tests to verify that the repair or replacement was successful:

Print-quality test
Learn about the print-quality test.

1. Verify that you have completed the necessary reassembly steps.

2. Make sure that the tray contains clean, unmarked paper.

3. Attach the power cord and interface cable or interface cables, and then turn on the product.

4. Print a configuration page.

5. Print a print quality page, and then verify that there are no lines, streaks, banding, or other print
quality defects.

6. Send a print job from the host computer, and then verify that the output meets expectations.

Order parts by authorized service providers

Find information about ordering parts and supplies for the printer.

Ordering
Order parts by authorized service providers.

2222 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 Table 6-24 Ordering

Item or provider Description

Order supplies and paper www.hp.com/go/suresupply

Order parts from authorized service providers www.hp.com/buy/parts or partsurfer.hp.com

Order through service or support providers Contact an HP-authorized service or support provider.

Order using the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS) To access, in a supported web browser on your
computer, enter the printer IP address or host name
in the address/URL field. The EWS contains a link to
the HP SureSupply web site, which provides options for
purchasing Original HP supplies.

Orderable parts
Not all of the parts shown in the exploded assembly diagrams are orderable parts.

Refer to the tables following the diagrams or the alphabetical/numerical parts lists to determine if a part
is orderable.

Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement (inner finisher)

Learn about parts, diagrams, removal and replacement (inner finisher)

NOTE: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work
at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-
metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-
sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

Orderable parts 2223

 Parts and diagrams (inner finisher)
View inner finisher exploded diagrams and parts lists.

Inner finisher (main)

Parts diagram and parts list for the inner finisher (main).

Figure 6-50 Inner finisher (main)

6-1

6-2

Table 6-25 Inner finisher (main)

Ref Part number Description Qty

Complete Y1G00-67901 Inner finisher whole unit 1

1 JC90-01310A Front paper support 1

2 JC90-01311A Rear paper support 1

3 JC82-00899A Front tamper unit assembly 1

4 JC82-00900A Rear tamper unit assembly 1

2224 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

Table 6-25 Inner finisher (main) (continued)

Ref Part number Description Qty

5 SS456-61001 Ejector 1

6 JC90-01334B Output tray motor assembly 1

6-1 JC31-00178B Output tray motor 1

6-2 0604-001393 Output tray motor sensor 1

7 JC90-01336A Sub paddle unit 1

8 JC90-01337B Output tray 1

10 JC81-07408B Staple cartridge 1

11 JC90-01343B Punch cover 1

13 6102-003354 Slide pack 2

14 JC61-07713A Wavy roller retainer 1

Not shown JC39-02169A Main interface harness 1

Inner finisher (main) 2225

 Inner finisher (covers)
Parts diagram and parts list for the inner finisher (covers)

Figure 6-51 Inner finisher (covers)

Table 6-26 Inner finisher (covers)

Ref Part number Description Qty

1 JC90-01321B Front cover 1

2 JC90-01322B Middle cover 1

3 JC90-01323B Top cover 1

4 JC90-01324B Left cover 1

4-1 JC82-01039A Output tray top of stack sensor kit 1

5 JC63-04750B Rear cover 1

6 JC63-04792B PCA cover 1

7 JC90-01546A Exit bin full 1

2226 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

Inner finisher (main paddle unit, entrance unit, exit unit, paper holding unit, and output tray unit)
Parts diagram and parts list for the inner finisher (main paddle unit, entrance unit, exit unit, paper holding
unit, and output tray unit).

Figure 6-52 Inner finisher (main paddle unit, entrance unit, exit unit, paper holding unit, and output tray
unit)

23-1

23
23-2

8-1

8-2

25 20
15-2
15-1

24

Table 6-27 Inner finisher (main paddle unit, entrance unit, exit unit, paper holding unit, and output tray unit)

Ref Part number Description Qty

1 0604-001393 Main paddle home sensor 2

2 JC92-02774B Main PCA 1

4 6602-003644 Entrance motor timing belt 1

5 JC82-01038A Paddle kit 1

5-1 JC63-04957A Paddle A 2

5-2 JC63-04958A Paddle B 2

5-3 JC81-07560A Paddle holder 4

8-1 JC66-04243A Entrance roller 1

8-2 JC66-04243A Middle roller 1

Inner finisher (main paddle unit, entrance unit, exit unit, paper holding unit, and output tray unit) 2227
 Table 6-27 Inner finisher (main paddle unit, entrance unit, exit unit, paper holding unit, and output tray unit)
(continued)

Ref Part number Description Qty

10 JC90-01344A Entrance motor assembly 1

13 JC66-04199A Exit sensor actuator 1

14 JC90-01313A Paper holding actuator 1

15 JC90-01314A Paper holding kit 1

15-1 JC33-00037A Paper holding solenoid 1

15-2 0604-001393 Paper holding sensor 1

16 JC90-01320A Output tray lower limit switch 1

16-3 JC66-04200A Output tray lower limit switch actuator 1

17 JC93-01001A Main paddle motor assembly 1

17-1 JC31-00149A Main paddle motor 1

19-1 JC66-04244A Exit roller 1

19-2 JC61-07449A Front compile guide 1

19-3 JC61-07450A Rear compile guide 1

20 JC90-01331A Exit motor assembly 1

20-1 JC31-00169B Exit motor 1

21 JC90-01319A Output tray frame 1

22 JC92-02780A Rear joint PCA 1

23 shown JC90-01334B Output tray motor assembly 1

23-1 JC31-00178B Output tray motor 1

23-2 0604-001393 Output tray motor sensor 1

24 0604-001415 Exit sensor 1

25 JC61-06391A Middle lower guide 1

2228 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

Inner finisher (paper support unit)
Parts diagram and parts list for the inner finisher (paper support unit).

Figure 6-53 Inner finisher (paper support unit)

2-2
2-1

1 2

Table 6-28 Inner finisher (paper support unit)

Ref Part number Description Qty

1 JC90-01310A Front paper support 1

2 JC90-01311A Rear paper support 1

2-1 0604-001393 Paper support home sensor 1

2-2 JC93-00802B Paper support motor assembly 1

Inner finisher (paper support unit) 2229

 Inner finisher (tamper unit)
Parts diagram and parts list for the inner finisher (tamper unit).

Figure 6-54 Inner finisher (tamper unit)

2 2-1
2-2

1-1

1-2

Table 6-29 Inner finisher (tamper unit)

Ref Part number Description Qty

1 JC82-00900A Rear tamper unit 1

1-1 0604-001393 Rear tamper home sensor 1

1-2 JC93-01001A Rear tamper motor assembly 1

2 JC82-00899A Front tamper unit 1

2-1 0604-001393 Front tamper home sensor 1

2-2 JC93-01001A Front tamper motor assembly 1

2230 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

Inner finisher (stapler unit, end fence unit)
Parts diagram and parts list for the inner finisher (stapler unit, end fence unit).

Figure 6-55 Inner finisher (stapler unit, end fence unit)

7
6

8
2

Table 6-30 Inner finisher (stapler unit, end fence unit)

Ref Part number Description Qty

1 0604-001381 End fence sensor 1

2 0604-001393 Stapler position sensor 1

3 JC93-00999A Stapler position motor 1

4 0604-001381 Punch waste full sensor 1

5 JC39-01610A Top cover switch 1

6 0604-001393 Finisher docking sensor 1

Inner finisher (stapler unit, end fence unit) 2231

 Table 6-30 Inner finisher (stapler unit, end fence unit) (continued)

Ref Part number Description Qty

7 0604-001393 Punch waste box sensor 1

8 JC39-01610A Compile cover switch 1

2232 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

Inner finisher (stapler assembly, entrance unit)
Parts diagram and parts list for the inner finisher (stapler assembly, entrance unit).

Figure 6-56 Inner finisher (stapler assembly, entrance unit)

Table 6-31 Inner finisher (stapler assembly, entrance unit)

Ref Part number Description Qty

1 JC59-00040A Stapler assembly 1

1-1 JC81-07408B Staple cartridge 1

2 JC90-01343B Punch cover 1

2-1 0604-001381 Entrance sensor 1

Not shown SS465-67001 Punch PBA 2-4 hole 1

Not shown SS467-67001 Punch PBA 2-3 hole 1

Not shown SS466-67001 Punch PBA Swedish 1

Inner finisher (stapler assembly, entrance unit) 2233

 Inner finisher (ejector unit)
Parts diagram and parts list for the inner finisher (ejector unit).

Figure 6-57 Inner finisher (ejector unit)

5 7
2
6

Table 6-32 Inner finisher (ejector unit)

Ref Part number Description Qty

1 SS456-61001 Ejector 1

2 0604-001393 Ejector2 home sensor 1

3 0604-001393 Ejector1 home sensor 1

4 JC90-01309A Ejector motor assembly 1

5 JC93-01168A Ejector2 motor assembly 1

6 0604-001393 Ejector2 motor sensor 1

7 JC93-00998A Ejector1 motor assembly 1

Covers

2234 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

Removal and replacement: Front cover (C1)
Learn how to remove and replace the front cover.

To view tear down and reassembling video of the inner finisher, click the link below.

View a tear down video of the inner finisher.

View a reassembling video of the inner finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
http://www.hp.com/buy/parts .

Table 6-33 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01321B Front cover

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

● Connect the power cable.

● Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

Removal and replacement: Front cover (C1) 2235

 1. Remove the front cover
Follow these steps to remove the front cover.

1. Open the front door and open the punch cover.

2. Remove three screws in the front.

3. Remove the lever.

4. Open the top cover.

5. From the right side of the front cover, carefully lift and pry toward the top-left corner to remove the
front cover.

Figure 6-58 Remove the front cover

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using

2236 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Rear cover (C8)

Learn how to remove and replace the rear cover.

To view teardown and reassembling video of the inner finisher, click the link below.

View a teardown video of the inner finisher.

View a reassembling video of the inner finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
http://www.hp.com/buy/parts .

Table 6-34 Part information

Part number Part description

JC63-04750B Rear cover

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

Removal and replacement: Rear cover (C8) 2237

 After performing service
Turn the printer power on

● Connect the power cable.

● Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

1. Open the top cover.

Figure 6-59 Open the top cover

2. Remove three screws.

3. Release hooks carefully and remove the rear cover.

Figure 6-60 Remove the rear cover

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

2238 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Middle cover (C3)

Learn how to remove and replace the middle cover.

To view teardown and reassembling video of the inner finisher, click the link below.

View a teardown video of the inner finisher.

View a reassembling video of the inner finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

Removal and replacement: Middle cover (C3) 2239

 ● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
http://www.hp.com/buy/parts .

Table 6-35 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01322B Middle cover

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

● Connect the power cable.

● Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

1. Open the top cover.

Figure 6-61 Open the top cover

2. Remove three screws.

2240 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 3. Release hooks carefully and remove the rear cover.

Figure 6-62 Remove the rear cover

2. Remove the middle cover

Follow these steps to remove the middle cover.

1. Open the front door and then open the punch cover.

Figure 6-63 Open the front door and punch cover

Remove the middle cover 2241

 2. Remove left-side one screw at the rear of the inner finisher, and then remove the middle cover by
lifting off the hinge pins at the front.

Figure 6-64 Remove the middle cover

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Top cover (C2)

Learn how to remove and replace the top cover.

To view teardown and reassembling video of the inner finisher, click the link below.

2242 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 View a teardown video of the inner finisher.

View a reassembling video of the inner finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
http://www.hp.com/buy/parts .

Table 6-36 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01323B Top cover

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

● Connect the power cable.

● Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

Remove the rear cover 2243

 1. Open the top cover.

Figure 6-65 Open the top cover

2. Remove three screws.

3. Release hooks carefully and remove the rear cover.

Figure 6-66 Remove the rear cover

2. Remove the top cover

Follow these steps to remove the top cover.

2244 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 Figure 6-67 Remove the top cover

■ Remove one screw at the rear of the inner finisher, and then remove the top cover by lifting off the
hinge pins at the front.

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: PCA cover (C6)

Learn how to remove and replace the PCA cover.

To view teardown and reassembling video of the inner finisher, click the link below.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2245

 View a teardown video of the inner finisher.

View a reassembling video of the inner finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
http://www.hp.com/buy/parts .

Table 6-37 Part information

Part number Part description

JC63-04792B PCA cover

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

● Connect the power cable.

● Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the PCA cover

Follow these steps to remove the PCA cover.

2246 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 ■ Remove two screws, and then remove the PCA cover.

Figure 6-68 Remove the PCA cover

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2247

 Removal and replacement: Left cover (C7)
Learn how to remove and replace the left cover.

To view teardown and reassembling video of the inner finisher, click the link below.

View a teardown video of the inner finisher.

View a reassembling video of the inner finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
http://www.hp.com/buy/parts .

Table 6-38 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01324B Left cover

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

● Connect the power cable.

● Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

2248 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

1. Remove the front cover
Follow these steps to remove the front cover.

1. Open the front door and open the punch cover.

2. Remove three screws in the front.

3. Remove the lever.

4. Open the top cover.

5. From the right side of the front cover, carefully lift and pry toward the top-left corner to remove the
front cover.

Figure 6-69 Remove the front cover

2. Remove the rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

1. Open the top cover.

Figure 6-70 Open the top cover

2. Remove three screws.

Remove the front cover 2249

 3. Release hooks carefully and remove the rear cover.

Figure 6-71 Remove the rear cover

3. Remove the output tray

Follow these steps to remove the output tray.

1. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-72 Remove four screws

2250 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 2. Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher, and then remove the output tray.

Figure 6-73 Remove the output tray.

4. Remove the output tray frame

Follow these steps to remove the output tray frame.

1. Rotate the pulley until the output tray frame depart from the gear.

Figure 6-74 Remove the pulley

Remove the output tray frame 2251

 2. Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher, and then remove the output tray frame.

Figure 6-75 Remove the output tray frame

TIP: Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher when reassembling. Be sure to level
the output tray.

Use the following video and instructions when the reinstalling the output tray frame assembly.

View a video for aligning the inner finisher output tray.

a. Position the first wheel into the channel on both sides while pushing the paper holding
actuator.

b. Let the second wheel rest on the channel on both sides simultaneously.

2252 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

c. Gently squeeze the wheels into channel until the output tray frame meet the gear.

d. Rotate the pulley until the output tray frame is no longer lifted. It can make to level the output
tray frame.

e. Rotate the pulley in the opposite direction.

Remove the output tray frame 2253

 5. Remove the PCA cover
Follow these steps to remove the PCA cover.

■ Remove two screws, and then remove the PCA cover.

Figure 6-76 Remove the PCA cover

6. Remove the left cover

Follow these steps to remove the left cover.

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-77 Remove two screws

2254 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

2. Remove four screws from both front and rear sides.

Figure 6-78 Remove four screws

3. Unplug two inline connectors, and then remove the left cover.

Figure 6-79 Unplug two connectors

TIP: Be sure to check the hook when reassembling.

Remove the left cover 2255

 7. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Entrance unit

Removal and replacement: Entrance sensor (S1)

Learn how to remove and replace the entrance sensor.

2256 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 To view teardown and reassembling video of the inner finisher, click the link below.

View a teardown video of the inner finisher.

View a reassembling video of the inner finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-39 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001381 Entrance sensor

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

● Connect the power cable.

● Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

Remove the rear cover 2257

 1. Open the top cover.

Figure 6-80 Open the top cover

2. Remove three screws.

3. Release hooks carefully and remove the rear cover.

Figure 6-81 Remove the rear cover

2. Remove the punch cover

Follow these steps to remove the punch cover.

2258 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

1. Unplug the connector. Remove the e-ring, and then remove the slide shaft at the rear of the inner
finisher.

Figure 6-82 Remove the slide shaft

2. Open the punch cover.

Figure 6-83 Open the punch cover

Remove the punch cover 2259

 3. Remove the front punch sheet, and then remove the e-ring and the washer. And then remove the
punch cover.

Figure 6-84 Remove the punch cover

3. Remove the entrance sensor

Follow these steps to remove the entrance sensor.

2260 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

1. Loosen the adhesive tape around, and then remove four screws. And then remove the punch cover.

Figure 6-85 Remove the punch cover

2. Remove one screw, unplug the connector, and then remove the entrance sensor bracket.

Figure 6-86 Remove the entrance sensor bracket

Remove the entrance sensor 2261

 3. Remove one screw, and then remove the sensor.

Figure 6-87 Remove the entrance sensor

4. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Entrance motor (M10)

Learn how to remove and replace the entrance motor.

To view teardown and reassembling video of the inner finisher, click the link below.

View a teardown video of the inner finisher.

2262 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 View a reassembling video of the inner finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-40 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01344A Entrance motor assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

● Connect the power cable.

● Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the front cover

Follow these steps to remove the front cover.

1. Open the front door and open the punch cover.

2. Remove three screws in the front.

Remove the front cover 2263

 3. Remove the lever.

4. Open the top cover.

5. From the right side of the front cover, carefully lift and pry toward the top-left corner to remove the
front cover.

Figure 6-88 Remove the front cover

2. Remove the rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

1. Open the top cover.

Figure 6-89 Open the top cover

2. Remove three screws.

2264 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 3. Release hooks carefully and remove the rear cover.

Figure 6-90 Remove the rear cover

3. Remove the middle cover

Follow these steps to remove the middle cover.

1. Open the front door and then open the punch cover.

Figure 6-91 Open the front door and punch cover

Remove the middle cover 2265

 2. Remove left-side one screw at the rear of the inner finisher, and then remove the middle cover by
lifting off the hinge pins at the front.

Figure 6-92 Remove the middle cover

4. Remove the punch cover

Follow these steps to remove the punch cover.

1. Unplug the connector. Remove the e-ring, and then remove the slide shaft at the rear of the inner
finisher.

Figure 6-93 Remove the slide shaft

2. Open the punch cover.

Figure 6-94 Open the punch cover

2266 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 3. Remove the front punch sheet, and then remove the e-ring and the washer. And then remove the
punch cover.

Figure 6-95 Remove the punch cover

5. Remove the diverter guide and the middle roller

Follow these steps to remove the diverter guide and the middle roller.

1. On the front of the inner finisher, remove the e-ring and bushing.

Figure 6-96 Remove the e-ring and bushing

Remove the diverter guide and the middle roller 2267

 2. On the rear of the inner finisher, remove the e-ring, pulley, bushing, belt, and spring (slightly hidden
from view).

Figure 6-97 Remove the e-ring, pulley, bushing, belt, and spring

3. Remove the diverter guide and the middle roller.

Figure 6-98 Remove the diverter guide and the middle roller

6. Remove the middle paper guide

Follow these steps to remove the middle paper guide.

2268 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 1. Remove six screws, and then open the middle paper guide in the direction of the arrow.

Figure 6-99 Open the middle paper guide

NOTE: Becareful not to damage the sensor connector.

2. Unplug the connector under the middle paper guide. And then, remove the middle paper guide.

Figure 6-100 Remove the middle paper guide

7. Remove the entrance motor

Follow these steps to remove the entrance motor.

Remove the entrance motor 2269

 1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-101 Remove two screws

2. Open the clamps, and then unplug the connector.

Figure 6-102 Unplug the connector

2270 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 3. Remove two screws, and then remove the motor.

Figure 6-103 Remove the entrance motor

8. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Exit unit

Unpack the replacement assembly 2271

 Removal and replacement: Exit roller (R3)
Learn how to remove and replace the exit roller.

To view teardown and reassembling video of the inner finisher, click the link below.

View a teardown video of the inner finisher.

View a reassembling video of the inner finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
http://www.hp.com/buy/parts .

Table 6-41 Part information

Part number Part description

JC66-04244A Exit roller

JC61-07449A Front compile guide

JC61-07450A Rear compile guide

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

● Connect the power cable.

● Use the power switch to turn the power on.

2272 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 Post service test
Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the front cover

Follow these steps to remove the front cover.

1. Open the front door and open the punch cover.

2. Remove three screws in the front.

3. Remove the lever.

4. Open the top cover.

5. From the right side of the front cover, carefully lift and pry toward the top-left corner to remove the
front cover.

Figure 6-104 Remove the front cover

2. Remove the rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

1. Open the top cover.

Figure 6-105 Open the top cover

Remove the front cover 2273

 2. Remove three screws.

3. Release hooks carefully and remove the rear cover.

Figure 6-106 Remove the rear cover

3. Remove the sub paddle unit

Follow these steps to remove the sub paddle unit.

1. Open the top cover, and then remove one screw securing the sub paddle unit.

Figure 6-107 Remove one screw

2274 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 2. Remove the e-ring, and then remove the pulley and timing belt. And then remove the e-ring and the
bushing.

Figure 6-108 Remove the e-ring, pulley, timing belt, and bushing

3. Lift up and remove the sub paddle unit.

Figure 6-109 Remove the sub paddle unit

4. Remove the exit roller

Follow these steps to remove the exit roller.

Remove the exit roller 2275

 1. Remove the guide on the center of the exit roller.

Figure 6-110 Remove the guide

2. On the front of the inner finisher, release the timing belt connected to the exit motor.

Figure 6-111 Release the timing belt

2276 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

3. Remove five screws securing the rear harness guide.

Figure 6-112 Remove five screws

4. On the rear of the inner finisher, remove the e-ring and the pulley and then remove the e-ring and
the bushing.

Figure 6-113 Remove e-ring, pulley, and bushing

Remove the exit roller 2277

 5. Push the bushing to detach it, and then remove the exit roller.

Figure 6-114 Remove the exit roller

5. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

2278 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

Removal and replacement: Exit sensor (S21)
Learn how to remove and replace the exit sensor.

To view teardown and reassembling video of the inner finisher, click the link below.

View a teardown video of the inner finisher.

View a reassembling video of the inner finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-42 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001415 Exit sensor

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

● Connect the power cable.

● Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

Removal and replacement: Exit sensor (S21) 2279

 1. Remove the front cover
Follow these steps to remove the front cover.

1. Open the front door and open the punch cover.

2. Remove three screws in the front.

3. Remove the lever.

4. Open the top cover.

5. From the right side of the front cover, carefully lift and pry toward the top-left corner to remove the
front cover.

Figure 6-115 Remove the front cover

2. Remove the rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

1. Open the top cover.

Figure 6-116 Open the top cover

2. Remove three screws.

2280 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 3. Release hooks carefully and remove the rear cover.

Figure 6-117 Remove the rear cover

3. Remove the middle cover

Follow these steps to remove the middle cover.

1. Open the front door and then open the punch cover.

Figure 6-118 Open the front door and punch cover

Remove the middle cover 2281

 2. Remove left-side one screw at the rear of the inner finisher, and then remove the middle cover by
lifting off the hinge pins at the front.

Figure 6-119 Remove the middle cover

4. Remove the punch cover

Follow these steps to remove the punch cover.

1. Unplug the connector. Remove the e-ring, and then remove the slide shaft at the rear of the inner
finisher.

Figure 6-120 Remove the slide shaft

2. Open the punch cover.

Figure 6-121 Open the punch cover

2282 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 3. Remove the front punch sheet, and then remove the e-ring and the washer. And then remove the
punch cover.

Figure 6-122 Remove the punch cover

5. Remove the diverter guide and the middle roller

Follow these steps to remove the diverter guide and the middle roller.

1. On the front of the inner finisher, remove the e-ring and bushing.

Figure 6-123 Remove the e-ring and bushing

Remove the diverter guide and the middle roller 2283

 2. On the rear of the inner finisher, remove the e-ring, pulley, bushing, belt, and spring (slightly hidden
from view).

Figure 6-124 Remove the e-ring, pulley, bushing, belt, and spring

3. Remove the diverter guide and the middle roller.

Figure 6-125 Remove the diverter guide and the middle roller

6. Remove the middle paper guide

Follow these steps to remove the middle paper guide.

2284 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 1. Remove six screws, and then open the middle paper guide in the direction of the arrow.

Figure 6-126 Open the middle paper guide

NOTE: Becareful not to damage the sensor connector.

2. Unplug the connector under the middle paper guide. And then, remove the middle paper guide.

Figure 6-127 Remove the middle paper guide

7. Remove the exit sensor

Follow these steps to remove the exit sensor.

Remove the exit sensor 2285

 ■ Remove the exit sensor from the middle paper guide.

Figure 6-128 Remove the exit sensor

8. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

2286 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Exit motor (M2)

Learn how to remove and replace the exit motor.

To view teardown and reassembling video of the inner finisher, click the link below.

View a teardown video of the inner finisher.

View a reassembling video of the inner finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-43 Part information

Part number Part description

JC31-00169B Exit motor

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

Removal and replacement: Exit motor (M2) 2287

 ● Connect the power cable.

● Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the front cover

Follow these steps to remove the front cover.

1. Open the front door and open the punch cover.

2. Remove three screws in the front.

3. Remove the lever.

4. Open the top cover.

5. From the right side of the front cover, carefully lift and pry toward the top-left corner to remove the
front cover.

Figure 6-129 Remove the front cover

2. Remove the exit motor bracket

Follow these steps to remove the exit motor bracket.

2288 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 ■ Remove two screws, unplug the motor connector. And then remove exit motor bracket.

Figure 6-130 Remove the exit motor bracket

3. Remove the exit motor

Follow these steps to remove the exit motor.

■ Remove two screws, and then remove the exit motor from the bracket.

Figure 6-131 Remove the exit motor

4. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Remove the exit motor 2289

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Paper support unit

Removal and replacement: Front paper support

Learn how to remove and replace the front paper support.

To view teardown and reassembling video of the inner finisher, click the link below.

View a teardown video of the inner finisher.

View a reassembling video of the inner finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

2290 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 ● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
http://www.hp.com/buy/parts .

Table 6-44 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01310A Front paper support

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

● Connect the power cable.

● Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the front cover

Follow these steps to remove the front cover.

1. Open the front door and open the punch cover.

2. Remove three screws in the front.

3. Remove the lever.

4. Open the top cover.

Remove the front cover 2291

 5. From the right side of the front cover, carefully lift and pry toward the top-left corner to remove the
front cover.

Figure 6-132 Remove the front cover

2. Remove the rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

1. Open the top cover.

Figure 6-133 Open the top cover

2. Remove three screws.

2292 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 3. Release hooks carefully and remove the rear cover.

Figure 6-134 Remove the rear cover

3. Remove the output tray

Follow these steps to remove the output tray.

1. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-135 Remove four screws

Remove the output tray 2293

 2. Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher, and then remove the output tray.

Figure 6-136 Remove the output tray.

4. Remove the output tray frame

Follow these steps to remove the output tray frame.

1. Rotate the pulley until the output tray frame depart from the gear.

Figure 6-137 Remove the pulley

2294 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

2. Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher, and then remove the output tray frame.

Figure 6-138 Remove the output tray frame

TIP: Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher when reassembling. Be sure to level
the output tray.

Use the following video and instructions when the reinstalling the output tray frame assembly.

View a video for aligning the inner finisher output tray.

a. Position the first wheel into the channel on both sides while pushing the paper holding
actuator.

b. Let the second wheel rest on the channel on both sides simultaneously.

Remove the output tray frame 2295

 c. Gently squeeze the wheels into channel until the output tray frame meet the gear.

d. Rotate the pulley until the output tray frame is no longer lifted. It can make to level the output
tray frame.

e. Rotate the pulley in the opposite direction.

2296 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

5. Remove the PCA cover
Follow these steps to remove the PCA cover.

■ Remove two screws, and then remove the PCA cover.

Figure 6-139 Remove the PCA cover

6. Remove the left cover

Follow these steps to remove the left cover.

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-140 Remove two screws

Remove the PCA cover 2297

 2. Remove four screws from both front and rear sides.

Figure 6-141 Remove four screws

3. Unplug two inline connectors, and then remove the left cover.

Figure 6-142 Unplug two connectors

TIP: Be sure to check the hook when reassembling.

2298 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

7. Remove the front harness guide
Follow these steps to remove the front harness guide.

1. Open one clamp and unplug five connectors, and then remove the wire harness from the front
harness guide.

Remove the front harness guide 2299

 2. Remove four screws, and then remove the front harness guide.

Figure 6-143 Remove the front harness guide

8. Remove the output tray motor assembly

Follow these steps to remove the output tray motor assembly.

■ Remove three screws, and then remove the output tray motor assembly.

Figure 6-144 Remove the output tray motor assembly

2300 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

9. Remove the output tray lower limit switch
Follow these steps to remove the output tray lower limit switch.

■ Remove one screw, and then remove the output tray lower limit switch.

Figure 6-145 Remove the output tray lower limit switch

10. Remove the paper holding

Follow these steps to remove the paper holding.

1. Remove the paper holding actuator spring.

Figure 6-146 Remove the paper holding actuator spring

Remove the output tray lower limit switch 2301

 2. Remove the e-ring and the rack pinion gear. And then remove the pin and the e-ring, and then
remove the bushing.

Figure 6-147 Remove e-ring, rack pinion gear, pin, and bushing

NOTE: Be sure not to lose the pin.

3. Carefully remove the paper holding shaft and the actuator.

Figure 6-148 Remove the paper holding shaft and the actuator

2302 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

11. Remove the sub paddle unit
Follow these steps to remove the sub paddle unit.

1. Open the top cover, and then remove one screw securing the sub paddle unit.

Figure 6-149 Remove one screw

Remove the sub paddle unit 2303

 2. Remove the e-ring, and then remove the pulley and timing belt. And then remove the e-ring and the
bushing.

Figure 6-150 Remove the e-ring, pulley, timing belt, and bushing

3. Lift up and remove the sub paddle unit.

Figure 6-151 Remove the sub paddle unit

12. Remove the exit roller

Follow these steps to remove the exit roller.

2304 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

1. Remove the guide on the center of the exit roller.

Figure 6-152 Remove the guide

2. On the front of the inner finisher, release the timing belt connected to the exit motor.

Figure 6-153 Release the timing belt

Remove the exit roller 2305

 3. Remove five screws securing the rear harness guide.

Figure 6-154 Remove five screws

4. On the rear of the inner finisher, remove the e-ring and the pulley and then remove the e-ring and
the bushing.

Figure 6-155 Remove e-ring, pulley, and bushing

2306 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 5. Push the bushing to detach it, and then remove the exit roller.

Figure 6-156 Remove the exit roller

13. Remove the front tamper

Follow these steps to remove the front tamper.

1. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-157 Remove four screws

Remove the front tamper 2307

 2. Unplug the connector and release the hook, and then pull the front tamper up to remove.

Figure 6-158 Remove the front tamper

14. Remove the rear tamper

Follow these steps to remove the rear tamper.

1. Remove four screws.

NOTE: Move cable guideout of position to access the screws.

Figure 6-159 Remove four screws

2308 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 2. Unplug two connectors and release the hook, and then remove the rear tamper.

Figure 6-160 Remove the rear tamper

15. Remove the ejector & paper support assembly

Follow these steps to remove the ejector & paper support assembly.

1. Open one clamp, disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-161 Disconnect one connector

Remove the ejector & paper support assembly 2309

 2. Pull the rear paper support up, and then release one clamp and disconnect two connectors.

Figure 6-162 Disconnect two connector

3. Remove four screws, and then remove the ejector & paper support assembly.

Figure 6-163 Remove the ejector & paper support assembly

16. Remove the front paper support

Follow these steps to remove the front paper support.

2310 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 1. Remove the e-ring and the bushing, and then pull and remove the drive shaft.

Figure 6-164 Remove the drive shaft

TIP: When reassembling the drive shaft, ensure the paper supports are in the full down
position(against the stops).

2. Remove one screw, and then remove the front paper support.

Figure 6-165 Remove the front paper support

17. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Unpack the replacement assembly 2311

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Rear paper support

Removal and replacement: Rear paper support

Learn how to remove and replace the rear paper support.

To view teardown and reassembling video of the inner finisher, click the link below.

View a teardown video of the inner finisher.

View a reassembling video of the inner finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

2312 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 ● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
http://www.hp.com/buy/parts .

Table 6-45 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01311A Rear paper support

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

● Connect the power cable.

● Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the front cover

Follow these steps to remove the front cover.

1. Open the front door and open the punch cover.

2. Remove three screws in the front.

3. Remove the lever.

4. Open the top cover.

Remove the front cover 2313

 5. From the right side of the front cover, carefully lift and pry toward the top-left corner to remove the
front cover.

Figure 6-166 Remove the front cover

2. Remove the rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

1. Open the top cover.

Figure 6-167 Open the top cover

2. Remove three screws.

2314 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 3. Release hooks carefully and remove the rear cover.

Figure 6-168 Remove the rear cover

3. Remove the output tray

Follow these steps to remove the output tray.

1. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-169 Remove four screws

Remove the output tray 2315

 2. Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher, and then remove the output tray.

Figure 6-170 Remove the output tray.

4. Remove the output tray frame

Follow these steps to remove the output tray frame.

1. Rotate the pulley until the output tray frame depart from the gear.

Figure 6-171 Remove the pulley

2316 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

2. Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher, and then remove the output tray frame.

Figure 6-172 Remove the output tray frame

TIP: Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher when reassembling. Be sure to level
the output tray.

Use the following video and instructions when the reinstalling the output tray frame assembly.

View a video for aligning the inner finisher output tray.

a. Position the first wheel into the channel on both sides while pushing the paper holding
actuator.

b. Let the second wheel rest on the channel on both sides simultaneously.

Remove the output tray frame 2317

 c. Gently squeeze the wheels into channel until the output tray frame meet the gear.

d. Rotate the pulley until the output tray frame is no longer lifted. It can make to level the output
tray frame.

e. Rotate the pulley in the opposite direction.

2318 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

5. Remove the PCA cover
Follow these steps to remove the PCA cover.

■ Remove two screws, and then remove the PCA cover.

Figure 6-173 Remove the PCA cover

6. Remove the left cover

Follow these steps to remove the left cover.

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-174 Remove two screws

Remove the PCA cover 2319

 2. Remove four screws from both front and rear sides.

Figure 6-175 Remove four screws

3. Unplug two inline connectors, and then remove the left cover.

Figure 6-176 Unplug two connectors

TIP: Be sure to check the hook when reassembling.

2320 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

7. Remove the front harness guide
Follow these steps to remove the front harness guide.

1. Open one clamp and unplug five connectors, and then remove the wire harness from the front
harness guide.

Remove the front harness guide 2321

 2. Remove four screws, and then remove the front harness guide.

Figure 6-177 Remove the front harness guide

8. Remove the output tray motor assembly

Follow these steps to remove the output tray motor assembly.

■ Remove three screws, and then remove the output tray motor assembly.

Figure 6-178 Remove the output tray motor assembly

2322 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

9. Remove the output tray lower limit switch
Follow these steps to remove the output tray lower limit switch.

■ Remove one screw, and then remove the output tray lower limit switch.

Figure 6-179 Remove the output tray lower limit switch

10. Remove the paper holding

Follow these steps to remove the paper holding.

1. Remove the paper holding actuator spring.

Figure 6-180 Remove the paper holding actuator spring

Remove the output tray lower limit switch 2323

 2. Remove the e-ring and the rack pinion gear. And then remove the pin and the e-ring, and then
remove the bushing.

Figure 6-181 Remove e-ring, rack pinion gear, pin, and bushing

NOTE: Be sure not to lose the pin.

3. Carefully remove the paper holding shaft and the actuator.

Figure 6-182 Remove the paper holding shaft and the actuator

2324 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

11. Remove the sub paddle unit
Follow these steps to remove the sub paddle unit.

1. Open the top cover, and then remove one screw securing the sub paddle unit.

Figure 6-183 Remove one screw

Remove the sub paddle unit 2325

 2. Remove the e-ring, and then remove the pulley and timing belt. And then remove the e-ring and the
bushing.

Figure 6-184 Remove the e-ring, pulley, timing belt, and bushing

3. Lift up and remove the sub paddle unit.

Figure 6-185 Remove the sub paddle unit

12. Remove the exit roller

Follow these steps to remove the exit roller.

2326 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

1. Remove the guide on the center of the exit roller.

Figure 6-186 Remove the guide

2. On the front of the inner finisher, release the timing belt connected to the exit motor.

Figure 6-187 Release the timing belt

Remove the exit roller 2327

 3. Remove five screws securing the rear harness guide.

Figure 6-188 Remove five screws

4. On the rear of the inner finisher, remove the e-ring and the pulley and then remove the e-ring and
the bushing.

Figure 6-189 Remove e-ring, pulley, and bushing

2328 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 5. Push the bushing to detach it, and then remove the exit roller.

Figure 6-190 Remove the exit roller

13. Remove the front tamper

Follow these steps to remove the front tamper.

1. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-191 Remove four screws

Remove the front tamper 2329

 2. Unplug the connector and release the hook, and then pull the front tamper up to remove.

Figure 6-192 Remove the front tamper

14. Remove the rear tamper

Follow these steps to remove the rear tamper.

1. Remove four screws.

NOTE: Move cable guideout of position to access the screws.

Figure 6-193 Remove four screws

2330 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 2. Unplug two connectors and release the hook, and then remove the rear tamper.

Figure 6-194 Remove the rear tamper

15. Remove the ejector & paper support assembly

Follow these steps to remove the ejector & paper support assembly.

1. Open one clamp, disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-195 Disconnect one connector

Remove the ejector & paper support assembly 2331

 2. Pull the rear paper support up, and then release one clamp and disconnect two connectors.

Figure 6-196 Disconnect two connector

3. Remove four screws, and then remove the ejector & paper support assembly.

Figure 6-197 Remove the ejector & paper support assembly

16. Remove the rear paper support

Follow these steps to remove the rear paper support.

2332 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

1. Remove one screw.

Figure 6-198 Remove one screw

2. Remove the shaft while pulling the bushing in the direction of the arrow.

Figure 6-199 Remove the shaft

Remove the rear paper support 2333

 3. Remove the rear paper support with attention for pinion.

Figure 6-200 Remove the rear paper support

17. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

2334 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

Removal and replacement: Paper support home sensor (S12)
Learn how to remove and replace the paper support home sensor.

To view teardown and reassembling video of the inner finisher, click the link below.

View a teardown video of the inner finisher.

View a reassembling video of the inner finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-46 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Paper support home sensor

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

● Connect the power cable.

● Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

Removal and replacement: Paper support home sensor (S12) 2335

 1. Remove the front cover
Follow these steps to remove the front cover.

1. Open the front door and open the punch cover.

2. Remove three screws in the front.

3. Remove the lever.

4. Open the top cover.

5. From the right side of the front cover, carefully lift and pry toward the top-left corner to remove the
front cover.

Figure 6-201 Remove the front cover

2. Remove the rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

1. Open the top cover.

Figure 6-202 Open the top cover

2. Remove three screws.

2336 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 3. Release hooks carefully and remove the rear cover.

Figure 6-203 Remove the rear cover

3. Remove the output tray

Follow these steps to remove the output tray.

1. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-204 Remove four screws

Remove the output tray 2337

 2. Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher, and then remove the output tray.

Figure 6-205 Remove the output tray.

4. Remove the output tray frame

Follow these steps to remove the output tray frame.

1. Rotate the pulley until the output tray frame depart from the gear.

Figure 6-206 Remove the pulley

2338 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

2. Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher, and then remove the output tray frame.

Figure 6-207 Remove the output tray frame

TIP: Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher when reassembling. Be sure to level
the output tray.

Use the following video and instructions when the reinstalling the output tray frame assembly.

View a video for aligning the inner finisher output tray.

a. Position the first wheel into the channel on both sides while pushing the paper holding
actuator.

b. Let the second wheel rest on the channel on both sides simultaneously.

Remove the output tray frame 2339

 c. Gently squeeze the wheels into channel until the output tray frame meet the gear.

d. Rotate the pulley until the output tray frame is no longer lifted. It can make to level the output
tray frame.

e. Rotate the pulley in the opposite direction.

2340 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

5. Remove the PCA cover
Follow these steps to remove the PCA cover.

■ Remove two screws, and then remove the PCA cover.

Figure 6-208 Remove the PCA cover

6. Remove the left cover

Follow these steps to remove the left cover.

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-209 Remove two screws

Remove the PCA cover 2341

 2. Remove four screws from both front and rear sides.

Figure 6-210 Remove four screws

3. Unplug two inline connectors, and then remove the left cover.

Figure 6-211 Unplug two connectors

TIP: Be sure to check the hook when reassembling.

2342 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

7. Remove the front harness guide
Follow these steps to remove the front harness guide.

1. Open one clamp and unplug five connectors, and then remove the wire harness from the front
harness guide.

Remove the front harness guide 2343

 2. Remove four screws, and then remove the front harness guide.

Figure 6-212 Remove the front harness guide

8. Remove the output tray motor assembly

Follow these steps to remove the output tray motor assembly.

■ Remove three screws, and then remove the output tray motor assembly.

Figure 6-213 Remove the output tray motor assembly

2344 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

9. Remove the output tray lower limit switch
Follow these steps to remove the output tray lower limit switch.

■ Remove one screw, and then remove the output tray lower limit switch.

Figure 6-214 Remove the output tray lower limit switch

10. Remove the paper holding

Follow these steps to remove the paper holding.

1. Remove the paper holding actuator spring.

Figure 6-215 Remove the paper holding actuator spring

Remove the output tray lower limit switch 2345

 2. Remove the e-ring and the rack pinion gear. And then remove the pin and the e-ring, and then
remove the bushing.

Figure 6-216 Remove e-ring, rack pinion gear, pin, and bushing

NOTE: Be sure not to lose the pin.

3. Carefully remove the paper holding shaft and the actuator.

Figure 6-217 Remove the paper holding shaft and the actuator

2346 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

11. Remove the sub paddle unit
Follow these steps to remove the sub paddle unit.

1. Open the top cover, and then remove one screw securing the sub paddle unit.

Figure 6-218 Remove one screw

Remove the sub paddle unit 2347

 2. Remove the e-ring, and then remove the pulley and timing belt. And then remove the e-ring and the
bushing.

Figure 6-219 Remove the e-ring, pulley, timing belt, and bushing

3. Lift up and remove the sub paddle unit.

Figure 6-220 Remove the sub paddle unit

12. Remove the exit roller

Follow these steps to remove the exit roller.

2348 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

1. Remove the guide on the center of the exit roller.

Figure 6-221 Remove the guide

2. On the front of the inner finisher, release the timing belt connected to the exit motor.

Figure 6-222 Release the timing belt

Remove the exit roller 2349

 3. Remove five screws securing the rear harness guide.

Figure 6-223 Remove five screws

4. On the rear of the inner finisher, remove the e-ring and the pulley and then remove the e-ring and
the bushing.

Figure 6-224 Remove e-ring, pulley, and bushing

2350 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 5. Push the bushing to detach it, and then remove the exit roller.

Figure 6-225 Remove the exit roller

13. Remove the front tamper

Follow these steps to remove the front tamper.

1. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-226 Remove four screws

Remove the front tamper 2351

 2. Unplug the connector and release the hook, and then pull the front tamper up to remove.

Figure 6-227 Remove the front tamper

14. Remove the rear tamper

Follow these steps to remove the rear tamper.

1. Remove four screws.

NOTE: Move cable guideout of position to access the screws.

Figure 6-228 Remove four screws

2352 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 2. Unplug two connectors and release the hook, and then remove the rear tamper.

Figure 6-229 Remove the rear tamper

15. Remove the ejector & paper support assembly

Follow these steps to remove the ejector & paper support assembly.

1. Open one clamp, disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-230 Disconnect one connector

Remove the ejector & paper support assembly 2353

 2. Pull the rear paper support up, and then release one clamp and disconnect two connectors.

Figure 6-231 Disconnect two connector

3. Remove four screws, and then remove the ejector & paper support assembly.

Figure 6-232 Remove the ejector & paper support assembly

16. Remove the rear paper support

Follow these steps to remove the rear paper support.

2354 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

1. Remove one screw.

Figure 6-233 Remove one screw

2. Remove the shaft while pulling the bushing in the direction of the arrow.

Figure 6-234 Remove the shaft

Remove the rear paper support 2355

 3. Remove the rear paper support with attention for pinion.

Figure 6-235 Remove the rear paper support

17. Remove the paper support home sensor

Follow these steps to remove the paper support home sensor.

■ Remove the sensor from the rear paper support.

Figure 6-236 Remove the paper support home sensor

18. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2356 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Paper support motor (M8)

Learn how to remove and replace the paper support motor.

To view teardown and reassembling video of the inner finisher, click the link below.

View a teardown video of the inner finisher.

View a reassembling video of the inner finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Removal and replacement: Paper support motor (M8) 2357

 Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-47 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-00802B (not orderable) Paper support motor assembly

JC31-00149A (not orderable) Paper support motor

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

● Connect the power cable.

● Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the front cover

Follow these steps to remove the front cover.

1. Open the front door and open the punch cover.

2. Remove three screws in the front.

3. Remove the lever.

4. Open the top cover.

2358 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 5. From the right side of the front cover, carefully lift and pry toward the top-left corner to remove the
front cover.

Figure 6-237 Remove the front cover

2. Remove the rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

1. Open the top cover.

Figure 6-238 Open the top cover

2. Remove three screws.

Remove the rear cover 2359

 3. Release hooks carefully and remove the rear cover.

Figure 6-239 Remove the rear cover

3. Remove the output tray

Follow these steps to remove the output tray.

1. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-240 Remove four screws

2360 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 2. Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher, and then remove the output tray.

Figure 6-241 Remove the output tray.

4. Remove the output tray frame

Follow these steps to remove the output tray frame.

1. Rotate the pulley until the output tray frame depart from the gear.

Figure 6-242 Remove the pulley

Remove the output tray frame 2361

 2. Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher, and then remove the output tray frame.

Figure 6-243 Remove the output tray frame

TIP: Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher when reassembling. Be sure to level
the output tray.

Use the following video and instructions when the reinstalling the output tray frame assembly.

View a video for aligning the inner finisher output tray.

a. Position the first wheel into the channel on both sides while pushing the paper holding
actuator.

b. Let the second wheel rest on the channel on both sides simultaneously.

2362 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

c. Gently squeeze the wheels into channel until the output tray frame meet the gear.

d. Rotate the pulley until the output tray frame is no longer lifted. It can make to level the output
tray frame.

e. Rotate the pulley in the opposite direction.

Remove the output tray frame 2363

 5. Remove the PCA cover
Follow these steps to remove the PCA cover.

■ Remove two screws, and then remove the PCA cover.

Figure 6-244 Remove the PCA cover

6. Remove the left cover

Follow these steps to remove the left cover.

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-245 Remove two screws

2364 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

2. Remove four screws from both front and rear sides.

Figure 6-246 Remove four screws

3. Unplug two inline connectors, and then remove the left cover.

Figure 6-247 Unplug two connectors

TIP: Be sure to check the hook when reassembling.

Remove the left cover 2365

 7. Remove the front harness guide
Follow these steps to remove the front harness guide.

1. Open one clamp and unplug five connectors, and then remove the wire harness from the front
harness guide.

2366 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 2. Remove four screws, and then remove the front harness guide.

Figure 6-248 Remove the front harness guide

8. Remove the output tray motor assembly

Follow these steps to remove the output tray motor assembly.

■ Remove three screws, and then remove the output tray motor assembly.

Figure 6-249 Remove the output tray motor assembly

Remove the output tray motor assembly 2367

 9. Remove the output tray lower limit switch
Follow these steps to remove the output tray lower limit switch.

■ Remove one screw, and then remove the output tray lower limit switch.

Figure 6-250 Remove the output tray lower limit switch

10. Remove the paper holding

Follow these steps to remove the paper holding.

1. Remove the paper holding actuator spring.

Figure 6-251 Remove the paper holding actuator spring

2368 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

2. Remove the e-ring and the rack pinion gear. And then remove the pin and the e-ring, and then
remove the bushing.

Figure 6-252 Remove e-ring, rack pinion gear, pin, and bushing

NOTE: Be sure not to lose the pin.

3. Carefully remove the paper holding shaft and the actuator.

Figure 6-253 Remove the paper holding shaft and the actuator

Remove the paper holding 2369

 11. Remove the sub paddle unit
Follow these steps to remove the sub paddle unit.

1. Open the top cover, and then remove one screw securing the sub paddle unit.

Figure 6-254 Remove one screw

2370 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 2. Remove the e-ring, and then remove the pulley and timing belt. And then remove the e-ring and the
bushing.

Figure 6-255 Remove the e-ring, pulley, timing belt, and bushing

3. Lift up and remove the sub paddle unit.

Figure 6-256 Remove the sub paddle unit

12. Remove the exit roller

Follow these steps to remove the exit roller.

Remove the exit roller 2371

 1. Remove the guide on the center of the exit roller.

Figure 6-257 Remove the guide

2. On the front of the inner finisher, release the timing belt connected to the exit motor.

Figure 6-258 Release the timing belt

2372 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

3. Remove five screws securing the rear harness guide.

Figure 6-259 Remove five screws

4. On the rear of the inner finisher, remove the e-ring and the pulley and then remove the e-ring and
the bushing.

Figure 6-260 Remove e-ring, pulley, and bushing

Remove the exit roller 2373

 5. Push the bushing to detach it, and then remove the exit roller.

Figure 6-261 Remove the exit roller

13. Remove the front tamper

Follow these steps to remove the front tamper.

1. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-262 Remove four screws

2374 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 2. Unplug the connector and release the hook, and then pull the front tamper up to remove.

Figure 6-263 Remove the front tamper

14. Remove the rear tamper

Follow these steps to remove the rear tamper.

1. Remove four screws.

NOTE: Move cable guideout of position to access the screws.

Figure 6-264 Remove four screws

Remove the rear tamper 2375

 2. Unplug two connectors and release the hook, and then remove the rear tamper.

Figure 6-265 Remove the rear tamper

15. Remove the ejector & paper support assembly

Follow these steps to remove the ejector & paper support assembly.

1. Open one clamp, disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-266 Disconnect one connector

2376 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 2. Pull the rear paper support up, and then release one clamp and disconnect two connectors.

Figure 6-267 Disconnect two connector

3. Remove four screws, and then remove the ejector & paper support assembly.

Figure 6-268 Remove the ejector & paper support assembly

16. Remove the paper support motor

Follow these steps to remove the paper support motor.

Remove the paper support motor 2377

 ■ Remove two screws, disconnect one connect, and then remove the paper support motor.

Figure 6-269 Remove the paper support motor

17. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Paddle unit

2378 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

Removal and replacement: Main paddle
Learn how to remove and replace the main paddle.

To view teardown and reassembling video of the inner finisher, click the link below.

View a teardown video of the inner finisher.

View a reassembling video of the inner finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-48 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01327A Main paddle

JC82-01038A Main paddle kit

JC63-04957A Main paddle A

JC63-04958A Main paddle B

JC81-07560A Main paddle holder

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

Removal and replacement: Main paddle 2379

 ● Connect the power cable.

● Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the main paddle

Follow these steps to remove the main paddle.

1. Open the top cover.

2. Rotate the main paddle shaft to see the lower side of the main paddle.

Figure 6-270 Rotate the main paddle shaft

2380 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 3. Remove the main paddle by pushing both sides.

Figure 6-271 Remove the main paddle

TIP: When reassembling the main paddle, check the pin position of the paddle and the hole
position of the shaft, and then assemble them.

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2381

 Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Main paddle home sensor (S4)

Learn how to remove and replace the main paddle home sensor.

To view teardown and reassembling video of the inner finisher, click the link below.

View a teardown video of the inner finisher.

View a reassembling video of the inner finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

2382 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 Table 6-49 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Main paddle home sensor

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

● Connect the power cable.

● Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the front cover

Follow these steps to remove the front cover.

1. Open the front door and open the punch cover.

2. Remove three screws in the front.

3. Remove the lever.

4. Open the top cover.

5. From the right side of the front cover, carefully lift and pry toward the top-left corner to remove the
front cover.

Figure 6-272 Remove the front cover

2. Remove the main paddle home sensor

Follow these steps to remove the main paddle home sensor.

Remove the front cover 2383

 1. Remove one screw. Open the clamp and unplug one connector, and then remove the main paddle
home sensor bracket.

Figure 6-273 Remove the main paddle home sensor bracket

2. Remove the main paddle home sensor from the bracket.

Figure 6-274 Remove the main paddle home sensor

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2384 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Main paddle motor (M3)

Learn how to remove and replace the main paddle motor.

To view teardown and reassembling video of the inner finisher, click the link below.

View a teardown video of the inner finisher.

View a reassembling video of the inner finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Removal and replacement: Main paddle motor (M3) 2385

 Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-50 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-01001A Main paddle motor assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

● Connect the power cable.

● Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the front cover

Follow these steps to remove the front cover.

1. Open the front door and open the punch cover.

2. Remove three screws in the front.

3. Remove the lever.

4. Open the top cover.

5. From the right side of the front cover, carefully lift and pry toward the top-left corner to remove the
front cover.

Figure 6-275 Remove the front cover

2386 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

2. Remove the main paddle motor
Follow these steps to remove the main paddle motor.

1. Remove three screws, unplug the connector, and then remove the main paddle motor bracket.

Figure 6-276 Remove the main paddle motor bracket

2. Remove two screws, and then remove the motor from the bracket.

Figure 6-277 Remove the main paddle motor

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Remove the main paddle motor 2387

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Main paddle assembly

Learn how to remove and replace the main paddle assembly.

To view teardown and reassembling video of the inner finisher, click the link below.

View a teardown video of the inner finisher.

View a reassembling video of the inner finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

2388 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
http://www.hp.com/buy/parts .

Table 6-51 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01327A (not orderable) Main paddle assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

● Connect the power cable.

● Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the front cover

Follow these steps to remove the front cover.

1. Open the front door and open the punch cover.

2. Remove three screws in the front.

3. Remove the lever.

4. Open the top cover.

5. From the right side of the front cover, carefully lift and pry toward the top-left corner to remove the
front cover.

Figure 6-278 Remove the front cover

Remove the front cover 2389

 2. Remove the rear cover
Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

1. Open the top cover.

Figure 6-279 Open the top cover

2. Remove three screws.

3. Release hooks carefully and remove the rear cover.

Figure 6-280 Remove the rear cover

3. Remove the main paddle home sensor bracket

Follow these steps to remove the main paddle home sensor bracket.

2390 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 ■ Remove one screw. Open the clamp and unplug one connector, and then remove the main paddle
home sensor bracket.

Figure 6-281 Remove the main paddle home sensor bracket

4. Remove the main paddle motor bracket

Follow these steps to remove the main paddle motor bracket.

■ Remove three screws, unplug the connector, and then remove the main paddle motor bracket.

Figure 6-282 Remove the main paddle motor bracket

5. Remove the main paddle

Follow these steps to remove the main paddle.

1. Open the top cover.

Remove the main paddle motor bracket 2391

 2. Rotate the main paddle shaft to see the lower side of the main paddle.

Figure 6-283 Rotate the main paddle shaft

3. Remove the main paddle by pushing both sides.

Figure 6-284 Remove the main paddle

TIP: When reassembling the main paddle, check the pin position of the paddle and the hole
position of the shaft, and then assemble them.

2392 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

6. Remove the main paddle assembly
Follow these steps to remove the main paddle assembly.

1. Remove the belt in the front.

Figure 6-285 Remove the belt

Remove the main paddle assembly 2393

 2. Remove the e-ring and the main paddle CAM in the rear. And then remove the e-ring and the
bushing.

Figure 6-286 Remove the e-ring, cam, and bushing

3. Push the shaft to remove the main paddle shaft.

Figure 6-287 Remove the main paddle shaft

7. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

2394 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Sub paddle unit

Learn how to remove and replace the sub paddle unit.

To view teardown and reassembling video of the inner finisher, click the link below.

View a teardown video of the inner finisher.

View a reassembling video of the inner finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
http://www.hp.com/buy/parts .

Table 6-52 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01336A Sub paddle unit

Removal and replacement: Sub paddle unit 2395

 Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

● Connect the power cable.

● Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

1. Open the top cover.

Figure 6-288 Open the top cover

2. Remove three screws.

2396 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 3. Release hooks carefully and remove the rear cover.

Figure 6-289 Remove the rear cover

2. Remove the sub paddle unit

Follow these steps to remove the sub paddle unit.

1. Open the top cover, and then remove one screw securing the sub paddle unit.

Figure 6-290 Remove one screw

Remove the sub paddle unit 2397

 2. Remove the e-ring, and then remove the pulley and timing belt. And then remove the e-ring and the
bushing.

Figure 6-291 Remove the e-ring, pulley, timing belt, and bushing

3. Lift up and remove the sub paddle unit.

Figure 6-292 Remove the sub paddle unit

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2398 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Tamper unit

Front tamper

Removal and replacement: Front tamper

Learn how to remove and replace the front tamper.

To view teardown and reassembling video of the inner finisher, click the link below.

View a teardown video of the inner finisher.

View a reassembling video of the inner finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

Tamper unit 2399

 ● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
http://www.hp.com/buy/parts .

Table 6-53 Part information

Part number Part description

JC82-00899A Front tamper

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

● Connect the power cable.

● Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the front cover

Follow these steps to remove the front cover.

1. Open the front door and open the punch cover.

2. Remove three screws in the front.

3. Remove the lever.

4. Open the top cover.

2400 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 5. From the right side of the front cover, carefully lift and pry toward the top-left corner to remove the
front cover.

Figure 6-293 Remove the front cover

2. Remove the rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

1. Open the top cover.

Figure 6-294 Open the top cover

2. Remove three screws.

Remove the rear cover 2401

 3. Release hooks carefully and remove the rear cover.

Figure 6-295 Remove the rear cover

3. Remove the output tray

Follow these steps to remove the output tray.

1. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-296 Remove four screws

2402 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 2. Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher, and then remove the output tray.

Figure 6-297 Remove the output tray.

4. Remove the output tray frame

Follow these steps to remove the output tray frame.

1. Rotate the pulley until the output tray frame depart from the gear.

Figure 6-298 Remove the pulley

Remove the output tray frame 2403

 2. Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher, and then remove the output tray frame.

Figure 6-299 Remove the output tray frame

TIP: Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher when reassembling. Be sure to level
the output tray.

Use the following video and instructions when the reinstalling the output tray frame assembly.

View a video for aligning the inner finisher output tray.

a. Position the first wheel into the channel on both sides while pushing the paper holding
actuator.

b. Let the second wheel rest on the channel on both sides simultaneously.

2404 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

c. Gently squeeze the wheels into channel until the output tray frame meet the gear.

d. Rotate the pulley until the output tray frame is no longer lifted. It can make to level the output
tray frame.

e. Rotate the pulley in the opposite direction.

Remove the output tray frame 2405

 5. Remove the PCA cover
Follow these steps to remove the PCA cover.

■ Remove two screws, and then remove the PCA cover.

Figure 6-300 Remove the PCA cover

6. Remove the left cover

Follow these steps to remove the left cover.

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-301 Remove two screws

2406 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

2. Remove four screws from both front and rear sides.

Figure 6-302 Remove four screws

3. Unplug two inline connectors, and then remove the left cover.

Figure 6-303 Unplug two connectors

TIP: Be sure to check the hook when reassembling.

Remove the left cover 2407

 7. Remove the front harness guide
Follow these steps to remove the front harness guide.

1. Open one clamp and unplug five connectors, and then remove the wire harness from the front
harness guide.

2408 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 2. Remove four screws, and then remove the front harness guide.

Figure 6-304 Remove the front harness guide

8. Remove the output tray motor assembly

Follow these steps to remove the output tray motor assembly.

■ Remove three screws, and then remove the output tray motor assembly.

Figure 6-305 Remove the output tray motor assembly

Remove the output tray motor assembly 2409

 9. Remove the output tray lower limit switch
Follow these steps to remove the output tray lower limit switch.

■ Remove one screw, and then remove the output tray lower limit switch.

Figure 6-306 Remove the output tray lower limit switch

10. Remove the paper holding

Follow these steps to remove the paper holding.

1. Remove the paper holding actuator spring.

Figure 6-307 Remove the paper holding actuator spring

2410 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

2. Remove the e-ring and the rack pinion gear. And then remove the pin and the e-ring, and then
remove the bushing.

Figure 6-308 Remove e-ring, rack pinion gear, pin, and bushing

NOTE: Be sure not to lose the pin.

3. Carefully remove the paper holding shaft and the actuator.

Figure 6-309 Remove the paper holding shaft and the actuator

Remove the paper holding 2411

 11. Remove the sub paddle unit
Follow these steps to remove the sub paddle unit.

1. Open the top cover, and then remove one screw securing the sub paddle unit.

Figure 6-310 Remove one screw

2412 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 2. Remove the e-ring, and then remove the pulley and timing belt. And then remove the e-ring and the
bushing.

Figure 6-311 Remove the e-ring, pulley, timing belt, and bushing

3. Lift up and remove the sub paddle unit.

Figure 6-312 Remove the sub paddle unit

12. Remove the exit roller

Follow these steps to remove the exit roller.

Remove the exit roller 2413

 1. Remove the guide on the center of the exit roller.

Figure 6-313 Remove the guide

2. On the front of the inner finisher, release the timing belt connected to the exit motor.

Figure 6-314 Release the timing belt

2414 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

3. Remove five screws securing the rear harness guide.

Figure 6-315 Remove five screws

4. On the rear of the inner finisher, remove the e-ring and the pulley and then remove the e-ring and
the bushing.

Figure 6-316 Remove e-ring, pulley, and bushing

Remove the exit roller 2415

 5. Push the bushing to detach it, and then remove the exit roller.

Figure 6-317 Remove the exit roller

13. Remove the front tamper

Follow these steps to remove the front tamper.

1. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-318 Remove four screws

2416 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 2. Unplug the connector and release the hook, and then pull the front tamper up to remove.

Figure 6-319 Remove the front tamper

14. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Front tamper home sensor (S5)

Learn how to remove and replace the front tamper home sensor.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2417

 To view teardown and reassembling video of the inner finisher, click the link below.

View a teardown video of the inner finisher.

View a reassembling video of the inner finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-54 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Front tamper home sensor

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

● Connect the power cable.

● Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the front cover

Follow these steps to remove the front cover.

2418 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 1. Open the front door and open the punch cover.

2. Remove three screws in the front.

3. Remove the lever.

4. Open the top cover.

5. From the right side of the front cover, carefully lift and pry toward the top-left corner to remove the
front cover.

Figure 6-320 Remove the front cover

2. Remove the rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

1. Open the top cover.

Figure 6-321 Open the top cover

2. Remove three screws.

Remove the rear cover 2419

 3. Release hooks carefully and remove the rear cover.

Figure 6-322 Remove the rear cover

3. Remove the output tray

Follow these steps to remove the output tray.

1. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-323 Remove four screws

2420 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 2. Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher, and then remove the output tray.

Figure 6-324 Remove the output tray.

4. Remove the output tray frame

Follow these steps to remove the output tray frame.

1. Rotate the pulley until the output tray frame depart from the gear.

Figure 6-325 Remove the pulley

Remove the output tray frame 2421

 2. Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher, and then remove the output tray frame.

Figure 6-326 Remove the output tray frame

TIP: Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher when reassembling. Be sure to level
the output tray.

Use the following video and instructions when the reinstalling the output tray frame assembly.

View a video for aligning the inner finisher output tray.

a. Position the first wheel into the channel on both sides while pushing the paper holding
actuator.

b. Let the second wheel rest on the channel on both sides simultaneously.

2422 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

c. Gently squeeze the wheels into channel until the output tray frame meet the gear.

d. Rotate the pulley until the output tray frame is no longer lifted. It can make to level the output
tray frame.

e. Rotate the pulley in the opposite direction.

Remove the output tray frame 2423

 5. Remove the PCA cover
Follow these steps to remove the PCA cover.

■ Remove two screws, and then remove the PCA cover.

Figure 6-327 Remove the PCA cover

6. Remove the left cover

Follow these steps to remove the left cover.

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-328 Remove two screws

2424 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

2. Remove four screws from both front and rear sides.

Figure 6-329 Remove four screws

3. Unplug two inline connectors, and then remove the left cover.

Figure 6-330 Unplug two connectors

TIP: Be sure to check the hook when reassembling.

Remove the left cover 2425

 7. Remove the front harness guide
Follow these steps to remove the front harness guide.

1. Open one clamp and unplug five connectors, and then remove the wire harness from the front
harness guide.

2426 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 2. Remove four screws, and then remove the front harness guide.

Figure 6-331 Remove the front harness guide

8. Remove the output tray motor assembly

Follow these steps to remove the output tray motor assembly.

■ Remove three screws, and then remove the output tray motor assembly.

Figure 6-332 Remove the output tray motor assembly

Remove the output tray motor assembly 2427

 9. Remove the output tray lower limit switch
Follow these steps to remove the output tray lower limit switch.

■ Remove one screw, and then remove the output tray lower limit switch.

Figure 6-333 Remove the output tray lower limit switch

10. Remove the paper holding

Follow these steps to remove the paper holding.

1. Remove the paper holding actuator spring.

Figure 6-334 Remove the paper holding actuator spring

2428 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

2. Remove the e-ring and the rack pinion gear. And then remove the pin and the e-ring, and then
remove the bushing.

Figure 6-335 Remove e-ring, rack pinion gear, pin, and bushing

NOTE: Be sure not to lose the pin.

3. Carefully remove the paper holding shaft and the actuator.

Figure 6-336 Remove the paper holding shaft and the actuator

Remove the paper holding 2429

 11. Remove the sub paddle unit
Follow these steps to remove the sub paddle unit.

1. Open the top cover, and then remove one screw securing the sub paddle unit.

Figure 6-337 Remove one screw

2430 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 2. Remove the e-ring, and then remove the pulley and timing belt. And then remove the e-ring and the
bushing.

Figure 6-338 Remove the e-ring, pulley, timing belt, and bushing

3. Lift up and remove the sub paddle unit.

Figure 6-339 Remove the sub paddle unit

12. Remove the exit roller

Follow these steps to remove the exit roller.

Remove the exit roller 2431

 1. Remove the guide on the center of the exit roller.

Figure 6-340 Remove the guide

2. On the front of the inner finisher, release the timing belt connected to the exit motor.

Figure 6-341 Release the timing belt

2432 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

3. Remove five screws securing the rear harness guide.

Figure 6-342 Remove five screws

4. On the rear of the inner finisher, remove the e-ring and the pulley and then remove the e-ring and
the bushing.

Figure 6-343 Remove e-ring, pulley, and bushing

Remove the exit roller 2433

 5. Push the bushing to detach it, and then remove the exit roller.

Figure 6-344 Remove the exit roller

13. Remove the front tamper

Follow these steps to remove the front tamper.

1. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-345 Remove four screws

2434 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 2. Unplug the connector and release the hook, and then pull the front tamper up to remove.

Figure 6-346 Remove the front tamper

14. Remove the front tamper home sensor

Follow these steps to remove the front tamper home sensor.

■ Unplug the connector, and then remove the front tamper home sensor.

Figure 6-347 Remove the front tamper home sensor

15. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Remove the front tamper home sensor 2435

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Front tamper motor (M9)

Learn how to remove and replace the front tamper motor.

To view teardown and reassembling video of the inner finisher, click the link below.

View a teardown video of the inner finisher.

View a reassembling video of the inner finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

2436 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-55 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-01001A Front tamper motor assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

● Connect the power cable.

● Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the front cover

Follow these steps to remove the front cover.

1. Open the front door and open the punch cover.

2. Remove three screws in the front.

3. Remove the lever.

4. Open the top cover.

5. From the right side of the front cover, carefully lift and pry toward the top-left corner to remove the
front cover.

Figure 6-348 Remove the front cover

Remove the front cover 2437

 2. Remove the rear cover
Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

1. Open the top cover.

Figure 6-349 Open the top cover

2. Remove three screws.

3. Release hooks carefully and remove the rear cover.

Figure 6-350 Remove the rear cover

3. Remove the output tray

Follow these steps to remove the output tray.

2438 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 1. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-351 Remove four screws

2. Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher, and then remove the output tray.

Figure 6-352 Remove the output tray.

4. Remove the output tray frame

Follow these steps to remove the output tray frame.

Remove the output tray frame 2439

 1. Rotate the pulley until the output tray frame depart from the gear.

Figure 6-353 Remove the pulley

2. Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher, and then remove the output tray frame.

Figure 6-354 Remove the output tray frame

TIP: Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher when reassembling. Be sure to level
the output tray.

Use the following video and instructions when the reinstalling the output tray frame assembly.

View a video for aligning the inner finisher output tray.

2440 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

a. Position the first wheel into the channel on both sides while pushing the paper holding
actuator.

b. Let the second wheel rest on the channel on both sides simultaneously.

c. Gently squeeze the wheels into channel until the output tray frame meet the gear.

d. Rotate the pulley until the output tray frame is no longer lifted. It can make to level the output
tray frame.

Remove the output tray frame 2441

 e. Rotate the pulley in the opposite direction.

5. Remove the PCA cover

Follow these steps to remove the PCA cover.

■ Remove two screws, and then remove the PCA cover.

Figure 6-355 Remove the PCA cover

6. Remove the left cover

Follow these steps to remove the left cover.

2442 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-356 Remove two screws

2. Remove four screws from both front and rear sides.

Figure 6-357 Remove four screws

Remove the left cover 2443

 3. Unplug two inline connectors, and then remove the left cover.

Figure 6-358 Unplug two connectors

TIP: Be sure to check the hook when reassembling.

7. Remove the front harness guide

Follow these steps to remove the front harness guide.

1. Open one clamp and unplug five connectors, and then remove the wire harness from the front
harness guide.

2444 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 2. Remove four screws, and then remove the front harness guide.

Figure 6-359 Remove the front harness guide

8. Remove the output tray motor assembly

Follow these steps to remove the output tray motor assembly.

■ Remove three screws, and then remove the output tray motor assembly.

Figure 6-360 Remove the output tray motor assembly

Remove the output tray motor assembly 2445

 9. Remove the output tray lower limit switch
Follow these steps to remove the output tray lower limit switch.

■ Remove one screw, and then remove the output tray lower limit switch.

Figure 6-361 Remove the output tray lower limit switch

10. Remove the paper holding

Follow these steps to remove the paper holding.

1. Remove the paper holding actuator spring.

Figure 6-362 Remove the paper holding actuator spring

2446 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

2. Remove the e-ring and the rack pinion gear. And then remove the pin and the e-ring, and then
remove the bushing.

Figure 6-363 Remove e-ring, rack pinion gear, pin, and bushing

NOTE: Be sure not to lose the pin.

3. Carefully remove the paper holding shaft and the actuator.

Figure 6-364 Remove the paper holding shaft and the actuator

Remove the paper holding 2447

 11. Remove the sub paddle unit
Follow these steps to remove the sub paddle unit.

1. Open the top cover, and then remove one screw securing the sub paddle unit.

Figure 6-365 Remove one screw

2448 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 2. Remove the e-ring, and then remove the pulley and timing belt. And then remove the e-ring and the
bushing.

Figure 6-366 Remove the e-ring, pulley, timing belt, and bushing

3. Lift up and remove the sub paddle unit.

Figure 6-367 Remove the sub paddle unit

12. Remove the exit roller

Follow these steps to remove the exit roller.

Remove the exit roller 2449

 1. Remove the guide on the center of the exit roller.

Figure 6-368 Remove the guide

2. On the front of the inner finisher, release the timing belt connected to the exit motor.

Figure 6-369 Release the timing belt

2450 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

3. Remove five screws securing the rear harness guide.

Figure 6-370 Remove five screws

4. On the rear of the inner finisher, remove the e-ring and the pulley and then remove the e-ring and
the bushing.

Figure 6-371 Remove e-ring, pulley, and bushing

Remove the exit roller 2451

 5. Push the bushing to detach it, and then remove the exit roller.

Figure 6-372 Remove the exit roller

13. Remove the front tamper

Follow these steps to remove the front tamper.

1. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-373 Remove four screws

2452 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 2. Unplug the connector and release the hook, and then pull the front tamper up to remove.

Figure 6-374 Remove the front tamper

14. Remove the front tamper motor

Follow these steps to remove the front tamper motor.

■ Remove two screws, unplug the connector, and then remove the motor.

Figure 6-375 Remove the front tamper motor

15. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Remove the front tamper motor 2453

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Rear tamper

Removal and replacement: Rear tamper

Learn how to remove and replace the rear tamper.

To view teardown and reassembling video of the inner finisher, click the link below.

View a teardown video of the inner finisher.

View a reassembling video of the inner finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

2454 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 ● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
http://www.hp.com/buy/parts .

Table 6-56 Part information

Part number Part description

JC82-00900A Rear tamper

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

● Connect the power cable.

● Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the front cover

Follow these steps to remove the front cover.

1. Open the front door and open the punch cover.

2. Remove three screws in the front.

3. Remove the lever.

4. Open the top cover.

Remove the front cover 2455

 5. From the right side of the front cover, carefully lift and pry toward the top-left corner to remove the
front cover.

Figure 6-376 Remove the front cover

2. Remove the rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

1. Open the top cover.

Figure 6-377 Open the top cover

2. Remove three screws.

2456 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 3. Release hooks carefully and remove the rear cover.

Figure 6-378 Remove the rear cover

3. Remove the output tray

Follow these steps to remove the output tray.

1. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-379 Remove four screws

Remove the output tray 2457

 2. Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher, and then remove the output tray.

Figure 6-380 Remove the output tray.

4. Remove the output tray frame

Follow these steps to remove the output tray frame.

1. Rotate the pulley until the output tray frame depart from the gear.

Figure 6-381 Remove the pulley

2458 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

2. Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher, and then remove the output tray frame.

Figure 6-382 Remove the output tray frame

TIP: Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher when reassembling. Be sure to level
the output tray.

Use the following video and instructions when the reinstalling the output tray frame assembly.

View a video for aligning the inner finisher output tray.

a. Position the first wheel into the channel on both sides while pushing the paper holding
actuator.

b. Let the second wheel rest on the channel on both sides simultaneously.

Remove the output tray frame 2459

 c. Gently squeeze the wheels into channel until the output tray frame meet the gear.

d. Rotate the pulley until the output tray frame is no longer lifted. It can make to level the output
tray frame.

e. Rotate the pulley in the opposite direction.

2460 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

5. Remove the PCA cover
Follow these steps to remove the PCA cover.

■ Remove two screws, and then remove the PCA cover.

Figure 6-383 Remove the PCA cover

6. Remove the left cover

Follow these steps to remove the left cover.

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-384 Remove two screws

Remove the PCA cover 2461

 2. Remove four screws from both front and rear sides.

Figure 6-385 Remove four screws

3. Unplug two inline connectors, and then remove the left cover.

Figure 6-386 Unplug two connectors

TIP: Be sure to check the hook when reassembling.

2462 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

7. Remove the front harness guide
Follow these steps to remove the front harness guide.

1. Open one clamp and unplug five connectors, and then remove the wire harness from the front
harness guide.

Remove the front harness guide 2463

 2. Remove four screws, and then remove the front harness guide.

Figure 6-387 Remove the front harness guide

8. Remove the output tray motor assembly

Follow these steps to remove the output tray motor assembly.

■ Remove three screws, and then remove the output tray motor assembly.

Figure 6-388 Remove the output tray motor assembly

2464 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

9. Remove the output tray lower limit switch
Follow these steps to remove the output tray lower limit switch.

■ Remove one screw, and then remove the output tray lower limit switch.

Figure 6-389 Remove the output tray lower limit switch

10. Remove the paper holding

Follow these steps to remove the paper holding.

1. Remove the paper holding actuator spring.

Figure 6-390 Remove the paper holding actuator spring

Remove the output tray lower limit switch 2465

 2. Remove the e-ring and the rack pinion gear. And then remove the pin and the e-ring, and then
remove the bushing.

Figure 6-391 Remove e-ring, rack pinion gear, pin, and bushing

NOTE: Be sure not to lose the pin.

3. Carefully remove the paper holding shaft and the actuator.

Figure 6-392 Remove the paper holding shaft and the actuator

2466 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

11. Remove the sub paddle unit
Follow these steps to remove the sub paddle unit.

1. Open the top cover, and then remove one screw securing the sub paddle unit.

Figure 6-393 Remove one screw

Remove the sub paddle unit 2467

 2. Remove the e-ring, and then remove the pulley and timing belt. And then remove the e-ring and the
bushing.

Figure 6-394 Remove the e-ring, pulley, timing belt, and bushing

3. Lift up and remove the sub paddle unit.

Figure 6-395 Remove the sub paddle unit

12. Remove the exit roller

Follow these steps to remove the exit roller.

2468 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

1. Remove the guide on the center of the exit roller.

Figure 6-396 Remove the guide

2. On the front of the inner finisher, release the timing belt connected to the exit motor.

Figure 6-397 Release the timing belt

Remove the exit roller 2469

 3. Remove five screws securing the rear harness guide.

Figure 6-398 Remove five screws

4. On the rear of the inner finisher, remove the e-ring and the pulley and then remove the e-ring and
the bushing.

Figure 6-399 Remove e-ring, pulley, and bushing

2470 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 5. Push the bushing to detach it, and then remove the exit roller.

Figure 6-400 Remove the exit roller

13. Remove the rear tamper

Follow these steps to remove the rear tamper.

1. Remove four screws.

NOTE: Move cable guideout of position to access the screws.

Figure 6-401 Remove four screws

Remove the rear tamper 2471

 2. Unplug two connectors and release the hook, and then remove the rear tamper.

Figure 6-402 Remove the rear tamper

14. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Rear tamper home sensor (S14)

Learn how to remove and replace the rear tamper home sensor.

2472 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 To view teardown and reassembling video of the inner finisher, click the link below.

View a teardown video of the inner finisher.

View a reassembling video of the inner finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-57 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Rear tamper home sensor

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

● Connect the power cable.

● Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the front cover

Follow these steps to remove the front cover.

Remove the front cover 2473

 1. Open the front door and open the punch cover.

2. Remove three screws in the front.

3. Remove the lever.

4. Open the top cover.

5. From the right side of the front cover, carefully lift and pry toward the top-left corner to remove the
front cover.

Figure 6-403 Remove the front cover

2. Remove the rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

1. Open the top cover.

Figure 6-404 Open the top cover

2. Remove three screws.

2474 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 3. Release hooks carefully and remove the rear cover.

Figure 6-405 Remove the rear cover

3. Remove the output tray

Follow these steps to remove the output tray.

1. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-406 Remove four screws

Remove the output tray 2475

 2. Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher, and then remove the output tray.

Figure 6-407 Remove the output tray.

4. Remove the output tray frame

Follow these steps to remove the output tray frame.

1. Rotate the pulley until the output tray frame depart from the gear.

Figure 6-408 Remove the pulley

2476 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

2. Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher, and then remove the output tray frame.

Figure 6-409 Remove the output tray frame

TIP: Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher when reassembling. Be sure to level
the output tray.

Use the following video and instructions when the reinstalling the output tray frame assembly.

View a video for aligning the inner finisher output tray.

a. Position the first wheel into the channel on both sides while pushing the paper holding
actuator.

b. Let the second wheel rest on the channel on both sides simultaneously.

Remove the output tray frame 2477

 c. Gently squeeze the wheels into channel until the output tray frame meet the gear.

d. Rotate the pulley until the output tray frame is no longer lifted. It can make to level the output
tray frame.

e. Rotate the pulley in the opposite direction.

2478 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

5. Remove the PCA cover
Follow these steps to remove the PCA cover.

■ Remove two screws, and then remove the PCA cover.

Figure 6-410 Remove the PCA cover

6. Remove the left cover

Follow these steps to remove the left cover.

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-411 Remove two screws

Remove the PCA cover 2479

 2. Remove four screws from both front and rear sides.

Figure 6-412 Remove four screws

3. Unplug two inline connectors, and then remove the left cover.

Figure 6-413 Unplug two connectors

TIP: Be sure to check the hook when reassembling.

2480 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

7. Remove the front harness guide
Follow these steps to remove the front harness guide.

1. Open one clamp and unplug five connectors, and then remove the wire harness from the front
harness guide.

Remove the front harness guide 2481

 2. Remove four screws, and then remove the front harness guide.

Figure 6-414 Remove the front harness guide

8. Remove the output tray motor assembly

Follow these steps to remove the output tray motor assembly.

■ Remove three screws, and then remove the output tray motor assembly.

Figure 6-415 Remove the output tray motor assembly

2482 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

9. Remove the output tray lower limit switch
Follow these steps to remove the output tray lower limit switch.

■ Remove one screw, and then remove the output tray lower limit switch.

Figure 6-416 Remove the output tray lower limit switch

10. Remove the paper holding

Follow these steps to remove the paper holding.

1. Remove the paper holding actuator spring.

Figure 6-417 Remove the paper holding actuator spring

Remove the output tray lower limit switch 2483

 2. Remove the e-ring and the rack pinion gear. And then remove the pin and the e-ring, and then
remove the bushing.

Figure 6-418 Remove e-ring, rack pinion gear, pin, and bushing

NOTE: Be sure not to lose the pin.

3. Carefully remove the paper holding shaft and the actuator.

Figure 6-419 Remove the paper holding shaft and the actuator

2484 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

11. Remove the sub paddle unit
Follow these steps to remove the sub paddle unit.

1. Open the top cover, and then remove one screw securing the sub paddle unit.

Figure 6-420 Remove one screw

Remove the sub paddle unit 2485

 2. Remove the e-ring, and then remove the pulley and timing belt. And then remove the e-ring and the
bushing.

Figure 6-421 Remove the e-ring, pulley, timing belt, and bushing

3. Lift up and remove the sub paddle unit.

Figure 6-422 Remove the sub paddle unit

12. Remove the exit roller

Follow these steps to remove the exit roller.

2486 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

1. Remove the guide on the center of the exit roller.

Figure 6-423 Remove the guide

2. On the front of the inner finisher, release the timing belt connected to the exit motor.

Figure 6-424 Release the timing belt

Remove the exit roller 2487

 3. Remove five screws securing the rear harness guide.

Figure 6-425 Remove five screws

4. On the rear of the inner finisher, remove the e-ring and the pulley and then remove the e-ring and
the bushing.

Figure 6-426 Remove e-ring, pulley, and bushing

2488 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 5. Push the bushing to detach it, and then remove the exit roller.

Figure 6-427 Remove the exit roller

13. Remove the rear tamper

Follow these steps to remove the rear tamper.

1. Remove four screws.

NOTE: Move cable guideout of position to access the screws.

Figure 6-428 Remove four screws

Remove the rear tamper 2489

 2. Unplug two connectors and release the hook, and then remove the rear tamper.

Figure 6-429 Remove the rear tamper

14. Remove the rear tamper home sensor

Follow these steps to remove the rear tamper home sensor.

■ Unplug the connector, and then remove the rear tamper home sensor.

Figure 6-430 Remove the rear tamper home sensor

15. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

2490 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Rear tamper motor (M5)

Learn how to remove and replace the rear tamper motor.

To view teardown and reassembling video of the inner finisher, click the link below.

View a teardown video of the inner finisher.

View a reassembling video of the inner finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Removal and replacement: Rear tamper motor (M5) 2491

 Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-58 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-01001A Rear tamper motor assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

● Connect the power cable.

● Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the front cover

Follow these steps to remove the front cover.

1. Open the front door and open the punch cover.

2. Remove three screws in the front.

3. Remove the lever.

4. Open the top cover.

5. From the right side of the front cover, carefully lift and pry toward the top-left corner to remove the
front cover.

Figure 6-431 Remove the front cover

2492 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

2. Remove the rear cover
Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

1. Open the top cover.

Figure 6-432 Open the top cover

2. Remove three screws.

3. Release hooks carefully and remove the rear cover.

Figure 6-433 Remove the rear cover

3. Remove the output tray

Follow these steps to remove the output tray.

Remove the rear cover 2493

 1. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-434 Remove four screws

2. Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher, and then remove the output tray.

Figure 6-435 Remove the output tray.

4. Remove the output tray frame

Follow these steps to remove the output tray frame.

2494 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

1. Rotate the pulley until the output tray frame depart from the gear.

Figure 6-436 Remove the pulley

2. Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher, and then remove the output tray frame.

Figure 6-437 Remove the output tray frame

TIP: Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher when reassembling. Be sure to level
the output tray.

Use the following video and instructions when the reinstalling the output tray frame assembly.

View a video for aligning the inner finisher output tray.

Remove the output tray frame 2495

 a. Position the first wheel into the channel on both sides while pushing the paper holding
actuator.

b. Let the second wheel rest on the channel on both sides simultaneously.

c. Gently squeeze the wheels into channel until the output tray frame meet the gear.

d. Rotate the pulley until the output tray frame is no longer lifted. It can make to level the output
tray frame.

2496 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 e. Rotate the pulley in the opposite direction.

5. Remove the PCA cover

Follow these steps to remove the PCA cover.

■ Remove two screws, and then remove the PCA cover.

Figure 6-438 Remove the PCA cover

6. Remove the left cover

Follow these steps to remove the left cover.

Remove the PCA cover 2497

 1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-439 Remove two screws

2. Remove four screws from both front and rear sides.

Figure 6-440 Remove four screws

2498 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 3. Unplug two inline connectors, and then remove the left cover.

Figure 6-441 Unplug two connectors

TIP: Be sure to check the hook when reassembling.

7. Remove the front harness guide

Follow these steps to remove the front harness guide.

1. Open one clamp and unplug five connectors, and then remove the wire harness from the front
harness guide.

Remove the front harness guide 2499

 2. Remove four screws, and then remove the front harness guide.

Figure 6-442 Remove the front harness guide

8. Remove the output tray motor assembly

Follow these steps to remove the output tray motor assembly.

■ Remove three screws, and then remove the output tray motor assembly.

Figure 6-443 Remove the output tray motor assembly

2500 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

9. Remove the output tray lower limit switch
Follow these steps to remove the output tray lower limit switch.

■ Remove one screw, and then remove the output tray lower limit switch.

Figure 6-444 Remove the output tray lower limit switch

10. Remove the paper holding

Follow these steps to remove the paper holding.

1. Remove the paper holding actuator spring.

Figure 6-445 Remove the paper holding actuator spring

Remove the output tray lower limit switch 2501

 2. Remove the e-ring and the rack pinion gear. And then remove the pin and the e-ring, and then
remove the bushing.

Figure 6-446 Remove e-ring, rack pinion gear, pin, and bushing

NOTE: Be sure not to lose the pin.

3. Carefully remove the paper holding shaft and the actuator.

Figure 6-447 Remove the paper holding shaft and the actuator

2502 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

11. Remove the sub paddle unit
Follow these steps to remove the sub paddle unit.

1. Open the top cover, and then remove one screw securing the sub paddle unit.

Figure 6-448 Remove one screw

Remove the sub paddle unit 2503

 2. Remove the e-ring, and then remove the pulley and timing belt. And then remove the e-ring and the
bushing.

Figure 6-449 Remove the e-ring, pulley, timing belt, and bushing

3. Lift up and remove the sub paddle unit.

Figure 6-450 Remove the sub paddle unit

12. Remove the exit roller

Follow these steps to remove the exit roller.

2504 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

1. Remove the guide on the center of the exit roller.

Figure 6-451 Remove the guide

2. On the front of the inner finisher, release the timing belt connected to the exit motor.

Figure 6-452 Release the timing belt

Remove the exit roller 2505

 3. Remove five screws securing the rear harness guide.

Figure 6-453 Remove five screws

4. On the rear of the inner finisher, remove the e-ring and the pulley and then remove the e-ring and
the bushing.

Figure 6-454 Remove e-ring, pulley, and bushing

2506 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 5. Push the bushing to detach it, and then remove the exit roller.

Figure 6-455 Remove the exit roller

13. Remove the rear tamper

Follow these steps to remove the rear tamper.

1. Remove four screws.

NOTE: Move cable guideout of position to access the screws.

Figure 6-456 Remove four screws

Remove the rear tamper 2507

 2. Unplug two connectors and release the hook, and then remove the rear tamper.

Figure 6-457 Remove the rear tamper

14. Remove the rear tamper motor

Follow these steps to remove the rear tamper motor.

■ Remove two screws, unplug the connector, and then remove the motor.

Figure 6-458 Remove the rear tamper motor

15. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2508 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Stapler unit

Removal and replacement: Stapler

Learn how to remove and replace the stapler.

To view teardown and reassembling video of the inner finisher, click the link below.

View a teardown video of the inner finisher.

View a reassembling video of the inner finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

Stapler unit 2509

 ● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-59 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01342A Stapler assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

● Connect the power cable.

● Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the front cover

Follow these steps to remove the front cover.

1. Open the front door and open the punch cover.

2. Remove three screws in the front.

3. Remove the lever.

4. Open the top cover.

2510 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 5. From the right side of the front cover, carefully lift and pry toward the top-left corner to remove the
front cover.

Figure 6-459 Remove the front cover

2. Remove the rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

1. Open the top cover.

Figure 6-460 Open the top cover

2. Remove three screws.

Remove the rear cover 2511

 3. Release hooks carefully and remove the rear cover.

Figure 6-461 Remove the rear cover

3. Remove the exit motor bracket

Follow these steps to remove the exit motor bracket.

■ Remove two screws, unplug the motor connector. And then remove exit motor bracket.

Figure 6-462 Remove the exit motor bracket

4. Remove the stapler

Follow these steps to remove the stapler.

2512 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

1. Push the stapler from the rear-side to the front-side.

Figure 6-463 Push the stapler

2. Remove one screw, unplug two connectors, and then remove the stapler assembly.

Figure 6-464 Remove the stapler assembly

Remove the stapler 2513

 3. Remove two screws, and then remove the stapler.

Figure 6-465 Remove the stapler

5. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Stapler position sensor (S2)

Learn how to remove and replace the stapler position sensor.

2514 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 To view teardown and reassembling video of the inner finisher, click the link below.

View a teardown video of the inner finisher.

View a reassembling video of the inner finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-60 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Stapler position sensor

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

● Connect the power cable.

● Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the front cover

Follow these steps to remove the front cover.

Remove the front cover 2515

 1. Open the front door and open the punch cover.

2. Remove three screws in the front.

3. Remove the lever.

4. Open the top cover.

5. From the right side of the front cover, carefully lift and pry toward the top-left corner to remove the
front cover.

Figure 6-466 Remove the front cover

2. Remove the rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

1. Open the top cover.

Figure 6-467 Open the top cover

2. Remove three screws.

2516 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 3. Release hooks carefully and remove the rear cover.

Figure 6-468 Remove the rear cover

3. Remove the middle cover

Follow these steps to remove the middle cover.

1. Open the front door and then open the punch cover.

Figure 6-469 Open the front door and punch cover

Remove the middle cover 2517

 2. Remove left-side one screw at the rear of the inner finisher, and then remove the middle cover by
lifting off the hinge pins at the front.

Figure 6-470 Remove the middle cover

4. Remove the punch cover

Follow these steps to remove the punch cover.

1. Unplug the connector. Remove the e-ring, and then remove the slide shaft at the rear of the inner
finisher.

Figure 6-471 Remove the slide shaft

2. Open the punch cover.

Figure 6-472 Open the punch cover

2518 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 3. Remove the front punch sheet, and then remove the e-ring and the washer. And then remove the
punch cover.

Figure 6-473 Remove the punch cover

5. Remove the diverter guide and the middle roller

Follow these steps to remove the diverter guide and the middle roller.

1. On the front of the inner finisher, remove the e-ring and bushing.

Figure 6-474 Remove the e-ring and bushing

Remove the diverter guide and the middle roller 2519

 2. On the rear of the inner finisher, remove the e-ring, pulley, bushing, belt, and spring (slightly hidden
from view).

Figure 6-475 Remove the e-ring, pulley, bushing, belt, and spring

3. Remove the diverter guide and the middle roller.

Figure 6-476 Remove the diverter guide and the middle roller

6. Remove the middle paper guide

Follow these steps to remove the middle paper guide.

2520 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 1. Remove six screws, and then open the middle paper guide in the direction of the arrow.

Figure 6-477 Open the middle paper guide

NOTE: Becareful not to damage the sensor connector.

2. Unplug the connector under the middle paper guide. And then, remove the middle paper guide.

Figure 6-478 Remove the middle paper guide

7. Remove the exit motor bracket

Follow these steps to remove the exit motor bracket.

Remove the exit motor bracket 2521

 ■ Remove two screws, unplug the motor connector. And then remove exit motor bracket.

Figure 6-479 Remove the exit motor bracket

8. Remove the end fence sensor bracket

Follow these steps to remove the end fence sensor bracket.

1. Remove three screws at the front of the inner finisher, and then remove the bracket.

Figure 6-480 Remove the bracket

2522 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

2. Remove two screws at the front of the inner finisher.

Figure 6-481 Remove two screws

3. Remove two screws at the rear of the inner finisher.

Figure 6-482 Remove two screws

4. Loosen three cable clamps. Unplug the connector at the sensor, and then remove the end fence
sensor bracket.

Figure 6-483 Remove the end fence sensor bracket

Remove the end fence sensor bracket 2523

 9. Remove the stapler position sensor
Follow these steps to remove the stapler position sensor.

1. Remove one screw from the front of the inner finisher.

Figure 6-484 Remove one screw

2. Remove one screw from the rear of the inner finisher.

Figure 6-485 Remove one screw

2524 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 3. Unplug four photo-sensor connectors. Open the six cable clamps.

Figure 6-486 Unplug connectors

4. Remove the assembly, and then remove the sensor.

Figure 6-487 Remove the stapler position sensor

10. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2525

 IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Stapler position motor (M1)

Learn how to remove and replace the stapler position motor.

To view teardown and reassembling video of the inner finisher, click the link below.

View a teardown video of the inner finisher.

View a reassembling video of the inner finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
http://www.hp.com/buy/parts .

Table 6-61 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-00999A Stapler position motor

2526 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

● Connect the power cable.

● Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the front cover

Follow these steps to remove the front cover.

1. Open the front door and open the punch cover.

2. Remove three screws in the front.

3. Remove the lever.

4. Open the top cover.

5. From the right side of the front cover, carefully lift and pry toward the top-left corner to remove the
front cover.

Figure 6-488 Remove the front cover

2. Remove the rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

Remove the front cover 2527

 1. Open the top cover.

Figure 6-489 Open the top cover

2. Remove three screws.

3. Release hooks carefully and remove the rear cover.

Figure 6-490 Remove the rear cover

3. Remove the middle cover

Follow these steps to remove the middle cover.

2528 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 1. Open the front door and then open the punch cover.

Figure 6-491 Open the front door and punch cover

2. Remove left-side one screw at the rear of the inner finisher, and then remove the middle cover by
lifting off the hinge pins at the front.

Figure 6-492 Remove the middle cover

4. Remove the punch cover

Follow these steps to remove the punch cover.

1. Unplug the connector. Remove the e-ring, and then remove the slide shaft at the rear of the inner
finisher.

Figure 6-493 Remove the slide shaft

Remove the punch cover 2529

 2. Open the punch cover.

Figure 6-494 Open the punch cover

3. Remove the front punch sheet, and then remove the e-ring and the washer. And then remove the
punch cover.

Figure 6-495 Remove the punch cover

5. Remove the diverter guide and the middle roller

Follow these steps to remove the diverter guide and the middle roller.

2530 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

1. On the front of the inner finisher, remove the e-ring and bushing.

Figure 6-496 Remove the e-ring and bushing

2. On the rear of the inner finisher, remove the e-ring, pulley, bushing, belt, and spring (slightly hidden
from view).

Figure 6-497 Remove the e-ring, pulley, bushing, belt, and spring

Remove the diverter guide and the middle roller 2531

 3. Remove the diverter guide and the middle roller.

Figure 6-498 Remove the diverter guide and the middle roller

6. Remove the middle paper guide

Follow these steps to remove the middle paper guide.

1. Remove six screws, and then open the middle paper guide in the direction of the arrow.

Figure 6-499 Open the middle paper guide

NOTE: Becareful not to damage the sensor connector.

2532 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 2. Unplug the connector under the middle paper guide. And then, remove the middle paper guide.

Figure 6-500 Remove the middle paper guide

7. Remove the stapler position motor

Follow these steps to remove the stapler position motor.

1. Remove three screws, unplug the motor connector, and then remove the stapler position motor
bracket.

Figure 6-501 Remove the stapler position motor bracket

Remove the stapler position motor 2533

 2. Remove two screws, and then remove the motor from the bracket.

Figure 6-502 Remove the stapler position motor

TIP: Use the following steps when reinstalling the stapler position motor.

1. Release the spring tension screw.

2. Apply tension to the spring by pulling the belt, and then tighten the spring tension screw.
Tightening the screw puts maximum slack in the belt.

3. Lower the stapler position motor while placing the belt on the motor pulley, and then secure
the bracket with three screws.

2534 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 4. Release the spring tension screw to allow the spring to apply tension to the belt, and then
tighten it again

8. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Ejector unit

Removal and replacement: Ejector & paper support assembly

Learn how to remove and replace the ejector & paper support assembly.

To view teardown and reassembling video of the inner finisher, click the link below.

View a teardown video of the inner finisher.

View a reassembling video of the inner finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Unpack the replacement assembly 2535

 Before performing service
Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
http://www.hp.com/buy/parts .

Table 6-62 Part information

Part number Part description

SS456-61001 Ejector

JC90-01310A Front paper support

JC90-01311A Rear paper support

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

● Connect the power cable.

● Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the front cover

Follow these steps to remove the front cover.

1. Open the front door and open the punch cover.

2. Remove three screws in the front.

3. Remove the lever.

4. Open the top cover.

2536 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 5. From the right side of the front cover, carefully lift and pry toward the top-left corner to remove the
front cover.

Figure 6-503 Remove the front cover

2. Remove the rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

1. Open the top cover.

Figure 6-504 Open the top cover

2. Remove three screws.

Remove the rear cover 2537

 3. Release hooks carefully and remove the rear cover.

Figure 6-505 Remove the rear cover

3. Remove the output tray

Follow these steps to remove the output tray.

1. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-506 Remove four screws

2538 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 2. Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher, and then remove the output tray.

Figure 6-507 Remove the output tray.

4. Remove the output tray frame

Follow these steps to remove the output tray frame.

1. Rotate the pulley until the output tray frame depart from the gear.

Figure 6-508 Remove the pulley

Remove the output tray frame 2539

 2. Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher, and then remove the output tray frame.

Figure 6-509 Remove the output tray frame

TIP: Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher when reassembling. Be sure to level
the output tray.

Use the following video and instructions when the reinstalling the output tray frame assembly.

View a video for aligning the inner finisher output tray.

a. Position the first wheel into the channel on both sides while pushing the paper holding
actuator.

b. Let the second wheel rest on the channel on both sides simultaneously.

2540 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

c. Gently squeeze the wheels into channel until the output tray frame meet the gear.

d. Rotate the pulley until the output tray frame is no longer lifted. It can make to level the output
tray frame.

e. Rotate the pulley in the opposite direction.

Remove the output tray frame 2541

 5. Remove the PCA cover
Follow these steps to remove the PCA cover.

■ Remove two screws, and then remove the PCA cover.

Figure 6-510 Remove the PCA cover

6. Remove the left cover

Follow these steps to remove the left cover.

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-511 Remove two screws

2542 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

2. Remove four screws from both front and rear sides.

Figure 6-512 Remove four screws

3. Unplug two inline connectors, and then remove the left cover.

Figure 6-513 Unplug two connectors

TIP: Be sure to check the hook when reassembling.

Remove the left cover 2543

 7. Remove the front harness guide
Follow these steps to remove the front harness guide.

1. Open one clamp and unplug five connectors, and then remove the wire harness from the front
harness guide.

2544 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 2. Remove four screws, and then remove the front harness guide.

Figure 6-514 Remove the front harness guide

8. Remove the output tray motor assembly

Follow these steps to remove the output tray motor assembly.

■ Remove three screws, and then remove the output tray motor assembly.

Figure 6-515 Remove the output tray motor assembly

Remove the output tray motor assembly 2545

 9. Remove the output tray lower limit switch
Follow these steps to remove the output tray lower limit switch.

■ Remove one screw, and then remove the output tray lower limit switch.

Figure 6-516 Remove the output tray lower limit switch

10. Remove the paper holding

Follow these steps to remove the paper holding.

1. Remove the paper holding actuator spring.

Figure 6-517 Remove the paper holding actuator spring

2546 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

2. Remove the e-ring and the rack pinion gear. And then remove the pin and the e-ring, and then
remove the bushing.

Figure 6-518 Remove e-ring, rack pinion gear, pin, and bushing

NOTE: Be sure not to lose the pin.

3. Carefully remove the paper holding shaft and the actuator.

Figure 6-519 Remove the paper holding shaft and the actuator

Remove the paper holding 2547

 11. Remove the sub paddle unit
Follow these steps to remove the sub paddle unit.

1. Open the top cover, and then remove one screw securing the sub paddle unit.

Figure 6-520 Remove one screw

2548 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 2. Remove the e-ring, and then remove the pulley and timing belt. And then remove the e-ring and the
bushing.

Figure 6-521 Remove the e-ring, pulley, timing belt, and bushing

3. Lift up and remove the sub paddle unit.

Figure 6-522 Remove the sub paddle unit

12. Remove the exit roller

Follow these steps to remove the exit roller.

Remove the exit roller 2549

 1. Remove the guide on the center of the exit roller.

Figure 6-523 Remove the guide

2. On the front of the inner finisher, release the timing belt connected to the exit motor.

Figure 6-524 Release the timing belt

2550 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

3. Remove five screws securing the rear harness guide.

Figure 6-525 Remove five screws

4. On the rear of the inner finisher, remove the e-ring and the pulley and then remove the e-ring and
the bushing.

Figure 6-526 Remove e-ring, pulley, and bushing

Remove the exit roller 2551

 5. Push the bushing to detach it, and then remove the exit roller.

Figure 6-527 Remove the exit roller

13. Remove the front tamper

Follow these steps to remove the front tamper.

1. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-528 Remove four screws

2552 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 2. Unplug the connector and release the hook, and then pull the front tamper up to remove.

Figure 6-529 Remove the front tamper

14. Remove the rear tamper

Follow these steps to remove the rear tamper.

1. Remove four screws.

NOTE: Move cable guideout of position to access the screws.

Figure 6-530 Remove four screws

Remove the rear tamper 2553

 2. Unplug two connectors and release the hook, and then remove the rear tamper.

Figure 6-531 Remove the rear tamper

15. Remove the ejector & paper support assembly

Follow these steps to remove the ejector & paper support assembly.

1. Open one clamp, disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-532 Disconnect one connector

2554 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 2. Pull the rear paper support up, and then release one clamp and disconnect two connectors.

Figure 6-533 Disconnect two connector

3. Remove four screws, and then remove the ejector & paper support assembly.

Figure 6-534 Remove the ejector & paper support assembly

16. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2555

 Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Ejector motor assembly (S11/ M6/ M7)

Learn how to remove and replace the ejector motor assembly.

To view teardown and reassembling video of the inner finisher, click the link below.

View a teardown video of the inner finisher.

View a reassembling video of the inner finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

2556 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 Table 6-63 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01309A (not orderable) Ejector motor assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

● Connect the power cable.

● Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the front cover

Follow these steps to remove the front cover.

1. Open the front door and open the punch cover.

2. Remove three screws in the front.

3. Remove the lever.

4. Open the top cover.

5. From the right side of the front cover, carefully lift and pry toward the top-left corner to remove the
front cover.

Figure 6-535 Remove the front cover

2. Remove the rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

Remove the front cover 2557

 1. Open the top cover.

Figure 6-536 Open the top cover

2. Remove three screws.

3. Release hooks carefully and remove the rear cover.

Figure 6-537 Remove the rear cover

3. Remove the output tray

Follow these steps to remove the output tray.

2558 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 1. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-538 Remove four screws

2. Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher, and then remove the output tray.

Figure 6-539 Remove the output tray.

4. Remove the output tray frame

Follow these steps to remove the output tray frame.

Remove the output tray frame 2559

 1. Rotate the pulley until the output tray frame depart from the gear.

Figure 6-540 Remove the pulley

2. Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher, and then remove the output tray frame.

Figure 6-541 Remove the output tray frame

TIP: Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher when reassembling. Be sure to level
the output tray.

Use the following video and instructions when the reinstalling the output tray frame assembly.

View a video for aligning the inner finisher output tray.

2560 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

a. Position the first wheel into the channel on both sides while pushing the paper holding
actuator.

b. Let the second wheel rest on the channel on both sides simultaneously.

c. Gently squeeze the wheels into channel until the output tray frame meet the gear.

d. Rotate the pulley until the output tray frame is no longer lifted. It can make to level the output
tray frame.

Remove the output tray frame 2561

 e. Rotate the pulley in the opposite direction.

5. Remove the PCA cover

Follow these steps to remove the PCA cover.

■ Remove two screws, and then remove the PCA cover.

Figure 6-542 Remove the PCA cover

6. Remove the left cover

Follow these steps to remove the left cover.

2562 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-543 Remove two screws

2. Remove four screws from both front and rear sides.

Figure 6-544 Remove four screws

Remove the left cover 2563

 3. Unplug two inline connectors, and then remove the left cover.

Figure 6-545 Unplug two connectors

TIP: Be sure to check the hook when reassembling.

7. Remove the front harness guide

Follow these steps to remove the front harness guide.

1. Open one clamp and unplug five connectors, and then remove the wire harness from the front
harness guide.

2564 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 2. Remove four screws, and then remove the front harness guide.

Figure 6-546 Remove the front harness guide

8. Remove the output tray motor assembly

Follow these steps to remove the output tray motor assembly.

■ Remove three screws, and then remove the output tray motor assembly.

Figure 6-547 Remove the output tray motor assembly

Remove the output tray motor assembly 2565

 9. Remove the output tray lower limit switch
Follow these steps to remove the output tray lower limit switch.

■ Remove one screw, and then remove the output tray lower limit switch.

Figure 6-548 Remove the output tray lower limit switch

10. Remove the paper holding

Follow these steps to remove the paper holding.

1. Remove the paper holding actuator spring.

Figure 6-549 Remove the paper holding actuator spring

2566 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

2. Remove the e-ring and the rack pinion gear. And then remove the pin and the e-ring, and then
remove the bushing.

Figure 6-550 Remove e-ring, rack pinion gear, pin, and bushing

NOTE: Be sure not to lose the pin.

3. Carefully remove the paper holding shaft and the actuator.

Figure 6-551 Remove the paper holding shaft and the actuator

Remove the paper holding 2567

 11. Remove the sub paddle unit
Follow these steps to remove the sub paddle unit.

1. Open the top cover, and then remove one screw securing the sub paddle unit.

Figure 6-552 Remove one screw

2568 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 2. Remove the e-ring, and then remove the pulley and timing belt. And then remove the e-ring and the
bushing.

Figure 6-553 Remove the e-ring, pulley, timing belt, and bushing

3. Lift up and remove the sub paddle unit.

Figure 6-554 Remove the sub paddle unit

12. Remove the exit roller

Follow these steps to remove the exit roller.

Remove the exit roller 2569

 1. Remove the guide on the center of the exit roller.

Figure 6-555 Remove the guide

2. On the front of the inner finisher, release the timing belt connected to the exit motor.

Figure 6-556 Release the timing belt

2570 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

3. Remove five screws securing the rear harness guide.

Figure 6-557 Remove five screws

4. On the rear of the inner finisher, remove the e-ring and the pulley and then remove the e-ring and
the bushing.

Figure 6-558 Remove e-ring, pulley, and bushing

Remove the exit roller 2571

 5. Push the bushing to detach it, and then remove the exit roller.

Figure 6-559 Remove the exit roller

13. Remove the front tamper

Follow these steps to remove the front tamper.

1. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-560 Remove four screws

2572 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 2. Unplug the connector and release the hook, and then pull the front tamper up to remove.

Figure 6-561 Remove the front tamper

14. Remove the rear tamper

Follow these steps to remove the rear tamper.

1. Remove four screws.

NOTE: Move cable guideout of position to access the screws.

Figure 6-562 Remove four screws

Remove the rear tamper 2573

 2. Unplug two connectors and release the hook, and then remove the rear tamper.

Figure 6-563 Remove the rear tamper

15. Remove the ejector & paper support assembly

Follow these steps to remove the ejector & paper support assembly.

1. Open one clamp, disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-564 Disconnect one connector

2574 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 2. Pull the rear paper support up, and then release one clamp and disconnect two connectors.

Figure 6-565 Disconnect two connector

3. Remove four screws, and then remove the ejector & paper support assembly.

Figure 6-566 Remove the ejector & paper support assembly

16. Remove the front paper support and the rear paper support
Follow these steps to remove the front paper support and the rear paper support.

Remove the front paper support and the rear paper support 2575
 ■ Remove two screws, and then pull the paper support assembly out of ejector assembly.

Figure 6-567 Remove paper support assembly

17. Remove the ejector motor assembly

Follow these steps to remove the ejector motor assembly.

1. Remove the e-ring and washer. Remove two timing belts, and then remove one screw.

Figure 6-568 Remove e-ring, washer, belt, and screw

2576 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

2. Remove the timing belt, and then remove one screw.

Figure 6-569 Remove the belt, screw

3. Remove the cable from clamp, and then disconnect two motor connectors and the sensor
connector.

Figure 6-570 Disconnect the motor and sensor connectors

Remove the ejector motor assembly 2577

 4. Remove the ejector motor assembly.

Figure 6-571 Remove the ejector motor assembly

18. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Ejector assembly (include end fence, S10/ S16)
Learn how to remove and replace the ejector assembly.

2578 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 View videos on how to remove and reassemble the inner finisher below:

View a teardown video of the inner finisher .

View a reassembling video of the inner finisher .

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-64 Part information

Part number Part description

SS456-61001 Ejector

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

● Connect the power cable.

● Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the front cover

Follow these steps to remove the front cover.

Remove the front cover 2579

 1. Open the front door and open the punch cover.

2. Remove three screws in the front.

3. Remove the lever.

4. Open the top cover.

5. From the right side of the front cover, carefully lift and pry toward the top-left corner to remove the
front cover.

Figure 6-572 Remove the front cover

2. Remove the rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

1. Open the top cover.

Figure 6-573 Open the top cover

2. Remove three screws.

2580 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 3. Release hooks carefully and remove the rear cover.

Figure 6-574 Remove the rear cover

3. Remove the output tray

Follow these steps to remove the output tray.

1. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-575 Remove four screws

Remove the output tray 2581

 2. Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher, and then remove the output tray.

Figure 6-576 Remove the output tray.

4. Remove the output tray frame

Follow these steps to remove the output tray frame.

1. Rotate the pulley until the output tray frame depart from the gear.

Figure 6-577 Remove the pulley

2582 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

2. Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher, and then remove the output tray frame.

Figure 6-578 Remove the output tray frame

TIP: Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher when reassembling. Be sure to level
the output tray.

Use the following video and instructions when the reinstalling the output tray frame assembly.

View a video for aligning the inner finisher output tray.

a. Position the first wheel into the channel on both sides while pushing the paper holding
actuator.

b. Let the second wheel rest on the channel on both sides simultaneously.

Remove the output tray frame 2583

 c. Gently squeeze the wheels into channel until the output tray frame meet the gear.

d. Rotate the pulley until the output tray frame is no longer lifted. It can make to level the output
tray frame.

e. Rotate the pulley in the opposite direction.

2584 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

5. Remove the PCA cover
Follow these steps to remove the PCA cover.

■ Remove two screws, and then remove the PCA cover.

Figure 6-579 Remove the PCA cover

6. Remove the left cover

Follow these steps to remove the left cover.

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-580 Remove two screws

Remove the PCA cover 2585

 2. Remove four screws from both front and rear sides.

Figure 6-581 Remove four screws

3. Unplug two inline connectors, and then remove the left cover.

Figure 6-582 Unplug two connectors

TIP: Be sure to check the hook when reassembling.

2586 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

7. Remove the front harness guide
Follow these steps to remove the front harness guide.

1. Open one clamp and unplug five connectors, and then remove the wire harness from the front
harness guide.

Remove the front harness guide 2587

 2. Remove four screws, and then remove the front harness guide.

Figure 6-583 Remove the front harness guide

8. Remove the output tray motor assembly

Follow these steps to remove the output tray motor assembly.

■ Remove three screws, and then remove the output tray motor assembly.

Figure 6-584 Remove the output tray motor assembly

2588 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

9. Remove the output tray lower limit switch
Follow these steps to remove the output tray lower limit switch.

■ Remove one screw, and then remove the output tray lower limit switch.

Figure 6-585 Remove the output tray lower limit switch

10. Remove the paper holding

Follow these steps to remove the paper holding.

1. Remove the paper holding actuator spring.

Figure 6-586 Remove the paper holding actuator spring

Remove the output tray lower limit switch 2589

 2. Remove the e-ring and the rack pinion gear. And then remove the pin and the e-ring, and then
remove the bushing.

Figure 6-587 Remove e-ring, rack pinion gear, pin, and bushing

NOTE: Be sure not to lose the pin.

3. Carefully remove the paper holding shaft and the actuator.

Figure 6-588 Remove the paper holding shaft and the actuator

2590 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

11. Remove the sub paddle unit
Follow these steps to remove the sub paddle unit.

1. Open the top cover, and then remove one screw securing the sub paddle unit.

Figure 6-589 Remove one screw

Remove the sub paddle unit 2591

 2. Remove the e-ring, and then remove the pulley and timing belt. And then remove the e-ring and the
bushing.

Figure 6-590 Remove the e-ring, pulley, timing belt, and bushing

3. Lift up and remove the sub paddle unit.

Figure 6-591 Remove the sub paddle unit

12. Remove the exit roller

Follow these steps to remove the exit roller.

2592 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

1. Remove the guide on the center of the exit roller.

Figure 6-592 Remove the guide

2. On the front of the inner finisher, release the timing belt connected to the exit motor.

Figure 6-593 Release the timing belt

Remove the exit roller 2593

 3. Remove five screws securing the rear harness guide.

Figure 6-594 Remove five screws

4. On the rear of the inner finisher, remove the e-ring and the pulley and then remove the e-ring and
the bushing.

Figure 6-595 Remove e-ring, pulley, and bushing

2594 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 5. Push the bushing to detach it, and then remove the exit roller.

Figure 6-596 Remove the exit roller

13. Remove the front tamper

Follow these steps to remove the front tamper.

1. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-597 Remove four screws

Remove the front tamper 2595

 2. Unplug the connector and release the hook, and then pull the front tamper up to remove.

Figure 6-598 Remove the front tamper

14. Remove the rear tamper

Follow these steps to remove the rear tamper.

1. Remove four screws.

NOTE: Move cable guideout of position to access the screws.

Figure 6-599 Remove four screws

2596 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 2. Unplug two connectors and release the hook, and then remove the rear tamper.

Figure 6-600 Remove the rear tamper

15. Remove the ejector & paper support assembly

Follow these steps to remove the ejector & paper support assembly.

1. Open one clamp, disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-601 Disconnect one connector

Remove the ejector & paper support assembly 2597

 2. Pull the rear paper support up, and then release one clamp and disconnect two connectors.

Figure 6-602 Disconnect two connector

3. Remove four screws, and then remove the ejector & paper support assembly.

Figure 6-603 Remove the ejector & paper support assembly

16. Remove the front paper support and the rear paper support
Follow these steps to remove the front paper support and the rear paper support.

2598 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 ■ Remove two screws, and then pull the paper support assembly out of ejector assembly.

Figure 6-604 Remove paper support assembly

17. Remove the ejector motor assembly

Follow these steps to remove the ejector motor assembly.

1. Remove the e-ring and washer. Remove two timing belts, and then remove one screw.

Figure 6-605 Remove e-ring, washer, belt, and screw

Remove the ejector motor assembly 2599

 2. Remove the timing belt, and then remove one screw.

Figure 6-606 Remove the belt, screw

3. Remove the cable from clamp, and then disconnect two motor connectors and the sensor
connector.

Figure 6-607 Disconnect the motor and sensor connectors

2600 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 4. Remove the ejector motor assembly.

Figure 6-608 Remove the ejector motor assembly

18. Remove the ejector assembly

Follow these steps to remove the ejector assembly.

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-609 Remove two screws

Remove the ejector assembly 2601

 2. Unplug two connectors, and then remove the ejector assembly.

Figure 6-610 Remove the ejector assembly

19. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

End fence unit

2602 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

Removal and replacement: End fence sensor (S17)
Learn how to remove and replace the end fence sensor.

To view teardown and reassembling video of the inner finisher, click the link below.

View a teardown video of the inner finisher.

View a reassembling video of the inner finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-65 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001381 End fence sensor

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

● Connect the power cable.

● Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

Removal and replacement: End fence sensor (S17) 2603

 1. Remove the front cover
Follow these steps to remove the front cover.

1. Open the front door and open the punch cover.

2. Remove three screws in the front.

3. Remove the lever.

4. Open the top cover.

5. From the right side of the front cover, carefully lift and pry toward the top-left corner to remove the
front cover.

Figure 6-611 Remove the front cover

2. Remove the rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

1. Open the top cover.

Figure 6-612 Open the top cover

2. Remove three screws.

2604 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 3. Release hooks carefully and remove the rear cover.

Figure 6-613 Remove the rear cover

3. Remove the middle cover

Follow these steps to remove the middle cover.

1. Open the front door and then open the punch cover.

Figure 6-614 Open the front door and punch cover

Remove the middle cover 2605

 2. Remove left-side one screw at the rear of the inner finisher, and then remove the middle cover by
lifting off the hinge pins at the front.

Figure 6-615 Remove the middle cover

4. Remove the punch cover

Follow these steps to remove the punch cover.

1. Unplug the connector. Remove the e-ring, and then remove the slide shaft at the rear of the inner
finisher.

Figure 6-616 Remove the slide shaft

2. Open the punch cover.

Figure 6-617 Open the punch cover

2606 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 3. Remove the front punch sheet, and then remove the e-ring and the washer. And then remove the
punch cover.

Figure 6-618 Remove the punch cover

5. Remove the diverter guide and the middle roller

Follow these steps to remove the diverter guide and the middle roller.

1. On the front of the inner finisher, remove the e-ring and bushing.

Figure 6-619 Remove the e-ring and bushing

Remove the diverter guide and the middle roller 2607

 2. On the rear of the inner finisher, remove the e-ring, pulley, bushing, belt, and spring (slightly hidden
from view).

Figure 6-620 Remove the e-ring, pulley, bushing, belt, and spring

3. Remove the diverter guide and the middle roller.

Figure 6-621 Remove the diverter guide and the middle roller

6. Remove the middle paper guide

Follow these steps to remove the middle paper guide.

2608 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 1. Remove six screws, and then open the middle paper guide in the direction of the arrow.

Figure 6-622 Open the middle paper guide

NOTE: Becareful not to damage the sensor connector.

2. Unplug the connector under the middle paper guide. And then, remove the middle paper guide.

Figure 6-623 Remove the middle paper guide

7. Remove the exit motor bracket

Follow these steps to remove the exit motor bracket.

Remove the exit motor bracket 2609

 ■ Remove two screws, unplug the motor connector. And then remove exit motor bracket.

Figure 6-624 Remove the exit motor bracket

8. Remove the end fence sensor bracket

Follow these steps to remove the end fence sensor bracket.

1. Remove three screws at the front of the inner finisher, and then remove the bracket.

Figure 6-625 Remove the bracket

2610 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

2. Remove two screws at the front of the inner finisher.

Figure 6-626 Remove two screws

3. Remove two screws at the rear of the inner finisher.

Figure 6-627 Remove two screws

4. Loosen three cable clamps. Unplug the connector at the sensor, and then remove the end fence
sensor bracket.

Figure 6-628 Remove the end fence sensor bracket

Remove the end fence sensor bracket 2611

 9. Remove the end fence sensor
Follow these steps to remove the end fence sensor.

■ Remove one screw, and then remove the end fence sensor.

Figure 6-629 Remove the end fence sensor

10. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Output tray unit

2612 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

Removal and replacement: Output tray
Learn how to remove and replace the output tray.

To view teardown and reassembling video of the inner finisher, click the links below.

View a teardown video of the inner finisher.

View a reassembling video of the inner finisher.

To view a video for aligning the inner finisher output tray, click the link below.

View a video for aligning the inner finisher output tray.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
http://www.hp.com/buy/parts .

Table 6-66 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01337B Output tray

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

● Connect the power cable.

● Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Removal and replacement: Output tray 2613

 Post service test
Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the front cover

Follow these steps to remove the front cover.

1. Open the front door and open the punch cover.

2. Remove three screws in the front.

3. Remove the lever.

4. Open the top cover.

5. From the right side of the front cover, carefully lift and pry toward the top-left corner to remove the
front cover.

Figure 6-630 Remove the front cover

2. Remove the rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

1. Open the top cover.

Figure 6-631 Open the top cover

2614 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 2. Remove three screws.

3. Release hooks carefully and remove the rear cover.

Figure 6-632 Remove the rear cover

3. Remove the output tray

Follow these steps to remove the output tray.

1. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-633 Remove four screws

Remove the output tray 2615

 2. Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher, and then remove the output tray.

Figure 6-634 Remove the output tray.

4. Remove the output tray frame

Follow these steps to remove the output tray frame.

1. Rotate the pulley until the output tray frame depart from the gear.

Figure 6-635 Remove the pulley

2616 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

2. Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher, and then remove the output tray frame.

Figure 6-636 Remove the output tray frame

TIP: Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher when reassembling. Be sure to level
the output tray.

Use the following video and instructions when the reinstalling the output tray frame assembly.

View a video for aligning the inner finisher output tray.

a. Position the first wheel into the channel on both sides while pushing the paper holding
actuator.

b. Let the second wheel rest on the channel on both sides simultaneously.

Remove the output tray frame 2617

 c. Gently squeeze the wheels into channel until the output tray frame meet the gear.

d. Rotate the pulley until the output tray frame is no longer lifted. It can make to level the output
tray frame.

e. Rotate the pulley in the opposite direction.

2618 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

5. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Output tray top of stack sensor (S8)

Learn how to remove and replace the output tray top of stack sensor.

To view teardown and reassembling video of the inner finisher, click the link below.

View a teardown video of the inner finisher.

View a reassembling video of the inner finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2619

 ● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
http://www.hp.com/buy/parts .

Table 6-67 Part information

Part number Part description

JC82-01039A output tray top of stack sensor

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

● Connect the power cable.

● Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the front cover

Follow these steps to remove the front cover.

1. Open the front door and open the punch cover.

2. Remove three screws in the front.

3. Remove the lever.

4. Open the top cover.

2620 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 5. From the right side of the front cover, carefully lift and pry toward the top-left corner to remove the
front cover.

Figure 6-637 Remove the front cover

2. Remove the rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

1. Open the top cover.

Figure 6-638 Open the top cover

2. Remove three screws.

Remove the rear cover 2621

 3. Release hooks carefully and remove the rear cover.

Figure 6-639 Remove the rear cover

3. Remove the output tray

Follow these steps to remove the output tray.

1. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-640 Remove four screws

2622 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 2. Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher, and then remove the output tray.

Figure 6-641 Remove the output tray.

4. Remove the output tray frame

Follow these steps to remove the output tray frame.

1. Rotate the pulley until the output tray frame depart from the gear.

Figure 6-642 Remove the pulley

Remove the output tray frame 2623

 2. Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher, and then remove the output tray frame.

Figure 6-643 Remove the output tray frame

TIP: Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher when reassembling. Be sure to level
the output tray.

Use the following video and instructions when the reinstalling the output tray frame assembly.

View a video for aligning the inner finisher output tray.

a. Position the first wheel into the channel on both sides while pushing the paper holding
actuator.

b. Let the second wheel rest on the channel on both sides simultaneously.

2624 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

c. Gently squeeze the wheels into channel until the output tray frame meet the gear.

d. Rotate the pulley until the output tray frame is no longer lifted. It can make to level the output
tray frame.

e. Rotate the pulley in the opposite direction.

Remove the output tray frame 2625

 5. Remove the PCA cover
Follow these steps to remove the PCA cover.

■ Remove two screws, and then remove the PCA cover.

Figure 6-644 Remove the PCA cover

6. Remove the left cover

Follow these steps to remove the left cover.

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-645 Remove two screws

2626 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

2. Remove four screws from both front and rear sides.

Figure 6-646 Remove four screws

3. Unplug two inline connectors, and then remove the left cover.

Figure 6-647 Unplug two connectors

TIP: Be sure to check the hook when reassembling.

Remove the left cover 2627

 7. Remove the output tray top of stack sensor
Follow these steps to Remove the output tray top of stack sensor.

■ Remove two screws from both sides of the left cover. Remove the bracket, and then remove the
sensor.

Figure 6-648 Remove the output tray top of stack sensor

8. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

2628 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Output tray lower limit switch (S7)

Learn how to remove and replace the output tray lower limit switch.

To view teardown and reassembling video of the inner finisher, click the link below.

View a teardown video of the inner finisher.

View a reassembling video of the inner finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-68 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01320A Output tray lower limit switch

Removal and replacement: Output tray lower limit switch (S7) 2629
 Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

● Connect the power cable.

● Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the front cover

Follow these steps to remove the front cover.

1. Open the front door and open the punch cover.

2. Remove three screws in the front.

3. Remove the lever.

4. Open the top cover.

5. From the right side of the front cover, carefully lift and pry toward the top-left corner to remove the
front cover.

Figure 6-649 Remove the front cover

2. Remove the rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

2630 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 1. Open the top cover.

Figure 6-650 Open the top cover

2. Remove three screws.

3. Release hooks carefully and remove the rear cover.

Figure 6-651 Remove the rear cover

3. Remove the output tray

Follow these steps to remove the output tray.

Remove the output tray 2631

 1. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-652 Remove four screws

2. Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher, and then remove the output tray.

Figure 6-653 Remove the output tray.

4. Remove the output tray frame

Follow these steps to remove the output tray frame.

2632 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

1. Rotate the pulley until the output tray frame depart from the gear.

Figure 6-654 Remove the pulley

2. Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher, and then remove the output tray frame.

Figure 6-655 Remove the output tray frame

TIP: Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher when reassembling. Be sure to level
the output tray.

Use the following video and instructions when the reinstalling the output tray frame assembly.

View a video for aligning the inner finisher output tray.

Remove the output tray frame 2633

 a. Position the first wheel into the channel on both sides while pushing the paper holding
actuator.

b. Let the second wheel rest on the channel on both sides simultaneously.

c. Gently squeeze the wheels into channel until the output tray frame meet the gear.

d. Rotate the pulley until the output tray frame is no longer lifted. It can make to level the output
tray frame.

2634 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 e. Rotate the pulley in the opposite direction.

5. Remove the PCA cover

Follow these steps to remove the PCA cover.

■ Remove two screws, and then remove the PCA cover.

Figure 6-656 Remove the PCA cover

6. Remove the left cover

Follow these steps to remove the left cover.

Remove the PCA cover 2635

 1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-657 Remove two screws

2. Remove four screws from both front and rear sides.

Figure 6-658 Remove four screws

2636 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 3. Unplug two inline connectors, and then remove the left cover.

Figure 6-659 Unplug two connectors

TIP: Be sure to check the hook when reassembling.

7. Remove the front harness guide

Follow these steps to remove the front harness guide.

1. Open one clamp and unplug five connectors, and then remove the wire harness from the front
harness guide.

Remove the front harness guide 2637

 2. Remove four screws, and then remove the front harness guide.

Figure 6-660 Remove the front harness guide

8. Remove the output tray lower limit switch

Follow these steps to remove the output tray lower limit switch.

2638 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 ■ Remove one screw, and then remove the output tray lower limit switch.

Figure 6-661 Remove the output tray lower limit switch

9. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Output tray motor assembly

Unpack the replacement assembly 2639

 Removal and replacement: Output tray motor assembly (M4)
Learn how to remove and replace the output tray motor assembly.

To view teardown and reassembling video of the inner finisher, click the link below.

View a teardown video of the inner finisher.

View a reassembling video of the inner finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
http://www.hp.com/buy/parts .

Table 6-69 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01334B Output tray motor assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

● Connect the power cable.

● Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

2640 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

1. Remove the front cover
Follow these steps to remove the front cover.

1. Open the front door and open the punch cover.

2. Remove three screws in the front.

3. Remove the lever.

4. Open the top cover.

5. From the right side of the front cover, carefully lift and pry toward the top-left corner to remove the
front cover.

Figure 6-662 Remove the front cover

2. Remove the rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

1. Open the top cover.

Figure 6-663 Open the top cover

2. Remove three screws.

Remove the front cover 2641

 3. Release hooks carefully and remove the rear cover.

Figure 6-664 Remove the rear cover

3. Remove the output tray

Follow these steps to remove the output tray.

1. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-665 Remove four screws

2642 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 2. Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher, and then remove the output tray.

Figure 6-666 Remove the output tray.

4. Remove the output tray frame

Follow these steps to remove the output tray frame.

1. Rotate the pulley until the output tray frame depart from the gear.

Figure 6-667 Remove the pulley

Remove the output tray frame 2643

 2. Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher, and then remove the output tray frame.

Figure 6-668 Remove the output tray frame

TIP: Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher when reassembling. Be sure to level
the output tray.

Use the following video and instructions when the reinstalling the output tray frame assembly.

View a video for aligning the inner finisher output tray.

a. Position the first wheel into the channel on both sides while pushing the paper holding
actuator.

b. Let the second wheel rest on the channel on both sides simultaneously.

2644 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

c. Gently squeeze the wheels into channel until the output tray frame meet the gear.

d. Rotate the pulley until the output tray frame is no longer lifted. It can make to level the output
tray frame.

e. Rotate the pulley in the opposite direction.

Remove the output tray frame 2645

 5. Remove the PCA cover
Follow these steps to remove the PCA cover.

■ Remove two screws, and then remove the PCA cover.

Figure 6-669 Remove the PCA cover

6. Remove the left cover

Follow these steps to remove the left cover.

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-670 Remove two screws

2646 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

2. Remove four screws from both front and rear sides.

Figure 6-671 Remove four screws

3. Unplug two inline connectors, and then remove the left cover.

Figure 6-672 Unplug two connectors

TIP: Be sure to check the hook when reassembling.

Remove the left cover 2647

 7. Remove the front harness guide
Follow these steps to remove the front harness guide.

1. Open one clamp and unplug five connectors, and then remove the wire harness from the front
harness guide.

2648 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 2. Remove four screws, and then remove the front harness guide.

Figure 6-673 Remove the front harness guide

8. Remove the output tray motor assembly

Follow these steps to remove the output tray motor assembly.

■ Remove three screws, and then remove the output tray motor assembly.

Figure 6-674 Remove the output tray motor assembly

Remove the output tray motor assembly 2649

 9. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Output tray motor sensor (S6)

Learn how to remove and replace the output tray motor sensor.

To view teardown and reassembling video of the inner finisher, click the link below.

View a teardown video of the inner finisher.

View a reassembling video of the inner finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

2650 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 ● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
http://www.hp.com/buy/parts .

Table 6-70 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Output tray motor sensor

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

● Connect the power cable.

● Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the front cover

Follow these steps to remove the front cover.

1. Open the front door and open the punch cover.

2. Remove three screws in the front.

3. Remove the lever.

4. Open the top cover.

Remove the front cover 2651

 5. From the right side of the front cover, carefully lift and pry toward the top-left corner to remove the
front cover.

Figure 6-675 Remove the front cover

2. Remove the rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

1. Open the top cover.

Figure 6-676 Open the top cover

2. Remove three screws.

2652 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 3. Release hooks carefully and remove the rear cover.

Figure 6-677 Remove the rear cover

3. Remove the output tray

Follow these steps to remove the output tray.

1. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-678 Remove four screws

Remove the output tray 2653

 2. Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher, and then remove the output tray.

Figure 6-679 Remove the output tray.

4. Remove the output tray frame

Follow these steps to remove the output tray frame.

1. Rotate the pulley until the output tray frame depart from the gear.

Figure 6-680 Remove the pulley

2654 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

2. Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher, and then remove the output tray frame.

Figure 6-681 Remove the output tray frame

TIP: Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher when reassembling. Be sure to level
the output tray.

Use the following video and instructions when the reinstalling the output tray frame assembly.

View a video for aligning the inner finisher output tray.

a. Position the first wheel into the channel on both sides while pushing the paper holding
actuator.

b. Let the second wheel rest on the channel on both sides simultaneously.

Remove the output tray frame 2655

 c. Gently squeeze the wheels into channel until the output tray frame meet the gear.

d. Rotate the pulley until the output tray frame is no longer lifted. It can make to level the output
tray frame.

e. Rotate the pulley in the opposite direction.

2656 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

5. Remove the PCA cover
Follow these steps to remove the PCA cover.

■ Remove two screws, and then remove the PCA cover.

Figure 6-682 Remove the PCA cover

6. Remove the left cover

Follow these steps to remove the left cover.

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-683 Remove two screws

Remove the PCA cover 2657

 2. Remove four screws from both front and rear sides.

Figure 6-684 Remove four screws

3. Unplug two inline connectors, and then remove the left cover.

Figure 6-685 Unplug two connectors

TIP: Be sure to check the hook when reassembling.

2658 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

7. Remove the front harness guide
Follow these steps to remove the front harness guide.

1. Open one clamp and unplug five connectors, and then remove the wire harness from the front
harness guide.

Remove the front harness guide 2659

 2. Remove four screws, and then remove the front harness guide.

Figure 6-686 Remove the front harness guide

8. Remove the output tray motor assembly

Follow these steps to remove the output tray motor assembly.

■ Remove three screws, and then remove the output tray motor assembly.

Figure 6-687 Remove the output tray motor assembly

2660 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

9. Remove the output tray motor sensor
Follow these steps to remove the output tray motor sensor.

■ Remove one screw, remove the shaft, and then remove the sensor.

Figure 6-688 Remove the output tray motor sensor

10. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Output tray motor

Learn how to remove and replace the output tray motor.

Remove the output tray motor sensor 2661

 To view teardown and reassembling video of the inner finisher, click the link below.

View a teardown video of the inner finisher.

View a reassembling video of the inner finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
http://www.hp.com/buy/parts .

Table 6-71 Part information

Part number Part description

JC31-00178B Output tray motor

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

● Connect the power cable.

● Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the front cover

Follow these steps to remove the front cover.

2662 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 1. Open the front door and open the punch cover.

2. Remove three screws in the front.

3. Remove the lever.

4. Open the top cover.

5. From the right side of the front cover, carefully lift and pry toward the top-left corner to remove the
front cover.

Figure 6-689 Remove the front cover

2. Remove the rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

1. Open the top cover.

Figure 6-690 Open the top cover

2. Remove three screws.

Remove the rear cover 2663

 3. Release hooks carefully and remove the rear cover.

Figure 6-691 Remove the rear cover

3. Remove the output tray

Follow these steps to remove the output tray.

1. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-692 Remove four screws

2664 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 2. Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher, and then remove the output tray.

Figure 6-693 Remove the output tray.

4. Remove the output tray frame

Follow these steps to remove the output tray frame.

1. Rotate the pulley until the output tray frame depart from the gear.

Figure 6-694 Remove the pulley

Remove the output tray frame 2665

 2. Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher, and then remove the output tray frame.

Figure 6-695 Remove the output tray frame

TIP: Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher when reassembling. Be sure to level
the output tray.

Use the following video and instructions when the reinstalling the output tray frame assembly.

View a video for aligning the inner finisher output tray.

a. Position the first wheel into the channel on both sides while pushing the paper holding
actuator.

b. Let the second wheel rest on the channel on both sides simultaneously.

2666 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

c. Gently squeeze the wheels into channel until the output tray frame meet the gear.

d. Rotate the pulley until the output tray frame is no longer lifted. It can make to level the output
tray frame.

e. Rotate the pulley in the opposite direction.

Remove the output tray frame 2667

 5. Remove the PCA cover
Follow these steps to remove the PCA cover.

■ Remove two screws, and then remove the PCA cover.

Figure 6-696 Remove the PCA cover

6. Remove the left cover

Follow these steps to remove the left cover.

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-697 Remove two screws

2668 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

2. Remove four screws from both front and rear sides.

Figure 6-698 Remove four screws

3. Unplug two inline connectors, and then remove the left cover.

Figure 6-699 Unplug two connectors

TIP: Be sure to check the hook when reassembling.

Remove the left cover 2669

 7. Remove the front harness guide
Follow these steps to remove the front harness guide.

1. Open one clamp and unplug five connectors, and then remove the wire harness from the front
harness guide.

2670 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 2. Remove four screws, and then remove the front harness guide.

Figure 6-700 Remove the front harness guide

8. Remove the output tray motor assembly

Follow these steps to remove the output tray motor assembly.

■ Remove three screws, and then remove the output tray motor assembly.

Figure 6-701 Remove the output tray motor assembly

Remove the output tray motor assembly 2671

 9. Remove the output tray motor
Follow these steps to remove the output tray motor.

■ Remove two screws, unplug the connector, and then remove the output tray motor.

Figure 6-702 Remove the output tray motor

10. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

2672 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Paper holding unit

Removal and replacement: Paper holding

Learn how to remove and replace the paper holding.

To view teardown and reassembling video of the inner finisher, click the link below.

View a teardown video of the inner finisher.

View a reassembling video of the inner finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
http://www.hp.com/buy/parts .

Table 6-72 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01313A Paper holding actuator

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

Paper holding unit 2673

 After performing service
Turn the printer power on

● Connect the power cable.

● Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the front cover

Follow these steps to remove the front cover.

1. Open the front door and open the punch cover.

2. Remove three screws in the front.

3. Remove the lever.

4. Open the top cover.

5. From the right side of the front cover, carefully lift and pry toward the top-left corner to remove the
front cover.

Figure 6-703 Remove the front cover

2. Remove the rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

2674 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 1. Open the top cover.

Figure 6-704 Open the top cover

2. Remove three screws.

3. Release hooks carefully and remove the rear cover.

Figure 6-705 Remove the rear cover

3. Remove the output tray

Follow these steps to remove the output tray.

Remove the output tray 2675

 1. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-706 Remove four screws

2. Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher, and then remove the output tray.

Figure 6-707 Remove the output tray.

4. Remove the output tray frame

Follow these steps to remove the output tray frame.

2676 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

1. Rotate the pulley until the output tray frame depart from the gear.

Figure 6-708 Remove the pulley

2. Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher, and then remove the output tray frame.

Figure 6-709 Remove the output tray frame

TIP: Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher when reassembling. Be sure to level
the output tray.

Use the following video and instructions when the reinstalling the output tray frame assembly.

View a video for aligning the inner finisher output tray.

Remove the output tray frame 2677

 a. Position the first wheel into the channel on both sides while pushing the paper holding
actuator.

b. Let the second wheel rest on the channel on both sides simultaneously.

c. Gently squeeze the wheels into channel until the output tray frame meet the gear.

d. Rotate the pulley until the output tray frame is no longer lifted. It can make to level the output
tray frame.

2678 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 e. Rotate the pulley in the opposite direction.

5. Remove the PCA cover

Follow these steps to remove the PCA cover.

■ Remove two screws, and then remove the PCA cover.

Figure 6-710 Remove the PCA cover

6. Remove the left cover

Follow these steps to remove the left cover.

Remove the PCA cover 2679

 1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-711 Remove two screws

2. Remove four screws from both front and rear sides.

Figure 6-712 Remove four screws

2680 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 3. Unplug two inline connectors, and then remove the left cover.

Figure 6-713 Unplug two connectors

TIP: Be sure to check the hook when reassembling.

7. Remove the front harness guide

Follow these steps to remove the front harness guide.

1. Open one clamp and unplug five connectors, and then remove the wire harness from the front
harness guide.

Remove the front harness guide 2681

 2. Remove four screws, and then remove the front harness guide.

Figure 6-714 Remove the front harness guide

8. Remove the output tray motor assembly

Follow these steps to remove the output tray motor assembly.

■ Remove three screws, and then remove the output tray motor assembly.

Figure 6-715 Remove the output tray motor assembly

2682 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

9. Remove the output tray lower limit switch
Follow these steps to remove the output tray lower limit switch.

■ Remove one screw, and then remove the output tray lower limit switch.

Figure 6-716 Remove the output tray lower limit switch

10. Remove the paper holding

Follow these steps to remove the paper holding.

1. Remove the paper holding actuator spring.

Figure 6-717 Remove the paper holding actuator spring

Remove the output tray lower limit switch 2683

 2. Remove the e-ring and the rack pinion gear. And then remove the pin and the e-ring, and then
remove the bushing.

Figure 6-718 Remove e-ring, rack pinion gear, pin, and bushing

NOTE: Be sure not to lose the pin.

3. Carefully remove the paper holding shaft and the actuator.

Figure 6-719 Remove the paper holding shaft and the actuator

2684 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

11. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Paper holding sensor (S9)

Learn how to remove and replace the paper holding sensor.

To view teardown and reassembling video of the inner finisher, click the link below.

View a teardown video of the inner finisher.

View a reassembling video of the inner finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2685

 ● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
http://www.hp.com/buy/parts .

Table 6-73 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Paper holding sensor

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

● Connect the power cable.

● Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the front cover

Follow these steps to remove the front cover.

1. Open the front door and open the punch cover.

2. Remove three screws in the front.

3. Remove the lever.

4. Open the top cover.

2686 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 5. From the right side of the front cover, carefully lift and pry toward the top-left corner to remove the
front cover.

Figure 6-720 Remove the front cover

2. Remove the rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

1. Open the top cover.

Figure 6-721 Open the top cover

2. Remove three screws.

Remove the rear cover 2687

 3. Release hooks carefully and remove the rear cover.

Figure 6-722 Remove the rear cover

3. Remove the output tray

Follow these steps to remove the output tray.

1. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-723 Remove four screws

2688 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 2. Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher, and then remove the output tray.

Figure 6-724 Remove the output tray.

4. Remove the output tray frame

Follow these steps to remove the output tray frame.

1. Rotate the pulley until the output tray frame depart from the gear.

Figure 6-725 Remove the pulley

Remove the output tray frame 2689

 2. Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher, and then remove the output tray frame.

Figure 6-726 Remove the output tray frame

TIP: Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher when reassembling. Be sure to level
the output tray.

Use the following video and instructions when the reinstalling the output tray frame assembly.

View a video for aligning the inner finisher output tray.

a. Position the first wheel into the channel on both sides while pushing the paper holding
actuator.

b. Let the second wheel rest on the channel on both sides simultaneously.

2690 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

c. Gently squeeze the wheels into channel until the output tray frame meet the gear.

d. Rotate the pulley until the output tray frame is no longer lifted. It can make to level the output
tray frame.

e. Rotate the pulley in the opposite direction.

Remove the output tray frame 2691

 5. Remove the PCA cover
Follow these steps to remove the PCA cover.

■ Remove two screws, and then remove the PCA cover.

Figure 6-727 Remove the PCA cover

6. Remove the left cover

Follow these steps to remove the left cover.

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-728 Remove two screws

2692 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

2. Remove four screws from both front and rear sides.

Figure 6-729 Remove four screws

3. Unplug two inline connectors, and then remove the left cover.

Figure 6-730 Unplug two connectors

TIP: Be sure to check the hook when reassembling.

Remove the left cover 2693

 7. Remove the front harness guide
Follow these steps to remove the front harness guide.

1. Open one clamp and unplug five connectors, and then remove the wire harness from the front
harness guide.

2694 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 2. Remove four screws, and then remove the front harness guide.

Figure 6-731 Remove the front harness guide

8. Remove the output tray motor assembly

Follow these steps to remove the output tray motor assembly.

■ Remove three screws, and then remove the output tray motor assembly.

Figure 6-732 Remove the output tray motor assembly

Remove the output tray motor assembly 2695

 9. Remove the output tray lower limit switch
Follow these steps to remove the output tray lower limit switch.

■ Remove one screw, and then remove the output tray lower limit switch.

Figure 6-733 Remove the output tray lower limit switch

10. Remove the paper holding

Follow these steps to remove the paper holding.

1. Remove the paper holding actuator spring.

Figure 6-734 Remove the paper holding actuator spring

2696 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

2. Remove the e-ring and the rack pinion gear. And then remove the pin and the e-ring, and then
remove the bushing.

Figure 6-735 Remove e-ring, rack pinion gear, pin, and bushing

NOTE: Be sure not to lose the pin.

3. Carefully remove the paper holding shaft and the actuator.

Figure 6-736 Remove the paper holding shaft and the actuator

Remove the paper holding 2697

 11. Remove the paper holding sensor
Follow these steps to remove the paper holding sensor.

1. Unplug the connector.

2. Remove the adhesive strip from below the sensor.

3. Remove the paper holding sensor.

Figure 6-737 Remove the paper holding sensor

12. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

2698 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Paper holding solenoid (SL1)

Learn how to remove and replace the paper holding solenoid.

To view teardown and reassembling video of the inner finisher, click the link below.

View a teardown video of the inner finisher.

View a reassembling video of the inner finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-74 Part information

Part number Part description

JC33-00037A Paper holding solenoid

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

Removal and replacement: Paper holding solenoid (SL1) 2699

 ● Connect the power cable.

● Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the front cover

Follow these steps to remove the front cover.

1. Open the front door and open the punch cover.

2. Remove three screws in the front.

3. Remove the lever.

4. Open the top cover.

5. From the right side of the front cover, carefully lift and pry toward the top-left corner to remove the
front cover.

Figure 6-738 Remove the front cover

2. Remove the rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

2700 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 1. Open the top cover.

Figure 6-739 Open the top cover

2. Remove three screws.

3. Release hooks carefully and remove the rear cover.

Figure 6-740 Remove the rear cover

3. Remove the output tray

Follow these steps to remove the output tray.

Remove the output tray 2701

 1. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-741 Remove four screws

2. Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher, and then remove the output tray.

Figure 6-742 Remove the output tray.

4. Remove the output tray frame

Follow these steps to remove the output tray frame.

2702 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

1. Rotate the pulley until the output tray frame depart from the gear.

Figure 6-743 Remove the pulley

2. Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher, and then remove the output tray frame.

Figure 6-744 Remove the output tray frame

TIP: Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher when reassembling. Be sure to level
the output tray.

Use the following video and instructions when the reinstalling the output tray frame assembly.

View a video for aligning the inner finisher output tray.

Remove the output tray frame 2703

 a. Position the first wheel into the channel on both sides while pushing the paper holding
actuator.

b. Let the second wheel rest on the channel on both sides simultaneously.

c. Gently squeeze the wheels into channel until the output tray frame meet the gear.

d. Rotate the pulley until the output tray frame is no longer lifted. It can make to level the output
tray frame.

2704 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 e. Rotate the pulley in the opposite direction.

5. Remove the PCA cover

Follow these steps to remove the PCA cover.

■ Remove two screws, and then remove the PCA cover.

Figure 6-745 Remove the PCA cover

6. Remove the left cover

Follow these steps to remove the left cover.

Remove the PCA cover 2705

 1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-746 Remove two screws

2. Remove four screws from both front and rear sides.

Figure 6-747 Remove four screws

2706 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 3. Unplug two inline connectors, and then remove the left cover.

Figure 6-748 Unplug two connectors

TIP: Be sure to check the hook when reassembling.

7. Remove the front harness guide

Follow these steps to remove the front harness guide.

1. Open one clamp and unplug five connectors, and then remove the wire harness from the front
harness guide.

Remove the front harness guide 2707

 2. Remove four screws, and then remove the front harness guide.

Figure 6-749 Remove the front harness guide

8. Remove the output tray motor assembly

Follow these steps to remove the output tray motor assembly.

■ Remove three screws, and then remove the output tray motor assembly.

Figure 6-750 Remove the output tray motor assembly

2708 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

9. Remove the output tray lower limit switch
Follow these steps to remove the output tray lower limit switch.

■ Remove one screw, and then remove the output tray lower limit switch.

Figure 6-751 Remove the output tray lower limit switch

10. Remove the paper holding

Follow these steps to remove the paper holding.

1. Remove the paper holding actuator spring.

Figure 6-752 Remove the paper holding actuator spring

Remove the output tray lower limit switch 2709

 2. Remove the e-ring and the rack pinion gear. And then remove the pin and the e-ring, and then
remove the bushing.

Figure 6-753 Remove e-ring, rack pinion gear, pin, and bushing

NOTE: Be sure not to lose the pin.

3. Carefully remove the paper holding shaft and the actuator.

Figure 6-754 Remove the paper holding shaft and the actuator

2710 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

11. Remove the sub paddle unit
Follow these steps to remove the sub paddle unit.

1. Open the top cover, and then remove one screw securing the sub paddle unit.

Figure 6-755 Remove one screw

Remove the sub paddle unit 2711

 2. Remove the e-ring, and then remove the pulley and timing belt. And then remove the e-ring and the
bushing.

Figure 6-756 Remove the e-ring, pulley, timing belt, and bushing

3. Lift up and remove the sub paddle unit.

Figure 6-757 Remove the sub paddle unit

12. Remove the exit roller

Follow these steps to remove the exit roller.

2712 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

1. Remove the guide on the center of the exit roller.

Figure 6-758 Remove the guide

2. On the front of the inner finisher, release the timing belt connected to the exit motor.

Figure 6-759 Release the timing belt

Remove the exit roller 2713

 3. Remove five screws securing the rear harness guide.

Figure 6-760 Remove five screws

4. On the rear of the inner finisher, remove the e-ring and the pulley and then remove the e-ring and
the bushing.

Figure 6-761 Remove e-ring, pulley, and bushing

2714 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 5. Push the bushing to detach it, and then remove the exit roller.

Figure 6-762 Remove the exit roller

13. Remove the front tamper

Follow these steps to remove the front tamper.

1. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-763 Remove four screws

Remove the front tamper 2715

 2. Unplug the connector and release the hook, and then pull the front tamper up to remove.

Figure 6-764 Remove the front tamper

14. Remove the paper holding solenoid

Follow these steps to remove the paper holding solenoid.

1. Remove two screws at the front of the inner finisher.

Figure 6-765 Remove two screws

2716 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

2. Remove one screw.

Figure 6-766 Remove one screw

3. Disconnect two connectors and remove the solenoid assembly.

Figure 6-767 Remove the solenoid assembly

Remove the paper holding solenoid 2717

 4. Remove two screws, and then release the solenoid from the bracket.

Figure 6-768 Remove the paper holding solenoid

15. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Punch unit

Removal and replacement: Punch cover

Learn how to remove and replace the punch cover.

To view teardown and reassembling video of the inner finisher, click the link below.

2718 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 View a teardown video of the inner finisher.

View a reassembling video of the inner finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
http://www.hp.com/buy/parts .

Table 6-75 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01343B Punch cover

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

● Connect the power cable.

● Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

Remove the rear cover 2719

 1. Open the top cover.

Figure 6-769 Open the top cover

2. Remove three screws.

3. Release hooks carefully and remove the rear cover.

Figure 6-770 Remove the rear cover

2. Remove the punch cover

Follow these steps to remove the punch cover.

2720 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

1. Unplug the connector. Remove the e-ring, and then remove the slide shaft at the rear of the inner
finisher.

Figure 6-771 Remove the slide shaft

2. Open the punch cover.

Figure 6-772 Open the punch cover

Remove the punch cover 2721

 3. Remove the front punch sheet, and then remove the e-ring and the washer. And then remove the
punch cover.

Figure 6-773 Remove the punch cover

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

2722 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Punch waste full sensor (S19)

Learn how to remove and replace the punch waste full sensor.

To view teardown and reassembling video of the inner finisher, click the link below.

View a teardown video of the inner finisher.

View a reassembling video of the inner finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-76 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001381 Punch waste full sensor

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

Removal and replacement: Punch waste full sensor (S19) 2723

 ● Connect the power cable.

● Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the front cover

Follow these steps to remove the front cover.

1. Open the front door and open the punch cover.

2. Remove three screws in the front.

3. Remove the lever.

4. Open the top cover.

5. From the right side of the front cover, carefully lift and pry toward the top-left corner to remove the
front cover.

Figure 6-774 Remove the front cover

2. Remove the rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

2724 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 1. Open the top cover.

Figure 6-775 Open the top cover

2. Remove three screws.

3. Release hooks carefully and remove the rear cover.

Figure 6-776 Remove the rear cover

3. Remove the middle cover

Follow these steps to remove the middle cover.

Remove the middle cover 2725

 1. Open the front door and then open the punch cover.

Figure 6-777 Open the front door and punch cover

2. Remove left-side one screw at the rear of the inner finisher, and then remove the middle cover by
lifting off the hinge pins at the front.

Figure 6-778 Remove the middle cover

4. Remove the punch cover

Follow these steps to remove the punch cover.

1. Unplug the connector. Remove the e-ring, and then remove the slide shaft at the rear of the inner
finisher.

Figure 6-779 Remove the slide shaft

2726 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 2. Open the punch cover.

Figure 6-780 Open the punch cover

3. Remove the front punch sheet, and then remove the e-ring and the washer. And then remove the
punch cover.

Figure 6-781 Remove the punch cover

5. Remove the diverter guide and the middle roller

Follow these steps to remove the diverter guide and the middle roller.

Remove the diverter guide and the middle roller 2727

 1. On the front of the inner finisher, remove the e-ring and bushing.

Figure 6-782 Remove the e-ring and bushing

2. On the rear of the inner finisher, remove the e-ring, pulley, bushing, belt, and spring (slightly hidden
from view).

Figure 6-783 Remove the e-ring, pulley, bushing, belt, and spring

2728 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 3. Remove the diverter guide and the middle roller.

Figure 6-784 Remove the diverter guide and the middle roller

6. Remove the middle paper guide

Follow these steps to remove the middle paper guide.

1. Remove six screws, and then open the middle paper guide in the direction of the arrow.

Figure 6-785 Open the middle paper guide

NOTE: Becareful not to damage the sensor connector.

Remove the middle paper guide 2729

 2. Unplug the connector under the middle paper guide. And then, remove the middle paper guide.

Figure 6-786 Remove the middle paper guide

7. Remove the punch waste full sensor

Follow these steps to remove the punch waste full sensor.

1. Remove one screw, unplug the connector, and then remove the punch waste full sensor bracket.

Figure 6-787 Remove the punch waste full sensor bracket

2730 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 2. Remove one screw, and then remove the punch waste full sensor from the bracket.

Figure 6-788 Remove the punch waste full sensor

8. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch
the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the
printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Problem solving
Learn about problem solving.

Control panel message document (CPMD)

Learn about the control panel message document (CPMD).

Unpack the replacement assembly 2731

 Refer to Error codes (types and structure) on page 716 for more details.

Electrical Mechanical Diagrams (Inner finisher)

2732 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

Punch waste full sensor
Figure 6-789 Punch waste full sensor

Punch waste full sensor (0604-001381)

5V
Inner Finisher PCA (JC92-02774B )
CN3, Rear joint I/F
1 STAPLER MOTOR OUT1
2 STAPLER MOTOR OUT1
3 STAPLER MOTOR OUT2
4 STAPLER MOTOR OUT2
5 STAPLER LOW
6 STAPLER READY
7 STAPLER HOME
8 STAPLER POSITION MOTOR B
JC39-02173A 9 STAPLER POSITION MOTOR nB
10 STAPLER POSITION MOTOR nA
11 STAPLER POSITION MOTOR A
12 STAPLER POSITION HOME REAR
13 STAPLER POSITION HOME FRONT
14 DGND
15 FRONT COVER OPEN
16 FRONT COVER SWITH
17 ENTRANCE MOTOR B
18 ENTRANCE MOTOR A
19 ENTRANCE MOTOR nB
20 ENTRANCE MOTOR nA
21 STAPLER PCA 5V

22 DGND
23 PUNCH WASTE FULL SENSOR
5V 24 5V
25 24V
26 24V
27 DGND
28 DGND
29 DGND
30 5V
31 3.3V
32 PUNCH MOTOR SLE
33 PUNCH MOTOR EN
34 PUNCH MOTOR HA
35 PUNCH MOTOR SENSOR
36 PUNCH HOME SENSOR
37 PUNCH MOTOR DECAY
38 DS2 2
39 DS2 1
40 LED5 OU

Punch waste full sensor 2733

 Punch waste box sensor and finisher docking sensor
Figure 6-790 Punch waste box sensor and finisher docking sensor
Inner Finisher PCA (JC92-02774B)
CN1, Rear sensor
5V 1 PUNCH WASTE BOX SENSOR 5V
2 DGND
3 PUNCH WASTE BOX SENSOR
4 FINISHER DOCKING SENSOR 5V
5 DGND
5V
6 FINISHER DOCKING SENSOR
7 DGND
JC39-02174A 8 ENTRANCE SENSOR
9 5V
Punch waste 10 OUT_PATH
box sensor 11 nDETECT_FAN
(0604-00139) 12 DGND

5V

5V
Finisher docking
sensor
(0604-00139)

2734 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

Entrance motor
Figure 6-791 Entrance motor

24V

Entrance motor (JC31-00169B)

Inner Finisher PCA (JC92-02774B )

Inner
CN3,Finisher PCA
Rear joint I/F
1 STAPLER MOTOR OUT1
2 STAPLER MOTOR OUT1
3 STAPLER MOTOR OUT2
4 STAPLER MOTOR OUT2
5 STAPLER LOW
6 STAPLER READY
7 STAPLER HOME
8 STAPLER POSITION MOTOR B
JC39-02173A 9 STAPLER POSITION MOTOR nB
10 STAPLER POSITION MOTOR nA
11 STAPLER POSITION MOTOR A
12 STAPLER POSITION HOME REAR
13 STAPLER POSITION HOME FRONT
14 DGND
15 FRONT COVER OPEN
16 FRONT COVER SWITH
17 ENTRANCE MOTOR B
18 ENTRANCE MOTOR A
24V 19 ENTRANCE MOTOR nB
20 ENTRANCE MOTOR nA
21 STAPLER PCA 5V
22 DGND
23 PUNCH WASTE FULL SENSOR
24 5V
25 24V
26 24V
27 DGND
28 DGND
29 DGND
30 5V
31 3.3V
32 PUNCH MOTOR SLE
33 PUNCH MOTOR EN
34 PUNCH MOTOR HA
35 PUNCH MOTOR SENSOR
36 PUNCH HOME SENSOR
37 PUNCH MOTOR DECAY
38 DS2 2
39 DS2 1
40 LED5 OU

Entrance motor 2735

 Exit sensor
Figure 6-792 Exit sensor

5V
Exit sensor Inner Finisher PCA (JC92-02774B)
( 0604-001415 )
CN2, Rear
1 REAR TAMPER MOTOR B
2 REAR TAMPER MOTOR nB
3 REAR TAMPER MOTOR nA
4 REAR TAMPER MOTOR A

5 REAR TAMPER HOME SENSOR 5V

JC39-02176A
6 DGND
7 REAR TAMPER HOME SENSOR

8 DGND
9 TOP COVER
10 TOP COVER SWITH
11 N.C

12 OUTPUT TRAY TOP OF STACK SENSOR LED

13 OUTPUT TRAY TOP OF STACK LED
14 EXIT SENSOR 5V
15 DGND
5V 16 EXIT SENSOR
17 DGND
18 END FENCE SENSOR
19 END FENCE SENSOR 5V
20 PAPR SUPPORT HOME 5V
21 DGND
22 PAPR SUPPORT HOME
23 PAPR SUPPORT MOTOR B
24 PAPR SUPPORT MOTOR nB
25 PAPR SUPPORT MOTOR nA
26 PAPR SUPPORT MOTOR A

2736 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

Exit motor, main paddle motor & home sensor, output tray lower limit switch, and
paper holding solenoid
Figure 6-793 Exit motor, paddle motor&sensor, output tray lower limit sensor, and paper holding solenoid

Inner Finisher PCA

( JC92-02774B )

Exit motor CN7, Front

(JC31-00169B)
1 EXIT MOTOR B
24V 24V 2 EXIT MOTOR A
3 EXIT MOTOR nB
24V EXIT MOTOR nA
Main paddle 4
5 OUTPUT TRAY MOTOR SENSOR
motor
JC39-02168A 6 DGND
(JC93-01001A) 7 OUTPUT TRAY MOTOR SENSOR
8 MAIN PADDLE HOME SENSOR, 5V
5V 9 DGND
5V 10 MAIN PADDLE HOME SENSOR

Main paddle 11 MAIN PADDLE MOTOR B

home sensor 12 MAIN PADDLE MOTOR Nb
24V 13 MAIN PADDLE MOTOR Na
(0604-001393) 14 MAIN PADDLE MOTOR A

15 OUTPUT TRAY MOTOR OUT1

16 OUTPUT TRAY MOTOR OUT2
17 FRONT TAMPER MOTOR B
18 FRONT TAMPER MOTOR Nb
19 FRONT TAMPER MOTOR Na
24V 20 FRONT TAMPER MOTOR A
21 FRONT TAMPER HOME SENSOR, 5V
Paper holding 22
24V 5V DGND
sensor 23 FRONT TAMPER HOME SENSOR
(0604-001393) 24 PAPER HOLDING SENSOR, 5V
25 DGND
Output tray lower 5V 26 PAPER HOLDING SENSOR
Paper holding solenoid
limit switch
with harness (JC33-00037A) 27 DGND
with harness 28 OUTPUT TRAY
(JC39-02178A) TOP OF STACK SENSOR

CN6, Stacker limit switch

1 DGND
2 OUTPUT TRAY LOWER LIMIT SW NO/NC
24V 3 OUTPUT TRAY LOWER LIMIT SW NC

CN9, Paper holding solenoid

1 GND
24V 2 PAPER HOLDING SOLENOID

Exit motor, main paddle motor & home sensor, output tray lower limit switch, and paper holding solenoid 2737
 Paper support motor & home sensor
Figure 6-794 Paper support sensor and motor

Paper support motor ( JC93-00802B)

Paper support home

sensor (0604-001393)

24V
5V

Inner Finisher PCA (JC92-02774B)

CN2, Rear
REAR TAMPER MOTOR B 1
REAR TAMPER MOTOR nB 2
REAR TAMPER MOTOR nA 3
REAR TAMPER MOTOR A 4

REAR TAMPER HOME SENSOR 5V 5

DGND 6
REAR TAMPER HOME SENSOR 7

DGND 8
TOP COVER 9
TOP COVER SWITCH 10
JC39-02176A
N.C 11

OUTPUT TRAY TOP OF STACK SENSOR LED 12

OUTPUT TRAY TOP OF STACK LED 13
EXIT SENSOR 5V 14
DGND 15
EXIT SENSOR 16
DGND 17
END FENCE SENSOR 18
END FENCE SENSOR 5V 19
PAPR SUPPORT HOME 5V 20
DGND 21 5V
PAPR SUPPORT HOME 22
PAPR SUPPORT MOTOR B 23
PAPR SUPPORT MOTOR nB 24
PAPR SUPPORT MOTOR nA 25 24V
PAPR SUPPORT MOTOR A 26

2738 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

Front tamper motor and home sensor
Figure 6-795 Front tamper sensor and motor

Inner Finisher PCA (JC92-02774B)

CN7, Front
EXIT MOTOR B 1
EXIT MOTOR A 2
EXIT MOTOR nB 3
EXIT MOTOR nA 4
OUTPUT TRAY MOTOR SENSOR 5V 5
DGND 6
OUTPUT TRAY MOTOR SENSOR 7
MAIN PADDLE HOME SENSOR 5V 8
DGND 9
MAIN PADDLE HOME SENSOR 10

MAIN PADDLE MOTOR B 11

MAIN PADDLE MOTOR nB 12
MAIN PADDLE MOTOR nA 13
MAIN PADDLE MOTOR A 14

OUTPUT TRAY MOTOR OUT1 15

Front tamper home sensor
OUTPUT TRAY MOTOR OUT2 16
(0604-001393)
FRONT TAMPER MOTOR B 17 5V
FRONT TAMPER MOTOR nB 18 24V
FRONT TAMPER MOTOR nA 19
20 Front tamper motor
FRONT TAMPER MOTOR A JC39-02168A
21 (JC93-01001A)
FRONT TAMPER HOME SENSOR 5V
DGND 22 24V
5V
FRONT TAMPER HOME SENSOR 23
PAPER HOLDING SENSOR 5V 24
DGND 25
PAPER HOLDING SENSOR 26

DGND 27
OUTPUT TRAY TOP OF STACK 28
SENSOR RECEIVER

Front tamper motor and home sensor 2739

 Rear tamper motor and home sensor
Figure 6-796 Rear tamper sensor and motor

Inner Finisher PCA (JC92-02774B)

CN2, Rear
1 REAR TAMPER MOTOR B
24V 2 REAR TAMPER MOTOR nB
3 REAR TAMPER MOTOR nA
4 REAR TAMPER MOTOR A

5 REAR TAMPER HOME SENSOR 5V

6 DGND
5V 7 REAR TAMPER HOME SENSOR

8 DGND
JC39-02176A 9 TOP COVER
10 TOP COVER SWITH
11 N.C

12 OUTPUT TRAY TOP OF STACK SENSOR LED

13 OUTPUT TRAY TOP OF STACK LED

Rear tamper 14 EXIT SENSOR 5V

home sensor 15 DGND
(0604-001393) 16 EXIT SENSOR
5V
17 DGND
18 END FENCE SENSOR
19 END FENCE SENSOR 5V
24V
20 PAPR SUPPORT HOME 5V
Rear tamper motor 21 DGND
(JC93-01001A) 22 PAPR SUPPORT HOME
23 PAPR SUPPORT MOTOR B
24 PAPR SUPPORT MOTOR nB
25 PAPR SUPPORT MOTOR nA
26 PAPR SUPPORT MOTOR A

2740 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

End fence sensor
Figure 6-797 End fence sensor

End fence sensor (0604-001381)

5V Inner Finisher PCA (JC92-02774B)

CN2, Rear
1 REAR TAMPER MOTOR B
2 REAR TAMPER MOTOR nB
3 REAR TAMPER MOTOR nA
4 REAR TAMPER MOTOR A

5 REAR TAMPER HOME SENSOR 5V

6 DGND
JC39-02176A 7 REAR TAMPER HOME SENSOR

8 DGND
9 TOP COVER
10 TOP COVER SWITH
11 N.C

12 OUTPUT TRAY TOP OF STACK SENSOR LED

13 OUTPUT TRAY TOP OF STACK LED
14 EXIT SENSOR 5V
15 DGND
16 EXIT SENSOR
17 DGND
18 END FENCE SENSOR
5V 19 END FENCE SENSOR 5V
20 PAPR SUPPORT HOME 5V
21 DGND
22 PAPR SUPPORT HOME
23 PAPR SUPPORT MOTOR B
24 PAPR SUPPORT MOTOR nB
25 PAPR SUPPORT MOTOR nA
26 PAPR SUPPORT MOTOR A

End fence sensor 2741

 Stapler position motor and sensor
Figure 6-798 Stapler position sensor and motor

Inner Finisher PCA

(JC92-02774B)

CN3, Rear joint I/F

1 STAPLER MOTOR OUT1
2 STAPLER MOTOR OUT1
3 STAPLER MOTOR OUT2
4 STAPLER MOTOR OUT2
5 STAPLER LOW
6 STAPLER READY
7 STAPLER HOME
8 STAPLER POSITION MOTOR B
24V 9 STAPLER POSITION MOTOR nB
10 STAPLER POSITION MOTOR nA
1.7v /
11 STAPLER POSITION MOTOR A
1.7v or 3.3v or 3.3v /
Stapler position home 12 STAPLER POSITION HOME REAR
5v Vcc (pull up) 5v
rear sensor (0604-001393) 13 STAPLER POSITION HOME FRONT
1.7v / 14 DGND
3.3v / 15 FRONT COVER OPEN
5V Stapler position middle front 5v 16 FRONT COVER SWITH
sensor (0604-001393) 17 ENTRANCE MOTOR B
5V 18 ENTRANCE MOTOR A
Stapler position middle sensor (0604-001393) 19 ENTRANCE MOTOR nB
20 ENTRANCE MOTOR nA
Stapler position home 21 STAPLER PCA 5V
1.7v or front sensor
3.3v or (0604-001393) 22 DGND
5v Vcc (pull up) 23 PUNCH WASTE FULL SENSOR
24 5V
24V 25 24V
26 24V
27 DGND
Stapler position motor 28 DGND
(JC93-00999A) 29 DGND
30 5V
31 3.3V
32 PUNCH MOTOR SLE
33 PUNCH MOTOR EN
34 PUNCH MOTOR HA
35 PUNCH MOTOR SENSOR
36 PUNCH HOME SENSOR
37 PUNCH MOTOR DECAY
JC39-02173A 38 DS2 2
39 DS2 1
40 LED5 OU

CN10, Traverse sensor

5V 1 STAPLER POSITION MID FRONT 5V

2 DGND
3 STAPLER POSITION MID FRONT

5V 4 STAPLER POSITION MID REAR 5V

5 DGND
6 STAPLER POSITION MID REAR

2742 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

Ejector 1 motor and home sensor, ejector 2 motor, motor sensor, and home sensor
Figure 6-799 Ejector 1 motor and home sensor, ejector 2 motor, motor sensor, and home sensor

Ejector1 home sensor (0604-001393)

5V

Ejector2 motor Ejector1 motor

(JC93-00998A) Ejector2 home sensor
24V (JC93-01168A) (0604-001393)
24V
5V
Ejector2 motor sensor
(0604-001393)
5V

JC39-02165A
Inner Finisher PCA (JC92-02774B)
CN4, Ejector
24V 1 EJECTOR2 MOTOR OUT2
2 EJECTOR2 MOTOR OUT1
3 EJECTOR1 MOTOR B
4 EJECTOR1 MOTOR nB
24V 5 EJECTOR1 MOTOR nA
6 EJECTOR1 MOTOR A

5V 7 EJECTOR2 MOTOR SENSOR 5V

8 DGND
9 EJECTOR2 MOTOR SENSOR
5V 10 EJECTOR2 HOME SENSOR 5V
11 DGND
12 EJECTOR2 HOME SENSOR

5V 13 EJECTOR1 HOME 5V
14 DGND
15 EJECTOR1 HOME

Ejector 1 motor and home sensor, ejector 2 motor, motor sensor, and home sensor 2743
 Output tray motor and sensor
Figure 6-800 Output tray motor and sensor

Inner Finisher PCA (JC92-02774B)

CN7, Front
24V
EXIT MOTOR B 1
EXIT MOTOR A 2
EXIT MOTOR nB 3
EXIT MOTOR nA 4
OUTPUT TRAY MOTOR SENSOR 5V 5 5V
DGND 6
OUTPUT TRAY MOTOR SENSOR 7
MAIN PADDLE HOME SENSOR 5V 8
DGND 9 JC39-02168A
MAIN PADDLE HOME SENSOR 10

MAIN PADDLE MOTOR B 11

Output tray motor
MAIN PADDLE MOTOR Nb 12
MAIN PADDLE MOTOR Na 13 (JC31-00178B)
MAIN PADDLE MOTOR A 14

OUTPUT TRAY MOTOR OUT1 15

OUTPUT TRAY MOTOR OUT2 16
24V
FRONT TAMPER MOTOR B 17
FRONT TAMPER MOTOR Nb 18
FRONT TAMPER MOTOR Na 19
FRONT TAMPER MOTOR A 20 5V
FRONT TAMPER HOME SENSOR 5V 21
Output tray motor sensor
DGND 22
FRONT TAMPER HOME SENSOR 23 (0604-001393)
PAPER HOLDING SENSOR 5V 24
DGND 25
PAPER HOLDING SENSOR 26

DGND 27
OUTPUT TRAY TOP OF STACK 28
SENSOR RECEIVER

2744 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

Output tray top of stack sensor
Figure 6-801 Output tray top of stack sensor

Output tray top of

stack sensor receiver
(0603-001309)
Output tray top of
stack sensor LED 3.3V
(0601-003440)

3.3V

JC39-02168A

JC39-02176A

Inner Finisher PCA (JC92-02774B)

CN2, Rear CN7, Front

1 REAR TAMPER MOTOR B EXIT MOTOR B 1
2 REAR TAMPER MOTOR nB EXIT MOTOR A 2
3 REAR TAMPER MOTOR nA EXIT MOTOR nB 3
4 REAR TAMPER MOTOR A EXIT MOTOR nA 4
OUTPUT TRAY MOTOR SENSOR 5V 5
5 REAR TAMPER HOME SENSOR 5V DGND 6
6 DGND OUTPUT TRAY MOTOR SENSOR 7
7 REAR TAMPER HOME SENSOR MAIN PADDLE HOME SENSOR 5V 8
DGND 9
8 DGND
MAIN PADDLE HOME SENSOR 10
9 TOP COVER 24V
10 TOP COVER SWITCH MAIN PADDLE MOTOR B 11
11 MAIN PADDLE MOTOR nB 12
N.C
3.3V MAIN PADDLE MOTOR nA 13
12 OUTPUT TRAY TOP OF STACK SENSOR LED 3.3V MAIN PADDLE MOTOR A 14
13 OUTPUT TRAY TOP OF STACK LED
OUTPUT TRAY MOTOR OUT1 15
14 EXIT SENSOR 5V OUTPUT TRAY MOTOR OUT2 16
15 DGND
16 EXIT SENSOR FRONT TAMPER MOTOR B 17
17 DGND FRONT TAMPER MOTOR nB 18
18 END FENCE SENSOR FRONT TAMPER MOTOR nA 19
19 END FENCE SENSOR 5V FRONT TAMPER MOTOR A 20
FRONT TAMPER HOME SENSOR 5V 21
20 PAPR SUPPORT HOME 5V DGND 22
21 DGND FRONT TAMPER HOME SENSOR 23
22 PAPR SUPPORT HOME PAPER HOLDING SENSOR 5V 24
23 PAPR SUPPORT MOTOR B DGND 25
24 PAPR SUPPORT MOTOR nB PAPER HOLDING SENSOR 26
25 PAPR SUPPORT MOTOR nA
DGND 27
26 PAPR SUPPORT MOTOR A
OUTPUT TRAY TOP OF STACK 28
SENSOR RECEIVER 3.3V 3.3V

Output tray top of stack sensor 2745

 Top cover switch
Figure 6-802 Top cover switch

Top cover switch (JC39-01610A)

24V

Inner Finisher PCA (JC92-02774B)

CN2, Rear
REAR TAMPER MOTOR B 1
REAR TAMPER MOTOR nB 2
REAR TAMPER MOTOR nA 3
REAR TAMPER MOTOR A 4
JC39-02176A
REAR TAMPER HOME SENSOR 5V 5
DGND 6
REAR TAMPER HOME SENSOR 7

DGND 8
TOP COVER 24V 9
TOP COVER SWITCH 10 24V

N.C 11

OUTPUT TRAY TOP OF STACK SENSOR LED 12

OUTPUT TRAY TOP OF STACK LED 13
EXIT SENSOR 5V 14
DGND 15
EXIT SENSOR 16
DGND 17
END FENCE SENSOR 18
END FENCE SENSOR 5V 19
PAPR SUPPORT HOME 5V 20
DGND 21
PAPR SUPPORT HOME 22
PAPR SUPPORT MOTOR B 23
PAPR SUPPORT MOTOR nB 24
PAPR SUPPORT MOTOR nA 25
PAPR SUPPORT MOTOR A 26

2746 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

Front cover switch
Figure 6-803 Frame front

Stapler motor JC39-02177A Staple joint PCA

(JC59-00040A) 24V (JC41-00900A)
Inner Finisher PCA (JC92-02774B)
CN3, Rear joint I/F
JC39-02164A
1 STAPLER MOTOR OUT1
2 STAPLER MOTOR OUT1
3 STAPLER MOTOR OUT2
Rear joint PCA 24V 4 STAPLER MOTOR OUT2
(JC41-00905A) 5 STAPLER LOW
6 STAPLER READY
7 STAPLER HOME
8 STAPLER POSITION MOTOR B
9 STAPLER POSITION MOTOR nB
JC39-02173A 10 STAPLER POSITION MOTOR nA
11 STAPLER POSITION MOTOR A
12 STAPLER POSITION HOME REAR
13 STAPLER POSITION HOME FRONT
14 DGND
24V
15 FRONT COVER OPEN 24V
24V
16 FRONT COVER SWITH
17 ENTRANCE MOTOR B
Front cover switch 18 ENTRANCE MOTOR A
(JC39-01610A) 19 ENTRANCE MOTOR nB
20 ENTRANCE MOTOR nA
21 STAPLER PCA 5V

22 DGND
23 PUNCH WASTE FULL SENSOR
24 5V
25 24V
26 24V
27 DGND
28 DGND
29 DGND
30 5V
31 3.3V
32 PUNCH MOTOR SLE
33 PUNCH MOTOR EN
34 PUNCH MOTOR HA
35 PUNCH MOTOR SENSOR
36 PUNCH HOME SENSOR
37 PUNCH MOTOR DECAY
38 DS2 2
39 DS2 1
40 LED5 OU

Front cover switch 2747

 7 Diagrams

Learn about the electrical-mechanical diagrams.

Diagrams (connection)
Learn about the connection diagram.

NOTE: The connection diagram includes the harness part code as shown below.

● Blue text harness codes are for both color and mono models.

● Green text harness codes are for mono models.

● Red text harness codes are for color models.

Figure 7-1 Connection diagram

E-LABEL

E-LABEL

Diagrams (FUSER EXIT)

Learn about the fuser exit diagram.

2748 Chapter 7 Diagrams

 Figure 7-2 Fuser exit diagram
HDD
FUSER
1. 6
FUSER
. .
FUSER POS EEPROM . .
. .
6 1

*X4300:Drawer
K4350:W allconnector

SATA POW ER ,YW 396-02F

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
1. N
FUSER ,2-292229
-8
NC THERM ISTOR 0 . .

SATA SIGNAL,
CN40 -FUSER

67800-5001
. . 5V1_LP
1
. . 3_3V_CRUM

CN20-SATA SIGNAL
2

CN16-SATA POW ER
. .
M ono only.
THERM ISTOR . .
3 nFUSER_POS1
GND
SIDE 4
N 1

SATA_RX_P
SATA_RX_N
SATA_TX _P
5 SDA1_CRUM _FUSER

SATA_TX_N
5V2_SLP
6 SCL1_CRUM _FUSER

DGND
Coloronly.

DGN D
DGND

DGND

DGND

DGND
7 GND

NC
NC
8 NC0_TD_OUT
NC THERM ISTOR 1 9 NC0_TC_OUT
10 THERM _SIDE2
11 THERM _SIDE1
GND
EXIT ,3-292229
-0
12
13 NC1_TD_OUT CN6 -EXIT
10
9 14 NC1_TC_OUT 5V1_LP (N.C)
1
8 15 DIR_BLDC_FUSER GND (N.C)
7 2
FDB 16 CLK_BLDC_FUSER nPAPER_EXIT1 (N.C)
FUSER BLDC BLDC 6
5
4
17 nREADY_BLDC_FUSER
nEN_BLDC_FUSER
3
4 5V1_SLP
18 5 GND
3 GAIN_BLDC_FUSER
2 19 6 nBIN_FULL_EXIT1
1 20 BRAKE_BLDC_FUSER A_EXIT2
7
21 GND nA_EXIT2
8
22 GND nB_EXIT2
9
23 24V3 B_EXIT2
10
24 24V3 PW M _RETURN_DUPLEX
11
25 A_EXIT1 24V3
12
EXIT1 STEP 26 nA_EXIT1
nB_EXIT1
13 5V1_LP
27
28 B_EXIT1
14
15
GND
nDETECT_T1_POS1
5V1_LP
M AIN PBA
16
17 GND
18 nPAPER_EXIT2
19 5V1_SLP
20 GND
21 nBIN_FULL_EXIT2

OPTION 22
23
24
nDETECT_EXIT2
GND
GND
25 COVER_OPEN_SIDE
26 nCOVER_OPEN_SI DE
27 OUT_FAN_FUSER
28 nDETECT_FAN_FUSER
EXIT2 STEP EXIT1 FULL
1 3 29
30
GND
NC
1 7 2 2
2 6 3 1
3 5
4 4
5 3
6 2
7 1
SOL

DUPLEX RETURN 1 8
Coloronly. 2 7
3 6
T1 POSITON 4 5
5 4
6 3
7 2
8 1
1 8
EXIT2 2 7
3 6
4 5
5 4
EXIT2 FULL 6 3
7 2
8 1
1 3
SIDE 2 2
COVER OPEN 3 1

Coloronly.

FUSER FA

Diagrams (PICKUP/PH DRIVE/SIDE)

Learn about the pickup/ph drive/side diagram.

Diagrams (PICKUP/PH DRIVE/SIDE) 2749

 Figure 7-3 Pickup/PH drive/side diagram

10
9 PH DRIVER ,3-292229-6
8
7
M AINBLDC BLDC 6
5
4
1
CN47-PH DRIVER
DIR_BLDC_M AIN
3 2 CLK_BLDC_M AIN
2 3 nREADY_BLDC_M AIN
1 4 nEN_BLDC_M AIN
1 6 5 GAIN_BLDC_M AIN
6 BRAKE_BLDC_M AIN
FEED1 2 5 7 GND
3 4 8 GND
1 3 4 3 9 24V1_LP
REGI 5 2 10 24V1_LP
2 2 6 1
3 1 11 GND
12 nPAPER_FEED1

M P CLUTCH
REGICLUTCH
CL 13
14
5V1_LP
GND

CL
15 nPAPER_REGI
16 5V1_LP
M ono only. 17 REGI_CLUTCH _CON
FEED CLUTCH 18 24V1_LP
CL 19
20
M P_CLUTCH_CON
24V1_LP
21 FEED_CLUTCH_CON
22 24V1_LP
Coloronly. 23
24
A_T1
nA_T1
25 nB_T1
T1 STEP STEP 26
27
B_T1
DIR_BLDC_OPC_M (ITB)
28 CLK_BLDC_OPC_M (ITB)
29 nREADY_BLDC_OPC_M (ITB)
10 30 nEN_BLDC_OPC_M (ITB)
9
8 31 GAIN_BLDC_OPC_M (ITB)
7 32 BRAKE_BLDC_OPC_M (ITB)
OPC BLDC(@M ONO)/
ITBBLDC(@C OLOR) BLDC 6
5
4
33
34
GND
GND
3 35 24V1_LP
2 36 24V1_LP
1

1 6
PAPER_EM PTY1 2 5
3 4 PICKUP,2-292229-8
4 3
5 2 CN 46-PICKUP
PAPER_LIF
T1 6 1 1 5V1_LP
2 GND
3 nPAPER_EM PTY1
4 5V1_LP
5 GND
6 nPAPER_LIFT1
PICKUP1 STEP STEP 7 A_PICKUP1

SIDEUnit
8 nA_PICKUP1
1 3 9 nB_PICKUP1
M P_EM PTY 2
3
2
1 Coloronly. 10
11
B_PICKUP1
A_FEED
STEP 12 nA_FEED
SOL

M P SOLENOID 1 2 13 nB_FEED
2 1 FEED STEP 14 B_FEED
HYBRID 15 5V1_LP
16 GND
17 nPAPER_EM PTY2
18 5V1_LP
19 GND
DUPLEX STEP STEP PAPER_EM PTY2
1
2
6
5
20
21
nPAPER_LIFT2
GND
3 4 22 nPAPER_FEED2
4 3 23 5V1_LP
PAPER_LIF
T2 5 2 24 A_PICKUP2
6 1 25 nA_PICKUP2
1 3 26 nB_PICKUP2
FUSER OU T 2 2
1 3 27 B_PICKUP2
FEED2 2 2
3 1 3 1 28 NC

SIDE,3-292229-0
M ono only. CN36-SIDE
STEP
1 3
CTD CTD
CTD 2
3
2
1
PICKUP2 STEP 1
2
5V1_SLP
GND
3 nPAPER_M P_EM PTY
4 PW M _M P_SOL
Coloronly
CURL1
. 1
2
9
8
5
6
24V3
A_DUP
3 7 7 nA_DUP
4 6 8 nB_DUP
5 5 9 B_DUP
6 4 10 5V1_LP
7 3 11 GND
CURL2 1 30 12 nPAPER_FUSER_OUT
8 2 . .
9 1 . . 13 ADC_INNER_TEM P(N.C)
14 GND(N .C)
. . 15 NC
1 5 . . 16 5V_ACR (5V1_SLP)
2 4 . . 17 CTD_LED_CENT(GND)
DUPLEX JAM 3 3 30 1 18 CTD_P_MON O(nPAPER_CURL1)
4 2 19 5V1_SLP
5 1 20 GND
21 nPAPER_CURL2
22 5V1_SLP
1 3 23 GND
DUPLEX 2 2 24 nPAPER_JAM _DUPLEX
FAN 3 1 25 OUT_FAN_DUPLEX
26 nDETECT_FAN_DUPLEX
27 GND
28 3.3
V
1 4 29 ADC_M P_SIZE
M P SIZE 1 3 2 3 30 GND
2 2
SENSOR 3 1 3 2
4 1

MAIN PC A

Diagrams (laser scanner assembly/HVPS)

Learn about the laser scanner assembly/HVPS diagram.

2750 Chapter 7 Diagrams

 Figure 7-4 Laser scanner assembly/HVPS diagram

Diagrams (toner)
Learn about the toner diagram.

Diagrams (toner) 2751

 Figure 7-5 Toner diagram
Color only. TO NER DC ,3-292229-6
CN 15 TON ER
1 4 BO TTLE
2 5 1 nA_TON ER_DC _K
TO NER K 3 3 2 GN D
DC M TR DC TO NER K
4 2 3 5V1_LP
5 1 4 GN D
CO UN T 5 TO NER _COUN T_K
6 nA_TON ER_DC _C
1 4 7 GN D
TO NER C 2 5 8 5V1_LP
DC M TR DC TO NER C
3
4
3
2
9 GN D
10 TO NER _COUN T_C
CO UN T 5 1 11 3_3V_CRU M
12 SDA_CRU M _BO TTLE_K
TO NER K
13 SCL_CRU M _BO TTLE_K
CRU M 14 GN D
TO NER C 15 3_3V_CRU M
16 SDA_CRU M _BO TTLE_C
CRUM 17 SCL_CRU M _BO TTLE_C
TO NER M 1 4 18 GN D
DC M TR DC TO NER M
2
3
5
3
19 nA_TON ER_DC _M
20 GN D
CO UN T 4 2 21 5V1_LP
5 1 22 GN D
23 TO NER _COUN T_M
TO NER Y 24 nA_TON ER_DC _Y
DC M TR DC 1 4 25 GN D
TO NER Y 2
3
5
3
26
27
5V1_LP
GN D
M ono only.
CO UN T 4 2 28 TO NER _COUN T_Y TO NER, 1-292230-5
5 1 29 3_3V_CRU M
TO NER M 30 SDA_CRU M _BO TTLE_
CN 7 TO NER
CRU M A_DU CT
31 M 1
nA_DUC T
32 SCL_CRU M _BO TTLE_M 2
TO NER Y nB_DUC T
33 GN D 3
CRUM B_DU CT
34 3_3V_CRU M 4
GN D
35 SDA_CRU M _BO TTLE_Y 5
nA_TO NER_DC _K
36 SCL_CRU M _BO TTLE_Y 6
DUC T STEP GN D 7
5V1_LP
GN D
8
TO NER_COUN T_K_CO
9
N
10
5V_LP
11
O N_ERASER_K
1 4 12
3_3V_CRU M
TO NER DC M TR DC 2
3
5
3
13
14
SDA_CRU M _BO TTLE_K
SCL_CRU M _BO TTLE_K
4 2 15
GN D
5 1
TO NER CN T

1 2 SHUTTER , PW M -0002-
ERA SER 2 1 Color only. CN 22 009-A1TTER
SHU
TO NER ACR GN D
CR UM SHU TTER DC 1
2
DM O T_ACR SHU TTER
5V_LP
AC R 3 GN D
4 nSENS_ACR _SHU TTER_H
SHUTTER OME
5
6 GN D
W ASTE 1 3 7 AD C_W AST E_LEVE L_C
ON
LEVEL 2 2 8 ID SENSO R ,2-292229-
3 1 9 O N_W ASTE_LED
5V_LP 2
CN 12 ID SENSO R
1 CTD_P_REAR
CTD REAR 2 5V_AC R
CTD 3 GN D
4 CTD_LED_REAR
5 CTD_P_FRON T
CTD FRO NT CTD 6 5V_AC R
7 GN D
8 CTD_LED_FRON T
9 CTD_P_CENT
CTD CENTER CTD 10 5V_AC R
11 GN D
12 CTD_S_CENT
13 CTD_LED_CENT
INNER TEMP 14 ADC _INN ER _TEM P
15 GN D
16 NC

Diagrams (FDB/LVPS)
Learn about the FDB/LVPS diagram.

2752 Chapter 7 Diagrams

 Figure 7-6 FDB/LVPS diagram

HEATER S/W
MAIN SWI TCH

HEATER
AC
INLET

FUSER 4
3 MAIN IF
2
1

2
1
FUSER M AIN IF
HEATER S/W

HEATER
1 LAMP 1 ZERO_CROSS_I N 1
HEATER S/W
DGN D 2

HEATER IF
2 LAM P2
3 COMM ON DGND 3
GND

ON_MA IN_RELAY 4
24V1 5
ON_FUSER_RELAY 6

MAIN PCA
FUSER_24V 7
DGND 8
MAIN SWITCH ON_FU SER_M AIN1 9 SMPS TYPE5 12P
ON_FUSER_MAI N2 10
FDB 1
CN30
5V1
1 2 5V2
2 MAIN SWITCH 3 24V1
4 24V2
3 5 24V3
4 6 24V4
7 DGND
8 DGND
9 DGND
10 DGND
11 DGND
INLET TYPE5 12 DGND

INLET TYPE5
1 LIVE LIVE 1
2 NEUTR AL NEUTRAL 2

FDB IF ,2-292229-8
CN4 -FDB IF
1 ZERO CROSS IN
2 GND
3 GND
4 ON MAIN REL AY
TYPE 5 SIGNAL 5 24V1
6 ON FUSER RELAY
TYPE5 SIGNAL 7 FUSER 24V
DGND 8 GND
nEN _24V_SMP S 21
SMPS
9 ON FUSER MAIN1
FAN

10 ON FUSER M AIN0
_O 3
11
12
O UT FAN SMPS
nDETECT_FAN_SMPS
DGND 13 GND
14 NC
15 nEN_24V_SMPS_O
16 GND
PAPER

17 nPAPER_SIZE1
SIZE1

18 GND
19 ADC_PAPER_SI ZE1
20 3.3V_SLP
SMPS TYPE 5
PAPER

21 nPAPE R_SIZE2
SIZE2
SMPS TYPE5

22 GN D
SMPS TYPE 5 23 ADC_PAPER_SI ZE2
5V1 1 24
25
3.3V_SLP
ADC OUTER TEMP
5V2 2
OUT TEMP/

26 GND
HUMI DITY

only.
Mono

24V1 3 27
28
ADC OUTER HUMI
3.3V_SLP
24V2 4
24V3 5
24V4 6
DGND 7
only.
Color
OUT TEMP/
HUMI DITY
NEUTRAL
LIVE
TYPE5

DG ND 8
4
3
2
1

DGND 9
DGND 10
1
2
3
4

DGND 11
DGND 12
TYPE5
2
1

Diagrams (UI)
Learn about the UI diagram.

Diagrams (UI) 2753

 Figure 7-7 UI diagram
OPTION
HUB JOINT
USB IF
1 VBUS
2 DM
3 DP
4 GND WIFIIF HUB IF

WIFI
NC 6 1 RESET_WIFI
3.3V 5 2 3.3V
DM 4 3 DM
DP 3 4 DP
GND 2 5 GND

NFC IF
GND 1 6 GND
7 HOSTWAKE

VBUS

3.3V
GND
DM
DP
5
4
3
2
1
NFC IF
VBUS

3.3V
NFC

GND
DM
DP
1
2
3
4
5
UI

USB HOST3 USB HOST4

CN8 SPEAKER
nRST_USB_HUB

nKEY_SOFT_PW

nWA KEUP_EUI
nWAKEUP_ENG
CB POWER

SP EAKER

CN7 USB HOST3

MCB

1 VBUS_USB_HOST2 CN5 USB HOST4

SPEAKER
SPEAKER
nRST_UI

SPEAKER
SPEAKER

2 DM_HOST3 1 VBUS_USB_HOST2
POWER

2 DM_HOST4
_MCB

3 DP_HOST3
GND
M CN2

5VS
5VS

5VS

GND
GND

4 GND 3 DP_HOST4
R

4 GND
10
11
12
13
14
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

1
2

MCB USB IF
USB HOST2
nKEY_S O FT_PW

CN1 MCB USB IF

nWAKEUP_ENG

1 5VS
nWAKEUP_UI
CN2 POWER

2 DM_MCB CN6 USB HOST2

OPE

nRST _UI

3 DP_MCB 1 VBUS_USB_HOST1
2 DM_HOST2
POWER

4 GND
GN D

3 DP_HOST2
GND
5VS
5VS

GND
5VS

5 GND
OPE

4 GND
R

6 GND
10

7 GND
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

8 GND
9 GND
CN5 USB HOST1
VBUS_USB_HOST1
USB HO ST1

D M _HO ST1
DP_HOST1
GND

USB HUB
1
2
3
4

OPE POWER ,1-

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

292230-4
OPE USB ,MNC2Y-
CN8 FRONT USB HUB

CN14 OPE
GND 1
5K5P10

GND 2
GND 3
DM_FRONT_HUB
DP_FRONT_HUB

WKUP2OPE 4
nWKUP2MCB 5
5V_OPE 6
5V_OPE

nKEY_SOFT_PWR_AVR 7
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND

5V_OPE 8
5V_OPE 9
5V_OPE 10
RST_USB_HUB_OPE 11
nRST_UI 12
GND 13
GND 14

MAIN PCA

Diagrams (FRONT/OPC)
Learn about the front OPC diagram.

2754 Chapter 7 Diagrams

 Figure 7-8 Front/OPC diagram

M AIN PCA
M ono only.
FRONT ,2-292 229
-4

COVER OPEN
FRONT
CN49 FRO N T M O N O

3
2
1
1 GN D
2 CO VER_OPEN _FRON T

1
2
3
3 3.3V_SB
4

W ASTE
GN D

INST
5 nDETECT_W ASTE_IN ST
6 GN D

W ASTE

4
3
2
1
LEVEL
7 AD C_W ASTE_LEVEL
8 EN _W ASTE_LED
9 5V_LP

1
2
3
4
10 O U T_FAN _FUSER

FUSER
11 nDETECT_FAN _FUSER_CO N

FAN
12 GN D
13 5V_LP
14 GN D
15 DU CT_CO U N T

COUNT
DUCT

TC SENSOR
16 GN D

Coloronly.
17 TC_VIN _K
18 24 V1_LP
FRO N T ,2-29222 9
-6

1
.
.
19 TSEN _VCO N T_K
20 3.3V_CRU M

CRUM
DEVE
Coloronly.
21 SDA_CRU M _DEVE0 CN32 FRO N T CO LO R
TC K SENSOR FRONT

8
.
.
22 SCL_CRU M _DEVE0 1 GN D
4
3
2
1
23 GN D 2 TC_VIN _K
24 NC 3 24 V1_LP
1
2
3
4 4 TSEN _VCO N T_K
COVER OPEN

5 GN D
6 CO VER_OPEN _FRON T
7 3.3V_SB
8 GN D
9 nDETECT_W ASTE_IN ST
10 A_W AS TE
W ASTE

11 nA_W ASTE
INST

12 nB_W ASTE
13 B_W ASTE
W TB STEP TC C SENSOR

14 GN D
STEP

15 TC_VIN _C
16 24 V2
17 TSEN _VCO N T_C
18 GN D
19 TC_VIN _M
20 24 V2
4
3
2
1

21 TSEN _VCO N T_M

22 GN D
1
2
3
4

23 TC_VIN _Y
TC M SENSOR

24 24 V2
25 TSEN _VCO N T_Y
4
3
2
1

26 NC
1
2
3
4
TC Y SENSOR

4
3
2
1
1
2
3
4

ERASER K

Coloronly.
O PC SENSOR ,3-29222 9
-6
M odular
PBA
DEVE K
CRUM

CN19 O PC SEN SO R
10
O PC DRIVE ,4-29222 9
-0 1 5V_LP
9 2 ON _ERASER_K
ERASER C

8 CN22 OPC DRIVE 3 3.3V_CRU M

BLDC 1
7 DIR_BLDC_O PC_K
OPC K

4 SD A_CRU M _DEVE_K
BLDC

6
2 CLK_BLD C_O PC_K 5 SCL_CRU M _DEVE_K
M odular

5
3 nREAD Y_BLD C_O PC_K
PBA

4 6 GN D
3 4 nEN _BLD C_O PC_K
DEVE C OPC K
CRUM PHASE

2 7 5V_LP
1 5 GAIN _BLD C_O PC_K 8 O N _ERASER_C
6 BRAKE_BLD C_O PC_K 9 3.3V_CRU M
7 GN D 10 SD A_CRU M _DEVE_C
8 GN D 11 SCL_CRU M _D EVE_C
9 24V2 12 GN D
10 10 24 V2
9 13 5V_LP
8 11 DIR_BLD C_O PC_C 14 GN D
BLDC

7 12 CLK_BLD C_O PC_C 15 O PC_PH ASE_K

OPC C
BLDC

6 13 nREAD Y_BLD C_O PC_C

PHASE

16 5V_LP
OPC C

5
4 14 nEN _BLD C_O PC_C 17 GN D
3 15 GAIN _BLD C_O PC_C 18 O PC_PH ASE_C
2 16 BRAKE_BLD C_O PC_C
1 19 5V_LP
17 GN D 20 ON _ERASER_M
ERASER M

18 GN D 21 3.3V_CRU M
19 24V2 22 SD A_CRU M _DEVE_M
20 24 V2 23 SCL_CRU M _DEVE_M
M odular

21 DIR_BLDC_O PC_M 24
PBA

GN D
22 CLK_BLD C_O PC_M
DEVE M

10 25 5V_LP
CRUM

9 23 nREADY_BLD C_O PC_M 26 ON _ERASER_Y

8
24 nEN _BLD C_O PC_M
BLDC

7 27 3.3V_CRU M
OPC M

25 GAIN _BLD C_O PC_M

BLDC

6 28 SDA_CRU M _DEVE_Y
ERASER Y

5 26 BRAKE_BLD C_O PC_M 29 SCL_CRU M _DEVE_Y

4
3 27 GN D 30 GN D
M odular

2 28 GN D 31 5V_LP
PBA

1 29 24 V2 32 GN D
DEVE Y OPC M
CRUM PHASE

30 24V2 33 O PC_PHASE_M
31 DIR_BLDC_O PC_Y 34 5V_LP
32 CLK_BLD C_O PC_Y 35 GN D
33 nREADY_BLD C_O PC_Y 36 O PC_PHASE_Y
10 34 nEN _BLD C_O PC_Y
9 35 GAIN _BLD C_O PC_Y
8
36 BRAKE_BLD C_O PC_Y
BLDC

7
OPC Y
BLDC

6 37 GN D
5 38 GN D
PHASE
OPC Y

4
3 39 24 V2
2 40 24 V2
1

Diagrams (scanner)
Learn about the scanner diagram.

Diagrams (scanner) 2755

 Figure 7-9 Scanner diagram

DSD F

Scanner Unit

CCD M IF , DSDF DC IS ,4-292229-0

SCAN IF ,3-292229-4 05002HR-H50G 4 CN 24 DSDF DC IS
CN 3 SCAN IF CN 9 CCD M IF SCAN_VCLK_2_P 1
1 SC AN_M TR _M S1 GN D 1 SCAN_VCLK_2_N 2
2 PW M _SC AN_M O T SCAN_VCLK_1_P 2 GN D 3
3 SC AN_M TR _DIR SCAN_VCLK_1_N 3 LVDO _D CIS_4_P 4
4 nEN_SCAN_M TR GN D 4 LVDO _D CIS_4_N 5
5 SC AN_M TR _PLS SLO AD_AFE 5 GN D 6
6 PW M _W HITE_LED SCLK_AFE 6 LVDO _D CIS_3_P 7
7 nFLAT_CO VER_O PEN2 SDI_AFE 7 LVDO _D CIS_3_N 8
8 nFLAT_CO VER_O PEN1 GN D 8 GN D 9
9 nCCD _HO M E PITG 1 9 LVDO _D CIS_2_P 10
10 nAPS _SEN SO R2 nRST_CCD _AFE 10 LVDO _D CIS_2_N 11
11 nAPS _SEN SO R1 SDO _AFE 11 GN D 12
12 nDETECT_DADF GN D 12 LVCK_DC IS_P 13
13 nDETECT_PAP ER_DAD F LVDO 4_N 13 LVCK_DC IS_N 14
14 nSCAN_READ 1 LVDO 4_P 14 GN D 15
15 DADF_TXD GN D 15 LVDO _D CIS_1_P 16
16 DADF_R XD LVDO 3_N 161 LVDO _D CIS_1_N 17
17 nRST_DADF LVDO 3_P 7 GN D 18
18 nSCAN_READ 2 GN D 18 LVDO _D CIS_0_P 19
19 GN D LVCK_N 19 LVDO _D CIS_0_N 20
20 GN D LVCK_P 20 GN D 21
21 GN D GN D 21 GN D 22
22 GN D LVDO 2_N 22 SDI_DC IS 23
23 3.3V_LP LVDO 2_P 23 SCLK_DC IS 24
24 GN D GN D 24 SDO _DC IS 25
25 5V1_W KSRC _SCAN LVDO 1_N 25 SLO AD_DICS 26
26 GN D LVDO 1_P 26 GN D 27
27 5V_LP GN D 27 GN D 28
28 5V_LP LVDO 0_N 28 PITG 2 29
29 GN D LVDO 0_P 29 GN D 30
30 24V3 GN D 30 3.3V_A1000 31
31 24V3 3.3V_LP 31 3.3V_A1000 32
32 24V3 3.3V_LP 32 3.3V_A1000 33
33 24V3 3.3V_LP 33 3.3V_A1000 34
34 SC AN_M TR _M S2 3.3V_LP 34 3.3V_A1000 35
3.3V_LP 35 3.3V_A1000 36
3.3V_LP 36 3.3V_A1000 37
3.3V_LP 37 3.3V_A1000 38
3.3V_LP 38 GN D 39
GN D 39 GN D 40
GN D 40
5V2_LP 41
5V2_LP 42
5V2_LP 43
5V2_LP 44
GN D 45
GN D 46
10V_CC D 47
10V_CC D 48
10V_CC D 49
10V_CC D 50

Diagrams (Dual Cassette Feeder)

Learn about the Dual Cassette Feeder diagram.

2756 Chapter 7 Diagrams

Figure 7-10 2x520 sheet feeder diagram

OPTION
FEED2

FEED1
COVER OPEN

EMPTY2

EMPTY1
LI

LI
FT2

FT1

OPTION
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
2
1

9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
SI
nSI
24V4
CN3 SI

5V_SUSP
nSENS_P_FEED2
GND
nSENS_LFIT2_LMIIT
GND
5V_SUSP
nSENS_P_EMPTY2
GND
5V_SUSP
5V_SUSP
nSENS_P_FEED1
GND
nSENS_LFIT1_LMIIT
GND
5V_SUSP
nSENS_P_EMPTY1
GND
5V_SUSP
CN6 SENSORIF

FI
DE COVEROPEN
DECOVER_OPEN

FI
NISHER3K
SENSORIF

INNER
NISHER
DE COVER OPEN
MINICUBE2
MTR IF
CN1
CN5 M TR IF 3.3V 1
1 N.C nRESET 2
FEED STEP

2 N.C SOF3_DEBUG 3
STEP

3 A_FEED 3.3V 4
4 nA_FEED SIF3_DEBUG 5
5 nB_FEED nSCKF3_DEBUG 6
6 B_FEED HS_DEBUG 7
7 N.C FLMD1 8
PI

8 N.C FLMD0 9
CKUP1STEP

STEP

9 A_PICKUP1 NC 10
10 nA_PICKUP1
11 nB_PICKUP1
12 B_PICKUP1
13
2x520 sheet feeder

A_PICKUP2
14 nA_PICKUP2 ENGINE IF
15 nB_PICKUP2
PI

16 B_PICKUP2 MO LEX
CKUP1STEP

CN7 ENGINE IF
STEP

17 N.C 55515-1605/
NC 1
nCMD_REQ 2
NC 3
NC 4
GND 5 M OLEX
GND 6 54678-1619/
GND 7

2-292249-

2-292246-
GND 8

TYCO

TYCO
GND 9
24V4 10
24V4 11

2/

2/
24V4 12
5V_SUSP 13
5V_SUSP 14
5V_SUSP 15
nRST_DCF 16
RXD 17
TXD 18

DUBUG
USB CN2 DEBUG
3.3V 1
CN4 USB TXD_DEBUG 2
1 NC RXD_DEBUG 3
2 DM GND 4
3 DP
4 GND
3.
ADC_P_SZ
GND
nCASSETTE2_OPEN
3.
ADC_P_SZ
GND
nCASSETTE1_OPEN
CN9 PAER SI

MAIN PCA
FINISHER,PW W-0002-016-A1
3V

3V

DCF,1-2922230-8 CN28 -FINISHER

PAERSI
IE2

IE1

CN27 -DCF 1 nRST_FNIISHER

1 DCF_RXD 2 FINISHER_TXD
ZE1,

2 DCF_TXD 3 FINISHER_RXD
ZE1,
2

3 nRST_DCF 4 nCMD_REQ_FINISHER
4 5V1_SLP 5 NC
2

5 5V1_SLP 6 nDETECT_FNIISHER
6 5V1_SLP 7 5V1_SLP
8 DGND
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

7 24V1
8 24V1 9 24V4
9 24V1 10 24V4
10 DGND 11 24V4
11 DGND 12 24V4
12 DGND 13 DGND
13 DGND 14 DGND
14 nDETECT_DCF 15 DGND
15 NC 16 DGND
16 NC
17 nCMD_REQ_DCF
18 NC
PAPERSI

PAPERSI
ZE2

ZE1

Diagrams (Dual Cassette Feeder) 2757

 A

Review the certificates of volatility for the printer.

Certificate of Volatility (For 77822, 77825, 77830)

Learn about the product certificate of volatility.

Figure A-1 Certificate of Volatility (1 of 2)

Hewlett-Packard Certificate of Volatility
Model: Part Number: Address:
HP Color LaserJet Managed Managed Hewlett Packard Company
MFP E778XXdn X3A78A= E77822dn 11311 Chinden Blvd
X3A81A= E77825dn Boise, ID 83714
HP Color LaserJet Managed X3A84A= E77830dn
Flow MFP E778XXz X3A77A= E77822z
X3A80A= E77825z
X3A83A= E77830z

Volatile Memory
Does the device contain volatile memory (Memory whose contents are lost when power is removed)?
Yes No If Yes please describe the type, size, function, and steps to clear the memory below
Type (SRAM, DRAM, etc): Size: User Modifiable: Function: Operation Steps to clear memory:
Z Bundles system and print/scan When the printer is powered off
DDR3 - DRAM HP Formatter buffer the memory is erased.
3GB- Obsidian
1 GB –Accel
brd
4 GB - Main
Formatter
Yes No
Type (SRAM, DRAM, etc): Size: User Modifiable: Function: Steps to clear memory:
HP Formatter
3GB- Obsidian
4 GB - Main
Formatter
dn Bundles Yes No .
DDR3 - DRAM
Type (SRAM, DRAM, etc): Size: User Modifiable: Function: Steps to clear memory:
Yes No

Non-Volatile Memory
Does the device contain non-volatile memory (Memory whose contents are retained when power is removed)?
Yes No If Yes please describe the type, size, function, and steps to clear the memory below
Type (Flash, EEPROM, etc): Size: User Modifiable: Function: Steps to clear memory:
IOD EEPROM 32KB Yes No Store customer setting data There are no steps to clear this
for backup/restore data.
Type (Flash, EEPROM, etc): Size: User Modifiable: Function: Steps to clear memory:
HP side: SPI Flash
4MB Yes No Contains the boot code and There are no steps to clear this
factory product configuration data
data required for the device
to function. User
modifications are limited to
downloading digitally signed
HP firmware images.
Type (Flash, EEPROM, etc): Size: User Modifiable: Function: Steps to clear memory:
Samsung MSOK : Yes No
MSOK – TPM 2 KB RSA Key Pair is stored on There are none. FW reload will
MSOK – CRUM 256 Bytes the TPM, HP-signed handle any issues.
MSOK - EEProm 1 KB Immutable ID Certificate is
stored on the CRUM, the
new Key pair is saved on the
EEProm

2758 Appendix A
Figure A-2 Certificate of Volatility (2 of 2)
Mass Storage
Does the device contain mass storage memory (Hard Disk Drive, Tape Backup)?
Yes No If Yes please describe the type, size, function, and steps to clear the memory below
Type (HDD, Tape, etc): Size: User Modifiable: Function: Steps to clear memory:
dn & z Bundles 320GB Yes No OS and user data Firmware update
1 – HDD Main board

dn bundles only
1 – EMMC card 16GB Yes OS and user data Firmware update

USB
Does the item accept USB input and if so, for what purpose (i.e Print Jobs, device firmware updates, scan upload)?
Yes No If Yes please describe below
Print jobs, HP digitally signed firmware upgrades, 3rd party application loading. USB ports can be disabled.
Can any data other than scan upload be sent to the USB device)?
Yes No If Yes please describe below
Diagnostic service logs can be uploaded. Print files can be printed via a USB thumb drive.

RF/RFID
Does the item use RF or RFID for receive or transmit of any data including remote diagnostics. (e.g. Cellular phone,
Bluetooth) Yes No If Yes please describe below
Purpose:
Frequency: Bandwidth:
Modulation: Effective Radiate Power (ERP):
Specifications:

Other Transmission Capabilities

Does the device employ any other methods of non-wired access to transmit or receive any data whatsoever (e.g. anything
other than standard hard wired TCP/IP, direct USB, or parallel connections)? Yes No If Yes please describe below:
Purpose: WiFi Direct Print
Frequency: 2.4 GHz, 5GHz Bandwidth: 2401 - 2495 MHz; depending on selected
channel in 2.4GHz band.
5180 - 5825 MHz; depending on selected channel in 5GHz
band.
Modulation: Effective Radiate Power (ERP):
Specifications: 802.11 b/g/n

Other Transmission Capabilities

Does the device employ any other methods of non-wired access to transmit or receive any data whatsoever (e.g. anything
other than standard hard wired TCP/IP, direct USB, or parallel connections)? Yes No If Yes please describe below:
Purpose: Device Beaconing, Secure Print Apps
Frequency: 2.4 GHz Bandwidth: 2400-2483.5 MHz; depending on selected
channel.
Modulation: Effective Radiate Power (ERP):
Specifications: BTLE4.0 compliant

Other Capabilities
Does the device employ any other method of communications such as a Modem to transmit or receive any data
whatsoever? Yes No If Yes please describe below:
Purpose:
Specifications:

Certificate of Volatility (For 77822, 77825, 77830) 2759

 Certificate of Volatility (for E783xxdn)
Figure A-3 Certificate of Volatility (1 of 3)
Hewlett-Packard Certificate of Volatility
Model: Part Number: Address:
HP Color LaserJet Managed Managed Hewlett Packard Company
MFP E783xxdn 8GR95A =E78323dn 11311 Chinden Blvd
Boise, ID 83714
8GR96A = E78325dn

8GR97A = E78330dn

Volatile Memory
Does the device contain volatile memory (Memory whose contents are lost when power is removed)?
Yes No If Yes please describe the type, size, function, and steps to clear the memory below
Type (SRAM, DRAM, etc): Size: User Modifiable: Function: Steps to clear memory:
HP Formatter Yes No Operation system and When the printer is powered off
DDR3-DRAM (Obsidian) – print/scan buffer the memory is erased
3GB
ECB – 4GB
.
Type (SRAM, DRAM, etc): Size: User Modifiable: Function: Steps to clear memory:
Yes No When the printer is powered off
the memory is erased

Non-Volatile Memory
Does the device contain non-volatile memory (Memory whose contents are retained when power is removed)?
Yes No If Yes please describe the type, size, function, and steps to clear the memory below
Type (Flash, EEPROM, etc): Size: User Modifiable: Function: Steps to clear memory:
IOD EEPROM 64KB Yes No Store customer setting data There are no steps to clear
for backup/restore this data.
Type (Flash, EEPROM, etc): Size: User Modifiable: Function: Steps to clear memory:
HP side: SPI Flash 4MB Yes No Contains the boot code and There are no steps to clear
factory product configuration this data
data required for the device
to function.
User modifications are
limited to downloading
digitally signed HP firmware
images.
Type (Flash, EEPROM, etc): Size: User Modifiable: Function: Steps to clear memory:
MSOK : Yes No TPM NVRAM - stores HP- Drive lock password can be
MSOK – TPM NVRAM 256 KB signed immutable ID changed through the device
MSOK – EEProm 32 KB certificate and associated embedded web server
MSOK – CRUM 120 KB RSA key pair in locked interface.
memory. No other data stored on
EEProm - stores device the MSOK can be cleared.
lifecycle data
(e.g. device page counts),
copy of device speed
license, and SED
(self-encrypting drive) drive
lock password.
CRUM - stores device page
counts, consumables
information, device speed
information, and product
serial number.

2760 Appendix A
Figure A-4 Certificate of Volatility (2 of 3)
Mass Storage
Does the device contain mass storage memory (Hard Disk Drive, Tape Backup)?
Yes No If Yes please describe the type, size, function, and steps to clear the memory below
Type (HDD, Tape, etc.): Size: User Modifiable: Function: Stores customer data, Steps to clear memory: 1.
1 – HDD Main board 500GB Yes No OS, applications, digitally signed Secure Storage Erase – Areas
SED Encrypted HDD firmware images, persistent data, temporary files and job data by
and temporary data used for overwriting information
processing and system functions.
overwriting information one or
three times.
2. Secure Disk Erase – Erases
files when jobs finish
processing by overwriting them
one or three times.
3. Secure File Erase – Erases
files when jobs finish
processing by overwriting them
one or three times.
Type (HDD, Tape, etc.): Size: User Modifiable: Function: Steps to clear memory:
1 – EMMC card HP Yes No Stores customer data, OS, 1. Secure Fast Erase –
Formatter applications, digitally signed Changes the encryption keys
(Obsidian firmware images, persistent rendering all data in the
) – 16GB data, and temporary data used customer partition unreadable.
(Card)
ECB –
for processing and system 2. Power Cycle of the printer –
4GB functions. Deletes all customer data stored in
the customer partition.

Optional Mass Storage

Does the device contain mass storage memory (Hard Disk Drive, Tape Backup)?
Yes No If Yes please describe the type, size, function, and steps to clear the memory below
Type (HDD, Tape, etc.): Size: User Modifiable: Function: Steps to clear memory:
Optional Formatter HDD 500GB Yes No Stores customer data, 1. Erase and Unlock Encrypted
FIPS Encrypted HDD OS, applications, Disk – This changes the Encryption
digitally signed firmware keys rendering all data unreadable.
Optional Formatter HDD 500GB images, persistent data, 2. Secure Storage Erase –
TAA Secure Encrypted HDD and temporary data Areas temporary files and job
(Available AMS only) used for processing and data by overwriting information
system functions. overwriting information one or
three times.
3. Secure Disk Erase – Erases files
when jobs finish processing
4. Secure File Erase – Erases
files when jobs finish processing
by overwriting them one or three
times.

Certificate of Volatility (for E783xxdn) 2761

 Figure A-5 Certificate of Volatility (3 of 3)
USB
Does the item accept USB input and if so, for what purpose (i.e Print Jobs, device firmware updates, scan upload)?
Yes No If Yes please describe below
Print jobs, HP digitally signed firmware upgrades, 3rd party application loading. USB ports can be disabled.
Can any data other than scan upload be sent to the USB device?
Yes No If Yes please describe below
Diagnostic service logs can be uploaded. Print files can be printed via a USB thumb drive.

RF/RFID
Does the item use RF or RFID for receive or transmit of any data including remote diagnostics. (e.g. Cellular phone,
Bluetooth) Yes No If Yes please describe below
Purpose:
Frequency: Bandwidth:
Modulation: Effective Radiate Power (ERP):
Specifications:

Other Transmission Capabilities

Does the device employ any other methods of non-wired access to transmit or receive any data whatsoever (e.g. anything
other than standard hard wired TCP/IP, direct USB, or parallel connections)? Yes No If Yes please describe below:
Purpose: WiFi Direct Print
Frequency: 2.4 GHz, 5GHz Bandwidth:
2401 - 2495 MHz; depending on selected channel in
2.4GHz band.
5180 - 5825 MHz; depending on selected channel in 5GHz band.

Modulation: Effective Radiate Power (ERP):

Specifications: 802.11 b/g/n

Other Transmission Capabilities

Does the device employ any other methods of non-wired access to transmit or receive any data whatsoever (e.g. anything
other than standard hard wired TCP/IP, direct USB, or parallel connections)? Yes No If Yes please describe below:
Purpose: Device Beaconing, Secure Print Apps
Frequency: 2.4 GHz Bandwidth: 2400-2483.5 MHz; depending on selected
channel.
Modulation: Effective Radiate Power (ERP):
Specifications: BTLE4.0 compliant

Other Capabilities
Does the device employ any other method of communications such as a Modem to transmit or receive any data
whatsoever? Yes No If Yes please describe below:
Purpose:
Specifications:

Author Information
Name Title Email Business Unit
Jaeseung Jang Technical Marketing Engineer [email protected] IPG
LEE, JAESUNG HW Asset Engineer [email protected] IPG
Date Prepared: 3/30/2020

2762 Appendix A
Certificate of Volatility (for E783xxz)
Figure A-6 Certificate of Volatility (1 of 3)
Hewlett-Packard Certificate of Volatility
Model: Part Number: Address:
HP Color LaserJet Managed Managed Hewlett Packard Company
MFP E783XXz 8GR99A =E78323z 11311 Chinden Blvd
Boise, ID 83714
8GS00A = E78325z

8GS01A = E78330z

Volatile Memory
Does the device contain volatile memory (Memory whose contents are lost when power is removed)?
Yes No If Yes please describe the type, size, function, and steps to clear the memory below
Type (SRAM, DRAM, etc): Size: User Modifiable: Function: Steps to clear memory:
HP Formatter Yes No Operation system and When the printer is powered off
DDR3-DRAM (Rock) – 4GB print/scan buffer the memory is erased
ECB – 4GB
.
Type (SRAM, DRAM, etc): Size: User Modifiable: Function: Steps to clear memory:
Yes No When the printer is powered off
the memory is erased

Non-Volatile Memory
Does the device contain non-volatile memory (Memory whose contents are retained when power is removed)?
Yes No If Yes please describe the type, size, function, and steps to clear the memory below
Type (Flash, EEPROM, etc): Size: User Modifiable: Function: Steps to clear memory:
IOD EEPROM 64KB Yes No Store customer setting data There are no steps to clear
for backup/restore this data.
Type (Flash, EEPROM, etc): Size: User Modifiable: Function: Steps to clear memory:
HP side: SPI Flash 4MB Yes No Contains the boot code and There are no steps to clear
factory product configuration this data
data required for the device
to function.
User modifications are
limited to downloading
digitally signed HP firmware
images.
Type (Flash, EEPROM, etc): Size: User Modifiable: Function: Steps to clear memory:
MSOK : Yes No TPM NVRAM - stores HP- Drive lock password can be
MSOK – TPM NVRAM 256 KB signed immutable ID changed through the device
MSOK – EEProm 32 KB certificate and associated embedded web server
MSOK – CRUM 120 KB RSA key pair in locked interface.
memory. No other data stored on
EEProm - stores device the MSOK can be cleared.
lifecycle data
(e.g. device page counts),
copy of device speed
license, and SED
(self-encrypting drive) drive
lock password.
CRUM - stores device page
counts, consumables
information, device speed
information, and product
serial number.

Certificate of Volatility (for E783xxz) 2763

 Figure A-7 Certificate of Volatility (2 of 3)
Mass Storage
Does the device contain mass storage memory (Hard Disk Drive, Tape Backup)?
Yes No If Yes please describe the type, size, function, and steps to clear the memory below
Type (HDD, Tape, etc.): Size: User Modifiable: Function: Stores customer data, Steps to clear memory:
2 – Hard Drivers 500GB Yes No OS, applications, digitally signed 1. Secure Storage Erase –
(1 – Formatter & 1 – ECB) firmware images, persistent data, Areas temporary files and job
1- ECB HDD 500GB and temporary data used for data by overwriting information
SED Encrypted processing and system functions.
overwriting information one or
HDD three times.
2- HP Formatter 500GB
2. Secure Disk Erase – Erases
FIPS Encrypted files when jobs finish
HDD processing by overwriting them
one or three times.
3. Secure File Erase – Erases
files when jobs finish
processing by overwriting them
one or three times.

Optional Mass Storage

Does the device contain mass storage memory (Hard Disk Drive, Tape Backup)?
Yes No If Yes please describe the type, size, function, and steps to clear the memory below
Type (HDD, Tape, etc.): Size: User Modifiable: Function: Steps to clear memory:
Optional Formatter HDD 500GB Yes No Stores customer data, 1. Erase and Unlock Encrypted
FIPS Encrypted HDD OS, applications, Disk – This changes the Encryption
digitally signed firmware keys rendering all data unreadable.
Optional Formatter HDD 500GB images, persistent data, 2. Secure Storage Erase –
TAA Secure Encrypted HDD and temporary data Areas temporary files and job
(Available AMS only) used for processing and data by overwriting information
system functions. overwriting information one or
three times.
3. Secure Disk Erase – Erases files
when jobs finish processing
4. Secure File Erase – Erases
files when jobs finish processing
by overwriting them one or three
times.

2764 Appendix A
Figure A-8 Certificate of Volatility (3 of 3)
USB
Does the item accept USB input and if so, for what purpose (i.e Print Jobs, device firmware updates, scan upload)?
Yes No If Yes please describe below
Print jobs, HP digitally signed firmware upgrades, 3rd party application loading. USB ports can be disabled.
Can any data other than scan upload be sent to the USB device?
Yes No If Yes please describe below
Diagnostic service logs can be uploaded. Print files can be printed via a USB thumb drive.

RF/RFID
Does the item use RF or RFID for receive or transmit of any data including remote diagnostics. (e.g. Cellular phone,
Bluetooth) Yes No If Yes please describe below
Purpose:
Frequency: Bandwidth:
Modulation: Effective Radiate Power (ERP):
Specifications:

Other Transmission Capabilities

Does the device employ any other methods of non-wired access to transmit or receive any data whatsoever (e.g. anything
other than standard hard wired TCP/IP, direct USB, or parallel connections)? Yes No If Yes please describe below:
Purpose: WiFi Direct Print
Frequency: 2.4 GHz, 5GHz Bandwidth:
2401 - 2495 MHz; depending on selected channel in
2.4GHz band.
5180 - 5825 MHz; depending on selected channel in 5GHz band.

Modulation: Effective Radiate Power (ERP):

Specifications: 802.11 b/g/n

Other Transmission Capabilities

Does the device employ any other methods of non-wired access to transmit or receive any data whatsoever (e.g. anything
other than standard hard wired TCP/IP, direct USB, or parallel connections)? Yes No If Yes please describe below:
Purpose: Device Beaconing, Secure Print Apps
Frequency: 2.4 GHz Bandwidth: 2400-2483.5 MHz; depending on selected
channel.
Modulation: Effective Radiate Power (ERP):
Specifications: BTLE4.0 compliant

Other Capabilities
Does the device employ any other method of communications such as a Modem to transmit or receive any data
whatsoever? Yes No If Yes please describe below:
Purpose:
Specifications:

Author Information
Name Title Email Business Unit
Jaeseung Jang Technical Marketing Engineer [email protected] IPG
LEE, JAESUNG HW Asset Engineer [email protected] IPG
Date Prepared: 3/30/2020

Certificate of Volatility (for E783xxz) 2765

 B Service parts changes For Environmental
Protection Agency 3.0 Compliant Products

Learn about service part changes for EPA compliance.

HP is introducing A3 Laser Jet MFPs to meet the new Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) 3.0
Compliance standards. A few service parts are changing even though their appearance and ways of
replacing them are almost the same as before. These new regulations are primarily concerned with
lower power consumption which the parts affected contribute to. All Items listed in this document are
service parts being changed for these EPA 3.0 Compliant products.

Theses EPA 3.0 compliant devices will begin manufacturing in Spring 2020 and will not have new product
numbers. Identification of these products will be accomplished by a specific character in their serial
numbers.

Printer service parts affected

● Formatter

● FDB (Fuser Drive Board)

● Fuser unit

Printer service parts affected

● HP Color LaserJet Managed MFP E77822dn / E77825dn / E77830dn

● HP Color LaserJet Managed Flow MFP E77822z / E77825z / E77830z

● HP Color LaserJet Managed MFP E77422a / E77422dv/ E77422dn / E77428dn

● HP LaserJet Managed MFP E72525dn / E72530dn / E72535dn

● HP LaserJet Managed Flow MFP E72525z / E72530z / E72535z

● HP LaserJet Managed MFP E72425a / E72425dv / E72425dn / E72430dn

∗ Parts referenced in this doc are also compatible with the SKU’s above. However, installation of these
parts in the SKU’s in BOLD will not make them EPA 3.0 compliant. Only SKU’s identified by a specific
character in their serial number are EPA 3.0 compliant.

Table B-1 E77822z/E77825z/E77830z (color printers)

Item Description

1 Formatter Rock

2 FDB V1

3 FDB V2

2766 Appendix B Service parts changes For Environmental Protection Agency 3.0 Compliant Products
Table B-2 E77822dn/E77825dn/E77830dn (color printers)

Item Description

1 Formatter Obisidian1

2 FDB V1

3 FDB V2

Table B-3 E77422a/E77428dv/E77422dn/E77428dn (color printers)

Item Description

1 Formatter Obisidian2

2 FDB V1

3 FDB V2

Table B-4 E72525z/E72530z/E72535z (mono printers)

Item Description

1 Formatter Rock

2 FDB V1

3 FDB V2

4 Fuser V1

5 Fuser V2

Table B-5 E72525dn/E72530dn/E72535dn (mono printers)

Item Description

1 Formatter Obisidian1

2 FDB V1

3 FDB V2

4 Fuser V1

5 Fuser V2

Table B-6 E72425a/E72425dv/E72425dnE72430dn (mono printers)

Item Description

1 Formatter Obisidian2

2 FDB V1

3 FDB V2

4 Fuser V1

5 Fuser V2

Service parts changes For Environmental Protection Agency 3.0 Compliant Products 2767
 Table B-7 Foramtter type 1/2/3

No Legacy part EPA 3.0 Common Part name Description Remark

number compliant
product

1 JC92-03070A Y3K99-60005 New Formatter Rock PCA Formatter_Ro

ck

1 JC92-03005A X3A92-60006 New Formatter Obsidian PCA Formatter_Ob

isidian1

1 JC92-03036A X3A92-60007 New Formatter Obsidian PCA Formatter_Ob

isidian2

Table B-8 FDB V1/V2

No Legacy part EPA 3.0 Common Part name Description Remark

number compliant
product

2 JC44-00210E 8GR94-60001 New FDB 110V(V1) FDB V1

3 JC44-00211E 8GR94-60002 New FDB 220V(V2) FDB V1

2 JC44-00210D 8GR94-60001 New FDB 110V(V1) FDB V1

3 JC44-00211D 8GR94-60002 New FDB 220V(V2) FDB V1

Table B-9 Fuser V1/V2

No Legacy part EPA 3.0 Common Part name Description Remark

number compliant
product

4 JC82-00479A X3A65-61001 New Fuser 110V(V1) Fuser V1

5 JC82-00481A X3A65-61002 New Fuser 220V(V2) Fuser V1

Notes

● Service parts referenced above for legacy products (Gemstone 1.0/1.1)) and EPA 3.0 Compliant
products are forward and backward compatible. However, Hp does not recommend installing old
service parts which do not meet EPA 3.0 Compliance in EPA 3.0 Compliant products. This is to
ensure these products remain EPA 3.0 compliant after field service.

● If an EPA 3.0 Compliant FUSER is installed in any printer, that unit needs to have firmware upgraded
to the latest level to function properly, especially those with a B or C in 3rd digit of serial number
(SN).

● EPA 3.0 Compliant products will be identified as indicated below : 3rd digit will be shown as “D” from
“B” or “C”.

2768 Appendix B Service parts changes For Environmental Protection Agency 3.0 Compliant Products
Service parts changes For Environmental Protection Agency 3.0 Compliant Products 2769
 Glossary of terms

802.11
802.11 is a set of standards for wireless local area network (WLAN) communication, developed by the
IEEE LAN/MAN Standards Committee (IEEE 802).

802.11b/g/n
802.11b/g/n can share the same hardware and use the 2.4 GHz band. 802.11b supports bandwidth up
to 11 Mbps, 802.11n supports bandwidth up to 150 Mbps. 802.11b/g/n devices might occasionally suffer
interferences from microwave ovens, cordless telephones, and Bluetooth devices.

AC
An electric current that reverses its direction many times a second at regular intervals. For example, the
110V line current found in a typical US electrical wall receptacle.

AC Control Module (PageWide)

The AC Control Module controls the heating elements in the airflow assembly. Functions include voltage
monitoring (ensuring correct operation in a low-quality-power environment), isolation (low voltage heater
control signals are isolated from the high voltage AC power for safety), AC switching (power is switched
on/off to the heater), and heating element configuration (heating element configuration is changed
between series and parallel for temperature predictability).

ADF
An Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) is a device that automatically feeds an original sheet (or multiple
sheets) of paper into the image scanner. The document feeder is a component of the integrated
scanner assembly (ADF and image scanner).

Airflow System (PageWide)

The airflow system conditions the printed pages to avoid page curling due to the ink on the page. The
airflow system functionally consists of a fan and heating elements. The pressurized air is blown on the
page through the nozzles that are placed on the paper path of the airflow system between print and
eject zone.

BOOTP
Bootstrap Protocol. A network protocol used by a network client to obtain its IP address automatically.
This is usually done in the bootstrap process of computers or operating systems running on them. The
BOOTP servers assigns an IP address from a pool of addresses to each client. BOOTP enables “diskless
workstation” computers to obtain an IP address prior to loading any advanced operating system.

CCD
A Charged Coupled Device (CCD) is the scanner module which enables a scan job. A CCD locking
mechanism is used to hold the CCD module to prevent any damage when the printer is moved.

CIS
A Contact Image Sensor (CIS) scanner captures an image using the printer's optical path. Red, green,
and blue LEDs sequentially illuminate a small strip of the document (often called a raster line), and the
optical system captures each color in a single row of Charged Coupled Device (CCD) sensors that cover
the entire page width.

2770 Glossary of terms

Collation
Collation is a process of printing a multiple-copy job in sets. When collation is selected, the device prints
an entire set before printing additional copies.

Control Panel
The control panel is a flat, typically vertical panel or screen where the user can control and/or monitor
the printer. The control panel is found on the front of the printer.

Coverage
Coverage is the printing term used for a toner usage measurement on printing. For example, 5%
coverage means that an A4 sided paper has about 5% image or text on it. If the paper or original has
complicated images or a large amount of text, the coverage will be higher and at the same time, a toner
usage will be as much as the coverage.

DC
An electric current flowing in one direction only. Typically, a low voltage load current supplied to an
electrical assembly.

DCC
The DC controller (DCC) controls the operation of the printer sub-systems and electrical components.
the DCC sends out various signals to operate motors, solenoids, and other printer components based
on the print command and image data that the host computer sends the formatter.

Default
The value or setting that is in effect when a printer is unboxed, reset, or initialized.

DHCP
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) is a client-server networking protocol. A DHCP server
provides configuration parameters specific to the DHCP client host requesting, generally, information
required by the client host to participate on an IP network. The DHCP also provides a mechanism for
allocation of IP addresses to client hosts.

Digital Send Software

Digital send software allows a mufti-function printer (MFP) to scan and send information quickly and
securely to email, network folders, other printers, and fax services.

DIMM
A Dual Inline Memory Module (DIMM) is a small circuit board that holds memory. The DIMM stores all
data within the printer, such as printing data and received fax data.

DPI
Dots Per Inch (DPI) is a measurement of resolution that is used for scanning and printing. Generally,
higher DPI results in a higher resolution (more visible detail in the image and a larger file size).

Duplex
A mechanism that automatically turns over a sheet of paper so that the printer can print (or scan) on
both sides of the paper. A printer equipped with a duplex unit can print on both sides of the paper during
one print cycle.

Glossary of terms 2771

 Duty Cycle
Duty cycle is the page quantity which does not affect printer performance for a month. Generally, the
printer has the lifespan limitation such as pages per year. The lifespan means the average capacity of
print-outs, usually within the warranty period. For example, if the duty cycle is 48,000 pages per month
the printer limit is 2,400 pages a day (assuming 20 working days/month).

Dynamic Security
Dynamic Security is a toner cartridge design and process for authenticating genuine HP supplies. HP
printers use toner cartridges that have security chips or electronic circuitry. Cartridges using a non-HP
chip, or modified chip, or non-HP circuitry might not work (now or in the future).

e-Duplex
Single-pass electronic duplex (e-Duplex) printer use two separate scan modules to scan the front-side
and back-side of an e-duplex copy job page in a single pass through the document feeder.

EMC
EMC is a measure of a device's ability to operate as intended in its shared operating environment while,
at the same time, not affecting the ability of other equipment within the same environment to operate as
intended.

EMI
EMI is the electromagnetic energy which affects the functioning of an electronic device. Electronic
devices (like printers) are a source of EMI. Because it is rare for electronics to operate in isolation,
products are generally engineered to function in the presence of some amount of EMI.

eMMC
An embedded Multi-Media Card is a compact memory device consisting of NAND flash memory and a
simple storage controller.

Emulation
Emulation is a technique of one machine obtaining the same results as another. An emulator duplicates
the functions of one system with a different system, so that the second system behaves like the first
system. Emulation focuses on exact reproduction of external behavior. This is different from simulation,
which concerns an abstract model of the system being simulated, often considering its internal state.

EPS
Encapsulated PostScript (EPS) is a PostScript (PS) code file which is used for storing font and vector
graphic image information.

ESD
An electrostatic discharge (ESD) is a sudden flow of electricity between two electrically charged objects
caused by contact, an electrical short, or dielectric breakdown. Discharge of built up static electricity.

Ethernet
Ethernet is a frame-based computer networking technology for local area networks (LANs). It defines
wiring and signaling for the physical layer, and frame formats and protocols for the media access
control (MAC)/data link layer of the OSI model. Ethernet is mostly standardized as IEEE 802.3. Ethernet
has become the most widespread LAN technology in use during the 1990s to present.

Ferrite
A ferrite is used to reduce the amount of radio frequency noise (or interference) in a wire or cable. A
ferrite enables proper EMC/EMI performance for regulatory purposes.

2772 Glossary of terms

FFC
Flat Flexible Cables (FFCs) are designed for Printed Circuit Assembly (PCA) to PCA connections (for
example, connecting a fax PCA to the formatter).

FIH
A Foreign Interface Harness (FIH) is a port that enables HP multifunction printers (MFPs) to use third-
party devices to extend the capabilities of the MFP.

Firmware
The formatter stores the printer firmware. A remote firmware upgrade process is used to overwrite and
upgrade the firmware.

Flash memory
Flash memory is non-volatile, meaning it retains stored data even when the power is turned off.

Flow integrated scanner assembly

A printer scanner assembly that includes a slide-out external physical keyboard.

Formatter (LaserJet)
The formatter controls printer functions like receiving and processes print data, developing and
coordinating data placement and timing with the DC controller PCA, storing font and customer
configuration information, communicating with the host computer, and monitoring control panel
functions and relaying printer status information through the control panel.

FTP
FTP stands for File Transfer Protocol. FTP is a protocol designed for transferring files over the Internet.
Files stored on an FTP server can be accessed using an FTP client, such as a web browser, FTP software
program, or a command line interface.

Fuser Unit
The fuser unit is part of a laser printer that adheres the toner onto the printed page. It consists of a
heat roller and a pressure roller. After toner is transferred onto the paper, the fuser unit applies heat and
pressure to make sure that the toner stays on the paper permanently (which is why paper is warm when
it comes out of a laser printer).

Gateway
A connection between computer networks, or between a computer network and a telephone line. A
gateway is used to connect two different computer networks, especially a connection to the Internet.

Grayscale
Shades of gray that represent light and dark portions of a color image printed in monochrome. Colors
are represented by a range of gray shades from white to black.

Halftone
Halftone is a way of reproducing a photograph or other image in which the various tones of gray or color
are produced by variously sized dots of ink or toner. Halftone simulates grayscale by varying the number
of dots. Highly colored areas consist of a large number of dots, while lighter areas consist of a smaller
number of dots.

HDD
A Hard-Disk Drive (HDD) (commonly referred to as a hard drive or hard disk) is a non-volatile storage
device which stores digitally-encoded data on rapidly rotating platters with magnetic surfaces.

Glossary of terms 2773

 IEEE
The Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) is an international non-profit, professional
organization for the advancement of technology related to electricity.

Image scanner
The image scanner (or Sub Scanner Assembly) contains the components to digitally scan an original
source document. The image scanner is a component of the integrated scanner assembly (ADF and
image scanner).

IP address
An Internet Protocol (IP) address is a unique number that a device uses in order to identify and
communicate with other devices on a network utilizing the Internet Protocol standard.

IPM
The Images Per Minute (IPM) is a method of measuring the speed of a printer. An IPM rate indicates the
number of single-sided sheets a printer can complete in one minute.

IPP
The Internet Printing Protocol (IPP) defines a standard protocol for printing and managing print jobs,
media size, resolution, etc. IPP can be used locally, or over the internet to reach hundreds of printers. IPP
also supports access control, authentication, and encryption, making it a capable and secure printing
solution.

ISA
The Integrated Scanner Assembly (ISA) includes the document feeder and image scanner.

ISO
The International Organization for Standardization (ISO) is an international standard-setting body
composed of representatives from national standards bodies. In produces world-wide industrial and
commercial standards.

JBIG
Joint Bi-level Image Experts Group (JBIG) is an image compression standard with no loss of accuracy or
quality. It was designed for compression of binary images, particularly for faxes, but can also be used for
other images.

JPEG
Joint Photographic Experts Group (JPEG) is a commonly used standard method of loss compression for
photographic images. It is the format used for storing and transmitting photographs on the World Wide
Web.

LDAP
The Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) is a networking protocol for querying and modifying
directory services running over TCP/IP.

LED
A Light-Emitting Diode (LED) is a semiconductor device that can indicate the status of a printer
(formatter LEDs) or a component in a contact image sensor (CIS) scanner that helps capture an image.

LEDM
Low end data model (LEDM) provides one consistent data representation method and defines the
dynamic and capabilities tickets shared between clients and devices, as well as the access protocol,
event, security, and discovery methods.

2774 Glossary of terms

LPDC
Late point differentiation configuration (LPDC) allows the channel partner to configure the speed to the
printer depending on the customer’s order. LPDC configuration is stored on the Trusted Platform Module
(TPM).

LVPS - SMPS
Low Voltage Power Supplies (LVPS) and Switching Mode Power Supplies (SMPS) supply direct current
(DC) voltages to various printer components and assemblies.

MAC address
Media Access Control (MAC) address is a unique identifier associated with a network adapter. MAC
address is a unique 48–bit identifier usually written as 12 hexadecimal characters grouped in pairs (for
example, 00–00–0c-34–11–4e). This address is usually hard-coded into a Network Interface Card (NIC) by
the manufacturer and used as an aid for routers trying to locate machines on a large network.

MEt
HP Memory Enhancement technology (MEt) effectively doubles the standard memory through a variety
of font- and data-compression methods. MEt is available only in Printer Command Language (PCL) mode;
it is not functional when printing in PostScript (PS) mode.

MFP
A Multi Function Printer (MFP) is a printer that incorporates multiple functionalities in a single physical
body. For example, an MFP printer can scan, digitally send, fax, copy, and print.

MHV
Miniature High Voltage (MHV) is designed for high voltage applications of BNC connectors (DC voltage
between 500 V and 5 kV).

Modem
A device that modulates a carrier signal to encode digital information, and also demodulates such a
carrier signal to decode transmitted information.

MPCA (PageWide)
The MPCA integrates both formatter (LaserJet) and engine control electronics (DC controller) into a
single assembly. The Main PCA (MPCA) controls printer functions like receiving and processes print
data, developing and coordinating data placement, storing font and customer configuration information,
communicating with the host computer, and monitoring control panel functions and relaying printer
status information through the control panel.

NAND
NAND is not an acronym (the term is short for NOT AND a Boolean operator and logic gate). NAND
(flash) memory is non-volatile, meaning it retains stored data even when the power is turned off.

NVRAM
Nonvolatile random access memory (NVRAM) is used to store I/O and information about the print
environment configuration (stored data even when the power is turned off).

OPC
Organic Photo Conductor (OPC) is a mechanism that makes a virtual image for print using a laser beam
emitted from a laser printer. It is usually green or rust colored and has a cylinder shape. An imaging
unit containing a drum slowly wears the drum surface during its usage in the printer, and it should
be replaced appropriately due to wear from contact with the cartridge development brush, cleaning
mechanism, and paper.

Glossary of terms 2775

 Originals
The first example of something, such as a document, photograph, or text which is copied, reproduced, or
translated to produce additional copies. The original itself is not copied or derived from something else.

PCA
Printed Circuit Assembly (PCA). Once the printed circuit board (PCB) is complete, electronic components
must be assembled to form a functional printed circuit assembly or PCA.

PCL
Printer Command Language (PCL) is a Page Description Language (PDL) developed by HP as a printer
protocol. PCL has become an industry standard. Originally developed for early Inkjet printers, PCL has
been released in varying levels for thermal, dot matrix printers and laser printers.

PDF
Portable Document Format (PDF) is a proprietary file format developed by Adobe Systems. A PDF
represents two dimension documents in a device independent and resolution independent format.

PJL
Printer job language (PJL) is an integral part of printer configuration, in addition to the standard PCL
and PostScript (PS). With standard cabling, the printer can use PJL to perform a variety of functions like
dynamic I/O switching, context-sensitive switching, and isolation of print environment settings from one
print job to the next.

PML
Printer management language (PML) allows remote configuration of the printer and status read-back
from the printer through the I/O ports.

PostScript (PS)
PostScript (PS) is a Page Description Language (PDL) and programming language used primarily in
electronic and desktop publishing. PostScript is run in an interpreter to generate an image.

PPM
Pages Per Minute (PPM) is a method of measurement for determining how fast a printer works, meaning
the number of pages a printer can produce in one minute.

Print Media
Media like paper, envelopes, labels, and transparencies which can be used in a printer, scanner, fax, or
copier.

Printer Driver
A program used to send commands and transfer data from the computer to the printer.

Printhead (PageWide)
The printhead converts the digital firing instructions from the printer electronics into properly formed
and timed microscopic drops of the four ink colors.

Printhead Wiper (PageWide)

The printhead wiper system keeps the printhead nozzles firing correctly throughout the life of the printer
as it performs the wiping and capping functions. The wiping function cleans the nozzles of ink residue
and particulates. The capping function keeps the nozzles moist during storage and when the printer is
idle.

2776 Glossary of terms

Protocol
A convention or standard that controls or enables the connection, communication, and data transfer
between two computing endpoints.

RAM
Random Access Memory (RAM) is the printer memory device where the data in current use is kept so it
can be quickly retrieved by the device's processor. This memory is an important factor in avoiding errors
and printing documents properly. Printer memory is used to store, and process print jobs as they are
sent to the printer from a computer. After printing, the job is cleared from the memory to make room
for more print jobs. Printer memory is directly linked to two print characteristics: speed and print quality.
More memory allows you to print faster and print larger, high-quality graphics.

REDI sensor
An optical reflective edge detection interrupter (REDI) sensor. Usually used in conjunction with mirrors
to sense the presence or absence of paper in the paper path. These sensors are carefully aligned and
calibrated at the factory, so care must be taken when servicing these sensors.

Resolution
The sharpness of an image is measured in Dots Per Inch (DPI). The higher the DPI, the greater the
resolution.

SCB
The Scanner Control Board (SCB) controls the functions of the image scanner components in the Sub
Scanner Assembly (SSA).

Service fluid and aerosol management systems (PageWide)

There are two types of service fluid, shipping fluid and ink. The service fluid management system is
contained entirely within the duplex module. Service fluid is discharged as droplets from the printhead,
and then collected in a container inside the duplex module. Some of the droplets are called aerosol
because they are lighter than air. Aerosol can float inside the printer and collect on the lens of optical
sensors, producing false failures. The aerosol management system transports the aerosol and collects
it in a safe place. Aerosol management consists of an aerosol fan, mounted on the rear wall of the air
flow assembly, which creates air flow that pulls the aerosol through the holes in the platen and into the
aerosol filter inside the duplex module.

SFP
A single-function printer only processes print jobs sent from a host computer or from an USB port on the
printer.

SMB
Server Message Block (SMB) is a network protocol mainly applied to share files, printers, serial ports,
and miscellaneous communications between nodes on a network. SMB also provides an authenticated
inter-process communication mechanism.

SMTP
Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) is the standard for email transmissions across the internet. SMTP
is a relatively simple, text-based protocol, where one or more recipient of a message is specified, and the
message text is transferred. It is a client server protocol where the client transmits an email message to
the server.

SODIMM
Small outline dual in-line memory module (SODIMM) is a thin profile memory storage device (a smaller
alternative to a standard DIMM device).

Glossary of terms 2777

 SSA
The Sub-Scanner Assembly is the image scanner component of the Integrated Scanner Assembly (ISA,
which includes the document feeder and the image scanner).

Subnet Mask
The subnet mask is used in conjunction with the network address to determine which part of the
address is the network address and which part is the host address.

TCP/IP
The Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) and the Internet Protocol (IP) are the set of communications
protocols that implement the protocol stack on which the internet and most commercial networks run.

TIFF
Tagged Image File Format (TIFF) is a variable-resolution bit mapped image format. TIFF describes image
data that typically come from scanners. TIFF images use tags, keywords defining the characteristics
of the image that is included in the file. This flexible and platform-independent format can be used for
pictures that have been made by various image processing applications.

Toner Cartridge
A bottle or container that holds toner, which is used in a machine like a printer. Toner is a powder used
in laser printers and photocopiers. The toner forms the text and images on printed paper. Toner can be
fused by a combination of heat/pressure from the fuser, causing it to bind the fibers in the paper.

TPM
The HP Trusted Platform Module (TPM) is a security accessory for printers. The TPM strengthens
protection of encrypted credentials and data stored on your printer. Certificate private keys are both
generated by and protected by the TPM. Once installed, the printer and the TPM are sealed, and the
printer owns the TPM. The TPM may not be moved to another device without losing its ownership from
the original printer. Installing a TPM accessory might necessitate a firmware upgrade. The TPM prevents
the printer from starting if the TPM is missing. If the TPM is removed from the printer, a control-panel
error message appears indicating that the TPM is missing.

NOTE: The TPM is not a service part for some printer models. Check the printer service manual to determine if
the TPM is a replaceable service part.

TWAIN
An industry standard for scanners and software. By using a TWAIN compliant scanner with TWAIN-
compliant software, a scan can be initiated from the program. TWAIN is an image capture API for
Microsoft Windows and Apple Macintosh operating systems.

URL
Uniform Resource Locator (URL) is the global address of documents and resources on the internet. The
first part of the address indicates what protocol to use. The second part specifies the IP address or the
domain name where the resource is located.

USB
Universal Serial Bus (USB) is a standard that was developed by the USB Implementers Forum, Inc., to
connect computers and peripherals. Unlike the parallel port, USB is designed to concurrently connect a
single computer USB port to multiple peripherals.

Walk-up USB
Some printers support direct printing from a USB flash drive (the walk-up USB port is usually near the
control panel).

2778 Glossary of terms

Watermark
A watermark is a recognizable image or pattern in paper that appears lighter when viewed by
transmitted light. Watermarks were first introduced in Bologna, Italy in 1282. Watermarks have been
used by paper makers to identify their product, and also on postage stamps, currency, and other
government documents to discourage counterfeiting.

XPS
XML Paper Specification (XPS) is a specification for a Page Description Language (PDL) and a new
document format developed by Microsoft. This has benefits for portable document and electronic
documents. It is an XML-based specification based on a new print path and vector-based, device-
independent document format.

ZIF Connector
Zero insertion force (ZIF) connectors use a mechanical locking method to secure Flat Flexible Cables
(FFCs) to a Printed Circuit Assembly (PCA).

Glossary of terms 2779

 Index

Symbols/Numerics booklet diverter booklet output tray 2139

parts and diagrams 1078 booklet paddle home
76.00.24 718
booklet diverter motor sensor 1892
parts and diagrams 1080 booklet paddle motor 1889
A
booklet diverter unit booklet presser 1922
accessories parts and diagrams 1076 booklet presser home
dimensions 1, 6, 12 Booklet diverter unit 1021, 2098 sensor 1937
weight 1, 6, 12 booklet end fence unit booklet presser motor 1941
acoustic specifications 1, 6, 14 parts and diagrams 1087 booklet stapler unit 1999
ADF Booklet end fence unit 1008, booklet tamper home
parts and diagrams - exterior 1902 sensor 1961
LX 472 booklet entrance booklet tamper motor 1980
parts and diagrams - lower parts and diagrams 1073 booklet tamper unit 1944
image scanner (LX) 588 booklet entrance unit bridge door sensor 1107
parts and diagrams - LX parts and diagrams 1072 bridge entrance sensor 1090
models 444, 472, 483 Booklet entrance unit 1005, 1872 bridge exit sensor 1102
parts and diagrams - main booklet entrance-presser motor bridge motor 1096
frame assembly LX 483 parts and diagrams 1073 buffer motor 1849
parts and diagrams - pickup booklet exit buffer solenoid 1855
LX 472 parts and diagrams 1078 caster cover 1145
ADF (GX/z) booklet exit unit dummy feed guide 1185
parts and diagrams 497 parts and diagrams 1076 ejector assembly 1035
ADF main frame (GX/z) Booklet exit unit 1023, 2121 ejector motor 1035
parts and diagrams 542 booklet finisher ejector unit 1582
ADF upper pickup (GX/z) booklet blade 2016 ejector1 1633
parts and diagrams 523 booklet blade home ejector1 motor sensor 1607
after-service checklist 118, 123, sensor 2034 ejector2 home sensor 1658
125, 948, 1031, 1034, 2175, 2219, booklet blade motor 2052 ejector2 motor 1710
2222 booklet c-fold blade 2062 ejector2 motor sensor 1684
APS sensor 593 booklet c-fold blade home end fence home 1035
authorized service providers, sensor 2077 end fence home sensor 1315
parts 122, 1035, 2222 booklet c-fold blade end fence motor 1340
motor 2091 entrance motor 1035
B booklet diverter 2098 entrance sensor 1035
backup error booklet diverter home exir roller 1035
32.WX.YZ error 716 sensor 2115 exit motor 1270
reset error 716 booklet diverter motor 2118 exit sensor 1035
restore error 716 booklet end fence 1902 feed entrance motor 1180
belt - timing gear booklet end fence home front cover 1129
HCI 648 sensor 1917 front door 1118
booklet blade booklet end fence motor 1914 front lower cover 1137
parts and diagrams 1084 booklet entrance motor 1872 front paper holding
booklet blade motor booklet entrance sensor 1875 sensor 1809
parts and diagrams 1084 booklet exit sensor 2121 front paper support 1035
booklet c-fold blade booklet fold motor 2056 front tamper home
parts and diagrams 1078 booklet front cover 1178 sensor 1374
booklet c-fold motor booklet maker 1862 front tamper motor 1400
parts and diagrams 1080 booklet maker PCA 2148 front tamper unit 1349

2780 Index
left lower cover 1149 top output tray paper full cassette 1, 34, 38
left upper cover 1162 sensor 1246 cassette lift drive 1, 59, 61
main exit cam motor 1275 tray diverter 1201 Cassettes Tray 2/3
main exit sensor 1257 tray diverter home parts and diagrams 249
main output tray lower limit sensor 1208 caster
sensor 1765 booklet finisher diagrams 1035, HCI 662
main output tray motor 1784 1070 caution vi
main output tray motor booklet finisher parts 1035, 1070 caution for moving the scanner 1,
sensor 1779 booklet finisher remove and 66, 75
main output tray top of stack replace 1035 CCDM PCA 1, 91
sensor 1735 booklet finisher view 948 certificate of volatility 2758
main output tray top of stack booklet fold motor CoV E77822/25/30 2758
switch 1751 parts and diagrams 1080 Certificate of Volatility 2760,
main paddle 1035 booklet fold roller 2763
main PCA 2142 parts and diagrams 1082 Channel partners
manual staple sensor 1561 booklet fold unit WISE 118
motor 1035 parts and diagrams 1076 Channel partners support
paddle 1283 Booklet fold unit 1017, 2016 HP Channel Services Network
paddle home sensor 1297 booklet maker (CSN) 118
paddle motor 1306 detailed specifications 950 checklists
paper holding home parts and diagrams 1070 after-service 118, 123, 125, 948,
sensor 1793 Booklet maker 1862 1031, 1034, 2175, 2219, 2222
paper holding Motor 1834 booklet maker baset preservice 118, 123, 124, 948,
paper holding solenoid 1035 parts and diagrams 1089 1031, 1034, 2175, 2219, 2221
paper support 1035 Booklet output tray unit 1024, cleaning page 716, 732, 753, 842
paper support home 2139 cleaning the paper dust stick 118,
sensor 1035 booklet paddle unit 126
punch waste full 1035 parts and diagrams 1086 cleaning the scan glass 118, 126
rear cover 1124 Booklet paddle unit 1006, 1889 clear paper jams 948, 2160, 2731
rear paper holding booklet presser unit component test
sensor 1821 parts and diagrams 1072 special mode test 716, 721,
rear paper support 1035 Booklet presser unit 1010, 1922 729, 731
rear tamper home booklet stapler unit components
sensor 1450 parts and diagrams 1074 diagnostic tests 716, 721, 729,
rear tamper motor 1477 Booklet stapler unit 1015 731
rear tamper unit 1426 booklet tamper unit scanning system 1, 66, 69
right upper cover 1113 parts and diagrams 1075 connection
sensor 1035 Booklet tamper unit 1013, 1943 diagram 2748
stacker lower limit bookletr finisher connector error
switch 1035 exit motor 1035 65.WX.YZ error 716, 717
stacker motor 1035 bridge unit control panel 239
stapler 1035 parts and diagrams 1041, 1043 Backup/Restore menu 716,
stapler front sensor 1513 Bridge unit 1041, 1090 732, 753, 842
stapler mid-front sensor 1525 buffer diverter Calibrate/Cleaning menu 716,
stapler mid-rear sensor 1537 parts and diagrams 1069 732, 753, 842
stapler position motor 1570 buffer unit Copy menu (MFP only) 716,
stapler position sensor 1035 parts and diagrams 1067 732, 753, 796
stapler rear sensor 1549 Buffer unit 1001, 1849 CPMD 716
stapler unit 1502 Fax menu (fax models
switch 1035 C only) 716, 732, 753, 834
top cover 1115 Print menu 716, 732, 753, 838
Calibrate/Cleaning menu, control
top exit sensor 1230 Reports menu 716, 732, 753
panel 716, 732, 753, 842
top jam cover assembly 1191 Scan menu 805
cartridge
top lower feed assembly 1218 Scan menu (MFP only) 716,
dynamic security 46
top output tray 1244 732, 753

Index 2781
 Settings menu 716, 732, 753, engine 716, 721, 729, 730, 850, Diagrams
755 860 ADF (GX/z) 497
Supplies menu 716, 732, 753, fax 716, 850, 860 ADF (LX models) 444
838 image management 716, 850, ADF exterior and ADF pickup(LX
Trays menu 716, 732, 753, 839 860, 878 models) 472
troubleshooting menu 716, LED 716, 721, 729 ADF lower image scanner
732, 753, 839 print test patterns 716, 850, (LX) 588
USB Firmware Upgrade 860, 879 ADF main frame (GX/z) 542
menu 716, 732, 753, 842, scanner 716, 850, 860, 868 ADF main frame assembly (LX
844 diagram models) 483
control panel diagnostic connection 2748 ADF upper pickup (GX/z) 523
flowcharts 716, 721, 724 dual cassette feeder 2756 booklet blade 1084
control panel menus 716, 732, 753 FDB/LVPS 2752 booklet blade motor 1084
control panel messages 716 front OPC 2754 booklet c-fold blade 1078
conventions used vi fuser exit 2748 booklet c-fold motor 1080
Copy menu (MFP only), control laser scanner assembly/ booklet diverter 1078
panel 716, 732, 753, 796 HVPS 2750 booklet diverter motor 1080
copy specifications 1, 6, 21 pickup/ph drive/side 2749 booklet diverter unit 1076
CoV scanner 2755 booklet end fence unit 1087
certificate of volatility 2758 toner 2751 booklet entrance 1073
cover UI 2753 booklet entrance unit 1072
parts and diagrams 1037 diagram, electrical-mechanical booklet entrance-presser
Covers 1113, 2234 relationships motor 1073
parts and diagrams 401 document feeder section 933 booklet exit 1078
CPMD 716 drive section 914 booklet exit unit 1076
CPMP dual-cassette feeder booklet fold motor 1080
WISE 119, 718 (DCF) 939 booklet fold roller 1082
current settings pages 716, 732 exit section 913 booklet fold unit 1076
frame section 923 booklet maker 1070
D fuser section 926 booklet maker base 1089
high-capacity input (HCI) 942 booklet paddle unit 1086
DC controller communication error
image formation section 935 booklet presser unit 1072
55.WX.YZ error 716, 717
MP right door section 927 booklet stapler unit 1074
DC controller firmware error
paper handling section 921 booklet tamper unit 1075
70.WX.YZ error 716, 718
PCAs, Boards, and Laser bridge unit 1041, 1043
DCF 1, 109
Scanning Unit (LSU) 909 buffer diverter 1069
DCF main frame pickup
scanner section 931 buffer unit 1067
parts and diagrams 622
diagrams cassettes tray 2/3 249
DCF main frame pickup 1
covers-inner finisher 2226 cover 1037
parts and diagrams - drive 621
ejector unit-inner covers 401
DCF main frame pickup upper
finisher 2234 DCF main frame pickup 622
parts and diagrams -
electrical-mechanical 909, DCF main frame pickup 1 621
drive 629
2748 DCF main frame pickup
decoding
finisher system 948, 2173 upper 629
message 716
inner finisher 2224 Dual cassette feeder
defeating
paper support unit-inner DCF 605
interlocks 716, 721, 729, 730
finisher 2229 ejector unit 1058, 1061
definitions and terms
sensor, motor, and roller-inner end fence unit 1055
glossary 2770
finisher 2227 entrance motor 1047
determine problem source 716,
stapler unit-inner entrance unit 1045, 1047
721
finisher 2233 exit assemblies 246
developer unit 1, 42-44
tamper unit-inner exit motor 1053
diagnostics
finisher 2230, 2231 flow ADF image scanner (GX/
adjustment 716, 850, 860, 873
use parts lists and sGX) 575
component 716, 721, 729, 731
diagrams 122

2782 Index
 flow ADF open cover dimensions dual cassete feeder (DCF) right
(GX/z) 514 accessories 1, 6, 12 door 608
flow ADF stacker (GX/ printer 1, 6, 12 dual cassette feeder 1, 109
sGX) 539 diverter unit 2191 diagram 2756
front door 1040 document feeder dual cassette feeder (DCF)
front jam cover 1069 document feeder input tray PCA 611
fuser output drive 255 (LX) 450 dual cassette feeder (DCF) pickup
hanress 1037 document feeder (LX) reverse motor 616
HCI drive 676 roller 485 dual cassette feeder (DCF) pickup
HCI main 630 document feeder error units 623
HCI sub - cassette 702 31.WX.YZ error 716 dual cassette feeder (DCF) rear
HCI sub - frame 647 document feeder pick roller cover 606
HCI sub - pickup upper/ (LX 477 dual cassette feeder (DCF) unit
lower 668 document feeder section dual cassete feeder (DCF)
image scanner assembly 579 electrical-mechanical motor 613
left lower cover 1065 relationships diagram 933 dual cassete feeder (DCF) rear
left upper cover 1064 document feeder skew (LX du cover 606
lower bridge 1043 models) 716 dual cassette feeder (DCF)
main assembly 131 documentation, printer error motor 616
main drive 252 codes and messages dual cassette feeder (DCF)
main engine frame WISE 119, 718 PCA 611
assembly 258 drive assembly - feed dual cassette feeder (DCF)
main exit CAM motor 1053 HCI 678 pickup units 623
main exit unit 1051, 1055 drive assembly - feed motor dual cassette feeder (DCF) right
main frame 353 HCI 682 door 608
main frame pickup 335 drive assembly - lift drive right and Dual cassette feeder DCF)
main frame pickup upper 350 motor - lift drive left motor parts and diagrams - Dual
main output tray motor 1066 HCI 687 cassette feeder DCF 605
main output tray unit 1062 drive assembly - step motor dual-cassette feeder (DCF)
main PCA 1058 HCI 690 electrical-mechanical
paddle 1057 drive assembly - sub-pulley relationships diagram 939
paddle motor 1057 HCI 692 duplexer error
paddle unit 1055 drive section 69.WX.YZ error 716, 717
paper holding motor 1066 electrical-mechanical dynamic security
paper holding unit 1062 relationships diagram 914 toner cartridge 46
registration sub-frame 324 drive system 1, 59
right door 411 cassette lift drive 1, 59, 61 E
right door feed guide 439 drive motors 1, 59
each unit functions
right door output 436 exit drive 1, 59
finisher system 948, 2175
right upper cover 1040 feed drive 1, 59, 63
ejector home sensor 2743
stapler unit 1058 fuser drive 64
ejector motor 2743
tamper unit 1058, 1059 fuser release drive 1, 59
ejector unit 2209
top cover 1040 main drive unit 61
parts and diagrams 1058, 1061
top door 1040 main drive unit motor 1, 59
Ejector unit 993, 1582, 2535
top exit unit 1051 pickup drive 1, 59, 61
Ejector1 1607
top lower cover 1053 registration / Tray 1 drive 62
ejector2 unit 1658
top output tray unit 1051 registration drive 1, 59
electrical parts layout
Tray 1 registration drive 322 toner collection unit drive 65
finisher system layout 948,
Tray 1 rollers 414 toner reservoir drive 1
2175
Tray diverter CAM 1050 toner reservoir drive [E876
electrical specifications 1, 6, 14
tray diverter unit 1048 models only) 59
electrical-mechanical
tray jam cover 1050 toner supply drive 1, 59, 66
diagrams 909, 2748
upper bridge 1041 drivers, supported 1, 6
digital sending error (firmware) dual cassete feeder (DCF)
44.WX.YZ error 716, 717 motor 613

Index 2783
 electrostatic discharge (ESD) 118, feeding system 1, 34 document feeder input
123, 948, 1031, 1034, 2175, 2219, cassette 1, 34, 38 tray 499
2222 main components and document feeder jam access
Embedded Jetdirect error functions 1, 34, 35 cover 515
80.WX.YZ error 716, 718 MP feeder assembly 1, 34 document feeder PCA fan 555
end fence sensor 2741 overview 1, 34 document feeder rear
end fence unit 2204 pickup assembly 39 motors 547
parts and diagrams 1055 pickup unit 1, 34 document feeder ultrasonic
End fence unit 985, 1315, 2602 registration assembly 40 sensor with PCA 561
engine registration unit 1, 34 Flow ADF image scanner (GX/sGX)
diagnostics 716, 721, 729, 730 rollers 1, 34, 35 parts and diagrams 575
engine error (LaserJet) sensor, motor, and solenoid 1, Flow ADF open cover (GX/z)
46.WX.YZ error 716, 717 34, 35, 37 parts and diagrams 514
63.WX.YZ error 716, 717 Tray 1 feeder assembly 41 flow ADF PCA 1, 91
engine error (PageWide) feeding system information 1, 34 flow ADF skew (LX du
61.WX.YZ error 716, 717 finisher docking sensor 2734 models) 716
entrance motor 2735 finisher sectional view 948, 2175 Flow ADF stacker (GX/sGX)
parts and diagrams 1047 finisher system 948, 956, 2175, parts and diagrams 539
entrance unit 2190 2180 formatter
parts and diagrams 1045, 1047 diagrams 948, 2173 locating 1, 2
Entrance unit 1045, 1180, 2256 each unit functions 948, 2175 Formatter 100
eraser PCA 1, 91, 108 electrical parts layout 948, formatter lights 716, 721, 729
error 2175 frame section
fault 716 finisher sectional view 948, electrical-mechanical
ESD electrostatic discharge 2175 relationships diagram 923
(ESD) 118, 123, 948, 1031, 1034, paper path 948, 2175 front cover switch 2747
2175, 2219, 2222 PCA connection front door
event log 716, 732, 735 information 948, 2175 parts and diagrams 1040
clear using touchscreen control finisher system diagram 956, front jam cover
panel 716, 732, 735 2180 parts and diagrams 1069
event log error (firmware) finisher system electrical front OPC
42.WX.YZ error 716, 717 parts 956, 2180 diagram 2754
Exit assemblies finisher system paper path 956, Front tamper 1349, 2399
parts and diagrams 246 2180 front tamper motor 2739
exit drive 1, 59, 64 finisher system PBA front tamper sensor 2739
exit motor connection 956, 2180 front view 2175
parts and diagrams 1053 finisher system sectional fuser drive 64
exit section view 956, 2180 fuser drive assembly 1, 91
electrical-mechanical firmware communication error fuser drive board 104
relationships diagram 913 49.WX.YZ error 716, 717 fuser error
exit sensor 2736 firmware install error 41.WX.YZ error 716, 717
exit unit 2194 99.WX.YZ error 716, 718 laser scanner error 716, 717
Exit unit 2271 hard disk error 716, 718 paper path error 716, 717
exploded parts views, use parts remote firmware upgrade fuser error (LaserJet)
lists and diagrams 122 error 716, 718 50.WX.YZ error 716, 717
flatbed scanner system fuser exit
F overview 1, 66, 67 diagram 2748
flow (z bundles) document feeder fuser output drive
fan error
document feeder contact parts and diagrams 255
58.WX.YZ error 716, 717
image sensor (CIS) 505 fuser PCA 1, 91
Fax menu (fax models only), control
document feeder contact fuser release drive 1, 59
panel 716, 732, 753, 834
image sensor (CIS) fan 558 fuser section
FDB/LVPS
document feeder front electrical-mechanical
diagram 2752
motor 544 relationships diagram 926
feed drive 1, 59, 63
fuser unit 1, 49

2784 Index
 fuser unit drive 1, 49, 51 HCI 1 I
overview 1, 49 HCI belt - timing gear 648
image creation 1, 42
temperature control 1, 49, 51 HCI caster 662
imaging unit 1, 42, 43
fuser unit drive 1, 49, 51 HCI drive
intermediate transfer belt
fuser unit temperature control 1, parts and diagrams 676
unit 47
49, 51 HCI drive assembly - feed 678
overview 1, 42
HCI drive assembly - sub-
paper transfer belt unit 1, 42,
G pulley 692
43
HCI guide post and guide post
General Settings menu, control toner cartridge 1, 42, 43
plate 664
panel 716, 732, 753, 755 image formation section
HCI kit - HP LaserJet E7 tray
general specifications 1, 6, 14 electrical-mechanical
rollers 670
glossary relationships diagram 935
HCI main
terms and definitions 2770 image quality
parts and diagrams 630
guide post and guide post plate black lines, vertical 716, 882,
HCI main electrical
HCI 664 886
connector 659
blurred image 716, 882, 895
H HCI motor - feed drive 682
duplex blur, white spot blur on
HCI motor - lift drive right and
hanress color print-out 900
motor - lift drive left 687
parts and diagrams 1037 flow ADF or ADF skew (LX du
HCI motor - step drive 690
hard disk drive 197 models) 716
HCI PCA 657
hard disk partition error foggy image 716, 882, 893
HCI photo interrupter and sensor
98.WX.YZ error 716, 718 incorrect color
bracket 710
hardware configuration 1, 91 registration 896
HCI right door 641
CCDM PCA 1, 91 jitter image 716, 882, 897
HCI sub - cassette
eraser PCA 1, 91, 108 light image 716, 882, 894
parts and diagrams 702
flow ADF PCA 1, 91 light lines, vertical 716, 882,
HCI sub - frame
fuser drive assembly 1, 91 888
parts and diagrams 647
fuser drive board 104 periodic black dots,
HCI sub - pickup upper/lower
fuser PCA 1, 91 horizontal 716, 882, 891
parts and diagrams 668
high voltage power supply periodic black lines,
HCI sub-paper side right 703
PCA 1, 91 horizontal 716, 882, 891
HCI sub-pickup 631
high-voltage power supply periodic light/dark band,
HDD 197
(HVPS) PCA 106 horizontal 892
high capacity input tray 1
low voltage power supply (LVPS; periodic light/dark dots,
high voltage power supply PCA 1,
Type 5H) / switching mode horizontal 716, 882, 892
91
power supply (SMPS) 102 periodic light/dark lines,
high-capacity input (HCI)
low voltage power supply PCA horizontal 716, 882
electrical-mechanical
(Type 3R) 1, 91 poor fusing 716, 882, 898
relationships diagram 942
low voltage power supply PCA skewed image 716, 882, 897
high-voltage power supply (HVPS)
(Type 4) 1, 91, 102 stain on back side 716, 882,
PCA 106
low voltage power supply PCA 899
high-voltage rail assembly 370
(Type 5H) 1, 91 standard tone, setting 716,
home button is unresponsive 716,
LVPS PCA (Type 3R) 1, 91 882
721, 724, 727
LVPS PCA (Type 4) 1, 91, 102 uneven pitch 716, 882, 897
HP Channel Services Network
LVPS PCA (Type 5H) 1, 91, 102 white lines, vertical 716, 882,
(CSN)
main controller 1, 91, 94 888
Channel partners support 118
master system operation image scanner assembly
HP internal users
key 1, 91, 94, 98 parts and diagrams 579
WISE 118
scan joint PCA 1, 91 imaging unit 1, 42, 43
HP Jetdirect print server
WLED IF PCA 1, 91 developer unit 1, 42-44
lights 716, 721, 729
WLED PCA 1, 91 overview 1, 42, 43
HP LaserJet E7 tray rollers
hardware integration pocket (HIP) individual component
HCI 670
is not functioning 716, 721, 724, diagnostics 716, 721, 729
HVPS PCA 1, 91
728

Index 2785
 information paper support home internal diagnostics error
general 716, 850, 857 sensor 2223, 2335 90.WX.YZ error 716, 718
print reports 716, 850, 857, paper support motor 2357 video display error 716, 718
859 parts and diagrams 2224 interpret control-panel messages
software version 716, 850, 857, parts and diagrams - and event log entries 948,
858 covers 2226 2160, 2175, 2731
supply status 716, 850, 857, parts and diagrams - ejector
858 unit 2234 J
inner finisher 114 parts and diagrams - paper
jam error (LaserJet)
block diagram 2175 support unit 2229
13.WX.YZ error 716
detailed specifications 2176 parts and diagrams - sensor,
jam error (PageWide)
ejector & paper support motor, and roller 2227
13.WX.YZ error 716
assembly 2535 parts and diagrams - stapler
jams
ejector assembly 2223, 2578 unit 2233
locations 716, 844
ejector motor 2223 parts and diagrams - tamper
Jetdirect print server
ejector motor assembly 2556 unit 2230, 2231
lights 716, 721, 729
end fence home 2223 PCA cover 2245
job accounting error (firmware)
end fence sensor 2603 punch cover 2718
48.WX.YZ error 716, 717
entrance motor 2223, 2262 punch waste full 2223
job management error
entrance sensor 2223, 2256 punch waste full sensor 2723
(firmware) 716, 717
exir roller 2223 rear cover 2237
job pipeline error
exit motor 2223, 2287 rear paper support 2223, 2312
(firmware) 716, 717
exit roller 2272 rear tamper 2454, 2472
job parser error (firmware)
exit sensor 2223, 2279 rear tamper motor 2491
47.WX.YZ error 716, 717
front cover 2235 sensor 2223
printer calibration error 716,
front paper support 2223, stacker lower limit
717
2290 switch 2223
front tamper 2399 stacker motor 2223 K
front tamper home stapler 2223, 2509
sensor 2417 stapler position motor 2526 keyboard 242
front tamper motor 2436 stapler position sensor 2223,
left cover 2248 2514 L
main paddle 2223, 2379 sub paddle unit 2395 laser scanner assembly 1
main paddle assembly 2388 switch 2223 laser scanning optical path 1,
main paddle home top cover 2242 54
sensor 2382 inner finisher detailed overview 1, 53
main paddle motor 2385 specifications 2176 laser scanner assembly/HVPS
middle cover 2239 inner finisher diagrams 2223 diagram 2750
motor 2223 inner finisher parts 2223 laser scanner error (LaserJet)
output tray 2613 inner finisher PCA 2217 51.WX.YZ error 716, 717
output tray lower limit inner finisher remove and 52.WX.YZ error 716, 717
switch 2629 replace 2223 laser scanner unit 53
output tray motor 2661 input accessory error laser scanning optical path 53
output tray motor 67.WX.YZ error 716, 717 overview 53
assembly 2640 input/output error LED lamp module 583
output tray motor 40.WX.YZ error 716, 717 LEDs
sensor 2650 interlocks See lights
output tray top of stack defeating 716, 721, 729, 730 left lower cover
sensor 2619 intermediate transfer belt parts and diagrams 1065
paper holding 2673 overview 47 left upper cover
paper holding sensor 2685 intermediate transfer belt unit 47 parts and diagrams 1064
paper holding solenoid 2223, cleaning blade 47, 48 lights
2699 overview 47 formatter 716, 721, 729
paper support 2223 transfer belt drive 47, 48

2786 Index
 troubleshooting with 716, 721, main frame pickup upper external I/O card error 716, 718
729 parts and diagrams 350 internal EIO error 716, 718
low voltage power supply (LVPS; main output tray motor wireless error 716, 718
Type 5H) / switching mode parts and diagrams 1066 network and software
power supply (SMPS) 102 main output tray unit specifications 1, 6
low voltage power supply PCA parts and diagrams 1062 network interface 1, 6
(Type 3R) 1, 91 Main output tray unit 996, 1735 no control panel sound 716, 721,
low voltage power supply PCA main parts 131 724, 726
(Type 4) 1, 91, 102 main PCA note vi
low voltage power supply PCA parts and diagrams 1058
(Type 5H) 1, 91 maintenance 118, 126 O
lower bridge machine cleaning for
operating systems, supported 1,
parts and diagrams 1043 maintenance 118, 126
6
LVPS PCA (Type 3R) 1, 91 preventive maintenance 126
operating-environment range
LVPS PCA (Type 4) 1, 91, 102 maintenance counts
printer 14
LVPS PCA (Type 5H) 1, 91, 102 part replacement count 716,
option specifications 1, 6
switching mode power 850, 859
optional configurations 1, 6
supply 102 maintenance parts 1, 6, 29
optional parts 33
master system operation key 1,
options list 1, 6
M 91, 94, 98
orderable parts 122, 1035, 2223
memory error
machine cleaning for ordering 948, 1031, 2175, 2219
82.WX.YZ error 716, 718
maintenance 118, 126 other errors
EMMC error 716, 718
cleaning the ADF) 126 drive unit 716, 882
hard disk error 716, 718
cleaning the flow ADF white bar electrical circuit 716, 882
menu map 716, 732
and CIS (GX ADF) 118 feeding system 716, 882
menus, control panel
cleaning the flow ADF white bar flow ADF 716, 882
Calibrate/Cleaning 716, 732,
and CIS (LX/du model) 118 fuser 716, 882
753, 842
cleaning the paper dust image system 716, 882
Copy (MFP only) 716, 732, 753,
stick 118, 126 laser scanner assembly 716,
796
cleaning the scan glass 118, 882
Fax (fax models only) 716, 732,
126 scanner 716, 882
753, 834
main assembly output accessory error
General Settings 716, 732, 753,
parts and diagrams 131 66.WX.YZ error 716, 717
755
main controller output tray 2212
Manage Trays 716, 732, 753,
hardware configuration 1, 91, output tray motor 2744
839
94 Output tray motor
Print 716, 732, 753, 838
new model (IR/UI) 1, 91, 94 assembly 2639
Reports 716, 732, 753
previous model 1, 91, 94 output tray motor sensor 2744
Scan 805
main drive Output tray top of stack
Scan (MFP only) 716, 732, 753
parts and diagrams 252 sensor 2745
Supplies 716, 732, 753, 838
main electrical connector Output tray unit 2612
motor error (LaserJet)
HCI 659 OXPd/Web kit error
59.WX.YZ error 716, 717
Main engine frame assembly 45.WX.YZ error 716, 717
MP right door section
parts and diagrams 258
electrical-mechanical P
main exit CAM motor
relationships diagram 927
parts and diagrams 1053
MSOK 1, 91, 94, 98 paddle
main exit unit
multipurpose feeder assembly 1, parts and diagrams 1057
parts and diagrams 1051, 1055
34 paddle motor
Main exit unit 980, 1257
parts and diagrams 1057
main frame
N paddle unit 2198
parts and diagrams 353
parts and diagrams 1055
main frame pickup Near Field Communication error
Paddle unit 983, 1283, 2378
parts and diagrams 335 81.WX.YZ error 716, 718
page error
Bluetooth error 716, 718
21.WX.YZ error 716

Index 2787
 paper handling error (LaserJet) booklet fold unit 1076 main frame 353
56.WX.YZ error 716, 717 booklet maker 1070 main frame pickup 335
paper handling section booklet maker base 1089 main frame pickup upper 350
electrical-mechanical booklet paddle unit 1086 main output tray motor 1066
relationships diagram 921 booklet presser unit 1072 main output tray unit 1062
paper handling specifications 1, booklet stapler unit 1074 main PCA 1058
6, 23 booklet tamper unit 1075 paddle 1057
paper holding motor bridge unit 1041, 1043 paddle motor 1057
parts and diagrams 1066 buffer diverter 1069 paddle unit 1055
paper holding unit 2212 buffer unit 1067 paper holding motor 1066
parts and diagrams 1062 cassettes tray 2/3 249 paper holding unit 1062
Paper holding unit 998, 1793, cover 1037 paper support unit-inner
2673 covers 401 finisher 2229
paper jams covers-inner finisher 2226 registration sub-frame 324
locations 716, 844 DCF main frame pickup 622 right door 411
paper path DCF main frame pickup 1 621 right door feed guide 439
finisher system 948, 2175 DCF main frame pickup right door output 436
paper support motor 2738 upper 629 right upper cover 1040
paper support sensor 2738 Dual cassette feeder ssensor, motor, and roller-inner
paper support unit 2196 DCF 605 finisher 2227
Paper support unit 2290 ejector unit 1058, 1061 stapler unit 1058
paper transfer belt unit 1, 42, 43 ejector unit-inner stapler unit-inner
cleaning blade 1, 42, 43 finisher 2234 finisher 2233
overview 1, 42, 43 end fence unit 1055 tamper unit 1058, 1059
transfer belt drive 1, 42, 43 entrance motor 1047 tamper unit-inner
parts 122, 1035, 2222 entrance unit 1045, 1047 finisher 2230, 2231
use parts lists and exit assemblies 246 top cover 1040
diagrams 122 exit motor 1053 top door 1040
Parts flow ADF image scanner (GX/ top exit unit 1051
ADF (GX/z) 497 sGX) 575 top lower cover 1053
ADF (LX models) 444 flow ADF open cover top output tray unit 1051
ADF exterior and ADF pickup(LX (GX/z) 514 Tray 1 registration drive 322
models) 472 flow ADF stacker (GX/ Tray 1 rollers 414
ADF lower image scanner sGX) 539 Tray diverter CAM 1050
(LX) 588 front door 1040 tray diverter unit 1048
ADF main frame (GX/z) 542 front jam cover 1069 tray jam cover 1050
ADF main frame assembly (LX fuser output drive 255 upper bridge 1041
models) 483 hanress 1037 parts and accessories 948, 1031,
ADF upper pickup (GX/z) 523 HCI drive 676 2175, 2219
booklet blade 1084 HCI main 630 parts and diagrams 118
booklet blade motor 1084 HCI sub - cassette 702 parts and diagrams, using 122
booklet c-fold blade 1078 HCI sub - frame 647 parts list and diagrams, how to
booklet c-fold motor 1080 HCI sub - pickup upper/ use 122
booklet diverter 1078 lower 668 parts, main 131
booklet diverter motor 1080 image scanner assembly 579 parts, order by authorized service
booklet diverter unit 1076 inner finisher 2224 providers 122, 1035, 2222
booklet end fence unit 1087 left lower cover 1065 parts, orderable 122, 1035, 2223
booklet entrance 1073 left upper cover 1064 parts, ordering 122, 1035, 2222
booklet entrance unit 1072 lower bridge 1043 PCA 2142
booklet entrance-presser main assembly 131 HCI 657
motor 1073 main drive 252 PCA connection information 1027
booklet exit 1078 main engine frame finisher system 948, 2175
booklet exit unit 1076 assembly 258 PCA precautions 948, 1031, 1033,
booklet fold motor 1080 main exit CAM motor 1053 2219, 2220
booklet fold roller 1082 main exit unit 1051, 1055

2788 Index
PCAs, Boards, and Laser Scanning product number right upper cover
Unit (LSU) locating 1, 2 parts and diagrams 1040
electrical-mechanical punch unit 973, 2187
relationships diagram 909 Punch unit 1185, 2718 S
pick roller punch waste box sensor 2734
scan glass 581
document feeder (LX) 477 Punch waste full sensor 2733
scan joint PCA 1, 91
pickup assembly 39
Scan menu (MFP only), control
pickup drive 1, 59, 61 R
panel 716, 732, 753
pickup unit 1, 34
real-time clock error Scan menu, control panel 805
pickup/ph drive/side
11.WX.YZ error 716 scan specifications 1, 6, 18
diagram 2749
Rear paper support 2312 scanner
plastic latches information 948,
Rear tamper 1425, 2454 caution for moving 1, 66, 75
1031, 1033, 2219, 2221
rear tamper motor 2740 CDD and lens 590
post-service tests 118, 123, 125,
rear tamper sensor 2740 diagram 2755
948, 1031, 1035, 2175, 2219, 2222
rear view 2175 scanner glass 581
power
registration assembly 40 scanner assembly - CDD and
consumption 1, 6, 14
registration drive 1, 59, 62 lens 590
power subsystem 716, 721
registration sub-frame scanner error
power supply
parts and diagrams 324 30.WX.YZ error 716
troubleshooting 716, 721, 722
registration unit 1, 34 scanner section
power-on troubleshooting
removal and replacement 118 electrical-mechanical
overview 716, 721, 722
removal and replacement booklet relationships diagram 931
pre-boot menu options 716, 732,
finisher 1035 scanning system
735
removal and replacement inner components 1, 66, 69
precations
finisher 2223 scanning system components 1,
information 948, 1031, 2219
removal and replacement 66, 69
precautions
precautions 948, 1031, 2219 security error
replacing parts 123, 1032, 2219
removal order 33.WX.YZ error 716, 717
preservice checklist 118, 123, 124,
removing order 118, 123, 125, sensor and bracket
948, 1031, 1034, 2175, 2219, 2221
1035, 2222 HCI 710
print bar error (PageWide)
removing parts sensor error
62.WX.YZ error 716, 717
checklists 118, 123, 124, 948, 54.WX.YZ error 716, 717
print drivers, supported 1, 6
1031, 1034, 2175, 2219, 2221 58.WX.YZ error 716, 717
Print menu, control panel 716,
replacing parts serial number
732, 753, 838
precautions 123, 1032, 2219 locating 1, 2
print quality
replacing the main SVC part service and support
test 118, 123, 125, 948, 1031,
high-voltage rail assembly 370 WISE 118
1035, 2175, 2219, 2222
right door dampener 366 service and support information
print quality troubleshooting 716,
toner collection unit presence WISE and CSN 118
882
photo sensor 395 service approach 118, 123, 948,
flow ADF skew adjust 716
Reports menu, control panel 716, 1031, 2175, 2219
image quality 716, 882
732, 753 precautions 123, 1032, 2219
other errors 716, 882
reverse roller service functions
print specifications 1, 6, 16
document feeder (LX) 485 capture log 716, 850, 880
Print Test Page 716, 732, 753, 755
revision history iii debug log 716, 850, 880
printer
right door envelope rotate 716, 850, 880,
dimensions 1, 6, 12
HCI 641 882
operating-environment
Right door main memory clear 716, 850,
range 14
parts and diagrams 411 880
weight 1, 6, 12
right door dampener 366 transfer assembly control 716,
printer memory error
Right door feed guide 850, 880, 881
20.WX.YZ error 716
parts and diagrams 439 service mode 716, 850
Process Cleaning Page 716, 732,
right door output diagnostics 716, 850, 860
753, 842
parts and diagrams 436

Index 2789
 entering service mode 716, document feeder (ADF) jam tests
850 access cover (LX) 445 post-service 118, 123, 125, 948,
information 716, 850, 857 standard (LX/du model) document 1031, 1035, 2175, 2219, 2222
maintenance counts 716, 850, feeder print-quality 118, 123, 125, 948,
859 document feeder main 1031, 1035, 2175, 2219, 2222
mode menu tree 716, 850, 851 motor 464 tip vi
service functions 716, 850, standard (z bundles) document toner
880 feeder diagram 2751
sHCI 1 document feeder whole toner cartridge 1, 42, 43
side high capacity input tray 1 unit 144 dynamic security 46
software and solutions 1, 6 stapler finisher 948 toner collection unit drive 65
solve problems Stapler finisher 956 toner collection unit presence
control panel messages 716 stapler position motor 2742 photo sensor 395
CPMD 716 stapler position sensor 2742 top cover
specifications 1, 6 stapler unit 2206 parts and diagrams 1040
copy specifications 1, 6, 21 parts and diagrams 1058 top cover switch 2746
electrical and acoustic 1, 6, 14 Stapler unit 1502, 2509 top door
general specifications 1, 6, 14 Stapler unit (booklet) 1998 parts and diagrams 1040
maintenance parts 1, 6, 29 stapler-stacker finisher top exit unit
network interface 1, 6 detailed specifications 950 parts and diagrams 1051
network specifications 1, 6 stapler-stacker finisher and Top exit unit 978, 1218
optional parts 33 booklet maker top lower cover
options 1, 6 detailed specifications 950 parts and diagrams 1053
options list 1, 6 stapler/stacker diagrams 1036 Top output tray unit 979, 1244
paper handling stapler/stacker parts 1036 top output tray unitr
specifications 1, 6, 23 static, precautions for 118, 123, parts and diagrams 1051
print specifications 1, 6, 16 948, 1031, 1034, 2175, 2219, 2222 touchscreen blank, white, or dim
scan specifications 1, 6, 18 sub-paper side right (no image) 716, 721, 724, 725
software and solutions 1, 6 HCI 703 touchscreen has an unresponsive
software specifications 1, 6 sub-pickup zone 716, 721, 724, 725
supplies 1, 6, 28 HCI 631 Tray 1
stacker finisher 948 supplies 948, 1031, 2175, 2219 jams, clearing 716, 844
Stacker finisher 956 supplies error (LaserJet) Tray 1 drive 62
standard (dn bundles) document 10.WX.YZ error 716 Tray 1 feeder assembly 41
feeder supplies error (PageWide) Tray 1 registration drive
document feeder PCA 569 17.WX.YZ error 716 parts and diagrams 322
document feeder white Supplies menu, control panel 716, Tray 1 rollers
backing 137 732, 753, 838 parts and diagrams 414
standard (du bundles) document switching mode power supply Tray 2
feeder LVPS PCA (Type 5H) 102 jams, clearing 716, 844
document feeder white system error (LaserJet) Tray 3
backing 134 62.WX.YZ error 716, 717 jams, clearing 716, 844
standard (LX models) document system requirements Tray diverter CAM
feeder minimum 1, 6 parts and diagrams 1050
document feeder whole tray diverter unit
unit 139 T parts and diagrams 1048
standard (LX) document feeder Tray diverter unit 976, 1048, 1191
tamper unit 2201
document feeder (ADF) tray jam cover
parts and diagrams 1058,
PCA 473 parts and diagrams 1050
1059
document feeder feed tray motor error (LaserJet)
Tamper unit 987, 990, 1349, 2399
motor 492 60.WX.YZ error 716, 717
terms and definitions
standard (LX) document feeder tray selection - use requested
glossary 2770
(ADF) tray 716, 732, 753, 755
contact image sensor trays
(CIS) 454 jams, clearing 716, 844

2790 Index
Trays menu, control panel 716,
732, 753, 839
troubleshooting
checklist 716, 732
control panel checks 716, 721,
724
lights, using 716, 721, 729
power 716, 721, 722
process 716, 721
troubleshooting tools
control panel messages 716
CPMD 716

U
UI
diagram 2753
understand lights on the formatter
formatter lights 716, 721, 729
understand the lights on the
formatter
HP Jetdirect LEDs 716, 721, 729
upper bridge
parts and diagrams 1041
Use Requested Tray 716, 732, 753,
755

W
warning vi
Web-based Interactive Search
Engine
WISE 118
Web-based Interactive Search
Engine (WISE)
HP internal users and Channel
partners 118
weight
accessories 1, 6, 12
printer 1, 6, 12
WISE
CPMD 119, 718
HP internal users and Channel
partners 118
Web-based Interactive Search
Engine 118
WLED IF PCA 1, 91
WLED PCA 1, 91

Index 2791